The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutResolution - 2023-R0209 - Contract 17114 with Lee Lewis Construction 4.25.23Resolution No. 2023-RO209 Item No. 6.19 April 25, 2023 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Public Works Contract per RFP 23 — 17114-KM, by and between the City of Lubbock and Lee Lewis Construction for construction of Crime Lab and Evidence Warehouse, consistent with the terms of the bid submittal attached hereto and incorporated herein, and related documents. Passed by the City Council on April 25, 2023 A TEST: C ney Paz, Interim dity S etary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: & � �2' .- Erik Rejino, Assistant City Manager Mitchell SAtterw)or, T`if TAssistant City Attorney ccdocs/RES.Bid Award -Lee Lewis Construction March 20, 2023 REVISED PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT DATE: March 7. 2023 PROJECT NUMBER: RFP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse Proposal of Lee Lewis CongrijctiDn _ _ (hereinafter called Offeror) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for construction of the referenced project, having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors, notice to offerors and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. UNIT PRICE ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT UOM Unit Price No. la Fencing - Wrought Iron $ 400.00 LF Unit Price No. lb Fencing - Decorative $600.00 LF Unit Price No. 2a Concrete — Curb & Gutter $ 25.00 LF Unit Price No. 2b Concrete - Sidewalk $ 6.50 LF Unit Price No. 3a Pavement - Asphalt $ 4.00 SF Unit Price No. 3b Pavement - Concrete $ 7.00 SF Unit Price No. 4a Utilities — Electrical Secondary $800.00 LF Unit Price No. 4b Utilities — Water Line $ A500 LF Unit Price No. 4c Utilities — Sewer Line $ 65.00 LF Unit Price No. 4d Utilities — Fire Line $ 65.00 LF Unit Price No. 4e Utilities — Gas Line $ 60.00 LF Unit Price No. 5a Metal Panel Systems - Aluminum Composite Metal Panel $ An nn SF Unit Price No. 5b Metal Panel Systems - PEMB Rib Panel IS 25.00SF ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT UOM Unit Price No. 6a Misc. & Structural Steel — Fabrication & Delivery $ 4,500.00 TON Unit Price No. 6b Misc. & Structural Steel — Steel Erection $ 750.00 TON Unit Price No. 6c Misc. & Structural Steel — Detailing & Drafting $ 125.00 Man HR AMOUNTS INCLUDED IN BASE PROPOSAL The Offeror provides the following additional information that will be made a part of the contract: 1. What amount is the Overhead and Profit included in the Base Proposal? $ $ 347,000 2. What amount is the General Conditions included in the Base Proposal? $ $ 351,000 3. By putting an "X" in the following box, the Bidder is indicating that the $300,000 contingency allowance indicated in Section 0122 00 Price and Payment is included in Base Proposal (BT-24FU) 90 4. By putting an "X" in the following box, the Bidder is indicating that the $10,000 Special Inspections Allowance indicated in Section 0010 00 - 1 Price and Payment is included in Base Proposal (BT-24FU). ICJ 5. By putting an "X" in the following box, the Bidder is indicating that the $2,500/Door Unit Cost Door Hardware Allowance indicated in Section 00 10 00 —1 Price and Payment is included in Base Proposal (BT-24FU). N PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION TIME: 1. Contractors proposed CONSTRUCTION TIME for completion: TOTAL CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS:. 400 days Ito Substantial Completion) TOTAL CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS: 430 days _�to Final Completion) (not to exceed 450 consecutive calendar days to Substantial Completion / 480 consecutive calendar days to Final Completion). Offeror hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 450 Consecutive Calendar Days with final completion within 480 Consecutive Calendar Days as stipulated in the specification and other contract documents. Offeror hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages in the sum of $1,000 for each consecutive calendar day after substantial completion and liquidated damages in the sum of $1,000 for each consecutive calendar day after final completion set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the General Conditions of the Agreement. City of Lubbock, TX Public Works ITB 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab Evidence Warehouse Lee Lewis Construction of Lubbock, TX QTY Unit Extended # Items +/- U/M Price Cost Base Bid # 1-1 Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence 1 LS $8,127,000.00 8,127,000.00 $8,101,000 Warehouse 4; ? Mebii4atleiq i 1 C _ N , Bid ter., Bid Add/Deduct x ' Item(s), as clearly and separately identified on the Drawings and/or in the Specifications. The Offeror shall clearly indicate if this price is to be Added or Deducted from the Base Proposal by placing an(4)or (-) before the price. The Offeror agrees to hold this price for a period of not less than 60 days from the date of contract award. Do not include this time period in the construction duration included in this proposal. Alternate Proposal using Asphalt Paving in lieu of Concrete Total Items 1-1: $8,101,000.00 Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Offerors. Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the proposing. The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of six 60 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Offeror hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of 5% of proposal amount _ Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. (Seal if Offeror is a ATTEST: gxco Offeror acknowledges receipt of the Addenda No. I Date 2-6-23 Addenda No. 2 Date 2-23-23 Addenda No. 3 Date 2-23-23 Addenda No. 4 Date 3-2-23 Addenda No. 5 Date 3-2-23 Addenda No. 6 Date 3-3-23 T m )n s addenda: Date: 03/07/2023 Authorized Signature Ryan Lewis (Printed or Typed Name) Lee Lewis Construction Company 7810 Orlando Ave Address Lubbock ,Lubbock City, County Texas ,79423 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 797-8400 Fax: 806-797-8492 Email: FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 75-1680801 M/WBE Firm: Woman Black American Native American Hispanic American I I Asian Pacific American Other (Specify) CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 lofl Complete Nos.1- 4 and 6 If there are interested parries. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos.1. 2, 3, 5, and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING Certificate Number 1 Name of business entity filing form, and the city, state and country of the business entity's place of business. 2023-999424 Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Lubbock, TX United States Date Filed: 03/27/2023 2 Name of govemmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which a form Is being filed. City of Lubbock Date Acknowledged: 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identity the contract, and provide a description of the services, goods, or other property to be provided under the contract. Contract 17114 Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab and Warehouse 4 Name of Interested Party City, State, Country (place of business) Nature of interest (check applicable) Controillng I Intermediary Lewis, Lee Lubbock, TX United States X 5 Check only It there is NO Interested Party. a 6 UNSINORN DECLARATION My name is m- "- �` W V1 and my date of birth is -; My address is (street) (city) (state) (ZIP code) (country) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in 4 �� County, State of on theaj*�d6y of Ynj� 20 �. (— th) (year) Signature of authorized agent of contracting business entity (Declarant) Forms Drovided bvTexas Ethics Commission www_ethirs.state_tx.us version V_3.5_t_3ar!tRhcn j� CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 1 0f 1 Complete Nos. 1- 4 and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos. 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING Certificate Number: 1 Name of business entity filing form, and the city, state and country of the business entity's place of business. 2023-999424 Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Lubbock, TX United States Date Filed: 03/27/2023 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is being filed. City of Lubbock Date Acknowledged: 03/28/2023 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract, and provide a description of the services, goods, or other property to be provided under the contract. RFP 23-17114KM General Construction Nature of interest 4 Name of Interested Party City, State, Country (place of business) (check applicable) Controlling Intermediary Lewis, Lee Lubbock, TX United States X 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. ❑ 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION My name is and my date of birth is My address is (street) (city) (state) (zip code) (country) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in County, State of on the day of , 20 (month) (year) Signature of authorized agent of contracting business entity (Declarant) Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Version V3.5.1.3ac88bc0 BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE BY: CONTRACT AWARD DATE: April 25, 2023 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse RFP 23-17114-KM CONTRACT 17114 PROJECT NUMBER: 92551.9210.50000 Plans & Specifications may be obtained from https:Hci-lubbock-tx.bonfirehub.com/ City of 1 ' bb o cn TEXAS CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas Page Intentionally Left Blank Addenda Page Intentionally Left Blank 61!400-.b'ock ADDENDUM] Closing Date Extension RFP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse DATE ISSUED: February 6, 2023 NEW CLOSING DATE: February 28, 2023 at 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over the proposal dates for the above named Request for Proposal (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. The following date in the Request for Proposals has been revised. Closing Date Extension The closing date has been extended from Wednesday, February 15, 2023 to Tuesday, February 28, 2023, at 3:00 PM CST. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Kiara Morgan City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office 1314 Ave K, Floor 9 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Questions may be emailed to kmorgangmylubbock.us Questions are preferred to be posted on hgps:Hci-lubbock-tx.bonfirehub.com/ THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Kiara Morgan Buyer III City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the proposer's responsibility to advise the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the close date. A review of such notifications will be made. rub„>ofbock cues ADDENDUM 2 Questions & Answers REP 22-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse DATE ISSUED: February 23, 2023 CLOSING DATE: February 28 at 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over the proposal dates for the above named Request for Proposal (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. The following date in the Request for Proposals (RFP) has been revised. Questions and Answers 1. Please see the attached Q&A. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Kiara Morgan City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office 1314 Ave K, Floor 9 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Questions may be emailed to kmorgangmylubbock.us Questions are preferred to be posted on hgps:Hci-lbbock-tx.bonfirehub.com/ THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Kiara Morgan Buyer III City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the proposer's responsibility to advise the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the close date. A review of such notifications will be made. Questions & Answers 1). Door 102B in the door schedule on A-601 has a remark calling for it to be bullet resistant. There are no BR door specs, in the openings spec section (08000). Can you please clarify? "Door 102B and frame to carry a UL level 4 bullet resistant rating per door schedule." 2). Window 430 at the Public Counter on A-211, Detail C3 shows an open space. Is this a package passer? There is a mention of package passer in the spec (sec. 08 56 59, p 2, para 2.2 G). But no true description in the drawings or specs. Can you please clarify? "Keynote `430' calls out "BALLISTIC WINDOW W/ PASS THROUGH". The pass through is a package passer, per spec section called out above." 3). Spec Hollow Metal Window with Bullet Resistant Transaction Frame Package Receiver (sec 08 56 59, p2, para 2.2) line C: Window Type: Stainless Steel Ballistic Transaction Window. Line C #5: Material Hollow Metal, Primed. Can you please clarify what type of material you would like the frame to be made out of prime painted carbon steel or Stainless Steel? "Primed carbon steel." 4) Looks like the DNA Fusion is just Mercury boards. Will customer accept iPro Monitor Cast (Video Insight Integrated Access) — they are Mercury too "Request for substitutions must be submitted as per Section 0125 00 Substitution Procedures." 5) Is there a missing drawing T-002 site plan that is mentioned on T-001? "Sheet T-002 Site Plan is attached herein." 6) It appears that M100, the Mechanical Floor Plan is missing from the plan set. Can this please be provided? "Sheet M-100 Mechanical Floor Plan is included in the drawing set and attached herein." 7) Will alternates be accepted for Termite Control? A potential pest control company bidding the project recommends Bayer Premise Pre -Construction as a cost-effective non -repellant technology (like Termidor), which is what they recommend on new construction due to the long residual protection provided. "Request for substitutions must be submitted as per Section 0125 00 Substitution Procedures." 8) Can you please confirm the insulation requirements (R-values) for the PEMB roof and walls? "Refer to sheet G-101: Building Envelope Requirements." 9) Is the Wood laboratory casework only to be supplied in areas shown on A4/A-401 Enlarged Floor plan and plastic laminate clad cabinets elsewhere? And the reason I ask is the details for all the casework shown on A-330 doesn't call out either Plastic Laminate millwork or Laboratory Wood Casework. I can assume that is what they want but it's not real clear that I can tell. "Processing Lab 170, Powder 174, and Alternative Light Source 175 are the only rooms to receive Laboratory Casework. PLAM cabinets everywhere else." 10) Also there really is only a schedule called interior Material Legend, but) it does not clearly say what is Laboratory casework LC1, which is not designated on the floor plans or elevations anywhere that I can see other than an astute guess. "Processing Lab 170, Powder 174, and Alternative Light Source 175 are the only rooms to receive LC 1." 11) Does the chem resin tops go only in labs locations (A4/A-401) and the Quartz surfaces go everywhere else? "Processing Lab 170, Powder 174, and Alternative Light Source 175 are the only rooms to receive LC 1 with the chem resin tops. All other countertops in the building shall be Quartz." 12) In the Contractor's Project Experience and Resources form there is no mention of Attachment B. However, there is a Project Information Form (Attachment B) provided. Are we required to submit an Attachment B including our Current and past projects in the past 10 or 5 years? "Yes, please complete Attachment B in the contractor's qualification." 13) Sec 28 35 25 Fire Alarm, the specs call for a fire alarm system with voice evac. Being that the occupancy is a B/A3 and an occupancy load of 143, voice evac is not required will a general fire alarm system (Horn strobes/strobes) be accepted? "No." 14) If this project is to be with Voice Evac, this section mentions to provide a fire evacuation message and tornado message. Will this be a mass notification system? "It will have two prerecorded message (1 fire and 1 Tornado activated by a specific pull station)." 15) See 28 35 25 Fire Alarm, the specs call for a fire alarm system with voice evac. Being that the occupancy is a B/A3 and an occupancy load of 143, voice evac is not required will a general fire alarm system (Horn strobes/strobes) be accepted? "No." 16) If this project is to be with Voice Evac, Section 28 35 25 Part 2.3 D.3 mentions to provide a fire evacuation message and tornado message. Will this be a mass notification system? "It will have two prerecorded message (1 fire and 1 Tornado activated by a specific pull station)." 17) Will Impact and Permit Fees be waived for this project? "A permit is required but all permit, plan review and impact fees will be waived." 18) Will Lab Testing be by owner? "Testing and inspection services are specified in Section 0140 00 Quality Requirements." 19) Will any additional or revised sheets be issued? Specifically, there appears to be some missing information on a few details in Sheet S-511. "Due to a printing error, Sheets S-501 & S-511 are attached herein." 20) Sec 10 56 26 - Mobile Storage Units This section of the Project Manual refers to Mobile Storage Units. We are unable to locate these in the plans, is this something that will be included in the scope? If so, please provide drawings and location. "Mobile Storage Units and surface mount rail system drawings will be issued and bid separately at a later date." 21) My question is, would you please inform me of all the General Contractors that are currently bidding this project so I may submit my bid to them? Please feel free to call me with any questions you may have, im in the office between 6am to 4pm. Plan Holders List is attached. Plan Holders List Vendor Name Contact Name Contact Email Phone Number Address Date Downloaded Acme Electric Robby Brown robby@acmeelect.com 108E 82nd Lubbock Texas US 79404 2023-02-22 16:06:46 Alliance Steel David Mitchell dmitchell@allianceokc.com 4057457500 3333 South Council Road Oklahoma City Oklahoma US 73179 2023-02-22 08:39:24 bfd interiors I blending furniture + design Misty Hill misty@bfdinteriors.com 806771680621316aylorDrive Lubbock Texas US79415 2023-02-0114:26:48 Bid Dyllyn Nelson dnelson@southplainstowing.com 8172661274 301 Erskine St lubbock TEXAS US 79403 2023-02-06 13:32:14 BidNet Dwight Anderson gbs@bidnet.com 8006771997 15 british american blvd latham New York US 12110 2023-01-26 04:29:01 Binagia Construction Services Kevin Binagia kbbinagia@yahoo.co 7137241129 12110 DERMOTT DR Houston Texas US 77065 2023-02-16 08:18:43 Boyd Watterson Asset Management Daniel Elzeer delzeer@boydwatterson.com 2165359407 1301 E 9th Street Suite 2900 Cleveland Ohio US 44060 2023-01-25 07:05:23 Cambridge LTD Brice Collins CAMBRIDGELTD@AOL.COM 2023-01-25 06:36:43 Centerline Engineering Karyn Wells kwells@centerlineengineering.net 806-470-8686 8312 Upland Ave Lubbock Texas US 79424 2023-01-26 14:21:24 Chapman Harvey Architects O'Jay Barbee ojayb@chapmanharvey.com 8067491153 612 Broadway Lubbock Texas US 79416 2023-02-22 10:39:48 CLICK Engineering John Click jcole@clickeng.com 2148712302 2218 Bryan Street Suite 150 Dallas Texas US 75201 2023-02-16 16:57:03 Collier Construction Aaron Campbell aaron@colliertx.com 8067411982 2202 Ave E Lubbock Texas US 79404 2023-02-15 14:56:44 Construct Connect Jamie Gregory jamie.gregory@constructconnect.com 2023-02-07 09:34:56 Constructconnect Michael Stubbs content@constructconnect.com 8003642059 3825 Edwards Rd., Suite 800 Cincinnati Ohio US 45209 2023-02-0109:18:05 Construction Bid Source Sherri Schweickert sherri@constructionbidsource.com 888-786-9450 6265 HWY 9 Felton California US 95018 2023-01-31 15:18:02 Construction Rent -A -Fence Ladd Moehnke Imoehnke@crafinc.com 512-595-5366 21497 US Hwy 79 Taylor Texas US 76574 2023-02-10 15:28:27 Construction Rent -A -Fence, Inc. Kevin Massar kevin@crafinc.com 512-595-5366 P.O.Box 65 Thrall Texas US 76578 2023-02-24 08:45:55 Danika +Co Josey Guevara Josey@danikaandco.com 8068914613 4403 Westchester Glen Dr Grand Prairie Texas US 75052 2023-01-30 15:54:17 Deerwood Construction roy Aguilar Raguilar@deerwoodinc.com 8062413478 P.O.Box 3009 Lubbock Texas US 79452 2023-02-15 14:51:27 Dodge Data & Analytics Dodge Data Analytics support@construction.com 2023-02-24 01:25:29 Dodge Data and Analytics April Hamilton april.hamilton@construction.com (877)784-9556 300 American Metro Blvd #185 Hamilton Township New Jersey US 08619 2023-01-27 03:44:35 Estimating II Ethan Cassidy ecassidy70@tamu.edu 6179 Eastex Fwy Beaumont Texas US 77706 2023-01-29 18:57:51 Fanning, Fanning & Associates, Inc. Gloria Pennell gpfanning@gmail.com 806 745-2533 2555 74th Street Lubbock Texas US 79423 2023-02-07 14:13:24 Henthorn Commercial Heath Davidson heath@henthorncommercial.com 8064384285 2011 Ave. C Lubbock Texas US 79404 2023-01-25 10:08:41 Hoar Construction Callie Bassett cbassett@hoar.com 2023-02-09 10:37:29 HONESTO CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION STEVE HONESTO honestoconcrete@gmail.com 8065357950 151642ndst 151642ndst LUBBOCK Texas US 79412 2023-01-2517:48:34 Hugo Reed and Associates, Inc Nathan Rigler nrigler@hugoreed.com 8067635642 1601 Avenue N Lubbock Texas US 79401 2023-01-26 09:40:37 IMS RachaelBoughan ky@imsinfo.com 2023-01-2422:21:59 Jackson Brandy Jackson bjackson@parkhill.com 18067781273 5104 44th St LUBBOCK Please Select US 79414 2023-02-07 12:55:12 Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. A. Leigh Zepeda azepeda@leelewis.com 17177 Preston Road Suite 160 Dallas Texas US 75248 2023-02-15 09:53:07 Maris Development Company Amgrateful Nwogu marisdevelopment@gmail.com 7207 Regency Square Blvd Suite 260 Houston Texas US 77489 2023-02-15 07:17:25 Menemsha Solutions Derek Mast dmast@menemshasolutions.com (310) 343-3430 20521 Earl Street Torrance California US 90503 2023-01-26 12:09:14 North America Procurement Council Inc., PBC Eric Johnson sourcemanagement@napc.me 302-450-1923 PO Box 40445 Grand Junction Colorado US 81504 2023-01-3103:13:11 Onvia, Inc Source Management sourcemanagement2@onvia.com 2063739500 509 Olive Way Seattle Washington WA 98101 2023-01-26 06:16:40 OPREX Adam Beikmann bids@oprex.com 8064108014 5109 82nd st suite #7 Lubbock TEXAS US 79424 2023-02-03 15:49:14 Oprex Construction Andy White andy@oprex.com 6502 Slide Rd Suite 203 Lubbock Texas Lubbock 79424 2023-01-3011:27:16 PaleoWest Penny Muzzy admin@paleowest.com 2023-02-1309:59:08 Reyes Prestige Concrete LLC Elias Reyes reyesprestigeconcrete@yahoo.com 8064410610 P.O. BOX 16078 P.O BOX 16078 Lubbock Texas US 79490 2023-02-1412:01:59 Smartprocure Inc Ron Bjornsson rbjornsson@smartprocure.us 2023-01-2419:04:37 TAM COSC 375 taitt Sbrusch taittsbrusch@gmail.com 1101 w Luther st College station Texas US 77840 2023-01-3102:05:51 Team Modul, LLC Maegan Balog teammodul@gmail.com 8178071468 2208 Saint Jullian Street 2208 Saint Jullian Street Savannah Texas US 76227 2023-02-0109:57:30 Teinert Construction Colten Nance cnance@teinert.com 8067442801 1402 Crickets Ave. Lubbock Texas US 79401 2023-02-21 15:29:37 Teinert Construction (Teinert Commercial Building Services) Jacob Kirkland jacob@teinert.com 18065480143 1402 Crickets Ave. Lubbock Texas US 79401 2023-02-06 17:30:08 The PlanIT Room Cecilia Hernandez projects@theplanitroom.com 915.781.2900 1155 Westmoreland Ste 109 EI Paso Texas EI Paso County 79925 2023-01-27 13:25:15 Tommy Klein Construction shad hartman shartman@tkleinconst.com 8062521305 7312 Upland Ave LUBBOCK Texas US 79424 2023-01-26 09:13:14 Universal Engineering Sciences, Inc. Brian Meikle bmeikle@universalengineering.com 4074230504 3532 Maggie Boulevard Orlando Florida US 32811 2023-01-25 08:28:12 Virtual Builder Exchange Jeannette Olguin jeannette@virtualbx.com 2105646900 4047 Naco Perrin San Antonio Texas US 78217 2023-01-25 16:18:18 West Texas Chapter AGC Josue Williams abilene@wtagc.org 3256767447 31255. 27th Street Abilene Texas US 79605 2023-01-25 16:48:13 Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Substitution Requests 1. We respectfully submit for your consideration a request to approve products as an accepted substitute on Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse Construction (23-027721); please find substitution request form attached. With over 30 years of experience, Scranton Products is the industry leader in plastic (HDPE) bathroom partitions and lockers. Constructed from premium, American -made solid plastic, our products resist dents, scratches, corrosion, graffiti and mildew. More information regarding the benefits of our products as well as technical data sheets and MSDS forms for the appropriate product(s), confirming performance as specified. "This substitution is rejected." 2. Concerning the project, Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse. Chicago Bullet Proof is seeking approval for our bullet resistant products to be used in this project. I have attached Substitution Binders. In which are Substitution Request Forms (SRF), product info, and UL certs. I have also included our brochure for your review. Please consider our products for this and future projects. Our products are UL 752 listed and labeled, not all our competitors are. Please advise if you need anything else or have any questions. DR: Our flush doors are UL listed, level 1-6 & 8. Vision panels in the door, and side-lites can be easily added with glazing to match protection level. Door cutouts for lock sets and panic devises as chosen by the customer can be added. PP: Our package passer is constructed using Shot -Tex steel with Stainless steel door faces as an option. They can have a vision panel in levels 1-3. They are certified by UL to level 8. STW: Our Standard Transaction Window can be manufactured using stainless steel (-s), or carbon steel (-p). The carbon steel can be finished prime painted, or powder coated to spec'd color choice. It is manufactured with natural voice transmission sill and rails, but a speak-thru can be added. it can also be seal glazed. The stainless sill has an integrated non - ricochet deal tray. "This substitution is approved." 3. I was reaching out to see the specification on the brick needed on this job. We can match and I was just needing to know the size of the brick. "Provide brick as specified" 4. I had a quick question about the Mobile Storage Shelving Units (10 56 26) for the above mentioned project. It states that the basis of design is for Spacesaver, but no mention of alternates. Spacefile is a 50 year old manufacturer and tend to be 20% - 30% less expensive than Spacesaver and are AIA and Masterspec approved. We have a GSA program and have certified installers all over the country. Can we submit a bid for the Mobile storage shelving? SEE ATTACHED "This substitution is approved." 5. We would like to provide a factory direct bid for the Mobile High Density Shelving. I see the specs in Div 10 but do not see the drawings? "Mobile High Density Shelving and surface mount rail system drawings will be issued and bid separately at a later date." 6. Per the Specifications listed for the generator, it details "minimum, one unit shall be capable of producing 350kw at .8 power factor." Are you specifically asking for (1) 350KW generator? If this isn't the case please inform us on how you would like us to proceed. Please advise. Provide a generator that will handle a 350KW load at .8 PF. Generator might be larger and that is acceptable. 7. Spec section 00 10 00 states that an allowance of $2500 should be carried for door hardware, per door. Can you please clarify what doors/door types this allowance should be carried for? "Include $2500 allowance for all openings except demountable partition openings and overhead doors." 8. What size angle and attachments are needed for the ledger angle shown on A4/S51 L" This connection as per C4/S007. 9. Is closure angle required at D6/S511? Yes, provide closure angle. 10.. What size is the ledger angle shown at D2/S511? Refer to Unscheduled Masonry Lintel Table, Sheet S006. 11.. What size is the HSS Trellis between grid 6.9 and 8.2 also detail C3/S511? 6"H x 4"W x 1 /4". bb'of ock TEXAS ADDENDUM 3 Davis Bacon Wage Rates, Q&A and Extension RFP 22-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse DATE ISSUED: February 23, 2023 New CLOSING DATE: March 2, 2023 at 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over the proposal dates for the above named Request for Proposal (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. The following date in the Request for Proposals (RFP) has been revised. Davis Bacon Wage Rates Attached are the current Davis Bacon Wage rates as referenced in the RFP documents. Extension 1. The closing date has been extended from Thursday, February 28, 2023 to Thursday, March 2 2023, at 3:00 PM CST. Question & Answers 1. Please see the attached Q&A. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Kiara Morgan City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office 1314 Ave K, Floor 9 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Questions may be emailed to kmorgangmylubbock.us Questions are preferred to be posted on hgps:Hci-lbbock-tx.bonfirehub.com/ THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Kiara Morgan Buyer III City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the proposer's responsibility to advise the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the close date. A review of such notifications will be made. Additional Questions and Answers We were just turned on to this project by one of the specified manufacturer's on this project. I noticed that the questions deadline has pasted but there was not a single question asked about the fencing on the project. There are many different items that need to be addressed on this project with the fencing. If you could get any of the following answered, it would be greatly appreciated. 1.) There were no written specifications for any of the fencing (both interior or exterior). Can these be provided? SI will be issued to clarify the specifications for the chainlink fencing. 2.) Sheet CS101, note 11 calls out for a HySecurity S1ideDriver 15 but there are no written specifications to state what all options is required for this gate operator. Can a spec sheet be provided for what all needs to come with this gate operator? \... SI will be issued to clarify the requirements for the Slidedriver gate operator as attached.... 3.) Sheet CS101, note 14 calls out for a 4' pedestrian gate (see detail CS502). The gate detail shows a chain link gate. However, there are 2 pedestrian gates in the ornamental fence line. Should the gate match the type of fence that it is being placed in? ... Yes, SI will be provided to clarify the gates shall match the type of fence in which they are placed. 4.) The chain link on the southeast side of the building has a cut that references E3/CS501. This referenced detail does not shown anything on the fencing on if it needs to be set in concrete footing or come as a plated design. Is this the correct detail to be referenced? ... SI will be issued to clarify that the fencing is to be placed in concrete footing within the thickened edge of the concrete sidewalk. 5.) Sheet CS101, shows most of the fencing to come with a ribbon curb note 7 (see detail C3/CS501). This detail does not show the fencing in it. Should the fencing be a plated post design or a concrete footing below the ribbon curb? SI will be issued to clarify all fencing on this project is to be placed with concrete footing... 6.) Sheet CS502, detail B2 shows the 9' tall chain link fence with no bracing. Normally a 9' tall fence, you would either have a middle rail and/or a bottom rail. Should there be more than just a top rail on this fencing? SI will be issued to clarify 9' chainlink fence shall include x-bracing at all terminal posts only as shown in details... 7.) Sheet CS502, detail B6 shows the 9' tall chain link fence with 2 3/8" OD posts. On this height of fence, you would normally have a 2 7/8" OD sch 40 posts (3.65 lbs/ft) or even a 4" OD sch 40 posts (9.11 lbs/ft). The 2 3/8" OD post may be too light to handle the windload especially in a windy environment. Should these line post size change to a larger size? SI will be issued to clarify post size of 2-7/8" OD sch 40... 8.) Sheet CS502, detail B5 calls out for a 4" OD post (3.654 lbs/ft). The size of a 4" OD sch 40 post would be 9.11 lbs./ft. or a 4" OD SS 40 post would be 6.56 lbs ft. The only pipe that weighs 3.65 lbs./ft. is a 2 3/8" OD sch 40 post. This 2 3/8" OD sch 40 post would be too light for this height of fence. Is the weight wrong on this detail? SI will be issued to clarify the 4" OD post of Sch 40 material (9.11 lbs./ft)... 9. Sheet CS502, detail B4 shows a standard 4' walk gate. Is there any type of specialty hardware required on these gates such as panic bars or mag locks, etc.? I did not see anything listed in the door hardware schedule for these gates. SI will be issued to clarify that all pedestrian gates shall have panic bars... 10. Is the chain link fence to be black vinyl coated or galvanized? SI will be issued to clarify that all chainlink fencing is to be galvanized... no coating is required... 11. Sheet CS503, details call out both a 2 rail and a 3 rail fence. Ameristar will only make the 10' Trident in either a 3 or 4 rail. How many horizontal rails are required: 3 or 4? SI will be issued to clarify a 3-rail system for the Ameristar fencing.... 12. What color of fencing is required for the ornamental fence? Black is the standard color and everything else requires an upcharge. SI will be issued to clarify ornamental fencing shall be Black 13. Sheet A-121, rooms 220-223 call out per note 210 for MTL Chain Link Fence. There is an elevation on sheet A-212 detail B5 that shows this fencing. I cannot locate any specifications on this metal chain link fence. Is this truly chain link fencing or should this be some type of metal partition? SI will be issued to clarify material inside building as specified by the Architect of Record. 14. Sheet A-121, rooms 221, 222, and 223 show a gate/door. This gate/door is not listed in the door hardware schedule. What type of gate hardware is required with these gates/doors? SI will be issued to clarify material inside building as specified by the Architect of Record. 15. Addendum 2 for the new Lubbock Forensic/Property Facility updated sheet S501 and S511. It added several new pages that are not referenced on S 121 or other sheets. Please update S 121 to show where the changes occur. Thank you. Please see updated I I 1 and 121 attached. 16. The "IWB" Interactive Whiteboard - Smartboard MX265 did not have a display wall mount listed in the specs. Does this need to be a Smart WallStand or a regular Peerless Wall Mount model like the other flat panel displays? A regular Peerless Wall Mount model like the other flat panel displays 17. With the current backorder status of the specified Crestron equipment being up to one year for certain components, would Extron be an acceptable substitution? Bid as specified using Crestron solution. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. DAVIS BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS EXHIBIT A bb'of ock TEXAS ADDENDUM 4 Extension REP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse DATE ISSUED: March 2, 2023 NEW CLOSING DATE: March 07, 2023 at 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over the proposal dates for the above named Request for Proposal (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. The following date in the Request for Proposals has been revised. Closing Date Extension 1. The closing date has been extended from Thursday, March 2, 2023 to Tuesday, March 07, 2023 at 3:00 p.m. CST. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Kiara Morgan City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office 1314 Ave K, Floor 9 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Questions may be emailed to kmorgangmylubbock.us Questions are preferred to be posted on https:Hci-lbbock-tx.bonfirehub.com/ THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Kiara Morgan Buyer III City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the proposer's responsibility to advise the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the close date. A review of such notifications will be made. bb'of ock TEXAS ADDENDUM S Revised Bid Table and Proposal Submittal Form REP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse DATE ISSUED: March 2, 2023 NEW CLOSING DATE: March 07, 2023 at 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over the proposal dates for the above named Request for Proposal (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. The following date in the Request for Proposals has been revised. Revised Bid Table The Bid Table has been updated to remove concrete patching. Please ensure you are submitting the current version of Bid Table BT-24FU revised March 2, 2023. Revised Proposal Submittal Form 1. Please utilize and submit the attached Revised Proposal Submittal Form with your response. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Kiara Morgan City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office 1314 Ave K, Floor 9 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Questions may be emailed to kmorgan(&,mylubbock.us Questions are preferred to be posted on hops:Hci-lbbock-tx.bonfirehub.com/ THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Kiara Morgan Buyer III City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the proposer's responsibility to advise the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the close date. A review of such notifications will be made. REVISED PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: RFP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse Proposal of called Offeror) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: (hereinafter The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for construction of the referenced project, having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors, notice to offerors and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. UNIT PRICE ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT UOM Unit Price No. la Fencing - Wrought Iron $ LF Unit Price No. lb Fencing - Decorative $ LF Unit Price No. 2a Concrete — Curb & Gutter $ LF Unit Price No. 2b Concrete - Sidewalk $ LF Unit Price No. 3a Pavement - Asphalt $ SF Unit Price No. 3b Pavement - Concrete $ SF Unit Price No. 4a Utilities — Electrical Secondary $ LF Unit Price No. 4b Utilities — Water Line $ LF Unit Price No. 4c Utilities — Sewer Line $ LF Unit Price No. 4d Utilities — Fire Line $ LF Unit Price No. 4e Utilities — Gas Line $ LF Unit Price No. 5a Metal Panel Systems - Aluminum Composite Metal Panel $ SF Unit Price No. 5b Metal Panel Systems - PEMB Rib Panel $ SF ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT UOM Unit Price No. 6a Misc. & Structural Steel — Fabrication & Delivery $ TON Unit Price No. 6b Misc. & Structural Steel — Steel Erection $ TON Unit Price No. 6c Misc. & Structural Steel — Detailing & Drafting $ Man HR AMOUNTS INCLUDED IN BASE PROPOSAL The Offeror provides the following additional information that will be made a part of the contract: 1. What amount is the Overhead and Profit included in the Base Proposal? $ 2. What amount is the General Conditions included in the Base Proposal? $ 3. By putting an "X" in the following box, the Bidder is indicating that the $300,000 contingency allowance indicated in Section 0122 00 Price and Payment is included in Base Proposal (BT-24FU) ❑ 4. By putting an "X" in the following box, the Bidder is indicating that the $10,000 Special Inspections Allowance indicated in Section 00 10 00 - 1 Price and Payment is included in Base Proposal (BT-24FU). ❑ By putting an "X" in the following box, the Bidder is indicating that the $2,500/Door Unit Cost Door Hardware Allowance indicated in Section 00 10 00 — 1 Price and Payment is included in Base Proposal (BT-24FU). ❑ PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION TIME: 1. Contractors proposed CONSTRUCTION TIME for completion: TOTAL CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS: (to Substantial Completion) TOTAL CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS: (to Final Completion) (not to exceed 450 consecutive calendar days to Substantial Completion / 480 consecutive calendar days to Final Completion). Offeror hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 450 Consecutive Calendar Days with final completion within 480 Consecutive Calendar Days as stipulated in the specification and other contract documents. Offeror hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages in the sum of $1,000 for each consecutive calendar day after substantial completion and liquidated damages in the sum of $1,000 for each consecutive calendar day after final completion set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the General Conditions of the Agreement. Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Offerors. Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the proposing. The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of sixty 60 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Offeror hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. (Seal if Offeror is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary Offeror acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Date: Authorized Signature (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City, County State Zip Code Telephone: - Fax: Email: FEDERAL No. TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY M/WBE Finn: Woman Black American Native American Hispanic American Asian Pacific American Other (Specify) INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS I, the undersigned Bidder certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me and my Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) business days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid. If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Director of Purchasing & Contract Management for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2572. SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-110) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of $25,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). Contractors receiving individual awards of $25,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Before an award of $25,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. I, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 2252.152 The undersigned representative of the undersigned company or business, being an adult over the age of eighteen (18) years of age, pursuant to Texas Government Code, Chapter 2252, Section 2252.152, certify that the company named above is not listed on the website of the Comptroller of the State of Texas concerning the listing of companies that are identified under Section 806.051, Section 807.051 or Section 2253.153. I further certify that should the above -named company enter into a contract that is on said listing of companies on the website of the Comptroller of the State of Texas, which do business with Iran, Sudan or any Foreign Terrorist Organization, I will immediately notify the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Department. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 2271.002 Company hereby certifies the following: 1. Company does not boycott Israel; and 2. Company will not boycott Israel during the term of the contract. The following definitions apply to this state statute: (1) 'Boycott Israel" means refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli -controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes; and (2) "Company" means an organization, association, corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited partnership, limited liability partnership, or limited liability company, including a wholly owned subsidiary, majority -owned subsidiary, parent company, or affiliate of those entities or business associations that exists to make a profit. This Certification is required from a Company if the Company has 10 or more full-time employees and the contract for goods or services (which includes contracts formed through purchase orders) has a value of $100,000 or more that is to be paid wholly or partly from public funds of the governmental entity. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE 2274 By entering into this Agreement, Contractor verifies that: (1) it does not, and will not for the duration of the contract, have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association or (2) the verification required by Section 2274.002 of the Texas Government Code does not apply to the contract. If Contractor is a company with 10 or more full-time employees and if this Agreement has a value of at least $100,000 or more, Contractor verifies that, pursuant to Texas Government Code Chapter 2274, it does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; and will not discriminate during the term of the contract against a firearm entity or firearm trade association. Contractor represents and warrants that: (1) it does not, and will not for the duration of the contract, boycott energy companies or (2) the verification required by Section 2274.002 of the Texas Government Code does not apply to the contract. If Contractor is a company with 10 or more full-time employees and if this Agreement has a value of at least $100,000 or more, Contractor verifies that, pursuant to Texas Government Code Chapter 2274, it does not boycott energy companies; and will not boycott energy companies during the term of the Agreement. This verification is not required for an agreement where a governmental entity determines that these requirements are inconsistent with the governmental entity's constitutional or statutory duties related to the issuance, incurrence, or management of debt obligations or the deposit, custody, management, borrowing, or investment of funds. Agreement Example Review This sample Agreement has been reviewed and ( ) is acceptable ( ) is acceptable as noted Contractor Acknowledtement In compliance with this solicitation, the undersigned, having examined the solicitation documents, instructions to offerors, documents associated with the request for proposals, and being familiar with the conditions to be met has reviewed the above information regarding: • Insurance Requirements • Suspension and Debarment Certification • Texas Government Code Section 2252.152 • Texas Government Code Section 2271.002 • Texas Government Code 2274 An individual authorized to bind the company must sign the following section. Failure to execute this portion may result in proposal rejection. By signing below, the terms stated have been reviewed and approved. Company Name: Signed By: Print Name and Title: Date: bb'of ock TEXAS ADDENDUM 6 Revised Specifications REP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse DATE ISSUED: March 3, 2023 NEW CLOSING DATE: March 07, 2023 at 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over the proposal dates for the above named Request for Proposal (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. The following date in the Request for Proposals has been revised. Revised Specifications 1. Refer to the drawings, rooftop unit schedule. Delete the requirement for unit mounted convenience outlets to be provided with the rooftop units. Refer to the electrical drawings for required outlets. 2. Refer to the specifications, section 237000 Equipment. In paragraph 2.13V, delete the requirement for touchscreen thermostats to be provided by the unit manufacture. Network thermostats are specified to be furnished by the temperature control contractor under section 239000. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Kiara Morgan City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office 1314 Ave K, Floor 9 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Questions may be emailed to kmorgangmylubbock.us Questions are preferred to be posted on https:Hci-lbbock-tx.bonfirehub.com/ THANK YOU, Gam, CITY OF LUBBOCK Kiara Morgan Buyer III City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contracts Management Office It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the proposer's responsibility to advise the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the close date. A review of such notifications will be made. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 11 12 13 INDEX NOTICE TO OFFERORS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE § 2269 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM — (must be submitted by published due date & time) 4-1. PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM 4-2. SUBMITTAL OF DOCUMENTS 4-3. CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS — (to be submitted no later than seven business days after the close date when proposals are due) 5-1. FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS (IF APPLICABLE) SPECIFICATIONS Page Intentionally Left Blank NOTICE TO OFFERORS Page Intentionally Left Blank City of Lubbock TEXAS RFP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse 1. NOTICE TO OFFERORS 1.1. Offerors may submit proposals electronically by uploading required documents at the City of Lubbock's partner's website, Bonfire. This Request for Proposals is for your convenience in submitting an offer for the specified services. If submitting electronically, do not submit paper documents. If you choose to submit in hard copy, submit one original paper copy of your submittal to the office of the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management: Physical: Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management City of Lubbock 13 14 Avenue K, 9th Floor Lubbock, Texas 79401 Mailing: Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 MARK ENVELOPE WITH THE SOLICITATION NUMBER, TITLE, AND DUE DATE/TIME 1.2. Proposals will be opened in the office of the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management, Citizens Tower, 1314 Avenue K, Floor 9, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, and via teleconference as shown below at 3:00 PM on February 15, 2023, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the above referenced. 1.3. After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened in the office of the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management and publicly read aloud. Bids will be opened via teleconference if date/time stamped on or before the deadline stated at the office listed above. The Zoom meeting information is as follows: Website: https:Hzoom.us/j/97171139562?pwd=YVNSSHE5bmNzVIB6ZVpyeDJCZGYrdzO9 Meeting ID: 9717113 9562 Passcode: 1314 1.4. It is the sole responsibility of the offeror to ensure that his proposal is actually in the office of the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Any proposal received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the offeror. 1.5. Mailing of a proposal does not ensure that the proposal will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If offeror does not hand deliver proposal, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. The City of Lubbock assumes no responsibility for errant delivery of proposals, including those relegated to a courier agent who fails to deliver in accordance with the time and receiving point specified. 1.6. Although offers may be submitted electronically, hard copy proposals will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX PROPOSALS. 1.7. Proposals may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time set for closing. Alteration made before RFP closing must be initialed by offeror guaranteeing authenticity. 1.8. Proposals are due at 3:00 PM on February 15, 2023 and should be addressed to Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management, City of Lubbock, Texas, Citizens Tower, 1314 Avenue K, Floor 9, Lubbock, Texas, 79401. The City of Lubbock Council members will consider the proposals on February 28, 2023, at the Citizens Tower, 1314 Avenue K, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all proposals and waive any formalities. The successful offeror will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful offeror will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. Said statutory bonds shall be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of "A" or better. THE BONDS MUST BE IN A FORM ACCEPTABLE TO THE CITY ATTORNEY. NO WORK ON THE CONTRACT SHOULD COMMENCE BEFORE THE BONDS ARE PROVIDED AND APPROVED. 1.9 NOTICE TO PROCEED WILL BE ISSUED 30 DAYS FOLLOWING THE AWARD OF THE CONTRACT BY THE LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL. 1.10. Please allow time to upload required documentation. 24hrs in advance is recommended. 1.11. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to the Offeror. FAILURE OF THE OFFEROR TO INCLUDE PROPOSAL SECURITY WITH THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NON -RESPONSIVE PROPOSAL AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL. 1.12. Copies of plans and specifications may be obtained at bidder's expense from the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management office. Plans and specifications can be viewed online and downloaded from https://ci-lbbock-tx.bonfirehub.com/portal/ at no cost. In the event of a large file size, please be patient when downloading or viewing. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most public libraries. 1.13. Offerors may view the plans and specifications without charge at The Reproduction Company, 2102 Avenue Q, Lubbock, Texas 79405 or at hqp://pr.thereproductioncompany.com/ . ONE SET OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE OBTAINED, AT THE CITY'S EXPENSE, FROM THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY WITH A $100 REFUNDABLE DEPOSIT, Phone: (806) 763-7770. Deposit Checks shall be made PAYABLE TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, and will be refunded if documents are returned in good condition within Sixty (60) days of the opening of Proposals. Additional sets of plans and specifications may be obtained at the offeror's expense. 14. It shall be each offeror's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform Offeror regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the proposal submitted. 2. PRE -PROPOSAL MEETING 2.10. For the purpose of familiarizing offerors with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Request for Proposals (RFP) documents, a non - mandatory pre -proposal conference will be held at 10:00AM, February 2, 2023, via teleconference. The Zoom meeting information is as follows: Website: https://zoom.us/j/98654748959?pwd=bk81 SkhRVGZuT2hNeU0zMF1Kaz1HQT09 Meeting ID: 986 5474 8959 Passcode: 1314 2.11. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective offeror they represent. 2.12. It is the offeror's responsibility to attend the pre -proposal meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -proposal meeting to offerors who do not attend the pre -proposal meeting. Attention of each offeror is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to offerors. Each offerors attention is further directed to Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. 3. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all offerors that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit proposals in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. 4. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -proposal meetings and proposal openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require special assistance, please contact the Purchasing and Contract Management Office at (806) 775-2572 write to Post Office Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK, Marta Alvarez DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING & CONTRACT MANAGEMENT Page Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS Page Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 1. OFFEROR INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 1.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the offerors responsibility to advise the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the proposal closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 1.2 NO OFFEROR SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE PROPOSAL CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: Kiara Morgan, Buyer III City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office 1314 Avenue K, Floor 9, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 Phone 806-775-2167 Email: KMorgangMylubbock.us Website: https://ci-lbbock-tx.bonfirehub.copi/portal/ 2. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 2.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within 450 Consecutive Calendar Days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful offeror. 2.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 2.3 Upon receipt of notice to proceed, and upon commencement of the work, the Contractor shall ensure daily prosecution of the work is conducted every business day until the work is completed, regardless if the work will be substantially or finally complete ahead of specified deadlines in the agreement, unless the City determines time off from said prosecution is necessary or reasonable and Contractor received said determination in writing from the City. Additionally, inclement weather shall be the only other reason consistent, daily prosecution of the work may not take place on those inclement weather days. 3. GUARANTEES 3.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within One year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 3.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 3.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 3.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 4. BASIS OF PROPOSALS AND SELECTION CRITERIA 4.1 The City uses the Competitive Sealed Proposals procurement method as authorized by the Texas Legislature and further defined by Texas Government Code Section 2269. The Maximum Point value is equal to 100 points. The weight factor is 60 points for Price, 30 points for Contractor Qualifications, and 10 points for Construction Time. The selection criteria used to evaluate each proposal includes the following: 4.1.1 60 POINTS - PRICE: The quality of Offerors is not judged solely by a low initial cost proposal or, conversely, eliminated solely because of a high initial cost proposal. The following is the formula used when determining price as a factor for construction contract proposals. The lowest proposal price of all the proposals becomes the standard by which all price proposals are evaluated. One at a time, each proposal is evaluated by taking the lowest proposal price and dividing it by the price of the proposal being evaluated. That fraction is then multiplied by the maximum point value of the price factor for the price score. For Example: (Lowest Price/Current Proposal Price) x Maximum Point Value = Price Score. 4.1.2 30 POINTS - CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS: When evaluating a contractor's qualifications, the City uses the "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" attached within, past experience with the contractor, the "Safety Record Questionnaire", and the Contractor's Experience Modification Ratio (EMR). The City may also interview the job superintendent at a time to be named after receipt of proposals. 4.1.3 Five (5) points of the overall points for this criteria are based on the Experience Modification Ration (EMR) and supporting documentation submitted by the contractor. 4.1.3.1 The lowest EMR of all the proposals becomes the standard by which all the EMRs are evaluated. One at a time, each proposal is evaluated by taking the lowest EMR and dividing it by the EMR of the proposal being evaluated. That fraction is then multiplied by 5 for the EMR score. For example: (Lowest EMR/Current EMR) x 5 = EMR Score portion of this criteria) 4.1.3.2 Contractors with an EMR greater than 1.0, as well as those Contractors not submitting EMRs, will receive zero points for this portion of the selection criteria. 4.1.4 For the remaining portion of this criteria, each evaluator assigns points based upon the responses the contractor provides in the "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications", any past experience with the contractor, and on safety record information submitted. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of Lubbock residents, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor under the contractor's control. Evaluators base their rating primarily upon how well you document previous offenses with the date of the offense, location where the offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of the offense, and any penalty assessed 4.1.5 The "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" is a minimum. 4.1.5.1 You may provide additional pertinent information relevant to the project for which you are submitting this proposal in an appendix. 4.1.6 10 POINTS - CONSTRUCTION TIME: This criterion is, as with price, objective and evaluators use the following formula when determining construction time as a factor for construction contract proposals. The lowest construction time proposal of all the proposals becomes the standard by which all the construction time proposals are evaluated. One at a time, each proposal is evaluated by taking the lowest construction time and dividing it by the construction time of the proposal being evaluated. That fraction is then multiplied by the maximum point value of the construction time factor for the construction time score. For example: (Lowest construction time/Current Proposal construction time) x Maximum Point Value = Construction Time Score) 4.1.7 EVALUATION PROCESS: Evaluators independently review and score each proposal. The Committee meets, to discuss the individual scores of each evaluator. If the individual scores are similar, the Chairperson may average the scores then rank offerors accordingly. If the scores are significantly diverse, the Chairperson initiates and moderates discussion to determine the reasons for the differences and ensures that all evaluators are fully knowledgeable of all aspects of the proposals. Scores may then be adjusted by the committee based on committee discussion. 4.1.8 Please note that offerors with higher qualifications scores could be ranked higher than offerors with slightly better price scores. 4.2 The estimated budget for the construction phase of this project is $8,000,000.00. 4.3 Proposals shall be made using the forms provided. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS (Continued) 5. ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 5.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the RFP are made by ADDENDA information available over the Internet at https://ci-lubbock-tx.bonfirehub.com/portal/. We strongly suggest that you check for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most public libraries. 5.2 Any offeror in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management. At the request of the offeror, or in the event the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing and Contract Management. Such addenda issued by the Purchasing and Contract Management Office will be available over the Internet at https://ci-lubbock-tx.bonfirehub.coM/portal/ and will become part of the proposal package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original RFP. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the proposal closing date. 5.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any explanation or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office in writing or in this RFP should be used in preparing proposal responses. All contacts that an offeror may have had before or after receipt of this RFP with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this proposal should be disregarded in preparing responses. 5.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to offerors. 6. EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 6.1 Each offeror shall carefully examine all RFP documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a proposal to ensure that their proposal meets the intent of these specifications. 6.2 Before submitting a proposal, each offeror shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Request for Proposals. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the offeror from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Request for Proposals. 6.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the offeror fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If offeror does not notify the Director of Purchasing and Contract Management before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. 7. PROPOSAL PREPARATION COSTS 7.1 Issuance of this RFP does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a proposal. 7.2 The issuance of this RFP does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 7.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a proposal shall be paid by the offeror. 8. TRADE SECRETS, CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 8.1 If you consider any portion of your proposal to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 8.2 Proposals will be opened in a manner that avoids disclosure of the contents to competing offerors and keeps the proposals secret during negotiations. All proposals are open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, but trade secrets and confidential information in the proposals are not open for inspection. Tex. Loc. Govt. Code 252.049(a) 8.3 Marking your entire proposal CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Public Information Act. 8.4 Pursuant to Section 552.234(c) of the Texas Government Code, submit your open records request using the link provided below. https:Hlubbocktx.govqa.us/WEBAPP/ rs/(S(quiyirflbtihahjnyce g)ypcs))/SupportHome. aspx 8.5 For more information, please see the City of Lubbock Public Information Act website at: https://ci.lubbock.tx.us/pages/public-information-act 9. LICENSES, PERMITS, Taxes 9.1 The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the offeror is or may be required to pay. 10. UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES 10.1 Prospective offerors are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their proposal submittal how they would utilize local resources. 11. CONFLICT OF INTEREST 11.1 The offeror shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 11.2 By signing and executing this proposal, the offeror certifies and represents to the City the offeror has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this proposal. 11.3 It is not necessary to fill out the CIQ Form unless you have a business relationship that might cause a conflict of interest with the City of Lubbock 11.4 Effective January 1, 2006, Chapter 176 of the Texas Local Government Code requires that any vendor or person considering doing business with a local government entity disclose in the Questionnaire, Form CIQ, the vendor or person's affiliation or business relationship that might cause a conflict of interest with a local government entity. By law, the questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the City of Lubbock not later than the Seventh business day after the date the person becomes aware of the facts that require the statement to be filed. The questionnaire can be found at: hlt2s://www.ethics.state.tx.us/forms/conflict/ For the City of Lubbock, these forms should be filed with the City Secretary's Office, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas, 79457 See Section 176.006, Local Government Code: http://www.statutes.legis.state.tx.us/SOTWDocs/LG/htm/LG. 176.htm. A person commits an offense if the person violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a Class C misdemeanor. 12. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 12.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 12.2 All offerors shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 13. CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES 13.1 Effective January 1, 2016, Section 2252.908, as amended, of Chapter 2252 of the Texas Government Code requires certain business entities to submit an electronic disclosure form to the Texas Ethics Commission before entering into a contract with a local government entity when any of the following apply: 1) Contract requires an action or vote by the City Council (governing body); OR 2) Contract value is $1 Million or greater; OR 3) Contract is for services that would require a person to register as a lobbyist under Chapter 305 of the Government Code. This must be done before executing the contract. The disclosure form may be found at https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/whatsnew/elf_ info_form1295.htm. You must log in and create an account the first time you fill out the form. Tutorial videos on how to log in for the first time and how to fill out the form can be found through the link above. After you electronically submit the disclosure form, a screen will come up confirming the submission and assigning a certificate number. Then, you must print the form, have an authorized agent complete the declaration and sign, and provide it to the City (scanned email copy is acceptable). 14. PLANS FOR USE BY OFFERORS 14.1 It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a proposal on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a proposal without charge. The contract documents may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Offerors. 15. PAYMENT 15.1 All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 16. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID 16.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 17. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 17.1 The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 18. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR 18.1 The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to a maximum of five sets of plans and specifications and related contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19. PROTECTION OF THE WORK 19.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the proposals have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of an offeror the following information: (a) The experience record of the offeror showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the offeror. (c) Equipment schedule. 20. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 21. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES 2 1. 1 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures, both known and unknown, cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, and/or the owning utility at the Contractor's expense. 22. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES 22.1 The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 23. EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 24. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE 24.1 The successful offeror shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful offeror shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 25. INSURANCE 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 26. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each offeror is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The offeror's attention is further directed to the requirements of Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the offeror's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on Sundays or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on Sundays or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on Sundays or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 27. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS 27.1 The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall keep a record showing the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or subcontractor in the construction of the public work and the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. This record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the City. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, sixty dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 28. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES 28.1 Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated proposal price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the offeror without being considered. 29. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL 29.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City, and all blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in, stating the price in numerals for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the extended total for a bid item, the unit price will be taken. A bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. 29.2If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(2), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. 29.4 Proposal submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the proposals, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 30. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 30.1 Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by offeror shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Offerors. (b) General Instructions to Offerors. (c) Offeror's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bonds (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors. (j) All other documents made available to offeror for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. 30.2 If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 31. QUALIFICATIONS OF OFFERORS 31.1 The offeror may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The offeror may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the offeror's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the offeror to perform the work, and the offeror shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The offeror's proposal may be deemed not to meet specifications or the proposal may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the offeror fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the offeror's qualifications shall include but not be limited to: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the offeror to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the offeror. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. (e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors (f) The experience and qualifications of key project personnel (g) Past experience with the Owner 31.2 Complete and submit the PROPOSED List of Sub -Contractors. Seven (7) business days after closing, complete and submit the FINAL List of Sub -contractors. (a) If no sub -contractors will be used please indicate so. 31.3 Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past five (5) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock specifications herein. 32. SELECTION 32.1 Selection shall be based on the responsible offeror whose proposal is determined to be the most advantageous to the City of Lubbock considering the relative importance of evaluation factors included in this REP. 32.2 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT (CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OR OTHER) HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL. 32.3 The City shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the City based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The City shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The City and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the City is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the City shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. 32.4In determining best value for the City, the City is not restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. 32.5 A proposal will be subject to being considered irregular and may be rejected if it shows omissions, alterations of form, conditional alternate proposals, additions or alternates in lieu of the items specified, if the unit prices are obviously unbalanced (either in excess of or below reasonably expected values), or irregularities of any kind. 33. ANTI -LOBBYING PROVISION 33.1 DURING THE PERIOD BETWEEN PROPOSAL SUBMISSION DATE AND THE CONTRACT AWARD, OFFERORS, INCLUDING THEIR AGENTS AND REPRESENTATIVES, SHALL NOT DISCUSS OR PROMOTE THEIR PROPOSAL WITH ANY MEMBER OF THE LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL OR CITY STAFF EXCEPT UPON THE REQUEST OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT IN THE COURSE OF CITY -SPONSORED INQUIRIES, BRIEFINGS, INTERVIEWS, OR PRESENTATIONS. 33.2 This provision is not meant to preclude bidders from discussing other matters with City Council members or City staff. This policy is intended to create a level playing field for all potential bidders, assure that contract decisions are made in public, and to protect the integrity of the bid process. Violation of this provision may result in rejection of the bidder's bid. 34. PROTEST 34.1 All protests regarding the RFP process must be submitted in writing to the City Director of Purchasing and Contract Management within 5 working days after the protesting party knows of the occurrence of the action which is protested relating to advertising of notices deadlines, proposal opening and all other related procedures under the Local Government Code, as well as any protest relating to alleged improprieties with the RFP process. This limitation does not include protests relating to staff recommendations as to award of contract. Protests relating to staff recommendations may be directed to the City Manager. All staff recommendations will be made available for public review prior to consideration by the City Council as allowed by law. FAILURE TO PROTEST WITHIN THE TIME ALLOTTED SHALL CONSTITUTE A WAIVER OF ANY PROTEST. 35. PREVAILING WAGE RATES 35.1 Offerors are required to comply with Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, with respect to the payment of prevailing wage rates for the construction of a public work, including a building, highway, road, excavation, and repair work or other project development or improvement, paid for in whole or in part from public funds, without regard to whether the work is done under public supervision or direction. A worker is employed on a public work if the worker is employed by the contractor or any subcontractor in the execution of the contract for the project. 35.2 A worker employed on a public work by or on behalf of the City of Lubbock shall be paid not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for the work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. 35.3 A contractor or subcontractor who violates Texas Government Code Section 2258.023 shall pay to the City of Lubbock $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE & 2269 SUBCHAPTER D. SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS Sec. 2269.151. CONTRACTS FOR FACILITIES: COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS. (a) In this chapter, "competitive sealed proposals" is a procurement method by which a governmental entity requests proposals, ranks the offerors, negotiates as prescribed, and then contracts with a general contractor for the construction, rehabilitation, alteration, or repair of a facility. (b) In selecting a contractor through competitive sealed proposals, a governmental entity shall follow the procedures provided by this subchapter. Sec. 2269.152. USE OF ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. The governmental entity shall select or designate an architect or engineer to prepare construction documents for the project. The selected or designated engineer or architect has full responsibility for complying with Chapter 1001 or 1051, Occupations Code, as applicable. If the engineer or architect is not a full-time employee of the governmental entity, the governmental entity shall select the engineer or architect on the basis of demonstrated competence and qualifications as provided by Section 2254.004, Government Code. Sec. 2269.153. PREPARATION OF REQUEST. The governmental entity shall prepare a request for competitive sealed proposals that includes construction documents, selection criteria and the weighted value for each criterion, estimated budget, project scope, estimated project completion date, and other information that a contractor may require to respond to the request. The governmental entity shall state in the request for proposals the selection criteria that will be used in selecting the successful offeror. Sec. 2269.154. EVALUATION OF OFFERORS. (a) The governmental entity shall receive, publicly open, and read aloud the names of the offerors and any monetary proposals made by the offerors. (b) Not later than the 45th day after the date on which the proposals are opened, the governmental entity shall evaluate and rank each proposal submitted in relation to the published selection criteria. Sec. 2269.155. SELECTION OF OFFEROR. (a) The governmental entity shall select the offeror that submits the proposal that offers the best value for the governmental entity based on: (1) the selection criteria in the request for proposal and the weighted value for those criteria in the request for proposal; and (2) its ranking evaluation. (b) The governmental entity shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The governmental entity and its architect or engineer may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. (c) If the governmental entity is unable to negotiate a satisfactory contract with the selected offeror, the governmental entity shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. In determining best value for the governmental entity, the governmental entity is not restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. Page Intentionally Left Blank PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM Page Intentionally Left Blank REVISED PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT DATE: March 7.2023 PROJECT NUMBER: RFP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse Proposal of Lee LeWia f onstroction (hereinafter called Offeror) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for construction of the referenced project, having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors, notice to offerors and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. UNIT PRICE ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT UOM Unit Price No. la Fencing- Wrought Iron $ 400.00 LF Unit Price No. lb Fencing - Decorative $600.00 LF Unit Price No. 2a Concrete — Curb & Gutter $ LF Unit Price No. 2b Concrete - Sidewalk S 6.50 LF Unit Price No. 3a Pavement - Asphalt S 4.00 SF Unit Price No. 3b Pavement - Concrete SF Unit Price No. 4a Utilities — Electrical Secondary $ LF Unit Price No. 4b Utilities — Water Line S 65.00 LF Unit Price No. 4c Utilities -- Sewer Line $ 65,0.0 LF Unit Price No. 4d Utilities — Fire Line $ 65.00 LF Unit Price No. 4e Utilities — Gas Line $ 60.00 LF Unit Price No. 5a Metal Panel Systems - Aluminum Com osite Metal Panel $ SF Unit Price No. 5b Metal Panel Systems - PEMB Rib Panel $ SF ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT UOM Unit Price No. 6a Misc. & Structural Steel — Fabrication & Deliver $ 4,500,00 TON Unit Price No. 6b Misc. & Structural Steel — Steel Erection $ 750.00 TON Unit Price No. 6c Misc. & Structural Steel — Detailing & Drafting $ 125.00 Man HR AMOUNTS INCLUDED IN BASE PROPOSAL The Offeror provides the following additional information that will be made a part of the contract: 1. What amount is the Overhead and Profit included in the Base Proposal? $ $ 347,000 2. What amount is the General Conditions included in the Base Proposal? $ $ 351,000 3. By putting an "X" in the following box, the Bidder is indicating that the $300,000 contingency allowance indicated in Section 0122 00 Price and Payment is included in Base Proposal (BT-24FU) 4. By putting an "X" in the following box, the Bidder is indicating that the $10,000 Special Inspections Allowance indicated in Section 00 10 00 - 1 Price and Payment is included in Base Proposal (BT-24FU). [� 5. By putting an "X" in the following box, the Bidder is indicating that the $2,500/Door Unit Cost Door Hardware Allowance indicated in Section 00 10 00 —1 Price and Payment is included in Base Proposal (BT-24FU), N PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION TIME: 1. Contractors proposed CONSTRUCTION TIME for completion: TOTAL CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS:, 400 days (to Substantial Completion) TOTAL CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS: 430 days Sto Final Completion) (not to exceed 450 consecutive calendar days to Substantial Completion / 480 consecutive calendar days to Final Completion). Offeror hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 450 Consecutive Calendar Days with final completion within 480 Consecutive Calendar Days as stipulated in the specification and other contract documents. Offeror hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages in the sum of $1,000 for each consecutive calendar day after substantial completion and liquidated damages in the sum of $1,000 for each consecutive calendar day after final completion set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the General Conditions of the Agreement. City of Lubbock, TX Public Works ITB 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab Evidence Warehouse Lee Lewis Construction of Lubbock, TX QTY Unit Extended # Items +/- U/M Price Cost Base Bid 41-1 Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence 1 LS $8,127,000.00 8,127,000.00 $8,101,700 Warehouse 44-2—MeWizatieH Add/Deduct - —Tr#e� elleiweg Prises a e€e d/ ltgraate RF@posal 1 1.9 (4, 000.0o) ltem(s), as clearly and separately identified on the Drawings and/or in the Specifications. The Offeror shall clearly indicate if this price is to be Added or Deducted from the Base Proposal by placing an (+) or (-) before the price. The Offeror agrees to hold this price for a period of not less than 60 days from the date of contract award. Do not include this time period in the construction duration included in this proposal. Alternate Proposal using Asphalt Paving in lieu of Concrete -#3 fi--�ritemate'Pro�Sat usingspt�aiTf�avmgin'tietr�rrctj is^8;693;66d.�6 5;695;666:66 Total Items 1-1: $8,101,700.00 Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Offerors. Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the proposing. The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of six 60 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Offeror hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars (S ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of 5% of proposal amount Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. (Seal if Offeror is a Corporati ATTEST: -{� Secretary Offeror acknowledges receipt of the MWwing addenda: Addenda No. i Date 2-6-23 Addenda No. 2 Date 2-23-23 Addenda No. _3 Date 2-23-23 Addenda No. 4 Date 3-2-23 Addenda No. 5 Date 3-2-23 Addenda No. 6 Date 3-3-23 Date: 03/07/2023 Authorized Signature Ryan Lewis (Printed or Typed Name) Lee Lewis Construction Company 7810 Qrlando Ave Address Lubbock ,Lubbock City, County Texas ,79423 State Zip Code Telephone: 806-797-8400 Fax: 806-797-8492 Email: p)r leelF S,WL9 com FEDEIZAAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 75-1680801 MIWBE Firm: =Woman I I $lack American Native American Hispanic American I I Asian Pacific American Other (Specify) INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS I, the undersigned Bidder certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me and my Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) business days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid. If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Director of Purchasing & Contract Management for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2572. SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-110) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of $25,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). Contractors receiving individual awards of $25,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Before an award of $25,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. I, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 2252.152 The undersigned representative of the undersigned company or business, being an adult over the age of eighteen (18) years of age, pursuant to Texas Government Code, Chapter 2252, Section 2252.152, certify that the company named above is not listed on the website of the Comptroller of the State of Texas concerning the listing of companies that are identified under Section 806.051, Section 807.051 or Section 2253.153. I further certify that should the above -named company enter into a contract that is on said listing of companies on the website of the Comptroller of the State of Texas, which do business with Iran, Sudan or any Foreign Terrorist Organization, I will immediately notify the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Department. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 2271.002 Company hereby certifies the following: 1. Company does not boycott Israel; and 2. Company will not boycott Israel during the term of the contract. The following definitions apply to this state statute: (1) 'Boycott Israel" means refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli -controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes; and (2) "Company" means an organization, association, corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited partnership, limited liability partnership, or limited liability company, including a wholly owned subsidiary, majority -owned subsidiary, parent company, or affiliate of those entities or business associations that exists to make a profit. This Certification is required from a Company if the Company has 10 or more full-time employees and the contract for goods or services (which includes contracts formed through purchase orders) has a value of $100,000 or more that is to be paid wholly or partly from public funds of the governmental entity. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE 2274 By entering into this Agreement, Contractor verifies that: (1) it does not, and will not for the duration of the contract, have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association or (2) the verification required by Section 2274.002 of the Texas Government Code does not apply to the contract. If Contractor is a company with 10 or more full-time employees and if this Agreement has a value of at least $100,000 or more, Contractor verifies that, pursuant to Texas Government Code Chapter 2274, it does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; and will not discriminate during the term of the contract against a firearm entity or firearm trade association. Contractor represents and warrants that: (1) it does not, and will not for the duration of the contract, boycott energy companies or (2) the verification required by Section 2274.002 of the Texas Government Code does not apply to the contract. If Contractor is a company with 10 or more full-time employees and if this Agreement has a value of at least $100,000 or more, Contractor verifies that, pursuant to Texas Government Code Chapter 2274, it does not boycott energy companies; and will not boycott energy companies during the term of the Agreement. This verification is not required for an agreement where a governmental entity determines that these requirements are inconsistent with the governmental entity's constitutional or statutory duties related to the issuance, incurrence, or management of debt obligations or the deposit, custody, management, borrowing, or investment of funds. Agreement Example Review This sample Agreement has been reviewed and (X) is acceptable ( ) is acceptable as noted Contractor Acknowledgement In compliance with this solicitation, the undersigned, having examined the solicitation documents, instructions to offerors, documents associated with the request for proposals, and being familiar with the conditions to be met has reviewed the above information regarding: • Insurance Requirements • Suspension and Debarment Certification • Texas Government Code Section 2252.152 • Texas Government Code Section 2271.002 • Texas Government Code 2274 An individual authorized to bind the company must sign the following section. Failure to execute this portion may result in proposal rejection. By signing below, the terms stated have been reviewed and approved. Company Name: Lee Lewis Construction Signed By: Print Name and Title: Ryan Lewis - COO Date: 03/07/23 '0� MutualLiberty . SURETY CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address) LEE LEWIS CONSTRUCTION, INC. P.. BOX 65197 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79464 OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS BOND AMOUNT: 5% Bid Bond SURETY: (Name, legal slams and principal place of business) Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company 175 Berkeley Street Boston, MA 02116 MAILING ADDRESS FOR NOTICES: Liberty Mutual Surety Claims P.O. Box 34526 Seattle, WA 98124 Five Percent of Bid Amount This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project number, ijany) CONSTRUCTION OF CITY OF LUBBOCK CRIME LAB AND EVIDENCE WAREHOUSE RFP 23-17114-KM The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds m may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in thejurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days. If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractors bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project�k4 V Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conformi��h• other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall );L�coOalruP�a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. ? a� Signed and seated this 28th day of FEBRUARY , 2023 Ir�c Lgd LEE LEWIS CONSTRUCTION, (Witness) (Contractor as Principal) �i��rrr `•,JN1 , 1) hbuurtit (Title) Liberty Mut al Fire Insurance Company rasa (Witness) MARLA ITILL 7:2 (PPM7 HOWARD COWAN. ATTORNEY-IN-FACTBarr • s Init Liberty Mutual Surety vouches that the original text of this document conforms exactly to the text I LMS-2D882e 020 in AIA Document A31 D-2010 Edition Bid Bond. This Power of Attorney limits the acts of those named herein, and they have no authority to bind the Company except in the manner and to the extent herein stated. Liberty Mutual. Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company Wausau, Wisconsin SURETY POWER OF ATTORNEY Certificate No: 8202359 - 974223 KNOWN ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company, being a Wisconsin Corporation having its principal office in the City of Wausau, State of Wisconsin does hereby make, constitute and appoint Marla Hill, Howard Cowan all of the city of Lubbock stale of TX each individually if there be more than one named, its true and lawful attomey(s)4n-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in theirfits name, place and stead, to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver in theidiils behalf, and as Iheir(ts act and deed, without power of redelegabon, as follows: bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and all other surety obligations, as required, unlimited as to Dollar amount and to bind the Company(ies) making this appointment thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond or undertaking was signed by the duly authorized officers of the Company(ies), and all the acts of said attomey(s), pursuant to the authority herein given, are hereby rafifed and confirmed. AUTHORITY FOR MAKING APPOINTMENT OF ATTORNEYS -IN -FACT Imenl of Attomeys-in-Fact by Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company are made pursuant to Article V, Section 10 of Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company's By -Laws, as sd and by Unanimous Consent of the Board of Directors dated May 21st, 2013. Further, the President of Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company, executed a Delegation o1 ty and authorized the assistant secretary signing below to appoint attorneys -in -fact as may be necessary to act on behalf of Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company to make ), seal, acknowledge and deliver as surety any and all undertakings, bonds, recognizances, and other surety obligations. VESS WHEREOF, Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company has caused these presents to be signed by its authorized representatives, and its Corporate Seal to be hereto affixed, 16th day of October , 2019 . m J 1 `0 o) m N N a`) State of PENNSYLVANIA County of MONTGOMERY ss Attest: Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company David M. Carey, Assistant Secretary The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this 16th day of October , 2019 by David M. Carey, an authorized representative of Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company. 5p PAST QF'FµONWei E� COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA larial OF OC Teresa Natalia, Notary Public Upper Merlon Twp., Montgomery County By: v on Espires es March 28.2021 My Commission Member, PenasylranlaA awh or Notaries CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, an Assistant Secretary of Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the original power of attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the dale of this cerOfirale; and I do further certify that the officer or official who executed the said power of attorney was one of the officers or officials specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint attomeys-in-fact as provided in the Unanimous Consent and Vote of the Board of Directors of Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company dated May 21, 2013. This certificate and the above power of attorney may be signed by facsimile or mechanically reproduced signatures under and by authority of the Board of Directors of Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance Company evidenced by the Unanimous Consent and Vole of the Board of Directors dated June 28, 2006 wherein it was VOTED that the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with respectto any surety undertakings, bonds, recognizances and other surety obligations to which it is adeched. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said company, affixed, this 28th day of FEBRUARY , 2023 . fseE INaby A� FpV 40NPONgfy Vrr--�_! � = O m B 1908 n y- ,. o Renee C. Llewellyn, Assistant Secretary ~d�y'acoN%adsB U) W LMFIC Facsimile CCOa19 Contractors Statement of Qualifications Individual contractors and joint ventures submitting a bid must complete the following evaluation information for the Project. Joint ventures shall be composed of not more than two firms and each firm must complete separate evaluations. Evaluation information must be submitted at time of bid submittal. Failure to submit the following Bidder Evaluation information may result in the OWNER considering the bid non -responsive and result in rejection of the bid by the OWNER. Bidders are to provide any additional information requested by the OWNER. In evaluating a firm's qualifications, the following major factors will be considered: A. FINANCIAL CAPABILITY: For this project, the CONTRACTOR'S financial capability to undertake the project will be determined by the CONTRACTOR'S ability to secure bonding satisfactory to the OWNER. Please Reference Tab 3. - Bid Bond 9 Do the organization and key personnel have appropriate technical experience on similar projects? Please Reference the Proposed Project Team forms on the pages to follow, as well as C. SAFETY: Attachment No.1. Does the organization stress and support safety as an important function of the work process? Please Reference Attachment A, Item 6 - "Project D. OUALITY OF WORK: Site Safety". (1) Does the organization have a commitment to quality in every facet of their work - the process as well as the product? Please Reference Attachment A, Item 5 - " Quality Management / Additional Qualifications". (2) Does the organization have a written quality philosophy and/or principles that exemplifies their work? If so, submit as Attachment "A". Please Reference Attachment A, Item 5 -" Quality Management / Additional Qualifications". (3) Has this organization ever received an award or been recognized for doing "quality" work on a project? If so, give details under Attachment "A". Please Reference Attachment A, Item 5 -" Quality Management / Additional Qualifications - Design & E. CONFORMANCE TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Construction Awards". (1) Does the organization have a commitment and philosophy to construct projects as designed and as defined in the Contract Documents? Please Reference Attachment A, Item 5 - "Quality Management / Additional Qualifications". The OWNER reserves the right to waive irregularities in determining the firm's qualifications and reserves the right to require the submission of additional information. The qualifications of a firm shall not deprive the OWNER of the right to accept a bid, which in its judgement is the lowest and best bid, to reject any and all bids, to waive irregularities in the bids, or to reject nonconforming, non- responsive, or conditional bids. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to reject any bid where circumstances and developments have in the opinion of the OWNER changed the qualifications or responsibility of the firm. Material misstatements on the qualifications forms may be grounds for rejection of the firm's bid on this project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the contract to such firm, may be grounds for immediate termination of the contract. Additionally, the firm will be liable to the OWNER for any additional costs or damages to the OWNER resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney's fees for collecting such costs and damages. Complete the following information for your organization: Contractor's General Information Organization Doing Business As Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Business Address of Principle Office 7810 Orlando Avenue Lubbock, TX 79243 Telephone Numbers (806) 797 - 8400 Main Number (806) 797 - 8400 Fax Number (806) 797 - 8492 Web Site Address www.leelewis.com Form of Business (Check One) If a Corporation Date of Incorporation X I A Corporation A Partnership An Individual November 28, 1976 State of Incorporation Texas Chief Executive Officer's Name Lee Lewis President's Name Jason Smith Vice President's Name(s) Ty Parsons Devin Sherman Anthony Lewis Secretary's Name Judy Ward Treasurer's Name If a Partnership Date of Organization Kelly Messersmith N/A State whether partnership is general or N/A limited If an Individual Name N/A N/A Business Address N/A N/A R I organization N/A Indicators of Organization Size Average Number of Current Full Time 250 Average Estimate of Revenue for the $495,000,000 Employees Current Year Contractor's Organizational Experience Organization Doing Business As Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Business Address of Regional Office 7810 Orlando Avenue Lubbock, TX 79243 Name of Regional Office Manager Ran Lewis Telephone Numbers (806) 797 - 8400 Main Number (806) 797 - 8400 Fax Number (806) 797 - 8492 Web Site Address www.leelewis.com Organization List of names that this organization currently, has or anticipates operating under over the history of the organization, including the names of related companies presently doing business: Names of Organization From Date To Date Formerly operated as Lee Lewis General Contractor, Inc. 1976 1988 List of companies, firms or organizations that own any pan of the organization. Name of companies, firms or organization Percent Ownership Not Applicable Construction Experience Years experience in projects similar to the proposed project: 47 Years As a General Contractor I X I As a Joint Venture Partner Has this or a predecessor organization ever defaulted on a project or failed to complete any work awarded to it? No. If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization been released from a bid or proposal in the past ten years? No. If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever been disqualification as a bidder or proposer by any local, state, or federal agency within the last five ears? No. If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Is this organization or your proposed surety currently in any litigation or contemplating litigation? No. If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents? o If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Contractor's Proposed Key Personnel Organization Doing Business As Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. OrganizationProposed Project Provide a brief description of the managerial structure of the organization and illustrate with an organizational cart. Include the title and names of key personnel. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. See Attachment No.1 - Project Team for Team Chart and Resumes. Lee Lewis is the CEO of Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. which was established in 1976, and has had a vital presence in the Texas construction market for over 45 years. Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. is a construction manager and a builder with a staff of over 300 employees with offices in Lubbock, Dallas, and Austin, Texas. Provide a brief description of the managerial structure proposed for this project and illustrate with an organizational cart. Include the title and names of proposed key personnel and alternates. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. See Attachment No.1 - Project Team for Team Chart and Resumes. Please reference the attached Project Team for team chart, resume and references for each individual. Our team's strength lies in our dedicated professional staff who possess the experience and knowledge required to provide unprecedented construction services. PersonnelExperience of Key Provide information on the key personnel proposed for this project that will provide the following key functions. Provide infomiation for candidates for each of these positions on the pages for each of these key personnel. Also provide biographical information for each primary and alternate candidate as an attachment. The biographical information must include the following as a minimum: technical experience, managerial experience, education and formal training, work history which describes project experience, including the roles and responsibilities for each assignment, and primary language. Additional information highlighting experience which makes them the best candidate for the assignment should also be included. Role Primary Candidate Alternate Candidate Project Manager David Clower Jobin Weems Project Superintendent Jimmy Thompson Alex Lopez Project Safety Officer Will Call N/A Quality Control Manager John Givens Dan Morgan If key personnel are to fulfill more than one of the roles listed above, provide a written narrative describing how much time will be devoted to each function, their qualifications to fulfill each role and the percentage of their time that will be devoted to each role. If the individual is not to be devoted solely to this project, indicate how time it to be divided between this project and their other assignments. Proposed Project Managers Organization Doing Business As Primary Candidate Name of Individual Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. David Clower Years of Experience as Project Manager 15 Years of Experience with this organization 8 Number of similar projects as Project Manager Numerous Projects with similar components Number of similar projects in other positions Numerous Projects with similar components Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Plainview Police / Fire Station 100%- Reducing 3/1/23 over Time Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap roval to contactingthe names individuals as a reference Name Tim McLean Name Justin M ers Title/Position Consultant Title/Position Architect Partner Organization Mclean Construction Consulting Organization Martinez Architects Telephone Telephone E-mail tmcleansconsultin .com E-mail Project UMC Medical Center Project Candidate role on Project Manager Project Alternate Candidate Name of Individual Candidates role Project Manager on Project Jobin Weems Years of Experience as Project Manager q Years of Experience with this organization 3 Number of similar projects as Project Manager Numerous Projects with similar components Number of similar projects in other positions Numerous Projects with similar components Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Frenship ISD New ES 1 0 - Reduci a 8/1/23 over Time Reference Contact Name Information (listing names indicates approval Brad Draper to contacting the Name names individuals as a reference) Jason Moore Title/ Position President, Board of Trustees Title/ Position Architect Organization Frenship ISD Organization MWM Architects Telephone 806.781.0738 Telephone 806.745.7707 E-mail Brad.draper@kwa-engineers.com E-mail 'moore@mwmlbb.com Project Frenship ISD New ES Project Frenship ISD New ES Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project Proposed Project Superintendent Organization Doing Business As Primary Candidate Name of Individual Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Jimmy Thompson Years of Experience as Project Superintendent 38 Years of Experience with this organization 32 Number of similar projects as Superintendent Numerous Projects with similar components Number of similar projects in other positions Numerous Projects with similar components Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Plainview Fire Station / Plainview Police Station 100% 3/l/23 Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap roval to contacting the names individuals as a reference Name Bobby Gibson Name Derrick Watson Title/ Position Fire Chief Title/ Position Police Chief Organization Plainview Fire Department Organization Plainview Police Department Telephone 806.296.1170 Telephone 817.600.4218 E-mail bgibson@plainviewtx.org E-mail dwatson@piainviewtx.org Project Plainview Fire Station Project Plainview Police Station Candidate role on Fire Chief Project Alternate Candidate Name of Individual Candidate role on Police Chief Project Alex Lopez Years of Experience as Project Superintendent 10 Years of Experience with this organization 10 Number of similar projects as Superintendent Numerous Projects with similar components Number of similar projects in other positions Numerous Projects with similar components Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date N/A N/A N/A Name Derek Cobb Name C'Jay Barbee Title/ Position Superintendent Title/ Position Architect Organization Frenship ISD Organization Chapman Harvey Architects Telephone 806.866.0112 Telephone 806.749.1153 E-mail N/A E-mail N/A Project N/A Project N/A Candidate role on Project Superintendent I Candidate role on Project Superintendent Proposed Project Safety Officer Organization Doing Business As Primary Candidate Name of Individual Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Will Call Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer 6 years Years of Experience with this organization 10 years Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Numerous Projects with similar components Number of similar projects in other positions Numerous Projects with similar components Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date N/A N/A N/A Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap oval to contacting the names individuals as a reference Name Jim Parkpr Name Bruce Kt ys Title/ Position Loss Control Services Director Title/ Position Construction Manager Organization K&S Group Organization Bayer Cro science Telephone 214.234.8871 Telephone 806.724.3511 E-mail jparker@k&sgroup.com E-mail virgil.b.keys@monsanto.com Project N/A Project Monsanto/Bayer Cotton Seed Proce Candidate role on Safety manager Project I A!temate Candidate Name ndividual Candidate role on Safety manager Project N/A Years of Exp ' nce as Project Safety Officer Years of Experiene ith this organization Number of similar project Safety Officer Number of similar projects in o ositions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date .� Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project sing Proposed Project Quality Control Manager Organization Doing Business As Primary Candidate Name of Individual Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. John Givens Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager 43 Years. Years of Experience with this organization 40 Years. Number of similar projects as Quality Manager See Attachment No. 1 - Project Team. Number of similar projects in other positions Numerous projects with similar components. Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information listing names indicates ap roval to contacting the names individuals as a reference Name UereK LODiDName Rick Wilczak Title/ Position Director of Facilities Title/ Position VP of Design Construction Organization Frenship ISD Organization Garfield Public Private Telephone 806.866.9541 Telephone 702.523.7343 E-mail dcobb@frenship.us E-mail rick.w arfiield ublic rivate.co Project FISD 2007 Bond FISD 2014 Bond Project Candidate role on Sr. Project Manager Project Dir, of uali Assurance & Control Alternate Candidate Name of Individual Candidate role on Sr. Project Manager Project I Dir, of ual*tm Assurance & Contr Dan Morgan Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager 16 Years. Years of Experience with this organization 16 Years. Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Numerous projects with similar components. Number of similar projects in other positions Numerous projects with similar components. Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date IDEA Schools - Odessa 95% July 2021 Reficiencc Contact Name Information (listing names indicates approval Kathryn R. Suehy to contacting the Name names individuals as a reference) Carlos A uilar Title/ Position IT Director Title/ Position Director of Engineering Organization Texas Tech University Organization Ector County Hospital District Telephone 806.834.2536 Telephone 432.640.1126 E-mail kathryn.suchy@ttu.edu E-mail CAguilar@echd.org Project Rawls College of Business Project Odessa West MCH Clinic/ Odessa Ea Candidate role on Project Quality Control Manager I I Candidate role on Project Quality Control Manager t MCH Clinic Contractor's Project Experience and Resources Organization Doing Business As Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Projects Provide a list of major projects that are currently underway, or have been completed within the last ten years on Attachment A Provide a description of your organizations approach to completing this project to provide best value for the Owner. Including a description of your approach in the following areas: 1. Contract administration 2. Management of subcontractor and suppliers 3. Time management 4. Cost control Please Reference Attachment A for further 5. Quality management descriptions of items 1-9. 6. Project site safety 7. Managing changes to the project 8. Managing equipment 9. Meeting HUB / MWBE Participation Goal Equipment Provide a list of major equipment ro osed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if necessary Equipment Item Primary Use on Project Own Will Buy Lease Picku Trucks General Transportation X Forkli Moving Materials X Box Blade Tractor Excavation X Lifts Lifting X Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. owns or will furnish all necessary eguipmentTo—r—tFis projec L. Division of Work between Organization What work will the or anization complete using its own resources? The amount of work that Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. self -performs changes with the market conditions. When more economical for the project, we will self -perform the following: Engineering and Layout, Form Carpentry, Rough Carpentry, Concrete Construction, Reinforcing Tying and Placement, Miscellaneous Steel Erection, Installation of Doors, Frames and Hardware, Installation of Miscellaneous Specialties, Equipment Operators and General Labor. What work does the organization propose to subcontract on thisproject? Please Reference the Contractor's Subcontractor's and Vendors form on the next page. Contractor's Subcontractors and Vendors Organization Doing Business As Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Project Subcontractors Provide a list of subcontractors that will provide more than 10 percent of the work ased on contract amounts Name Work to be Provided Est. Percent of Contract HUB/MWBE Firm Provide information on the proposed key personnel, project experience and a description of past relationship and work ex erience for each subcontractor listed above usin the Project Information Forms. Equipment Vendors Provide a list of major equipment ro osed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if ary Vendor Name Equipment /Material Provided Furnish Only Furnish and Install I UB/M WBE Firm ID] Please see Tab "Attachment A" for a complete list of Current Projects List and Projects Completed within the last 10 years. Current Projects and Project Completed within the last 10 Years Project Owner I City of Lubbock I Project Name 1 3 Police Substations General Description of Project: tacn su sta ion is about 11,200 square- eet and win nave a community room Tor neignDomood watch meetings, community organization meetings an Project Cost 117,908,275 ($5,969,425/eachproject) I Date Project Completed September 2021 Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Cla on Brake• Josh Weel4is Travis Garrison Frank Call John Givens Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Darren Densford Sr. Construction PM City of Lubbock 806.392.3509 ddensford@mail.ci.lubbock. Designer Stephen Drewell Project Architect MWM Architects 806.745.7707 sdrewell@mwm-arch.com Construction Manager Jason Smith President Lee Lewis Construction 806.797.8400 jsmith@leelewis.com Project Owner I Ci of Lubbock Project Name I Municipal Courts Facility General Description of Project: Remodel of existing space to become Court Room with offices. Project Cost $4,415,200 1 Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Neil Easter; Tyler Brineyl Leighton Metzker Frank Call John Givens Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Darren Densford Sr. Project Manager City of Lubbock 306.392.3509 ddensford@mail.d.lubbock. Designer Randall Scott Founding Principal & CEO Randall Scott Architects 972.664.9100 rscott@rsarchitects.com Construction Manager Jason Smith President ee Lewis Construction 806.797.8400 jsmith@leelewis.com Project Owner I Cit of Lubbock Project Name Citizens Tower General Description of Project: enovation o an existing storytower, attached story structure, an adjacent o ice area ovate a ow on grade parking. Also included in scope Project Cost $46,235,751 Date Project Completed 5/1/2020 Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name I Josh Weems I Travis Garrison I Frank Call John Givens Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position I Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Wes Everrett Facilities Management City of Lubbock 806-775-2275 wesleye@betenbough.com Designer John Strasius Architect Perkins & Will 214-283 8700 john.strasius@perkinswill.c Construction Manager Jason Smith President I Lee Lewis Construction 806.797.8400 jsmith@leelewis.com Please see Tab "Attachment A" for a complete list of Current Projects List and Projects Completed within the last 10 years. x.us n 11 Attachment B Project Information Project Owner I Cit of Plainview I Project Name I Plainview Police Station General Description of Project Complete interior renovations of an existing 2 story building with basement BudgetProject Budget History Schedule Performance Amount % of Bid Amount Date Days Bid 2,720,000.00-275,334 credited to 50K Owner contingen" at Buyout Notice to Proceed 10/25/21 Change Orders -325 334.00 Contract Substantial Completion Date at Notice to Proceed 8/21/21 Owner Enhancements 5696954 Contract Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Not Specified Unforeseen Conditions 14 589.75 Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date 12 28 21 Design Issues 13 075.23 Change Order Authorized Final Completion Date Not Specified Total -240 699.48 Actual / Estimated Substantial Completion Date 12/28/21 Final Cost 2,479,300.52 Key Project Personnel Actual / Estimated Final Completion Date Project Manager Project Sup Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name David Clower Jimm Thompson Percentage of Time Devoted to the Project 50% o Proposed for this Project Yes Yes Did Individual Start and Complete the Project? Yes Yes If not, who started or completed the project in their place. Reason for change. Contact Information (listing names indicates approvalReference Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Jeffery Snyder City Manager City of Plainview 806-269-1100 jsnyder@plainviewtx.org Designer Justin Myers Partner Martinez Architects 281-346-7371 justinm@martinez-architects.com Construction Manager David Clower Project Manager Lee Lewis Constructio 806-300-3083 dclower@leelewis.com Surety LibertM Mutual Agent ResolvedIssues / Disputes or Pending Resolution by Arbitration, Litigation or Dispute Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Resolved Resolved Issues Howard Cowan 806-722-2663 marlahill@sbcglobal.net Review Boards Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Pendin Resolved Issues Attachment B Project Information Project Owner I CityofPlainview Project Name Plainview Fire Station General Description of Project New facility with apparatus bays BudgetProject Budget History Schedule Performance Amount % of Bid Amount Date Days Bid 4,600,00.00/ 162,042 credited to 50k OC at buyout Notice to Proceed 11 1/21 Change Orders -212 042.00 Contract Substantial Completion Date at Notice to Proceed 11/1/22 Owner Enhancements -7,498.00 Contract Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Not Specified Unforeseen Conditions Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date 2/28/23 Design Issues Change Order Authorized Final Completion Date 2/28/23 Total -219,540.00 Actual / Estimated Substantial Completion Date 2/28/23 Final Cost 4,380,460.00 Key Project Personnel Actual / Estimated Final Completion Date Project Manager Project Sup Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name David Clower Jimm Thompson Percentage of Time Devoted to the Project 50% 50% Proposed for this Project Yes Yes Did Individual Start and Complete the Project? Yes Yes If not, who started or completed the project in their place. Reason for change. formationReference Contact In Name .individuals Title/ Position as a reference) Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Jeffery Snyder City Manager City of Plainview 806-269-1100 jsnyder@plainviewtx.org Designer Justin Myers Partner Martinez Architects 281-346-7371 justinm@martinez-architects.com Construction Manager David Clower Project Manager Lee Lewis Construction 806-300-3083 dclower@leelewis.com Surely Howard Cowan Agent / Disputes Resolved or Pending Resolution by Arbitration, Litigation or Dispute Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Resolved Resolved Issues Lihprtv Mutual 806 722 2663 arlahill@sbc lobal.net BoardsIssues Review Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Pendin Resolved Issues Page Intentionally Left Blank SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE The Lubbock County Commissioner's Court desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 262.0275 of the Local Government Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on County contracts. Pursuant to Section 262.0275 of the Local Government Code, Lubbock County has adopted the following written definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a proposer prior to awarding proposals on County contracts. The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a proposer for this consideration shall be: Lubbock County shall consider the safety record of the offerors in determining the responsibility thereof. The County may consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of Lubbock County, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the County may consider, among other things: a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC), against the proposer for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years. b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. C. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in bodily harm or death. d. Any other safety related matter deemed by the Commissioners Court to be material in determining the responsibility of the offeror and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the proposal documents in a safe environment, both for the workers and other employees of offeror and the citizens of Lubbock County. In order to obtain proper information from offerors so that Lubbock County may consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on County contracts, Lubbock County requires that offerors answer the following four (4) questions and submit them with their proposals: QUESTION ONE Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of OSHA within the past three (3) years? YES NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number one above, the offeror must provide to Lubbock County, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. _ ��Offeror'slnitials QUESTION TWO s Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number two above, the offeror must provide to Lubbock County, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. OUESTION THREE Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted in serious bodily injury or death? YES NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number three above, the offeror must provide to Lubbock County, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION FOUR Provide your company's Experience Modification Rate and supporting information: .88 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK 1 certify that 1 have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my statements and answers to questions. 1 am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire will be investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my proposal to be rejected. Z '�'`=' Signature Title NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS LUBBOCK COUNTY being first duly sworn, on his/her oath, says that the bid above submitted is a genuine and not a sham or collusive bid, or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named; and s/he further says that the said respondent has not directly induced or solicited any firm on the above work or supplies to put in a sham, or any other person or corporation to refrain from a statement of qualifications; and that said firm has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to self an advantage over any other firm or firms. Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Firm Ryan Lewis Name Signature Coo Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 2621 Z023 Notary Public My Commission Expires: JUDY WARD Notary Public, State of Texas Notary IN 416122-1 (C) My Commission Expires 07-15-2023 NOTE: THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND INCLUDED IN WITH THE SUBMISSION Page Intentionally Left Blank Company Name 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Location Services Provided Minority Owned Yes No ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED ALONG WITH YOUR RESPONSE IF NO SUB -CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO SUBMITTED BY: (PRINT NAME OF COMPANY) Page Intentionally Left Blank POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS The below -listed document must be received in the Purchasing and Contract Management Office Not Later Than SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS after the close date when responses are due. FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Pate Intentionally Left Blank FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Minority Owned Company Name Location Services Provided Yes No 1. ° ° 2. ° ° 3. ° ° 4. ° ° 5. ° ° 6. ° ° 7. ° ° 8. ° ° 9. ° ° 10. ° ° 11. 12. 13. ° ° 14. ° ° 15. ° ° 16. ° ° SUBMITTED BY: (PRINT NAME OF COMPANY) THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED NOT LATER THAN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER THE CLOSE DATE WHEN RESPONSES ARE DUE IF NO SUB -CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO Page Intentionally Left Blank PAYMENT BOND Page Intentionally Left Blank STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $50,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Lee Lewis Construction (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Eight Million One Hundred One Thousand Seven Hundred Dollars ($8,101,700.00) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated IIth day of April, 2023, to RFP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this day of Surety *By: (Title) 2023. (Company Name) By: (Printed Name) (Signature) (Title) Page Intentionally Left Blank The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Surety * By: Approved as to form: City of Lubbock By: City Attorney (Title) * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. Page Intentionally Left Blank PERFORMANCE BOND Pate Intentionally Left Blank STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Lee Lewis Construction (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Eight Million One Hundred One Thousand Seven Hundred Dollars ($8,101,700.00) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated 11th day of April, 2023, to RFP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this day of , 2023. Surety * By: (Title) (Company Name) By: (Printed Name) (Signature) (Title) Page Intentionally Left Blank The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Surety *By: (Title) Approved as to Form City of Lubbock By: City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. Page Intentionally Left Blank CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Page Intentionally Left Blank CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE: P.O. BOX 2000, Room 204 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions f the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY ❑ Commercial General Liability General Aggregate $ ❑ Claims Made Products-Comp/Op AGG $ ❑ Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury $ ❑ Owner's & Contractors Protective Each Occurrence $ ❑ Fire Damage (Any one Fire) $ Med Exp (Any one Person) $ AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY ❑ Any Auto Combined Single Limit $ ❑ All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Person) $ ❑ Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $ ❑ Hired Autos Property Damage $ ❑ Non -Owned Autos GARAGE LIABILITY ❑ Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident $ ❑ Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ ❑ BUILDER'S RISK ❑ 100% of the Total Contract Price $ ❑ INSTALLATIONFLOATER $ EXCESS LIABILITY ❑ Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ ❑ Other Than Umbrella Form $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY The Proprietor/ ❑ Included Statutory Limits Partners/Executive ❑ Excluded Each Accident $ Officers are: Disease Policy Limit $ Disease -Each Employee $ OTHER The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK (Name of Insurer) By: Title: The Insurance Certificates Furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as Additional Insured on Auto General Liability and provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Lubbock. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. CONTRACTORCHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS ADDITIONAL INSURED ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCTS OF COMPLETE OPERATIONS. PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. COPIES OF THE ENDORSEMENTS ARE REQUIRED. REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-305-7238 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (D) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (F) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (G) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. Page Intentionally Left Blank CONTRACT Pate Intentionally Left Blank Contract 17114 STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 251' day of April, 2023 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Lee Lewis Construction of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: RFP 23-17114-KM Construction of City of Lubbock Crime Lab & Evidence Warehouse and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. Lee Lewis Construction's proposal dated March 7, 2023, is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. CONTRACTOR: CITY OF LPBK, TEXAS (OWNER): Lee Lewis Construction By: By: T PRINTED ME: 1•( Ytit� TITLE: �t S I Y��lJ COMPLETE ADDRESS: Lee Lewis Construction 7810 Orlando Ave Lubbock, TX 79423 4 T �•'' C2 9G { m 0 z j0. ATTEST: Corporate Secretary rtney Paz, City APPROVED AS TqZ ONDTI FINT: P lic Works Representative Name (Printed) Date lKeLeVisure., ROED A TO FORM. M t Assistant City Attorney Page Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT Page Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit Lee, Lewis Construction who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative Darren Densford, City Architect, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Offerors, General Instructions to Offerors, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to Offeror for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s). WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. it. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished ten copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES The Contractor is responsible for construction layout based on the control provided in the construction documents. All lines and grades shall be furnished whenever Owner's Representative (as distinguished from Resident Project Representative(s)) deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative (as distinguished from Resident Project Representative(s))has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors, as distinguished from Resident Project Representative, as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any person or persons on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such person or persons shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of workers or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. P-11I 1Y_1►101111M[o]►I Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Contractor is responsible for construction quality control testing, cost, and reporting of the type and extent required by the contract documents. The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor ftom its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations in Paragraph 23. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the observation of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent to the firm actually performing the work, and additional higher -tier markups limited to 5% to cover additional overhead and insurance costs; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work, as estimated by the Engineer and approved by the Owner.. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. In the absence of a requested clarification for a conflict in the documents prior to proposals being reviewed, it will be assumed that the Contractor proposes the higher cost alternative on conflicts identified after proposals are reviewed. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS ADDITIONAL INSURED ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCTS OF COMPLETE OPERATIONS. PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. COPIES OF THE ENDORSEMENTS ARE REQUIRED. A. Commercial General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and $1,000,000 per occurrence to include: Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Personal Injury & Advertising Injury Med Exp (Any one Person) w/Heavy Equipment XCU B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance — NOT REQUIRED C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit per occurrence, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. — Builder's Risk Insurance is needed for this project, and at a minimum, the insurance should cover the full insurable value of the improvements. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $4,000,000 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverage's. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $1,000,000 G. Unmanned Aircraft Liability Requirements: $1,000,000 occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate coverage is needed for this project. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does G not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the proposal specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30-point bold type and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 800-372-7713 or 512-804-4000 (www.tdi.state.t .us) to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner and Engineer, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to offering. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to proposing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising there from. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the Notice to Proceed and contract documents, respectively, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $1,000 PER CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to Finally complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $1,000 PER CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall fail to meet the time requirements stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction. The Contractor shall ensure daily prosecution of the work is conducted every business day until completed, regardless if the work will be substantially or finally complete ahead of specified deadlines in the agreement, unless the City determines time off from said prosecution is necessary or reasonable and Contractor received said determination in writing from the City. Further, when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative (as distinguished from the Resident Project Representative) may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. Additionally, inclement weather shall be the only other reason consistent, daily prosecution of the work may not take place on those inclement weather days. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than within twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workers, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project, provided that the over run or under run of estimated quantities not exceed 15% of the estimated quantity. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner and Engineer, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK hi consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less: (i) in the event the total value of the contract is five million dollars or more, 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents; or (ii) in the event the total value of the contract is less than five million dollars, 10% or less, of the amount thereof, which percentage shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents ("Retainage"). If Contractor engages a sub -contractor to perform all or part of Contractor's work under the contract, the Contractor shall not withhold a greater percentage of Retainage than the percentage set out in in this section pertaining to the Contractor. Contractor shall likewise require any subcontractor it engages to comply with section 2252.032 of the Texas Government Code. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. The work will be deemed substantially complete when the work (or a specified portion thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of the Owner or Owner's Representative, the work (or a specified portion thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with all the contract documents, including the Proposal and all applicable technical specifications, so that the work (or a specified portion thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended without unscheduled disruption. Owner may, in its sole discretion, release all or a portion of the Retainage upon Owner's receipt of the certificate of substantial completion for all of the work or a specified portion thereof. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. Owner may, in its sole discretion, release all or a portion of the Retainage for fully completed and accepted portions of the work. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner may withhold the Retainage if there is a bona fide dispute between Owner and Contractor according to section 2252.032(f) of the Texas Government Code. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time but not to exceed 30 days after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall pay all claims, cost, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of the engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution cost) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed, (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims, (c) Damage to another contractor, (d) Notification to owner of failure to make payments to Subcontractors or Suppliers, (e) Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required, (f) Failure to submit monthly progress schedule updates or revised scheduled as requested by Owner, (g) Failure to provide Project photographs required by Specifications. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of persons and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed proposals, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by a Surety Company listed on the State Treasury's "Approved" list and authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 56. NONAPPROPRIATION All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination. 57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT At any time during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the event such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the full amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor. 58. NON -ARBITRATION The City reserves the right to exercise any right or remedy available to it by law, contract, equity, or otherwise, including without limitation, the right to seek any and all forms of relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. Further, the City shall not be subject to any arbitration process prior to exercising its unrestricted right to seek judicial remedy. The remedies set forth herein are cumulative and not exclusive, and may be exercised concurrently. To the extent of any conflict between this provision and another provision in, or related to, this document, this provision shall control. 59. CONTRACTOR ACKNOWLEDGES Contractor acknowledges by supplying any Goods or Services that the Contractor has read, fully understands, and will be in full compliance with all terms and conditions and the descriptive material contained herein and any additional associated documents and Amendments. The City disclaims any terms and conditions provided by the Contractor unless agreed upon in writing by the parties. In the event of conflict between these terms and conditions and any terms and conditions provided by the Contractor, the terms and conditions provided herein shall prevail. The terms and conditions provided herein are the final terms agreed upon by the parties, and any prior conflicting terms shall be of no force or effect. 60. LABOR CODE CHAPTER 214 Sec. 214.008. MISCLASSIFICATION OF CERTAIN WORKERS; PENALTY. (a) A person who contracts with a governmental entity to provide a service as defined by Section 2155.001, Government Code, shall properly classify, as an employee or independent contractor in accordance with Chapter 201, any individual the person directly retains and compensates for services performed in connection with the contract. (b) In this subsection, "subcontractor" means a person directly retained and compensated by a person who contracts with a governmental entity to provide a service as defined by Section 2155.001, Government Code. A subcontractor shall properly classify, as an employee or independent contractor in accordance with Chapter 201, any individual the subcontractor directly retains and compensates for services performed in connection with the contract for which the subcontractor is retained. (c) A person who fails to properly classify an individual as required by Subsection (a) or (b) shall pay to the commission a penalty equal to $200 for each individual that the person has not properly classified. (d) The commission may not take action to collect a penalty under this section from a person after the third anniversary of the date on which the violation occurred. 61. CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES House Bill 1295, adopted by the 84th Legislature, created §2252.908, Texas Government Code. Section 2252.908 requires a business entity entering into certain contracts with a governmental entity or state agency to file with the governmental entity or state agency a disclosure of interested parties at the time the business entity submits the signed contract to the governmental entity or state agency. Section 2252.908 requires the disclosure form to be signed by the authorized agent of the contracting business entity, acknowledging that the disclosure is made under oath and under penalty of perjury. Section 2252.908 applies only to a contract that requires an action or vote by the governing body of the governmental entity or state agency before the contract may be signed or has a value of at least $1 million. Instructions for completing Form 1295 are available at: hgps:Hci.lubbock.tx.us/departments/purchasing/vendor-information 62. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 2252.152 Contracts with Companies Engaged in Business with Iran, Sudan, or Foreign Terrorist Organization Prohibited. Pursuant to Section 2252.152 of the Texas Government Code, prohibits the City from entering into a contract with a vendor that is identified by The Comptroller as a company known to have contracts with or provide supplies or service with Iran, Sudan or a foreign terrorist organization. 63. TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 2271.002 Pursuant to Section 2271.002 of the Texas Government Code, a) This section applies only to a contract that: (1) is between a governmental entity and a company with 10 or more full-time employees; and (2) has a value of $100,000 or more that is to be paid wholly or partly from public funds of the governmental entity. (b) A governmental entity may not enter into a contract with a company for goods or services unless the contract contains a written verification from the company that it: (1) does not boycott Israel; and (2) will not boycott Israel during the term of the contract. 64. CONTRACTOR ACKNOWLEDGES Contractor Acknowledges by supplying any Goods or Services that the Contractor has read, fully understands, and will be in full compliance with all terms and conditions and the descriptive material contained herein and any additional associated documents and Amendments. The City disclaims any terms and conditions provided by the Contractor unless agreed upon in writing by the parties. In the event of conflict between these terms and conditions and any terms and conditions provided by the Contractor, the terms and conditions provided herein shall prevail. The terms and conditions provided herein are the final terms agreed upon by the parties, and any prior conflicting terms shall be of no force or effect. 65. TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract and the contractor or vendor agrees that the contract can be terminated if the contractor or vendor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. To the extent Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code applies to this agreement, Contractor agrees to: (1) preserve all contracting information related to the contract as provided by the records retention requirements applicable to the governmental body for the duration of the contract; (2) promptly provide to the governmental body any contracting information related to the contract that is in the custody or possession of the entity on request of the governmental body; and (3) on completion of the contract, either: (A) provide at no cost to the governmental body all contracting information related to the contract that is in the custody or possession of the entity; or (B) preserve the contracting information related to the contract as provided by the records retention requirements applicable to the governmental body. 66. CONFIDENTIALITY The Contractor shall retain all information received from or concerning the City and the City's business in strictest confidence and shall not reveal such information to third parties without prior written consent of the City, unless otherwise required by law. 67. INDEMNITY The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the city of Lubbock and its elected officials, officers, agents, and employees from all suits, actions, losses, damages, claims, or liability of any kind, character, type, or description, including without limiting the generality of the foregoing, all expenses of litigation, court costs, and attorney's fees, for injury or death to any person, or injury to any property, received or sustained by any person or persons or property, to the extent arising out of, related to or occasioned by, the negligent acts of the Contractor, its agents, employees, and/or subcontractors, related to the performance, operations or omissions under this agreement and/or the use or occupation of city owned property. The indemnity obligation provided herein shall survive the expiration or termination of this agreement. 68. PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY All architectural or engineering services to be performed shall be done with the professional skill and care ordinarily provided by competent architects or engineers practicing under the same or similar circumstances and professional license. 69. TEXAS SENATE BILL 219 SUBCHAPTER B ITEMS B AND C (b) A contractor must, within a reasonable time of learning of a defect, inaccuracy, inadequacy, or insufficiency in the plans, specifications, or other design documents, disclose in writing to the person with whom the contractor enters into a contract the existence of any known defect in the plans, specifications, or other design documents that is discovered by the contractor, or that reasonably should have been discovered by the contractor using diligence, before or during construction. In this subsection, ordinary diligence means the observations of the plans, specifications, or other design documents or the improvement to real property that a contractor would make in the reasonable preparation of a bid or fulfillment of its scope of work under normal circumstances. Ordinary diligence does not require that the contractor engage a person licensed or registered under Title 6, Occupations Code, or any other person with specialized skills. A disclosure under this subsection is made in the contractor's capacity as contractor and not as a licensed professional under Title 6, Occupations Code. (c) A contractor who fails to disclose a defect as required by Subsection (b) may be liable for the consequences of defects that result from the failure to disclose. DAVIS BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS EXHIBIT A Page Intentionally Left Blank "General Decision Number: TX20220280 10/14/2022 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20210280 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Crosby and Lubbock Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis -Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis -Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). If the contract is entered . Executive Order 14026 into on or after January 30, generally applies to the 2022, or the contract is contract. renewed or extended (e.g., an 1. The contractor must pay option is exercised) on or all covered workers at after January 30, 2022: least $15.00 per hour (or I I the applicable wage rate I I I listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours I I I spent performing on the I I contract in 2022. I I If the contract was awarded on 1. Executive Order 13658 I I or between January 1, 2015 and I generally applies to the (January 29, 2022, and the I contract. I I contract is not renewed or I . The contractor must pay all I I extended on or after January I covered workers at least I 130, 2022: I $11.25 per hour (or the I I applicable wage rate listed I I I on this wage determination, I I if it is higher) for all I I I hours spent performing on I I I that contract in 2022. I The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at https://www.doI.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/07/2022 1 02/25/2022 2 03/25/2022 3 08/05/2022 4 10/14/2022 BOI L0074-003 01/01/2021 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER ...................... $ 29.47 24.10 CARP0665-00101/01/2022 Rates Fringes CARPENTER ........................ $ 24.98 7.83 * ELEC0602-008 09/01/2022 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN ...................... $ 26.07 12.63 ENG10178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1) Tower Crane ............. $ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above ..... $ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under .............. $ 32.35 13.10 IRON 0084-01106/01/2022 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL ........... $ 26.76 7.88 IRON0263-003 06/01/2022 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL ........... $ 27.14 7.68 PLUM 0404-001 09/01/2020 Rates Fringes PLUMBER .......................... $ 26.05 8.81 SH E E0049-00104/01/2019 Rates Fringes SHEET METALWORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only) ............... $ 21.73 14.94 * SUTX2014-060 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER ....................... $ 20.04 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER ... $ 19.60 0.00 INSULATOR - MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation) ............... $ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING .......... $ 12.27 ** 0.00 LABORER: Common or General ...... $ 12.35 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick ... $ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff........... $ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe....... $ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader ................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer ............. $ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill ................. $ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift ..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade .......... $ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader ................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic .............. $ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete) ......... $ 16.03 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller ................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 PAINTER (Brush, Roller, and Spray) ...........................$ 14.27 ** 0.00 ROOFER ...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METALWORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation ........... $ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER ....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER ......................$ 14.00 ** 2.01 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck ........ $ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck ..... $ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi -Trailer Truck ............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck ....... $ 12.00 ** 4.11 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($15.00) or 13658 ($11.25). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health -related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health -related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non -union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISIO" EXHIBITS B & C City of Lubbock Overtime Legal Holiday Prevailing Wage Rates The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. SPECIFICATIONS Page Intentionally Left Blank PROJECT MANUAL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PUBLIC SAFETY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY LUBBOCK, TEXAS CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PROJECT NO. 92551 DATE 11/11/2022 PARKHILL 4222 Street Parkhill Lubbock, Texasxas 79423 T: 806.473.3616 / F: 806.473.3500 CITY OF LUBBOCK - FACILITIES MANAGEMENT 0 - Citizens Tower, 4th Floor Cit of P.O. Box 2000 1 1314 Avenue K Y Lubbock, Texas 79457 Lubbock T: 806.775.2368 1 F: 806.775.3267 DOCUMENT 00 0107 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT DOCUMENT 00 0107 — PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD A. Architect: Responsible for divisions 01-33 sections except where indicated as prepared by other design professionals of record. City of Lubbock - Facilities Management Darren J. Densford, A.I.A. License #26619 1314 Avenue K Lubbock, Texas 79457 SEAL 11/11/2022 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 00 01 07 - 1 PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 000107 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT C. Civil Engineer: The division sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 0157 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 0157 19 Temporary Environmental Controls DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS 0241 13 Selective Site Demolition DIVISION 31: EARTHWORK 31 1000 Site Clearing 31 23 00 Excavation and Fill 31 23 00.10 Excavation and Fill for Utilities 3131 16 Termite Control DIVISION 32: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1150 Flexible Base Course 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 1373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 1723 Pavement Markings DIVISION 33: UTILITIES 33 05 00 Common Work Results for Utilities 33 05 13 Manholes and Structures 33 1200 Water Utility Distribution Equipment 33 1300 Disinfection of Water Utility Distribution 33 31 00.10 Sanitary and Storm Utility Sewerage Piping Parkhill Alan Holly, P.E. License #94792 4222 85th Street Lubbock, Texas 79423 SEAL a f ••AI.AN•L. w4LL� ..Z.................... t,-A. 94792 11/11/2022 16 00 01 07 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 00 0107 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT D. Landscape Architect: The division sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: DIVISION 05: METALS 0575 13 Decorative Perforated Panels DIVISION 32: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 84 00 Planting Irrigation 3291 13 Soil Preparation 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 32 93 00 Exterior Plants Parkhill Brent Clifford, R.L.A. License #2428 4222 85th Street Lubbock, Texas 79423 SEAL V,NDSGppE �`X0'A. Q;*14 242$ F••.....•• �F. OF 11/11/2022 00 01 07 - 3 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 000107 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT E. Interior Designer: The division sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: DIVISION 09: FINISHES 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 09 54 26 Suspended Wood Ceilings 0965 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 0968 13 Tile Carpeting 09 77 00 Fiberglass Reinforced Panels and Corner Guards 09 84 11 Wall Mounted Acoustic Panels 09 91 23 Interior Painting 09 93 00 Staining and Transparent Finish DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 10 1423.13 Room -Identification Signage 1021 13.17 Toilet Compartments DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 12 34 50 Laboratory Countertops, Sinks and Pegboards 12 35 53.19 Wood Laboratory Casework 12 36 61.19 Quartz Agglomerate Countertops SEAL Parkhill Britni Nicole Wilkens, R.I.D. License #10504 4222 85th Street Lubbock, Texas 79423 00 01 07 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 00 0107 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT F. Structural Engineer: The division sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: DIVISION 03: CONCRETE 03 1000 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 11 19 Insulating Concrete Forming (ICF) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION 05: METALS 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking DIVISION 31: EARTHWORK 31 20 00 Earth Moving Parkhill Zach Lindauer, P.E. License #120549 4222 85th Street Lubbock, Texas 79423 SEAL COOP OF #1 zr 4 CHARY F. L114DAVER ..... .....«..� r a 120549 11/11/2022 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 000107-5 DOCUMENT 000107 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT G. Mechanical Engineer: The division sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: DIVISION 21: FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 Fire Protection Sprinkler System 21 22 00 FM-200 System DIVISION 22: PLUMBING 22 00 00 Plumbing Systems DIVISION 23: HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 23 30 00 Piping and Accessories 23 40 00 Air Distribution 23 50 00 Hangers and Supports 23 55 00 Marking and Identification 23 60 00 Insulation 23 70 00 Equipment 23 80 00 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems 23 90 00 Direct Digital Control System for HVAC SEAL Fanning, Fanning & Associates, Inc. Scott M. Fanning, P.E. License #61441 2555 74th Street Lubbock, Texas 79423 SCOTT M. FANNING j ,�•:.......61441......:.�i �I1�cc /CENS�� w- 11/11/2 22 Fanning, Fanning & Associates, Inc. Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-00294 2555 74`h Street Lubbock,Texas 79423 Tel 806.745.2533 Fax 806.745.3596 www.fanningfanning.com 00 01 07 - 6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 00 0107 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT H. Electrical Engineer: The division sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL 260100 Basic Electrical Requirements 2605 18 Wires and Cables 26 05 25 Grounding and Bonding 26 05 32 Raceways 26 05 34 Boxes 26 05 52 Electrical Identification 26 05 73 Arc -Flash Hazard Analysis 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 2628 15 Safety Switches 2632 13 Emergency Power Generation and Control 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switch and Controls 26 51 00 Lighting DIVISION 28: ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 35 25 Digital Addressable Voice Evacuation Fire -Alarm System Fanning, Fanning & Associates, Inc. Allen K. Ware, P.E. License #130686 2555 74th Street Lubbock, Texas 79423 Fanning, Fanning & Associates, Inc. Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-00294 2555 74" Street Lubbock,Texas 79423 Tel 806.745.2533 Fax 806.745.3596 www.fanningfanninpcom SEAL .AS ��` �1� iI E OF T Figs t� *: !V tv . :* ALLEN K. WARE � � .... ..� 130686 :95 "`NI I)/ONAL t-` = 11/11/2022 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 00 01 07 - 7 PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 000107 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT I. Communications Distribution Designer: The division sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following: DIVISION 27: COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 Communications 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 27 11 00 Communications Room Fittings 27 1500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 2741 16 Audiovisual Systems 2741 17 Audiovisual Infrastructure DIVISION 28: ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 00 00 Electronic Security 28 1000 Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 28 26 00 Emergency Intercommunications and Duress 28 50 00 Life Safety Two -Way Radio Distribution System SEAL Datacom Design Group John Rob Hicks, R.C.D.D. BICSI ID #200774 9111 Jollyville Road, Suite 290 Austin, Texas 78759 END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 07 00 01 07 - 8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT PROJECT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and SPECIFICATIONS for: Public Safety IMprovements Project Forensic / Property Facility Project #92551 Lubbock, Texas Design Professional: City of Lubbock - Facilities Management Darren J. Densford, A.I.A. 1314 Avenue K Lubbock, Texas 79457 ddensfordkM lubbock.us Phone 806.775.2368 / Fax 806.775.3267 Consulting Parkhill Design Professional 4222 85th Street Lubbock, Texas 79423 Phone 806.473.3629 / Fax 806.473.3500 Project Manager: City of Lubbock — Facilities Management Tim Key P.O. Box 2000, Room 418 1314 Avenue K Lubbock, Texas 79457 tkeykMlubbock.us Phone 806.775.3078 / Fax 806-775-3267 Procurement Office: City of Lubbock — Purchasing & Contract Management Marta Alvarez - Director P.O. Box 2000, Room 921 1314 Avenue K Lubbock, Texas 79457 malvarezkglylubbock.us Phone 806.775.2572 / Fax 806.775.2572 DOCUMENT 00 0110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS INTR OD UCT OR Y INFOR MA TION NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 00 01 01 Project Title Page 1 00 01 07 Professional Certifications — Seals Page 8 0001 10 Table of Contents 5 0001 15 List of Drawing Sheets 1 DIVISION 00: PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REOUIREMENTS NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 00 10 00 Proposal Submittal Form 4 00 90 23 Geotechnical Data 42 DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 01 1000 Summary 4 01 21 00 Allowances 3 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0001 10 - PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT 01 22 00 Unit Prices 2 01 23 00 Alternates 1 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 3 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 2 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 4 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 7 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 2 013300 Submittal Procedures 7 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 7 01 42 00 References 7 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 8 0157 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 2 0157 19 Temporary Environmental Controls 4 01 60 00 Product Requirements 5 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 5 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 6 DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 0241 13 Selective Site Demolition 2 DIVISION 03: CONCRETE NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 03 1000 Concrete Forming and Accessories 5 03 11 19 Insulating Concrete Forming (ICF) 9 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 3 03 30 00 Cast -in -Place Concrete 16 03 35 43 Polished Concrete Finishing 3 DIVISION 04: MASONRY NUMBER 04 20 00 DIVISION 05: METALS DESCRIPTION Unit Masonry NO. OF PAGES 11 NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 7 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 4 05 31 00 Steel Decking 4 05 40 00 Cold -Formed Metal Framing 5 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 4 0551 13 Metal Pan Stairs 6 0552 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 4 0575 13 Decorative Perforated Panels 3 DIVISION 06: WOOD. PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 3 06 16 00 Sheathing 3 0641 16 Plastic -Laminate -Clad Architectural Cabinets 5 06 67 10 Bullet -Resistant Fiberglass Panels 2 0001 10 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 07: 100% Construction Documents THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 3 07 27 26 Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers 6 0742 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 6 07 54 23 Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 7 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 7 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 4 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 10 0792 19 Acoustical Joint Sealants 3 DIVISION 08: OPENINGS NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 6 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors 4 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 5 0841 13 Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts 6 08 56 59 Service and Teller Window Units 3 08 71 00 Door Hardware 10 08 80 00 Glazing 6 08 87 33 Decorative Films 3 DIVISION 09: FINISHES NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 09 22 16 Non -Structural Metal Framing 4 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 7 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 5 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 3 09 54 26 Suspended Wood Ceilings 3 0965 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 3 0968 13 Tile Carpeting 5 09 77 00 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels and Corner Guards 4 09 84 11 Wall Mounted Acoustic Panels 2 0991 13 Exterior Painting 4 09 91 23 Interior Painting 6 09 93 00 Staining and Transparent Finishing 3 DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 4 10 14 23.13 Room -Identification Signage 3 1021 13.17 Toilet Compartments 3 10 22 19 Demountable Partitions 3 1028 13 Toilet Accessories 5 10 43 00.70 Emergency Aid Specialties 2 10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets 3 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers 2 1051 13 Metal Lockers 5 10 56 26 Mobile Storage Shelving Units 7 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0001 10-3 PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT DIVISION 11: EOUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 5 12 34 50 Laboratory Countertops, Sinks and Pegboards 7 12 35 53.19 Wood Laboratory Casework 5 12 36 61.19 Quartz Agglomerate Countertops 2 DIVISION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 14 DIVISION 14: CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 21: FIRE SUPPRESSION NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 21 00 00 Fire Protection Sprinkler System 6 21 22 00 FM-200 System 5 DIVISION 22: PLUMBING NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 22 00 00 Plumbing Systems 4 DIVISION 23: HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 23 00 00 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical 11 23 30 00 Piping and Accessories 5 23 40 00 Air Distribution 5 23 50 00 Hangers and Supports 3 23 55 00 Marking and Identification 3 23 60 00 Insulation 3 23 70 00 Equipment 16 23 80 00 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems 2 23 90 00 Direct Digital Control System for HVAC 34 DIVISION 25: INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (NOT USED) DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 26 01 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 4 2605 18 Wires and Cables 4 26 05 25 Grounding and Bonding 5 26 05 32 Raceways 6 26 05 34 Boxes 2 26 05 52 Electrical Identification 3 26 05 73 Arc -Flash Hazard Analysis 5 26 24 16 Panelboards 4 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 3 2628 15 Safety Switches 3 2632 13 Emergency Power Generation and Control 6 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switch and Controls 2 26 51 00 Lighting 3 0001 10 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT DIVISION 27: COMMUNICATIONS NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 27 00 00 Communications 15 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 6 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 6 27 11 00 Communications Room Fittings 4 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 10 2741 16 Audiovisual Systems 14 2741 17 Audiovisual Infrastructure 4 DIVISION 28: ELECTRONIC SAFETYAND SECURITY NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 28 00 00 Electronic Security 12 28 10 00 Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection 6 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 6 28 26 00 Emergency Intercommunications and Duress 4 28 35 25 Digital Addressable Voice Evacuation Fire -Alarm System 7 28 50 00 Life Safety Two -Way Radio Distribution System 7 DIVISION 31: EARTHWORK NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 31 1000 Site Clearing 2 31 20 00 Earth Moving 5 31 23 00.00 Excavation and Fill 4 31 23 00.10 Excavation and Fill for Utilities 5 31 31 16 Termite Control 2 DIVISION 32: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 32 1150 Flexible Base Course 3 3212 16 Asphalt Paving 8 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 1 l 32 1373 Concrete Paving Joints Sealants 4 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 2 32 84 00 Planting Irrigation 1 1 3291 13 Soil Preparation 5 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 6 32 93 00 Exterior Plants 4 DIVISION 33: UTILITIES NUMBER DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES 33 05 00 Common Work Results for Utilities 1 3305 13 Manholes and Structures 2 33 1200 Water Utility Distribution Equipment 5 33 1300 Disinfection of Water Utility Distribution Equipment 2 33 31 00.10 Sanitary and Storm Utility Sewerage Piping 3 END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0001 10-5 PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 00 0115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 100% Construction Documents —ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT DOCUMENT 00 01 15 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY, dated November 11, 2022, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications. END OF DOCUMENT 00 0115 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0001 l 5 - l PROJECT #92551 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM LUMP SUM PRICE PROPOSAL CONTRACT DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: RFP 23-17114-MA Police Department Forensic / Property Facility PROPOSAL OF (hereinafter called Offeror) TO: The Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for the Police Department Forensic / Property Facility having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors, notice to offerors and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. BASE PROPOSAL Dollars (Write out Amount) (Amount in Numbers) The above Base Proposal price is divided into: $ Dollars for Materials incorporated into the Work and Dollars for Labor and any Materials not incorporated into the Work. This separation of the contract price into Materials and Labor is required in order for the successful Offeror to be able to purchase free of state sales tax the materials to be incorporated into the Work. The successful Offeror will be required to submit similar information for any Alternates accepted by the City of Lubbock. AMOUNTS INCLUDED IN BASE PROPOSAL The Offeror provides the following additional information that will be made a part of the contract with Texas Tech: 1) Overhead and Profit included in the Base Proposal: 2) General Conditions included in the Base Proposal: 3) Owner Contingency Allowance included in the Base Proposal 4) Special Inspections Allowance included in the Base Proposal 5) Unit Cost Door Hardware Allowance included in the Base Proposal $ 300,000.00 $ 10,000.00 $ 2,500.00 / Door FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 00 10 00 - l PROJECT #92551 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM ADD or DEDUCT ALTERNATE PROPOSAL ITEM: The following prices are for Add/Deduct Alternate Proposal Item(s), as clearly and separately identified on the Drawings and/or in the Specifications. The Offeror shall clearly indicate if this price is to be Added or Deducted from the Base Proposal by placing an "X" in the box next to the "Add" or "Deduct" before the written price. The Offeror agrees to hold this price for a period of not less than 60 days from the date of contract award. Do not include this time period in the construction duration included in this proposal. ALTERNATE NO.1: Furnish and install all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide asphalt paving in lieu of concrete paving. Add ❑ Deduct ❑ (Write out Amount) Dollars ($ ) (Amount in Numbers) The above Alternate Proposal price is divided into: $ Dollars for Materials incorporated into the Work and $ Dollars for Labor and any Materials not incorporated into the Work. UNIT PRICES: The following amounts are for Unit Price Proposal Item(s), as clearly and separately identified on the Drawings and/or in the Specifications. The Offeror agrees the amounts are incorporated into the Agreement and applicable during the duration of the Work.as per Section 0122 00 "Unit Prices". ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT Unit Price No. 1 a Fencing - Wrought Iron $ / LF Unit Price No. lb Fencing - Decorative $ / LF Unit Price No. 2a Concrete - Curb & Gutter $ / LF Unit Price No. 2b Concrete - Sidewalk $ / LF Unit Price No. 3a Pavement - Asphalt $ / SF Unit Price No. 3b Pavement - Concrete $ / SF Unit Price No. 4a Utilities — Electrical Secondary $ / LF Unit Price No. 4b Utilities — Water Line $ / LF Unit Price No. 4c Utilities — Sewer Line $ / LF Unit Price No. 4d Utilities — Fire Line $ / LF Unit Price No. 4e Utilities — Gas Line $ / LF Unit Price No. 5a Metal Panel Systems - Aluminum Composite Metal Panel $ / SF FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 00 10 00 - 2 PROJECT #92551 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM Unit Price No. 5b Metal Panel Systems - PEMB Rib Panel $ / SF Unit Price No. 6a Misc. & Structural Steel — Fabrication & Delivery $ / Ton Unit Price No. 6b Misc. & Structural Steel — Steel Erection $ / Ton Unit Price No. 6c Misc. & Structural Steel — Detailing & Drafting $ / Man Hour PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION DURATION: The Offeror agrees to complete all work shown in the Contract Documents for the base proposal in consecutive calendar days from the date of Notice to Proceed. Total Consecutive Calendar Days: (to Substantial Completion) Total Consecutive Calendar Days: (to Final Completion) (Not to exceed 450 consecutive calendar days to Substantial Completion and 480 consecutive calendar days to Final Completion.) Offeror hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 450 Consecutive Calendar Days with final completion within 480 Consecutive Calendar Days as stipulated in the specification and other contract documents. Offeror hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages in the sum of $1,000 for each consecutive calendar day after substantial completion and liquidated damages in the sum of $1,000 for each consecutive calendar day after final completion set forth here in above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the General Conditions of the Agreement. Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted inaccordance with instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Offerors. Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the proposing. The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Offerer hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Offerers are required , whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offerer will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Offerer's Initials FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 00 10 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ), or a Proposal Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. Date: Authorized Signature (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City County State Zip Code Offeror acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Telephone: Addenda No. Date Fax: Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date M/WBE Firm: Email: FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. Woman Black American Native American Hispanic American Asian Pacific American Other (Specify) FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 00 10 00 - 4 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 00 90 23 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 00 90 23 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 INFORMATION A. Geotechnical Data: 1. An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the building site was authorized by Owner, and these investigations were made by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. 5847 50' Street Lubbock, Texas 79424 806.300.0140 2. The entire report is bound at the end of this Section. 3. The report is available for Contractor's information but is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY A. Proposers are expected to examine the geotechnical data reports and then determine for themselves the validity of the information contained there -in as it relates to this Project. B. Architect and Owner do not guarantee continuity of conditions indicated at boring locations and assume no responsibility for variations of subsoil quality or conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 00 90 23 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 00 90 23 - l PROJECT #92551 Irerracon GeoReport Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 Prepared for: City of Lubbock Lubbock, Texas Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Attn: Mr. Wesley Everett — Director of Facilities Management P: (806) 775-2275 E: weverett@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock,Texas Terracon Project No. AR195034 Dear Mr. Everett: We have completed the Geotechnical Engineering services for the above referenced project. This study was performed in general accordance with Terracon Proposal No. PAR195034 dated October 28, 2019. This report presents the findings of the subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical recommendations concerning earthwork and the design and construction of foundations, floor slabs and pavements for the proposed project. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. If you have any questions concerning this report or if we may be of further service, please contact us. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. Texas Registration #3272 �*^— Rahul Muduganti, E.I.T. Staff Engineer Reviewed by Gregory J. Klein, P.E. - Principal rlo2b.3,S Je yson, P.E. Geotechnical Department Manager Terracon Consultants, Inc. 5847 50th Street Lubbock, Texas 79424 P (806) 300 0140 F (806) 797 0947 terracon.com Geotechnical Engineering Report 1rerracon Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 GeoReport. REPORT TOPICS REPORTSUMMARY....................................................................................................... INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................1 SITECONDITIONS.........................................................................................................1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................2 GEOTECHNICAL CHARACTERIZATION...................................................................... 2 GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW....................................................................................... 3 EARTHWORK................................................................................................................. 4 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS........................................................................................... 6 SEISMICCONSIDERATIONS........................................................................................ 8 FLOORSLABS............................................................................................................... 9 PAVEMENTS................................................................................................................ 10 ENVIRONMENTAL SCREENING.................................................................................13 GENERAL COMMENTS...............................................................................................13 FIGURES......................................................................................................................15 Note: This report was originally delivered in a web -based format. Orange Bold text in the report indicates a referenced section heading. The PDF version also includes hyperlinks which direct the reader to that section and clicking on the GeoReport logo will bring you back to this page. For more interactive features, please view your project online at client.terracon.com. ATTACHMENTS EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES SITE LOCATION AND EXPLORATION PLANS EXPLORATION RESULTS SUPPORTING INFORMATION Note: Refer to each individual Attachment for a listing of contents. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 REPORT SUMMARY 1rerracon GeoReport. - Tonic' 0 Overview Statement ` di The proposed project will consist of a 25,000-sq. ft. building and associated Project Description parking lot. Earthwork Approved on -site soils and imported fill material meeting Earthwork section requirements can be used as structural fill. Shallow Foundations Shallow foundations can be utilized for the construction of the proposed structures. Pavements Recommendations for both asphaltic concrete and portland cement concrete pavements are provided in this section. General Comments This section contains important information about the limitations of this eotechnical engineering report. 1. If the reader is reviewing this report as a pdf, the topics above can be used to access the appropriate section of the report by simply clicking on the topic itself. 2. This summary is for convenience only. It should be used in conjunction with the entire report for design purposes. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, Texas Terracon Project No. AR195034 March 5, 2020 INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of our subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering services performed for the proposed Evidence Warehouse located at 401 N. Ash Avenue in Lubbock, Texas. The purpose of these services is to provide information and geotechnical engineering recommendations relative to: Subsurface soil conditions Groundwater conditions Site preparation and earthwork Foundation design and construction Seismic site classification per IBC Floor slab design and construction Pavement design and construction The geotechnical engineering Scope of Services for this project included the advancement of eight test borings to approximate depths ranging from 5 to 20 feet below existing site grades. Maps showing the site and boring locations are shown in the Site Locatio and Exploration Plar sections, respectively. The results of the laboratory testing performed on soil samples obtained from the site during the field exploration are included on the boring logs and in the Exploration Result section. SITE CONDITIONS The following description of site conditions is derived from our site visit in association with the field exploration. Item Description Parcel Information The proposed project is located at 401 N. Ash Avenue in Lubbock, Texas. Existing I Improvements The project site is a vacant lot. Current Ground Cover Exposed soils and vegetation. Existing Topography Gently sloping west with a progressive gradient on the western portions of the site. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas GeoRe oPt March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 p PROJECT DESCRIPTION Item Description Project Description The proposed project will consist of a 25,000-sq. ft. building and associated parking lot. Finished Floor ±2 feet of existing grade. Elevation Maximum Loads Column Loads: 50 kips (Assumed) Walls Loads: 3 klf Below Grade Structures None Anticipated. Both rigid (concrete) and flexible (asphalt) pavement sections are considered. It is our understanding that pavement will be subjected to either Pavements 7,500 Equivalent Single Axel Load ESAL (Light Duty) or 50,000 ESAL (Pavement Subjected to Occasional Truck Traffic). GEOTECHNICAL CHARACTERIZATION We have developed a general characterization of the subsurface conditions based upon our review of the subsurface exploration, laboratory data, geologic setting and our understanding of the project. This characterization, termed GeoModel, forms the basis of our geotechnical calculations and evaluation of site preparation and foundation options. Conditions encountered at each exploration point are indicated on the individual logs. The individual logs can be found in the :xploration Result section and the GeoModel can be found in the ,-igures section of this report. As part of our analyses, we identified the following model layers within the subsurface profile. For a more detailed view of the model layer depths at each boring location, refer to the GeoModel. Model Layer 1 2 Groundwater Conditions Layer Name Clayey Sand Siltv Sand General Description Loose to very dense Medium dense to very dense The borings were advanced in the dry using continuous flight auger drilling techniques that allow short term groundwater observations to be made while drilling. At the time of our exploration, groundwater seepage was not observed in the borings except in the following: Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 Boring Number Approximate Depth to Groundwater while Drilling (fee 131 18 B2 18 B3 18 Below ground surface Approximate Depth to Groundwater after - g (fey `. 18 18 18 1 rerracon GeoReport Approximate Depth to Groundwater 24 hours After Completion of -illing (feet) 18 18 18 These groundwater observations provide an indication of the groundwater conditions present at the time the boring was drilled. Groundwater conditions may be different at the time of construction. Groundwater conditions may change because of seasonal variations in rainfall, runoff and other conditions not apparent at the time of drilling. The water levels observed in the boreholes can be found on the boring logs in Exploration Results. GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW The subsurface soils encountered in our borings consist of clayey sands and silty sands to the maximum depth explored of 20 feet below ground surface (bgs). Settlement of foundations on prepared subgrade using the recommended allowable bearing capacity and the assumed modest design loads should be less than 1 inch. The on -site soils are not expected to experience substantial volumetric changes (shrink/swell) with fluctuations in moisture content. Potential vertical movements due to shrink/swell are estimated to be less than 1 inch. The near surface loose clayey sands could become unstable with typical earthwork and construction traffic, especially after precipitation events. Effective drainage should be completed early in the construction sequence and maintained after construction to avoid potential issues. If possible, the grading should be performed during the warmer and drier times of the year. If grading is performed during the winter months, an increased risk for possible undercutting and replacement of unstable subgrade will persist. Site preparation recommendations are provided in the Earthwork section. The Shallow Foundations section addresses support of proposed structures bearing on approved on -site soils or structural fill material. The Floor Slabs section includes recommendations for subgrade preparation associated with performance expectations of our assumed slab loads. Both asphaltic concrete (AC) and portland cement concrete (PCC) pavement options can be used for parking area. Pavements section provides recommendations for the design of new pavement systems. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 3 Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 1 rerracon GeoReport The General Comments section provides an understanding of the report limitations. EARTHWORK Earthwork is anticipated to include clearing, excavations, and fill placement. The following sections provide recommendations for use in the preparation of specifications for the work. Recommendations include critical quality criteria, as necessary, to render the site in the state considered in our geotechnical engineering evaluation for foundations, floor slabs, and pavements. General Site Preparation Remove existing vegetation and deleterious materials from the proposed project area. Exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and depressions which could prevent uniform compaction. The stripped materials consisting of vegetation and organic materials should be wasted from the site or used to revegetate landscaped areas or exposed slopes after completion of grading operations. Excessively wet or dry material should either be removed or moisture conditioned and recompacted. After stripping and grubbing, the subgrade should be proof -rolled where possible to aid in locating loose or soft areas. The proof -rolling should consist of several overlapping passes in mutually perpendicular directions over a given area. Any soft or pumping areas should be excavated to firm ground. Excavated areas should be backfilled with properly placed and compacted fill as discussed in Compaction Requirements. Structural Fill Material Types Structural fill is material used below, or within 3 feet of structures, pavements, or constructed slopes. Earthen materials used for structural fill should meet the material property requirements shown below. Soil Type' On -Site Soils USCS Classification I Required Parameters (for Structural Fill) Free of vegetation, organic material, debris, and SC, SM rocks greater than 4 inches in maximum dimension. liquid limits (LL) less than 35, plasticity index (PI) less than 15 Clean soil (free of deleterious material and debris) Imported Fill SC, CL With liquid limits (LL) less than 35, plasticity index (PI) less than 15 and no rock greater than 4 inches in maximum dimension Structural fill should consist of approved materials free of organic matter and debris. Frozen material should not be used, and fill should not be placed on a frozen subgrade. A sample of each material type should be submitted to the Geotechnical Engineer for evaluation prior to use on this site. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 GeORepOrt. Compaction Requirements Structural fill should meet the following compaction requirements. Item Compaction Criteria Maximum Lift Thickness 8 inches or less in loose thickness when heavy, self-propelled compaction equipment is used. Proposed structures A minimum of 95 percent of the maximum standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D 698) and within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. Utility Trench Backfill Utility trenches penetrating beneath the structures should be effectively sealed to restrict water intrusion and flow through the trenches, which could migrate below the building. The trench should provide an effective trench plug that extends at least 5 feet from the face of the building exterior. The plug material should consist of cementitious flowable fill or low permeability clay. The trench plug material should be placed to surround the utility line. If used, the clay trench plug material should be placed and compacted to comply with the water content and compaction recommendations for structural fill stated previously in this report. Grading and Drainage All grades must provide effective drainage away from the buildings during and after construction and should be maintained throughout the life of the structures. Water retained next to the buildings can result in soil movements greater than those discussed in this report. Greater movements can result in unacceptable differential floor slab and/or foundation movements, cracked slabs and walls, and roof leaks. The roof should have gutters/drains with downspouts that discharge onto splash blocks at a distance of at least 10 feet from the buildings. Exposed ground should be sloped and maintained at a minimum 5% away from the building for at least 10 feet beyond the perimeter of the building. Locally, flatter grades may be necessary to transition ADA access requirements forflatwork. After building construction and landscaping have been completed, final grades should be verified to document effective drainage has been achieved. Grades around the structure should also be periodically inspected and adjusted, as necessary, as part of the structure's maintenance program. Where paving or flatwork abuts the structure, a maintenance program should be established to effectively seal and maintain joints and prevent surface water infiltration. Earthwork Construction Considerations Shallow excavations are anticipated to be accomplished with conventional construction equipment. Upon completion of filling and grading, care should be taken to maintain the subgrade water content prior to construction of floor slabs. Construction traffic over the completed Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 1 rerracon GeoReport subgrades should be avoided. The site should also be graded to prevent ponding of surface water on the prepared subgrades or in excavations. Water collecting over or adjacent to construction areas should be removed. If the subgrade freezes, desiccates, saturates, or is disturbed, the affected material should be removed, or the materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted prior to floor slab construction. As a minimum, excavations should be performed in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations" and its appendices, and in accordance with any applicable local, and/or state regulations. Construction site safety is the sole responsibility of the contractor who controls the means, methods, and sequencing of construction operations. Under no circumstances shall the information provided herein be interpreted to mean Terracon is assuming responsibility for construction site safety, or the contractor's activities; such responsibility shall neither be implied nor inferred. Construction Observation and Testing The earthwork efforts should be monitored under the direction of the Geotechnical Engineer. Monitoring should include documentation of adequate removal of vegetation and topsoil, proof - rolling, and mitigation of areas delineated by the proof -roll to require mitigation. Each lift of compacted fill should be tested, evaluated, and reworked, as necessary, until approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement of additional lifts. Each lift of fill should be tested for density and water content at a frequency of at least one test for every 2,500 square feet of compacted fill in the building areas and 5,000 square feet in pavement areas. One density and water content test should be performed for every 50 linear feet of compacted utility trench backfill. In areas of foundation excavations, the bearing subgrade should be evaluated under the direction of the Geotechnical Engineer. If unanticipated conditions are encountered, the Geotechnical Engineer should prescribe mitigation options. In addition to the documentation of the essential parameters necessary for construction, the continuation of the Geotechnical Engineer into the construction phase of the project provides the continuity to maintain the Geotechnical Engineer's evaluation of subsurface conditions, including assessing variations and associated design changes. SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS Proposed structures can be supported using shallow foundations. If the site has been prepared in accordance with the requirements noted in the following design parameters are applicable for the proposed project. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 6 Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 Design Parameters — Compressive Loads Item Maximum Net Allowable Bearing pressure'' z Minimum Foundation Dimensions Ultimate Coefficient of Slidina Friction Minimum Embedment Below Finished Grade Estimated Total Movements from Structural Loads '3 Ultimate Passive Pressure 1 rerracon GeoReport Description 2,000 psf Columns: 30 inches Continuous: 18 inches 0.35 24 inches Less than 1 inch 275 psf/ft (triangular distribution) 1. The maximum net allowable bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding overburden pressure at the footing base elevation. An appropriate factor of safety has been applied. Values assume that exterior grades are no steeper than 20% within 10 feet of structure. Values provided are for an assumed maximum 50 kip column load and 3 kip per linear foot continuous foundation load. Our Geotechnical Engineer must review recommendations if projects loads exceed these values. 3. Unsuitable or soft soils should be over -excavated and replaced per the recommendations presented in the Earthwork. a The sides of the excavation for the spread footings must be nearly vertical and the concrete should be placed neat against these vertical faces for the passive earth pressure values to be valid. If the loaded side is sloped or benched, and then backfilled, the allowable passive pressure will be reduced. Passive resistance in the upper 2 feet of the soil profile should be nealected. Foundation Construction Considerations As noted in Earthworl' , the footing excavations should be evaluated under the direction of the Geotechnical Engineer. The base of all foundation excavations should be free of water and loose soil prior to placing concrete. Concrete should be placed soon after excavating to reduce bearing soil disturbance. Care should be taken to prevent wetting or drying of the bearing materials during construction. Excessively wet or dry material or any loose/disturbed material in the bottom of the footing excavations represent unsuitable conditions and should be corrected before foundation concrete is placed. If unsuitable bearing soils are encountered at the base of the planned footing excavation, the excavation should be extended deeper to suitable soils, and the footings could bear directly on these soils at the lower level or on lean concrete backfill placed in the excavations. This is illustrated on the sketch below. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 DESIGN FUU I INCH LLVLL RECOMMENDED W EXCAVATION LEVEL LEAN CONCRETE LEAN CONCRETE BACKFILL NOTE: EXCAVATIONS ARE SHOWN VERTICAL; HOWEVER, THE SIDEWALLS SHOULD BE SLOPED AS NECESSARY FOR SAFETY 1 rerracon GeoReport Over -excavation for structural fill placement below footings should be conducted as shown below. The over -excavation should be backfilled up to the footing base elevation, with approved on -site soils or imported fill, as recommended in the Earthwork section. DE IC FOOT RECO EXCA` OVER -EXCAVATION / BACKFILL ZONE NOTE: EXCAVATIONS ARE SHOWN VERTICAL', HOWEVER, THE SIDEWALLS SHOULD BE SLOPED AS NECESSARY FOR SAFETY SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS The seismic design requirements for structures are based on Seismic Design Category. Site Classification is required to determine the Seismic Design Category for a structure. The Site Classification is based on the upper 100 feet of the site profile defined by a weighted average value of either shear wave velocity, standard penetration resistance, or undrained shear strength in accordance with Chapter 20 of ASCE 7 and the International Building Code (IBC). Based on the soil properties encountered at the site and as described on the exploration logs and results, it is our professional opinion that the Seismic Site Classification is D. Subsurface explorations at this site were extended to a maximum depth of 20 feet. The site properties below the boring depth to 100 feet were estimated based on our experience and knowledge of geologic conditions of the general area. If significant project cost savings could be realized from an improved site Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 8 Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 1 rerracon GeoReport classification, additional deeper borings or geophysical testing may be performed to confirm the conditions below the current boring depth. FLOOR SLABS For the light slab loads assumed, the slab performance will largely be a function of the onsite soils or fill materials quality. The modulus of subgrade reaction is provided in the table below for materials selected and compacted as noted in the Earthwork section. Slab deflection can be estimated based on the load. If anticipated loads result in excess settlement that are not tolerable, our Engineer can provide recommendations for improvement to the uppermost portion of the site subgrade or more strict control of site grading fill materials and compaction requirements. Floor Slab Design Parameters Item Description Pad prepared with approved on -site or imported soils placed and compacted Floor Slab Support in accordance with Earthwork section of this report. Estimated Modulus of Subgrade Reaction z 120 pounds per square inch per inch (psi/in) for point loads Floor slabs should be structurally independent of building footings to reduce the possibility of floor slab cracking caused by differential movements between the slab and foundation. Modulus of subgrade reaction is an estimated value based upon our experience with the subgrade condition, the requirements noted in Earthwork, and the floor slab support as noted in this table. It is provided for point loads. For large area loads the modulus of subgrade reaction would be lower. The use of a vapor retarder should be considered beneath concrete slabs on grade covered with wood, tile, carpet, or other moisture sensitive or impervious coverings, or when the slab will support equipment sensitive to moisture. When conditions warrant the use of a vapor retarder, the slab designer should refer to ACI 302 and/or ACI 360 for procedures and cautions regarding the use and placement of a vapor retarder. Floor Slab Construction Considerations Finished subgrade, within and for at least 3 feet beyond the floor slab, should be protected from traffic, rutting, or other disturbance and maintained in a relatively moist condition until floor slabs are constructed. If the subgrade should become damaged or desiccated prior to construction of floor slabs, the affected material should be removed, and structural fill should be added to replace the resulting excavation. Final conditioning of the finished subgrade should be performed immediately prior to placement of the floor slab support course. The Geotechnical Engineer should approve the condition of the floor slab subgrades immediately prior to placement of the floor slab support course, reinforcing steel, and concrete. Attention should Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 9 Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 1 rerracon GeoReport be paid to high traffic areas that were rutted and disturbed earlier, and to areas where backfilled trenches are located. PAVEMENTS Both concrete and asphalt pavement design sections are requested for the proposed project. Pavement thickness design is dependent upon: the anticipated traffic conditions during the life of the pavement, subgrade and paving material characteristics, and climatic conditions of the region. Design Traffic Traffic levels were provided by the client for use in flexible AASHTO Asphalt Concrete (AC) pavement thickness design and Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) as shown in the uescription section. Our office should be contacted if there are any changes in the reported traffic patterns or frequency in order to determine the recommendations contained herein are still valid. Pavement Subgrade Parameters Our analysis used a subgrade Resilient Modulus (Mr) of 5,160 psi (pounds per square inch) for use for flexible pavement design, and a Modulus of Subgrade Reaction (k) of 110 pci (pounds per cubic inch) for use in designing the rigid pavement sections. These are assumed values based on our experience in the area with laboratory testing of similar clayey sand soils. Laboratory testing of site soils in combination with provided traffic volumes could allow for refinement of recommended pavement sections. Pavement Section Thicknesses The following tables provide options for AC and PCC Sections: Asphaltic Concrete Design Thickness (inch Layer Pavements Subjected to Light Duty Occasional Truck Traffic Asphaltic Concrete' Aggregate Base 1,2 Compacted Subgrade or Structural Fill 2,3 3 H-1 H. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 Asphaltic Concrete Design 1 rerracon GeoReport Thickness (inches) of Layer Light Duty Pavements Subjected to Occasional Truck Traffic 1. All materials should meet the TxDOT 2014 Standard Specifications for Highway Construction. 2. Subgrade soil, structural fill aggregate base should be compacted to at least 95% of its Standard Proctor (ASTM 698) maximum dry density with moisture contents controlled within 2% of optimum moisture content. 3. Compacted subgrade thickness should be increased to 12 inches for aprons or entrances subject to City of Lubbock Design Standards and Specifications. 1W Portland Cement Concrete Design Thickness (inches) Layer Light Duty Pavements Subjected to Dumpster Occasional Truck Traffic Pad Portland Cement Concrete 2 5 6 7 Compacted Subgrade or 6 6 6 Structural Fill 1. In areas of anticipated moderate traffic, fire trucks, delivery trucks, and areas with repeated turning or maneuvering of heavy vehicles. 2. All materials should meet the TxDOT 2014 Standard Specifications for Highway Construction. 3. Subgrade soil or structural fill should be compacted to at least 95% of its Standard Proctor (ASTM 698) maximum dry density with moisture contents controlled within 2% of optimum moisture content. 4. Compacted subgrade thickness should be increased to 12 inches for aprons or entrances subject to City of Lubbock Design Standards and Specifications. Areas for parking of heavy vehicles, concentrated turn areas, and start/stop maneuvers could require thicker pavement sections. Edge restraints (i.e. concrete curbs or aggregate shoulders) should be planned along curves and areas of maneuvering vehicles. A maintenance program including surface sealing, joint cleaning and sealing, and timely repair of cracks and deteriorated areas will increase the pavement's service life. As an option, thicker sections could be constructed to decrease future maintenance. Openings in pavements, such as decorative landscaped areas, are sources for water infiltration into surrounding pavement systems. Water can collect in the islands and migrate into the surrounding subgrade soils thereby degrading support of the pavement. This is especially applicable for islands with raised concrete curbs, irrigated foliage, and low permeability near - surface soils. The civil design for the pavements with these conditions should include features to restrict or collect and discharge excess water from the islands. Examples of features are edge drains connected to the storm water collection system, longitudinal subdrains, or other suitable outlets and impermeable barriers preventing lateral migration of water such as a cutoff wall installed to a depth below the pavement structure. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 11 Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 1 rerracon GeoReport Dishing in parking lots surfaced with ACC is usually observed in frequently -used parking stalls (such as near the front of buildings) and occurs under the wheel footprint in these stalls. The use of higher -grade asphaltic cement, or surfacing these areas with PCC, should be considered. The dishing is exacerbated by factors such as irrigated islands or planter areas, sheet surface drainage to the front of structures, and placing the ACC directly on a compacted clay subgrade. PCC pavement details for joint spacing, joint reinforcement, and joint sealing should be prepared in accordance with ACI 330 and ACI 325. PCC pavements should be provided with mechanically reinforced joints in accordance with ACI 330. Pavement Drainage Pavements should be sloped to provide rapid drainage of surface water. Water allowed to pond on or adjacent to the pavements could saturate the subgrade and contribute to premature pavement deterioration. In addition, the pavement subgrade should be graded to provide positive drainage within the granular base section. Appropriate sub -drainage or connection to a suitable daylight outlet should be provided to remove water from the granular subbase. Based on the possibility of shallow and/or perched groundwater, we recommend installing a pavement subdrain system to control groundwater, improve stability, and improve long-term pavement performance. Pavement Maintenance The pavement sections represent minimum recommended thicknesses and, as such, periodic maintenance should be anticipated. Therefore, preventive maintenance should be planned and provided for through an on -going pavement management program. Maintenance activities are intended to slow the rate of pavement deterioration and to preserve the pavement investment. Maintenance consists of both localized maintenance (e.g., crack and joint sealing and patching) and global maintenance (e.g., surface sealing). Preventive maintenance is usually the priority when implementing a pavement maintenance program. Additional engineering observation is recommended to determine the type and extent of a cost-effective program. Even with periodic maintenance, some movements and related cracking may still occur and repairs may be required. Pavement performance is affected by its surroundings. In addition to providing preventive maintenance, the civil engineer should consider the following recommendations in the design and layout of pavements: Final grade adjacent to paved areas should slope down from the edges at a minimum 2%. Subgrade and pavement surfaces should have a minimum 2% slope to promote proper surface drainage. Install below pavement drainage systems surrounding areas anticipated for frequent wetting. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 12 Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 1 rerracon GeoReport Install joint sealant and seal cracks immediately. Seal all landscaped areas in or adjacent to pavements to reduce moisture migration to subgrade soils. Place compacted, low permeability backfill against the exterior side of curb and gutter. Place curb, gutter and/or sidewalk directly on clay subgrade soils rather than on unbound granular base course materials. ENVIRONMENTAL SCREENING During the advancement of the soil borings, Terracon performed field screening using sensory methods and an organic vapor meter (OVM) equipped with a photoionization detector (PID) to detect the presence of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). The borings were screened for the presence of methane, carbon dioxide, oxygen, and balance gas readings utilizing a Landtec GEM 2000 landfill gas meter. Observations to document the presence of fill materials, including materials representative as municipal solid wastes (MSW), were also performed during the screening. Based on the field screening observations, the Landtec GEM 2000 and PID instrumentation did not exhibit readings above applicable background screening levels for the above indicated constituents. Additionally, visual observations of fill materials, including materials representative of MSW, were not observed during the advancement of the borings at the site. Based on these findings, adverse soil vapor conditions and foreign materials that may encountered during construction activities do not appear to be present in the areas investigated at the site. Further environmental investigation associated with the presence of a potential landfill at the site does not appear to be warranted at this time. GENERAL COMMENTS Our analysis and opinions are based upon our understanding of the project, the geotechnical conditions in the area, and the data obtained from our site exploration. Natural variations will occur between exploration point locations or due to the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. Terracon should be retained as the Geotechnical Engineer, where noted in this report, to provide observation and testing services during pertinent construction phases. If variations appear, we can provide further evaluation and supplemental recommendations. If variations are noted in the absence of our observation and testing services on -site, we should be immediately notified so that we can provide evaluation and supplemental recommendations. Our Scope of Services does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 1 rerracon GeoReport pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken. Our services and any correspondence or collaboration through this system are intended for the sole benefit and exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and are accomplished in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices with no third -party beneficiaries intended. Any third -party access to services or correspondence is solely for information purposes to support the services provided by Terracon to our client. Reliance upon the services and any work product is limited to our client, and is not intended for third parties. Any use or reliance of the provided information by third parties is done solely at their own risk. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site characteristics as provided are for design purposes and not to estimate excavation cost. Any use of our report in that regard is done at the sole risk of the excavating cost estimator as there may be variations on the site that are not apparent in the data that could significantly impact excavation cost. Any parties charged with estimating excavation costs should seek their own site characterization for specific purposes to obtain the specific level of detail necessary for costing. Site safety, and cost estimating including, excavation support, and dewatering requirements/design are the responsibility of others. If changes in the nature, design, or location of the project are planned, our conclusions and recommendations shall not be considered valid unless we review the changes and either verify or modify our conclusions in writing. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 14 FIGURES Contents: GeoModel Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable GEOMODEL Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, TX Terracon Project No. AR195034 Model Layer 1 2 Kd Clayey Sand EDSilty Sand First Water Observation Second Water Observation M Third Water Observation Layer Name Clayey Sand Silty Sand General Description Loose to very dense Medium dense to very dense LEGEND Groundwater levels are temporal. The levels shown are representative of the date and time of our exploration. Significant changes are possible over time. Water levels shown are as measured during and/or after drilling. In some cases, boring advancement methods mask the presence/absence of groundwater. See individual logs for details. Irerracon GeoReport NOTES: Layering shown on this figure has been developed by the geotechnical engineer for purposes of modeling the subsurface conditions as required for the subsequent geotechnical engineering for this project. Numbers adjacent to soil column indicate depth below ground surface. ATTACHMENTS Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 GeORepOrt. EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES Field Exploration Number of Borings Boring Depth (feet)' Location 6 20 Proposed Building Locations 2 5 Proposed Pavements Locations Below ground surface. Boring Layout and Elevations: Terracon personnel provided the boring layout. Coordinates were obtained with a handheld GPS unit (estimated horizontal accuracy of about ±10 feet). Subsurface Exploration Procedures: We drilled soil borings with a truck -mounted drill rig using continuous flight augers. We obtained representative samples primarily by the split -barrel sampling procedure. At least five soil samples were taken to a depth of 10 feet and at about 5 feet intervals thereafter to the completion depth of the borings as indicated on the boring logs. Pavement area borings included collection of three samples. Our granular soil sampling was conducted in general accordance with the Standard Method for Penetration Test and Split -Barrel Sampling of Soils (ASTM D1586). In the split -barrel sampling procedure, a standard, 2-inch O.D., split -barrel sampling spoon is driven into the boring with a 140-pound automatic SPT (Standard Penetration Test) hammer falling 30 inches. Field personnel recorded the number of hammer blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches of an 18-inch sampling interval as the SPT N-value. The N-values are recorded on the field boring logs. The soil samples obtained from the split -barrel sampler were visually classified and packaged for transportation to our laboratory. The sampling depths, penetration distances, and other sampling information was recorded on the field boring logs. The samples were placed in appropriate containers and taken to our soil laboratory for testing and classification by a Geotechnical Engineer. The exploration team prepared field boring logs as part of the drilling operations. These field logs included visual classifications of the materials encountered during drilling and our interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. Final boring logs were prepared from the field logs. The final boring logs represent the Geotechnical Engineer's interpretation of the field logs and include modifications based on observations and tests of the samples in our laboratory. Laboratory Testing The project engineer reviewed the field data and assigned laboratory tests to understand the engineering properties of the various soil strata, as necessary, for this project. Procedural Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES 1 of 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas GeoRe ort March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 p standards noted below are for reference to methodology in general. In some cases, variations to methods were applied because of local practice or professional judgment. Standards noted below include reference to other, related standards. Such references are not necessarily applicable to describe the specific test performed. Moisture Content Measurements (ASTM D-2216) Grain Size Analysis (ASTM D-422) Atterberg Limits (ASTM D-4318) The laboratory testing program often included examination of soil samples by an engineer. Based on the material's texture and plasticity, we described and classified the soil samples in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES 2 of 2 SITE LOCATION AND EXPLORATION PLANS Contents: Site Location Plan Exploration Plan Note: All attachments are one page unless noted above. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable SITE LOCATIO►'' Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 N if CIO 'O--w f - 'v 5XI '1 1 40 r � s 41 � f 1 rerracon GeoReport wile t ! _Aa IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY. AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES MAP PROVIDED BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS FXPI ()RATION PLAN Evidence Warehouse Lubbock, Texas March 5, 2020 Terracon Project No. AR195034 T- 400 ' J1 y l � J , IF, or.� N I F ; A 1 rerracon GeoReport IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY. AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES MAP PROVIDED BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS EXPLORATION RESULTS Contents: Boring Logs (B1 thru P2) Atterberg Limits Grain Size Distribution (2 pages) Note: All attachments are one page unless noted above. a D 0 x w zz 0 w M a w 3 0 z 0 0 co co w 0 BORING LOG NO. 131 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, TX w (D LOCATION See Exploration Plan z w a STRENGTH TEST .-. ATL LIMITS w } g 2 Latitude: 33.6059' Longitude:-101.8368' = >o J w u~irn F j o w w -C �= z z > w � 0 Q w w w d w_ w w z z LL-PL-PI U O 2 0 Q� �m0 w ( w aw" p� O p� W w DEPTH 0 CLAYEY SAND (SCI, dark brown to brown, loose to 6-6-3 very dense N=9 7-6-5 N=11 5- 5-5-5 N=10 1 23-50/4" 1 21-29-36 N=65 13.0 SILTY SAND (SM), brown, medium dense to dense 1 15-17-21 N=38 2 '. Z 10-14-12 N=26 20.0 2 Boring Terminated at 20 Feet Stratification lines are approximate. In -situ, the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Advancement Method: See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a Notes: Continuous Flight Auger description of Feld and laboratory procedures used and additional data (If any). See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Abandonment Method: Boring backfilled with Auger Cuttings and/or Bentonite WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Irerracon 5847 50th St Lubbock, TX Boring Started: 02-06-2020 Boring Completed: 02-06-2020 18' bgs while drilling Drill Rig: B-49 Driller: RC 18' bgs at completion of drilling 18' bgs after 24 hours Project No.: AR195034 a D 0 x w zz 0 w M a w 3 0 z 0 0 co co w 0 BORING LOG NO. B2 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, TX w (D LOCATION See Exploration Plan z w a STRENGTH TEST .-. ATL LIMITS w > w � } g 2 Latitude: 33.606' Longitude:-101.8365' = >o J w u~irn F j o w w -C �= z z 0 Q w w w d w_ w w z z LL-PL-PI U O 2 0 Q� �m0 w ( w aw" p� O p� w W DEPTH 0 CL CLAYEY SAND (SC), dark brown to brown, loose to 4-6-7 dense N=13 4-3-4 N=7 5 5-9-14 11 32-17-15 36 N=23 1 6-11-14 N=25 1 9-13-19 N=32 13.0 SILTY SAND (SM), brown, dense to very dense 1 10-14-16 N=30 2 '. Z 13-27-32 N=59 20.o 2 Boring Terminated at 20 Feet Stratification lines are approximate. In -situ, the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Advancement Method: See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a Notes: Continuous Flight Auger description of Feld and laboratory procedures used and additional data (If any). See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Abandonment Method: Boring backfilled with Auger Cuttings and/or Bentonite WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Irerracon 5847 50th St Lubbock, TX Boring Started: 02-06-2020 Boring Completed: 02-06-2020 18' bgs while drilling Drill Rig: B-49 Driller: RC 18' bgs at completion of drilling 18' bgs after 24 hours Project No.: AR195034 a D 0 x w zz 0 w M a w 3 0 z 0 0 co co w 0 BORING LOG NO. B3 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, TX w (D LOCATION See Exploration Plan z w a STRENGTH TEST .-. ATL LIMITS w } g 2 Latitude: 33.6057° Longitude:-101.8367' _ >0 _ w u~irn F j o w w -C = z z > w � 0 Q w w w d w_ w w z z LL-PL-PI U O 2 0 Q� �00 � w ( w aw" 00(n 0 p� W w DEPTH 0 (n CLAYEY SAND (SCI, dark brown to brown, loose to 2-4-4 very dense N=8 2-2-9 N=11 5 13-17-21 N=38 1 22-50/5" 8 26-17-9 36 1 50/6" 13.0 SILTY SAND (SM), brown, dense 1 12-14-22 N=36 2 '. Z 13-15-17 N=32 20.0 2 Boring Terminated at 20 Feet Stratification lines are approximate. In -situ, the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Advancement Method: See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a Notes: Continuous Flight Auger description of Feld and laboratory procedures used and additional data (If any). See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Abandonment Method: Boring backfilled with Auger Cuttings and/or Bentonite WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Irerracon 5847 50th St Lubbock, TX Boring Started: 02-06-2020 Boring Completed: 02-06-2020 18' bgs while drilling Drill Rig: B-49 Driller: RC 18' bgs at completion of drilling 18' bgs after 24 hours Project No.: AR195034 a D 0 x w zz 0 w M 0 a w 3 0 z 0 0 co w BORING LOG NO. B4 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, TX w (D LOCATION See Exploration Plan z w d STRENGTH TEST .-. ATL LIMITS w > w � } g 2 Latitude: 33.6058' Longitude:-101.8364' = >O J w u~iv� F j w w -C �= z z 0 Q w w w d w_ w w z z LL-PL-PI U O 2 0 Q� �m0 w ( w aw" p� O p� w W DEPTH CL CLAYEY SAND (SC), brown, loose to very dense 3-4-5 N=9 5-6-6 8 28-14-14 37 N=12 5 17-19-24 N=43 1 11-26-31 N=57 1 26-50/4" 13.0 SILTY SAND (SM), brown, very dense 1 2 '. 2 Boring Terminated at 20 Feet Stratification lines are approximate. In -situ, the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Advancement Method: See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a Notes: Continuous Flight Auger description of Feld and laboratory procedures used and additional data (If any). See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Abandonment Method: Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Irerracon Boring Started: 02-06-2020 Boring Completed: 02-06-2020 No free water observed Drill Rig: B-49 Driller: RC 5847 50th St Lubbock, TX Project No.: AR195034 a D 0 x w U z 0 w M a w 3 0 z 0 0 co co w 0 BORING LOG NO. B5 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, TX w (D LOCATION See Exploration Plan z w d STRENGTH TEST .-. ATL LIMITS w > w � } g 2 Latitude: 33.6055' Longitude:-101.8367' _ >O _ w u~iv� F j w w -C Z) 2 z z 0 Q w w w d w_ w w z z LL-PL-PI U O Q� w ( aw" O p� W 2 0 �m0 w p� w DEPTH 0 CLAYEY SAND (SC), brown, medium dense to 4-10-12 dense N=22 6-8-11 N=19 12-12-14 N=26 5 X9-9-10 N=19 7-6-14 1 N=20 13-22-26 N=48 13-12-24 1 N=36 13.0 SILTY SAND (SM), brown, dense to very dense 1 18-50/6" 2 '. 14-15-21 N=36 20.o 2 Boring Terminated at 20 Feet Stratification lines are approximate. In -situ, the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Advancement Method: See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a Notes: Continuous Flight Auger description of Feld and laboratory procedures used and additional data (If any). See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Abandonment Method: Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Irerracon Boring Started: 02-06-2020 Boring Completed: 02-06-2020 No free water observed Drill Rig: B-49 Driller: RC 5847 50th St Lubbock, TX Project No.: AR195034 a D 0 x w zz 0 w M a w 3 0 z 0 0 co co w 0 BORING LOG NO. B6 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, TX w } g 0 O (D 2 Q LOCATION See Exploration Plan Latitude: 33.6056' Longitude:-101.8363' DEPTH = w z >O J w w Q� w d w d u~iv� F j w_ w STRENGTH TEST .-. w w z O -C �= � p� ATL LIMITS w z z U W > ( w � w y aw" 0 z LL-PL-PI CLAYEY SAND (SC), brown, medium dense to very dense X 4-6-7 N=13 7 26-12-14 31 7-8-9 N=17 5 9-12-14 N=26 1 8-15-19 N=34 1 22-24-31 N=55 13.0 SILTY SAND (SM), brown, medium dense to dense 1 10-8-31 N=39 2 '. X 7-6-19 r.' 20.0 2 0-- N=25 Boring Terminated at 20 Feet Stratification lines are approximate. In -situ, the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Advancement Method: Continuous Flight Auger See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a description of Feld and laboratory procedures Notes: used and additional data (If any). See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Abandonment Method: Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Irerracon Boring Started: 02-06-2020 Boring Completed: 02-06-2020 No free water observed Drill Rig: B-49 Driller: RC 5847 50th St Lubbock, TX Project No.: AR195034 BORING LOG NO. P1 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, TX w (D LOCATION See Exploration Plan z w STRENGTH TEST .-. ATL LIMITS w } g 2 Latitude: 33.6061' Longitude:-101.8366' = >O J d w u~iv� F j w w -C �= z z > w � 0 Q w w w d w_ W w Z z LL-PL-PI U O Q� w O aw" O p� W 2 0 �m0 w p� w CL DEPTH 0 CLAYEY SAND (SC), brown, loose to dense 4-4-5 N=9 4-4-4 1 1..5.0 N=8 10-14-16 N=30 5 Boring Terminated at 5 Feet Stratification lines are approximate. In -situ, the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Advancement Method: See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a Notes: Continuous Flight Auger description of Feld and laboratory procedures used and additional data (If any). See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Abandonment Method: Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Irerracon Boring Started: 02-06-2020 Boring Completed: 02-06-2020 No free water observed Drill Rig: B-49 Driller: RC 5847 50th St Lubbock, TX Project No.: AR195034 BORING LOG NO. P2 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, TX w (D LOCATION See Exploration Plan z w STRENGTH TEST .-. ATL LIMITS w } >O d u~iv� -C z w g 2 Latitude: 33.6059' Longitude:-101.8363' = J w F j w �= 0 Q w w w d w_ W > � w Z w z LL-PL-PI z U O Q� w O aw" O p� W 2 0 �m0 w p� w CL DEPTH 0 CLAYEY SAND (SC), brown, medium dense 6.8-9 N=17 7-6-6 1 1..5.0 N=12 5-5-10 N=15 5 Boring Terminated at 5 Feet Stratification lines are approximate. In -situ, the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic Advancement Method: See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a Notes: Continuous Flight Auger description of Feld and laboratory procedures used and additional data (If any). See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Abandonment Method: Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Irerracon Boring Started: 02-06-2020 Boring Completed: 02-06-2020 No free water observed Drill Rig: B-49 Driller: RC 5847 50th St Lubbock, TX Project No.: AR195034 ATTERBERG LIMITS RESULTS ASTM D4318 GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422 / ASTM C136 U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS HYDROMETER N N N I 10 9. 9 8 8 7. 7i 6 61 H x C7 5 w } 5 m w 4, Z w Z 41 w 0 of 3 w a 3 2 2i 1. 1� i 40 �■■■■IIIII�{�Y�►i�lliis�■�ii::ll:::"!■■�IIIIII�■■■IIIII�■■■ 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 COBBLES GRAVEL I SAND SILT OR CLAY coarse fine coarse I medium fine 0 10 20 30 40, m m m Z 50 o O D U) m m w 6000 m G) x 70 80 90 BORING ID DEPTH % COBBLES % GRAVEL % SAND % SILT % FINES % CLAY USCS • B2 5 - 6.5 0.0 0.5 63.2 36.3 SC m B3 7.5 - 8.3 0.0 8.9 54.8 36.3 SC A B4 2.5 - 4 0.0 1.8 61.3 36.9 SC L DESCRIPTION D (SC) GRAIN SIZ • m A Sieve o me Sieve % ine Sieve % Fin A7CLAYEY D� 0.147 0.164 0.15 3/8" #4 #40 #200 100.0 99.49 97.76 36.25 1/2" 3/8" #4 #40 #200 100.0 91.9 91.07 88.77 36.29 3/8" #4 #40 #200 100.0 98.17 94.94 36.87D D (SC) (SC) D �u REMARKS COEFFICIENTS • • m A m A Cc Cu PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse PROJECT NUMBER: AR195034 Irerracon SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue 5847 50th St CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX Lubbock, TX Lubbock, TX GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION ASTM D422 / ASTM C136 U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS HYDROMETER I 10 9. 9 8 8 7. 7i 6 61 H x N C7 5 N w N } 5 o m C7 � w w 4, g LL a w Z 41 w a U o W 3, a z o0 3 w 2' a c7 2i ai 0 0 w 1' 3 1 W z Z W w W � I �■■■■IIIII�IIY�►uIlY1�Y■■■IYIII�■■■■IIIIII�■■■IIIII�■■■ 100 10 1 0.1 0 10 20 30 40, m m m Z 50 o D U) m m w 6000 m G) x 70 80 90 0.01 0.0010 COBBLES GRAVEL I SAND SILT OR CLAY coarse I fine I coarse I medium I fine- BORING ID 9VDEPTH % COBBLES % GRAVEL % SAND % SILT % FINES % CLAY USCS 101 66 0 - 1.5 0.0 8.8 60.5 30.7 SC GRAIN SIZE D, 0.193 COEFFICIENTS • Cc Cu PROJECT: Evidence Warehouse SITE: 401 N. Ash Avenue Lubbock, TX • Sieve %Finer Sieve %Finer Sieve % Fine 1/2" 100.0 3/8' 95.83 #4 91.23 #40 84.32 #200 30.71 IMI SOIL DESCRIPTION • 1 CLAYEY SAND (SC) REMARKS IrerraconPROJECT NUMBER: AR195034 5847 50th St CLIENT: City of Lubbock Lubbock, TX Lubbock, TX SUPPORTING INFORMATION Contents: Unified Soil Classification System General Notes to Log Terms Note: All attachments are one page unless noted above. UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM lrerracon GeoReport. Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests A Coarse -Grained Soils: More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve Fine -Grained Soils: 50% or more passes the No. 200 sieve Soil Classification Group Group Name B Symbol Gravels: More than 50% of coarse fraction retained on No. 4 sieve Clean Gravels: Less than 5% fines c Cu >_ 4 and 1 < Cc < 3 E GW Well -graded ravel F Cu < 4 and/or [Cc<1 or Cc>3.0] E GP Poorly graded gravel F Gravels with Fines: More than 12% fines c Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel F, G, H Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel F, G, H Sands: 50% or more of coarse fraction passes No. 4 sieve Clean Sands: Less than 5% fines o Cu >_ 6 and 1 < Cc < 3 E SW Well -graded sand Cu < 6 and/or [Cc<1 or Cc>3.0] E SP Poorly graded sand 1 Sands with Fines: More than 12% fines o Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G, H, Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G, H, i Silts and Clays: Liquid limit less than 50 Inorganic: PI > 7 and plots on or above "A" CL Lean clay K, L, M PI < 4 or plots below "A" lines ML Silt K, L, M Organic: Liquid limit - oven dried < 0.75 OL Organic clayK, L, M, N Liquid limit -not dried Organic silt K, L, M, o Silts and Clays: Liquid limit 50 or more Inorganic: PI plots on or above "A" line CH Fat clay K, L, M PI plots below "A" line MH Elastic Silt K, L, M Organic: Liquid limit - oven dried < 0.75 OH Organic clayK, L, M, P Liquid limit -not dried Organic silt K, L, M, a Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor I PT Peat A Based on the material passing the 3-inch (75-mm) sieve. B If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add "with cobbles or boulders, or both" to group name. c Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well -graded gravel with silt, GW-GC well -graded gravel with clay, GP -GM poorly graded gravel with silt, GP -GC poorly graded gravel with clay. o Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well -graded sand with silt, SW -SC well -graded sand with clay, SP-SM poorly graded sand with silt, SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay. (fl lz Cu = Dso/Dio Cc = D10 x Dso F If soil contains >_ 15% sand, add "with sand" to group name. G If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC -GM, or SC-SM. W 60 50 H If fines are organic, add "with organic fines" to group name. If soil contains >_ 15% gravel, add "with gravel' to group name. J If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area, soil is a CL-ML, silty clay. K If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add "with sand" or "with gravel," whichever is predominant. L If soil contains >_ 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add "sandy" to group name. MIf soil contains >_ 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add "gravelly" to group name. N PI >_ 4 and plots on or above "A" line. a PI < 4 or plots below "A" line. P PI plots on or above "A" line. OR plots below "A" line. For classification of fine-grained soils and fine-grained fraction of coarse -grained soils �0 Equation of "X - line Horizontal at PI=4 to LL=25.5. 40 — then PI=0.73 (ILL-20) �� Equation of "U" -line �,' G o` Vertical at LL=16 to PI=7, 30 then PI=0.9 (LL-8) O ,� G MH or OH ___;Ir _ /CL - ML ML or OL i 20 10 7 4 0 0 10 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 11 GENERAL NOTES TO LOG TERMS lrerracon GeoReport. SAMPLING WATER LEVEL FIELD TESTS Penetration Test � Water N Resistance (Blows/Ft) AugStandard �CiiGu�s nRockCon3 ncou terely Encountered ®Grab 'Shelby Water Level After a (HP) Hand Penetrometer Specified Period of Trne (T) Torvane Sample Tube Water Level After a Specified Period of Time (DCP) Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Standard Texas Cone Peneumion Peneinxnzier Tesi Water levels indicated on the soil boring logs are the levels UC Unconfined Compressive Strength 9 9 p 9 measured in the borehole at the times indicated. Groundwater level variations will occur over time. In low (PID) Photo -Ionization Detector permeability soils, accurate determination for groundwater CA Ring Sampler levels is not possible with short term water level (OVA) Organic Vapor Analyzer observations. DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel, or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non -plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse - grained soils are defined on the basis of their in -place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency. LOCATION AND ELEVATION NOTES Unless otherwise noted, Latitude and Longitude are approximately determined using a hand-held GPS device. The accuracy of such devices is variable. Surface elevation data annotated with +/- indicates that no actual topographical survey was conducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead, the surface elevation was approximately determined from topographic maps of the area. STRENGTH TERMS RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE -GRAINED SOILS CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS (50% or more passing the No. 200 sieve.) (More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve.) Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing, field visual -manual Density determined by Standard Penetration Resistance procedures or standard penetration resistance Standard Penetration or Standard Penetration or Descriptive Term Descriptive Term Unconfined Compressive Strength N-value N-value (Density) Blows/Ft. (Consistency) Qu, (tsf) Blows/Ft. Very Soft Less than 0.25 0-1 Very Loose 0-3 Loose 4-9 Soft 0.25 to 0.5 2-4 Medium Dense 10 — 29 Medium Stiff 0.5 to 1.00 4-8 Dense 30 — 50 Stiff 1.00 to 2.00 8 — 15 Very Dense >50 Very Stiff 2.00 to 4.00 15 — 30 H and >4.00 >30 RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL p RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES Descriptive Term(s) of Percent of Descriptive Term(s) of Percent of other constituents Dry Weight other constituents Dry Weight Trace <15 Trace <5 With 15 — 29 With 5-12 Modifier >30 Modifier >12 GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY PLASTICITY DESCRIPTION Major Component of Sample Particle Size Term Plasticity Index Boulders Over 12 in. (300 mm) Non -plastic 0 Cobbles 12 in. to 3 in. (300 mm to 75 mm) Low 1 — 10 Gravel 3 in. to #4 sieve (75mm to 4.75mm) Medium 11 — 30 Sand #4 to #200 sieve (4.75mm to 0.075mm) High >30 Silt or Clay Passing #200 sieve (0.075mm) DOCUMENT 0110 00 SUMMARY 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT SECTION 0110 00 - SUMMARY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Owner-furnished/Contractor-installed (OFCI) products. 4. Contractor Use of Site and Premises. 5. Work Restrictions. 6. Specification and Drawing Conventions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0173 00 "Execution" for coordination of Owner -installed products. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Public Safety Improvements Project - FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY. Project #92551. 1. Project Location: 401 N. Ash Avenue, Lubbock, Texas. B. Owner: City of Lubbock. 1. Owner's Representative: Erik Rejino, P.O. Box 2000, 1314 Avenue K, Lubbock, Texas 79457, T: 806.775.2355, F: 806.775.2275, erejino@mylubbock.us. C. Architect: City of Lubbock, Facilities Management. 1. Architect's Representative: Darren Densford, AIA, P.O. Box 2000, 1314 Avenue K, Lubbock, Texas 79457, T: 806.775.2368, F: 806.775.3267, ddensford@mylubbock.us. D. Architect's Consultants: Architect has retained the following design professionals, who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Architect: Parkhill a. Architect Representative: Ryan Wilkens, AIA, 4422 85t' Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, T: 806.473.2200, F: 806.473.3500. 2. Interior Designer: Parkhill a. Interior Designer Representative: Britni Wilkens, RID, 4422 85t' Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, T: 806.473.2200, F: 806.473.3500. 3. Civil Engineer: Parkhill. a. Civil Engineer Representative: Allan Holly, PE, 4422 85t' Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, T: 806.473.2200, F: 806.473.3500. 4. Landscape Architect: Parkhill. a. Landscape Architect Representative: Brent Clifford, RLA, 4422 85t' Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, T: 806.473.2200, F: 806.473.3500. 5. Structural Engineer: Parkhill. a. Structural Engineer Representative: Zach Lindauer, PE, 4422 85t'' Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, T: 806.473.2200, F: 806.473.3500. 6. Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing Engineer: Parkhill / Fanning, Fanning & Associates, Inc. a. MEP Engineer Representative: Scott M. Fanning, PE, 2555 74t' Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, T: 806.745.2533, F: 806.745.3596. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 10 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 0110 00 SUMMARY 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT 7. Audio -Video, Information Technology, Security Consultant: Parkhill / Datacom Design Group. a. AV/IT/Security Representative: John Rob Hicks, RCDD, 9111 Jollyville Road, Austin, Texas 78759, T: 512.478.6001. E. Other Owner Consultants: Owner has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Surveyor: Hugo Reed and Associates, Inc. a. Surveyor Representative: Robert A. Christopher, LSLS, RPLS, 1601 Avenue N, Lubbock, Texas 79401, T: 806.763.5642, F: 806.763.3891. 2. Geotechnical Engineer: Terracon Consultants, Inc. a. Geotechnical Engineer Representative: Jerry T. Sayson, PE, 5847 50' Street, Lubbock, Texas 79424, T: 806.300.0140, F: 806.797.0947. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Without force or effect, Work of Project consists of a new 26,280 square foot FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY Storage (S) and business (B) occupancy groups, construction type II-B with sprinkler system. Major building assemblies consist of insulating concrete forming, structural steel framing, metal building components, insulated metal panels, brick and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED (OFCI) PRODUCTS A. Owner's Responsibilities: Owner will furnish products indicated and perform the following, as applicable: 1. Provide to Contractor Owner -reviewed Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples. 2. Provide for delivery of Owner -furnished products to Project site. 3. Upon delivery, inspect, with Contractor present, delivered items. a. If Owner -furnished products are damaged, defective, or missing, arrange for replacement. 4. Obtain manufacturer's inspections, service, and warranties. 5. Inform Contractor of earliest available delivery date for Owner -furnished products. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: The Work includes the following, as applicable: 1. Designate delivery dates of Owner -furnished products in Contractor's construction schedule, utilizing Owner -furnished earliest available delivery dates. 2. Review Owner -reviewed Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples, noting discrepancies and other issues in providing for Owner -furnished products in the Work. 3. Receive, unload, handle, store, protect, and install Owner -furnished products. 4. Make building services connections for Owner -furnished products. 5. Protect Owner -furnished products from damage during storage, handling, and installation and prior to Substantial Completion. 6. Repair or replace Owner -furnished products damaged following receipt. C. Owner-Furnished/Contractor-Installed (OFCI) Products: 1. Marker Boards 2. Television Displays 3. Interactive White Boards 4. Chemical Cabinet 5. Residential Appliances a. Microwave 01 10 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 0110 00 SUMMARY 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT b. Ice and Water Dispenser C. Dishwasher d. Refrigerator 6. Laboratory Fume Hoods 7. 20x24 Modular Office Building 8. Storage Shelving 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Restricted Use of Site: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Limits on Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets, work on public streets, rights of way, and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging for temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Architect's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. C. Smoking and Controlled Substance Restrictions: Use of tobacco products, alcoholic beverages, and other controlled substances on Owner's property is not permitted. D. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. 1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon () is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Text Color: Text used in the Specifications, including units of measure, manufacturer and product names, and other text may appear in multiple colors or underlined as part of a hyperlink; no emphasis is implied by text with these characteristics. 3. Hypertext: Text used in the Specifications may contain hyperlinks. Hyperlinks may allow for access to linked information that is not residing in the Specifications. Unless otherwise indicated, linked information is not part of the Contract Documents. 4. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 00 Contracting Requirements: General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to all Sections of the Specifications. C. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. D. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 10 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 DOCUMENT 0110 00 SUMMARY 100% Construction Documents — ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings and published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 10 00 01 10 00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 21 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT SECTION 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Unit -cost allowances. 2. Contingency allowances. 3. Testing and inspecting allowances. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0122 00 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices, including adjustment of quantity allowances when applicable. 2. Section 0126 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 3. Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for field testing by an independent testing agency. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Allowance: A quantity of work or dollar amount included in the Contract, established in lieu of additional requirements, used to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. 1.4 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection, or purchase and delivery, of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed by the Owner to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 21 00-1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 21 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT ��11�I�KILyI II\ 111C�1i.'h[�.� A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed. A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.9 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results. B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum. C. Costs of testing and inspection services not specifically required by the Contract Documents are Contractor responsibilities and are not included in the allowance. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.10 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work -in -place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, required maintenance materials, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other markups. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of Work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit -cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work -in -place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. 012100-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 21 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT B. Submit claims for increased costs due to a change in the scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of Work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower - priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1: Contingency Allowance: Include a contingency allowance of $300,000.00 for use according to Owner's written instructions. B. Allowance No. 2: Special Inspections Allowance: Include the sum of $10,000.00 for special inspections mandated by applicable codes. C. Allowance No. 3: Unit -Cost Allowance: Include the sum of $2,500.00 per door for door hardware, as specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware" and as shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION 01 21 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 21 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0122 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 0122 00 - UNIT PRICES 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 2. Section 0126 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 3. Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements" for field testing by an independent testing agency. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount incorporated into the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work -in -place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the Part 3 "Schedule of Unit Prices" Article contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. 1: Fencing. 1. Description: Provide a dollar value to add / deduct the specified fence as outlined and detailed in the Contract Documents. a. Wrought Iron b. Decorative 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot. B. Unit Price No. 2: Concrete. 1. Description: Provide a dollar value to add / deduct the specified concrete as outlined and detailed in the Contract Documents. a. Curb and Gutter b. Sidewalk 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 22 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0122 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Unit Price No. 3: Pavement. 1. Description: Provide a dollar value to add / deduct the specified pavement including applicable base and sub -base as outlined and detailed in the Contract Documents. a. Asphalt b. Concrete 2. Unit of Measurement: Square foot. D. Unit Price No. 4: Utilities. 1. Description: Provide a dollar value to add / deduct utilities including applicable excavation and compaction as outlined and detailed in the Contract Documents. a. Electrical Secondary b. Water Line C. Sewer Line d. Fire Line e. Gas Line 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot. E. Unit Price No. 5: Metal Panel Systems. 1. Description: Provide a comprehensive dollar value to add / deduct the metal panel systems as outlined and detailed in the Contract Documents. a. Aluminum Composite Metal Panel. b. PEMB Rib Panel 2. Unit of Measurement: Square foot. F. Unit Price No. 6: Miscellaneous and structural steel. 1. Description: Miscellaneous lintels and other supports not otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, in accordance with Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" and Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications." a. Fabrication and Delivery - Unit of Measurement: Ton. b. Steel Erection - Unit of Measurement: Ton. C. Detailing and Drafting - Unit of Measurement: Man Hour. END OF SECTION 01 22 00 012200-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0123 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 0123 00 - ALTERNATES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include, as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation, whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of the Contract. C. Schedule: A Part 3 "Schedule of Alternates" Article is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: Asphalt paving in lieu of concrete paving. 1. Base Bid: Provide concrete paving as indicated on Drawing CS101 and as specified in Section 32 13 13 "Concrete Paving." 2. Alternate: Provide asphalt paving as indicated on Drawing CS 102 and as specified in Section 32 12 16 "Asphalt Paving." END OF SECTION 01 23 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 23 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0125 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 0125 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 0123 00 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit documentation identifying product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 25 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0125 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated. in. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 14 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. C. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 012500-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0125 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0125 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 25 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0126 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 0126 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 2. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for forms for contract modifications provided as part of web -based Project management software. A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 14 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 26 00 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0126 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit -Price Adjustment: See Section 0122 00 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit -price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0126 00 012600-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0129 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 0129 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. 2. Section 0122 00 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices. 3. Section 0126 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than fifteen days after the date established in the Notice to Proceed. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Owner's name. C. Owner's Project number. d. Name of Architect. e. Architect's Project number. f. Contractor's name and address. g. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. 5. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 29 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0129 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 6. Overhead Costs, Proportional Distribution: Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each line item. 7. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments, as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the seventh day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner -requested project acceleration. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. C. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. F. Transmittal: Submit notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from [entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related 012900-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0129 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT to the Work covered by the payment] [subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application]. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Sustainable design action plans, including preliminary project materials cost data. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruction conference. I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. I. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. a. Complete administrative actions, submittals, and Work preceding this application, as described in Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures." 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: I . Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Certification of completion of final punch list items. 3. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 4. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 5. AIA Document G706. 6. AIA Document G706A. 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. 10. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations are paid. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 29 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0129 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 11. Waivers and releases. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0129 00 012900-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination drawings. 2. RFIs. 3. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0173 00 'Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 2. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses, cellular telephone numbers, and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, in web -based Project software directory, and in prominent location inbuilt facility. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results, where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0131 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project -specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade -specific information to coordination drawings in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. C. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. £ Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire -protection, fire -alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling -mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms, showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire -protection, fire -alarm, and electrical equipment. 013100-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. C. Fire -rated enclosures around ductwork. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inchesin diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire - alarm locations. C. Panel board, switchboard, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor - control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire -Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that, in general, the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit. C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: a. Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format. 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C 106. 1.7 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name of Architect. 3. Date. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 31 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Name of Contractor. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. RFI subject. 7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 10. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 11. Contractor's signature. 12. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or software -generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor -generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log bi-weekly. Use software log that is part of web -based Project management software. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 013100-4 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number, including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within three days if Contractor disagrees with response. G. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file, incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of seven days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. C. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. 1. Preparation of Record Documents. M. Use of the premises. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. P. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Parking availability. S. Office, work, and storage areas. t. Equipment deliveries and priorities. U. First aid. V. Security. W. Progress cleaning. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 31 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other Sections and when required for coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Submittals. d. Review of mockups. e. Possible conflicts. f. Compatibility requirements. g. Time schedules. h. Weather limitations. i. Manufacturer's written instructions. j. Warranty requirements. k. Compatibility of materials. 1. Acceptability of substrates. In. Temporary facilities and controls. n. Space and access limitations. o. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. P. Testing and inspecting requirements. q. Installation procedures. r. Coordination with other work. S. Required performance results. t. Protection of adjacent work. U. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction 013100-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and fixture needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Site use. 5) Temporary facilities and controls. 6) Progress cleaning. 7) Quality and work standards. 8) Status of correction of deficient items. 9) Field observations. 10) Status of RFIs. 11) Status of Proposal Requests. 12) Pending changes. 13) Status of Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting, where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 31 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0132 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 0132 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Concealed Work photographs. 3. Periodic construction photographs. 4. Final Completion construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 2. Section 0179 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 3. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence. 4. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site clearing operations commence. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within seven days of taking photographs. 1. Submit photos on CD-ROM or thumb -drive or by uploading to web -based Project management software site. Include copy of key plan indicating each photograph's location and direction. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag or in web -based Project management software site: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of location, vantage point, and direction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. 1.3 FORMATS AND MEDIA A. Digital Photographs: Provide color images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 12 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. Use flash in low light levels or backlit conditions. B. Digital Images: Submit digital media as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image -editing software. C. Metadata: Record accurate date and time from camera. D. File Names: Name media files with date, Project area and sequential numbering suffix. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs with maximum depth of field and in focus. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 32 33 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0132 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of the Work, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property, to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. C. Concealed Work Photographs: Before proceeding with installing work that will conceal other work, take photographs sufficient in number, with annotated descriptions, to record nature and location of concealed Work, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Underground utilities. 2. Underslab services. 3. Piping. 4. Electrical conduit. 5. Waterproofing and weather -resistant barriers. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 50 photographs monthly coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 50 photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will inform photographer of desired vantage points. F. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Immediate follow-up when on -site events result in construction damage or losses. b. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. C. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0132 33 013233-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 0133 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0129 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting coordination drawings and subcontract list and for requirements for web -based Project software. 3. Section 0132 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 4. Section 0132 33 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting preconstruction photographs, periodic construction photographs, and Final Completion construction photographs. 5. Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports, and schedule of tests and inspections. 6. Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals. 7. Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 8. Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 9. Section 0179 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." 1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 33 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Final Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule as required to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. C. Submittal Category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. 1.4 SUBMITTAL FORMATS A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 7. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section number with sequential alphanumeric identifier and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals. 8. Category and type of submittal. 9. Submittal purpose and description. 10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for each of multiple items. 11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 12. Indication of full or partial submittal. 13. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 14. Other necessary identification. 15. Remarks. 16. Signature of transmitter. B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. D. Electronic Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number. E. Submittals Utilizing Web -Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files or other format indicated by Project management software. 1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Email: Prepare submittals as PDF package and transmit to Architect by sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line as requested by Architect. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a digital Project Record Document file. 013300-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Web -Based Project Management Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web -based Project management software website. Enter required data in web -based software site to fully identify submittal. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections, so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block, and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 33 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams that show factory -installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. C. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrently with Samples. B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. C. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. h. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy(ies). C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of type, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components, such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of Sample. C. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. Email Transmittal: Provide PDF transmittal. Include digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics and identification information for record. 4. Web -Based Project Management Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web -based Project software website. Enter required data in web -based software site to fully identify submittal. 5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 6. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units, showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 013300-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 7. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal. G. Certificates: 1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated. 2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. 4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of AWS 132.1/132.1M on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. H. Test and Research Reports: 1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0133 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT before installation of product. Include written recommendations for substrate preparation and primers required. 2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. C. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use. 1.7 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. C. BIM Incorporation: Incorporate delegated design drawing and data files into BIM established for Proj ect. 1. Prepare delegated design drawings in the following format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with indication in web - based Project management software. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and 01 33 00 - 6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval. 1.9 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return. 1. PDF Submittals: Architect will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate action. 2. Submittals by Web -Based Project Management Software: Architect will indicate, on Project management software website, the appropriate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be discarded by Architect without action. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 33 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 33 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 0140 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality -assurance and quality -control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality - assurance and quality -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced," unless otherwise further described, means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Quality -Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, subcontractor, or sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade -specific terminology in referring to a Work result does not require that certain construction activities specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). D. Mockups: Physical assemblies of portions of the Work constructed to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. Mockups are not Samples. 1. Mockups are used for one or more of the following: a. Verify selections made under Sample submittals. b. Demonstrate aesthetic effects. C. Demonstrate the qualities of products and workmanship. d. Demonstrate successful installation of interfaces between components and systems. e. Perform preconstruction testing to determine system performance. 2. Product Mockups: Mockups that may include multiple products, materials, or systems specified in a single Section. 3. In -Place Mockups: Mockups constructed on -site in their actual final location as part of permanent construction. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0140 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT criteria. Unless otherwise indicated, copies of reports of tests or inspections performed for other than the Project do not meet this definition. F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. G. Source Quality -Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source (e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop). H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. The term "testing laboratory" has the same meaning as the term "testing agency." I. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work, to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. J. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work, to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality -control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect. 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated Design Services Statement: Submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements is specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, inform the Architect regarding the conflict and obtain clarification prior to proceeding with the Work. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for clarification before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified is the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality -control personnel. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee 014000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample -taking and testing and inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement of whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory -Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory -authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement of whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0140 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory -authorized service representative requirements. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that is similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Testing and Inspecting Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented in accordance with ASTM E329, and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Proj ect. H. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect, demonstrate, repair, and perform service on installations of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following Contractor's responsibilities, including the following: 1. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 2. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 3. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. 4. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 5. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups of size indicated. 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers who will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project. 5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding Work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re -review of each mockup. 014000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 7. Promptly correct unsatisfactory conditions noted by Architect's preliminary review, to the satisfaction of the Architect, before completion of final mockup. 8. Approval of mockups by the Architect does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 9. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 10. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality -control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality -control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality - control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform duties of Contractor. D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." E. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. F. Contractor's Associated Requirements and Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 40 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and quality -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Interpreting tests and inspections, and stating in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 5. Retesting and reinspecting corrected Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and authorities' having jurisdiction reference during normal working hours. 1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample -taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 0173 00 "Execution." 014000-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 0140 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 40 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0142 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 0142 00 - REFERENCES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms, including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted," have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms, including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified," have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. 1. For standards referenced by applicable building codes, comply with dates of standards as listed in building codes. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations, List: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Abbreviations and acronyms not included in this list are to mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." The information in this list is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; (see FGIA). FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 42 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0142 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 014200-2 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.agpfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.orjz. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; www.concrete.org. 9. ACP - American Clean Power; (Formerly: American Wind Energy Association); www.cleanpower.org. 10. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concretepipeorg. 11. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 12. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpaorg. 13. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 14. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.oriz. 15. AHRI - Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 16. Al - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 17. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.or. 18. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 19. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.oriz. 20. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; (see PLIB). 21. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 22. AMPP - Association for Materials Protection and Performance; www.ampp.org. 23. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.or . 24. AOSA/SCST - Association of Official Seed Analysts (The)/Society of Commercial Seed Technologists (The); www.analyzeseeds.com. 25. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 26. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 27. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 29. ASA - Acoustical Society of America; www.acousticalsociety.or. 30. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 31. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (see ASCE). 32. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 33. ASME - ASME International; American Society of Mechanical Engineers (The); www.asme.org. 34. ASSE - ASSE International; (American Society of Sanitary Engineering); www.asse- plumbing.org. 35. ASSP - American Society of Safety Professionals; www.assp.org. 36. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org. 37. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.or�. 38. AVIXA - Audiovisual and Integrated Experience Association; www.avixa.org. 39. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 40. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 41. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.aMa.com. 42. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 43. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 44. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 45. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 46. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0142 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 47. BIFMA - Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association; www.bifma.org. 48. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 49. BWF - Badminton World Federation; www.bwfbadminton.com. 50. CARB - California Air Resources Board; www.arb.ca.gov. 51. CDA - Copper Development Association Inc.; www.copier.org. 52. CE - Conformite Europeenne (European Commission); www.ec.europa.eu/growth/single- market/ce-marking. 53. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 54. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 55. CFSEI - Cold -Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 56. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 57. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.or. 58. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 59. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 60. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.or. 61. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.compositepanel.org. 62. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 63. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofsM. 64. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.or�. 65. CSA - CSA Group; www.csagroup.org. 66. CSI - Cast Stone Institute; www.caststone.or. 67. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csiresources.ora. 68. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.or�. 69. CTA - Consumer Technology Association; www.cta.tech. 70. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; www.coolingtechnology.org. 71. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 72. DHA - Decorative Hardwoods Association; www.decorativehardwoods.org. 73. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.or . 74. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.ecianow.org. 75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 77. EOS/ESD - EOS/ESD Association, Inc.; Electrostatic Discharge Association; www.esda.org. 78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; www.esta.org. 79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.=. 80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 81. FGIA - Fenestration and Glazing Industry Alliance; https://fgiaonline.org. 82. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 83. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 84. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmgpprovals.com. 85. FM Global - FM Global; www.ftnalobal.com. 86. FRSA - Florida Roofing and Sheet Metal Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 87. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.co 88. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 89. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.oM. 91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 92. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (see NAAMM). FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 42 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0142 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 014200-4 93. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 94. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.or. 95. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 96. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 97. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Association (The); www.theicpa.com. 98. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 99. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 100. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 101. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; www.ies.or . 102. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.or. 103. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; (see FGIA). 104. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpaorg. 105. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 106. Intertek - Intertek Group; www.intertek.com. 107. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); www.isa.org. 108. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; www.isfanow.or. 109. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.or. 110. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int. 111. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 112. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.li hg tning.org. 113. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 114. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 115. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 116. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 117. MHI - Material Handling Industry; www.mhi.or. 118. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 119. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 120. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; www.msshq.org. 121. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 122. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); (see AMPP). 123. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 124. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.insulationinstitute.org. 125. NALP - National Association of Landscape Professionals; www.landscapeprofessionals.org. 126. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgga.com. 127. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 128. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.nfaa.org. 129. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 130. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 131. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 132. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 133. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 134. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.=. 135. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfha.org. 136. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 137. NFPA - NFPA International; (see NFPA). 138. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 139. NGA - National Glass Association; www. lag ss.org. 140. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0142 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 141. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 142. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (see NWFA). 143. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 144. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 145. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 146. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org. 147. NSI - Natural Stone Institute; www.naturalstoneinstitute.org. 148. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 149. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 150. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 151. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 152. NWRA - National Waste & Recycling Association; www.wasterecycling.org. 153. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pciorg. 154. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 155. PLASA - PLASA; www.plasa.org. 156. PLIB - Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.plib.org. 157. PVCPA - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 158. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.or. 159. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 160. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; (see WWPA). 161. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org. 162. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 163. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.or . 164. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.or�. 165. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 166. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (see ASCE). 167. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.securityindustry.org. 168. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 169. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfoM. 170. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 171. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpteorg. 172. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 173. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 174. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spriorg. 175. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 176. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 177. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; (see AMPP). 178. STI/SPFA - Steel Tank Institute/Steel Plate Fabricators Association; www.steeltank.com. 179. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 180. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.$)ypa.org. 181. TCA - Tilt -Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 182. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tcnatile.com. 183. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.kbcdco.tema.or�. 184. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); www.tiaonline.org. 185. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masopZsocieiy.org. 186. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.lpinst.org. 187. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 188. TRI - Tile Roofing Industry Alliance; www.tileroofing.org. 189. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.org. 190. UL LLC - UL LLC; www.ul.com. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 42 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0142 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 191. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 192. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.us bg corg. 193. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 194. WA - Wallcoverings Association; www.wallcoverings.org. 195. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; (see PLIB). 196. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.or�. 197. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 198. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.woodworkinstitute.com. 199. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 200. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpaorg. B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CPSC - U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 2. DOC - U.S. Department of Commerce; www.commerce.gov. 3. DOD - U.S. Department of Defense; www.defense.gov. 4. DOE - U.S. Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 5. DOJ - U.S. Department of Justice; www.ojp.usdoigov 6. DOS - U.S. Department of State; www.state.gov. 7. EPA - United States Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 8. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 9. GPO - U.S. Government Publishing Office; www.gpo.gov. 10. GSA - U.S. General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. II. HUD - U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 12. LBNL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Energy Technologies Area; www.lbl.gov/. 13. NIST - National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 14. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 15. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies; www.trb.or. 16. USACE - U.S. Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 17. USDA - U.S. Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 18. USDA - U.S. Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 19. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 20. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from U.S. Government Publishing Office; www. ovg info. goy. 2. DOD - U.S. Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.dsp.dla.mil/Specs-Standards/. 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (see FS). 014200-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0142 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. FED -STD - Federal Standard; (see FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.dsp.dla.mit/Specs-Standards/. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from U.S. General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. C. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org. 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (see DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (see USAB). E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. TAS; Texas Accessibility Standards; Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation; www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/abtas.htm 2. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development; https://tfsweb.tamu.edu/. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0142 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 42 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 0150 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 2. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for allowance for metered use of temporary utilities. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. Installation, removal, and use charges for temporary facilities to be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use with metering. Provide connections and extensions of services and metering as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use with metering. Provide connections and extensions of services and metering as required for construction operations. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for commencement of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates of each temporary utility. C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content. D. Fire -Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire -prevention program. E. Moisture- and Mold -Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage and mold. Describe delivery, handling, storage, installation, and protection provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 1. Indicate procedures for discarding water -damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and requirements for replacing water -damaged Work. 2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire -resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. 3. Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 50 00 - I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized -steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized -steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top rails. B. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized -steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized -steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized -steel bases for supporting posts. C. Fencing Windscreen Privacy Screen: Polyester fabric scrim with grommets for attachment to chain - link fence, sized to height of fence, in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices: 1. Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common -Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project -site documents, including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 8 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating, Cooling, and Dehumidifying Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 015000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return -air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: 1. Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, safety shower and eyewash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Use of Permanent Toilets: Use of Owner's existing or new toilet facilities is not permitted. E. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes and their proper curing or drying. F. Electric Power Service: 1. Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. a. Install electric power service underground unless otherwise indicated. b. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 50 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install WiFi cell phone access equipment and one land -based telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide secure WiFi wireless connection to internet with provisions for access by Architect and Owner. J. Project Computer: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following: 1. Processor: Intel Core i5 or i7. 2. Memory: 16 gigabyte. 3. Disk Storage: 1-terabyte hard -disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive. 4. Display: 24-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM. 5. Full-size keyboard and mouse. 6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet. 7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10 Professional. 8. Productivity Software: a. Microsoft Office Professional, 2013 or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader DC. C. WinZip 10.0 or higher. 9. Printer: "All -in -one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions. 10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router, and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 10.0 -Mbps upload and 15 -Mbps download speeds at each computer. 11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application. 12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 2 terrabytes, with automated backup software providing daily backups. k1c, 119Z117l MaINII1*1103ll:1NII:I10010 A. Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary field offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible in accordance with ASTM E136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 015000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Provide dust -control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Use of Planned Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas in accordance with Section 3120 00 "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain, including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire -fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. F. Storage and Staging: Use designated areas of Project site for storage and staging needs. G. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. H. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touch up signs, so they are legible at all times. I. Waste Disposal Facilities: 1. Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 0173 00 "Execution." J. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. K. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. L. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. 1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for that purpose. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 50 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: 1. Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, in accordance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. a. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant -protection zones. b. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation -control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. d. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: 1. Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. F. Pest Control: Engage pest -control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals, so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction. G. Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday. 1. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. J. Temporary Egress: Provide temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide signage directing occupants to temporary egress. K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire -prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking specified in other Sections. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 015000-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign, stating that hoses are for fire -protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Moisture and Mold Protection: Protect stored materials and installed Work in accordance with Moisture and Mold Protection Plan. B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water -damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry -in conditions. 2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified for installed and stored materials. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum -based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective and require replacing. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. C. Remove and replace materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 50 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 50 00 015000-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0157 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 01 5713 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes obtaining permits and furnishing labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to provide erosion and sediment control during construction including furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sediment control structures and procedures and the proper removal when no longer required. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be per Project requirements and include copies of submitted forms and inspection reports as Project progresses. 1.3 TPDES PERMIT A. Permit Provisions: 1. Prepare a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), including site map, per TPDES Construction General Permit (TXR 150000) for Stormwater Discharge associated with construction activity. 2. Contractor shall be Primary Operator of SWPPP, will install and maintain physical measures detailed in Plan, and provide administrative oversight of Plan. 3. Contractor Shall: a. Prepare and submit a Notice of Intent (NOI) to TCEQ with a copy to Owner. b. Sign and post onsite a completed "Construction Site Notice," and provide copy to operator of any separate municipal storm sewer system per permit requirements. C. Install Best Management Practices (BMPs) noted on SWPPP Site Plan. d. Maintain BMPs during construction. e. Periodically inspect BMPs, monitor Plan, file reports, and other items required by TPDES Construction General Permit. Contractor shall maintain a master copy of SWPPP plan at job site and insert copies of required periodic inspection reports into master copy of SWPPP. f. Make revisions to BMPs if needed as construction progresses, revise if BMPs shown do not adequately limit sediments leaving site. g. Prepare and submit a Notice of Termination (NOT) to TCEQ and copy Owner. h. Remove BMPs from Project site. 4. General Permit requirements supersede noted items in the event of a conflict. 5. For assistance in completing NOI or NOT, Contractor may access TCEQ website at www.tceq.state.tx.us. B. Temporary Drainage Provisions: 1. Contractor shall provide for drainage of stormwater and water as applied or discharged onsite in performance of Work. Drainage facilities shall be adequate to prevent damage to Work, site, and adjacent property. 2. Clean, enlarge, or supplement existing drainage channels and conduits as necessary to carry all increased runoff attributable to Contractor operations. Construct dikes as necessary to divert increased runoff from entering adjacent property (except in natural channels), to protect Owner facilities and Work, and direct water to drainage channels or conduits. Ponding provided as necessary to prevent downstream flooding. C. Dust Control: No construction activity shall take place without applying reasonable measures required to prevent particulate matter from becoming airborne, so it remains visible beyond limits FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 5713 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0157 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT of construction. Reasonable measures may include application of water or chemical dust suppressants, paving, frequent road cleaning, and planting vegetative ground cover. Utilize methods and practices of construction to eliminate blowing dust in full observance of state and federal regulations. If dust complaints received by local municipality or Owner, apply reasonable control measures. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS, CODES, AND ORDINANCES A. Comply with local codes and ordinances. If local codes and ordinances require more stringent or additional erosion and sediment control measures during construction, Contractor shall provide such measures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 5713 015713-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0157 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 0157 19 - TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Environmental protection requirements. 2. Protection of natural resources. 3. Erosion and sediment control measures. 4. Control and disposal of solid and sanitary wastes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. These publications form a part of this Specification to extent referenced and are referred to in text by basic designation only. 1. 29 CFR 1910-Subpart G - Occupational Health and Environmental Control. 2. Corps of Engineers (COE) COE EP-1165-2-304 - 1976 Flood Plain Regulations for Flood Plain Management. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Sediment: Soil and other debris that eroded and was transported by runoff water or wind. B. Solid Waste: Rubbish, debris, garbage, and other discarded solid materials resulting from industrial, commercial, agricultural operations, and community activities. C. Rubbish: Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes, glass, crockery, metal, lumber, cans, and bones. D. Debris: Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as ashes and waste materials resulting from construction or maintenance and repair Work, leaves, and tree trimmings. E. Chemical Wastes: Salts, acids, alkalies, herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals, and spent products which serve no purpose. F. Sanitary Wastes: Sewage. G. Wastes Characterized as Domestic Sanitary Sewage: Garbage including refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and consuming food. H. Oily Waste: Petroleum products and bituminous materials. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Provide and maintain, during life of Contract, environmental protection as defined. Contractor shall comply with all requirements as described in Construction General Permit (TXR150000). Plan for and provide environmental protective measures to control pollution that develops during normal construction practice. Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required to correct conditions to develop during construction of permanent or temporary environmental features associated with Project. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations pertaining to environment, including but not limited to water, air, and noise pollution. B. Best Management Practices (BMPs): 1. Waste Materials: Collect and store all waste materials, including construction debris, in a securely lidded metal dumpster. Do not bury construction material onsite. Transit dumpster shall comply with ordinance 18.52.010 (enclosure and removal of waste materials during construction). Dumpster shall be emptied as necessary or as required by ordinance 9.04 (sold waste management) and trash hauled to licensed landfill. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 57 l 9 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 5719 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Hazardous Waste. At minimum, these product categories are considered hazardous: paint, acids for cleaning masonry surfaces, cleaning solvents, asphalt products, chemical additives for spill stabilization, curing compounds, and additives. In the event of a spill which may be hazardous, take immediate action, contact the fire department and TCEQ. 3. Sanitary Waste: All shall be collected from construction portable units as necessary or required, chapter 18.08 (building code), by a licensed sanitary waste management contractor. All waste material shall be responsibility of Contractor. 4. Spill Prevention. Use these practices to reduce risk of spills or other accidental exposures of materials to stormwater runoff a. Good Housekeeping: 1) Store only enough products required to do job. 2) Neatly and orderly store materials onsite. 3) Keep products in original container. 4) Do not mix substances with one another, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 5) Use entire contents of product before disposing container. 6) Follow manufacturer recommendations for proper use and disposal. b. Hazardous product practices used to reduce risks: 1) Keep products in original container if possible. 2) Retain original labels, product information, and material safety data sheets (MSDS). 3) Dispose surplus product per manufacturer-, local-, and/or state - recommended methods. C. Petroleum Products: Monitor all onsite vehicles for leaks and receive regular preventive maintenance to reduce chance of spills. Store petroleum in tightly -sealed containers, clearly labeled. Apply any asphalt substances used onsite per manufacturer recommendation. 5. Spill Control Practices: a. Clearly post manufacturer -recommended methods for spill cleanup and site personnel made aware of procedures. b. Keep materials and equipment necessary for spill cleanup in material storage area onsite. C. Clean all spills immediately after discovery. d. Spill area shall be well ventilated and appropriate clothing worn. e. Report any spill to appropriate governmental agency. f. Take measures to prevent a spill from reoccurring. 6. Maintenance and Inspection Procedures: Inspect all pollution prevention measures at least once a month. Following a storm event of 0.5 inches or more, inspect BMPs and pollution control procedures for adequacy. Keep a record of result of site inspections onsite. 7. Construct disposal areas, stockpiles, and haul roads to minimize and control sediment that may enter receiving waters or streambeds. Construct construction staging areas and vehicle maintenance areas to minimize runoff of pollutants. C. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP): 1. Understand Erosion Control relating to Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES). 2. Install erosion control measures as follows: a. Install silt fencing all existing inlets before start of construction. b. Place temporary swales and desilting basins where necessary to convey stormwater runoff. C. Daily sweep paved street adjacent to site entrance to remove any excess mud, dirt, or rock tracked from site. d. Ensure all erosion control methods are inspected monthly or after every erodible 015719-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0157 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT rainfall (1/2-inch or more). Make any necessary repairs or cleanup to maintain effectiveness of erosion control at that time. e. Measures are recommendations only. Ensure requirements of TPDES are met. D. Perform a preconstruction survey of Project site with Architect; assess existing environmental conditions in and adjacent to site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES A. Preserve natural resources within Project boundaries and outside limits of permanentWork. Restore to equivalent or improved condition upon completion of Work. Confine construction activities to within limits of Work indicated or specified. B. Land Resources: Except in areas cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs without Architect permission. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to existing nearby trees for anchorages unless authorized by Architect. Where use of attached ropes, cables, or guys is authorized, Contractor is responsible for any resultant damage. 1. Protect existing trees to remain and maybe injured, bruised, defaced, or otherwise damaged by construction operations. Remove displaced rocks from uncleared areas. By approved excavation, remove trees with 30+ percent of root systems destroyed. 2. Replacement: Remove trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment operations, and replace with equivalent, undamaged trees and landscape features. Obtain Architect approval before replacement. 3. Temporary Construction: Remove traces of temporary construction facilities (haul roads, Work areas, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste materials, etc.). Grade temporary roads, parking areas, and similar temporarily used areas to conform with surrounding contours. C. Water Resources/Oily Wastes: Prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering ground, drainage areas, or local bodies of water. Surround all temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage tanks with a temporary earth berm of sufficient size and strength to contain contents of tanks in event of leakage or spillage. D. Fish and Wildlife Resources: Do not disturb fish and wildlife, alter water flows, or otherwise significantly disturb native habitat adjacent to Project and critical to survival of fish and wildlife, except as indicated or specified. 3.2 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES A. Carefully protect in -place and report immediately to Architect historical and archaeological items or human skeletal remains discovered in course of Work. Stop Work in immediate area of discovery until directed by Architect to resume. If historical and archaeological resources such as artifacts (stone tools), features (stone walls), deposits (seashells and charcoal stained soil), human bones, and other cultural remains encountered, stop that portion of Work and notify Architect immediately. Within 36 hours, Owner will determine if a change pursuant to Contract should be issued or direct Contractor to proceed without change. No adjustment in Contract price or completion time allowed for delays that do not exceed 36 hours from the time Contractor is notified to stop Work. Owner retains ownership and control over historical and archaeological resources. 3.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES A. Burnoff of ground cover not permitted. B. Manage and control borrow areas to prevent sediment from entering nearby streams or lakes. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 57 l 9 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 01 5719 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Restore areas, including those outside borrow areas, disturbed by borrow and haul operations. Restoration includes grading, replacement of topsoil, and establishment of a permanent vegetative cover. C. Protection of Erodible Soils: Immediately finish earthwork brought to a final grade, as indicated, or specified. Immediately protect side and back slopes upon completion of rough grading. Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize duration of exposure of unprotected soils. D. Temporary Protection of Erodible Soils: Mechanically retard and control rate of runoff from construction site including construction of diversion ditches, benches, and berms to retard and divert runoff to protected drainage courses. 3.4 CONTROL AND DISPOSE SOLID AND SANITARY WASTES A. Pick up solid wastes and place in containers regularly emptied. Do not prepare, cook, or dispose food on Project site. Prevent contamination of site of other areas when handling and disposing wastes. On completion, leave areas clean. Control and dispose waste. 1. Dispose Rubbish and Debris per requirements specified in area as directed by Owner. Rubbish may be disposed in current landfill if all rules for disposal are followed. 2. Place garbage in approved containers and move to a pickup point or disposal area, where directed. 3.5 DUST CONTROL A. Control dust along all haul roads and in Project area. Minimize dust at all times, including nonworking periods. Sprinkle or treat with dust suppressants, site soil, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by operations. END OF SECTION 0157 19 015719-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 0160 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for Contractor requirements related to Owner -furnished products. 2. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 3. Section 0123 00 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 4. Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 5. Section 0142 00 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 6. Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Salvaged items or items reused from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Comparable Product: Product by named manufacturer that is demonstrated and approved through the comparable product submittal process described in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of -design product," including make or model number or other designation. Published attributes and characteristics of basis -of -design product establish salient characteristics of products. 1. Evaluation of Comparable Products: In addition to the basis -of -design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. Manufacturer's published attributes and characteristics of basis -of -design product also establish salient characteristics of products for purposes of evaluating comparable products. C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 60 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications; submit a comparable product request or substitution request, if applicable. D. Comparable Product Request Submittal: An action submittal requesting consideration of a comparable product, including the following information: 1. Identification of basis -of -design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced, including Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 2. Data indicating compliance with the requirements specified in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article. E. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: An action submittal complying with requirements in Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." F. Substitution: Refer to Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures" for definition and limitations on substitutions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- or power - operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. C. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 3. See individual identification Sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional equipment identification requirements. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of approved comparable products and approved substitutions. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 016000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment. 2. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 3. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 4. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation and with adequate protection from wind. 5. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written standard warranty form furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and issued in the name of the Owner or endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner and issued in the name of the Owner or endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included in the Project Manual, prepare a written document, using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 60 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following." 2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following." 3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. 016000-4 a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following." 4. Non -Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed or an unnamed product that complies with requirements. a. Non -limited list of products is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following." b. Provision of an unnamed product is not considered a substitution, if the product complies with requirements. 5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following." 6. Non -Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or a product by an unnamed manufacturer that complies with requirements. a. Non -limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following." b. Provision of products of an unnamed manufacturer is not considered a substitution, if the product complies with requirements. 7. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications may additionally indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require the phrase "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. l . If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. E. Sustainable Product Selection: Where Specifications require product to meet sustainable product characteristics, select products complying with indicated requirements. Comply with requirements in Division 01 sustainability requirements Section and individual Specification Sections. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with the following requirements: 1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those of the named basis -of -design product. Significant product qualities include attributes, such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. B. Architect's Action on Comparable Products Submittal: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation, as specified in Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." 1. Form of Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." 2. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. C. Submittal Requirements, Two -Step Process: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0160 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 60 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 0177 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final Completion procedures. 3. List of incomplete items. 4. Submittal of Project warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0129 00 "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial Completion and Final Completion. 2. Section 0132 33 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographic documentation. 3. Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. List of Incomplete Items: Contractor -prepared list of items to be completed or corrected, prepared for the Architect's use prior to Architect's inspection, to determine if the Work is substantially complete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest -control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items required by other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's "punch list"), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction, permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 77 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment in accordance with Section 0129 00 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and 017700-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list will state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report. 5. Submit Final Completion photographic documentation. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first listed by room or space number. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceilings, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel Electronic File: Architect will return annotated file. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. 1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. E. Warranties in Paper Form: 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by- 11 -inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 77 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. 017700-4 d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited -access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Clean flooring, removing debris, dirt, and staining; clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. i. Vacuum and mop concrete. j. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions if visible soil or stains remain. k. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent. in. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT P. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. q. Clean luminaires, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. r. Clean strainers. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 0150 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste -disposal requirements in Section 0150 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.2 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations required by "Correction of the Work" Article in Section 0173 00 "Execution" before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 0177 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 77 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 0178 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 5. Product maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect or by uploading to web -based project software site. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. E. Comply with Section 0177 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. 1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 78 23 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard -copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by- 11 -inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple -volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by- 11 -inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 017823-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY MANUAL A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. List items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include the following: 1. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. 2. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. 3. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. 1.8 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 78 23 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 1.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures. 1. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. C. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. 017823-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification. 1.10 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information. 1. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below. C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 01 78 23 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. 1. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals. 1.11 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0178 23 017823-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 02 4113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 02 4113 - SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes preparing Project area for construction operations by demolition, removal, and salvage or disposal of all obstructions within limits of Project construction area. Such obstructions are expected to include but not necessarily limited to foundations, asphalt paving, concrete slabs, concrete curb and gutter, existing light poles with concrete footings and associated electrical conduit and wiring, existing water meter boxes, vaults, and valve boxes with associated conduit and appurtenances, existing fence with concrete footings, and all rubbish and debris, whether above or below ground, except live utility facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE A. Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Owner. Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the Architect. Coordinate the Work of this Section with all other Work indicated. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition of Work. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition, deconstruction, or removal Work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by Architect prior to performing such Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Where applicable, all lines separating pavement to remove from that to remain in place, shall be cut neatly, in a straight line, or separated at an existing expansion or construction joint. Make cuts by sawing or other methods approved by Owner's Representative which will produce a satisfactory edge. In no case shall line be cut with a motor grader blade. B. Remove all existing materials to remove and dispose under this item and dispose in appropriate disposal areas off Owner property. Accomplish removal operations to minimize disturbance of existing underlying courses and adjacent pavement structures or improvements to remain in place. Rework, recompact, and regrade any underlying courses disturbed during removal operations to Architect satisfaction. Repair any damage to adjacent pavement structures or improvements to remain in place to Architect satisfaction. C. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, remove all obstructions to 2 feet below lower elevations of excavation or to bottom of structure, whichever is lower. D. Backfill any voids created from removing obstructions within construction area with acceptable material. Compact per requirements of subgrade preparation of Contract Documents. E. Complete Work specified herein so prepared construction area is free of holes, ditches, and other abrupt changes in elevations and irregularities to contour. F. Protect personnel from possible airborne contaminants, including but not limited to, asbestos fibers, FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0241 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 02 4113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT dried fecal matter, and metal dust. G. If material containing asbestos is encountered, an Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan must be prepared. END OF SECTION 02 4113 024113-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Form -facing material for cast -in -place concrete. 2. Shoring, bracing, and anchoring. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 03 11 19 "Insulating Concrete Forms" for formwork related to insulated concrete formed walls. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Form -Facing Material: Temporary structure or mold for the support of concrete while the concrete is setting and gaining sufficient strength to be self-supporting. B. Formwork: The total system of support of freshly placed concrete, including the mold or sheathing that contacts the concrete, as well as supporting members, hardware, and necessary bracing. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1. Review the following: a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control. b. Construction, movement, contraction, and isolation joints C. Forms and form -removal limitations. d. Shoring and reshoring procedures. e. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each of the following: 1. Exposed surface form -facing material. 2. Concealed surface form -facing material. 3. Form ties. 4. Waterstops. 5. Form -release agent. B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by, and signed and sealed by, a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of forms. 1. For exposed vertical concrete walls, indicate dimensions and form tie locations. 2. Indicate dimension and locations of construction and movement joints required to construct the structure in accordance with ACI 301. a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 3. Indicate location of waterstops. 4. Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping of forms, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. B. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 10 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Mockups: Formed surfaces to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build panel approximately 100 sq. ft. in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete Formwork: Design, engineer, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, shores, and reshores in accordance with ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads, so that resulting concrete conforms to the required shapes, lines, and dimensions. 1. Design wood panel forms in accordance with APA's "Concrete Forming Design/Construction Guide." 2. Design formwork to limit deflection of form -facing material to 1/240 of center -to -center spacing of supports. a For architectural concrete specified in Section 03 33 00 "Architectural Concrete," limit deflection of form -facing material, studs, and walers to 0.0025 times their respective clear spans (L/400). 2.2 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. As -Cast Surface Form -Facing Material: 1. Provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. 2. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 3. Acceptable Materials: As required to comply with Surface Finish designations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -In -Place Concrete, and as follows: a Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Concealed Surface Form -Facing Material: Lumber, plywood, metal, plastic, or another approved material. 1. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Pan -Type Forms: Glass -fiber -reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation, with [straight] [or] [tapered] end forms. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- thick, galvanized -steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. E. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. 2. Form release agent for form liners shall be acceptable to form liner manufacturer. F. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off, glass -fiber -reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 031000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FORMWORK A. Comply with ACI 301. B. Construct formwork, so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 and to comply with the Surface Finish designations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for as -cast finishes. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities as follows: 1. Surface Finish-1.0: ACI 117 Class D, 1 inch. 2. Surface Finish-2.0: ACI 117 Class B, 1/4 inch. 3. Surface Finish-3.0: ACI 117 Class A, 1/8 inch. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 1. Minimize joints. 2. Exposed Concrete: Symmetrically align joints informs. E. Construct removable forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. 1. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast -concrete surfaces. 2. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 3. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and other accessories, for easy removal. F. Do not use rust -stained, steel, form -facing material. G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. 1. Provide and secure units to support screed strips 2. Use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. 1. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 2. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. J. At construction joints, overlap forms onto previously placed concrete not less than 12 inches. K. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. 1. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. 2. Obtain written approval of Architect prior to forming openings not indicated on Drawings. L. Construction and Movement Joints: 1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 2. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 3. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. 4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 10 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam - girder intersection. 5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 6. Space vertical joints in walls at 25 feet on center, maximum. a. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. M. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. 1. Locate ports and openings in bottom of vertical forms, in inconspicuous location, to allow flushing water to drain. 2. Close temporary ports and openings with tight -fitting panels, flush with inside face of form, and neatly fitted, so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. N. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. O. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. P. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. 1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through -wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 4. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures, as indicated on Drawings. 5. Clean embedded items immediately prior to concrete placement. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS A. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. 1. Obtain written approval of Architect prior to forming openings not indicated on Drawings. 3.4 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form -removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. 1. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material are unacceptable for exposed surfaces. 2. Apply new form -release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. 1. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. 031000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.5 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Inspect formwork for shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete member being formed. END OF SECTION 03 10 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 10 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 1119 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 03 1119 — INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes insulated concrete forming and accessories and installationrequirements: 1. Furnish all labor and materials, tools and equipment to perform the complete erection/ installation of the Insulating Concrete Form System (ICF), installation of reinforcing steel, placement of concrete within formwork, and final cleanup. 2. Adequate bracing and false work shall be provided by the Installing Contractor to comply with all applicable Codes. 3. Products Supplied but Not Installed Under This Section: a. EPS compatible modified bituminous sheet waterproofing membrane. 4. Products Installed but Provided by Others Under This Section: a. Sleeves. b. Embeds. C. Anchors, bolts. 5. Products Provided and Installed Under This Section: a. Reinforcing steel. b. Window and door opening framingiblocking. C. Concrete. d. Steel embeds. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing. 5. Section 06 10 00 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 07 27 26 - Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barrier. 7. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation. 8. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 9. Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts. 10. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit. 11V► R:337*TjI:11I[I)MV.1107T1jZ17►1'/uki A. EPS: Acronym for "Expanded Polystyrene" when referencing the insulating foam component of the Insulating Concrete Form System. B. ICF: Acronym for "Insulating (or Insulated) Concrete Form." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Form Alignment System: A form alignment and scaffold system designed exclusively for use with Insulating Concrete Forms. B. Trained Installer: An installation Contractor, who has received instructional training in the installation of the specified Insulating Concrete Form System and is capable of providing written verification of his designation as such by the specified manufacturer of the system being installed. C. Window or Door Opening Framing/Blocking: A site constructed frame assembly consisting of fire - retardant, pressure -treated wood used to frame a rough opening within the forming system that will retain concrete around the opening. The frame can also provide for subsequent anchorage of doors and windows within the wall assembly. Shore and anchor all opening framing to eliminate movement during concrete placement. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 11 19 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 1119 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 318/318R - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-08) and Commentary. B. ACI 301 — Specifications for Structural Concrete. C. ASTM C165 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulations. D. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus. E. ASTM C203 - Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block- Type Thermal Insulation. F. ASTM C272 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions. G. ASTM C303 - Standard Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block and Board -Type Thermal Insulation. H. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. I. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. J. ASTM D 1621- Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. K. ASTM D1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. L. ASTM D2126 - Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging. M. ASTM D2863 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle -Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index). N. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. O. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. P. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission ofMaterials. Q. ASTM E336 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Attenuation between Rooms in Buildings. R. ASTM E2634 - Standard Specification for Flat Wall Insulating Concrete Form (ICF) Systems. S. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice For Placing Reinforcing Bars T. AC 12 - Acceptance Criteria for Foam Plastic Insulation. U. AC 15 - Concrete Floor, Roof and Wall Systems and Concrete Masonry Wall Systems. V. AC 353 - Stay -In -Place, Foam Plastic Insulating Concrete Form (ICF) Systems for Solid Concrete. W. NFPA 259 - Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials. X. NFPA 268 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. Y. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non -Load -Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components. Z. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. AA. AA. UBC 26-3 - Room Fire Test Standard for Interior Foam Plastic Systems. BB. BB. UBC 26-4 - Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior, Non -load -bearing Wall Panel Assemblies Using Foam Plastic Insulation. CC. CC. UBC 26-9 - Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior, Non -load -bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate - Scale, Multi -Story Test Apparatus. DD. DD. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 031119-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT 492551 SECTION 03 1119 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Relevant laboratory tests or data that validate product compliance with performance criteria specified prior to commencing Work. B. Contractor or Certified installer qualifications with ICF commercial project experience including the following: 1. Identify on corporate letterhead: a. Firm's legal name. b. Federal ID number. C. Address. d. Phone number. e. Fax number. f. Corporate e-mail address. g. Number of years of experience successfully installing the ICF system being submitted for consideration. 2. Submit 3 projects references. Projects must be of similar size and complexity. Do not repeat references. C. Wall Bracing information. D. Form Alignment System Engineering: ICF Contractor shall provide an engineered scaffold plan detailing the Form Alignment System to be implemented during construction for all ICF wall assemblies. The scaffolding plan must be sealed by an Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. E. ICC-ES ESR Report. F. Shop Drawings indicating locations of proposed construction joints required to construct the structure in accordance with ACI 301. Joint locations are subject to the approval of the Primary Designer. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Relevant laboratory tests or data that validate product compliance with performance criteria specified prior to commencing Work. B. Copy of manufacturer's product installation manual. 1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Warranty Documentation: Product warranty documentation specified under Quality Assurance shall be supplied to Contractor (for subsequent provision to building owner) upon completion of building construction. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall engage a Manufacturer Certified Installer or Certified Technical Advisor for the duration of the work under this Section. The Certified Installer or Certified Technical Advisor shall furnish proof of certification documentation and have a minimum of 5 years verifiable field experience on commercial ICF projects. Contractor without manufacturer certification shall have a minimum of 7 years' experience on ICF commercialprojects. B. Mockups: If required, construct sample wall mockup panel to include full wall system and details, located where directed by Architect. Panel may form part of finished Work if approved by Architect. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original factory packaging, bearing Identification of product manufacturer and batch/lot number. Handle and store products in location to prevent damaging and soiling. B. Ensure that UV protection is provided for material, should on -site storage extend beyond 30 days. C. Handle and store products in location to prevent damaging and soiling. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 11 19 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 1119 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT D. Maintain form materials and accessories in original packaging or provide similar protection to unpackaged form materials -should on -site storage prior to installation extend beyond 3 months. E. Form units and related form installation materials and equipment to be stored flat until time of use. F. ICF Installer is required to secure all ICF at all times during construction to prevent forms from leaving site due to high wind conditions. 1.10 SITE CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Use appropriate measures for protection and supplementary heating when required to ensure proper curing conditions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Conform to ACI requirements for placing concrete in cold weather conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ICF WALL FORMS A. Concrete Forms - a structural stay -in -place concrete forming system, consisting of opposing expanded polystyrene (EPS) panels with minimum 2-5/8-inch insulation thickness each side, held parallel by means of connectors or ties (webs), which serves to provide insulating characteristics as well as concrete pour formworks. Where One -Series forms are specified, the inner layer of EPS is removed and replaced with a plywood form and the concrete core has 2-5/8-inch of additional width. Approved Block Systems: 1. Nudura: www.nudura.com (Design and product reference standard used). 2. Substitutions: other systems approved prior to bid in accordance with Section 0160 00 requirements. B. Wall system to provide uniform monolithic concrete core wall of the thickness detailed on the 03 11 19-4 Drawings. 1. Wall system Webs - are plastic bridging that hold the EPS panels at a set distance and provide resistance to the concrete pressure. They are also used as attachment points for interior and exterior finishing materials and horizontal reinforcing spacers. Webs shall be spaced at 8 inches o.c. unless thicker wall assembly is indicated at a location. Webs shall be consistent width indicated full height of form. The webs shall be recessed in form so they are not exposed. 2. Insulating concrete form system shall consist of 2 flame resistant panels of expanded polystyrene (EPS) connected by either high -density polypropylene hinged pin foldable webs or EPS embedded polystyrene fastening strips interconnected with slide in format - high density polypropylene web connectors. EPS foam panels shall feature continuous vertical dove tail grooves on interior panel surfaces to provide integral surface bonding to concrete core once filled and concrete is cured. Dove tail grooves shall also facilitate structural linkage with end cap forms placed into the form cavity where required as part of the overall architectural design layout. 3. All web fastening strips to run full height of form and be fitted top and bottom with reversible fitting, "triple -tooth" interlocking mechanisms to enable positive vertical interlocking of forms with each other. Wall system webs to provide minimum 1-1/2- inch - wide fastening strips at 8 inches o.c., approximately 5/8 inch below insulation face to facilitate finish fastening of both interior and exterior finishes. 4. Insulating concrete form system shall be capable of forming ALL of following concrete core thicknesses: 4-, 6-, 8-, 10-, or 12-inch wall sections as required for various locations throughout project scope with standard form line-up. Refer to Structural Drawings for form dimensional requirements. 5. All form units of wall forming system shall be capable of being shipped to site in folded FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT 492551 SECTION 03 1119 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT condition to minimize shipping cost and site storage space requirement andbe capable of being deployed to installation ready condition by simply unfolding the unit in a single pull motion or pull motion combined with insertion of a single web. 6. Standards, corner forms, and standalone panels of form system shall provide fully reversible interlocks along top and bottom edges to assure minimum product waste on site. EPS foam panels shall be molded with 1 inch wide by 1/2 inch high/deep alternating male/female reversible projection/socket interlocks positioned in pairs along both top and bottom edges of allpanels. 7. Wall system shall be capable of providing horizontal and vertical lock positioning of steel within form cavity to conform to all reinforcing requirements of ACI 318 and the Structural Drawings. 8. Wall system to provide accurate positioning of steel within form cavity to conform to ACI 318. 9. EPS foam to provide maximum water vapor permeance of 3.5 per ASTM E96 and minimum of R-18 considering insulation forms only. 10. Provide preformed brick ledge and other special forms to create the wall profile indicated in section. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Form system manufacturer shall provide written documentation verifying active compliance to ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria AC-353 "Stay -in -place, Foam Plastic Insulating Concrete Form (ICF) Systems for Solid Concrete," with valid listing in the report verifying qualification of form system for use in Types I through V construction as qualified under the governing Building Code for this project. 2. Documentation shall verify compliance to the following regulatory documents and standards: a. Form system structural, and general performance assessment of properties of EPS foam and polypropylene materials assessment in accordance with ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation (which includes results for): 1) ASTM C165 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulation. 2) ASTM C203 - Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block -Type Thermal Insulation. 3) ASTM C272 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions. 4) ASTM C303 - Standard Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block and Board -Type Thermal Insulation. 5) ASTM D1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 6) ASTM D 1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 7) ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. b. Finish attachment testing in accordance with ASTM D1761 - Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood (Modified for Polypropylene Web assessment). C. Surface Burning, Flash Ignition and Self Ignition Temperature Characteristics assessment of both plastic web and EPS form materials in accordancewith: 1) ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 2) ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 11 19 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 1119 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Building Materials. 3) ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics. d. Verification of performance and compliance of finishes for provision thermal barrier protection to foam plastic in accordance with one of the following: 1) NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. 2) UBC 26-3 - Room Fire Test Standard for Interior Foam Plastic Systems. 3) UL Fire Classification U931. e. Fire Resistance Rated Construction Assessment: In accordance with UL 263, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2.2 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B. Masonry ties: Refer Section 04 20 00. C. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers for concrete not exposed to weather or moisture: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement. D. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports and Spacers for concrete surfaces exposed to weather: plastic or plastic coated steel type; size and shape as required. E. Plastic Washers: Wind -lock ULP-302 Plates or equivalent. F. ICF foam Adhesive: Wind -lock Foam 2 Foam Quick Curing or equivalent. G. Form Alignment System: 1. Trained Installer shall furnish and utilize the Wall Access and Form Alignment System as supplied by the Manufacturer or an approved equivalent to facilitate construction of the wall assembly, and to provide adjustment for ensuring plumbness and straightness of the wall system during construction, just prior to concrete placement and immediately after concrete placement while form system is still adjustable to final finished position. 2. Form Alignment System shall be OSHA compliant. Technical Associate shall supply engineering documentation pertaining to the "base" Form Alignment System components to verify compliance upon request. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Inspect all areas to establish extent of work and verify site access conditions. Coordinate building layout with Contractor and confirm accuracy prior to casting walls. 2. Verify that site conditions meet manufacturer's requirements. B. Evaluation and Assessment: 1. Examine footings installed under Section 03 30 00 are within f 1/4 inch of level and that step footing increments are 18 inches in height. 2. Where partial or half course is intended for starting course elevation, ensure step footing increment is equal to cut form unit less 1/2 inch. 3. When specified, ensure reinforcing steel dowels are in place at specified centers along footing lengths. 4. Ensure reinforcement steel dowels have OSHA compliant protection installed until formwork is erected above dowel level. 5. Prior to casting concrete, advise Architect and Owner and request in -wall review of steel reinforcing placement. 03 11 19-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT 492551 SECTION 03 1119 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ACI 301 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Construction formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Install forms in running bond pattern. 1. Align joints. 2. Align furring strips. D. Construction forms tight to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. 1. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. 2. Obtain written approval of Architect prior to forming openings not indicated on Drawings. F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. 1. Location ports and openings in bottom of vertical forms, in inconspicuous location, to allow flushing water to drain. 2. Close temporary ports and openings with tight -fitting panels, flush with inside face of form, and neatly fitted, so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. G. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. H. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 1. Shore insulating concrete forms to ensure stability and to resist stressing imposed by construction loads. J. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress, preferably in compression zones of concrete members. Splices should comply with ACI 318 and should develop full strength of reinforcement. Lap splices shall be Class B. K. Stagger lap splices and detail as required by ACI 318 and CRSI 63. L. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS A. Clean all debris from top of slabs prior to commencing work. Secure forms to slab/footing to insure alignment and avoid movement during concrete placement. Coordinate with installer to key in foundations to lock in wall concrete as may be detailed. B. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. C. Furnish complete wall alignment system and brace system to aid in construction of the wall system. Provide an adjustable device for maintaining plumbness of the wall during construction. Maximum spacing of wall bracing shall be 6 ft or less. D. Coordinate with appropriate trades for service penetrations (such as electrical service conduits, water service pipes, air supply and exhaust ducts, etc.). Penetrations shall be placed at the required locations as indicated by the appropriate trade. Service penetrations exceeding 16 inches square shall be reinforced. 1. Prior to placing concrete, provide PVC pipe sleeves at service penetrations to create voids where services can be passed through at a later date. E. Ship forms assembled. F. Wood Block -outs for windows and doors shall be braced and screwed off each side (maximum spacing 8-inch o.c.) with plastic washer plates. Block -outs shall be supported to avoid movement during concrete placement. Maximum spacing of vertical and horizontal bracing shall be 24-inches FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 11 19 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 1119 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT o.c. and 36-inches o.c., respectively. Block -outs to be left in placed shall be anchored to the concrete with 1/2-inch x 6-inch anchor bolts at 24 inches o.c. with heads and washers recessed into blocking to avoid conflict with item installed in opening. G. Blockouts or extra blocking for specialty items such as Fire Extinguisher cabinets or toilet accessories: Coordinate with installing trade for requirements. H. Horizontal Reinforcement Placement: Assure reinforcement diameter, grade and positioning is accurate to engineering specifications on structural drawings and installed in correct axis of wall for each course placed. I. Form Alignment System/Installation: Assure Form Alignment System is regularly checked for crew safety, anchorage to form system as specified, vertical alignment checks at both pre - placement of concrete as well. J. Vertical Reinforcement Placement: Assure reinforcement diameter, grade, and positioning is accurate to engineering specifications on structural drawings and installed in correct axis of wall, prior to placement of concrete. K. Pre -Concrete Placement Inspection: Installer shall assure string lines are place at top of all pours and wall system aligned for placement, cross check and assure that all required service penetration sleeves, embed plates, anchor bolts, fittings, beam pocket preparations, as specified on drawings are in place prior to commencement of concrete placement. L. Consolidate wall concrete with internal vibrator or ICF external Wall Banger. Maintain the concrete slump specified for ICF walls in Section 03 30 00 to insure properconsolidation. M. Provide spray foam at base of forms to prevent concrete and gray water from exitingform. 3.4 CLEAN-UP A. Clean-up and properly dispose of all debris remaining on job site related to the installation of the insulated concrete forms. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Assure final finishes are installed over form product, or provide temporary coverage of installation to reduce EPS foam surface exposure to ultraviolet light, should final finish application be delayed longer than 18 months after form product installation. B. Consult with exterior finish Contractor concerning exposure of EPS to ultraviolet light to ensure proper finish to ICF walls. 031119-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT 492551 SECTION 03 1119 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING (ICF) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT ATTACHMENT A Summary of Specified Form Unit Thicknesses and Dimensions Product Feature 4 inches 6 inches 8 inches 10 inches 12 inches Standard Form Unit Length 96 96 96 96 96 Width 9-1/4 11-1/4 13-1/4 15-1/4 17-1/4 Height 18 18 18 18 18 EPS Thickness 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 90 Degree Form Unit Length (a) (ing) 31-5/8 31-5/8 33-5/8 35-5/8 37-5/8 Length (b) (sht) 15-5/8 15-5/8 17-5/8 19-5/8 21-5/8 Width 9-1/4 11-1/4 13-1/4 15-1/4 17-1/4 Height 18 18 18 18 18 45 Degree Form Unit Length (a) (ing) 26-1/2 26-1/2 26-1/2 28-1/2 30-1/2 Length (b) (sht) 10-1/2 10-1/2 10-1/2 12-1/2 14-1/2 Width 9-1/4 11-1/4 13-1/4 15-1/4 17-1/4 Height 18 18 18 18 18 1- and 2-Sided Tapered Top Form Units Length 48 48 48 48 48 Width 9-1/4 11-1/4 13-1/4 15-1/4 17-1/4 Height 18 18 18 18 18 EPS Thickness 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 Molded Brick Ledge* Length 48 48 48 48 48 Width 9-1/4 11-1/4 13-1/4 15-1/4 17-1/4 Height 18 18 18 18 18 T-Form Units (main & T-wall core thickness matching) Lg. T Mn. Lgth 18 20 22 24 26 Sh. T Mn. Lgth 50 52 54 56 58 Height 18 18 18 18 18 EPS Thickness 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 Molded Brick Ledge & Tapered Top Unit Length 48 48 48 48 48 Width 9-1/4 11-1/4 13-1/4 15-1/4 17-1/4 Height 18 18 18 18 18 Brick Ledge Extension Length 32 32 32 32 32 Width 4-1/2 4-1/2 4-1/2 4-1/2 4-1/2 Height 13-1/2 13-1/2 13-1/2 13-1/2 13-1/2 End Cap Width 4-1/4 6-1/4 8-1/4 10-1/4 12-1/4 Height 18 18 18 18 18 EPS Thickness 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 Fast. Strip. Op. YES YES YES YES YES Height Adjuster Length 32 32 32 32 32 Height 3 3 3 3 3 Fast. Strip. Op. YES YES YES YES YES * Where One -Series forms are specified, the width of the concrete core will be increased by 2-5/8 inch. ** These form units sold in 96-inch lengths in some regions of the USA. END OF SECTION 03 1119 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 11 19 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel reinforcement bars. 2. Welded -wire reinforcement. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 32 13 13 "Concrete Paving" for reinforcing related to concrete pavement and walks. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review the following: a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control. b. Construction contraction and isolation joints. C. Steel -reinforcement installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of steel reinforcement. 2. Epoxy repair coating. 3. Zinc repair material. 4. Bar supports. 5. Mechanical splice couplers. 6. Structural thermal break insulated connection system. B. Shop Drawings: Comply with ACI SP-066: 1. Include placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. 2. Include bar sizes, lengths, materials, grades, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, location of splices, lengths of lap splices, details of mechanical splice couplers, details of welding splices, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 3. For structural thermal break insulated connection system, indicate general configuration, insulation dimensions, tension bars, compression pads, shear bars, and dimensions. C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to build the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Primary Designer. D. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage, and to avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 1. Store reinforcement to avoid contact with earth. 2. Do not allow epoxy -coated reinforcement to be stored outdoors for more than 60 days without being stored under an opaque covering. 3. Do not allow dual -coated reinforcement to be stored outdoors for more than 60 days without being stored under an opaque covering. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 20 00 - I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Do not allow stainless steel reinforcement to come into contact with uncoated reinforcement. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, [Grade 60] [Grade 75] [Grade 80] [Grade 100], deformed. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Epoxy -Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, ASTM A775/A775M epoxy coated. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded -wire reinforcement in place. 1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete in accordance with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: a. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire, all -plastic bar supports, or CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar supports. D. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508 inch in diameter. 1. Finish: Plain. 2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection of In -Place Conditions: 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. 2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. 1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. 2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. C. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch, not less than one bar diameter, or not less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is greater. D. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318. E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. F. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Drawings. 1. Bars indicated to be continuous, and all vertical bars shall be lapped not less than 36 bar diameters at splices, or 24 inches, whichever is greater. 032000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Stagger splices in accordance with ACI 318. G. Install structural thermal break insulated connection system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Install welded -wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths. 1. Support welded -wire reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." a. For reinforcement less than W4.0 or D4.0, continuous support spacing shall not exceed 12 inches. 2. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one wire spacing plus 2 inches for plain wire and 8 inches for deformed wire. 3. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 4. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Primary Designer. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. B. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length, to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Comply with ACI 117. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel -reinforcement placement. END OF SECTION 03 20 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 20 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast -in -place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 03 10 00 "Concrete Forming and Accessories" for form -facing materials, form liners, insulating concrete forms, and waterstops. 3. Section 03 11 19 "Insulating Concrete Forming." 4. Section 03 20 00 "Concrete Reinforcing" for steel reinforcing bars and welded -wire reinforcement. 5. Section 31 20 00.10 "Earth Moving for Facility" for drainage fill under slabs -on -ground. 6. Section 32 13 13 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in -place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. C. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete Subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor. 2. Review the following: a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control. b. Construction joints, control joints, isolation joints, and joint -filler strips. c. Semirigid joint fillers. d. Vapor -retarder installation. e. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances. f. Cold and hot weather concreting procedures. g. Concrete finishes and finishing. h. Curing procedures. i. Forms and form -removal limitations. j. Shoring and reshoring procedures. k. Methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness. 1. Floor and slab flatness and levelness measurements. M. Concrete repair procedures. n. Concrete protection. o. Initial curing and field curing of field test cylinders (ASTM C31/C31M.) p. Protection of field cured field test cylinders. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 30 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following: 1. Mixture identification. 2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength. 3. Durability exposure class. 4. Maximum w/cm. 5. Slump limit. 6. Air content. 7. Nominal maximum aggregate size. 8. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if permitted. 9. Intended placement method. 10. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Curing compounds. 4. Floor and slab treatments. 5. Bonding agents. 6. Adhesives. 7. Vapor retarders. 8. Semirigid joint filler. 9. Joint -filler strips. 10. Repair materials. B. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as an ACI- certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is a certified ACI Flatwork Concrete Finisher/Technician or an ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician. 1. Post -Installed Concrete Anchors Installers: ACI-certified Adhesive Anchor Installer. B. Ready -Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready - mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on each concrete mixture. 1. Include the following information in each test report: a. Admixture dosage rates. b. Slump. C. Air content. 033000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT d. Seven-day compressive strength. e. 28-day compressive strength. f. Permeability. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with ASTM C94 and ACI 301. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows. 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F, other than reinforcing steel. 5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I Type II Type I/II or Type III, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Alkali -Silica Reaction: Comply with one of the following: a. Expansion Result of Aggregate: Not more than 0.04 percent at one-year when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1293. 2. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal. 3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. E. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94, potable. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A; not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 30 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Raven Industries, Inc. b. Reef Industries, Inc. C. Stego Industries, LLC. 2.4 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap -polyethylene sheet. 1. Color: a. Ambient Temperature Below 50 deg F: Black. b. Ambient Temperature between 50 deg F and 85 deg F: Any color. C. Ambient Temperature Above 85 deg F: White. C. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C I 602/C I 602M. D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming, Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dayton Superior. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 in accordance with ASTM D2240. 2.6 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150 portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement, as defined in ASTM C219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand, as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4,100 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150 portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement, as defined in ASTM C219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5,000 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL 033000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs, based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing, high -range water -reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings and Grade Beams: Proportion normal -weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,000 psi. 2. Minimum Slump: 3 inches. 3. Maximum Slump: 5 inches. 4. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture: 8 inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch slump. 5. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio: 0.45. 6. Cementitious material shall be 15 percent fly ash by weight. B. Slab -on -Grade: Proportion normal -weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,000 psi. 2. Minimum Slump: 3 inches. 3. Maximum Slump: 6 inches. 4. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio: 0.45. 5. Cementitious material shall be 15 percent fly ash by weight. C. Topping Slabs: Proportion normal -weight concrete as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,000 psi. 2. Minimum Slump: 3 inches. 3. Maximum Slump: 6 inches. 4. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio: 0.45. 5. Cementitious material shall be 15 percent fly ash by weight. D. Insulated Concrete Form (ICF) Walls: Proportion normal -weight concrete as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,000 psi. 2. Minimum Slump: 5 inches. 3. Maximum Slump: 7 inches. 4. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio: 0.45. 5. Cementitious material shall be 15 percent fly ash by weight. E. Maximum aggregate size 1/2-inch. F. Air Content: Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch-nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch-nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch-nominal maximum aggregate size. G. Do not air -entrain concrete to trowel -finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. H. Admixtures with chloride -ions are prohibited. I. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete and concrete with a water- cementitious material ratio below 0.50. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 30 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories, and reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections, acceptable to testing agency, including the following: 1. Daily access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Secure space for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including source of water and continuous electrical power at Project site during site curing period for test samples. 4. Security and protection for test samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. 1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSUAISC 303. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour. 2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour. 3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and grade beams not less than 6 inches, sealing vapor retarder to concrete. 4. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 5. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of floor slabs, grade beams, and pile caps, sealing entire perimeter to floor slabs, grade beams, foundation walls, or pile caps. 6. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. 7. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete. a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material, overlapping damages area by 6 inches on all sides, and sealing to vapor retarder. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 033000-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence. 1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on Drawings or as approved by Architect. 2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders at third points of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam -girder intersection. C. Construction Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Form weakened -plane control joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of control joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than I inch below finished concrete surface, where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: 1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings. 2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed. 1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient installation, and repair defective areas. 2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses. B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete placement. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture. E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. 1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. Use tremie or other means to limit free fall of concrete to 5 feet. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 30 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with ACI 301. a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. C. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence. 2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas. 6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. 8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. As -Cast Surface Finishes: 1. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-1.0: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material. a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches wide or 1/2 inch deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch. C. Tie holes do not require patching. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class D. e. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. 2. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-3.0: As cast -concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1/8 inch. C. Patch tie holes. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class A. e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. f. Provide a mock-up of concrete surface appearance and texture. B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to as cast surface finishes where indicated on Drawings: 1. Grout -Cleaned Rubbed Finish: a. Clean concrete surfaces after contiguous surfaces are completed and accessible. b. Do not clean concrete surfaces as Work progresses. C. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand, complying with ASTM C144 or ASTM C404, by volume, with sufficient water to produce a mixture with the consistency of thick paint. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. d. Wet concrete surfaces. e. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface 033000-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT with clean burlap, and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: 1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. 2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: 1. While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull -floated or darbied. 2. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile depth of 1/4 inch in one direction. 3. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: 1. When bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of specific float apparatus, consolidate concrete surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power -driven floats. 2. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture and complies with ACI 117 tolerances for conventional concrete. 3. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. D. Trowel Finish: 1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power - driven trowel. 2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. 3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 4. Do not add water to concrete surface. 5. Do not apply hard -troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content greater than 3 percent. 6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin -film - finish coating system. 7. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, in accordance with ASTM E1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Slabs on Ground: 1) Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch and 1/16 inch 2 feet. b. Suspended Slabs: 1) Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch and 1/16 inch 2 feet. E. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 30 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT scarify surface with a fine broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 1. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 2. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel -finished floor surfaces. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations indicated on Drawings. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. 1. Cast -in inserts and accessories, as shown on Drawings. 2. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces. 3.10 CONCRETE CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 1. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing. 2. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 for hot -weather protection during curing. 3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h, calculated in accordance with ACI 305.1, before and during finishing operations. B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows: 1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. 2. Cure concrete containing color pigments in accordance with color pigment manufacturer's instructions. 3. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. 4. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period, as follows: a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final setting of concrete. b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet. C. Absorptive Cover: Pre -dampen absorptive material before application; apply additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface continuously wet. d. Water -Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams. e. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows: 1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. 2. Interior Concrete Floors: a. Floors to Receive Floor Coverings Specified in Other Sections: Contractor has option of the following: 1) Absorptive Cover: As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire area of floor. a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12-inches. b) Maintain absorptive cover water saturated, and in place, for duration of curing period, but not less than seven days. 033000-10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2) Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. b) Cure for not less than seven days. 3) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following: a) Water. b) Continuous water -fog spray. b. Floors to Receive Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments: Contractor has option of the following: 1) Absorptive Cover: As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire area of floor. a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12 inches. b) Maintain absorptive cover water saturated, and in place, for duration of curing period, but not less than seven days. 2) Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. b) Cure for not less than seven days. 3) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following: a) Water. b) Continuous water -fog spray. C. Floors to Receive Polished Finish: Contractor has option of the following: 1) Absorptive Cover: As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire area of floor. a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12 inches. b) Maintain absorptive cover water saturated, and in place, for duration of curing period, but not less than seven days. 2) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following: a) Water. b) Continuous water -fog spray. d. Floors to Receive Chemical Stain: 1) As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install curing paper over entire area of floor. 2) Install curing paper square to building lines, without wrinkles, and in a single length without end joints. 3) Butt sides of curing paper tight; do not overlap sides of curing paper. 4) Leave curing paper in place for duration of curing period, but not less than 28 days. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 30 00 - 11 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT e. Floors to Receive Urethane Flooring: 1) As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire area of floor. 2) Rewet absorptive cover, and cover immediately with polyethylene moisture - retaining cover with edges lapped 6 inches and sealed in place. 3) Secure polyethylene moisture -retaining cover in place to prohibit air from circulating under polyethylene moisture -retaining cover. 4) Leave absorptive cover and polyethylene moisture -retaining cover in place for duration of curing period, but not less than 28 days. f. Floors to Receive Curing Compound: 1) Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer. g. Floors to Receive Curing and Sealing Compound: 1) Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 3) Repeat process 24 hours later, and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Conform to ACI 117. 3.12 APPLICATION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. 4. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. 5. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. 2. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. D. Overfill joint, and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: 1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. 2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. 033000-12 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. C. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. e. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. b. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. a. Correct low and high areas. b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing surface -finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. a. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. b. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping. a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. C. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 30 00 - 13 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. C. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare testing and inspection reports. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. 1. Testing agency shall be responsible for providing curing container for composite samples on Site and verifying that field -cured composite samples are cured in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M. 2. Testing agency shall immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents. 3. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner, Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections and tests. a. Test reports shall include reporting requirements of ASTM C31, ASTM C39, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to each test and inspection: 1) Project name. 2) Name of testing agency. 3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians performing inspections and testing. 4) Name of concrete manufacturer. 5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing. 6) Date and time of concrete placement. 7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples. 8) Date and time sample was obtained. 9) Truck and batch ticket numbers. 10) Design compressive strength at 28 days. 11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials. 12) Field test results. 13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing, including curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures during initial curing period. 14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven days and 28 days. C. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery ticket to testing agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size, design air content, design slump at time of batching, and amount of water that can be added at Project site. D. Inspections: 1. Headed bolts and studs. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and 033000-14 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT slabs. 6. Batch Plant Inspections: On a random basis, as determined by Architect. E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M: a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal -weight concrete. a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M: a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M: a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of three 6-inch by 12-inch or 4-inch by 8-inch cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. a. Test one set of three laboratory -cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. Test one set of two field -cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. C. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory - cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in -place concrete. 8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength, and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi if specified compressive strength is 5,000 psi, or no compressive strength test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive strength if specified compressive strength is greater than 5,000 psi. 9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 10. Additional Tests: a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with ACI 301 section 1.6.6.3. 11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 30 00 - 15 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. F. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155 within 48 hours of completion of floor finishing and promptly report test results to Architect. 3.16 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows: 1. Protect from petroleum stains. 2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces. 3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs. 4. Prohibit use of pipe -cutting machinery over concrete surfaces. 5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces. 6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces. 7. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. 8. Protect concrete surfaces scheduled to receive surface hardener or polished concrete finish using Floor Slab Protective Covering. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 033000-16 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 35 43 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 03 35 43 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete not designated as polished concrete. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Design Reference Sample: Sample designated by Architect in the Contract Documents that reflects acceptable surface quality and appearance of polished concrete. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with polished concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Cast -in -place concrete subcontractor. C. Polished concrete finishing Subcontractor. 2. Review cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction joints, concrete repair procedures, concrete finishing, and protection of polished concrete. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Polishing Schedule: Submit plan showing polished concrete surfaces and schedule of polishing operations for each area of polished concrete before start of polishing operations. Include locations of all joints, including construction joints. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as an ACI- certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is a certified ACI Flatwork Concrete Finisher/Technician or an ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician with experience installing and finishing concrete, incorporating permeability -reducing admixtures. 1. Post -Installed Concrete Anchors Installers: ACI-certified Adhesive Anchor Installer. B. Mockups: Before casting concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups (10 feet by 10 feet) in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Demonstrate curing, finishing, and protecting of polished concrete. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 35 43 - I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 35 43 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Advanced Floor Products; Retro Plate 99. b. Ardex Americas; PC 50 Lithium Densifier. C. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard. d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; FGS Hardener Plus. e. QuestMark; DiamondQuest Densifying Impregnator. f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Shine Clear. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 POLISHING A. Polish: Level 2: Low sheen, 400 grit. B. Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs to match accepted mockup. 1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth and to depth required to reveal aggregate to match approved mockup. 2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive coats. 3. Continue polishing with progressively finer -grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level, to match approved mockup. 4. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations. 5. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Aggregate Installation: 1. Aggregate shall be hard seeded from above slab for a consistent field appearance. 2. Coordinate the exact procurement of aggregate placement with the concrete finishing crew at the Pre -installation meeting. B. Floor Surface Polishing and Treatment: 1. Provide polished concrete floor treatment in entirety of slab indicated by drawings. 2. Provide consistent finish in all contiguous areas. 3. Diamond polish concrete floor surfaces with power disk machined recommended by floor finish manufacturer. a Comply with manufacturer's recommended polishing grits for each sequence to achieve desired finish level. Level of sheen shall match that of approved mock-up. b. All concrete surfaces shall be as uniform in appearance as possible. 4. Treating Surface Imperfections: a Mix patching compound and grout material with dust created by griding to match color of adjacent concrete surface. b. Fill surface imperfections including, but not limited to, holes, surface damage, small and micro cracks, air holes, pop -outs and voids. C. Work compound and treatment until color differences between concrete surface and filled surface imperfections are not noticeable. 5. Finish edges of floor finish adjoining other materials in a clean and sharp manner, and to 033543-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 03 35 43 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT the approval of the Architect. 6. Apply final polish to achieve required sheen matching approved mock-up. 3.3 FINAL CLEANING A. Mechanically scrub treated floors for seven days with soft to medium pads with approved cleaning solutions, following manufacturer's written instructions for final cleaning. B. Upon completion, General Contractor shall protect finish. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 03 35 43 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 03 35 43 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Clay face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Steel reinforcing bars. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section: 1. Steel lintels in unit masonry. 2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry. 3. Cavity wall insulation. C. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required. 3. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls. 4. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end -dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar. 3. Weep holes/cavity vents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 60 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. 2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather -resistant membrane. 4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Primary Designer in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Primary Designer specifically approves FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 04 20 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT such deviations in writing. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 1. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 042000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. 2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. C. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire -resistance -rated assembly designs indicated. 1. Where fire -resistance -rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square -edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. B. CMUs: ASTM C90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of Insert value. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Primary Designer's sample. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C216. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 04 20 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT following: a. Blackson Brick - Endicott Brick Manganese Ironspot b. Mortar color: Blackson Brick Amerimix Dark Black, Type N. Grade: SW. Type: FBX. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 3350 psi. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C67 and is rated "not effloresced." Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 11-5/8 inches long. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. Color and Texture: As selected by Primary Designer 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 1501C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1 329/C 1 329M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lafarge North America Inc. D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Davis Colors. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. C. Lanxess Corporation. d. Solomon Colors, Inc. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 3. White -Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. G. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry -Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M. 1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized carbon steel. 2. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 042000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A82/A82M, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM Al53/A153M, Class B coating. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through -wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cheney Flashing Company. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 3) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc. 4. Fabricate through -wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing. 5. Fabricate through -wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 6. Fabricate through -wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 7. Fabricate metal drip edges for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches into wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal so that completed seam sheds water. 8. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 9. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 10. Fabricate metal expansion joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated. 11. Solder metal items at corners. B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper -Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded between two layers of glass - fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 3) Wire -Bond. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 04 20 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4) York Manufacturing, Inc. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches long. D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free -draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advanced Building Products Inc. b. CavClear/Archovations, Inc. C. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. e. Mortar Net Solutions. f. Wire -Bond. 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For exterior, above -grade, load -bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load -bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 3. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Mix to match Primary Designer's sample. 2. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Clay face brick. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530. VASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 042000-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond. B. Before installation, examine rough -in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 04 20 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /8 inch. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less -than -nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core. G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. H. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead -load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 3. At fire -rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping." 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay CMUs as follows: 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive air barriers unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together as follows: 1. Masonry -Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder -type reinforcement extending 042000-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT across both wythes. b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable -type (two -piece -type) reinforcement to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align. 2. Masonry -Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. C. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. 1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry. 3.7 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with masonry -veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw -attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. B. Provide not less than 2 inches of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of insulation. 1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace. 3.8 MASONRY -JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. D. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control- and expansion j oint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in -plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 04 20 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." D. Provide horizontal, pressure -relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure -relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe. Form 1/4- inch hook in edge of flashing embedded in inner wythe. 3. At masonry -veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under air barrier, lapping at least 4 inches. Fasten upper edge of flexible flashing to sheathing through termination bar. 4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 5. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1 /2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. E. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing. 1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. F. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches, to maintain drainage. 1. Fill cavities full height by placing pea gravel in cavities as masonry is laid, so that at any point, masonry does not extend more than 24 inches above top of pea gravel. G. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration 042000-10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 04 20 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. H. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form cavity vents. 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through -wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. 3.11 PARGING A. Parge exterior faces of below -grade masonry walls, where indicated, in two uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch. Dampen wall before applying first coat, and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat. B. Use a steel -trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. C. Damp -cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of j oints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Primary Designer's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket -and -brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04 20 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 04 20 00 - I I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Shear stud connectors. 3. Shrinkage -resistant grout. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear stud connectors through deck. 3. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for [steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural -steel frame] [miscellaneous steel fabrications] and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 4. Section 05 51 13 "Metal Pan Stairs" for metal pan stairs including delegated design requirements. 5. Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings" for painting requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in ANSI/AISC 303. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Structural -steel materials. 2. High -strength, bolt -nut -washer assemblies. 3. Shear stud connectors. 4. Anchor rods. 5. Threaded rods. 6. Shop primer. 7. Galvanized -steel primer. 8. Etching cleaner. 9. Galvanized repair paint. 10. Shrinkage -resistant grout. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 12 00 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Environmental Product Declaration: For each product. 3. Health Product Declaration: For each product. 4. Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate sustainability report for each manufacturer. 5. Environmental Product Declaration: For each product. 6. Environmental Product Declaration: For each product. 7. Environmental Product Declaration: For each product. 8. Third -Party Certifications: For each product. 9. Third -Party Certified Life Cycle Assessment: For each product. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical, high -strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members and connections of the seismic -load -resisting system. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Mill test reports for structural -steel materials, including chemical and physical properties. 1. Insert product. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (Acceptance Criteria 172). B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.I/D1.1M. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F3125/173125M, Grade F1852 bolt assemblies and for retesting bolt assemblies after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 051200-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. ANSUAISC 303. 2. ANSUAISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts." B. Connection Design Information: 1. Design connections and final configuration of member reinforcement at connections in accordance with ANSUAISC 303 by fabricator's qualified professional engineer. a. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service -load level. C. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained. 2.2 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992. B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A36. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36. D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500 Grade B structural tubing. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.3 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS A. High -Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 325-1, compressible -washer type with plain finish. B. High -Strength A490 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A490, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts or Grade F2280 tension -control, bolt -nut -washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 490-1, compressible -washer type with plain finish. C. Zinc -Coated High -Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain Mechanically deposited zinc coating. D. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108, AISI C-1015 through C-1020, headed -stud type, cold - finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. 2.4 RODS A. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Straight Hooked. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy -hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. B. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 ASTM F1554, Grade 55, weldable ASTM A354 ASTM A449, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy -hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36. 1. Nuts: ASTM A63 heavy -hex carbon steel. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 12 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. 2.5 PRIMER A. Steel Primer: 1. Comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings." 2.6 SHRINKAGE -RESISTANT GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/CI107M, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in accordance with ANSUAISC 303 and to ANSUAISC 360. 1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high -strength structural steel in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural -steel framing has been erected. 4. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop - priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted in accordance with SSPC- SP 3. F. Shear Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Weld using automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.8 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2.9 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following: 051200-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high -strength bolted, slip -critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces unless indicated to be painted. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction. B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 3. 2. SSPC-SP 5 (WAB)/NACE WAB-I. C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction and structural - steel framing until cast -in -place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with ANSUAISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360. B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2 Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 12 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack shrinkage -resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates, so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for grouting. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSFAISC 303. D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Slope roof framing members to slopes indicated on Drawings. 2 Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high -strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/DLIM for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3.5 REPAIR A. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing, and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. a. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power - tool cleaning. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural -steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2 Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high -strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts." 2 Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 051200-6 a. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1) Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/. 2) Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3) Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4) Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/. END OF SECTION 05 12 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 12 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 2100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 05 2100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. K-series steel joists. 2. KCS-type K-series steel joists. 3. K-series steel joist substitutes. 4. Steel joist accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete. 3. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for field -welded shear connectors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Welding certificates. C. Manufacturer certificates. D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt. E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. F. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications." for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field -welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0521 00-1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 2100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast -in -place concrete construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 2. CMC Joist & Deck. 3. Gooder-Henrichsen Co. 4. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 5. Structures of U.S.A., Inc. 6. Valley Joist. 7. Vulcraft; Nucor Vulcraft Group. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated on Drawings. 1. Use ASD; data are given at service -load level. 2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live -load deflections no greater than the following: a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. 2.3 STEEL JOISTS A. K-Series Steel Joist: Manufactured steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SH's "Specifications," with steel -angle top - and bottom -chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists. 2. K-Series Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle or -channel members. 3. Top -Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top -chord extensions where indicated on Drawings, complying with SH's "Specifications." 4. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications." 5. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 2.4 PRIMERS A. Primer: 1. SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.5 STEEL JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: 1. Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications." 052100-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 2100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom -chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. 1. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Finish: Plain, uncoated. D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. E. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly. 2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. B. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick. C. Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom -chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads are applied. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon -steel bolts. E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high -strength structural bolts. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts" for high -strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.3 REPAIRS A. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after installation, clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 21 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 2100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power - tool cleaning. b. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS Dl.1/Dl.1M. C. Visually inspect bolted connections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 05 2100 052100-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 3100 STEEL DECKING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight and lightweight structural concrete fill over steel deck. 3. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field -welded shear connectors. 4. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 5. Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck. 6. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." B. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0531 00-1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 3100 STEEL DECKING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 2. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 3. Nucor Corp. B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: 3 inches. 4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch. 5. Side Laps: Overlapped. 2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 2. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 3. Nucor Corp. B. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low -velocity, power -actuated or pneumatically driven carbon -steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws. C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated. G. Flat Sump Plates: Single -piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780. PART 3 - EXECUTION 053100-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 3100 STEEL DECKING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DECK A. Fasten roof -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated. B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 18 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon -steel screws. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum. D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld or mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space welds or mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld or fastener at each corner. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and mechanically fasten. E. Miscellaneous Roof -Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof -deck panels unless otherwise indicated. F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DECK A. Fasten floor -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0531 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 3100 STEEL DECKING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 18 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon -steel screws. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped. D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated. E. Floor -Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight -fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. 3.5 REPAIR A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 05 3100 053100-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior non -load -bearing wall framing. 2. Interior non -load -bearing wall framing. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Cold -formed steel framing materials. 2. Exterior non -load -bearing wall framing. 3. Interior non -load -bearing wall framing. 4. Vertical deflection clips. 5. Single deflection track. 6. Post -installed anchors. 7. Power -actuated anchors. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold -formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated. B. Code -Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product -certification program of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Cold -Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing complies with AISI S 100 and AISI S200 and ASTM C955, Section 8. B. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2.2 COLD -FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60, A60, A750, or GF30. B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 40 00 - I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.3 EXTERIOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and matching minimum base -metal thickness of steel studs. C. Vertical Deflection Clips, Exterior: Manufacturer's standard bypass head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep -leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure. 2.4 INTERIOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. B. Vertical Deflection Clips, Interior: Manufacturer's standard bypass head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. C. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep -leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure. 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel -framing accessories from ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel hex -headed bolts, carbon -steel nuts, and flat, hardened -steel washers; zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class C. B. Post -Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC58 ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Uses: Securing cold -formed steel framing to structure. C. Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion -resistant -coated, self -drilling, self -tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low -profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M. B. Shims: Load -bearing, high -density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold -formed steel of 054000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims. C. Sill Sealer Gasket: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Install load -bearing shims or grout between the underside of load -bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1 /4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sill sealer gasket at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold -formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold -formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install cold -formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold -formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. G. Install insulation, specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing -assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. H. Fasten hole -reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non -load -bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold -rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 40 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings. G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non -load -bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold -formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold -rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings. G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Install cold -formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error are not to exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 054000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 3.6 REPAIRS A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold -formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 05 40 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 40 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 2. Steel framing and supports for equipment. 3. Steel framing for pipe railing. 4. Metal ladders. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, and wedge -type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip -aggregate surface finishes. 2. Manufactured metal ladders. B. Delegated Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated -design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, floor slabs, decks, and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 0140 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 50 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT "Quality Requirements," to design ladders. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold -formed steel tubing. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring 055000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. 2.7 SHELF ANGLES A. Type: Support brackets fabricated by welding miter cut extruded aluminum sections, grinding and deburring sharp edges and welds, drilling holes for field attachment, and factory finishing. B. Inside Wall Mount counter brackets: L-shaped bracket fabricated from aluminum T sections designed for supporting 24-inches counter; Model No. EH-1818 as manufactured by Rangine Corporation. 1. Load capacity per bracket: 650 pounds. 2. Finish: Off-white, Primed. 2.8 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter, steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. 6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc -rich primer. 2.10 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 50 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 REPAIRS A. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. 2. Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting." and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." END OF SECTION 05 50 00 055000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 5113 METAL PAN STAIRS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 05 5113 - METAL PAN STAIRS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete -filled or treads. 2. Steel tube railings and guards attached to metal stairs. 3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. 1. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, blocking for attachment of wall -mounted handrails, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so they do not encroach on required stair width and are within fire -resistance -rated stair enclosure. D. Schedule installation of railings and guards so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. 1. Do not support railings and guards temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following: 1. Shop primer products. 2. Handrail wall brackets. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes, and field joints. 3. Include plan at each level. 4. Indicate locations of anchors, weld plates, and blocking for attachment of wall -mounted handrails. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For stairs, railings and guards, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Analysis data shall include but not limited to sealed calculations for the stringer and landing member sizing and connections. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated -design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0551 l 3 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 5113 METAL PAN STAIRS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. 1. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. a. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs, railings and guards, including attachment to building construction. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing and guard loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. C. Structural Performance of Railings and Guards: Railings and guards, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Tubing for Railings and Guards: ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed). 055113-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 5113 METAL PAN STAIRS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. 1. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings and Guards to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings and guards to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot -dip, zinc -coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc -rich primer. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Prefilled Concrete Treads: 1. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast - in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mix concrete with minimum 28- day compressive strength of 3000 psi and maximum aggregate size of 1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Plain Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A10645M, galvanized steel, 6 by 6 inches, W 1.4 by W 1.4, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Reinforcement Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening welded -wire reinforcement in place. a. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings and guards, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Assemble stairs, railings, and guards in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0551 l 3 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 5113 METAL PAN STAIRS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #2 - Completely sanded joint with some undercutting and pinholes okay. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. 1. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. 4. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally. 2.6 FABRICATION OF STEEL -FRAMED STAIRS A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for Service Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers steel channels as indicated on Drawings. a. Stringer Size: As required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. b. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube stringers. C. Finish: Shop primed. 2. Construct platforms of steel channel or rectangular tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube framing. b. Finish: Shop primed. 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold -rolled steel sheet. 2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. 3. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal pan subtreads filled with reinforced concrete during fabrication. 2.7 FABRICATION OF STAIR RAILINGS AND GUARDS A. Fabricate railings and guards to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of member, post spacings, wall bracket spacing, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inch- diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- diameter posts. 2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch-vertical, square pickets spaced to prohibit the passage of a 4-inch diameter sphere. B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings and guards with welded connections. 1. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. 2. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 3. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 4. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 5. Remove flux immediately. 055113-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 5113 METAL PAN STAIRS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 6. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #1 - No evidence of a welded joint as shown in NAAMM AMP 521. C. Form changes in direction of railings and guards as follows: 1. By bending. D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. E. Close exposed ends of railing and guard members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush -resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. 1. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.8 FINISHES A. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated, ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of floors, bearing surfaces and locations of bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. For wall -mounted railings, verify locations of concealed reinforcement within gypsum board and plaster assemblies. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL PAN STAIRS A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in -place construction. 1. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through -bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in - Place Concrete." F. Install precast terrazzo treads according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS AND GUARDS FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0551 l 3 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 5113 METAL PAN STAIRS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Adjust railing and guard systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints with tight, hairline joints. 1. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. 2. Plumb posts in each direction, within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails and guards so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of stairs for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. 4. Secure posts, rail ends, and guard ends to building construction as follows: a. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members. B. Install railing gates level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. C. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 2. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements. a. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. b. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3.4 REPAIR A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." END OF SECTION 05 5113 055113-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel railings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other ork. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of railings from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL RAILINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Kee Safety, Inc. 2. R & B Wagner, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. C. Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed). D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railing Components: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 52 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 2. Stainless Steel Railing Components: Type 316 stainless steel fasteners. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." B. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM Cll07/Cll07M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage. B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 1. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. 1. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #2 welds; good appearance, completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay I. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. 2. By bending to smallest radius that will not result in distortion of railing member. J. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. K. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated cap and end fittings of same metal and finish as railings. L. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. M. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip -fit sockets from stainless steel tube or pipe whose ID is 055213-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one -fortieth of post height. 1. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged. 2. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings. 2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous -metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves; however, hot -dip galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Other Railings: SSPC-SP 3. C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1 for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified inSection 09 9123 "Interior Painting" unless indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. 1. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 2. Install railings level, plumb, square, true to line; without distortion, warp, or rack. 3. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels. 4. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 5. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 6. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article, whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core -drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with setscrews. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type, as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 52 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT For steel railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with brackets on underside of rails connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. B. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 1. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3.5 REPAIR A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period, so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05 52 13 055213-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 7513 DECORATIVE PERFORATED PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 05 7513 - DECORATIVE PERFORATED PANELS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Laser cut decorative perforated metal panels. 2. Component -based, decorative perforated metal panel assemblies: a. Wall screens. B. Materials included in the Work but not specified in this Section: 1. Anchor plates and structural connections. Coordinate support sizes andlocations. C. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Supplier's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Description of materials, components, fabrication and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Supplier's shop drawings, including plans, elevations, sections and details indicating materials, components, sizes, dimensions, tolerances, hardware, fasteners, finishes, options, accessories and installation methods. Provide details of attaching metal panels to supports. C. Verification Samples: For each product specified, provide three 2-inch by 2-inch anodized aluminum samples with two sides folded as indicated. D. Pattern Samples: One 12-inch by 12-inch flat panel with indicated finish plus minimum two sample cut outs. Pattern scaling may vary depending on selection. E. Closeout Submittals: Supplier's maintenance and cleaning instructions and warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockup: Build full-size mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups at client's request as indicated on the Drawings, cost to be determined by design. 2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and fabrication. 3. Retain and maintain mockup during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed work. 4. Approved mockup in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed work. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Installer to verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal panels by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate construction to ensure that panels conform to built openings. B. Where measurements cannot be taken without delaying the Work, Installer to guarantee panel dimensions will fit and proceed with fabrication of product without field verification. Coordinate construction to ensure that panels conform to guaranteed openings. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging with corresponding labels and identifying information. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 75 13 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 75 13 DECORATIVE PERFORATED PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Unload, store, and erect panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. 2. Each panel is to be placed in a unique location on site and is to be specifically labeled for proper placement. B. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Store panels vertically, covered with appropriate weathertight and ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 2. Do not stack pallets. Panels that are stacked need to be protected from each successive panel above and below. 3. Avoid overhandling and excessively moving panels in order maintain protective packaging. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Anchoring Metal Panels to Other Construction: Select stainless steel fasteners of type, grade and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring metal panels to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. B. Provide nylon bushings and washers to prevent stainless steel from touching aluminum. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. 2.2 ORNAMENTAL PERFORATED METAL PANELS A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations or blemishes; unless allowed for specific metal types and finishes. B. Perforated Aluminum Sheet: AA5052-H32, 0.125-inch thick, flat sheet aluminum. C. Laser Cut Pattern: Custom design. Architect will provide CAD file with each pattern. There are five unique patterns that will be repeated and/or inverted. Refer to Panel Elevations and Schedule. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal panel assemblies to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish and anchorage, but not less than required to support structural loads. B. Fabricate systems in accordance with approved shop drawings and the supplier's instructions. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. C. Cut, drill and laser cut metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges; unless allowed for specific metal types and finishes. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Use grommets, bushings and washers or methods as recommended by the supplier for separation of dissimilar metals. 2.4 FINISHES FOR ALUMINUM PANELS A. Aluminum panels are to be mill finish fabricator to apply "Glass Bead Blasting Finish" to entire front of panel to remove mill oils, stains, and to "dull" appearance. A sample of the intended product can be found along 10t1i Street, south of UMC Hospital and north of the Texas Tech Tennis Facility. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 057513-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 05 7513 DECORATIVE PERFORATED PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Installer to verify field measurements are acceptable to suit assembly tolerances. C. Installer to verify supports and anchors are correctly positioned and set. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Installer to take field measurements after permanent end terminations are in place and prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, to ensure fitting of work. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the supplier for achieving the best result for the substrate under the Project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install metal panels in accordance with supplier's instructions. B. Install metal panels plumb, level, square, true to line and rigid. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. Clamp to steel frame to field drill anchor holes through post plate and aluminum panels. C. Adjust metal panels before anchoring to ensure alignment at abutting joints. D. Coat surfaces of aluminum legs that will be in contact with grout, concrete, or dissimilar metal framing, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. E. Attach metal panels securely in place using anchorage devices and fasteners as indicated. F. Corrosion Resistance: Separate incompatible materials to prevent galvanic corrosion. Ki["I'll leRtY ,1101 A. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. Manufacturer to provide proper coating for repainting any exposed steel surfaces. B. Return items that cannot be refinished in field. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean metal panels with water and light detergent promptly after installation in accordance with supplier's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that will damage finish. C. Do not use abrasive cleaners. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of metal panels from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by metal panel supplier. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion. B. Replace defective or damaged components. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new unit. END OF SECTION 05 7513 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 05 75 l 3 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. D. OSB: Oriented strand board. E. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal size or greater in least dimension. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire - test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire - retardant -treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln -dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 06 10 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. B. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. 2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM Al53/A153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire -retardant -treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. G. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 061000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.10.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILERS A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure -preservative -treated, key -beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 06 10 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Parapet sheathing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5516. 4. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. For air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing, include manufacturer's technical data and tested physical and performance properties of products. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire -test - response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire - retardant -treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. C. Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 06 16 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Identify fire -retardant -treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177/C1177M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. National Gypsum Company. C. USG Corporation. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. 2.3 PARAPET SHEATHING A. Plywood Sheathing: DOC PS 1, Exterior sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. B. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1 177/C 1 177M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. National Gypsum Company. C. USG Corporation. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For sheathing, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. E. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C954. PART 3 - EXECUTION 061600-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold -formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non -load -bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 06 16 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 4116 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 06 4116 - PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic -laminate -clad architectural cabinets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of fining, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic -laminate architectural cabinets. 5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Plastic Laminates: 4 by 6 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge. 2. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance with 5 years documented experience of similar size and complexity. 1. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0641 l 6 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 4116 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Build mockups of typical architectural cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet -work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Door and Drawer -Front Style: Flush overlay. E. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Edges of Plastic -Laminate Shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. a. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic -laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 3. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid -hardwood lumber. 4. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic -Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 0641 16-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 4116 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Interior Designer from laminate manufacturer's full range and as indicated on Interior Material Legend in Drawings. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products in accordance with test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire -retardant -treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln -dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire - test -response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of architectural cabinets. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSUBHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self -closing. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16-inch in diameter. D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: ANSUBHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. E. Drawer Slides: ANSUBHMA A156.9. 1. Standard Duty (Grade 1 and Grade 2): Side mount and extending under bottom edge of drawer. 2. For drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide, provide Heavy -Duty (Grade 1HD- 100: Side mount. a. Type: Full extension. b. Material: Zinc -plated ball bearing slides. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0641 16 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 4116 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT F. Door Locks: ANSUBHMA A156.11, E07121. G. Drawer Locks: ANSUBHMA A156.11, E07041. H. Door and Drawer Silencers: ANSUBHMA Al56.16, L03011. I. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded -plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Color: Black. J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for ANSUBHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: ANSI/BHMA 630. K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in ANSUBHMA A156.9. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times architectural cabinet fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at manufacturer's shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. B. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer - head cabinet installation screws. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 0641 16-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 4116 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 06 4116 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0641 16 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 67 10 BULLET -RESISTANT FIBERGLASS PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 06 67 10 - BULLET -RESISTANT FIBERGLASS PANELS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bullet -resistant architectural panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for bullet -resistant door assemblies. 1.2 REFERENCES A. UL 752 - Standard for Bullet -Resisting Equipment; 2000. B. NIJ 0108.01 - Standard for Ballistic Resistant Protective Material; National Institute of Justice; 1985. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications. C. Compliance Documentation: UL test reports for UL-listing under UL 752, or H.P.White Laboratories test reports showing compliance with NIJ Standard 0108.01, plus printed data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with contract documents. D. Samples: For each type specified, not less than 4 inches square. E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's detailed instructions applicable to the project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Testing Agencies: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or H. P. White Laboratories Inc. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project with testing agency's labels intact and legible. B. Handle material with care to prevent damage. C. Store materials inside under cover, stacked flat and off the floor. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warrant materials against defects for two years from date of receipt at project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Safeguard Security Services, Inc., San Antonio, TX: Armortex. 2. North American Bullet Proof, San Antonio, TX: Shotguard. 3. American Acrylic Corporation, West Babylon, NY: LUMAgard. 4. Waco Composites, Inc., Waco, TX: ArmorCore. 5. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 requirements. 6. Provide all bullet -resistant panels from a single manufacturer. 2.2 APPLICATIONS FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 06 67 I 0 - I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 06 6710 BULLET -RESISTANT FIBERGLASS PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Provide panels of the performance levels indicated at the following locations: 1. Partition types 16a and 14a. Reference Plans: Level 4. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Bullet -Resistant Panels: Multiple layers of woven roving ballistic grade fiberglass cloth impregnated with a thermoset polyester resin and compressed into flat rigid sheets. 1. Design: Non -ricochet type, designed to capture and retain the attacking projectile and lessen the potential of random injury and lateral penetration, using controlled internal delamination. 2. Performance Requirements: Tested in accordance with either UL 752 or NIJ 0108.01 for Level indicated. 3. Maximum Thickness: a. UL Level 4, NU IV Performance: 1-5/16 inch. Thickness varies by manufacture. Material must meet level performance. 4. Maximum Density (Weight): a. UL Level 4, NIJ IV Performance: 14.0 pounds per square foot. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all supports have been installed as required by contract documents before starting installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Install panels as indicated in Construction Documents. Panels that are to be installed at interior areas of casework shall be furnished and installed by casework fabricator. C. Adhere panels using an industrial adhesive, mastic, screws, or bolts. D. At joints between panels, maintain bullet -resistance at least equal to that of the panel. 1. Reinforce joints between panels with a back-up layer of the same bullet -resistant material. 2. Minimum Width of Reinforcing Layer at Joint: 4 inches, 2 inches on each panel, or a 2- inch minimum overlap. 3. Refer to Contract Documents for detail. E. At penetrations in bullet resistant panels, provide baffle of same material attached to back edge of studs. Oversize baffle, refer to Contract Documents for detail F. Maintain equivalent bullet -resistance at junctures with other bullet -resistant construction, including floors, roofs, door frames, and window frames. G. Do not allow penetrations through bullet -resistant panels except as required by the contract documents. END OF SECTION 06 67 10 066710-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam -plastic board insulation. 2. Glass -fiber blanket insulation. 3. Semi -rigid stone -wool board insulation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for foam -plastic board sheathing installed directly over wood or steel framing. 3. Section 07 54 23 "Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 4. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam -plastic board insulation. 2. Glass -fiber blanket insulation. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam -plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam -plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM -PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, Type IV: ASTM C578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. Owens Corning. 2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. 3. Thermal Resistance: R-7.5 minimum. 4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width. 2.2 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0721 00-1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Knauf Insulation. C. Owens Corning. 2. Flame -Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke -Developed Index: Not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Thermal Resistance: R-13 minimum. 2.3 STONE -WOOL BOARD INSULATION A. Stone -Wool Board Insulation, Non-combustible, lightweight, water repellent, rigid insulation board with rigid upper surface to ASTM C612 Type IVB. For use behind FORMED METAL WALL PANELS (07 42 13.13) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Rockwool International. 1) CAVITYROCK a) Black Mat Facer b) Size: 16 x 48 inches c) Thickness: 1.5 inches 2. Flame -Spread Index: Not more than zero when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke -Developed Index: Not more than zero when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Mechanical fasteners in accordance with insulation manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Insulation clips: in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed. 072100-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. E. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY -WALL INSULATION A. Foam -Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions, and with faces flush. 2. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 3. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation. Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass -Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07 2100 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0721 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 27 26 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 07 27 26 - FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vapor -permeable, fluid -applied air barriers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint -and -penetration treatments. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Air -Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air. B. Air -Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity. C. Air -Barrier Assembly: The collection of air -barrier materials and accessories applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review air -barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air -leakage and bond testing, air -barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate; technical data; dry film thickness; and tested physical and performance properties of products. B. Shop Drawings: For air -barrier assemblies. 1. Show locations and extent of air -barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions. 2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by Installer, who work on Project. B. Product Certificates: From air -barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier. C. Product Test Reports: For each air -barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project. B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 27 26 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 27 26 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly as indicated on Drawings, incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air -barrier assembly. a Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection and testing of air barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed. b. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall intersection. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by air -barrier manufacturer. 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air -barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air -barrier materials and air -barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air -Barrier Performance: Air -barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid -water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air -barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. Air -Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357. 2.3 HIGH -BUILD AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR PERMEABLE A. High -Build, Vapor -Permeable Air Barrier: Synthetic polymer membrane with an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written instructions, of 35 mils or thicker over smooth, void -free substrates. 072726-2 1. Synthetic Polymer Type: a Products:. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) W.R. Meadows, Inc: Air Shield LMP. 2. Physical and Performance Properties: a Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfrn/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 27 26 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method, Procedure A. C. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 250 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. d Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to ASTM D 4541. e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. £ UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 180 days according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air -barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air -barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air -barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal. B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air -barrier material manufacturer. C. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low -modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single -component, neutral -curing, Class 100150 (low -modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; US 11000 U1traSpan. C. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. d Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem Simple Seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Verify that substrates have cured and aged for minimum time recommended in writing by air -barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test concrete substrates for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrate for air - barrier application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 27 26 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 27 26 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form -release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate -patching material. E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless -steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. H. Bridge expansion joints discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck -to -wall, and deck -to -deck joints with air -barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. 3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Install accessory materials according to air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. 3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air -barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. B. Connect and seal exterior wall air -barrier material continuously to roofing -membrane air barrier, concrete below -grade structures, floor -to -floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. C. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic. D. Apply joint sealants forming part of air -barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply preformed silicone extrusion so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than I inch of full contact. 1. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air -barrier material. F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air -barrier material with foam sealant. G. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic. H. Seal top of through -wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- wide, transition strip. I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 072726-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 27 26 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.4 PRIMARY AIR -BARRIER MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Apply air -barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details. Apply air -barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. 1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air -barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 3. Where multiple prime coats are needed to achieve required bond, allow adequate drying time between coats. B. High -Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air -barrier material to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air -barrier material in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor -Permeable, High -Build Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 35 mils, applied in one or more equal coats. C. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air -barrier components. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. ABAA Quality Assurance Program: Perform examinations, preparation, installation, testing, and inspections under ABAA's Quality Assurance Program. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Inspections: Air -barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air -barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Air -barrier dry film thickness. 3. Continuous structural support of air -barrier system has been provided. 4. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings. 5. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. 6. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 7. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 8. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 9. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 10. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 11. Compatible materials have been used. 12. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 13. Connections between assemblies (air -barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 14. All penetrations have been sealed. D. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Air -Leakage -Location Testing: Air -barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers. 2. Air -Leakage -Volume Testing: Air -barrier assemblies will be tested for air -leakage rate FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 27 26 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 27 26 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT according to ASTM E 783. 3. Adhesion Testing: Air -barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or part thereof. E. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 1. Apply additional air -barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness. 2. Remove and replace deficient air -barrier components for retesting as specified above. F. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect air -barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full -thickness, air -barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed materials according to air -barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air -barrier manufacturer. B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction. C. Remove masking materials after installation. END OF SECTION 07 27 26 072726-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 07 42 13.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concealed -fastener, lap -seam metal wall panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural -support Installer, and installers whose Work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members. 5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after installation. 8. Review of procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 42 13.13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage Work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining Work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within 30 years from date of Substanitial Completion. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cf-n/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E283 at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E331 at the following test -pressure difference: 07 42 13.13 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. E. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 CONCEALED -FASTENER, LAP -SEAM METAL WALL PANELS A. Provide factory -formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory -applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Flush -Profile, Concealed -Fastener Metal Wall Panels TYPE A: Formed with vertical panel edges and between panel edges; with flush joint between panels. 1. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: Reynobond Fire Resistant (FR) Aluminum Composite Materials Reynobond (ACM) as manufactured by Arconic Architectural Products LLC (AAP, 50 Industrial Blvd, Eastman, Georgia 31023. www.reynobond.com). 2. Aluminum Sheet: Coil -coated sheet, ASTM B209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. b. Exterior Finish: Colorweld 500. C. Color: Deep Black. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645, cold -formed, metallic -coated steel sheet, ASTM A653, G90 coating designation or ASTM A792, Class AZ50 aluminum -zinc -alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. D. Panel Fasteners: Self -tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners. E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 42 13.13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory -installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.5 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Steel Panels and Accessories: 1. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. D. Aluminum Panels and Accessories: 1. Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 07 42 13.13 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer. 2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water -resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self -tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water -resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel Work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a 4-panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self -tapping screws. 8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit -penetrating panels. B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Panels: Use stainless steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. 2. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. D. Lap -Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets 1 full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. 2. Provide metal -backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels. 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 42 13.13 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings. E. Watertight Installation: 1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting -type panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight. 2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07 42 13.13 - 6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Cover board. 4. Walkways. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and for wood - based, structural -use roof deck panels. 3. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and counterflashings. 4. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including the following: 1. Layout and thickness of insulation. 2. Base flashings and membrane termination details. 3. Flashing details at penetrations. 4. Tapered insulation layout, thickness, and slopes. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 54 23 - I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, cover boards, and other components of roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system and flashings shall remain watertight. 1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155. 2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746, ASTM D4272, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470. B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: ASTM E108 or UL 790, Class C; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING A. TPO Sheet: ASTM D6878/D6878M, internally fabric- or scrim -reinforced, fabric -backed TPO sheet. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. C. GAF. d. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. 2. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane manufacturer or manufacturers approved by roof membrane manufacturer. 3. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 4. Exposed Face Color: Gray. 075423-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing components. 1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet. C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer. D. Roof Vents: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer. 1. Size: Not less than 4-inch diameter. E. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard. F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories. 2.4 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roof membrane manufacturer. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass -fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. Satisfactory pass UL 1256 or NFPA 276. 1. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. C. Firestone Building Products. d. GAF. e. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. £ Rmax, Inc. 2. Compressive Strength: 20 psi. 3. Thickness: a. Base Layer: At least 1-1/2 inches. b. Total Thickness: 4-1/2 inches. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards. 1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Slope: a. Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with other roofing system components. B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners with metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion - resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows: 1. Bead -applied, low-rise, one -component or multicomponent urethane adhesive. D. Cover Board: ASTM C1289 Type II, Class 4, Grade 1, 1/2-inch- thick polyisocyanurate, with a minimum compressive strength of 80 psi. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 54 23 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Flexible Walkways: Factory -formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip -resisting, surface -textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 1. Pad Size: Approximately 36 by 60 inches. 2. Roll Size: Approximately 36 inches wide. 3. Color: Contrasting with roof membrane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof - drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking." 4. Verify that joints in precast concrete roof decks have been grouted flush with top of concrete. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing system installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, listed roof assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29. B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning Work on adjoining roofing. C. Coordinate installation and transition of roofing system component serving as an air barrier with air barrier specified under Section 07 27 26 "Fluid -Applied Membrane Air Barriers." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of workday. B. Comply with roofing system and roof insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Installation Over Metal Decking: 1. Base Layer of Insulation: a. Joints: See Part 2 for allowed insulation board size. If not specified in Part 2, both sizes are allowed. 1) 48-by-96-inch Boards: Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in adjacent rows and with long joints continuous at right angle to flutes of decking. 075423-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT b. Locate end joints over crests of decking. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. d. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. e. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted. f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. h. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to metal decks. 1) Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. Install upper layers of insulation with joints of each layer offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation. a. Joints: See Part 2 for allowed insulation board size. If not specified in Part 2, both sizes are allowed. 1) 48-by-96-inch Boards: Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in adjacent rows. b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. C. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted. e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. g. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows: 1) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead -applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 2) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. 1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. 2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump. a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted. 3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations. 4. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows: a. Set cover board in ribbons of bead -applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED ROOF MEMBRANE A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing. C. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 54 23 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice area of roof membrane. E. hi addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. F. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roof membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roof membrane and sheet flashings, to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roof membrane and sheet flashings. 2. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with requirements. H. Spread sealant bed over deck -drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in place with clamping ring. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF BASE FLASHING A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field -formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: 1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations: a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit. b. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting rooftop unit locations. C. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit locations. d. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder. e. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit locations. f. Locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide 6-inch clearance between adjoining pads. 3. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration 075423-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 54 23 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 54 23 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed low -slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed equipment support flashing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 3. Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for set -on -type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leak proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each of the following 1. Underlayment materials. 2. Elastomeric sealant. 3. Butyl sealant. 4. Epoxy seam sealer. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field -assembled Work. 3. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 4. Include details of roof -penetration flashing. 5. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, flashings, and counterflashings. 6. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 7. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory - applied finishes. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 62 00 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. 2. Protect stored sheet metal flashing and trim from contact with water. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies, including cleats, anchors, and fasteners, shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface. 1. Color Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. a. Color: Black 2. Exposed Coil -Coated Finish: a Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 076200-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Fasteners for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion in accordance with ASTM D1187/D1187M. G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. H. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory - mitered and -welded corners and junctions. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cheney Flashing Company. b. Fry Reglet Corporation. C. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. d. Hickman Company, W. P. e. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. £ Keystone Flashing Company, Inc. g. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc. 2. Source Limitations: Obtain reglets from single source from single manufacturer. 3. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick. 4. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends. 5. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. 6. Accessories: a Flexible -Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. b. Counterflashing Wind -Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge. 7. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 3. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered and obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 4. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil -canning, buckling, FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 62 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified. C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal in accordance with cited sheet metal standard to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. G. Seams: 1. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.5 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop): Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12- foot- long sections. Furnish with 6-inch- wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. Joint Style: Overlapped, 4 inches wide. 2. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- wide, concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick. C. Roof and Roof -to -Wall Transition Expansion -Joint Cover: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch thick. D. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials: I . Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. E. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. 076200-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through -Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations of cited sheet metal standard that apply to installation characteristics required unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Install fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of welds. 3. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 4. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. 5. Install continuous cleats with fasteners spaced not more than 12 inches o.c. 6. Space individual cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 7. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil -canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 8. Do not field cut sheet metal flashing and trim by torch. 9. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure - treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated -aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 62 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant -filled joints unless otherwise indicated. a. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. b. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. C. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. 1) Do not install sealant -type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOF FLASHINGS A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. 1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. 2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: 1. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces in accordance with recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers. C. Copings: 1. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces in accordance with recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. a. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers. b. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch centers. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. I . Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. 2. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. E. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF WALL FLASHINGS A. Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture in accordance with cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall -opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry." 076200-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean off excess sealants. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended in writing by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. C. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures, as determined by Architect. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 62 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof hatches. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Coordinate dimensions with rough -in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. 1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field - assembled work. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 2.2 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof -hatch units with lids and insulated double -walled curbs, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid -to -curb counterflashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, straight sides, and integrally formed deck -mounting flange at perimeter bottom. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Babcock -Davis. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 72 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT b. BILCO Company (The). C. Dur-Red Products. d. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. e. O'Keeffe's Inc. f. Precision Ladders, LLC. B. Type and Size: Single -leaf lid, 36 by 36 inches. C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load. D. Hatch Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for hatch size indicated. 2. Finish: Factory prime coating. E. Construction: 1. Insulation: 1-inch- thick, glass -fiber board. a. R-Value: 4.3 according to ASTM C1363. 2. Nailer: Factory -installed wood nailer continuous around hatch perimeter. 3. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated. F. Hardware: Spring operators, hold -open arm, galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, galvanized steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. 1. Provide two -point latch on lids larger than 84 inches. G. Safety Railing System: Roof -hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps, fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation; attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized -steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized -steel tube, 1-5/8 inches in diameter. 3. Self -Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self -latching mechanism. 4. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated end fittings. 5. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and railing members. 6. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight. 7. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system. 8. Finish: Manufacturer's standard. H. Ladder -Assist Post: Roof -hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof -access ladder. 1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to closed position. 2. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 3. Material: Steel tube. 4. Post: 1-5/8-inch- diameter pipe. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 METAL MATERIALS A. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation. 07 72 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory -applied, baked -on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil. 2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester -backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Glass -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F, thickness as indicated. C. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: D. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals. B. Roof -Hatch Installation: 1. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanism and hardware. 2. Attach safety railing system to roof -hatch curb. 3. Attach ladder -assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 72 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A780/A780M. B. Touch up factory -primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting." C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Clean off excess sealants. E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07 72 00 07 72 00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Silyl-terminated polyether joint sealants. 4. Mildew -resistant joint sealants. 5. Polysulfide joint sealants. 6. Butyl joint sealants. 7. Latex joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product. B. Joint -Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint -sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint -sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint -sealant formulation. 4. Joint -sealant color. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: 1. For installer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. Unless noted otherwise, do not paint sealants to achieve color. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 92 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248. B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100150, NT: Nonstaining, single -component, non -sag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100150, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS- 290 FPS. b. Pecora Corporation; 890FTS/TXTR or 890 NST. C. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. C. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single -component, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS or 795. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SilPruf NB. C. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS- 295 FPS. d. Pecora Corporation; 864NST, 895NST, or 898NST. e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 or Spectrem 3. D. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100150, T, NT: Nonstaining, single -component, non -sag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100150, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. E. Silicone, Nonstaining, M, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, multicomponent, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 4-TS. 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single -component, non -sag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonalastic TXL b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk GPS1, 900, 915, 916, or 2000. C. ER Systems, an ITW Company; Pacific Polymers Elasto-Thane 230 MP. d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I -XL. e. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 1000. f. Schnee -Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; Permathane SM7108. g. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede-1 or Stampede -TX. h. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex Textured Sealant. i. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic. B. Urethane, S, NS, 100150, T, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontrafflc-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100150, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex 15LM. C. Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent 079200-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 330 or Iso-Flex 875R. D. Urethane, S, P, 35, T, NT: Single -component, pourable, plus 35 percent and minus 35 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 35, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 955-SL or Chem -Calk 955-SL. E. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single -component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1. b. Pecora Corporation; NR-201. C. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 952. d. Schnee -Morehead, Inc.; an ITW company; Permathane SM7101. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede 1 SL. F. Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT: Multicomponent, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. G. Urethane, M, NS, 25, NT: Multicomponent, non -sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede-2NS. H. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240. I. Urethane, M, NS, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, non -sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 505. b. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 881 or Iso-Flex 885 SG. C. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex - 2c NS EZ Mix. J. Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 50, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 888QC. K. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 555-SL. b. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 880 GB. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 92 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II SG or Urexpan NR 200. d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede-2SL. e. Tremco Incorporated; THC 900/901. 2.4 SILYL-TERMINATED POLYETHER (STPE) JOINT SEALANTS A. STPE, S, NS, 50, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SCS7000. b. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I -XL Tru-White. C. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede 100. B. STPE, S, NS, 35, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 35 percent and minus 35 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic FC. C. STPE, S, NS, 25, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex STP 25. b. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Sil-Thane 803. C. Schnee -Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM2100. D. STPE, S, NS, 100150, T, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Soudal USA; SoudaSeal 150LM. E. STPE, S, NS, 50, T, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Soudal USA; SoudaSeal 50LM. F. STPE, S, NS, 35, T, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 35 percent and minus 35 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Soudal USA; SoudaSeal AP. G. STPE, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Soudal USA; SoudaSeal CL or SoudaSeal FC. H. STPE, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single -component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Soudal USA; SoudaSeal SL. 2.5 MILDEW -RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Mildew -Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew -resistant, single -component, non -sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; SCSI 700 Sanitary. C. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil-GP. d. Soudal USA; RTV GP. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200. C. STPE, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, 50, NT: Mildew -resistant, single -component, non -sag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonolastic 150. 2.6 POLYSULFIDE JOINT SEALANTS A. Polysulfide, S, NS, 25, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, polysulfide joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck-O-Seal One Step. B. Polysulfide, M, NS, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, non -sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, polysulfide joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck-O-Seal Gun Grade. C. Polysulfide, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, polysulfide joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck-O-Seal 125 or Deck-O-Seal 150. 2.7 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl -Rubber -Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 300. b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158. 2.8 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonolac. b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikacryl-20 FC. C. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); 850A, 950A, or PowerHouse. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.9 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 92 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems. b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, any of the following types; as approved in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated. Size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1. Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin). 2. Type O (open -cell material). 3. Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin). C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: 079200-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Exterior insulation and finish systems. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Non -sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 92 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of j oint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers. b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast -in -place concrete slabs. C. Joints between plant -precast architectural concrete paving units. d. Joints in stone paving units, including steps. e. Tile control and expansion joints. f. Joints between different materials listed above. 2. Joint Sealant: a. Urethane, S, P, 35, T, NT. b. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT. C. Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT. d. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT. e. STPE, S, P, 25, T, NT. f. Polysulfide, M, P, 25, T, NT. B. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: 079200-8 a. Construction joints in cast -in -place concrete. b. Joints between plant -precast architectural concrete units. C. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints in dimension stone cladding. e. Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies. f. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. g. Joints between metal panels. h. Joints between different materials listed above. i. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and louvers. j. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. 2. Joint Sealant: a. Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 100150, NT. b. Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT. C. Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 100150, T, NT. d. Silicone, nonstaining, M, NS, 50, NT. e. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. f. Urethane, S, NS, 100150, T, NT. g. Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT h. Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT. i. Urethane, M, NS, 25, NT. j. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT. lc. Urethane, M, NS, 25, T, NT. 1. STPE, S, NS, 50, NT. In. STPE, S, NS, 35, NT. n. STPE, S, NS, 25, NT. o. STPE, S, NS, 100150, T, NT. P. STPE, S, NS, 50, T, NT. q. STPE, S, NS, 35, T, NT. r. STPE, S, NS, 25, T, NT. S. Polysulfide, S, NS, 25, NT. t. Polysulfide, M, NS, 25, T, NT. C. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast -in -place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. C. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring. d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. 2. Joint Sealant: a. Urethane, S, P, 35, T, NT. b. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT. C. Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT. d. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT. e. Polysulfide, M, P, 25, T, NT. D. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry, concrete, walls, and partitions. d. Joints on underside of plant -precast structural concrete beams and planks. 2. Joint Sealant: a. Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 100150, NT. b. Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT. C. Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 100150, T, NT. d. Silicone, nonstaining, M, NS, 50, NT. e. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. f. Urethane, S, NS, 100150, T, NT. g. Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT. h. Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT. i. Urethane, M, NS, 25, NT. j. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT. k. Urethane, M, NS, 25, T, NT. 1. STPE, S, NS, 50, NT. In. STPE, S, NS, 35, NT. n. STPE, S, NS, 25, NT. o. STPE, S, NS, 100150, T, NT. p. STPE, S, NS, 50, T, NT. q. STPE, S, NS, 35, T, NT. r. STPE, S, NS, 25, T, NT. S. Polysulfide, S, NS, 25, NT. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 92 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT t. Polysulfide, M, NS, 25, T, NT. U. Acrylic Latex. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Joint -Sealant Application: Mildew -resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: a. Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. b. STPE, mildew resistant, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. F. Joint -Sealant ApplicationConcealed mastics. 1. Joint Locations: a. Thresholds. b. Sill plates. 2. Joint Sealant: Butyl -rubber based. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 079200-10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 19 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 07 92 19 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric, latex, and butyl -rubber -based joint sealants for nonacoustical applications. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Acoustical -Joint -Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint -sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint -sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint -sealant color. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide acoustical joint -sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 826 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. GE Construction Sealants; RCS20 Acoustical. C. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro -Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. d. Serious Energy Inc.; Quiet Seal Pro. e. Tremco, Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. f. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. manufacturer's full range of colors. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 92 l 9 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 19 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic -rubber acoustical sealant. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. b. Serious Energy Inc.; Quiet Seal 350. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical -joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical -joint -sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with acoustical joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply. B. STC Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings. C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical 079219-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 07 92 19 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07 92 19 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 07 92 l 9 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow -metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow -metal doors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow -metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal -edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow -metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow -metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use non -vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory -finished units. B. Store hollow -metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4- inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 11 13 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 3. Republic Doors and Frames. 4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow -metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Face: Uncoated, cold -rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral -board, or vertical steel -stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Construction: Face welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.3 EXTERIOR HOLLOW -METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Extra -Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches C. Face: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral -board, or vertical steel -stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. Provide doors fabricated with thermal -resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating. b. Construction: Face welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 08 11 13 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 3. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 101 I/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. D. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. E. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." G. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow -Metal Doors: 1. Steel -Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full -door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral -fiber insulation. 2. Vertical Edges for Single -Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures, except provide flush closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. C. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0811 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. C. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal -stud partitions. 7. Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive door silencers where specified in Section 08 71 00. Keep holes clear during construction. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA Al56.115 for preparation of hollow -metal work for hardware. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow - metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow -metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES 081113-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow -metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. C. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. £ Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral -fiber insulation. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 11 13 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 6. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In -Place Metal or Wood -Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow -Metal Doors: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Steel Doors: a Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. C. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with hollow - metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. D. Metallic -Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 08 1113 081113-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Five-ply flush wood veneer -faced doors for transparent finish. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Factory -finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door and frame location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses. 3. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and fmish. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. a. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 14 16 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A. 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. 2.2 SOLID -CORE FIVE-PLY FLUSH WOOD VENEER -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Doors: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Eggers Industries. b. VT Industries Inc. 2. Performance Grade: a. ANSUWDMA I.S. 1A Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated below. b. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty: Door 102A. 3. ANSI/WDMA I.S. lA Grade: Custom. 4. Faces: Single -ply wood veneer not less than 1150 inch thick. a. Species: White oak. b. Cut: Rift cut. C. Match between Veneer Leaves: Random match with consistent grain pattern and density. d. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 5. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Applied wood -veneer edges of same species as faces and covering edges of faces - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type B. a. Mineral -Core Doors: At hinge stiles, provide laminated -edge construction with improved screw -holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 1) Screw -Holding Capability: 550 lbf in accordance with WDMA T.M. 10. 6. Core for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: a. ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 particleboard. 1) Provide doors with WDMA I.S. 10 structural -composite -lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors scheduled to receive exit devices in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." b. WDMA I.S. 10 structural composite lumber. 1) Screw Withdrawal, Door Face: 550 lbf. 2) Screw Withdrawal, Vertical Door Edge: 550 lbf. 7. Construction: Five plies, hot -pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 2. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 081416-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. 1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 3. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Staining: Refer to Interior Finish Legend in Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Install frames level, plumb, true, and straight. 1. Install fire -rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80. D. Job -Fitted Doors: 1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below. a. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire - rated doors. 2. Machine doors for hardware. 3. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 4. Clearances: a. Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. b. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. d. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. 5. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 6. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. E. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 14 l 6 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08 14 16 081416-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 08 33 23 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulated service doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory -applied finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Curtain slats, including full vision window secured to slat. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. ��i'/\:7:7\►Y71J A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling -door manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the following design wind loads: Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 33 23 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under design wind load, acting inward and outward. 2.3 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ACME Rolling Doors. b. Cookson Company. C. Overhead Door Corporation. 1) Basis -of -Design: Stormtite AP Model 627. d. Raynor. e. Wayne -Dalton Corp. B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 1.0 cfin/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph when tested according to ASTM E283. D. Insulated Door Curtain R-Value: R-4.75 minimum. E. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel. F. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2-5/8-inch center -to -center height. 1. Vision Panels: Approximately 10- by 1-inch openings spaced approximately 2 inches apart and beginning 12 inches from end guides; in two rows of slats at height indicated on Drawings; installed with insulated vision -panel glazing. 2. Insulated -Slat Interior Facing: Metal. G. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from hot -dip galvanized steel and finished to match door. H. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. I. Hood: Match curtain material and finish. 1. Shape: Square. 2. Mounting: Face of wall. J. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock and chain lock keeper. K. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, 25 or more cycles per hour and more than 90 cycles per day. 2. Operator Location: Top of hood. 3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or industrial use. 4. Motor Exposure: Interior. 5. Motor Electrical Characteristics: a. Horsepower: 1/2 hp. b. Voltage: 115 V ac, single phase, 60 Hz. 6. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. 7. Control Station(s): Interior mounted. L. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals. M. Door Finish: 1. Powder -Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Interior Curtain -Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain -slat face. 2.4 MATERIALS, GENERAL 083323-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.5 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling -door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc -coated (galvanized), cold -rolled structural -steel sheet; complying with ASTM A653/A653M, with G90 zinc coating; nominal sheet thickness (coated) of 0.028 inch; and as required. 2. Vision -Panel Glazing: Manufacturer's standard clear glazing, fabricated from transparent acrylic sheet or fire -protection -rated glass as required for type of door; set in glazing channel secured to curtain slats. 3. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 4. Metal Interior Curtain -Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain -slat face, with minimum steel thickness of 0.010 inch. B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface -mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch- thick, hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A653/A653M. 2.7 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side -locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock. C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power -operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.8 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather -resistant installation unless otherwise indicated. 1. At door head, use 1/8-inch- thick, replaceable, continuous -sheet baffle secured to inside of hood or field -installed on the header. 2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, nylon brushes. 2.9 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. Chain -Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain -pocket wheel and guard, and gear -reduction unit with a maximum 25-lbf force for door operation. Provide alloy -steel hand FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 33 23 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. 2.10 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation -cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear -reduction unit, solenoid -operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door. 1. Top -of -Hood Mounted: Operator is mounted to the right or left door head plate with the operator on top of the door -hood assembly and connected to the door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Headroom is required for this type of mounting. D. Control Station: Three -button control station in fixed location with momentary -contact push- button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant -pressure push-button control labeled "Close." 1. Interior -Mounted Units: Full -guarded, surface -mounted, heavy-duty type, with general- purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. E. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit -switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. 2.11 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.12 STEEL AND GALVANIZED -STEEL FINISHES A. Powder -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated 083323-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT for each door. C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with the accessibility standard. D. Power -Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate doors to confirm proper motor rotation and door performance. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. 1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather resistant. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 08 33 23 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 33 23 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 08 4113 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum -framed storefront systems. 2. Aluminum -framed entrance door systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Commercial Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0841 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. YKK AP America, Inc. 4. Oldcastle Building Envelope. B. Source Limitations: Unless noted otherwise in this Section, obtain all components of non -fire rated aluminum -framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. C. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. C. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E330/E330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested according to a minimum static -air -pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal - surface temperature of 180 deg F. b. Low Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: 0 deg F. C. Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F. 084113-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed -aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. 4. Finish: Color anodic finish as specified in Aluminum Finishes Article below. 5. Fabrication Method: Field -fabricated stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high -strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual -swing or automatic operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded -aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap -on, extruded -aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 4. Finish: Match adjacent storefront framing finish. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: 1. Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." 2. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." 3. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. B. Hardware sets for aluminum doors located in Section 08 71 00.10 "Door Hardware Schedule." 1. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 2. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior -door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. 3. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch. 2.6 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." C. Glazing Sealants: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 2.7 MATERIALS FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0841 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209. B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221. C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM 13429/13429M. D. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M. E. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M. F. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion -resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt -mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30- mil thickness per coat. E. Rigid PVC Filler. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At interior and exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding -type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. 084113-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: black. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. G. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation. I. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCE DOORS A. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field -Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface -mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0841 l 3 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch. C. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. END OF SECTION 08 4113 084113-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 56 59 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 08 56 59 - SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bullet -Resistant Hollow Metal Transaction Windows. 2. Hollow metal windows with bullet -resistant transaction frame package receiver B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 67 10 "Bullet -Resistant Fiberglass Panels." 3. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board." 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate work with adjacent materials specified in other sections and as indicated on drawings and approved shop drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 "Administrative Requirements" for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for specified products indicating materials, operation, glazing, finishes, and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, sizes, rough -in, mounting, anchors and fasteners, and installation clearances. D. Test Data: Test reports for specific window model and glazing to be furnished, showing compliance with all specified requirements; window and glazing may be tested separately, provided window test sample adequately simulates the glazing to be used. E. Manufacturer Qualification Statement. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with at least ten years documented experience, and with ability to provide test reports showing that their standard manufactured products meet the specified requirements. B. Transaction Window Assemblies: Ballistic Level 4 tested to UL 752 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver units in manufacturer's original packaging and unopened containers with identification labels intact. B. Store units in area protected from exposure to weather and vandalism. 1.6 WARRANTY A. See Section 0170 00 "Execution and Closeout Requirements" for additional warranty requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BULLET -RESISTANT HOLLOW METAL TRANSACTION WINDOWS A. Manufacturers: Armortex B. Location: Built within interior wall, as indicated on Drawings. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 56 59 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 56 59 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Window Type: Stainless Steel Ballistic Transaction Window (WI-FW-HM-RS). 1. Operation: Fixed. 2. Mounting: Wrap around return frame, 1/2-inch projection. 3. Window Size: 48-inch wide by 60-inch high. 4. Counter: Provided by Others 5. Material: Hollow Metal, Primed. D. Glazing: Laminated glazing: UL 752 - Level 4 ballistic rated, clear. 1. Bottom edge of glazing panel provided with 18 gage stainless steel cap. E. Communication: Talk around (Natural Voice Spacers) frame Via jambs that allow passage of speech at normal volume without distortion. F. Pass-Thru Device: Deal Tray (non -ricochet). 1. Material: Stainless Steel 2.2 HOLLOW METAL WINDOWS WITH BULLET -RESISTANT TRANSACTION FRAME PACKAGE RECEIVER A. Manufacturers: Armortex B. Location: Built within interior wall, as indicated on Drawings. C. Window Type: Stainless Steel Ballistic Transaction Window (WI-TW-HM-PR). 1. Operation: Fixed. 2. Mounting: Wraparound return frame, 1/2-inch projection. 3. Window Size: 48-inch wide by 60-inch high. 4. Counter: Provided by Others 5. Material: Hollow Metal, Primed. D. Glazing: Laminated glazing: UL 752 - Level 4 ballistic rated, clear. 1. Bottom edge of glazing panel provided with 18 gage stainless steel cap. E. Communication: Talk around (Natural Voice Spacers) frame Via jambs that allow passage of speech at normal volume without distortion. F. Pass-Thru Device: Deal Tray (non -ricochet). 1. Material: Stainless Steel G. Package Receiver 2.3 ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS A. Windows: Factory -fabricated, finished, and glazed, with extruded aluminum frame and glazing stops; complete with hardware and anchors. 1. Provide window units that are re-glazable from the secure side without dismantling the non -secure side of framing. 2. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with internal reinforcement. Make joints and connections flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Fully weld corners. 3. Apply factory finish to exposed surfaces. 4. Apply bituminous paint to concealed metal surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A1008/1008M, cold rolled, free from scale, pitting, coil breaks, and other surface defects. B. I Bullet -Resistant Composite: UL Listed Bullet Resistant Composite by ARMORTEX, of UL Ballistic Level equal to ballistic protection level 4. C. Ballistic Steel: Hi -Hard Ballistic Steel, of UL Ballistic Level equal to specified frame ballistic protection level. D. Track and Hangers: 1. Stainless steel 12 gage track guard and guide. 085659-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 56 59 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Aluminum 1500 series sliding roller track and wheeled hangers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that window openings are ready for installation of windows. B. Verify that correct embedded anchors are in place and in proper location; repair or replace anchors as required to achieve satisfactory installation. C. Notify Architect if conditions are not suitable for installation of units; do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install units in correct orientation (inside/outside or secure/non-secure). C. Anchor units securely in manner so as to achieve performance specified. D. Verify continuity of bullet resistance between window frame and wall construction. E. Set sill members and sill flashing in continuous bead of sealant. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces. B. Clean exposed surfaces promptly after installation without damaging finishes. C. Remove and replace defective work. D. Provide temporary protection to ensure that security windows are without damage upon Date of Substantial Completion. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary protection to ensure that service and teller windows are without damage upon Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08 56 59 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 56 59 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. All -glass doors demountable doors. C. Aluminum doors. d. Sliding doors demountable doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. 4. Key Control System: a. Key control cabinet. b. KnoxBox. B. Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 41 16 "Plastic -Laminate -Clad Architectural Cabinets" for cabinet door hardware provided with cabinets. 3. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow -metal frames. 4. Section 08 41 13 "Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance door hardware, except cylinders aluminum door gasketing and thresholds. 1.2 ALLOWANCES A. Door hardware is part of Door Hardware Allowance: $2,500 per door. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Floor -Recessed Door Hardware: Coordinate layout and installation with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with the security integrator. D. Electrical System Roughing -In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. E. Exit Devices and Door Lite: Locate the exit device below the door lite frame on hollow metal, wood, and aluminum doors. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Conference participants shall include Hardware Consultant and security integrator. B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Conference participants shall include: a. Hardware Consultant. b. Owner. C. Architect. d. Security integrator. 2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0871 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. C. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware. Shop drawings for manufacture standard plug connectors are not required. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed product, in each finish specified. D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. l . Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. C. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. e. Fastenings and other installation information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. E. Preliminary Keying Schedule: Submit 5 days prior to keying meeting. Prepared by or under the supervision of Hardware Consultant. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Hardware Consultant. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedules. Include changes that occurred during conduction. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 0871 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Door Hardware: Provide to Owner as listed below. a. Keys: 3 for each lock. b. Master Keys: 3. C. Blank Keys: 1 for each lock. d. Control Keys: 2 for each new keying system. e. Cylinder Cores: 3 extra cylinder cores for each master key group. f. Dogging Keys: 2 for each lock. g. Special Tools: Spanner, socket wrenches, and other tools required to adjust hardware items. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of a Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person employed by the installer who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC); or an Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC); or an Access Control System Consultant (ACSC). 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with Texas Accessibility Standard. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0871 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. C. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch. 5. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position. 2.3 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template -produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow - metal doors and hollow -metal frames. 1. Commercial Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allegion plc. b. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.4 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch- thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete. B. Continuous, Gear -Type Hinges: Extruded -aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded -aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings. 1. Commercial Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allegion plc. b. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. C. Electrified Continuous Hinge: Hinge shall provide access to wires without removing door leaf. 2.5 LOCKSETS A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: a. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company; 106 Lever. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY; MB Lever. 2. Escutcheons (Roses): a. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company; X Rose. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY; LN Rose. C. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 1. Commercial Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. C. Allegion plc.; L9000 or MA Series. d. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.; 45H Series. e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY; 8200 Series. 0871 00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.6 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. C. Allegion plc. d. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. B. General Auxiliary Locks: Provide 1 auxiliary lock per door with the functions as followed where scheduled: 1. Deadbolt Key/Key: Dead bolt retracted and projected by both keys. 2. Deadbolt Key/Turn: Dead bolt retracted and projected by outside key and inside accessible lever or paddle. 3. Classroom Deadbolt Key/Turn: Dead bolt retracted and projected by outside key. Dead bolt retracted but not projected by inside accessible lever or paddle. 4. Deadlatch Key/Lever: Dead latch bolt retracted and projected by outside key and inside accessible lever or paddle. 5. Classroom Deadlatch Key/Lever: Dead latch bolt retracted and projected by outside key. Dead latch bolt retracted but not projected by inside accessible lever or paddle. 6. Sliding Key/Turn: Refer to Sliding Door Hardware Article for additional requirements. 2.7 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS A. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; full -exterior or full -interior type, as required by application indicated. 1. Commercial Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allegion plc. b. DORMA USA, Inc. C. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.8 AUTOMATIC AND SELF -LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS A. Self -Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Type 27; minimum 3/4-inch throw; with dust - proof strikes; designed for mortising into door edge. Include wear plates. 2.9 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. General Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. B. Exit Devices [ for Other Doors]: 1. Commercial Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Allegion plc.; 98/99, 33A/35A, or 24/25 Series. b. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company; ED4000 or ED5000 Series. C. DORMA USA, Inc.; 9000 Series. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY; 80 Series. 2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores, Small Format Interchangeable Cores (SFIC); face finished to match lock. B. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 71 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.11 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Existing Medeco System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system installed in City of Lubbock Police Headquarters. B. Keys: Brass. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number. Include information to be furnished by Owner. 2.12 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.28; metal cabinet with baked -enamel finish; containing key -holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key -gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Key Boxes and Cabinets. b. GE Security, Inc. C. HPC, Inc. d. Lund Equipment Co., Inc. e. MMF Industries. f. Te1Kee; Oasis International. 2. Wall -Mounted Cabinet: Grade 1 cabinet with hinged -panel door equipped with key - holding panels and pin -tumbler cylinder door lock. B. KnoxBox: Recessed key lock box. Verify exact location with AHJ. Storage for 2 keys and access card. Provide tamper switch and to connect to intrusion detection system. 1. Manufacturer: Knox Company. 2. Finish: Black. 2.13 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. 1. Sliding Door Push/Pulls: Refer to Sliding Door Hardware Article. 2. Aluminum Doors: J402, offset door pull. J505, offset pull/push bar sets. 3. Steel, Hollow Metal, and Wood Doors: J405, pull plate. J302, push plate. 2.14 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active -leaf, hold -open lever and inactive -leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon -coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release. 2.15 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key -operated valves and forged -steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Commercial Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allegion plc. b. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 0871 00 - 6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. DORMA USA, Inc. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Modern type with cover. 3. Provide separate adjustable backcheck intensity, closing speed, and latch speed. 2.16 CONCEALED CLOSERS A. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key -operated valves. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allegion plc. b. DORMA USA, Inc. C. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2.17 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA Al56.8. 1. Overhead Stops: CO2541. 2. Overhead Rod Stops: C08541. Overhead rod stops may be used on the interior of mechanical, electrical, and storage rooms where overhead stops are scheduled. 3. Overhead Holder/Stops: CO2511. 4. Overhead Rod Holder/Stops: C08511. Overhead rod holders may be used on the interior of mechanical, electrical, and storage rooms where overhead holders are scheduled. 2.18 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Exterior Gasketing: a. Head and Jamb: Screw fasten, ROY165. b. Astragal: Meeting stiles, ROY735, or mullion seal, R00005. C. Door Sweep with Rain Drip: ROY536. 2. Acoustic Gasketing: a. Head and Jamb: Adjustable, ROY265. b. Astragal: Pull side surface adjustable, ROY836, pull side. C. Automatic Door Bottoms: Mortise or semi -mortise, ROY346. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. C. Zero International, Inc. B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg, as follows: l . Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cftn/sq. ft. of door opening. 2. Gasketing on Double Doors: 0.50 cfm per foot of door opening. 2.19 DOOR SILENCERS A. Door Silencers for Hollow Metal Frames: BHMA A156.16, L03011. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0871 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.20 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 2.21 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Sliding Door Pulls: Provide TAS compliant straight pulls. B. Sliding Demountable Door Hinges: Demountable manufacturer's standard sliding hinges. 2.22 GATE HARDWARE A. Decorative Metal Gates: 1. Gate Hinges: Hydraulic closer and hinge, flush mount. Coordinate gate weight with hinge combinations. Finish to match gate. a. D&D Technologies; SureClose. b. Locinox; Mammoth. 2. Gate Stops: Provide as needed by gate hinge warranty. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; Heavy Duty Door Stop No. 463. 3. Gate Rim Exit Device: Detex; Advantex Series, Weatherized. a. Dogging: Cylinder. b. Accessible turn or pull on outside. 2.23 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; 0.050-inch- thick; with manufacturer's standard machine or self -tapping screw fasteners. 1. Kick Plates: J102. Unless scheduled otherwise, push side. 2.24 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow -metal doors. 3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.25 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. Match lock or operating trim for finishes not scheduled. Refer to above for hinge non-ferrous requirement. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other 0871 00 - 8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface -applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. E. Key Control System: 1. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. 2. Key Lock Boxes: Install where indicated or approved by Architect to provide controlled access for fire and medical emergency personnel. F. Boxed Power Supplies: Verify location with Architect. Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. 1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware. G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0871 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT H. Stops: Provide wall stops for interior leafs and overhead stops for exterior leafs unless other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. I. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface -applied hardware. J. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. K. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware. END OF SECTION 08 7100 0871 00 - 10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 80 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass products. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Glazing tapes. 4. Miscellaneous glazing materials. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters in accordance with ASTM C1036. C. IBC: International Building Code. D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination, and service condition. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. PART2-PRODUCTS FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 80 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 80 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General Glass Manufactures: Unless specified otherwise and subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 2. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. 3. Pilkington North America. 4. Viracon, Inc. 5. Vitro Architectural Glass. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted and coated glass from single source from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: For each product and installation method, obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined in accordance with the IBC and ASTM E1300: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center -of -glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1150 times the short -side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 3. Thermal Loads: Design glazing to resist thermal stress breakage induced by differential temperature conditions and limited air circulation within individual glass lites and insulated glazing units. C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category 11. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center -of -glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 100 and based on most current non -beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. SHGC and Visible Transmittance: Center -of -glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 200 and based on most current non -beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than thickness indicated. 1. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Proj ect. 08 80 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 80 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat -strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat -strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat -strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3. C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. D. Heat -Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type 1, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. E. Reflective- and Low-E-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C1376. 2.5 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating -Glass Units: Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, recommended in writing by manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: 1. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. D. Spacers: 1. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. E. Edge Blocks: 1. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. F. Adhered Storefront Grid System 1. Zippy Grid, 308 West Broadway St., #LL@, Salt Lake City, UT, 84101, 801-532-3106, www.zippygrid.com FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 80 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 80 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. Exterior Profile: Original b. Interior Profile: Original 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch- minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant 08 80 00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 80 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure - glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 80 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 80 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.7 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE A. Clear Glass Type G02: Fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Safety glazing required. 3.8 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE A. Low-E-Coated, Clear Insulating Glass Type G10: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Guardian Super Neutral (SNR) 43 or comparable product from a manufacturer listed in Part 2. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered, clear float glass. 5. Interspace Content: Air. 6. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered, clear float glass. 7. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 8. Summer Daytime U-Factor:.46 maximum. 9. SGHC:.25 maximum. 10. Safety glazing required. I Biel IZI] I LI 011 Y fi1II1I:LiIIIhI 088000-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 87 33 DECORATIVE FILMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 08 87 33 DECORATIVE FILMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 — General Requirements apply. 2. Decorative films. 3. Transparent Films. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 "General Requirements" apply. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM E903 - Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Visible Light Transmittance: The ratio of the amount of visible light (380-780 nm) that is allowed to pass through a glazing system to the amount of visible light falling on the glazing system. The value is expressed as a percentage. B. Diffuse Visible Light Reflectance (exterior): The percentage of visible light falling on a flat, non - mirrored surface that is neither transmitted nor absorbed but scattered backwardly at random angles from that surface. This value is also known as "non-specularreflectance". C. Privacy Film Rating: This number, between 0 (clear) and 10 (opaque), represents the relative difficulty an observer has in identifying the nature and character of an object located on the opposite side of the window, with the observer and the object both located at least 2 feet from the pane upon which the product has been installed. D. Gradient Series: These films are intended to give graduated privacy while still allowing for a sense of openness. Partially block out views, selectively hide unattractive areas or add a fresh design element easily with this versatile series. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Decorative films that do not have a masking sheet. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0133 00. B. Product Data: Submit for each product specified indicating: 1. Performance properties. 2. Preparation and installation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling recommendations. C. Samples: For each type of decorative film specified, two (2) samples, 12-inches square. D. Qualification Data: Submit documentation indicating qualifications of decorative film manufacturer. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for decorative film to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Submit sample special warranty specified in this section. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 87 33 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 87 33 DECORATIVE FILMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has a minimum of 10 years of documented experience manufacturing decorative films similar to be used for thisproject. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is authorized by decorative film manufacturer to install film in accordance with guidelines set forth by the manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of decorative film from same manufacturer. D. Mock-ups: Build mock-ups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to evaluate surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Construct mock-ups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to discuss methods and procedures relating to installation of the decorative films. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle materials in manufacturer's protective packaging. B. Store and protect materials according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.9 SITE CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: Maintain temperature, humidity, and ventilation within limits recommended by manufacturer. 1.10 LIMITED WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Limited Warranty: Certain restrictions apply. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for decorative films is based on LLumar® Decorative Gradient Films manufactured by an Eastman Chemical Company business: CPFilms Inc., 575 Maryville Centre Drive, St. Louis, Missouri 63141; Telephone: 800-255-8627; Email address: commercialalerts@eastman.com; Web Site: www.Ilumar.com. B. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for transparent films is based on LLumar® Decorative Frost Films manufactured by an Eastman Chemical Company business: CPFilms Inc., 575 Maryville Centre Drive, St. Louis, Missouri 63141; Telephone: 800-255-8627; Email address: commercialalerts@eastman.com; Web Site: www.Ilumar.com. C. Substitutions will be considered, subject to compliance with requirements of this section, under provisions of Section 0160 00. 2.2 DECORATIVE GRADIENT FILMS A. Decorative Film (GF1): LLumar Gradient Series: Banded Fog Gradient B. Transparent Film (G13): LLumar6NRM80PS2 Decorative Frost Film applied to the interior surface of single -pane, 1/8-inch clear glass: 2.3 DECORATIVE FILM ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide accessories either manufactured by or acceptable to Decorative film manufacturer for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 088733-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 08 87 33 DECORATIVE FILMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Pressure Sensitive Adhesive: This adhesive is activated by pressure and water. It is characterized by its permanently tacky nature and its installation ease. C. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by film manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance Examine substrates for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance of Decorative film including glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates thoroughly prior to installation. C. Prepare substrates using methods recommended by film manufacturer to achieve the best results for the substrate under project conditions. D. Protect window frames and surrounding surfaces to prevent damage during installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install with no gaps or overlaps. C. If seamed, make seams non -overlapping. D. Do not remove release liner from film until just before each piece of film is cut and ready for installation. E. Custom cut to the glass with neat, square corners and edges to within 1/8-inch of the window frame. F. Remove air bubbles, blisters, and other defects. Be careful to remove "fingers" to eliminate any contamination or excess water pockets. It is crucial to remove as much water as possible during installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation, view film from a distance of 10-feet against a bright uniform sky or background. Film shall appear uniform in appearance with no visible streaks, wrinkles, banding, thin spots, or pinholes. B. If installed film does not meet these criteria, remove, and replace with new film. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove excess mounting solution at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended by film manufacturer. C. Replace films that cannot be cleaned. D. Protect installed products until completion of project. E. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08 87 33 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 08 87 33 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load -bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 05 40 00 "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load -bearing and exterior non -load -bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Studs and Runners: Provide documentation that framing members' certification is according to SIFA's "Code Compliance Certification Program for Cold -Formed Steel Structural and Non -Structural Framing Members." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to following ratios of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. The ratios listed below are based on the scheduled finishes. 1. Ceramic and Stone Tile: 1/360. 2. Plaster:1/360. Gypsum Board and Other Finishes: 1/240. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, unless noted otherwise in this Section: 1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 2. C1arkDietrich Building Systems. 3. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 4. Craco Mfg., Inc. 5. Custom Stud Inc. 6. Design Shapes in Steel. 7. MarinoWARE. 8. MBA Building Supplies. 9. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 10. Olmar Supply, Inc. 11. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 12. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 13. SCAFCO Corporation. 14. State Building Products, Inc. 15. Steel Construction Systems. 16. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 17. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 18. Telling Industries. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0922 16-1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) MBA Building Supplies. 3) MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 4) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 5) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 6) Telling Industries. b. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection. C. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Blazeframe Industries; Bare Slotted Track (BST/BST 2). 2) C1arkDietrich Building Systems; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 3) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 4) Metal-Lite; The System. 5) Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD. D. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. E. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated -metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive -backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, 092216-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load -bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single -Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire - resistance -rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Z-Shaped Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 22 16 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 092216-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Texture finishes. 4. Moisture guard. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 3. Section 09 22 16 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 29 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. C. National Gypsum Company. d. USG. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. C. National Gypsum Company. d. USG. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. C. National Gypsum Company. d. USG. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Mold -Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold -resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. C. National Gypsum Company. d. USG. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD A. Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Multilayer products constructed of two layers of gypsum boards sandwiching a viscoelastic sound -absorbing polymer core. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. National Gypsum Company. b. Quiet Solution. C. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, regular type 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 092900-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. C. National Gypsum Company. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized -steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. C. Expansion (control) joint. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound -Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 29 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Grabber Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. C. Specified Technologies, Inc. E. Moisture Guard: Provide continuous 1/2 inch high guard where gypsum panels contact floors. Product: Waterguard; PVC GDW moisture guard. www.waterguard-usa.com At all walls in restrooms and other wet walls, provided sealant between the moisture guard and the floor. F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation." 2.9 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water -based, job -mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Texture: Fine. C. Non -Aggregate Finish: Premixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1. Texture: Orange peel. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than l/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end j oints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical j oints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make j oints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 092900-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load -bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire -resistance -rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 4. Mold -Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Acoustically Enhanced Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels in the most economical direction unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face -layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance - rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face - layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 29 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners. D. Moisture Guard: Install per manufacture's instructions. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture -finish manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 092900-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 29 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 30 13 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mosaic tile. 2. Porcelain tile. 3. Setting Materials 4. Metal edge. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 3. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units for locations behind ceramic tile. 4. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for metal edge transitions. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of product including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. C. Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide samples of each color blend. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Conform to TCNA handbook for ceramic tile installation. 2. Installer: Company specializing in applying the Work of this Section with a minimum 5 years' documented experience. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 30 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 30 13 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Source Limitations: Obtain each specified product in this Section from a single manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Protect adhesives and liquid additives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Store tile and setting materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location and protect from contamination, dampness, freezing or overheating. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during tiling and for a minimum of 7 days after completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard -grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A 108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Tile Type (CT I) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following; or approved equal: a. Concept Surfaces 2. Color and size per Interior Material Legend. 3. Composition: Porcelain. 4. Thickness:3/8inch. 5. Surface: per Interior Material Legend. 6. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's full range of color and as indicated in Interior Material Legend in Drawings. 8. Grout Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch. 9. Grout Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of color and as indicated in Interior Material Legend in Drawings. B. Mosaic Tile Type (CT2) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following; or approved equal: a. Ann Sacks 2. Pattern and size: per Interior Material Legend. 3. Face Size: Per Interior Material Legend. 4. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's full range of color and as indicated in Interior Material Legend in Drawings Insert color and pattern. 5. Grout Joint Thickness: l/16 inch. 6. Grout Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of color and as indicated in Interior Material Legend in Drawings. 093013-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 30 13 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Ceramic Tile Type (CT3) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following, or approved equal: a. Concept Surfaces / Harmony. 2. Module Size: 12inch x 24inch. 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 4. Face: Ribbed textural tile with rectified edge. 5. Finish: Mat, opaque glaze. 6. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's full range of color and as indicated in Interior Material Legend in Drawings. 7. Grout Joint Thickness: 1/16 inch. 8. Grout Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of color and as indicated in Material Legend in Drawings. 2.3 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Metal Edge Transition: 1. Description: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of material and maximum available length to minimize running joints. a. Refer to Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" and as indicated on Interior Material Legend in Drawings for profiles and locations. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI Al 18.3, thinset bond type. B. Mortar Bed Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, type 1, gray or white. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 3. Sand: ASTM C144, fine. 4. Latex Additive: As approved. 5. Water: Clean and potable. C. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 1. Dry -Set Portland Cement Type: ANSI A118.1. 2, Latex -Portland Cement Type: ANSI A118.4. 3. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, 100 percent solids. D. Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.6; color as selected. E. High performance grout (Custom Building Products Prism Grout): ANSI Al18.7:, 100 percent solids epoxy grout; color as selected. 1. Location: All floor locations. F. Silicone Sealants: Silicone sealant, moisture and mildew resistant type, white. Refer to Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." G. Cleavage Membrane: 1. No. 15 asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D226, Type 1. 2. Polyethylene film, ASTM D4397, 4.0 mil thickness. H. Cementitious Backer Board: Refer to Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board." I. Grout: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or approved equal: a. Custom Building Products: 1) Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.6. 2) High performance grout (Custom Building Products Prism Grout): FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 30 l 3 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 30 13 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT ANSI Al 18.7 a) Locations: all floors. b. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range of color and as indicated in Interior Material Legend in Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall surfaces are free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials, smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1, and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces, and are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1. C. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instruction if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor -mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates. C. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. E. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry -set mortar to a feather edge. F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated in specification or on Drawings. Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on each wall and that no tile less than 1/2 width is used. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles square. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Install non -ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Install thresholds where indicated. I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. J. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. K. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. L. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN -SET METHOD 093013-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 30 13 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook thin -set methods for dry -set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with high performance grout, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook for thin -set method. B. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCNA Handbook for thin -set with dry -set or latex-portland cement bond coat. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 72 hours after installation. B. Cover floors with kraft paper and protect from dirt and residue from other trades. C. Where floor will be exposed for prolonged periods, cover with plywood or other similar type walkways. END OF SECTION 09 30 13 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 30 13 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 09 5123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical tiles for interior ceilings. 2. Fully concealed, direct -hung, suspension systems. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. B. Product test reports. C. Research reports. D. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS & EXTRA MATERIALS A. Maintenance data. B. Additional attic stock of 5% of each specified tile. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES - ACT1 A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. a. Equal product: Symphony m High NRC B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264. C. Classification: Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E. D. Color: White. E. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 42. F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC):.80. G. Edge/Joint Detail: As indicated by manufacturer's designation Reveal. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0951 23 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT H. Thickness: 7/8 inch. I. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES - ACT2 A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Commercial ceilings: a. Equal product: Armstrong Kitchen Zone B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264. C. Classification: Type X, Form 2, Pattern G. D. Color: White. E. Fire Class: A. F. Class A: Per ASTM E84 G. Flame spread index of 25 or less. Smoke developed: 50 or less. H. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 33. I. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC):.N/A. J. Light Reflectance Value: 0.89 K. Edge/Joint Detail: As indicated by manufacturer's designation. L. Thickness: 7/8 inch. M. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis -of -Design Product:: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following 1. Certainteed. 2. Armstrong B. Metal Suspension -System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct -hung, fully concealed, metal suspension system that complies with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. C. Direct -Hung, Double -Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and capped with cold -rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized, G30 coating designation. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate Heavy-duty system. 2. Access: Upward Downward and end pivoted side pivoted, with initial access openings of size indicated below and located throughout ceiling within each module formed by main and cross runners, with additional access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles. a. Initial Access Opening: In each module, 24 by 48. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. B. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical tiles in -place during a seismic event. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product to match selected ceiling tile. 1. CertainTeed Corporation. B. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying with seismic 0951 23 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for of suspension -system runners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width tiles at borders unless otherwise indicated. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. Install suspended acoustical tile ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. C. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION 09 5123 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0951 23 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 54 26 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 09 54 26 - SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood, grille -panel ceilings and suspension system. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of wood ceilings and suspension systems with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire - suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver ceiling components and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they are protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 1. Store materials flat and level, raised from the floor. B. Handle ceiling components and accessories in a manner that prevents damage. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install interior ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Store and acclimatize wood products in the spaces where they will be installed for a minimum of 72 hours immediately before ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements" to design attachment devices. B. Structural Performance: Exterior suspended wood ceilings shall withstand exterior exposure, the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses without showing permanent deformation of ceiling system components or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors: 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure indicated on Drawings, acting inward or outward. 2.2 SOLID -WOOD, GRILLE -PANEL CEILING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis of Design: 9 Wood, Inc. (www.9wood.com), WoodGrille, Series 1100 1. Wood Species: Hemlock. 2. Member Size: 5/8- by 3-1/4- inch. 3. Edge Profile: Square 4. Members/LF: Five members per LF; Custom spacing may be required. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 54 26 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 54 26 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. Ensure percent openness requirements are met for above ceiling fire sprinkler systems. 5. Assembly Style: Cross Piece Backer 6. Panel Sizes: See architectural RCPs. 7. Fire Rating: Class 1(A). 8. Finish: Match Wilson Art Color; New Age oak. a. Reveal Scrim: None. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Metal T-Grid Suspension System: Provide standard interior metal heavy-duty 15/16-inch suspension T-grid system using main runners, cross -tees, wall angle, or shadow moldings of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated and that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. Comply with all applicable codes and ordinances. B. Attachment Devices: Size for 3 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, direct hung unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire, Braces, Ties, Hanger Rods, Flat Hangers and Angle Hangers: Provide wires, rods and hangers that comply with applicable ASTM specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which suspended wood ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of suspended wood ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of suspended wood ceilings. 1. Balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. 2. Avoid using less -than -half -width units. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C636/C636M and seismic requirement indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension -system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns in 3 inches. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate to which hangers are attached and for type of hanger involved. 095426-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 54 26 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that does not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts or postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns in 1-1/2 inches. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers and without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in -place or post installed anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges and ends of wood units. 1. Screw -attach metal moldings to substrate at intervals of not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners on moldings and trim. E. Install wood components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and to accommodate natural expansion and contraction of wood products resulting from fluctuations in humidity. F. Cut wood components for accurate fit at borders and at interruptions and penetrations by other work through ceilings. 1. Stiffen edges of cut wood components as required to eliminate variations in flatness. G. Treat field -cut edges of wood components in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations; finish exposed field cuts to match factory finish. 1. Solid -Wood Planks: Use solid -wood end caps to conceal exposed field -cut edges H. Install wood components in coordination with suspension system and moldings and trim. 1. Install wood components in patterns indicated on Drawings. I. Install field -constructed access panels in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including dented units. END OF SECTION 09 54 26 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 54 26 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermoplastic -rubber base. 2. Metal molding accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions for using adhesives and grouts. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 degrees F or more than 90 degrees F. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC -RUBBER BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following, or FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 65 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT approved equal: 1. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). a. RB 1 and RB2: Style and Location: 1) Style D, Sculptured: Provide in areas indicated in Drawings. 2) Profile: As indicated on Interior Material Legend in Drawings. 3) Thickness: pper profile. C. Height: As indicated on Drawings. D. Lengths: Manufacturer's standard length. E. Outside Corners: Job formed. F. Inside Corners: Job formed. G. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations and as indicated on Interior Material Legend in Drawings. 2.2 METAL FLOORING TRANSITIONS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following, or approved equal 1. Schluter Systems B. Description: Metal Edge Transitions C. Locations: 1. Provide at all dissimilar flooring transitions and outside tiled corners on walls a. Ceramic Tile to Carpet Tile: RENO-TK; Stainless Steel. b. Static -Control Resilient Flooring to Carpet Tile: RENO-TK; Stainless Steel. C. Static -Control Resilient Flooring to Sealed/Polished Concrete: RENO-U; Stainless Steel. d. Exposed Tile Edges: Schluter; SCHIENE; Match tile color. e. Outside Tile Edges on walls: QUADEC; Match tile color. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient -product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient -product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching 096513-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Job -Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 6 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 6 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 METAL ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing metal accessories. B. Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient -product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 65 13 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 65 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modular carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 09 65 13 - Resilient Base and Accessories, including metal edge transitions. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and Schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, or Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long samples. C. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. f11c�1.Ix177u/.'%I1130F.3l(.Y11:3u11W1► 1ki A. Product test reports. B. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain -removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 68 13 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard." 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation, limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet -work in spaces in complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not installed carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT1) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or approved equal. 1. Mohawk Group (The); Mohawk Carpet, LLC. 2. Denim II / Zip It B. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of color and as indicated in Interior Material Legend on Drawings. C. Material Product Type: Tile. D. Construction: Tufted. E. Minimum Square Yard: No minimum. F. Surface Texture: Textured patterned loop. G. Gauge: 1/2 (47.00 rows per 10 cm). H. Tufted Pipe Weight: 18.0 oz. per sq. yd. (610 g/m2). 1. Finished Pile Thickness: 0.92 inch (2.34mm). J. Stitches Per Inch: 11.0 (43.31 per 10 cm). K. Dye Method: Solution dyed / yarn dyed. L. Fiber Type: Duracolor Premium Nylon. M. Fiber Technology: Duracolor by Mohawk Groups' Stain Resistant System. Passes GSA requirements for permanent stain -resistant carpet. N. Stain Release Technology: Permanent, built into fiber. O. Soil Release Technology: EcoSentry Soil Protection. P. Density:7,043. Q. Weight Density: 126,782. 09 68 13 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT R. Backing Material: EcoFlex NXT. S. Installation Method: Monolithic, Half Lap, Brick Ashlar, Basket Weave, Plant Half Lap, Monolithic Stepping, Random, Herringbone. T. Size 12- by 36- inches (.3048 in by .9144 m). U. Pattern Repeat: Not applicable. V. Foot Traffic Recommendation Tarr: Severe. W. GSA Stain Release: Pass. X. Flammability: ASTM E 648 Class 1 (Glue Down). Y. Smoke Density: ASTM E 662 Less than 450. Z. Static Propensity: AATCC-134 Under 3.5 KV. AA. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range and as indicated in Interior Material Legend on Drawings. 2.2 CARPET TILE (CPT 2) A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or approved equal: 1. Shaw Contract/Portal: a. Construction: Multi -level pattern loop. b. Fiber: Eco Solution Q Nylon. C. Dye Method: 100 percent Solution Dyed. d. Primary Backing: Synthetic. e. Secondary Backing: Ecoworx Tile. f. Protective treatments: SSP SHaw Soil Protection. g. Adhesive: Full Spread. h. Size: 24- by 24- inch. i. Gauge: l/12 inch. j. Stitches per inch: 8.5. k. Average Density: 7,814 oz/yd3. 1. Total thickness: 0.275 inch. in. Tufted weight: 28oz. n. Installation: As indicated in Interior Material Legend on Drawings. 2.3 CARPET TILE (CPT 3) A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or approved equal: Julie Industries, Inc. I Static Smart I Lan 4.1 a. Texture: Multi -level pattern loop b. Gauge:1/12 C. Density:4,923 d. Recycled content: 40.4% e. Stiches per inch: 9.0 f. Average pile height: 0.114 inch g. Fiber: premium branded Eco Solution Q Nylon h. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed i. Conductive fiber technology: Continuous conduction static smart monofilament. j. Size: per Interior Material Legend k. Electrostatic Propensity: AATCC 134-06 Less than 2.0 kV (2,000 volts) 1. Adhesive requirement: Shaw 5001 Pressure Sensitive in. Installation: As indicated in Interior Material Legend on Drawings. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 68 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining, pressure -sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Concrete Slabs: Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1,000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas, follow manufacturer's recommendations for testing. a. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. b. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104 and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes, and depressions 1/8-inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpettile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 10, "Carpet Tile," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer Glue down; install every tile with full -spread, releasable, pressure -sensitive adhesive. C. Maintain dye -lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Maintain pile -direction patterns indicated on Drawings. E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 09 68 13 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT I. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 68 13 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 68 13 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 77 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS AND CORNER GUARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 09 77 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Prefinished polyester glass reinforced plastic sheets and adhered to unfinished gypsum wallboard. 2. PVC trim. 3. Corner Guards. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board. 3. Section 09 9123 - Painting & Transparent Finishes. 4. Section 09 65 13 - Resilient Base and Accessories. C. Products Not Furnished or Installed under This Section: 1. Gypsum Board. 2. Resilient Base and Accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials: Standard Specifications (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 256 - Izod Impact Strengths (ft#/in) 2. ASTM D 570 - Water Absorption (%) 3. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Strengths (psi) & Tensile Modulus (psi) 4. ASTM D 790 - Flexural Strengths (psi) & Flexural Modulus (psi) 5. ASTM D 2583- Barcol Hardness 6. ASTM D 5319 - Standard Specification for Glass -Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling Panels. 7. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit sufficient manufacturer's data to indicate compliance with these specifications, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Submit elevations of each wall showing location of paneling and trim members with respect to all discontinuities in the wall elevation. C. Samples for Verification: Submit appropriate section of panel for each finish selected indicating the color, texture, and pattern required. 1. Submit complete with specified applied finish. 2. For selected patterns show complete pattern repeat. 3. Exposed Molding and Trim: Provide samples of each type, finish, and color. D. Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for adhesives, sealants and other pertinent materials prior to their delivery to the site (available as downloads for most Marlite¢s products at http://www.marlite.com/tech-details.aspx or by contacting Marlite at info@marlite.com). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to building code requirements for interior finish for smoke and flame spread FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 77 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 77 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS AND CORNER GUARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT requirements as tested in accordance with: 1. ASTM E 84 (Method of test for surface burning characteristics of building Materials) a. Wall Required Rating O Class C. B. Sanitary Standards: System components and finishes to comply with: 1. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) / Food Safety & Inspection Services (FSIS) requirements for food preparation facilities, incidental contact. 2. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) 2013 Food Code 6-101.11. 3. Canadian Food Inspection Agency (CFIA) requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials factory packaged on strong pallets. B. Store panels and trim lying flat, under cover and protected from the elements. Allow panels to acclimate to room temperature (range of 60 to 75 degrees F) for 48 hours prior to installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Building are to be fully enclosed prior to installation with sufficient heat (70 degrees) and ventilation consistent with good working conditions for finish work B. During installation and for not less than 48 hours before, maintain an ambient temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of adhesive used and recommendation of adhesive manufacturer. 1. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Furnish one-year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Marlite; 1 Marlite Drive, Dover, OH 44622. 800-377-1221 FAX (330) 343-4668 Email: info@marlite.com www.marlite.com. B. Product: 1. Standard FRP. 2.2 PANELS A. Fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets complying with ASTM D 5319. Dimensions: a. Thickness:0.090-inch. b. Width: 4-foot. C. Length: 8-foot. Tolerance: a. Length and Width: +/-1/8-inch. b. Square - Not to exceed 1/8-inch for 8 foot panels or 5/32-inch for 10-foot panels B. Properties: Resistant to rot, corrosion, staining, denting, peeling, and splintering. 1. Flexural Strength - 1.7 x 104psi per ASTM D 790. 2. Flexural Modulus O 6.0 x 101 psi per ASTM D 790. 097700-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 77 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS AND CORNER GUARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Tensile Strength O 8.0 x 103 psi per ASTM D 638. 4. Tensile Modulus O 9.43 x 101psi per ASTM D 638. 5. Water Absorption - 0.17 percent per ASTM D 570. 6. Barcol Hardness (scratch resistance) of 30 as per ASTM D 2583. 7. Izod Impact Strength of 7.0 ft. lbs./in ASTM D 256 C. Back Surface: Smooth imperfections which do not affect fimctional properties are not cause for rejection. D. Front Finish: 1. Specifier Note: Marlite¢s Standard FRP panels are available in several configurations, including Class A (I) and Class C (III) Fire -rated, along with various surface textures O smooth and pebble. Color: Specifier to choose. 2. Marlite Standard FRP is available in a variety of colors, including; a. Reference Interior Material Legend. b. Surface: Pebbled. C. Fire Rating: Class C fire rating d. Size: standard sizes are; 1) Marlite Standard FRP a) 48-inch by 96-inch 1.2m by 2.4m by .090-inch. 2.3 MOLDINGS A. PVC Trim: Thin -wall semi -rigid extruded PVC. 1. M 350 Inside Corner, 8-foot length. 2. M 360 Outside Corner, 8-foot length. 3. M 365 Division, 8-foot length. 4. M 370 Edge, 8-foot length. 5. V 177 135' Inside Corner 8-foot length. 6. V 179 135' Outside Corner 8-foot length. 7. Color: Match panel color. B. Outside Corner Guard (CG1): 1. F 560SS Stainless Corner Guard, 8-foot length. 2. Finish: #4 brushed satin. 3. Installation: by concealed method. 4. Size: 2-inch by 2-inch x 8-foot. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Either of the following construction adhesives complying with ASTM C 557. 1. Titebond Advanced Polymer Panel Adhesive O VOC compliant, non-flammable, environmentally safe adhesive. B. Sealant: 1. Marlite Brand - Color Match Sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine backup surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails countersunk, joints and cracks filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface. 1. Verify that stud spacing does not exceed 24 inches on -center. B. Repair defects prior to installation. 1. Level wall surfaces to panel manufacturers requirements. Remove protrusions and fill indentations. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 77 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 77 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS AND CORNER GUARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. B. Cut sheets to meet supports allowing 1/8 inch clearance for every 8 foot of panel. 1. Cut and drill with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with shears. 2. Pre -drill fastener holes 1/8 inch oversize with high speed drill bit. a. Space at 8 inch maximum on center at perimeter, approximately 1 inch from panel edge. b. Space at in field in rows 16 feet on center, with fasteners spaced at 12 inch maximum on center. C. Apply panels to board substrate, above base, vertically oriented with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels. 1. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints. a. Adhesive trowel and application method to conform to adhesive manufacturers recommendations. b. Drive fasteners for snug fit. Do not over -tighten. D. Apply panel moldings to all panel edges using silicone sealant providing for required clearances. 1. All moldings must provide for a minimum 1/8 inch of panel expansion at joints and edges, to insure proper installation. 2. Apply sealant to all moldings, channels and joints between the system and different materials to assure watertight installation. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove excess sealant from panels and moldings. Wipe panel down using a damp cloth and mild soap solution or cleaner. B. Refer to manufacturer's specific cleaning recommendations Do not use abrasive cleaners. END OF SECTION 09 77 00 097700-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 8411 WALL -MOUNTED ACOUSTIC PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 09 84 11 - WALL -MOUNTED ACOUSTIC PANELS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section including the following. 1. Wall -mounted acoustic panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each product indicating materials, dimensions, profiles, textures and colors. Include installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating plans, elevations, details of construction, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Verification Samples: Submit representative sample of felt in color specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Minimum of 2 years manufacturing similar products. B. Installer: Minimum of 2 years installing similar products. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Storage and Handling: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling. Protect from weather damage. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty against defects in manufacturing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL -MOUNTED ACOUSTIC PANELS (AWP1) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or approved equal: 1. Filz Felt I Risby: a. Content: 100% Wool Design Felt + Cork Composite Backing. b. Tile Thickness: 5/8 inch. C. Tile Size: 2 feet x 6 inch. d. Trim Option: End -of -Run Trim. f. Mounting Method: Tiles attach to a wall surface using a heavy-duty wallcovering adhesive. g. Color: Single color, as selected from manufacturer's full range of color and as indicated on Interior Material Legend in Drawings. h Colorfastness to Light: Class 4-5. i. Colorfastness to Crocking: Class 3-4 (wet), Class 4-5 (dry). FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 84 11 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 84 11 WALL -MOUNTED ACOUSTIC PANELS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Flammability: ASTM 84 Class B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions to determine that they are suitable for installation. Proceed with installation only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, approved submittals, and in proper relationship to adjacent construction. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust units for proper position, uniform appearance and operation. B. Clean exposed and semi -exposed surfaces using materials acceptable to manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 84 11 098411-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a high -side sheen flat, velvet-like finish. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, an eggshell finish. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a satin -like finish. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi -gloss finish. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacture's label with the following information: 1. Product name and type (description). FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0991 l 3 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Batch date. 3. Color number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials including lead paint may be present in buildings and structures to be painted. A report on the presence of known hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified. 2. Perform preparation for painting of substrates known to include lead paint in accordance with EPA Renovation, Repair and Painting Rule and additional requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. Kelly Moore. B. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Standards: Provide products that comply with Manufacture's Premium 111 Quality standards indicated and like VOC limits. B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 099113-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in - situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application. 1. Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint. B. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. E. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. F. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 91 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal, Galvanized -Metal, and Aluminum Substrates: 1. Water -Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, water -based, anti -corrosive for metal: S-W Pro Industrial Pro- Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5): S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat. END OF SECTION 09 9113 099113-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: a. Concrete. b. Concrete masonry units (CMU). C. Steel. d. Cast iron. e. Galvanized metal. f. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). g. Gypsum board. 2 Fire and smoke assembly identification. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2 Section 09 93 00 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a high -side sheen flat, velvet-like finish. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, an eggshell finish. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a satin -like finish. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi -gloss finish. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0991 23 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Primary Designer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Primary Designer will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Primary Designer at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Primary Designer specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacturer's label with the following information: 1. Product name and type (description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Kwal, Division of Sherwin-Williams. 3. Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 0991 23 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Kelly Moore. 6. Dunn Edwards. B. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Standards: Provide products that comply with Manufactures Premium Ist Quality standards indicated and like VOC limits. B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As selected by Primary Designer from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in - situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application. 1. Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint. B. Substrate Conditions: 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Concrete: 12 percent. b. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 91 23 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FORBID + PERMIT paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Concrete Floors: Remove oil, dust, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials. Comply with SSPC-SP-13/NACE 6 or ICRI 03732. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. H. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. h. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. 0991 23 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Other items as directed by Primary Designer. h. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. F. Fire and Smoke Assembly Identification: Where assembly types are identified in Drawings, provide stenciled identification in accessible concealed spaces and where noted in Drawings. 1. Assembly Types Requiring Identification: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers, and smoke partitions. 2. Accessible concealed spaces include below accessible floors, above ceilings, and attic spaces. 3. Locate within 15 feet of partition ends and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally. 4. Lettering not less than 3 inches in height with a minimum 3/8-inch stroke in a contrasting color. 5. Wording: "Fire and/or smoke barrier - Protect all openings." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Primary Designer, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Pedestrian Traffic Surfaces: 1. Clear Acrylic System, Gloss Finish: a. First Coat: S-W H&C Concrete Sealer Wet Look Water Base, at 100 to 200 sq. ft. per gal. b. Second Coat: S-W H&C Concrete Sealer Wet Look Water Base, at 100 to 200 sq. ft. per gal. B. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25, at 100 to 200 sq. ft. per gal. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 0991 23 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FORBID + PERMIT C. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi -gloss (Gloss Level 4): S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi -Gloss, B31-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry, per coat. 2. Water -Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Locations: 1) 220 After Hours Storage, 221-223 BIN Storage b. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25, at 100 to 200 sq. ft. per gal. C. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi -gloss (Gloss Level 5): S-W Pro Industrial Pre -Catalyzed Water Based Epoxy, K46-151 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. C. Metal Substrates (Aluminum, Steel, Galvanized Steel): 1. Water -Based Dry -Fall System: a. Top Coat: Dry -fall latex, flat: S-W Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall Flat, B42-80 Series, at 6.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry. 2. Water -Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Locations: 1) Railings and Stair locations b. Prime Coat: Primer, rust -inhibitive, water based: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, at 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry. C. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi -gloss[ (Gloss Level 5)]: S-W Pro Industrial Pre -Catalyzed Water Based Epoxy, K46-151 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. 3. Acrylic/Alkyd System: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames a. Prime Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, at 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry. b. Intermediate Coat: Water -based acrylic -alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Water -based acrylic -alkyd, semi -gloss, interior: S-W ProMar 200 Waterbased Acrylic -Alkyd Semi -Gloss, B34-8200 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry, per coat. d. Topcoat: Water -based acrylic -alkyd, gloss, interior: S-W ProMar 200 Waterbased Acrylic -Alkyd Gloss, B35-8200 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry, per coat. D. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, interior: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell (Gloss Level 3): S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry, per coat. 2. Water -Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Provide at the following space the following spaces: 1) 170 Processing Lab, 174 Chemical/Powder b. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry. C. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, eggshell (Gloss Level 3): S- W Pro Industrial Pre -Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K45-151 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. END OF SECTION 09 9123 0991 23-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 09 93 00 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Primers 1. Wood stains. 2. Transparent finishes. B. Related Requirements: Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for stains and transparent finishes on concrete floors. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product. 2. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 3. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: Sample for each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish required on representative samples of actual wood substrates. Size: 8 inches square. 1. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 2. Label each coat of each Sample. 3. Label each Sample for location and application area. 1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Stock Material: Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 degrees F. B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures of less than 5 degrees F above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following, or approved equal: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 93 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each coating product from single source from single manufacturer. 2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with 1 another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Stain Colors: As selected by Interior Designer and as indicated on Interior Material Legend in Drawings. 2.4 PRIMERS A. Alkyd Sanding Sealer, Interior, Solvent Based, Clear: Solvent -based, quick -drying, clear, sandable alkyd sealer used on new interior wood surfaces that are to be top -coated with an alkyd varnish. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 1 of the following: 1. PPG Paints. a. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.5 WOOD STAINS A. Stain, Interior, Semitransparent, for Interior Wood: Solvent -based, oil or oil/alkyd, semitransparent, pigmented stain for new interior wood surfaces that are to be finished with a clear varnish. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following, or approve equal: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.6 TRANSPARENT FINISHES A. Varnish, Interior, Water Based, Clear, Satin: Water -based clear satin coating for interior wood trim, frames, doors, paneling and cabinetry. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following, or approved equal: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). C. Gloss and Sheen Level: Manufacturer's standard low -sheen finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. F. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 09 93 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. B. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified. D. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. E. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. F. Interior Wood Substrates: Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 1. Apply wood filler paste to open -grain woods to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 2. Sand surfaces exposed to view and dust off. 3. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dry. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 1. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 2. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect Work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR WOOD -FINISH -SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood Substrates, Wood Trim: Semitransparent Stain System TPF1: 1. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semitransparent, matching topcoat. a. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semitransparent. END OF SECTION 09 93 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 09 93 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 1419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 14 19 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dimensional characters. a. Cast dimensional characters. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Sample of dimensional character. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS - Solid Brass FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 14 19 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Cast Characters: Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or approved equal: a. Takeform Signage / Ethos Dimensional Letters. 1) Typeface: Reference Drawings. 2) Material: Solid brass. 3) Face Finish: Satin brass. 4) Letter Height: Reference Drawings. 5) Letter Thickness: Reference Drawings. 6) Mounting Method: Concealed fasteners, flush mount. See Drawings for mounting position and method. 2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS - Solid Brass Exterior Grade A. Manufacturers" Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or approved equal. 1. Takeform Signage / Ethos Dimensional Letters: a. Typeface: Reference Drawings. b. Materials: Solid brass. C. Face Finish: Satin brass. d. Letter Height: Reference Drawings. e. Letter Thickness: Reference Drawings. f. Application: Exterior grade for exterior application. g. Mounting Method: Concealed fasteners, flosh mount. See Drawings for mounting position and method. 2.4 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS A. Brass Castings: ASTM B584, alloy recommended by manufacturer and finisher for finish indicated. B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish hot -dip galvanized devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean 101419-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 1419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil -canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. 7. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing. B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket -mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required. 1. Stainless Steel Brackets: Factory finish brackets to match sign background finish unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated. D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Verify that sign -support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 14 19 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10 14 19 101419-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 14 23.13 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 14 23.13 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Interior signs. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with a minimum 5 years' experience. Obtain signs from one source and a single manufacturer. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturers warranty against defects in materials or workmanship for minimum five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR SIGNS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following; or approved equal: 1. Takeform I Fusion 01. B. Materials and Construction: 1. Sign Face: Shall be 0.035 inch (nominal) standard grade, high pressure surface laminate. 2. Sign Core: Shall incorporate balanced construction with the core sandwiched between laminates to prevent warping. Laminate on face only shall not be acceptable. 3. Tactile Lettering: Shall be precision machined, raised 1/32 inch, matte PETG and subsurface colored for scratch resistance. 4. Accent Bar: Signs shall incorporate an anodized metal accent bar with a brushed satin finish. Painted accent bars shall not be acceptable. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 14 23.13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 14 23.13 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 5. Inserts: 0.080 inch thickness non -glare acrylic window flush to sign face and able to accept paper or acetate inserts. 6. The signage shall, with the exception of directories and directional, be a uniform 8- 1/2 inch width to facilitate inserts printed on standard width paper. 7. Insert components shall have a 0.080 thickness non -glare acrylic window and shall be inlaid flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance. 8. The signage shall include modules allowing for inserts, notice holders, occupancy sliders, marker, magnetic, and cork boards. All modules shall be flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance. 9. The laminates (front and back) shall be pressure laminated and precision machined together to a 90-degree angle. Edges shall be smooth, void of chips, burrs, sharp edges and marks. 10. The signage shall utilize an acrylic sphere for Grade 11 Braille inserted directly into a scratch resistant, high pressure laminate sign face. Braille dots are to be pressure fit in high tolerance drilled holes. 11. Braille dots shall be half hemispherical domed and protruding a minimum a. inch. 12. The signage shall utilize a pressure activated adhesive. The adhesive shall be nonhazardous and shall allow for flexing and deflection of the adhered components due to changes in temperature and moisture without bond failure. 13. All signs shall be provided with appropriate mounting hardware. Hardware shall be finished and architectural in appearance and suitable for the mounting surface. 14. Some signs may be installed on glass. A blank backer is required to be placed on the opposite side of the glass to cover tape and adhesive. The backer shall match the sign in size and shape. C. Printed Inserts: 1. The signage shall be capable of accepting paper or acetate inserts to allow changing and updating as required. Insert components shall have a 0.080 inch thickness non- glare acrylic window and shall be inlayed flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance. 2. The signage contractor shall provide and install all signage inserts. 3. Manufacturer shall provide a template containing layout, font, color, artwork and trim lines to allow Owner to produce inserts on laser or ink jet printer. The template shall be in an Acrobat or Word format (.pdf). D. Colors: 1. Face and background colors shall be standard grade, high pressure laminate, all colors and finishes. 2. Standard tactile colors shall match manufacturers ADA standard colorselection. 3. Sign and backer edge shall be treated with a hot wax seal for moisture integrity. 4. Colors shall be selected from manufacturer's full range of colors, and as indicated on Interior Material Legend in Drawings. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CODE COMPLIANCE A. It shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder to meet any and all local, state, and federal code requirements in fabricating and installing signs. 3.2 INSTALLATION 101423.13-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 14 23.13 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. 3. Install interior signage in accordance with ADA specifications. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Package to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment, handling, storage and installation. Products should remain in original packaging until removal in necessary. Store products in a dry indoor location. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCE A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Reference in Drawings Interior Signage Schedule, Pictorial Legend, and Signage Location Plan. END OF SECTION 10 14 23.13 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 14 23.13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 21 13.17 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 2113.17 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 3. Section 10 28 13 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment -mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6- inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 2.2 COMPACT GRADE LAMINATE TOILET COMPARMENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. a. Basis -of -Design: Compact Grade Laminate - DuraLine Series. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 21 13.17 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 21 13.17 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Toilet -Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. C. Urinal -Screen Style: Wall hung. D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic -core panel material with melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges and no-sightline system. Provide minimum 3/4-inch- thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- thick panels. E. Pilaster: Formed from stainless steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch nominal thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. F. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full -Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. G. Panel Finish: 1. Facing Sheet Finish: One color and pattern in each room. 2. Color and Pattern: As indicated on Interior Material Legend on Drawings, with manufacturer's standard dark color core. 3. Edge Color: Manufacturer's standard. 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch- thick stainless steel paired, self- closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through -bolts. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface -mounted cast -stainless steel latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber- faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through -bolts. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast -stainless steel hook and rubber - tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment- mounted accessories. Mount with through -bolts. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty rubber -tipped cast -stainless steel bumper at out - swinging doors and entrance -screen doors. Mount with through -bolts. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast -stainless steel pull at out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through -bolts. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded -aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex- type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized -steel, or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel compatible with related materials. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. D. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A743/A743M. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through -partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. 10 21 13.17 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 21 13.17 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Overhead -Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide out -swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. I . Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2-inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1-inch. 2. Full -Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full - height brackets. a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead -Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10 2113.17 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 21 13.17 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 22 19 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 22 19 - DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site -assembled demountable partitions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For demountable partitions. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details at floors, columns, permanent partitions, and ceilings; and method of erection and disassembly. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of the following products: 1. Face -Panel Finish: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, but not less than 6 inches square. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from the installers of the items involved: B. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For demountable partitions to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Do not deliver or install demountable partitions until finishes in spaces to receive them are complete, including suspended ceilings, floors, carpeting, and painting. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Structural Performance: Provide demountable partitions capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Transverse -Load Capacity: Lateral deflection of not more than 1/120 of the overall span FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 22 19 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 22 19 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT when tested under a uniformly distributed load of 5 lb/sq. ft. according to ASTM E 72. 2.2 SITE -ASSEMBLED DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS A. General: Site -assembled, demountable -partition assembly and components that are the standard products of manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide NxtWall Glass Office Wall Series or comparable product by one of the following: a. NxtWall. B. Framing: aluminum studs and top and bottom tracks, 4 inches deep. C. Trim: Continuous, factory -finished, snap -on type; adjustable for variations in floor and ceiling levels. 1. Trim Material: aluminum. 2. Panel Joints: Butt joints without trim. 3. Outside Corner Trim: Square. 4. Base Profile: Projected. 5. Cornice Trim: Continuous over tops of partial -height units for maximum stability. 6. Exposed -Metal Trim Finish: Color -anodized aluminum. 7. Trim Color: Black. D. Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- thick, frameless glass door construction. 1. Door Operation: Refer to Plans. 2. Door Finish: powder -coat finish. a. Color, Texture, and Pattern: Black. E. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." F. Glazing Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum frames for frameless (top and bottom - supported) glazing thickness indicated. 1. Frame Finish: Color -anodized aluminum. 2. Frame Color: Black. G. Frameless Glazing: Manufacturer's standard fully tempered clear float glass for butt -glazing with top and bottom support. H. Seals: Manufacturer's standard. I. Refer to Citizen's Tower demountable partition system. This system shall match the system at Citizen's Tower. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate demountable walls for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure -fit members that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Fabricate systems for installation with continuous seals at floor, ceiling, and other locations where partitions abut fixed construction. B. Panels for Site -Assembled Demountable Partitions: Face panels fabricated and finished in modular widths indicated. C. Finish Facings: Factory apply finish -facing materials with appropriate backings, using mildew - resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by finish -material manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply facing to panel with tightly butted invisible seams where indicated on Drawings, and with no gaps or overlaps; free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, or other defects. 2. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance. 3. Match facing pattern 72 inches above finished floor. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary 102219-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 22 19 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker over a nonspecular as fabricated mechanical finish. D. Power -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine components before installation. Reject components that are wet, moisture damaged, mold damaged, broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched. C. Examine roughing -in for electrical power to verify actual locations of power connections before partition installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install demountable partitions after other finishing operations have been completed. 1. Install partitions rigid, level, plumb, and aligned. Install seals at connections with floors, ceilings, fixed walls, and abutting surfaces to prevent light and sound transmission. 2. Except for filler panels scribed to fixed walls or columns, do not modify manufacturer's standard components. B. Doors and Frames: Install door -and -frame and glazing -and -glazing -frame assemblies securely anchored to partitions and with doors aligned and fitted. Install and adjust door hardware for proper operation. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install each demountable partition so surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent partitions. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Inspect installation, correct misalignments, and tighten loose connections. B. Doors: Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. Verify that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. C. Remove and replace defaced or damaged components. END OF SECTION 10 22 19 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 22 l 9 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 28 13 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public -use washroom accessories. 2. Drip shower accessories. 3. Custodial accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Design accessories and fasteners to comply with the following requirements: 1. Grab Bars: Installed units are able to resist 250 lbf concentrated load applied in any direction and at any point. 2.2 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: (TTD-1) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradley Corporation. 2. Description: Single -roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Recessed or Partition mounted, serving two adjacent toilet compartments. 4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 28 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: (PTDWR) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B-3803 Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle is Basis -of -Design. C. Bradley Corporation. 2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Recessed with projecting receptacle. a. Designed for nominal 6-inch wall depth. 4. Minimum Towel -Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. 5. Minimum Waste -Receptacle Capacity: 12 gal. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste -receptacle liner. 8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel -dispenser compartment and waste receptacle. C. Waste Receptacle: (WR) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 1) B-35633 Recessed Waste Receptacle with Disposal Door. 2. Mounting: Self -closing disposal -opening cover, recessed. 3. Minimum Capacity: < 3 Gallon >. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type for waste receptacle. D. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser: (PTD) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Mounting: Recessed and Surface mounted, Refer to Plans. a. B-35905 Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser (RPTD). b. B-359039 Surface -Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser (SPTD). 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A 480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). E. Automatic Soap Dispenser: (ASD) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Sloan 1) Basis -of -Design: Model EDS-500-CP. 2. Description: Automatic dispenser with infrared sensor to detect presence of hands; electrically operated, with adapter for 110- to 240-V ac power supply; designed for dispensing soap in lather form. 3. Mounting: Deck mounted on vanity or Deck mounted on lavatory. 4. Capacity:34-fl.oz. 5. Materials: Polished Chrome. 6. Refill Indicator: LED indicator. F. Soap Dispenser SD-2: (SD) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradley Corporation. 2. Description: Designed for manual operation and dispensing soap in lather form. 3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 102813-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. 5. Refill Indicator: Window type. G. Grab Bar: (GB) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradley Corporation. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. H. Sanitary -Napkin Disposal Unit: (SND) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradley Corporation. 2. Mounting: Recessed or Partition mounted, dual access. 3. Door or Cover: Self -closing, disposal -opening cover, and hinged face panel with tumbler lockset. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). I. Mirror Unit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradley Corporation. 2. Frame: Stainless steel channel. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 3. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Hangers: Manufacturer's standard rigid, tamper and theft resistant. 2.3 DRIP SHOWER ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod: I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corporation. 2. Description: 1-1/4-inch- outside diameter, straight rod. 3. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings 4. Mounting Flanges: Concealed fasteners; in manufacturer's standard material and finish. 5. Rod Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). B. Shower Curtain: I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradley Corporation. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 28 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Size: Minimum 6 inches wider than opening by 72-inches high. 3. Material: Nylon -reinforced vinyl, minimum 9 oz. or 0.008-inch- thick vinyl, with integral antibacterial and flame-retardant agents. 4. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 5. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. 6. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome -plated or stainless steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet. 2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Custodial Mop and Broom Holder: (JS) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradley Corporation. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length:36-inches. 4. Hooks: Four. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring -loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf. Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- diameter stainless steel. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.031-inch- minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch- minimum nominal thickness. C. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G60 hot -dip zinc coating. D. Galvanized -Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153/A153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer or specified in this Section, and tamper and theft resistant where exposed, and of stainless or galvanized steel where concealed. F. Mirrors: ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion - resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. B. Grab Bars: Install to comply with specified structural -performance requirements. 10 28 13 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 10 28 13 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY l 0 28 l 3- 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 43 00.70 EMERGENCY AID SPECIALTIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 43 00.70 - EMERGENCY AID SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Automated external defibrillator (AED) cabinet. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automated external defibrillators and automated external defibrillator cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of automated external defibrillator cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of automated external defibrillators indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of automated external defibrillator cabinets with wall depths. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace automated external defibrillators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Basis -of -Design products by Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Automated External Defibrillator (AED) Cabinets: a. Modern Metal Products. b. Safety Technology, Inc. 2.2 MOUNTABLE - AUTOMATED EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR CABINET A. Automated External Defibrillator (AED) Cabinet Type: Mountable AED cabinet of suitable type, size and capacity for automated external defibrillator. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries; LifeStart cabinet product indicated or comparable product. B. AED Cabinet Construction: Flush doors with 5/8-inch doorstop attached by continuous hinge and equipped with zinc -plated pull and roller catch. 1. Aluminum Steel Sheet Model: 1426. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 43 00.70 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 43 00.70 EMERGENCY AID SPECIALTIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled -Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. E. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet. F. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. G. Identification: Manufacturer's standard graphics and lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. H. Door Finish: 1. Aluminum: Anodized, Clear. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed automated external defibrillator cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install automated external defibrillator cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at height indicated below: B. Automated External Defibrillator Cabinets: 48 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. C. Automated External Defibrillator Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. D. Identification: 1. Apply decals at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as automated external defibrillator cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust automated external defibrillator cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of automated external defibrillator cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes or replace automated external defibrillator cabinets that cannot be restored to factory -finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by automated external defibrillator cabinet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10 43 00.70 104300.70-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 44 13 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire -protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguisher. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 10 44 16 "Fire Extinguishers" for portable, hand -carried fire extinguishers accommodated by fire -protection cabinets 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing -in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface -mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. B. Product Schedule: For fire -protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire -protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire -protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire -protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire -protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire -protection cabinets, accessories, and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Fire -Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E814 for fire -resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 2.3 FIRE -PROTECTION CABINET (FEC) A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. b. JL Industries, Inc; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. C. Larsens Manufacturing CompanX. d. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International. B. Cabinet Construction: Cabinet shall match fire rating of wall construction that cabinet is installed within.. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 44 l3 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 44 13 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Fire -Rated Cabinets: Construct fire -rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.043- inch-thick cold -rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick fire -barrier material. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. C. Cabinet Material: Cold -rolled steel sheet. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled -Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. F. Door Material: Steel sheet. G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. J. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire -protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked -enamel finish. 2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire -protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Pressure -sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical. K. Materials: 1. Cold -Rolled Steel: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. a. Finish: Baked enamel, TGIC polyester powder coat, HAA polyester powder coat, epoxy powder coat, or polyester/epoxy hybrid powder coat, complying with AAMA 2603. b. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. C. Color: White to match adjacent wall color. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. 3. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames and grind smooth. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 104413-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 44 13 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire -protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire -protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire -protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire -protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at height indicated below: 1. Fire -Protection Cabinet Mounting Height: 48 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Provide inside latch and lock for break -glass panels. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire -protection cabinets, square and plumb. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire -protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire -protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire -protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire -protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory - finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire - protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire -protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10 44 13 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 44 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand -carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 10 44 13 "Fire Protection Cabinets." 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire - protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire -protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10 when testing interval required by NFPA 10 is within the warranty period. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND -CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire -protection cabinet (FXC) and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 44 l6 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. C. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B. B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in enameled -steel container. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS (FXB) A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked -enamel finish. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. C. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket -mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. 1. Mounting Height: Top of fire extinguisher to be at 42 inches above finished floor. END OF SECTION 10 4416 104416-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 5113 METAL LOCKERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 5113 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Day -use lockers in single and multi -tier configurations. 2. Freestyle Personal Storage Locker. B. Related Requirements: 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: 1. Applicable standards for fasteners used for assembly. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: 1. Applicable standards for steel sheet materials used for fabrication. 2. Applicable standards for the testing of electrostatically applied Powder Coat Paint. C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Standards: 1. Applicable standards for steel materials used for fabrication. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. General: Metal Lockers hasp for locks. Available in single door or multi -tier configurations. B. Finishes: 1. Fabricated Metal Components and Assemblies: All components to be painted with an electro- statically applied Powder Coat paint that can meet or exceed test requirements set out by ASTM standard D3451-06 Standard Guide for Testing Coating Powders and Powder Coatings. 2. Day Use Lockers: nominal frame heights of 84 inches, nominal widths of 18- to 36- inches, and nominal depths of 24 inches, all in 1-inch increments. Single door and 2-, 3-, 4-, or 5- tier configurations available. Refer to Drawings for layouts. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: 1. Limit overall width not to exceed specified nominal width; locker width designed for zero growth. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of metal locker required. Include data substantiating that products to be furnished comply with requirements of the contract documents. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including descriptions of procedures and diagrams. Show complete locker installation layout, including quantities, locations, and types of accessory unites required. Include notations and descriptions of all installation items and components. 1. Show installation details at non-standard conditions, if any. 2. Provide layout, dimensions, and identification of each unit, corresponding to sequence of installation procedures. 3. Provide installation schedule and procedures to ensure proper installation. C. Samples: Provide minimum 3 inches square example of each color and texture on actual substrate for each component to remain exposed after installation. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 1051 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 5113 METAL LOCKERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT D. Selection Samples: For initial selection of colors and textures, submit manufacturer's color charts, consisting of actual product pieces, showing full range of colors and textures available. E. Warranty: Submit draft copy of proposed warranty for review by the Architect. F. Maintenance Data: Provide written documentation of the manufacturer's statement, claiming the maintenance free nature of the product. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage an experienced manufacturer who is ISO 9001:2008 certified for the design, production, installation, and service of metal lockers. Furnish certification attesting ISO 9001:2008 quality system registration. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is the manufacturer's authorized representative for the specified products for installing metal lockers. C. Minimum Qualifications: 1-year experience installing metal lockers of comparable size and complexity to specified project requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Follow manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify quantities of metal locker units before fabrication. Indicate verified measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication and delivery to ensure no delay in progress of the work. B. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal lockers units without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence metal lockers with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling, during remainder of construction period. B. Schedule installation of specified metal lockers after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Provide components, which must be built in at a time, which causes no delays in the general progress of the work. C. Pre -installation Conference: Schedule and conduct conference on project site to review methods and procedures for installing metal lockers including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Recommended attendees include: a. Owner's Representative. b. Prime Contractor or representative. C. Architect. d. Manufacturer's representative. e. Subcontractors or installers whose work may affect, or be affected by, the work of this section. I ff II)♦1i'/:17 71►Y 1111 A. Provide a written warranty, executed by Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units, which fail in materials or workmanship within the established warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under General Condition's provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Limited Lifetime Warranty: Subject to the terms in the written warranty, warrant the original purchaser exclusively that the locker frames manufactured by it will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lifetime of the locker. 1051 13-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 5113 METAL LOCKERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Based upon metal lockers manufactured by Spacesaver Corporation, 1450 Janesville Avenue, Fort Atkinson, Wisconsin 53538-2798. Telephone: 800-492-3434. 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and quality of workmanship, which meets or exceeds established industry standards for products specified. Use furniture grade sheet metal and fasteners for component fabrication unless indicated otherwise. 2.3 Locker TYPES A. Day Use Locker. Provide HD metal storage lockers in single door and multi -tier configurations by Spacesaver Corporation. Provide lockers equipped with accessories as requested 1. Type 2: 3-Tier Locker (Room 117). We have two types of lockers. 2. Personal Storage Lockers (Room 175). a. Full Double Door, Mesh. b. Slope Top and Pedestal C. Size:30"x24"x72". 2.4 MANUFACTURED COMPONENTS A. Welded Frame: 1. Multi -tier lockers shall include a fixed position shelf or shelves to separate the tiers. Shelf shall be constructed of a minimum of 18-gauge steel. Shelf shall be mechanically fastened to interior locker sides using a locking lance feature. a. Width: 1) Frame: 15- inches. 2) Individual Openings: 15- inches. b. Height: 1) Frame: 72- inches. 2) Individual Openings: 27- to 42- inches. C. Depth: 1) 18- inches. B. Metal Doors 1. Shall be formed from 2 pieces of minimum 20-gauge cold -rolled steel -box formed and riveted together. Door with inner and outer door panels shall have a combined steel thickness of no less than 0.075 inches or thick. 2-panel door design optimizes structural integrity of locker door system over and above any single frame door design. 2. Exterior door panel shall be constructed with formed flanges and return flanges to add stiffness. 3. Doors shall be full overlay style. 4. Hinge: a. Full overlay 1-inch hinge. b. Soft close style. C. One-piece wraparound hinge. d. Steel, nickel -plated. e. Minimum of 2 hinges per door. 1) Door heights up to 27 inches require 2 hinges. 2) Door heights >= 28 inches and < 56 inches require 3 hinges. 3) Door heights >= 56 inches require 4 hinges. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 1051 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 5113 METAL LOCKERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT f. Opens 110 degrees. 5. Locks: a. Locks shall be centered vertically in door. b. Provide hasp locks. 6. Doors to remain closed when in unlocked mode. C. Optional Interior/Accessory components: 1. All interior components must be specified at time of order. a. Coat Hook Riveted on Each Side D. Accessories: 1. Welded Base: Provide manufacturer's standard. 2. Locker Tag Numbers: Adhesive with large lettering; per customer requirement. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Coordinate fabrication and delivery to ensure no delay in progress of the work. 2.6 FINISHES A. Colors: Selected from manufacturer's standard available colors. B. Paint Finish: Textured (Standard). 1. Provide factory applied electrostatic powder coat paint. Meet or exceed specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine Lockers scheduled to receive accessories with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of specified accessory items. B. Proceed with accessory installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Follow manufacturer's written instructions for installation of each type of accessory item specified. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify accessory unit alignment and plumb after installation. Correct if required, following manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove components that are chipped, scratched, or otherwise damaged and which do not match adjoining work. Replace with new matching units, installed as specified and in manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust all accessories to provide smoothly operating, visually acceptable installation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean components and surfaces. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris, resulting from installation, upon completion of work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION/TRAINING A. Schedule and conduct demonstration of installed accessory items and features with Owner's personnel. 1051 13 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 5113 METAL LOCKERS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Schedule and conduct maintenance training with Owner's maintenance personnel. Training session should include lecture and demonstration of all maintenance and repair procedures that end -user personnel would normally perform. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect system against damage during remainder of construction period. Advise owner of additional protection needed to ensure that system will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 10 5113 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 1051 13 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 56 26 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 10 56 26 — MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING UNITS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanically assisted, carriage mounted high -density mobile storage units, support rails, fabrication, and installation including leveling of support rails. 2. Related Work, Not Furnished: a. Structural floor system capable of supporting live and dead loads required by prevailing building codes, including rolling loads of storage units to be installed. b. Finish floor covering materials and installation B. Related Sections: l . Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3. Division 09 - Finishes relating to finish floor and base materials. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: 1. Applicable standards for fasteners used for assembly. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: 1. Applicable standards for steel materials used for fabrication. C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Standards: 1. Applicable standards for steel materials used for fabrication. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: The system consists of four -post shelving units mounted on manufacturer's track- guided carriages to form a compact storage system. System design permits access to any single aisle by manually moving units until the desired aisle is opened. The carriage/rail system provides uniform carriage movement along the total length of travel, even with unbalanced loads. B. Carriage System Design and Features: The carriage system consists of formed structural steel wheel sections with precision machined wheels riding on steel rails surface mounted to the floor. Wheel sections shall interlock with steel side profiles and shelving posts to form a rigid carriage structure. Wheel sections shall also be interchangeable to permit carriages to be added onto and reconfigured without cutting or welding. Rails shall be types selected by the manufacturer to ensure smooth operation and self -centering of mobile storage units during travel without end play or binding. Rail types, quantities and spacing shall be selected by the manufacturer to suit installation conditions and requirements. All bearings used in the drive mechanism shall be permanently shielded and lubricated. C. Movement Controls: Triple or single arm operating wheels with rotating hand knobs shall be provided on the accessible (drive) ends of shelf units, centered on the end panel, located 40 inches from the base of each unit to permit units to be moved to create a single aisle opening. Turning the handle transmits power through chain drive to drive wheels on each carriage. D. Drive System: The system shall be designed with a positive type mechanically -assisted drive which minimizes end play, ensures there is no play in the drive handle, and that carriages will stop without drifting. 1. System shall include a chain sprocket drive system for each movable carriage to ensure that carriages move uniformly along the total length of travel, even with unbalanced loads. All system components shall be selected to ensure a smooth, even movement along the entire FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 56 26 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 56 26 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT carriage length. Drive system gearing shall be designed to permit 1 lb. of force applied to the drive handle to move a minimum of 4,000 lbs. of load. 2. A tensioning device shall be provided on each chain drive with provision for adjusting tension without removing end panels. 3. All bearings used in the drive mechanism shall be permanently shielded and lubricated. E. Safety Features: 1. Color -coded visual indicators shall provide verification that carriages are in a locked or unlocked mode. 2. A single safety lock button, mounted on each operating wheel hub, will permit moving a carriage in either direction to create a new access aisle when pulled out (unlocked), or locking the carriage when pushed in. F. Finishes: 1. Fabricated Metal Components and Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard powder coat paint finish. 2. End Panels, Accessible Ends: Manufacturer's standard powder coat paint finish. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Ease of Movement: Provide mechanically assisted units capable of being moved by exerting a maximum horizontal force of 5 pounds on the operating wheel. B. Seismic Performance: Provide mobile storage units capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake movement when required by applicable building codes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of shelving, track and installation accessory required. Include data substantiating that products to be furnished comply with requirements of the contract documents. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication, assembly, and installation details including descriptions of procedures and diagrams. Show complete extent of installation layout including clearances, spacings, and relation to adjacent construction in plan, elevation, and sections. Indicate clear exit and access aisle widths; access to concealed components; assemblies, connections, attachments, reinforcement, and anchorage; and deck details, edge conditions, and extent of finish flooring within area where units are to be installed. 1. Show installation details at non-standard conditions. Furnish floor layouts, technical and installation manuals for every unit shipment with necessary dimensions for rail layout and system configuration at the project site. Include installed weight, load criteria, furnished specialties, and accessories. 2. Provide layout, dimensions, and identification of each unit corresponding to sequence of installation and erection procedures. Specifically include the following: a. Location, position, and configuration of tracks on all floors. b. Plan layouts of positions of carriages, including all required clearances. C. Details of shelving, indicating method and configuration of installation in carriages. 3. Provide location and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or fastened to other construction. 4. Provide installation schedule and complete erection procedures to ensure proper installation. C. Samples: Provide minimum 3-inch square example of each color and texture on actual substrate for each component to remain exposed after installation. D. Selection Samples: For initial selection of colors and textures, submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual product pieces, showing full range of colors and textures available. E. Warranty: Submit draft copy of proposed warranty for review by the Architect. F. Maintenance Data: Provide in form suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals for mobile storage units. Data shall include operating and maintenance instructions, parts inventory listing, 105626-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 56 26 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT purchase source listing, emergency instructions, and related information. 1. Submit manufacturer's instructions for proper maintenance materials andprocedures. 2. Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use conditions. Include precautions against using materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. G. Reference List: Provide a list of recently installed mobile storage units to be visited by owner, architect, and contractor. Intent of list is to aid in verifying the suitability of manufacturer's products and comparison with materials and product specified in this section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage an experienced manufacturer who is ISO 9001 certified for the design, production, installation, and service of carriage mounted high- density mobile storage units and support rails. Furnish certificate attesting manufacturer's ISO 9001 quality system registration. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a manufacturer's authorized representative for the specified products for installing carriages and anchoring shelving units to carriages. 1. Minimum Qualifications: 2-years experience installing systems of comparable size and complexity to specified project requirements. 2. Guaranteed 48-hour service response time. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Follow manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions before fabrication. Indicate verified measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication and delivery to ensure no delay in progress of the Work. B. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating mobile storage units. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequencing: Coordinate storage shelving system installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. B. Scheduling: Plan installation to commence after finishing operations, including painting have been completed. C. Built -In Items: Provide components which must be built in at a time which causes no delays general progress of the Work. D. Pre -installation Conference: Schedule and conduct conference on project site to review methods and procedures for installing mobile storage units including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review project conditions and levelness of flooring and other preparatory work performed under other contracts. 2. Review and verify structural loading limitations. 3. Recommended attendees include: a. Owner's Representative. b. Prime Contractor or representative. C. The Architect d. Manufacturer's representative. e. Subcontractors or installers whose work may affect, or be affected by, the work of this section. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 56 26 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 56 26 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT I W[I�1i1/\ 9 M-11OIL", A. Provide a written warranty, executed by Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units which fail in materials or workmanship within the established warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under General Conditions provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Warrant the entire movable compact shelving installation against defects in materials for 5 years and workmanship for a period of 1 year from date of acceptance by the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General: Products are based upon mobile shelving system products manufactured by Spacesaver Corporation. 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and quality of workmanship which meet or exceed established industry standards for products specified. Material thicknesses/gauges are manufacturer's option unless indicated otherwise. B. Plastic Laminates: NEMA LD-3, GP-28, Vertical Grade. 2.3 MANUFACTURED COMPONENTS A. Rails: 1. Material: ASTM/AISI Type 1035 or 1045 steel, or equal, manufacturer's selection. 2. Capacity: 750 pounds per lineal foot of carriage. 3. Minimum Contact Surface: 5/8-inch wide. 4. Rail configuration shall permit attachment to top of structural floor system with provision for leveling rails to compensate for variations in floor surface level. 5. Provide rail connections designed to provide horizontal and vertical continuity between rail sections, to gradually transfer the concentrated wheel point load to and from adjoining rail sections. Butt joints are not permitted. B. Carriages: 1. Provide manufacturer's design movable carriages fabricated of welded wheel assembly with bolted steel and riveted construction. Galvanized carriage components are unacceptable. The use of cross -bracing is unacceptable. 2. Design carriages to allow the shelving uprights to recess and interlock into the carriage wheel section a minimum of 2 inches. Carriage design shall provide a minimum of two shelving retention rivets and two carriage bolts to securely retain each shelving post. Top mounting of shelving onto carriages is unacceptable. 3. Provide each carriage with two wheels per rail. C. Drive / Guide System: 1. Design: Provide drive system which prevents carriage whipping, binding and excessive wheel/rail wear under normal operation. a. Provide a full-length line drive shaft, whereby, all wheels on one side of carriage shall drive. 2. Shafts: 1 inch steel connecting tube shafts. 3. Bearing Surfaces: Provide rotating load bearing members with ball or roller bearings. Provide shafts with pillow block or flanged self -aligning type bearings. D. Wheel Sections: 1. Low -Profile Wheel Section: Minimum 12 ga. fixture -welded wheel sections to ensure that, once installed; bottom storage shelf is no higher than 4.25 inches above top of rail. Locate 105626-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 56 26 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT wheel assemblies under each upright to distribute loads directly to wheels. 2. Wheel Size: Minimum 3 inches, outside diameter drive and load wheels. 3. Guide Wheels: All wheels and all locations. E. Face Panels: 1. Materials: Plastic laminate clad particle board with plastic edging on vertical edges. 2. Finishes: Selected from manufacturer's standard available colors and patterns. F. Shelving: Four Post G. Accessories: 1. Anti -Tip Devices: Provide manufacturer's standard fixtures. 2. Surface Mount Rail 3. Card Holders on each face panel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Coordinate fabrication and delivery to ensure no delay in progress of the Work. B. Wheels: Provide precision machined units with permanently shielded and lubricated bearings. C. Carriage Wheel Sections: Fabricate Carriage wheel sections to provide two heavy-duty 7 ga. support plates to support the full weight of shelving posts. D. Carriage Side Profiles: Fabricate 14 ga. die -formed carriage side profiles 2-3/4 inches tall each with 4 shelving retention rivets. E. Rail Shims: Fabricate galvanized steel shims with interlocking tabs to prevent dislocation; interlocking tabs to interlock with rail and with other shims. For non -grouted systems only. F. Shelving, Supports and Accessories: See individual descriptions in "Shelving" paragraphs. 2.5 FINISHES A. Colors: Selected from manufacturer's standard available colors. B. Paint Finish: Provide factory applied electrostatic powder coat paint. Meet or exceed specifications of the American Library Association. C. Laminate Finish: Provide factory applied laminate panels at locations indicated on approved shop drawings. D. Edgings: Provide preformed edging, color -matched to unit colors selected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine floor surfaces with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of mobile storage units. B. Verify that building structural system is adequate for installing mobile storage units at locations indicated on approved shop drawings. C. Verify that intended installation locations of mobile storage units will not interfere with nor block established required exit paths or similar means of egress once units are installed. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to proper performance of mobile storage units, once installed. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Rails: 1. Lay out rails using full length units to the maximum extent possible. Use cut lengths only at ends to attain total length required. Locate and position properly, following dimensions indicated on approved shop drawings. Verify thickness of finished floor materials to be installed (by others) and install level 1/16 inch above finished floor surfaces. 2. When using grouted rails, verify level, allowing for a minimum 1 /4 inch of grout under high FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 10 56 26 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 56 26 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT points. Position and support rails so that no movement occurs during grouting. 3. When grouting, set rails in full grout bed, completely filling any voids entire length of all rails including rail connectors. Trim up sides flush with rails to ensure proper load transfer from rail to supporting floor. Using shims in lieu of full grouting is not permitted. 4. Installation Tolerances When Grouting: Do not exceed levelness of installed rails listed below: a. Maximum Variation From True Level Within Any Module: 3/32 inch. b. Maximum Variation Between Adjacent (Parallel) Rails: 1/16 inch, perpendicular to rail direction. C. Maximum Variation In Height: 1/32 inch, measured along any 10-foot rail length. 5. Installation Tolerances When Shimming: Do not exceed variation from level listed below: a. Maximum Variation Across All Rails (up to 5 rails or 12 feet: 3/8 inch. b. Maximum Variation from Rail to Rail: 1/8 inch. C. Maximum Variation in 12 feet of Rail Length, Along Any Rail: 1/4 inch and Maximum Variation in 2 feet of Rail Length (Flatness): 1/8 inch.—L/600. 6. Verify rail position and level; anchor to structural floor system with anchor type and spacings indicated on approved shop drawings. B. Floors/Ramps: I. General: Finished elevation shall be 1/16 inch below top of rails. 2. Place floors and ramps to the extent indicated on approved shop drawings. Provide ramp at both ends of mobile system if dual control access is required. 3. Construct floors and ramps to prevent warping or deformation of floor panels in a normal operating environment. Support panels on levelers at maximum 16 inches on center. 4. Ramp Slope: Do not exceed the following: a. ADA Accessible Ramps: Maximum 1:12 slope (4.76 degrees). b. Other Ramps: Maximum 9 degree slope (1.9:12). C. Vertical Transition, Ramp edge to floor: Maximum 1/8 inch. C. Shelving Units Installation: I. General: Follow layout and details shown on approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Position units level, plumb; at proper location relative to adjoining units and related work. 2. Carriages: a. Place movable carriages on rails. Ensure that all wheels track properly and centering wheels are properly seated on centering rails. Fasten multiple carriage units together to form single movable base where required. b. Position fixed carriage units to align with movable units. 3. Shelving Units: a. Stabilize shelving units following manufacturer's written instructions. Reinforce shelving units to withstand the stress of movement where required and specified. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify shelving unit alignment and plumb after installation. Correct if required following manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove components which are chipped, scratched, or otherwise damaged and which do not match adjoining work. Replace with new matching units, installed as specified and in manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust components and accessories to provide smoothly operating, visually acceptable installation. 3.5 CLEANING 10 56 26 - 6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 10 56 26 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING UNITS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Immediately upon completion of installation, clear components, and surfaces. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION/TRAINING A. Schedule and conduct demonstration of installed equipment and features with Owner's personnel. B. Schedule and conduct maintenance training with Owner's maintenance personnel. Training session should include lecture and demonstration of all maintenance and repair procedures that end user personnel would normally perform. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect system against damage during remainder of construction period. Advise Owner of additional protection needed to ensure that system will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 10 56 26 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY I 0 56 26 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 2413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated, single shades. 2. Motor -operated, single shades. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 3. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light -blocking shades with a sealant. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. 1. Motor -Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade. 1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark interior face of material if applicable. 2. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long. D. Product Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 24 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED, SINGLE SHADES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or approved equal: 1. Draper Inc. 2. Hunter Douglas Contract. 3. MechoShade Systems, Inc. 4. TimberBlindMetroShade. 5. Budget Blinds. B. Chain -and -Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous -loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel. a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. C. Chain -Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount. 2. Spring Lift -Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller shade weight and for lifting heavy roller shades. a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent. C. Rollers: Corrosion -resistant steel or extruded -aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive -end assemblies and idle -end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Double -Roller Mounting Configuration: Side by side. 2. Inside Roller: a. Drive -End Location: Right side of interior face of shade. b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. 3. Outside Roller: a. Drive -End Location: Right side of interior face of shade. b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. 4. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller mounting configuration, roller assemblies, operating mechanisms, installation accessories, and installation locations and conditions indicated. E. Inside Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light -filtering fabric per Interior Material Legend. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and per Interior Material Legend. F. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches. 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 122413-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 2413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.3 MOTOR -OPERATED, SINGLE ROLLER SHADES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or approved equal: 1. Draper Inc. 2. Hunter Douglas Contract. 3. MechoShade Systems, Inc. 4. TimberBlindMetroShade. 5. Budget Blinds. B. Motorized Operating Systems: Provide factory -assembled, shade -operator systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions indicated, complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, power disconnect switch, enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system. 1. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in rollers. a. Electrical Characteristics: coordinate with selected vendor and requirements for shade width. Shall be 4-1 ONm with speeds of 30-38 RPM and lifting capacities of 32 -80 lbs. Each motor shall be equipped with a thermal overload protector. Internallimits provide consistent upper and lower shade positions. Motors are UL approved and available in 110V AC or 220V AC. b. Maximum Total Shade Width: As required to operate roller shades indicated. C. Maximum Shade Drop: As required to operate roller shades indicated. d. Maximum Weight Capacity: As required to operate roller shades indicated. e. Control System: Shall be adaptable to conform to all requirements of the owner on both installation and in the future. f. Control Inputs: Shall vary, depending on the application and purpose. The switching device to activate the system will be either a switch for hardwire control, single or multichannel radio control or IR control. Controls can be integrated with building management systems utilizing commonly used applications such as Serial O RS232 or RS485, Dry Contacts or Voltage Triggers. C. Rollers: Corrosion -resistant steel or extruded -aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive -end assemblies and idle -end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shades for service. 1. Roller Mounting Configuration: Side by side. 2. Inside Roller: a. Drive -End Location: Right side of interior face of shade. b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller mounting configuration, roller assemblies, operating mechanisms, installation accessories, and installation locations and conditions indicated. E. Roller -Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive -end assembly. F. Inside Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light -filtering fabric per Interior Material Legend. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 24 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT G. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches. 1. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 2. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 3. Sun control automatic sensor. 2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain -loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 degrees F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb -to -jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4-inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8-inch. Length equal to head -to -sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4-inch, plus or minus 1/8-inch. C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible, except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width -to -length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. 2. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll -width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll -width panel located at top of shadeband. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. k*► Z1700017.y:/:\71o1►`3ky.11111IRI11M A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. A. Electrical Connections: Connect motor -operated roller shades to building electrical system. B. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 122413-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 2413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12 24 13 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 24 13 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 34 50 LABORATORY COUNTER TOPS, SINKS AND PEGBOARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 12 34 50 LABORATORY COUNTER TOPS, SINKS AND PEGBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY - This specification section covers counter tops specifically manufactured for laboratory use. A. Section Includes: 1. Work surfaces a. Epoxy resin work surfaces. 2. Accessories a. Sinks. b. Cupsinks. C. Troughs. d. Pegboards. e. Joint adhesive. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 Millwork and Rough Carpentry. 2. Division 11 Laboratory Fume Hoods. 3. Division 12 Laboratory Casework. 4. Division 12 Laboratory Fixtures. 1.2 REFERENCES A. SEFA 3 O Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association. B. ASTM International. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Approval drawings shall be submitted on pages no less than 11 inches x 17 inches and 3/8 inch scale. 2. Drawings shall include but not be limited to: a. Overall counter top size. b. Dotted -in base cabinet and knee space locations. C. Sink size and sink cutout locations. d. Fixture drilling size and locations. e. Column cutouts. f. All counter top cutout and drilling size and locations and seam locations. g. As most practical, seams shall be located at the intersection of base cabinets. 3. Seams shall not be placed in knee space areas and as far from sinks as practical. 4. Counter top sizes shall be of the largest practical size while allowing delivery into the building, floor and room. 5. Any one particular counter top piece should weigh no more than 350 lbs. B. Field Dimensions 1. Dimensions shall be field verified prior to fabrication by qualified factory or dealer representative to ensure proper fit of fabricated and delivered materials. 2. Field dimensions are to be transferred to production and final drawings. C. Product Data 1. Submit product data that details material origin and design, thickness, durability, performance test results, specification, edge design and color availability. D. Samples 1. Epoxy samples shall be no less than linch thick x 4 inches x 4 inches. 2. Samples shall be clearly marked with manufacturer name and product specifics. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 34 50 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 34 50 LABORATORY COUNTER TOPS, SINKS AND PEGBOARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT E. Test Reports 1. Submit 3rdparty test reports showing evaluations and adherence to SEFA 3 qualifications. F. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit Owner's Manual and recommended maintenance information. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Materials shall only be delivered to a jobsite after internal atmosphere condition has occurred, ceiling grid is installed and drywall has been painted. 2. Storage of epoxy tops in outside conditions is only acceptable when extreme temperatures and weather conditions are not present. 3. Tops must be covered and away from UV exposure. B. Storage 1. Epoxy tops shall be stored vertically or horizontally as per manufacturers¢ recommendations. 2. In all cases, tops shall be properly supported to eliminate bending and warping of stored materials. 3. Tops shall be stored on oversized pallets of a size suitable to support the size and weight of all combined materials. 4. Top corners and edges are to be additionally protected using heavy thickness cardboard or plastic material. C. Handling 1. Epoxy tops are heavy and shall be handled by qualified machinery or personnel to ensure personal, product and peripheral safety. 2. Tops are to be removed from pallets without causing scratches or damage to other tops. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design and subject to compliance: Epoxy counter tops shall be Kemresin as supplied by Kewaunee Scientific located in Statesville, NC. Substitutions may be accepted after following the substitution request as found in Division 1 documentation. In all cases, counter tops shall be manufactured by the same Division 12 casework and Division 11 fume hoods manufacturer. B. Qualified manufacturers shall have 10 plus years of documented and successful installations. Manufacturers shall have United States based modern production facility consisting of loading docks, material handling, raw material formulation, pour, bake, setting, CNC manufacturing and storage capabilities. Qualified manufacturer shall employ the use of a closed mold system. 2.2 MATERIALS Epoxy resin shall be a monolithic poured material consistent throughout material thickness. The finished surface shall have a smooth finish resulting in enhanced stain, scratch and abrasion resistance. A. Minimum sheen level shall be between 10-70 GU at 60 degrees. 2.3 WORKSURFACES A. MATERIALS Epoxy Resin Tops (Kemresin): 123450-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 34 50 LABORATORY COUNTER TOPS, SINKS AND PEGBOARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Epoxy Resin tops shall consist of modified epoxy resin that has been especially compounded and cured to provide the optimum physical and chemical resistance properties required of a heavy-duty laboratory table top. Tops and curbs shall be a uniform mixture throughout their full thickness, and shall not depend upon a surface coating that is readily removed by chemical and/or physical abuse. Tops shall be 1 inch thick, exposed edges with a 1/8 inch, 45 degree bevel on top and bottom and drip grooves provided on the underside at all exposed edges. 4 inch high curbs at the backs and ends of tops shall be 1 inch thick and bonded to the deck to form a square watertight joint. Sink cutouts shall be smooth and uniform without saw marks with the top edge beveled. The bottom edge of the sink opening shall be finished smooth with the edge broken to prevent sharpness. Corners of sink cutouts shall be radiused not less than 3/4 inch. C. Color: Per Interior Material Legend 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer to provide a full range of matching epoxy products including but not limited to; single poured dished fume hood counter tops, sinks, cupsinks, troughs and pegboards. B. Molded Epoxy Resin Sinks (Kemresin) 1. Sinks shall be molded of modified epoxy resin, carefully compounded with selected materials to provide maximum physical and chemical properties. 2. Sinks shall possess a high resistance to mechanical and thermal shock. 3. All inside corners to be coved and the bottom pitched to the drain outlet. 4. Manufacturer shall supply a full range of epoxy poured, single piece epoxy sinks available in manufacturers¢ standard colors. 5. Sinks shall be one piece and be available in under -mount or drop -in configurations. 6. Sink outlets shall be supplied loose and to be installed by respective trades. 7. Sink traps to be furnished and installed under Division 23 trade. C. Molded Epoxy Resin Cup Sinks (Kemresin) 1. Molded Epoxy Resin cup drains shall be molded in one-piece of the same resin as specified for Molded Epoxy Resin sinks. 2. Shall have an integral mounting flange and a 1-1/2 inches I.P.S. male straight thread outlet. D. Molded Epoxy Resin Drain Troughs 1. Molded Epoxy Resin drain troughs shall be molded of the same resin as specified for Molded Epoxy Resin sinks. 2. Troughs shall have not less than 1/8 inch per foot pitch to the drain or discharge end. 3. For ease of cleaning, the junction between the sides and bottom shall be seamless and have not less than a 3/4 inch radius. E. Pegboards 1. Manufacturer shall supply epoxy pegboards matching epoxy counter tops. 2. Pegboards to be 1 inch thick. 3. Exposed edges with 1/8 inch, 45 degree beveled chamfer and finished. 4. Back of pegboard, when exposed, to be finished. 5. Pegboard to be factory machined to accept polypropylene pegs. Pegs shall be supplied with pegboard. 6. Standard line of products shall include an applied drip trough made of epoxy resin or stainless steel. 7. Drip trough shall include a means to attach a drain tube. Drain tube shall be included when a drip trough is purchased. F. Field joint epoxy 1. Field joints to be filled using Smooth -On PC3 as manufactured by Smooth -On East Texas, PA www.smooth-on.com. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 34 50 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 34 50 LABORATORY COUNTER TOPS, SINKS AND PEGBOARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.5 PERFORMANCE A. WORK TOP PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: 1. Molded Epoxy Resin (Kemresin and EarthResin): a. Physical Properties: b. Flexural Strength (A.S.T.M. Method D790-90) = 15,000 PSI Compressive Strength (A.S.T.M. Method D790-90) 30,000 PSI C. Hardness, Rockwall E (A.S.T.M. Method D785-89) 100 d. Water Absorption (A.S.T.M. Method D570-81)% by weight, 24 Hours = 0.04 1) % by weight, 7 Days = 0.05 2) % by weight, 2 Hour Boil = 0.04 e. Specific Gravity = 1.97 123450-4 f. Tensile Strength = 8,500 PSI g. Burn Characteristics = Class 0, A h. Thermal Expansion = 34 10-6 i. Fire Resistance = Self Extinguishing j. Heat Deflection = Should not be exposed to dry ice or liquid nitrogen k Performance Test Results (Heat Resistance): A high form porcelain crucible, size 0, 15 ml capacity, shall be heated over a Bunsen burner until the crucible bottom attains an incipient red heat. Immediately, the hot crucible shall be transferred to the top surface and allowed to cool to room temperature. Upon removal of the cooled crucible, there shall be no blisters, cracks, or any breakdown of the top surface whatsoever. L Performance Test Results (Chemical Resistance): Tops shall resist chemical attacks from normally used laboratory reagents. Weight change of top samples submerged in the reagents* listed in the next paragraph for a period of seven days shall be less than one -tenth of one percent, except that the weight change for those reagents marked with ** shall be less than one percent. (Tests shall be performed in accordance with A.S.T.M. Method D543-67 at 77o F.). *Where concentrations are indicated, percentages are by weight. 1) Acetic Acid, Glacial Iso-Octane 2) Acetic Acid, 5% Kerosene 3) Acetone Methyl Alcohol 4) Ammonium Hydroxide, 28% Mineral Oil 5) Ammonium Hydroxide, 10% Methyl Ethyl Ketone 6) Aniline Oil Nitric Acid, 70%** 7) Benzene Nitric Acid, 40% 8) Carbon Tetrachloride Nitric Acid, 10% 9) Chromic Acid, 40%** Oleic Acid 10) Citric Acid, 10% Olive Oil 11) Cottonseed Oil Phenol, 5% 12) Dichromate Cleaning Solution** Soap Solution, 1% FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 34 50 LABORATORY COUNTER TOPS. SINKS AND PEGBOARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 13) Diethyl Ether Sodium Carbonate, 20% 14) Dimethyl Formamide Sodium Carbonate, 2% 15) Distilled Water Sodium Chloride, 10% 16) Detergent Solution, 1/4% Sodium Hydroxide, 50% 17) Ethyl Acetate Sodium Hydroxide, 10% 18) Ethyl Alcohol, 95% Sodium Hydroxide, 1% 19) Ethyl Alcohol, 50% Sodium Hypochlorite, 5% 20) Ethylene Dichloride Sulfuric Acid, 85% 21) Heptane Sulfuric Acid, 3% 22) Hydrochloric Acid, 37% Sulfuric Acid, 3% 23) Hydrochloric Acid, 10% Toluene 24) Hydrogen Peroxide, 28% Transformer Oil 25) Hydrogen Peroxide, 3% Turpentine a) NOTE: Dichromate cleaning solution is a formula from Lange's Handbook of Chemistry. m. Performance Test Results (Chemical Spot Tests O 24 Hours): a Chemical spot tests shall be made by applying 10 drops (approximately 1/2 cc) of each reagent to the surface to be tested. Each reagent (except those marked **) shall be covered with a 1-1/2 inch diameter watch glass, convex side down to confine the reagent. Spot tests of volatile solvents marked ** shall be tested as follows: A 1 inch or larger ball of cotton shall be saturated with the solvent and placed on the surfaces to be tested. The cotton ball shall then be covered y an inverted 2-ounce, wide mouth bottle to retard evaporation. All spot tests shall be conducted in such a manner that the test surface is kept wet throughout the entire 24-hour test period and at a temperature of 77 degrees F plus 3 degrees F. At the end of that test period, the reagents shall be flushed from the surfaces with water and the surface scrubbed with a soft bristle brush under running water, rinsed, and dried. Volatile solvent test areas shall be cleaned with a cotton swab soaked in the solvent used on the test area. Spots where dyes have dried shall be cleaned with a cotton swab soaked in alcohol to remove the surface dye. The test panel shall then be evaluated immediately after drying. Rating Description 0 = No Effect: No detectable change in the material surface. 1 = Excellent: Slight detectable change in color or gloss but no change in function or life of the surface. 2 = Good: A clearly discernible change in color or gloss but no significant impairment of surface life or function. 3 = Fair: Objectionable change in appearance due to discoloration or etch, possibly resulting in deterioration of function over an extended period of time. Chemical Reagent Rating Acetone 1 Acid Dichromate, 5% 2 Butyl Alcohol 0 Carbon Tetrachloride 0 Chloroform 1 Chromic Acid, 60% 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 34 50 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 34 50 LABORATORY COUNTER TOPS. SINKS AND PEGBOARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Cresol 1 Dichlor Acetic Acid 1 Dimethylformanide 1 Dioxane 1 Furfural 1 Gasoline 0 Chemical Reagent Rating Tincture of Iodine 0 Methyl Ethyl Ketone 1 Methylene Chloride 1 Mono Chlorobenzene 0 Naphthalene 0 Nitric Acid, 20% 0 Nitric Acid, 30% 0 Nitric Acid, 70% 1 Phenol, 90% 1 Phosphoric Acid, 85% 0 Silver Nitrate, Saturated 0 Sodium Hydroxide, 10% 0 Sodium Hydroxide, 20% 0 Sodium Hydroxide, 40% 0 Sodium Hydroxide, Flake 0 Sodium Sulfide, Saturated 0 Sulfuric Acid, 33% 0 Sulfuric Acid, 77% 0 Sulfuric Acid, 96% 0 Sulfuric Acid, 77% & Nitric Acid, 70%, Equal Parts 1 Toluene 0 Trichloroethylene 0 Xylene 0 Zinc Chloride, Saturated 0 PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Tops are to be installed only after base cabinets or support systems have been installed, leveled, and secured. Tops are to be adhered to cabinets using screws, silicone or 2 part epoxy adhesive -choice dependent upon application. Counter tops are to be installed to achieve a uniform alignment at the front edge of the tops. Overhang of counter top edges are to be consistent and as indicated on approved shop drawings. B. Shim tops as necessary to produce level joints and seams but no more than 1/8 inch. Joint width is to be consistent through the length of each joint with no gap greater than 1/8 inch. 123450-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 34 50 LABORATORY COUNTER TOPS, SINKS AND PEGBOARDS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Use 2-part joint epoxy cement mixed per manufacturers recommendations. Prior to setting up, clean and remove excess joint adhesive from counter top and from above joint line. Finished joints should be clean and level with adjacent counter tops. Dips and bumps in joints are not acceptable. Installed tops should be free of uneven surfaces, waves, or warping. C. Installed counter tops are to be protected using heavy gauge paper or cardboard. Each top is to be affixed with a sign warning other trades that finished tops reside below. D. Manufacturers¢ protective oil is to remain on countertops after installation and under protective paper and only to be cleaned off by others prior to owner acceptance and move in. 3.2 SINK INSTALLATION A. The installer responsible for the installation of sinks shall follow good plumbing practice. B. Sinks to be installed following manufacturer's best recommended practices. 3.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. The installer responsible for the installation of laboratory service fittings shall follow good plumbing practice. B. Prior to fixture final connection, plumber to flush supply lines to remove pipe shavings, scale and other debris to eliminate foreign matter from damaging valve components and interfering with the proper operation of fittings. C. Fittings to be secured to counter tops using manufacturer supplied locknut and lock washer. Do not over tighten. D. Fixtures are to be installed without scratching the surface finish of faucets, valves or counter tops. 3.4 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Qualified installers shall have 10+ years experience. B. Installers shall be directly trained by the epoxy top manufacturer and certified to install epoxy tops to manufacturers recommended practices and tolerances. 3.5 CLEANING A. Tops are to be cleaned using manufacturers recommended practices; 1. Clean Kemresin surfaces using a general purpose detergent and warm water. 2. Apply a coat of linseed oil or furniture polish after cleaning to maintain the top and to hide minor scratches. 3. Regular applications of linseed oil or furniture polish will enhance the appearance of your work top. END OF SECTION 12 34 50 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 34 50 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 35 53.19 WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 12 35 53.19 - WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood laboratory casework. 2. Filler and closure panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring laboratory casework. 3. Section 09 22 16 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal -framed partitions for anchoring laboratory casework. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Include sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and other surfaces not usually visible after installation. B. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including bottoms of cabinets more than 48 inches above floor, and visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. 1. Ends of cabinets are defined as "exposed" except ends are defined as "concealed" where installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. C. Semiexposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as cabinet interiors, shelves, and dividers; interiors and sides of drawers; and interior faces of doors. Tops of cases 78 inches or more above floor and bottoms of cabinets more than 24 inches but less than 48 inches above floor are defined as "semiexposed." 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of laboratory casework. B. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with installation of laboratory equipment. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachments to other work including blocking and reinforcements required for installation. 2. Indicate types and sizes of casework. 3. Indicate manufacturer's catalog numbers for casework. 4. Show fabrication details, including types and locations of hardware. 5. Indicate locations and types of service fittings. 6. Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping. 7. Include details of support framing system. 8. Include details of exposed conduits, if required, for service fittings. 9. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, and laboratory equipment. 10. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections. C. Samples: For casework finishes and materials requiring color selection. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 35 53.19 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 35 53.19 WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of casework finish provided. Include fillers, stains, finishes, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that produces casework of types indicated for this Project that has been tested for compliance with SEFA 8 W. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory casework until building is enclosed, utility roughing -in and wet -work are complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. B. Established Dimensions: Where laboratory casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. C. Field Measurements: Where laboratory casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. D. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by field measurements before enclosing them, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation. 2. Mott Manufacturing Ltd. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. System Structural Performance: Laboratory casework and support framing system shall withstand the effects of the following gravity loads and stresses without permanent deformation, excessive deflection, or binding of drawers and doors: 1. Support Framing System: 600 lb/ft. 2. Work Surfaces (Including Tops of Suspended Base Cabinets): 160 lb/ft. 3. Wall Cabinets (Upper Cabinets): 160 lb/ft. 4. Shelves: 40 lb/sq. ft. 2.3 CASEWORK, GENERAL A. Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8 W, "Laboratory Grade Wood Casework." B. Flammable Liquid Storage: Where cabinets are indicated for solvent or flammable liquid storage, provide units that are listed and labeled as complying with requirements in NFPA 30 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 12 35 53.19 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 35 53.19 WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001 and FSC STD-40-004. E. Certified Wood: Wood products shall certified wood tracked through a chain -of -custody process. Certified wood documentation shall be provided by sources certified through a forest certification system with principles, criteria, and standards developed using ISO/IEC Guide 59 or the World Trade Organization's "WTO Agreement on Technical Barriers to Trade." F. WOOD CASEWORK G. Design: 1. Provide 1/8-inch reveals between doors and drawers that are adjacent. Provide 1/16-inch vertical reveal bsetween doors/drawers and cabinet ends. H. Wood Species: White maple. 1. Wood Stain Colors and Finishes: from full manfacturer offering. 2. Issued for Regulatory approval, Permitting, or Construction I. Semi exposed Materials: 1. Wood: Provide solid wood or hardwood plywood for semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. a Plywood: Hardwood plywood of exposed plywood. Provide backs of same species as faces. 1) Grade: C faces and Grade J crossbands. 2.4 WOOD CABINET MATERIALS A. General: 1. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood. B. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, particleboard core except where veneer core is indicated. 2.5 CABINET HARDWARE A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial -quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSUBHMA A156.9, Type B01602, self -closing. Provide two for doors 48 inches high or less and three for doors more than 48 inches high. C. Hinged -Door and Drawer Pulls: Solid -aluminum, stainless steel, or chrome -plated -brass, back - mounted pulls. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide. 1. Design: Wire pulls to match existing. D. Drawer Slides: ANSUBHMA A156.9. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD- 100): Side mount. a Type: Full overtravel extension. b. Material: Zinc -plated ball bearing slides. 2. File drawers; provide 150 lb load capacity. E. Label Holders: Stainless steel, aluminum, or chrome plated; sized to receive standard label cards approximately 1 by 2 inches, attached with screws or rivets. Provide on drawers. F. Locks: Cam type, brass with chrome -plated finish; complying with ANSUBHMA A156.11, Type E07281. 1. Tumbler: Five pin. 2. Lock Locations: Provide where indicated. 3. Keying: Key each lock separately. G. Adjustable Shelf Supports: ANSUBHMA A156.9, powder -coated steel shelf rests, Type B04013. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 35 53.19 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 35 53.19 WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.6 WOOD CABINET FABRICATION A. Construction: Provide wood -faced laboratory casework complying with SEFA 8 W. 1. Issued for Regulatory approval, Permitting, or Construction 2. Bottoms of Base Cabinets and Tall Cabinets: 3/4-inch- thick, veneer -core hardwood plywood. 3. Tops and Bottoms of Wall Cabinets and Tops of Tall Cabinets: 1-inch- thick, veneer -core hardwood plywood. 4. Ends of Cabinets: 3/4-inch- thick, hardwood plywood. 5. Base Cabinet Top Frames: 1 by 3-inch exposed solid wood with mortise and tenon or doweled connections, glued and pinned or screwed. 6. Base Cabinet Stretchers: 3/4-by-4-1/2-inch panel product strips or solid -wood boards at front and back of cabinet, glued and pinned or screwed. May be provided as an option to base cabinet top frames. 7. Unexposed Backs of Cabinets: 1/4-inch- thick, hardwood plywood dadoed into sides, bottoms, and tops unless otherwise indicated. 8. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch- thick, particleboard- or MDF-core hardwood plywood or solid hardwood. 9. Drawer Sides and Backs: 1/2-inch- thick, solid hardwood or veneer -core hardwood plywood, with glued dovetail or multiple -dowel joints. 10. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch- thick, veneer -core hardwood plywood glued and dadoed into front, back, and sides of drawers. Use 1/2-inch- thick material for drawers more than 24 inches wide. 11. Doors 48 Inches High or Less: 3/4-inch thick, with particleboard or MDF cores and hardwood face veneers and crossbands. a Provide solid -hardwood stiles and rails. 12. Doors More Than 48 Inches High: 1-1/8 inches thick, with particleboard cores and hardwood face veneers and crossbands. B. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between casework and walls, ceilings, and equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as adjacent exposed casework surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide knee -space panels (modesty panels) at spaces between base cabinets, where indicated. 2. Provide utility -space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops. 3. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be exposed. 2.7 WOOD FINISH A. Staining: Remove fibers and dust and apply stain to exposed and semiexposed surfaces as necessary to match approved Samples. Apply stain to produce a consistent appearance. Apply wash -coat sealer before applying stain to closed -grain wood species. B. Finish to match existing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 123553.19-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 35 53.19 WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2. Install level, plumb, and true in line; shim as required using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. Do not exceed the following tolerances: 1. Variation of Tops of Base Cabinets from Level: l/16-inch in 10 feet. 2. Variation of Bottoms of Upper Cabinets from Level: 1/8-inch in 10 feet. 3. Variation of Faces of Casework from a True Plane: 1/8-inch in 10 feet. 4. Variation of Adjacent Surfaces from a True Plane (Lippage): 1/32-inch. 5. Variation in Alignment of Adjacent Door and Drawer Edges: 1/16-inch. B. Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 16 inches o.c. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 12 35 53.19 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 35 53.19 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 36 61.19 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 12 36 61.19 - QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quartz agglomerate countertops. 2. Quartz agglomerate backsplashes. 3. Quartz agglomerate end splashes. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ISFA 3-01. 1. Basis of Design and subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Per Interior Material Legend. 2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions and the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Custom. B. Configuration: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner where indicated in interior elevations. 3. End Splash: Matching backsplash. C. Countertops: 3/4-inch- thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same material. D. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- thick, quartz agglomerate. E. Joints: 1. Fabricate countertops without joints. F. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by quartz agglomerate manufacturer. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 12 36 61.19 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 12 36 61.19 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. B. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. C. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. D. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. E. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 12 36 61.19 12 36 61.19 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 13 34 19 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural -steel framing. 2. Metal roof panels. 3. Metal wall panels. 4. Gutters and downspouts. 5. Thermal insulation. 6. Accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for personnel doors in metal building system. 3. Section 08 33 23 "Overhead Doors" for sectional vehicular doors in metal building systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology Standard: See MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for definitions of terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in standards referenced by this Section. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Single span rigid frame. B. Bay Spacing: As indicated on Drawings. C. Primary Framing: Rigid frame of rafter beams and columns, braced end frames, end wall columns, and wind bracing. D. Secondary Framing: Purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, sill supports, clips, and other items as required for a complete structure. E. Wall System: Preformed metal panels and sub -girt graming/anchorage assembly, insulation, liner sheets, and accessory components. F. Roof System: Preformed metal panels with purlin framing/anchorage assembly, insulation, and accessory components. G. Roof Slope: 1 inch in 12 inches. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete foundations and casting of anchor -rod inserts into foundation walls and footings. Anchor rod installation, concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." B. Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of metal building system component. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Metal roof panels. b. Metal wall panels. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY l 3 34 l 9- l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Thermal insulation. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components by others. Include full building plan, elevations, sections, details and the following: 1. Anchor -Rod Plans: Submit anchor -rod plans and templates before foundation work begins. Include location, diameter, and minimum required projection of anchor rods required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location. 2. Structural -Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross -sections. 3. Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of panels including methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, clip spacing, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field -assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners. a. Show wall -mounted items including personnel doors, vehicular doors, and lighting fixtures. 4. Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1- 1/2 inches per 12 inches: a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters. C. Downspouts. C. Door/Frame Schedule: See Drawings for doors, frames and hardware. D. Delegated Design Submittals: For metal building systems. 1. Include analysis data indicating compliance with performance requirements and design data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer licensed in Texas responsible for their preparation. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For erector. B. Welding certificates. C. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer licensed in Texas. Include the following: 1. Name and location of Project. 2. Order number. 3. Name of manufacturer. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. 6. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot -rolled steel and AISI standards for cold - rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. 7. Governing building code and year of edition. 8. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity -related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes). 9. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code. 10. Building -Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors. D. Erector Certificates: For qualified erector, from manufacturer. E. Material Test Reports: For each of the following products: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Tension -control, high -strength, bolt -nut -washer assemblies. 4. Shop primers. 133419-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 5. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality -control reports. G. Field quality -control reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For metal panel fmishes and door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: Obtain roof and wall panels, components, transitions, and assemblies from same manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer having a minimum of 3 years experience in manufacturing panels of this nature. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of comprehensive engineering analysis and Shop Drawings by a professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located. C. Installer's Qualifications: Installation of panels and accessories by installers with a minimum of 2 years experience in panel projects of this nature and approved by Manufacturer. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS 131.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with panel installation only when weather conditions permit metal panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Pre -Engineered Buildings: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 13 34 19 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT offering products that may be incorporated into the Work including, but are not limited to, the following: 1. MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Division of NCI Group, Inc. 2. Butler Manufacturing Company; a division of Blue Scope Buildings North America, Inc. 3. Nucor Corporation, Nucor Buildings Group. 4. SBI Metal Buildings. 5. Varco-Pruden Buildings; a division of Blue Scope Buildings North America, Inc. B. Insulation Vapor Barrier: 1. Reef Industries, Inc.; Houston, Texas. 2. Thermal Design, Inc.; Madison, Nebraska. C. Flexible Insulation: 1. Certainteed Corporation; Valley Forge, Pennsylvania. 2. Manville Corporation; Denver, Colorado. 3. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation; Toledo, Ohio. 4. Thermal Design, Inc.; Madison, Nebraska. D. Insulation Support System: Thermal Design, Inc.; Madison, Nebraska. E. Metal Panels and Framing: 1. AEP/Span Metals Corp.; Dallas, Texas. 2. Alumax Corp.; Mesquite, Texas. 3. Centria Roof Systems; Moon Township, Pennsylvania. 4. MBCI; Grand Prairie, Texas. 5. Peterson Aluminum; Elk Grove Village, Illinois. F. Panel Closures: East Coast Fasteners and Closures, Inc.; Elkhart Lake, Wisconsin. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. B. Primary -Frame Type: 1. Rigid Clear Span: Solid -member, structural -framing system without interior columns. C. End -Wall Framing: 1. Manufacturer's standard, for buildings not required to be expandable, consisting of primary frame, capable of supporting one-half of a bay design load, and end -wall columns. D. Secondary -Frame Type: Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and exterior -framed (bypass) girts. E. Eave Height: Manufacturer's standard height, as indicated by nominal height on Drawings. F. Bay Spacing: As indicated on Drawings. G. Roof Slope: 1 inch per 12 inches. H. Roof System: Manufacturer's standard lap -seam, tapered -rib metal roof panels. I. Exterior Wall System: Exposed -fastener, tapered -rib, metal wall panels. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI PBD Panel. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements," to design metal building system. B. Structural Performance: Metal building systems to withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual." 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection and Drift Limits: a Design metal building system assemblies to withstand serviceability design loads without exceeding deflections and drift limits recommended in AISC Steel Design 133419-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Guide No. 3 "Serviceability Design Considerations for Steel Buildings." b. No greater than the following: 1) Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 2) Girts: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span. 3) Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 4) Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span. 5) Design secondary -framing system to accommodate deflection of primary framing and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings. 6) Lateral Drift: Maximum of 1/200 of the building height. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. D. Structural Performance for Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. E. Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E1680 or ASTM E283 at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. F. Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E283 at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. G. Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E1646 at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. H. Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E331 at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. 2.4 STRUCTURAL -STEEL FRAMING A. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." B. Bolted Connections: Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High - Strength Bolts." C. Cold -Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold - Formed Steel Structural Members" for design requirements and allowable stresses. D. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary -framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafters, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end -wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. 1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field -bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated. a Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to comply with manufacturer's standard, as approved by Architect. 2. Rigid Clear -Span Frames: I -shaped frame sections fabricated from shop -welded, built-up steel plates or structural -steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted. 3. Frame Configuration: Single gable. 4. Exterior Column: Tapered. 5. Rafter: Tapered. E. End -Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end -wall framing fabricated for field -bolted assembly to comply with the following: 1. End -Wall and Corner Columns: I -shaped sections fabricated from structural -steel shapes; FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 13 34 19 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT shop -welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold -formed, structural -steel sheet. 2. End -Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold -formed, structural -steel sheet; or I -shaped sections fabricated from shop -welded, built-up steel plates or structural -steel shapes. F. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate framing from either cold -formed, structural -steel sheet or roll -formed, metallic -coated steel sheet, prepainted with coil coating, to comply with the following: 1. Purlins: a C or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural -steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch wide flanges. 2. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural -steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees from flange, with minimum 2-1/2-inch wide flanges. a Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements. 3. Eave Struts: Unequal -flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural -steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels. 4. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch structural -steel angles or 1-inch- diameter, cold -formed structural tubing to stiffen primary -frame flanges. 5. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch structural -steel angles. 6. Base or Sill Angles: Manufacturer's standard base angle, minimum 3-by-2-inch, fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 7. Purlin and Girt Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips fabricated from steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized framing members. 8. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from cold -formed, structural -steel sheet or structural -steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings and head, jamb, and sill of other openings. 9. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold - formed, structural -steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads. G. Anchor Rods: Headed anchor rods as indicated in Anchor Rod Plan for attachment of metal building to foundation. H. Materials: 1. W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M; ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A529/A529M, Grade 50 or 55. 2. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M; ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A529/A529M, Grade 50 or 55. 3. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M; ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A529/A529M, Grade 50 or 55. 4. Non -High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, Grade A, carbon -steel, hex - head bolts; ASTM A563 carbon -steel hex nuts; and ASTM F844 plain (flat) steel washers. a Finish: Plain. 5. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers, Grade A325: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers. a Finish: Plain. 6. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers, Grade A490: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 7. Tension -Control, High -Strength Bolt -Nut -Washer Assemblies: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852, Type 1, heavy -hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM 133419-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT F436/F436M, Type 1 hardened carbon -steel washers. a Finish: Plain. I. Finish: Factory primed. Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Clean and prepare in accordance with SSPC-SP2. 2. Coat with manufacturer's standard primer. Apply primer to primary and secondary framing to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil. 2.5 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Exposed -Fastener, Tapered -Rib, Metal Liner Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. 1. Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0.018-inch nominal uncoated steel thickness. Prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M. a Exterior Finish: Siliconized polyester. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Major -Rib Spacing: 12 inches o.c. 3. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. 4. Panel Height: 1.25 inches. B. Finishes: 1. Exposed Coil -Coated Finish: a Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone -modified, polyester -enamel topcoat; with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat. 2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.6 METAL WALL PANELS A. Exposed -Fastener, Ribbed, Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs; designed to be installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. 1. Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0.018-inch nominal uncoated steel thickness. Prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M. a Exterior Finish: Siliconized polyester. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Major -Rib Spacing: 2.67- inches o.c. 3. Panel Coverage: 32inches. 4. Panel Height: 5/8-- inches. 2.7 INTERIOR LINER PANELS A. Interior liner system: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturer's offering products that may be incorporated inthe Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Thermal Design; Madison, NE. a Basis of Design: Simple Save insulation system manufactured by Thermal Design. b. Color: Selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.8 THERMAL INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 13 34 19 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Bay Insulation Systems; a division of Bay Industries. 2. Thermal Design: Simple Saver System; Madison, Nebraska. B. Roof Liner System: 1. Simple Saver Insulation System; Multiple Layer 2. Unfaced Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C991, Type 1, or NAIMA 202, glass -fiber - blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. density; 2-inch wide, continuous, vapor -tight edge tabs; with a flame -spread index of 25 or less. 3. Thermal Block: Snap-R thermal block. 4. UVMAX Steel Strap: a Size: 0.02-inch by 2-inch by continuous length. b. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 5. Syseal Fabric Liner: a Fabric shall comply with Ul/ULC 723 or ASTM E84, and be Class A compliant with a low flame spread index of 25 or less based on ASTM E84 test standards. b. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 6. Sealant: Simple Saver System G524 High Tack Sealant. 7. Fast-R Insulation Hangers. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fascia, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels. C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. D. Flashing and Trim: Zinc -coated (galvanized) or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0.018- inch nominal uncoated steel thickness, prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels. 1. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. 2. Opening Trim: Zinc -coated (galvanized) or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0.018- inch nominal uncoated steel thickness, prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of 133419-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings. E. Gutters: Zinc -coated (galvanized) or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0.018-inch nominal uncoated steel thickness, prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters. F. Downspouts: Zinc -coated (galvanized) or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0.018-inch nominal uncoated steel thickness, prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. 1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters. 2.10 FABRICATION A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly. 1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. 2. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members to be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures. B. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for fabrication and erection tolerances. C. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. 1. Make shop connections by welding or by using high -strength bolts. 2. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous, submerged arc -welding process. 3. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold -formed structural tubing between frame web and purlin web or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings. 4. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing if applicable, or punch for bolts. 5. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime primary framing with specified primer after fabrication. D. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll forming or break forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing. 1. Make shop connections by welding or by using non -high -strength bolts. 2. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime uncoated secondary framing with specified primer after fabrication. E. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry -bearing FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 13 34 19 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances. 1. Engage land surveyor to perform surveying. C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition. B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written instructions and drawings. B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer. C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection. D. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service. F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double -nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base -line elevation. Moist -cure grout for not less than seven days after placement. 1. Make field connections using high -strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts" for bolt type and joint type specified. a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned as required by manufacturer. G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing. 1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight -fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls. H. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings. 1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end -bay bracing only where indicated. 133419-10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT I. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing. J. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303. 3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. On -Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on -site using UL-certified, portable roll -forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory -formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C. Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural -panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer. 1. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal panels, to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seams before metal panel installation. D. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. a. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer. 2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten with self -tapping screws. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Locate metal panel splices over structural supports with end laps in alignment. 6. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material. E. Lap -Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque adjusted to compress EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 1. Arrange and nest side -lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion -resistant coating, by applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." 3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 13 34 19 - 11 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. 1. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 2. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with self -tapping screws. B. Lap -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with exposed fasteners at each lapped joint, at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Provide metal -backed sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels. 2. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 3. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather -side surface of fastenings on end laps and on side laps of nesting -type metal panels, on side laps of ribbed or fluted metal panels, and elsewhere as needed to make metal panels weatherproof to driving rains. 4. At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6 inches end lap, sealed with butyl - rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. C. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self - drilling or self -tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. D. Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed tolerance of 1/4-inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing. 2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. 3. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum. 4. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over metal wall panels at eave height. 5. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 6. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self -tapping screws. 7. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 8. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. 9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 10. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self -drilling or self - tapping screws. 11. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe, fixtures and conduit penetrating exterior walls. 3.7 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. General: Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire surface, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Set vapor -retarder -faced units with vapor retarder toward warm side of construction unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces except for flrestopping. 13 34 19 - 12 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to the surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. 3. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over insulation, with both sets of facing tabs sealed, to provide a complete vapor retarder. B. Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method: 1. Two-Layers-between-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder between purlins. Carry vapor -retarder -facing tabs up and over purlin, overlapping adjoining facing of next insulation course and maintaining continuity of retarder. Install layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space between purlins formed by thermal spacer blocks. Hold in place with bands and crossbands below insulation. a. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal roof panels attach directly to purlins, install thermal spacer blocks. 2. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. C. Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing. 1. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. 3.8 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 3. Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion -resistant coating, by applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather -resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted -and -soldered or lapped -and -sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 inches o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 13 34 19 - 13 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform field quality control special inspections and to submit reports. B. Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. C. Touchup Painting: 1. After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories. a. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or by SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." b. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. D. Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 1. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 13 34 19 13 34 19 - 14 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2100 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 2100 00 - FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Materials and Equipment B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials, provide complete plan layout of system and hydraulic calculation (for hydraulic design) for approval. 1.3 SCOPE A. The entire building area shall be protected by an ordinary hazard automatic sprinkler system. The design and installation shall be done by a Contractor regularly engaged in the construction of fire protection sprinklers systems and licensed for such by the authorities having jurisdiction. For the high pile storage area in the evidence warehouse, confirm with the fire marshal head spacing and rack sprinklers required. Provide full coverage of all spaces in accordance with NFPA 13. 1.4 PRE -SUBMITTAL, PRE -BID COORDINATION MEETING A. Prior to preparation of bids or submittals, meet with the City of Lubbock Fire Marshal and the City of Lubbock project manager to determine exact requirements of the evidence warehouse sprinkler layout. Based on the planned rack storage system and the items to be stored, provide full coverage per NFPA 13 for all areas in the building to the satisfaction of the Fire Marshal. It is anticipated that some in -rack sprinklers will be required to provide adequate fire sprinkler coverage. 1.5 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS A. The design and installation of the Automatic Sprinkler Systems and the Alarm and Supervisory Systems shall be in strict accordance with all mandatory and recommended provisions of the NFPA, FM, UBC, and UL publications. All recommended provisions of the NFPA (National Fire Codes) listed below shall be considered as mandatory requirements. B. Issues of the following publications, including revisions and amendment as of the date of award of this contract, form a part of this specification. 1. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) Z. No. 101 Life Safety Code 3. No. 99 Hospital Code (as required) 4. No. 13 Sprinkler System 5. No. 70 National Electrical Code 6. No. 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems 7. No. 24 Outside Protection S. Factory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation Publication (FM) 9. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Publication (UL) 10. Approved Equipment Lists (with supplements). 11. Interpretations of state and local authorities (City of Lubbock Fire Marshal) PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All material and equipment shall be new and the current standard products of the manufacturer. Where two or more items of equipment performing the same function are required, they shall be FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 21 00 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2100 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT exact duplicates, produced by one manufacturer. However, component parts need not be products of the same manufacturer. B. All materials and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for systems of the type indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise noted, and shall conform to the requirements of NFPA No. 13. 2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The following is a listing of the materials and specifications. The list is comprehensive in nature. It is not intended that all materials listed will necessarily be required, but that those required for the work be selected from this listing. All pipe and fittings shall be non -galvanized, except where called for on the drawings or required by code. ITEM SIZE (INCL) Pipe All Fittings, Grooved All Fittings, Screwed All Fittings, Press -Connect Thru 2 Inches Fittings, Flanged All Fittings, Welding All Flanges All SPECIFICATIONS Schedule 40 steel, ASTM A120 or A53 Schedule 10, ASTM 120 UL/FM Grooved Fittings Malleable iron, 150 Ib, ANSI B 16.3. Cast iron acceptable. Carbon Steel, IAPMO PS-117, UL/ULC, FM. Steel, 150 lb, ANSI B 16.5. Cast iron not acceptable. Steel, Sch. 40, ANSI B 16.9 Steel, 150 lb, ANSI B 16.5. Cast iron not acceptable. Threadolets Sockolets Thru 2 Inches Steel, ANSI B16.11 ASTM A105 Weldolets 2 Inches and larger Steel, 90 degrees STD only, ANSI B 16.9, ASTM 105 Plugs All Brass, square head, 125 lb, ANSI B 16.5 Unions Thru 2 Inches Malleable iron, 300 lb bronze to iron ground joint Flange Gaskets All Red rubber 1/16 inch, ANSI B16.21 Valves: Globe Valves Thru 2 Inches Screwed, bronze body, rising stem, 175 lb WWP, screw -in bonnet, renewable disc, NIBCO KT-65- UL/KT-21 1 -W-UL, Kennedy Fig. 97. Angle Valves Thru 2 Inches Screwed, bronze body, rising stem, 175 lb WWP, screw -in bonnet, renewable disc, NIBCO KT-67- UL/T-301-W, Kennedy Fig. 98. Gate Valves Thru 2 Inches Screwed, bronze body, OS and Y, 175 lb WWP, NIBCO T-104-0, Kennedy Fig. 66. 21 00 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2100 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Gate Valves 2-1/2-Inch and Larger Flanged, iron body, OS and Y, 175 lb WWP, NIBCO F-607-OTS, Kennedy Fig. 68 Check Valve Thru 2 Inches Screwed, bronze body, 175 lb WWP, horizontal swing, renewable disc, NIBCO KT-403-W, Kennedy Fig. 442. Check Valves 2-1/2-Inch and Larger Flanged, iron body, 175 lb WWP, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing, renewable seat and rubber faced disc, NIBCO F-908-W, Kennedy Fig. 126A. Auto Ball Drip 1/2 or 3/4 Bronze, Grinnell Model F775. Sprinklers and Nozzles: Automatic Sprinklerhead, Standard upright and Pendant For offices, Laboratories, Public Spaces, Conference Rooms and Corridors — all areas not support spaces Sidewall Water Flow Alarm Devices: Reliable Model G Head type, orifice size, thread size, 165 degree temperature rating satin chrome finish where exposed in finished areas. Provide quick response heads where required. Full recessed, fully concealed sprinklerhead with white concealer button, flush mounted with ceiling. Center heads in ceiling tiles. UL/FM flexible drops are permitted. Grunau Institutional model PH-3. Quick response head. Alarm check valves Alarm check valve, complete with trim including retard chamber and connections for pressure switches for local alarm bell and water flow transmitter. Reliable Model E. Water Motor Gong Miscellaneous: Pipe Hangers Supports, and Connections Reliable Model C. Approved type, in accordance NFPA No. 13 and No. 15 requirements. Pipe Escutcheons Chromium -plated iron or chromium -plated brass, either one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew. Sprinkler Escutcheon Two-piece, finish to match sprinkler except where otherwise specified on drawings. Depth as required to position sprinkler. Sprinkler Guard FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 Approved guard, standard baked red enamel finish. 210000-3 SECTION 2100 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Hypochlorite AWWA 300 Water Pressure Gage 3-inch minimum dial, 0-300 psi range, polished brass case, Federal Spec. GG-G-76. Siamese 2-1/2-Inch x 2-1/2-Inch x 4-Inch chromium plated flush mounted with caps, chains and sillcock. Mark "STANDPIPE AND AUTO SPKR". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 JOINTS A. Joints shall be the grooved or threaded type for 2-inch and smaller, and shall be grooved, welded or flanged for 2-1/2-inch and larger. B. Threaded Joints: Threads shall be concentric with the outside of the pipe and shall conform to ANSI B2.1. Threaded joints shall be made tight with an approved thread joint compound or tape. Joint compound shall be applied lightly but sufficiently to cover male threads only. Leaking joint shall not be repaired by peaning or packing. C. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be faced -true, provided with 1/16-inch red rubber gaskets, and made square and tight. When made up, flange bolts shall extend through nuts by at least one full thread. No flanges shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible after erection. D. Press Connect Joints: At the Contractor's option, NIBCO Bench Press or Viega MegaPress steel fittings may be used: Fittings shall conform to IAPMO PS 117. EPDM elastomeric sealing elements. All connections shall bear full insertion marks on the tubing. Press Connect fitting shall have Leak Detection as standard feature to detect unpressed fittings during the testing process. There shall be no mixing of manufacturers. The manufacturer's installation instructions shall be strictly adhered to. Special attention shall be given to the required two step pressure test. Initial test for unpressed fitting detection per manufacturer's installation manual, then full pressure test to 1.5 times design pressure. Installers shall be credentialed by manufacturer. Approved manufacturers: NIBCO, Viega E. Welded Joints: All welding, including methods and qualifications of welders, shall be in strict accordance with the standards and requirements specified in NFPA Nos. 13 and 15. All welds are subject to inspection by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to accept, reject, or demand removal of welds which are in violation of these specifications. Welded branch connections to headers shall be made by use of threadolets, sockolets or weldolets type fittings. F. Cutting: Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements shown on the shop drawings and to suit field conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or springing. All cuts shall be reamed to remove fins and burrs. k*► Ieh11 10 0 AN Y to) ►I A. Piping material, including valves and fittings, shall be delivered to the site in a clean and protected condition. End seals of pipe, valves and flange covers shall be maintained in place, being removed only as necessary for cleaning, fabrication, erection or for inspection by the Contractor. Care shall be exercised in the handling and storage of all piping materials and prefabricated piping so that contamination by moisture, grease, dirt, or injurious foreign matter shall not occur. B. The pipe shall be cut accurately to centerline measurements to suit field conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or springing. Piping shall be pitched to allow proper drainage. 210000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2100 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. The interior and exterior surfaces of all piping shall be kept clean at all times. Pipe shall be free from fins and burrs and shall be cleaned in accordance with cleaning procedures herein. D. No flanges or unions shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible after erection. E. All valves shall be properly packed and made leakproof under the test pressures described. F. All piping passing through walls shall be provided with pipe sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the systems piping they accommodate or approved steel sleeves providing annular space around the pipe. Annular space shall be made weather and watertight. G. Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire partitions, or floor/ceiling assemblies, a fire seal of mineral wool, or similar noncombustible material shall be packed between the pipe and sleeve. 3.3 ESCUTCHEONS A. Pipe escutcheons shall be provided at all finished surfaces where exposed piping passes through floors, walls or ceiling except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Sprinkler escutcheons shall be provided for all pendant heads through ceilings. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to the pipe. 3.4 SIGNS A. All control drain and inspector's valves shall be provided with porcelainized metal identification signs. All hydraulically designed systems shall be provided with a permanently attached nameplate data sign as recommended by NFPA No. 13. 3.5 SPRINKLER GUARDS A. All sprinkler heads installed within 7 feet of the floor or otherwise subject to mechanical damage shall be equipped with sprinkler guards. 3.6 TESTING A. Testing of the sprinkler systems and alarm systems shall be as prescribed by NFPA Pamphlet No. 13 and 72C. Each test shall be in the presence of an authorized representative of the owner. This representative shall sign the Certificate of Inspection as a witness of a successful test. The Contractor shall deliver these certificates of inspection in duplicate to the Architect. 3.7 STERILIZATION A. All new lines shall be flushed and sterilized with chlorine before acceptance for service. Calcium hypochlorite powder, containing not less than 70 percent available chlorine, shall be used for sterilization. The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of 100 ppm for at least 24 hours. At the conclusion of the 24-hour contract time, C12 residual should be at least 20 ppm. The chlorinating material shall be mixed with treated water in an acceptable container and injected directly into the system, the process being repeated until the system is filled. All valves in the system shall be open and closed 3 times during the procedure to insure that the sterilizing mixture is thoroughly and evenly distributed throughout the system. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, the system shall be flushed with water. 3.8 PROCEDURE FOR PLACING SYSTEMS IN SERVICE A. The Contractor shall place the systems in service with the operating mediums after purging operations are completed. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and tools required. 3.9 ELECTRICAL WORK A. All electrical work in connection with the installation of the fire protection system shall be performed in accordance with Divisions 26 and 28. 3.10 SPARE SPRINKLER HEADS A. The Contractor shall furnish spare heads in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 13. Heads shall be provided in a suitable cabinet and shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 21 00 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2100 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT each type and temperature rating of heads installed. In addition to the spare heads, the contractor shall furnish not less than one special sprinkler wrench per cabinet. The Cabinets shall be mounted at the system's riser. 3.11 ELECTRICAL ROOMS A. Sprinkler piping shall be routed to avoid all Electrical Rooms, except laterals extending into and serving the electrical room. END OF SECTION 2100 00 210000-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2122 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 2122 00 - FM-200 SYSTEM PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Shop Drawings, Design, Agent Containers, Releasing Mechanism, Discharge Nozzles, Materials & Installation -Mechanical, Detection -Actuation & Alarm Systems, Nameplates & Signs. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work covered by this section consists of performing all operation in connection with the design and installation of the BFC-227ea referred to by the trade name of FM-200 automatic fire extinguishing system, complete, in strict accordance with the specifications and applicable drawings. B. The design and installation of the system shall be complete with all necessary accessories for proper operation and shall be accomplished by a firm or organization regularly engaged in this type of work, and in strict accordance with requirements of the National Fire Protection Association. The fire protection supply line, controlling devices, protective devices, alarm system and supervisory devices, extinguishing agent, and all other equipment shall be thoroughly coordinated with the system to secure the required results. Generally, all areas in IT/DATA Room 209 shall be fully protected. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The design and installation of FM-200 automatic extinguishing system shall be in strict accordance with all mandatory and recommended provisions of the latest editions of the NFPA National Fire Codes and the UBC Publications. All recommended provisions of the NFPA (National Fire Codes) shall be considered as mandatory requirements. B. The FM and UL publications as listed below may be used for listing approved equipment. C. Issues of the following publications, including revisions and amendments, as of the date of award of this contract, form a part of this specification: 1. Factory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation Publication (FM): Approval Guide 2. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA): No. 70 National Electrical Code No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code No. 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems No. 75 Electronic Computer Systems 3. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Publication (UL): Approved Equipment List (with supplements) 4. IR Information Manual, Section IM 13.6.1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 21 22 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2122 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. All materials and equipment shall be current standard products of the respective manufacturers. Where two or more pieces of equipment performing the same function are required, they shall be exact duplicates produced by one manufacturer. However, component parts of the system need not be the products of the same manufacturer. All devices and equipment shall be listed by UL or approved by FM. All equipment and materials shall conform and function with current requirements of the applicable referenced NFPA Standards. The contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under this specification are installed and designed to be used to conform with NFPA requirements. The Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., label, seal or listing in the approved Equipment List or the FM approval guide will not necessarily be acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to NFPA requirements. B. All FM-200 equipment shall be new and comprised of standard "Off -the -shelf' components of the manufacturer. 2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shall be submitted for approval in accordance with General Conditions and Special Conditions. Shop drawings of each system shall include complete information on and calculations in support of quantity of agent to produce specified concentration; discharge time; agent storage pressure; container filling density; location of containers, location, flow rate and equivalent orifice area of each nozzle; location and routing, size and equivalent length of all pipe and fittings, location of detectors and all control equipment; and electrical circuitry and circuit routing. Shop drawings shall be to scale and shall include plans and elevations of equipment. 2.3 "AS -BUILT" SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shall be submitted in accordance with General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2.4 DESIGN A. Shall meet all applicable requirements of NFPA Standards Nos. 70, 72, 75 and 2001 except as noted herein. Discharge FM-200 within 10 seconds and maintain 7.1% concentration by volume at 70°F. F for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas. FM-200 concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0% immediately after discharge or less than 5.8% throughout holding time will not be accepted. Actuation of FM-200 systems is to be arranged to close supply and return air dampers and operate new contactors to disconnect the air handling equipment and electric power to room. Connect panel to a spare breaker. Provide bell and strobe in room to indicate an alarm condition on the FM-200 system and also provide the bell and strobe in corridor outside of data room. 2.5 AGENT CONTAINERS A. Agent containers shall be constructed in accordance with applicable Department of Transportation or ASME codes and regulations and located as approved by the Architect. Each container shall be equipped with an integral pressure gauge and filled with FM-200. A system shall be provided to check the weight of the containers including scales and support for the scales. Remotely locate the agent containers in General Storage 112. Confirm and coordinate location prior to preparing submittal with Architect. 2.6 RELEASING MECHANISM A. The releasing mechanism shall be compatible with the detection system installed, approved for FM- 200 System discharge, and shall be capable of releasing the agent automatically by actuation of 212200-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2122 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT detection system, or manually by operation of a remote manual dump station. The system shall also be capable of releasing the agent when on the emergency power supply (battery). 2.7 DISCHARGE NOZZLES A. The manufacturer shall furnish evidence that the nozzle design and configuration is capable of achieving a uniform concentration without stratification in all areas of the room. 2.8 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION - MECHANICAL A. Piping: Black schedule 40 steel pipe and malleable iron fittings shall be used for FM-200 distribution systems. B. Ordinary cast iron pipe and fittings shall not be used. C. Welded joints are acceptable to the extent such joints can be shop welded; no field welding shall be permitted. Welders must be certified, and all welds x-rayed. D. Piping shall be installed in a workmanlike manner. Pipe shall be reamed and cleaned before assembly and shall be blown out before installation of valves or discharging devices. A suitable number of unions shall be installed to allow removal of valves and equipment for servicing or replacement. E. Hangers and Support: All piping shall be supported with suitable hangers, brackets, or other approved means so spaced as to prevent sagging, warping, or vibration of piping. Piping shall not be supported on other piping or equipment. F. All piping shall be erected and supported in such a manner as to allow expansion or contraction without harmful strain to building structural members, to pipe, or to supports. G. All agent containers and related equipment shall be securely mounted to floors and/or walls and protected against mechanical damage. 2.9 DETECTION, ACTIVATION AND ALARM SYSTEMS A. Activation of the FM-200 protection system shall be by automatic or manual means. Discharge of the system manually shall be from the respective control panel. Automatic discharge shall be accomplished by Product of Combustion Detectors. B. Control Panels: Control panels housing all required relays, fuses, switches, reset devices, pilot and trouble lights, etc., shall be located adjacent agent storage containers and control equipment. The required number of normally open and normally closed contacts shall be provided to operate the FM- 200 system, actuate the audible horn/strobes, strobes and operate new contactor disconnect switches for power and air conditioning shutdown. The unit shall have normally open and normally closed trouble operated contacts for use with the fire alarm system. All relay coils shall be supervised. C. Abort Stations: The abort stations shall be "Dead Man" type and shall be located at exit and at control panel. D. Emergency Power Supply: Systems shall be supervised to indicate by sounding of a distinctive trouble buzzer, and lighting of a trouble light, a faulty condition in system circuits, failure of building power or low battery power. The supply shall have capacity to operate the FM-200 system for a minimum of 24 hours. 2.10 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. General: Nameplates shall be laminated black and white plastic with characters cut through the black outside plastic to the white core. Nameplate schedules shall be furnished with shop drawings submitted for approval. Instruction all signs shall be laminated red and white plastic. All letters shall be at least 1/2" height. B. Required Locations: Nameplates shall be furnished for all control, battery, power supply and relay panels and boxes, manual trips and power disconnect override switches. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 21 22 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2122 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Operation of any one of the cross zoned detectors shall cause the following events to occur: 1. The evacuation signal shall sound. 2. The appropriate lamp on the control panel shall illuminate. 3. The indicator lamp on the alarmed detector shall illuminate. If the detector is underfloor the remote annunciator lamp shall illuminate. 4. Signal is sent to main building fire alarm panel. B. Operation of both cross zoned detectors in an area shall cause the following events to occur: 1. The evacuation signal shall sound. 2. The appropriate zone lamps on the control panel shall illuminate. 3. The indicator lamps on the alarmed detector shall illuminate. If the detectors are underfloor, the remote annunciator lamps shall illuminate. 4. Signal is sent to main building fire alarm panel. 5. The computer room air unit shall shutdown and supply and return dampers shall close. 6. An adjustable 30 second time delay timer shall become energized and at the end of the timing cycle shall automatically release the FM-200 in the designated area. 3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. After FM-200 system and its related detection system has been fully installed and is ready to be placed in service, the Contractor shall perform the following inspection and test work on each system according to a schedule mutually agreed upon between the Contractor and the Architect: B. Contractor's Inspection and Test: Shall be performed by the Contractor to satisfy himself that the system is in complete operating order and meets all requirements of these specifications, and manufacturer's recommendations and specifications. This work shall consist of (1) necessary inspection to assure that all system components have been mounted and installed in accordance with these specifications, manufacturer's instructions, and shop drawings, and that all piping and electrical materials and equipment have been installed in accordance with these specifications, manufacturer's instructions and specifications and shop drawings; (2) testing as required to assure there are no shunts or grounds in all system wiring; and (3) connection to power supply and preliminary operational tests to verify proper line voltage and emergency power function, and to verify proper operation of all functions of all system components and circuits, all in accordance with manufacturer's standard procedures and instructions and applicable portions of these specifications. C. When the Contractor has satisfied himself that each system is in complete operating condition in every respect as required above, he shall notify the Architect that the system has been inspected and tested and is ready for final acceptance tests, giving at least two days notice of the desired date and time of such tests. D. Final Acceptance Tests: Shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Architect following final inspection of all phases of the work by and at the discretion of the Architect. E. A room pressurization test shall be conducted, in each protected space, to determine the presence of openings which would affect the FM-200 system concentration levels. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001. F. Documents certifying satisfying system operation shall be submitted to the Architect after all inspections are complete. G. A test plan shall be submitted by the contractor to include a step-by-step description of all tests to be performed and shall indicate the type and location of all that apparatus employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation requirements of this specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect and shall not be conducted until the test plan has been approved. 212200-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 2122 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT H. The Contractor shall supply all instrumentation, and other materials required to perform the tests and shall satisfy the Architect that the instrumentation is calibrated prior to each test. I. Any faults or malfunctions in the system or component operations discovered shall be corrected by and at the expense of the Contractor and final inspection and testing shall be repeated by the Contractor at his expense as directed by the Architect shall constitute evidence of satisfactory completion of this portion of the work, including that covered by Division 16 of these specifications. END OF SECTION FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 21 22 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Plumbing Fixtures, and Kitchen Equipment Connections. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories" A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. B. Sanitary Fixture Waste Arms: Fixtures served by sanitary soil waste and drain lines shall be connected using cast iron pipe and fittings, red brass pipe, Type L hard copper tubing with cast brass drainage fittings or lead. Use brass soldering nipples or ferrules as required. C. Sanitary Vent Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. D. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and cast-iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint fittings. No lead solder will be permitted. All flanges shall be 150 psig rated. E. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lbs. banded malleable iron fittings. F. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. G. Downspouts and Interior Storm Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67. H. Miscellaneous Lines: Such as pilot lines, bleed lines, control and sampling lines, equalizer lines, drains from air vents and relief vents, etc. shall be fabricated of the materials used in the systems to which they are connected. 1. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W-8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be Wade W-6000-TS with square FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 22 00 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4-inch size and shall be 4-inch for all larger lines. J. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12 inches long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. K. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded or tubing spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match. L. Automatic Air Vents: This Contractor shall furnish and install Crane No. 976 or 977 air vent valves at all high points for the hot water system, as shown and/or as required. Run a 3/4-inch type L hard copper drain line from the discharge of each air vent valve to a floor drain or as directed. M. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Valves: Where more than one recirculation circuit is shown on the drawings, each circuit shall be equipped with a self-contained recirculation temperature control valve. The valve shall be equal in all respects to Cimberio 778 and shall meet the following requirements. The Cim 778 (or equal) adjustable thermostatic balancing valve shall regulate domestic hot water flow in the recirculation circuit based on the actual water temperature entering the valve and the desired water temperature set on the valve. 1. The valve shall maintain dynamic control of the recirculating circuit by allowing a small amount of hot water to pass through even when fully closed. 2. The valve shall be field adjustable without the need for gauges or specialized tools as project conditions require. 3. The valve shall be offered in 11/2 inch NPT, 1/4 inch NPT, or 1-inch NPT sizes. B. Cim 778 will allow for increased flow over the minimum rate via a bypass once 1607 is achieved for an automatic legionella flushing period. 4. The valve shall be a DZR Brass ANSI C27453 or EN 12165 CW511L body and internal components and meet the following requirements: a. The valve shall be rated to 360 PSI maximum working pressure. b. The valve shall be standard NPT and press connections shall also be available. C. The valve shall have a temperature regulation range of 105°F-140°F. d. The valve shall have a working temperature range of 15°F-200°F. e. The valve shall be NSF/ANSI 61 certified for domestic water system use. f. Spring -loaded thermal actuator delivers sufficient thrust to keep orifice opening clean and free of deposits. g. The valve shall have two ports for optional thermometer or test pressure plug ports. h. The valve shall not use plastic as the shutter in the valve i. Each valve shall have isolation ball valves on each side from the factory to isolate the control valve for maintenance 5. Installation technicians shall review instructions included with each valve by the manufacturer. a. The valve shall be installed in the return piping branch of each domestic hot water system beyond the branch's final hot water device. b. Provide additional components as indicated on project drawings. 6. Install in an accessible location for maintenance or provide an access panel for any inaccessible installation locations. 7. Where recirculation valves are installed, provide and install an all -bronze recirculation pump sized for 1.0 gpm per valve provided, at a head loss equal to 25-foot THD. Install the recirculation pump with check valve at the domestic cold -water inlet to the water heater. 2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES 220000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of Crane, American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. C. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow preventers. D. All fixtures shall have (1/4) turn ball stop valves. E. Generally, all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. H. Where fixtures mate with irregular walls, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. I. The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. 2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE: Refer to drawings. 2.4 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. The Contractor shall disconnect all existing kitchen equipment plumbing connections and reconnect all equipment in the new location. Furnish and install new unions, gas cocks, valves and fittings and all other materials and labor required to provide a complete functional system. B. In addition, rough -in and make final connections to all new equipment furnished by others. Furnish and install all stops, waste, escutcheons, etc., required to provide a complete functional system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. These isolation valves shall be installed at an accessible location. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. 1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of/4-inch per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8-inch per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 2. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10 inches above the roof. 3. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. 4. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. 5. Gas Lines: a. All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings, with special venting provisions. b. A gas "drip pocket" or "dirt leg" shall consist of a nipple and screwed cap on the bottom of the riser and shall be installed at connections to equipment, at the low point of the FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 22 00 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT system and at the natural gas line entrance to the building (with the "gas cock" shut off valve). Install as required by the International Fuel Gas Code. C. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. d. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported on Miro Pillow Block pipe stands, Model 02 for 2 inches and below, Model 24-R for piping 2-inch to 4-inch and Model 48-R for 5 inches and above. Pans shall be mopped to roof. Pipes shall be strapped to supports with galvanized strap. 6. Identification: For other than black steel pipe, exposed gas piping shall be identified by a yellow label marked "Gas" in black letters. The marking shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding 5 feet (1524 mm). The marking shall not be required on pipe located in the same room as the appliances served. All tubing carrying medium -pressure gas shall be marked with a label at the beginning and end of each tubing section. 3.3 TESTING A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10-foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1 inch in 8 hours. D. Gas Lines: Test with 50 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. E. Downspouts and Storm Drains: Test with water under a head of at least 10 ft. System shall be tight at all joints with no leaks whatsoever. 3.4 DISINFECTING A. After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent. The chlorinating agent may be a liquid chlorine, liquid chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines through a suitable solution feed device. B. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being filled and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly. C. The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe lines for a period of not less than 24 hours. At the end of the 24-hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20 ppm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million. I Biel IZI] 01RI 0111 [I]►`"XIIIIIII7 220000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 23 00 00 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. 1.2 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.3 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 00 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. O. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, and 28 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" and "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.4 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation 230000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All electric wiring of every character, for power supply, for communications, etc. will be done under Divisions 26 and 28 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Divisions 26 and 28, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. The Temperature Control Contractor shall include in his bid and shall furnish all wiring required for control, including line (120v/lphase/60hz) voltage wiring and low voltage control wiring. All wiring shall be in conduit. Include extending line voltage electrical to a space in the nearest electrical panel (or as shown on the drawings) and providing breakers as required to terminate all power required to make temperature controls functional. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Divisions 26 and 28, and is a part of this contract. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Divisions 26 and 28. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. The contractor shall coordinate the voltage of all motors and any associated variable frequency drives with the Divisions 26 and 28 contractors prior to ordering the devices. C. Where no temperature control scope is shown in the documents, it shall be the responsibility of the Divisions 26 and 28 contractors to provide wiring, conduit and switches for the manual control of equipment, unless specifically noted to the contrary on the drawings and specifications. 1.7 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Divisions 21, 22, and 23 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide solid state overload protection, providing protection against single-phase events. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 00 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.8 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.9 FACTORY STARTUP OF EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall provide factory startup or factory authorized startup for certain equipment furnished for this project. Equipment requiring factory startup shall include the following: Rooftop Units, FM200 fire protection system, mini -split dx cooling units, and Exhaust Fans. Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's startup checklist substantiating that the equipment has been started and is operating in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The startup shall be performed by a person in the direct employ of the manufacturer or by an authorized agent. If the startup is performed by an authorized agent, the startup report shall be accompanied by a letter from the manufacturer identifying the agent as one who is certified to perform factory startup on the equipment furnished. As a minimum, submit the startup checklist with any comments or deficiencies noted during startup. Submit the report with certification letter (as required) to the Commissioning Agent for inclusion in the commissioning documentation. If there is no Commissioning Agent for the project, submit the startup reports as a submittal package to the Architect. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. All items of equipment provided shall be piped in strict accordance with its manufacturer's written installation instructions. Note that details on the drawings may be for equipment that is ultimately not furnished for the project and is for bidding purposes. Exact configuration shall match manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.11 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.12 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS 230000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the material is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time where possible. If hard copy is submitted, it shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section. Electronic submittals are preferred. Submit ONE pdf file per specification section, named as follows: Jobname_23XXXX_SpecSectionName.pd£ Include a cover letter from the contractor as the first sheet of the submittal, certifying that the submittal has been properly indexed and has been checked by the Contractor. Each item submitted shall include a cover letter by the material supplier, clearly indicating exact model numbers and details to be furnished for each item specified in the section. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1.14 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 00 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.15 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.16 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1.17 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.18 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" convey a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.19 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. 230000-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 1.20 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Divisions 21, 22, and 23 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Divisions 26 and 28 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, and 28 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.21 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, and 28 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 00 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 1.22 PAINTING A. Painting for Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, and 28 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.23 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire-resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.24 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. The work under the various sections must be expedited and close coordination will be required in executing the work. The various trades shall perform their portion of the work at such times as directed so as to insure meeting scheduled completion dates, and to avoid delaying any other trade. The Architect will set up completion dates, schedule the times of work in the various areas involved, etc. Each Contractor shall cooperate in establishing these times and locations and shall process his work so as to insure the proper execution of it. 1.25 WORKING TIME A. All work required by these installations shall be done during normal working hours, except in such cases as are specifically excepted hereinbefore. The Owner reserves the right to direct, at his own discretion, that any other parts of the work be done at other than normal working hours; in which case the Contractor involved shall be reimbursed by an amount equal to the excess cost of such overtime labor above the value of the same at regular rates. 1.26 SLEEVE DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall, before concrete is poured, prepare 1/8-inch scale floor plan drawings on tracing paper and shall show on these drawings, with dimension lines, the size and location of every pipe sleeve required for the passage of his lines. Prints shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to the setting of the pipe sleeves. 230000-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.27 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval, but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.28 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.29 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (Inch Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 1.30 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 00 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-1, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16-inch thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least '/z-inch high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 1.31 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.32 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.33 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. 1.34 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment, the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 230000-10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. 1.35 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 23 00 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 00 00 - I I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 30 00 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 23 30 00 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Valves. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.4 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.5 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipes, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe No Hub Joints Clay Tile Pipe and Fittings Clay Tile Joints Rubber Rings for A.C. Pipe ABS Soil Pipe and Fittings ABS Soil Joints — Elastomeric FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 ASTM A74, Class SV ASTM C564 Fed. Spec. HH-P-117, Type II ASTM D3183 ASTM C700 ASTM C425 ASTM D1869 ASTM D2751 ASTM D2751 23 30 00- 1 SECTION 23 30 00 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings PVC Soil Fittings — Elastomeric Copper Tubing Wrought Copper Solder Fittings Cast Bronze Solder Fittings Steel Pipe Butt Weld Fittings Socket Weld Fittings Steel Flanges Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings PVC Water Pipe Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR = 35 ASTM D3212 ASTM B88 ANSI B16.22 ANSI B16.18 ASTM A120, A53, A106 ANSI B16.9 ANSI B16.11 ANSI B16.5 ANSI B16.3 ASTM D1584 Type 1120 ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150-pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. 2.2 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3 inches and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/2-inch and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 2 Inches and smaller 428 424 Gate 2-1/2 Inches and larger 465-1/2 7-1/2 E Globe 2 Inches and smaller 1 14-1/2 P Globe 2-1/2 Inches and larger 351 21E Angle 2 Inches and smaller 2 16-1/2 P Angle 2-1/2 Inches and larger 353 23E B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated lines, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Swing Check Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG. E. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Iron body, flanged, bronze trimmed; equal to Crane No. 373 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 39E for pressures from 125 psi to 250 psi. F. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Memory stops may be deleted for domestic water service. Valve shall be two-piece ring type. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. G. Valves in Plastic Lines: Cabot Chemtrol CPVC ball valves. 233000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 30 00 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT H. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. Valves 2 inches and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 or Lee 10685 iron body flat -head threaded gas stop. I. Gate Valves OS and Y Pattern: Valves shall be furnished as an internal part of the backflow preventer assembly. Valves shall be full port, resilient wedge, outside screw and yoke pattern valves conforming to ASTM A126 Class B Iron Body Valves. The assembly shall be rated for a pressure of 175 prig. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding . fittings ittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Threadolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.2 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8 inches in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36-inch square. B. Pitch Pans: Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru pitch pans. Pans shall be 18-gage galvanized, welded, 3-inch deep, 8-inch X 8-inch or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with pitch. 3.3 PIPE SLEEVES FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 30 00- 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 30 00 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Generally, where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation. B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material equal to Dow Corning Silicone RTV Foam Penetration Seal. C. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through floors shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at least four No. 4 rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect. After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link equal to Link Seal. Contractor shall coordinate sleeve size to insure a watertight joint. 3.4 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.5 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Makeup joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded j oints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. B. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95 percent tin, 5 percent antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5 percent tin, 4 percent copper, .5 percent silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. Where flanges are shown or are required for connection to equipment, they shall be 150 psi flanges. C. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made, and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8-inch per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. D. Solvent Weld Plastic Joints: Solvent welded according to manufacturers instructions. E. Special Joints: Special joints made with clamps, compression couplings, etc. shall be as required to connect tubing to piping systems, tubing to items of equipment and other such connections. Use tools as required by the materials and conditions. F. Testing: 233000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 30 00 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. The Contractor shall have a minimum of 10 percent of all welds made by each welder examined and inspected by radiography. If a faulty weld is discovered, the Contractor shall perform radiographic inspection on all welds made by that welder. Any faulty welds shall be repaired and reinspected at the Contractor's expense. 2. The system shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the design pressure, as specified in Chapter VI ASME Code 1331.1-1986 for Power Piping, and carefully checked for leaks. After leaks are repaired, retest system; repeat repair and test until proved tight. Equipment shall be isolated from hydrostatic testing of piping. 3. Welds which cannot be hydrostatically tested, e.g., branch connections made to existing piping, shall be radiographed per Chapter VI, ASME Code B31.1-1986 at Contractor's expense. The Owner at his option may allow visual inspection of these welds in lieu of radiographs. 3.6 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100 percent penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4 inches in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.7 HANDLING OF MATERIAL A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive, building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian traffic. C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe. 3.8 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipes shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION 23 30 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 30 00- 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 40 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 23 40 00 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Low Pressure Ductwork, Duct Construction Test, Duct Liner, Duct Sealer, Air Control Devices, Plenums, Flexible Duct, Flexible Connections, Round Duct Taps, Fire Dampers, Fire/Smoke Damper, Access Panel, Ductports, and Air Distribution Devices. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low-pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 3rd Edition, (2015) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with double thickness factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of airflow, with a maximum slope of 1-inch in 7-inch on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1-inch in 7-inch on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1-inch in 4-inch where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10 percent of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION TEST FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 40 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 40 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. A trial leak test, as specified herein, shall be made after installation of the first section of each type of ductwork to demonstrate adequacy of the construction details. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Architect. B. Each test section shall incorporate at least five transverse joints and all typical fittings. C. Drawings showing all construction details of test sections, test procedures and instrumentation, and test results shall be submitted for record purposes. No additional ductwork shall be installed until the trial test installation described above has been approved. D. Low pressure duct shall be tested at 3-inch w.c. Construction of low-pressure systems shall be inherently airtight, and leakage shall be of a sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet ambient and not detectable by sense of feel. 2.3 DUCT LINER: Refer to drawings and insulation specifications. A. Note that internal sizes are shown on the drawings. B. Only ductwork specifically called to be lined on the drawings or specifications shall be lined. Generally, exposed ductwork shall be lined, and concealed supply and return ducts shall be insulated with fiberglass duct wrap. Refer to 236000 for insulation specifications. C. Conditioned Spaces: 1. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1-inch with Johns -Manville "Permacote Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with immobilized antimicrobial impregnated acrylic surface coating on one side. 2. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .25 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 deg. F. D. Unconditioned Spaces: 1. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1-1/2-inch with Johns -Manville "Permacote Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with immobilized antimicrobial impregnated acrylic surface coating on one side. 2. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .20 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 deg. F. 3. Duct liner shall comply with ASTM Cl 071 with an NRC not less than 0.70 as tested per ASTM C423. 4. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuftbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2 inches greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. 5. Use 100 percent adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.4 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the terminal units shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146 or Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 water based, non fibrated duct sealant to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of duct sealant to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.5 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the airflow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. 234000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 40 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Splitter dampers and volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20-gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct but shall be not less than 12 inches. Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 18 inches. The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24 inches, volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12 inches in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.6 PLENUMS A. The Contractor shall fabricate and install all sheet metal plenums. Plenums shall be constructed and insulated as specified for "Low Pressure Ductwork." hi addition, as a minimum requirement, plenums shall be braced with 1-1/2 by 10-gauge angles 24 inches on center, all sides. When plenums are mounted on the floor there shall be an additional angle around the plenum secured to the floor. Caulk all seams air and watertight. B. There shall be at least one door in each plenum 18-inch by 48-inch with two latches, 12-inch square Airsan Ductport, piano hinge, and gasket. All plenum doors shall be double metal clad with 1-inch- thick internal insulation. Provide two Ventlock series 300 latches on each door. 2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible ducts shall be used for connecting air terminal devices in high pressure systems, or for connecting air distribution devices in low pressure duct systems. Generally, flex duct shall not exceed 3-feet 0-inch in length or have more than 90 degrees of bend. At each vertical elbow, provide and install a F1exRIGHT or equal durable elbow support. Flexible duct shall be a factory -fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiberglass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4-inch-thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M-KE for low-pressure application. 2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3 inches between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1-inch slack in the flexible material itself. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 40 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 40 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. The material shall be of a vinyl coated woven nylon/polyester blend base fabric, 22 oz. per square yard, meeting NFPA 90A and B for flame spread and smoke developed. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. The material shall be equal to Excelon Fabric as manufactured by Duro-Dyne. 2.9 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. Provide zero leak press on fitting that is constructed with fully welded seams and has elastomer bushings to accompany damper hardware. Fittings are to be equipped with an adjustable spring - loaded locking mechanism standoff. Approved manufacturers — Elgen Manufacturing. 2.10 FIRE DAMPERS A. Weighted fire dampers having bronze bearings and held open by fusible links shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association as published in NFPA Bulletin 90A and applicable ordinances and the Building Code. All fire dampers shall have Underwriters' Laboratory labels. B. Specifically, fire dampers shall be provided at the points indicated on the drawings, where a duct penetrates a fire rated partition and where a duct penetrates the roof, ceiling, floor or other areas requiring a fire rated separation. They shall also be installed at any other location as required by applicable codes. Provide access panels in the duct and access doors in the ceiling or wall to service and test the damper. Access doors with vision panes shall be furnished with wire glass. C. Furnish fire dampers with fusible links rated for 160 degrees F unless indicated otherwise. Fire dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel and rated at 1-1/2 hours for partitions and floors rated up to 2 hours, and 3-hour rating for use in partitions and floors rated up to 4 hours unless noted otherwise. Blades shall be of the interlocking type, those in high pressure duct shall be 100 percent free area and out of the air stream. Fire dampers shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting as required and shall be furnished with factory fabricated sleeve minimum of two gauges heavier than connecting ductwork. D. Fire dampers in low-pressure duct shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 150A. Fire dampers in ceiling air distribution outlets shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 400. 2.11 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER A. Furnish and install a combination fire/smoke damper in all ducts penetrating fire/smoke partitions. Each combination fire and smoke damper shall meet all requirements specified elsewhere for fire dampers and additionally shall include an operating shaft which, when rotated 90 degrees, causes damper to operate between closed and open. Operating shaft and damper combination shall be suitable for linking to and operation by a damper operator. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be Ruskin type FSD-36, Class II, 250 deg. F., 10 CFM/SF leakage at 1-inch SP for low pressure applications and Ruskin type FSD-60, Class I, airfoil blade, 4 CFM/SF at 1-inch SP for high pressure applications. B. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be furnished complete with factory sleeve and damper operator factory installed on exterior of sleeve and properly linked to damper operating shaft. Actuator shall be of the spring return fail closed type that will close damper upon power interruption. Damper operators shall be UL listed as fire damper operators and bear the UL label for such. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked into blade edge (adhesive or clip -on seals not acceptable). C. The smoke damper shall close on a signal from the fire alarm system or from the operator of a smoke detector. D. Provide access doors with ductports in the duct and a ceiling access door if necessary for servicing the damper and actuator. 2.12 ACCESS PANEL 234000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 40 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. 2.13 DUCTPORTS A. Provide Airsan "Ductports" where specified or shown on the drawings. Also provide a ductport, visible thru the ceiling access door or panel, at each fire and smoke damper in high-pressure duct, located so that the damper can be viewed without opening the duct access. All ductports shall be constructed of wired, tempered glass. B. Ductports shall be gasketed airtight. In exhaust or return ducts the 12-inch square glass pane may be single thickness tempered glass. In all other locations it shall be double glazed. In all cases, glass in duct ports shall be wire glazing. 2.14 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. Door grilles shall be factory finished in baked enamel medium birch tan. All other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of four screws. C. Where perforated supply grilles are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable. D. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Nailor, Titus, Price, Metal -Aire or Krueger will be acceptable. PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 23 40 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 40 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 50 00 HANGARS AND SUPPORTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 23 50 00 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Hanger Rods and Hanger Spacing. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4 Inches and Larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3 Inches and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3 Inches and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4 Inches and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 Hanger Refrigerant Pipe 102 Hanger Glass Pipe 375 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Saddles Steel Lines On Rollers 71, 1710, 1712, 172, 173 Cone. Inserts New Construction 185 Rollers Steel Piping 161,272 Pipe Clamps 2 Inches and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3 Inches and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or Size of Cast Iron FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 50 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 50 00 HANGARS AND SUPPORTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Copper Tube Supported Pipe Supported 3/8-Inch 2-1/2-inch and smaller 3-inch and smaller '/2-Inch 3-inch and 4-inch 4-inch through 6-inch 5/8-Inch 5-inch through 8-inch 8-inch through 10-inch 3/4-Inch 10 inches and larger 12 inches and larger 2.3 HANGER SPACING A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4-inch and smaller 5 1 inch through 1-1/2 inches 7 2 inches and larger 10 All cast iron lines 5 (Minimum two per joint) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10-foot 0-inch on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 4 inches, verify the joist strength before installation. G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances shall be acceptable as hanger material. 235000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 50 00 HANGARS AND SUPPORTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT I. Hangers supporting insulated lines which are specified to be finished with a vapor seal shall be fitted outside the insulation. The insulation or horizontal lines shall be protected by low compression insulation shields. On all pipes the shields shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or rolled 14 gauge galvanized. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they encompass the bottom of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical lines there shall be two shields of the same type full encompassing the pipe at each clamp. Shields shall be secured with a 3/4-inch wide lacquered steel band at each end. J. Horizontal piping subject to expansion due to temperature above 180 degrees F shall be supported on roller hangers. Where the line is supported from overhead, hangers shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 272 with two locknuts on the hanger rod to allow for proper leveling of the line. Lines supported from elbow shall be supported using Fee and Mason Fig. 161 adjustable pipe roll stands set on and attached to support framing members. Roller hangers shall be sized to allow for increased sizes due to pipe covering. K. On all insulated lines four inches and larger and where roller supports are used on piping systems, install pipe covering protective saddles so that the load of the pipe line will be transmitted directly to the rollers without damage to the insulation. 3.2 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES A. Where pipes specified under different sections may possibly be racked on the same supporting structure, each trade shall cooperate with the others involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation. B. Any other special hangers and supports shall be provided and installed as indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere herein or required by conditions at the site. 3.3 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. 3.4 PRE -FABRICATED EQUIPMENT MOUNTING SUPPORTS A. Provide ThyCurb equipment mounting supports or approved equal of 18 ga. galvanized construction with continuously welded corner seams and a 3-inch cant, supports to be internally reinforced with a factory installed wood nailer and 18 ga. counterflashing. Supports to be a minimum of 8-inch above the finished roof and of the style and design to mate the roof deck. B. Supports shall be level at the top, with pitch built into supports where roof slopes 3/8 of an inch per foot or more and supports must have certified load bearing data. Supports must span a minimum of 2 joists and more if equipment length requires it. Supports to be used for all roof mounted equipment, HVAC units, condensing units and roof mounted piping. 3.5 PREFABRICATED ROOF MOUNTED PIPING SUPPORTS A. Provide rigid polycarbonate resin pipe supports with rigid Teflon roller equal to Miro Pillow block pipe stands. Use Model 02 for pipes less than 2 inches, Model 24-R for pipes 2 inches to 4 inches and Model 48-R for 5 inches and above. Mop pipe stands to roof on built-up roofs, set in plastic cement for other types of roofs. END OF SECTION 23 50 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 50 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 55 00 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 100%, Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 23 55 00 - MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Identification and Labeling. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section applies to piping systems used to transport gases, liquids or semi -liquids. The term "piping systems", includes pipes, fittings, valves and pipe coverings located either inside or outside the buildings. This identification scheme does not apply to piping systems buried in the ground. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Part 1910.144. B. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems - ANSI A 13.1 C. Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards - ANSI 253.1 1.5 METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION A. The primary identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. B. This identifying mark shall be supplemented by the use of a color code which will indicate the nature of the material carried in the system. Piping systems shall be placed, by the nature of their contents, in one of the basic groups listed below. Each group is assigned a predominant color range as noted. C. The entire exposed length of the piping system shall be painted by its proper color code to identify the system. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. Specialties shall be painted as specified for piping. D. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and ducts and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers similarly color coded and sized. E. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (Inch Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 55 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 55 00 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 8 to 10 2-1/2 Over 10 3-1/2 F. Colors: Exact colors shall conform to Owners Piping Identification Code. All numbers are PITTSBURGH: Piping Color Steam - 100 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Steam - 40 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Steam - 15 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Condensate - High Pressure Sunset Orange - 54-124 Condensate - Low Pressure Sunset Orange - 54-124 Condensate - Pump Return Sunset Orange - 54-124 Ducts - Supply and Return Safety Orange - 6-259 Hot and Chilled Water Supply and Return Spanish Blue - 1-346 Waste and Vent Flat Black - 54-198 Cold Water Vista Green - 6-256 Hot Water Rose Coral - 15P-27 Fire Lines and Gas (Nat.) Safety Red - 6-261 Air Lines Autumn Brown - 54-126 Equipment Pumps H and CH Water Seal Brown - 1-344 Converter Rose Coral - 15P-27 A.H. Unit, Generator Touch up as required H.W. Storage Tank Rose Coral - 15 P 27 Sump Pump, Water Pumps Safety Blue - 6-262 Controls Equipment Powder Blue - 4P-55 Copper Pipe Polish and lacquer Electrical Materials Grey Vacuum Lines Reef Brown - 95-6 (Color Guild) Gas (Natural) Safety Red - 6-261 1.6 IDENTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton P-250 tag with depressed, black filled numbers and letters identifying the service by letters and the number of the valve. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire. B. Furnish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize the valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall be neatly typed and mounted 23 55 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 55 00 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT under a glass pane in a suitable frame. These charts shall, in addition, list the various colors identifying the piping. 1.7 IDENTIFICATION OF UNDERGROUND LINES A. All lines installed underground shall have a 6-inch wide 0.004-inch thick color coded, permanent plastic tape buried above the pipe, approximately 12-inch below grade. The tape shall identify the pipe thus protected. 1.8 MARKING ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Lay -in Ceiling Panels: Use color coded thumb tacks neatly aligned in one corner of the panel to identify valves, fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc. The color code shall conform to the piping identification color code for valve access. The color shall be red for fire and smoke dampers. B. Stencil 1/2-inch high letters on concealed access doors to identify fire and smoke dampers. 1.9 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-1, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16-inch thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2-inch high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 23 55 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 55 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 60 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 23 60 00 - INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Vapor Barrier Jackets. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically accepted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier j ackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001- inch-thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame -resistant latex adhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. C. Where metal jackets are specified, they shall be 0.016-inch-thick No. 5005 tempered aluminum secured with machine drawn 0.020-inch stainless steel bands. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 60 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 60 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Foster 85-60 or Childers CP-82 or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4-inch-wide band of vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. 1. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650" molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulation shall be 1-inch for lines 1.5 inches and smaller. Insulation shall be 1.5-inch thick for larger lines. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 2. Domestic Cold -Water Lines: All cold water lines throughout with those exceptions noted hereinbefore, shall be insulated with I -inch thick Manville "Micro-lok APT 650" molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied vapor barrier jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 3. Refrigeration Suction Piping: 1-inch Manville Type 11 "Aerotube" threaded onto piping during fabrication and sealed with adhesive. In VRF systems, both refrigerant lines shall be insulated as specified. All exterior refrigerant lines shall receive an additional covering of 0.016-inch- thick No. 5005 tempered aluminum secured with machine drawn 0.020-inch stainless steel bands. Provide metal jackets on exterior lines. 4. Horizontal Storm Drains and Downspouts: Insulate entirely as specified for domestic Cold- water lines. 5. Roof Drains: Insulate bodies of roof drain with one coat insulating cement to thickness of adjacent covering and cover with vapor barrier jacket of kraft paper and aluminum foil with glass fiber reinforcing fabric. Hubs shall be covered by building up layers of insulation until they are covered. The insulation shall overlap the adjacent insulation by a minimum of 2 inches, bevel the ends and seal with glass fiber reinforced vapor barrier asphaltic adhesive. 6. Duct Insulation: Refer to Section 'AIR DISTRIBUTION' for duct liner specification. Note that all exposed ductwork shall be lined. 7. Ducts concealed above ceilings: 236000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 60 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2-inch-thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with 3-inch- wide pressure sensitive foil type applied with moving pressure using an appropriate sealing tool. Staples shall be outward clinch, maximum 6-inch on center. Install with not more than 25 percent compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three-inch wide facing strip. d. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. END OF SECTION 23 60 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 60 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 23 70 00 - EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Motors, Motor Starters, Flue Vents, Water Heater, Hot Water Circulator, Fans, In - Line Centrifugal Fans, Filters, Variable Frequency Drives, Electric Heaters, Disposable Medium Efficiency Filters, and Rooftop Air Conditioning Units - Single Zone, and Ductless Split System Cooling Only with Wall Mounted Indoor Unit B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity PART 2 - PRODUCTS h-WENIMu [DTI I "t I A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 70 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 2. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40-degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40-degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85 percent or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS A. Except where starters are shown integral to motor control centers (see electrical drawings), the Divisions 21, 22, and 23 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specified under Divisions 2122, and 23. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. All starters shall be combination starter/disconnect devices, and shall include control transformers, hand -off -auto switches, and pilot lights. B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. H. Provide all three phase starters with solid state overloads which provide protection against single- phase events. I. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. J. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on -off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.3 FLUE VENTS A. Provide and install flue vents on all gas burning devices including water heaters, unit heaters and furnaces. B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other required fittings and shall terminate 24 inches above the roof in a ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to "a Breidert Air-X-Hauster. Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be provided with a separation in accordance with the 237000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT standards of the NFPA. All vents shall be flashed and counterflashed into the roofing construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be watertight. 2.4 WATER HEATER A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall be a glass lined, jacketed, insulated package water heater. B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable thermostatic control, gas pressure regulator and all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety pilot designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame is extinguished. C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure relief valve, with a drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable codes. D. Gas fired water heaters shall bear the ASME Stamp and shall be installed in accordance with the Boiler Code if the capacity is 120 gallons or more, or the input is 200,000 BTUH or more. Specifically, 2 feet of clearance is required on all sides, and 4 feet of clearance is required above the heater. E. Refer to drawings for capacities. 2.5 HOT WATER CIRCULATOR A. The contractor shall furnish and install an all bronze in -line circulator as shown on the drawings. The pump shall be Bell and Gossett Model No. PR- 1-1/4, or approved equal, with a capacity of 10 GPM at 15 ft. head when directly driven by a 1/6 HP self -aligning flexible coupled oil -lubricated motor, 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase, 1750 RPM. The pump shall be suitable for 125 lb. working pressure. B. The pump shall have a ground and polished steel shaft with integral thrust collar. The shaft shall be supported by two horizontal sleeve bearings designed to circulate oil. The pump is to be equipped with a watertight seal to prevent leakage. Mechanical seal faces to be carbon on ceramic. The motor shall be non -overloading at any point on pump curve. C. The motor shall be of the open, drip -proof, sleeve -bearing, quiet -operating, rubber -mounted construction. Motors shall have built-in thermal overload protectors. D. The pump shall be supported such that the weight of the pump is not carried by the adjoining pipe. E. Provide a manual starter and aquastat to cycle the pump on a 20-degree F. temperature drop. 2.6 FANS A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Fans shall have factory -applied finish. I. Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 70 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.7 IN -LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Fan shall be belt driven inline type. The square shaped fan housing shall be of heavy gauge formed steel. One of the sides shall be hinged and shall support the entire drive assembly and wheel allowing the assembly to swing out for cleaning, inspection, or service without dismantling the unit in any way. The motor shall be mounted on the hinged side, exterior and isolated from the air stream. The belt and pillow block ball bearings shall be protected from the air stream by an enclosure. The shaft shall be keyed to both the wheel and pulley. B. The fan inlet shall be spun venturi throat overlapped by a backward curved centrifugal wheel with spun cone for maximum performance. C. Fans shall be Greenheck Model SQB. D. Power Roof Ventilators: 1. All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted. 2. Unless scheduled otherwise, all exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels. 3. All fans shall have backdraft dampers and bird screens. 4. Refer to the drawings for special requirements. 5. Curbs shall be factory -fabricated and furnished with the unit. 6. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Jenn Aire Products Co. or Greenheck. 2.8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Description: 1. This specification is to cover a complete Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) consisting of a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter designed for use with both asynchronous and permanent magnet motors. 2. The drive manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary options as specified. All drives installed on this project shall be from the same manufacturer and have a common user interface (control panel). Drives that are manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. 3. This specification is intended to supplement a drive schedule. The drive schedule identifies the optimized BOM for the project and includes quantity, size, voltage, enclosure rating, options, and harmonic mitigation requirements of the drives. IEEE 519-2014 is an electrical system standard for harmonic mitigation and not intended to be applied to an individual piece of equipment. Drives are only one of many sources of harmonics, thus verification of system IEEE 519-2014 compliance is beyond the VFD manufacturer's scope. The FOR (Engineer of Record) is responsible for conducting an electrical system study and verifying the drive schedule has specified proper harmonic mitigation for the drives. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Referenced Standards and Guidelines: a. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) IEEE 519-2014 237000-4 b. Underwriters Laboratories (as appropriate) UL 508, 508A, 508C, UL 61800, 61800-5-1, 61800-5-2, UL 1995 C. The Association of Electrical Equipment and Medical Imaging Manufacturers (NEMA) NEMA ICS 7-2014, Adjustable Speed Drives d. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) ENJEC 61800 e. National Electric Code (NEC) NEC 430.120, Adjustable -Speed Drive Systems FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT f. CSA Group CSA C22.2 No. 274 g. International Building Code (IBC) IBC 2018 Seismic — referencing ASCE 7-16 and ICC AC- 156 2. Qualifications: a. Drives shall be UL labeled as a complete assembly. The base VFD shall be UL listed for 100 kA SCCR when installed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines. b. The base drive shall be CE and meet EN 61800-3 for the First Environment restricted distribution (Category C2). C. The base drive shall be seismically certified per 2018 International Building Code (IBC) with a seismic importance factor of 1.5, and minimum 2.5 SDS rating. Seismic certification of equipment and components shall also be provided by OSHPD preapproval. d. The base drive shall be SEMI-F47 certified. The drive must tolerate voltage sags to 50 percent for up to 0.2 seconds, sags to 70 percent for up to 0.5 seconds, and sags to 80 percent for up to one second. e. Acceptable Manufacturers 1) ABB ACH Series. 2) Alternate manufacturer's requests shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval at least 20 working days prior to bid. Approval does not relieve the supplier of specification requirements. C. Submittals: Submittals shall include the following information: 1. Outline dimensions, conduit entry locations and weights. Customer connection and power wiring diagrams. 2. OSHPD preapproval, seismic certification and installation requirements where applicable. 3. Complete technical product description with complete list of options provided. Any portions of this specification not met must be clearly indicated or the supplier and contractor shall be liable to provide all additional components required to meet this specification. D. Variable Frequency Drives: 1. The drive package as specified herein and defined on the drive schedule shall be enclosed in a UL Type enclosure. 2. The drive shall provide full rated output from a line of +10 percent to -15 percent of nominal voltage across an ambient temperature range of -15 to 40 deg. C (5 to 104 deg. F). 3. All drives shall utilize the same Advanced Control Panel (keypad) user interface. a. Plain English text 1) The display shall be in complete English words for programming and fault diagnostics. 2) Safety interlock and run permissive status shall be displayed using predetermined application specific nomenclature, such as: Damper end switch or vibration trip. Customized terms, such as: AHU-1 End Switch or CT-2 Vibration shall also be available. b. The control panel shall include at minimum the followings controls: 1) Four navigation keys (Up, Down, Left, Right) and two soft keys. 2) Hand -Off -Auto selection, Fault Reset, and manual speed control. 3) A Help key shall include assistance for programming and troubleshooting. C. There shall be a built-in time clock in the control panel with 10-year battery backup. d. I/O Summary display with a single screen shall indicate and provide: 1) The status/values of all analog inputs, analog outputs, digital inputs, and relay outputs. 2) The function of all analog inputs, analog outputs, digital inputs, and relay outputs. 3) The ability to force all inputs and outputs to either a high, low, or specific value. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 70 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 237000-6 e. The drive shall automatically backup parameters to the control panel. The drive shall allow two additional unique manual backup parameter sets to be stored. f. The control panel shall be removable, capable of remote mounting. g. The drive shall be able to support a Bluetooth Advanced Control Panel. The Bluetooth control panel shall be FCC and QDL (Qualified Design Listing) certified. 1) free app (iOS and Android) shall replicate the control panel on a mobile device or tablet. The control panel's programming and control functionality shall function on the device. Customizing text, such as AHU-1 End Switch, shall be supported by the device's keyboard. 2) Bluetooth connectivity shall allow uploading, downloading, and emailing of parameters. 3) Bluetooth connectivity shall include two pairing modes: Always discoverable with a fixed passcode, and manual discovery with a unique generated passcode every pairing. 4. All drives shall have the following hardware features/characteristics as standard: a. Two (2) programmable analog inputs, two (2) programmable analog outputs, six (6) programmable digital inputs, and three (3) programmable Form-C relay outputs. b. The drive shall include an isolated USB port for interface between the drive and a laptop. C. An auxiliary power supply rated at 24 VDC, 250 mA shall be included. d. At a minimum, the drives shall have internal impedance equivalent to 5 percent to reduce the harmonics to the power line. 5 percent impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC link) chokes, or AC line reactor. Drives with only one DC link choke shall add an AC line choke integral to the drive enclosure. Reference the drive schedule to determine if additional harmonic mitigation is required for the system to comply with IEEE 519-2014. e. The drive shall have variable speed primary cooling fans. f. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110 percent of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes, 130 percent overload for 2 seconds every minute. g. The input current rating of the drive shall not be greater than the output current rating. h. Circuit boards shall be coated per IEC 60721-3-3; Chemical gasses Class 3C2 and Solid particles Class 3S2. i. Coordinated AC transient surge protection system consisting of 4 MOVs (phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground), a capacitor clamp, and internal chokes. The MOVs shall comply with UL 1449 4th Edition. j. The drive shall include a robust DC bus to provide short term power -loss ride through. An inertia -based ride through function should help maintain the DC bus voltage during power loss events. Drives with control power ride through only, are not acceptable. 5. All drives shall have the following software features as standard: a. A Fault Logger that stores the last 16 faults in non-volatile memory. The most recent 5 faults save at least 9 data points, including but not limited to: Time/date, frequency, DC bus voltage, motor current, DI status, temperature, and status words. b. An Event Logger that stores the last 16 warnings or events that occurred, in non-volatile memory. Events shall include, but not limited to: Warning messages, checksum mismatch, run permissive open, start interlock open, and automatic reset of a fault. C. Programmable start methods: Flying -start, Normal -start, and Brake -on -start. d. Programmable loss -of -load (broken belt / coupling) indication. This function to include a programmable time delay to eliminate false loss -of -load indications. e. Motor heating function to prevent condensation build up in the motor. Motor heating adjustment, via parameter, shall be in "Watts." f. There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. g. Four separate start interlock (safety) inputs shall be provided. The control panel will display the specific safety(s) that are open. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT h. The drive shall include a switching frequency control circuit that reduces the switching frequency based on actual drive temperature. It shall be possible to set a minimum and a target switching frequency. i. The ability to automatically restart after non -critical faults. j. PID functionality shall be included in the drive. k. Drive shall be compatible with an accessory that allows the control board to be powered from an external 24 VDC/VAC source. 1. A computer -based software tool shall be available to allow a laptop to program the drive. The drive shall be able to support programming without the need for line voltage. All necessary power shall be sourced via the laptop USB port. M. The drive shall include a fireman's override mode. 6. Security Features: a. The drive manufacture shall clearly define cybersecurity capabilities for their products. b. The drive shall include password protection against parameter changes. There shall be multiple levels of password protection including: End User, Service, Advanced, and Override. C. A checksum feature shall be used to notify the owner of unauthorized parameter changes made to the drive. d. The "Hand" and "Off' control panel buttons shall have the option to be individually disabled (via parameter) for drives mounted in public areas. 7. Network Communications: a. The drive shall have an EIA-485 port with removable terminal blocks. The onboard protocols shall be BACnet MS/TP, Modbus, and Johnson Controls N2. Optional communication cards for BACnet/IP and LonWorks shall be available. b. The drive shall have the ability to communicate via two protocols at the same time, one onboard protocol and one option card -based protocol. C. The drive shall not require a power cycle after communication parameters have been updated. d. The embedded BACnet connection shall be a MS/TP interface. The drive shall be BTL Listed to Revision 14 or later. 8. Disconnect — A circuit breaker or disconnect switch shall be provided when indicated on the drive schedule. The disconnect shall be door interlocked and padlockable. Drive input fusing shall be included on all packaged units that include a disconnecting means. All disconnect configurations shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label. 9. Bypass — Bypass drive packages shall be provided when indicated on the drive schedule. All drive/bypass configurations shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label. a. The drive and bypass package shall be a complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of a padlockable disconnect device, drive output contactor, bypass contactor, and drive input fuses. b. The bypass control shall be powered by a three-phase switch mode power supply with a voltage tolerance of +30 percent, -35 percent. Single-phase power supplies and control power transformers (CPT) are not acceptable. C. The drive and bypass package shall be seismic certified and labeled to the IBC with a seismic importance factor of 1.5. Seismic certification shall include OSHPD preapproval. d. All bypass packages shall utilize an LCD bypass control panel (keypad) user interface. The bypass control panel must be a separate display from the drive control panel. e. All bypasses shall have the following hardware features/characteristics as standard: 1) Six (6) digital inputs and five (5) Form-C relay outputs. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 70 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2) Drive isolation fuses shall be provided. Bypass designs which have no such fuses, or that only incorporate fuses common to both the drive and the bypass are not acceptable. 3) The bypass shall be able to detect a single-phase input power condition while running in bypass, disengage the motor, and provide a single-phase input power indication. 4) The bypass shall be designed for stand-alone operation and be completely functional in both Hand and Automatic modes, even if the drive and/or drive's control board has failed. £ All bypasses shall have the following software features as standard: 1) Programmable loss -of -load (broken belt / coupling) indication shall be functional in drive and bypass mode. 2) Run permissive and start interlock control functionality shall be functional in bypass mode. 3) The bypass control shall monitor the status of the drive and bypass contactors and indicate when there is a welded contactor contact or open contactor coil. 4) The bypass shall include a selection for either manual or automatic transfer to bypass. 5) The drive and bypass shall be designed to operate as an integrated system when in Override mode. There shall be four selectable Override modes: Bypass only, drive only, drive then transfer -to -bypass upon fault, and force to stop. g. Network communications — the bypass shall include BACnet MS/TP, Modbus, and Johnson Controls N2 as standard. Optional communication cards for BACnet/IP and LonWorks shall be available. E. Installation: 1. The responsible party shall install the drive-in accordance with the drive's installation manual. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with national, state and local building and electrical codes. F. Start -Up: Start-up shall be provided for each drive by an authorized local service provider. G. Product Support: 1. Factory trained support personnel shall be locally available at both the specifying and installation locations. A toll free 24/365 technical support line connected to factory support personnel located in the US and Canada shall be available. 2. Training shall include installation, programming and operation of the drive, bypass and network communications. Owner training shall be provided locally upon request. H. Warranty: The drive Product Warranty shall be 30 months from the date of shipment from the factory. The warranty shall include: Parts, on -site labor, and travel time and travel costs, or replacement of the complete drive as determined by the drive manufacturer's technical support. 2.9 FILTERS A. Provide all filters specified herein and/or scheduled or shown on the drawings. All filters shall be erected in holding frames, tight fitting, with no bypass path. B. All filters of every type shall be UL listed Class I or II. C. Every air -handling device which supplies air to any space shall have a filter bank. No., size, and type of filters, shall be as scheduled on the drawings. D. All frames shall be fitted with new media at final acceptance. In addition, provide 100 percent spare filters. 2.10 MAGNAHELIC GAUGES 237000-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Provide and install a Dwyer model 2002, 0-2-inch water column differential pressure gauge across every filter bank. Unit shall have 0.05-inch minor divisions. Provide copper tubing to each side of the filter bank. Mount the gauge to the filter housing, adjacent duct, or air handling unit. 2.11 DISPOSABLE MEDIUM EFFICIENCY FILTERS A. Filters shall be medium efficiency (30-35 percent based on ASHRAE 52-68) at a velocity of 500 FPM. Media shall be pleated, non -woven reinforced cotton fabric supported by a welded wire grid with 95 percent open area. Frame shall be heavy-duty waterproof chipboard. Filter shall have not less than 4.5 square feet of media per foot of face area. Filters shall be equal to Farr 30/30 series. 2.12 ELECTRIC HEATERS A. Furnish and install as shown on the drawings the recessed electric wall heaters. The heaters shall be 2000 watt, 240 volts, single phase rated at 6826 BTUH. The heating elements shall be totally enclosed corrosion resistant. The unit shall have a 16-gage louvered steel grille, permanently lubricated impedance protected motor, integral disconnect, and front panel mounted thermostat with "off' position. Wall heaters shall be equivalent to Markel No. 3422-T. 2.13 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS - SINGLE ZONE A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete summer -winter rooftop mounted air conditioning units as shown and scheduled on the drawings and as herein specified. Lennox, Carrier, General Electric or Trane units will be acceptable. Units must be of the same manufacture as indicated on the nameplate. B. Equipment: Each basic unit shall be completely factory assembled and test ran before shipment. Roof mounting frame and thermostat shall be separately furnished and installed on this job. C. The size of the complete unit shall not exceed those indicated on the scale drawings. If supply and return air connections require duct modifications from that shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall submit revised drawings for the Architect's review before installation. D. All electrical components shall carry the Underwriters' Laboratories Label. E. Cabinet Construction: All components of each unit shall be contained in a single weatherproof casing. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. Exterior panels shall have a durable finish coat of outdoor acrylic enamel. Basic unit shall occupy the entire roof curb assembly. F. All exterior panels of the conditioned air portion of each unit shall be lined with 1-inch-thick fiberglass insulation. In addition, the entire bottom of the unit shall be insulated with fiberglass. G. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1/2-inch mesh galvanized wire screen. H. Heating Section: Natural gas heating capacity as scheduled on the drawings shall be furnished in the unit. Burners using 100 percent secondary air shall be furnished and operation shall not be affected by wind or atmospheric conditions. Burners shall have dual limits and 100 percent safety shut-off. High voltage ignition and re -ignition and all necessary operating and safety controls shall be furnished. Standing pilots are not acceptable. Heat exchangers on all sizes of units shall be constructed of aluminized steel. 1. Entire unit shall be AGA approved for firing with entering air at any temperature. J. Heat exchanger shall be warranted for a period of ten years. K. Cooling Section: The cooling method shall be direct expansion coils with mechanical refrigeration. Coils shall have copper tubes with aluminum fins. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the plans. Provide crankcase heaters and safety protection for low suction and overcurrent. Units three tons and larger shall have expansion valves. L. The cooling system shall be rated according to ARI standard 210. System shall be fully charged with refrigerant. Compressors shall be warranted for five (5) years. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 70 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT M. Damper Section: An automatically controlled, multi -position interconnected system for handling outside air, return air and exhaust air shall be included in each unit, with mixed air thermostat and multi -position motor. N. This system of dampers shall maintain a positive relationship between each element so that all dampers move in unison, when required amounts of outside and return air are supplied. An exhaust -relief damper shall be included. O. All damper linkage for this system shall be adjustable. P. All damper blade bearings shall be made of a permanently lubricated corrosion -proof plastic material. Q. Outside air intakes shall employ rain eliminator louvers. R. Damper blades shall be lined with urethane foam to provide a tight seal and quiet operation. S. Filter Section: Filters shall be factory furnished with each unit. Filter media shall be 1-inch-thick fiberglass or polyurethane. Outside and return air shall be separately filtered. Separate filters may be factory supplied or field fabricated. Each unit shall have a separately filtered minimum fresh air intake complete with hood and screen. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 400 FPM. T. Blowers: Each unit shall be equipped with forward curved blower wheels. Units up thru 5 tons cooling capacity shall have direct driven blowers with PSC multi -speed motors, or belt driven blowers. Units with over 5 tons cooling capacity shall have belt driven blowers. The belt tension shall be easily adjustable. U. Vibration Isolation: The refrigeration compressors and the indoor fan system shall have rotating parts spring isolated from the unit cabinet to minimize transmission of vibration. Fan motors 1/2 HP and under shall be resiliently mounted. The condenser fan motors, and the combustion air fan motors shall be resiliently mounted. V. Temperature Controls: Temperature controls shall be furnished as standard by the unit manufacturer. Thermostats shall be touchscreen programmable thermostats. Programmable thermostats shall be equal to Honeywell VisionPRO 8000 series TB8220 commercial thermostat with touchscreen LCD screen. Features shall include large backlit digital display and touchscreen interaction. Unit shall be equipped with real time clock with battery backup during power failures and automatic compensation for daylight savings time. Unit shall be capable of seven-day program with intuitive, menu -driven, on -screen programming. Unit shall include Heat - Cool - Auto feature for compliance with International Energy Conservation Code. Unit shall include multiple HOLD options to temporarily override programming. Unit shall control within one degree Fahrenheit. Unit shall be equipped with up to three heat and two cool stages and shall be heat -pump compatible. Coordinate stages and heat - pump compatibility with equipment served by each thermostat. Unit shall carry a 5-year warranty. W. Condensate Pan: Furnish and install a full-size schedule 40 vented PVC trap from the condensate drain pan from each unit. The trap shall spill into a 24-inch x 24-inch x 3-inch deep 18-gauge galvanized iron pan set in plastic cement on the roof. X. Roof Mounting Frame: 1. A 13-inch-high galvanized roof mounting frame supplied by the unit manufacturer shall be furnished and installed for the unit. 2. This frame shall include a 2-inch x 4-inch nailer secured to the sides to facilitate flashing. 3. This frame shall exactly fit the unit and shall be approved by the National Roofing Contractors Association. 4. This frame shall be set level and squared according to the manufacturer's instructions and secured to the building as detailed on the plans. 5. All connections to the unit shall be made from bottom within the confines of the frame. 2.14 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM COOLING ONLY WITH WALL MOUNTED INDOOR UNIT A. System Description: The Air Conditioner system shall be a Mitsubishi Electric split system with Variable Speed Inverter Compressor technology. The system shall consist of a horizontal discharge, single phase outdoor unit, a matched capacity indoor section that shall be equipped with a wired wall mounted, wireless wall mounted and/or wireless handheld remote controller. 23 70 00 - 10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT B. Outdoor Unit Capacity: Model Numbers Cooling BTU/h PUY-A 12NHA4 12,000 PUY-A 18NHA4 18,000 PUY-A24NHA4 24,000 PUY-A30NHA4 30,000 PUY-A36NHA4 33,500/34,000 PUY-A42NHA4 42,000 C. Quality Assurance: 1. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and shall bear the ETL label. 2. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.) and local codes as required. 3. The units shall be rated in accordance with Air-conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute's (AHRI) Standard 210 and bear the ARI Certification label. 4. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO 14001, which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). 5. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the indoor section. 6. The outdoor unit shall be pre -charged with R-410a refrigerant for 70 feet (20 meters) of refrigerant tubing - PUY-42NHA4 for 100 feet (30 meters) of refrigerant tubing 7. System efficiency shall meet or exceed SEER values below: When used with Indoor Unit Minimum SEER PCA Ceiling Suspended Type 14.4 PEA / PEAD Ducted Type 13.8 PKA Wall Mounted Type 14.0 PLA Ceiling Recessed Cassette Type 13.5 D. Delivery, Storage and Handling: 1. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. The controller shall be shipped separately and shall be able to withstand 105°F storage temperatures and 95 percent relative humidity without adverse effect. E. Warranty: 1. The units shall have a manufacturer's parts and defects warranty for a period five (5) year from date of installation. The compressor shall have a warranty of seven (7) years from date of installation. If, during this period, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in workmanship or material, it shall be replaced or repaired at the discretion of the manufacturer. This warranty does not include labor. 2. Manufacturer shall have over thirty (30) years of continuous experience in the U.S. market. F. Outdoor Unit Design: 1. The outdoor unit shall be compatible with the four different types of indoor units (PCA - ceiling suspending, PEA / PEAD — ducted, PKA - wall mounted and PLA - four-way recessed ceiling cassette). The connected indoor unit shall be of the same capacity as the outdoor unit. Option: Indoor unit Twinning is allowed as described in 2. below. 2. Models PUY-A24NHA4 and PUY-A36NHA4 shall have the option to connect to two, one- half capacity, indoor units (PKA, PEA and/or PLA type), within the same confined space, to improve air distribution (total combined indoor unit capacity shall be equal to that of the outdoor unit). FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 70 00 - 11 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with an electronic control board that interfaces with the indoor unit to perform all necessary operation functions. 4. The outdoor unit shall be capable of cooling operation down to 0°F (-18°C) ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls (optional wind baffle shall be required). 5. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of 100 feet (30 meters) between indoor and outdoor units. 6. System shall operate at up to a maximum refrigerant tubing length of 100 feet (30 meters) for the 12,000 and 18,000 and 165 feet (50 meters) for the 24,000, 30,000, 36,000, and 42,000 BTU/h units between indoor and outdoor units without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil. Models PUY-Al2/18/24/30/36NHA4 shall be pre -charged for a maximum of 70 feet (20 meters) of refrigerant tubing — PUY-A42NHA4 for 100 feet (30 meters). 7. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory. 8. Outdoor unit sound level shall not exceed: Model Numbers Cooling PUY-Al2NHA4 46 dB(A) PUY-A18NHA4 48 dB(A) PUY-A24NHA4 48 dB(A) PUY-A30NHA4 48 dB(A) PUY-A36NHA4 48 dB(A) PUY-A42NHA4 51 dB(A) G. Cabinet: 1. The casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection and have a Munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1 finish. 2. Mounting feet shall be provided and shall be welded to the base of the cabinet and be of sufficient size to afford reliable equipment mount and stability. 3. Easy access shall be afforded to all serviceable parts by means of removable panel sections. 4. The fan grill shall be of ABS plastic. 5. Cabinet mounting and construction shall be sufficient to withstand 155 MPH wind speed conditions for use in Hurricane condition areas. Mounting, base support, and other installation to meet Hurricane Code Conditions shall be by others. H. Fan: 1. Models PUY-A 18/24/3 0/3 6NHA4 shall be furnished with a single DC fan motor. Model PUY- A42NHA4 shall have two (2) DC fan motors. 2. The fan blade(s) shall be of aerodynamic design for quiet operation, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. 3. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent external contact with moving parts I. Coil: 1. The L shaped condenser coil shall be of copper tubing with flat aluminum fins to reduce debris build up and allow maximum airflow. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. The installing contractor shall fabricate an expanded metal grate to attach to the wire guard. The expanded metal shall function as a hail guard. A hail guard sufficient to prevent damage to the outdoor unit in the event of a hailstorm shall be provided in the field. 237000-12 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of an electronic linear expansion valve (LEV) metering device. The LEV shall be controlled by a microprocessor - controlled step motor. 3. All refrigerant lines between outdoor and indoor units shall be of annealed, refrigeration grade copper tubing, ARC Type, meeting ASTM B280 requirements, individually insulated in twin - tube, flexible, closed -cell, CFC-free (ozone depletion potential of zero), elastomeric material for the insulation of refrigerant pipes and tubes with thermal conductivity equal to or better than 0.27 BTU-inch/hour per Sq Ft / °F, a water vapor transmission equal to or better than 0.08 Perm -inch and superior fire ratings such that insulation will not contribute significantly to fire and up to 1-inch thick insulation shall have a - Flame -Spread Index of less than 25 and a Smoke - development Index of less than 50 as tested by ASTM E 84 and CAN / ULC S-102. Compressor: 1. The compressor for models PUY-Al2/18/24/30/36NHA4 shall be a DC twin -rotor rotary compressor with Variable Speed Inverter Drive Technology. The compressor for model PUY- A42NHA4 shall be a Frame Compliant Scroll compressor with Variable Speed Inverter Drive Technology. 2. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load for significantly increasing the efficiency of the system which shall result in significant energy savings. 3. To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be automatically, intermittently applied to the compressor motor windings to maintain sufficient heat to vaporize any refrigerant. No crankcase heater is to be used. 4. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high-pressure safety switch. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. K. Electrical: 1. The electrical power of the unit shall be 208volts or 230 volts, single phase, 60 hertz. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187 volts to 253 volts. 2. Power for the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit via Mitsubishi Electric A - Control using three (3) fourteen (14) gauge AWG conductors plus ground wire connecting the units. 3. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit. 4. The control signal between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC. 5. The unit shall have Pulse Amplitude Modulation circuit to utilize 98 percent of input power supply. L. Operating Range: Operating Range Indoor Air Intake Temperature Outdoor Air Intake Temperature Cooling Maximum D.B. 95 deg. F (35 deg. C) W.B. 71 deg. D.B. 115 deg. F (46 deg. C) F (21.7 deg. C) Minimum D.B. 67 deg. F (19.4 deg. C) W.B. 57 D.B. 0°F (48 deg. C)* deg. F (13.9 deg. C) * Requires wind baffle — without wind baffle: D.B. 23 deg. F (-5 deg. C) M. Unit shall be able to provide 100 percent capacity when operating at 0 deg. F outdoor air temperature and a wind baffle is used. N. Indoor Unit Design: PKA Wall Mounted Type: The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring and internal piping, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit, in conjunction with the wired wall -mounted controller, wireless wall - mounted controller or wireless handheld controller, shall have a self -diagnostic function, 3-minute FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 70 00 - 13 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 237000-14 time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen before shipment from the factory. Wall Mounted Type Indoor Units Model Number Cooling Capacity PKA-A 12HA4 12,000 PKA-A 18HA4 18,000 PKA-A24KA4 24,000 PKA-A30KA4 30,000 PKA-A36KA4 34,200 1. Unit Cabinet: The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded plastic with smooth finish, flat front panel design with access for filter. Cabinet color shall be white — Munsell LOY 9.2/0.2. The unit shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied, pre -drilled, mounting plate. 2. Fan: The indoor unit fan shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct drive sirocco fan with a single motor. The fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds: Low, Mid, and Hi and Auto. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will adjust the fan speed based on the difference between controller set point and space temperature. Indoor unit sound level shall not exceed the levels below: Model Number Low Speed Mid Speed High Speed PKA-Al2HA4 36 dB(A) 40 dB(A) 43 dB(A) PKA-A18HA4 36 dB(A) 40 dB(A) 43 dB(A) PKA-A24KA4 39 dB(A) 42 dB(A) 45 dB(A) PKA-A30KA4 39 dB(A) 42 dB(A) 45 dB(A) PKA-A36KA4 43 dB(A) 46 dB(A) 49 dB(A) 3. Vane: There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a horizontal and downward direction for uniform air distribution. The horizontal vane shall significantly decrease downward air resistance for lower sound levels and shall close the outlet port when operation is stopped. There shall also be a set of vertical vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow movement. 4. Filter: Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter. 5. Coil: The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre -coated aluminum strake fins on copper tubing. The multi -angled heat exchanger shall have a modified fin shape that reduces air resistance for a smoother, quieter airflow. All tube joints shall be brazed with PhosCopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. An optional drain pan level switch (DPLS 1), designed to connect to the control board, shall be provided if required, and installed on the condensate pan to prevent condensate from overflowing. [Option: A condensate mini pump shall be provided to provide a means of condensate disposal when a gravity drain is not available.] 6. Electrical: The electrical power of the unit shall be 208 volts or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187 volts to 253 volts. The power to the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit, using the Mitsubishi Electric A -Control system. For A -Control, a three (3) conductor AWG-14 wire with ground shall provide power feed and bi-directional control transmission between the outdoor and indoor units. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 7. Performance: Each system shall perform in accordance with the ratings shown in the table below. Cooling performance shall be based on 80°F DB, 67°F WB (26.7°C DB, 19.4°C WB) for the indoor unit and 95°F DB, 75°F WB (35°C DB, 29.3°C WB) for the outdoor unit. System Model Number Cooling Capacity Btu/h TPW Cooling SEER CFM (Hi/Dry) PKA-Al2HA4 6,000 — 12,000 1,190 15.2 425 PKA-Al811A4 8,000 — 18,000 2,240 15.3 425 PKA-A24KA4 12,000 — 24,000 2,270 17.0 775 PKA-A30KA4 121000 — 30,000 4,130 15.5 775 PKA-A36KA4 12,000 — 34,200 5,030 14.0 920 TPW = Total Power Watts 8. System Control: The control system shall consist of a minimum of two (2) microprocessors, one on each indoor and outdoor unit, interconnected by a single non -polar two -wire cable. The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of monitoring return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from a wireless or wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit. The control signal between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC. Indoor units shall have the ability to control supplemental heat via connector CN152 and a 12 VDC output. a. The indoor unit control board shall have auxiliary control contact connectors to provide: Function / Model PCA PEA / PEAD PKA PLA CN-2L — Lossnay Control X X X X CN-24(152) Back-up Heat X X X X CN-32 — Remote Switch X X X X CN-51 — Central Control X X X X CN-105 —IT Terminal X X X X X = Included b. Remote Controllers: All remote controllers need to be ordered separately from the unit. Wired Remote Controller (PAR-21MAA): The Wired Remote Controller (PAR- 21MAA) shall be approximately 5-inch x 5-inch in size and white in color with a light - green LCD display. The PAR-21MAA shall support a selection from multiple languages (Spanish, German, Japanese, Chinese, English, Russian, Italian, or French) for display information. There shall be a built-in weekly timer with up to 8 pattern settings per day. The controller shall consist of an On/Off button, Increase/Decrease Set Temperature buttons, a Cool/Auto/Fan/Dry mode selector, a Timer Menu button, a Timer On/Off button, Set Time buttons, a Fan Speed selector, a Ventilation button, a Test Run button, and a Check Mode button. The controller shall have a built-in temperature sensor. Temperature shall be displayed in either Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C), and Temperature changes shall be by increments of 1°F (0.5°C). The PAR-21MAA shall have the capability of controlling up to a maximum of 16 systems, as a group with the same mode and set -point for all, at a maximum developed control cable distance of 1,500 feet (500 meters). FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 70 00 - 15 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 70 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT The control voltage from the wired controller to the indoor unit shall be 12/24 volts, DC. Field wiring shall run directly from the indoor unit to the wall mounted controller with no splices. Up to two wired controllers shall be able to be used to control one unit. The basic functions are: Wired Remote Controller PAR-21 MAA) Item Description Number of Units Controllable 16 units as 1 group ON/OFF Run and stop operation Operation Mode Switches between Cool/Dry/Auto/Fan/Heat. Temperature Setting Sets the setpoint temperature in the following range (Range and modes depend on Cool/Dry: 67 17-877 connected unit model) Heat: 63°F-83°F Auto: 67°F-83°F Fan Speed Setting Hi/Mid-2/Mid-1/Low/Auto (Range and modes depend on connected unit model) Air Flow Direction Setting Air flow direction angles 100 percent — 80 percent — 60 (Air flow direction settings percent — 40 percent, Swing. depend on the unit model) Weekly Scheduler ON/OFF/Temperature setting can be done up to 8 times one day in the week. The time can be set by the 1-minute interval. Operating Conditions Display Setpoint and room temperature. Sensing can be done at the remote controller or the indoor unit depending on the indoor unit dipswitch setting Liquid, discharge, indoor and outdoor pipe temperatures LEV opening pulses, sub cooling and discharge super heat Compressor Operating Conditions: Running current, frequency, input voltage, On/Off status and operating time Error When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed Ventilation Equipment Up to 16 indoor units can be connected to an interlocked system that has one LOSSNAY unit. LOSSNAY items that can be set are "Hi", "Low", and "Stop". Ventilation mode switching is not available. Auto Lock Out Function Setting/releasing of simplified locking for remote control buttons can be performed. • Locking of all buttons • Locking of all buttons except ON/OFF button PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 23 70 00 237000-16 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 80 00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 23 80 00 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. The contractor shall include in his bid an amount necessary to perform and submit a NEBB certified TAB report (submitted on NEBB forms). This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight -hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors, if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 80 00 - I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 80 00 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a document and submitted electronically. J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 23 80 00 238000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 23 90 00 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Scope: Provide labor, material, equipment, related services, and supervision required, including, but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, configuration and installation for complete building automation system (also identified as BMS, Direct Digital Control System For HVAC) including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software as required for the complete performance of the Work, as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein. The system shall be fully compatible with the existing Schneider Ecostruxure system installed at Citizen's Tower and other City of Lubbock buildings. Provide color graphics, alarms, and maintenance messages consistent with other buildings connected to the front-end. Demonstrate connectivity to the City of Lubbock maintenance area building automation system front end, with full functionality specified herein. B. UPS systems: Note that all control components, including the operator workstation and any field panels shall be equipped with Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS) to ride through short duration (30 minutes or less) of power interruption. C. Related Sections: Related sections include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Applicable general requirements for electrical Work specified within Divisions 23, and 26 Specification Sections apply to this Section. D. Network level components of the system — workstations, servers, etc. shall communicate using the BACnet protocol, as defined by ASHRAE Standard 135-2004. No gateways shall be used for communication to controllers furnished under this section. E. At a minimum, provide controls for the following: Rooftop Units and exhaust fans F. Except as otherwise noted, the control system shall consist of all necessary Ethernet Network Controllers, Standalone Digital Control Units, Room Controllers, workstations, software, sensors, transducers, relays, valves, dampers, damper operators, control panels, and other accessory equipment, along with a complete system of electrical interlocking wiring to fill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system. Except as otherwise specified, provide operators for equipment such as dampers if the equipment manufacturer does not provide these. Coordinate requirements with the various Contractors. G. The BAS system supplier shall review and study all HVAC drawings and the entire specification to familiarize themselves with the equipment and system operation and to verify the quantities and types of dampers, operators, alarms, etc. to be provided. H. All interlocking wiring, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the equipment listed below shall be provided under this Contract. When the BAS system is fully installed and operational, the BAS system supplier and representatives of the Owner will review and check out the system — see System Acceptance and Testing section of this document. At that time, the BAS system supplier shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications. I. Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of the system in coordination with the Owner's commissioning agent, HVAC Contractor, TAB Contractor and Owner's representative. J. All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with all governing codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, the Contractor, with guidance from the engineer, shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, the specification will govern. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT K. Related Sections: This Section includes the Building Management System (BMS) control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including open protocol control components for terminal heating and cooling units. Depending on the scope of the project, the complete specification may have numerous sections that interface to this section, including several from Divisions 26 and 28. 1.2 REFERENCES A. General, Code Compliance: The code listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The codes are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the referenced code shall be the latest date as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified. 1. Provide BAS components and ancillary equipment, which are UL-916 listed and labeled. 2. All equipment or piping used in conditioned air streams, spaces or return air plenums shall comply with NFPA 90A Flame/Smoke/Fuel contribution rating of 25/50/0 and all applicable building codes or requirements. 3. All wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code. 4. All smoke dampers shall be rated in accordance with UL 555S. 5. Comply with FCC rules, Part 15 regarding Class A radiation for computing devices and low power communication equipment operating in commercial environments. 6. Comply with FCC, Part 68 rules for telephone modems and data sets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unless specifically defined within the Contract Documents, the words or acronyms contained within this specification shall be as defined within, or by the references listed within this specification, the Contract Documents, or, if not listed by either, by common industry practice. 1. Standard: a. ASHRAE: American Society Heating, Refrigeration, Air Conditioning Engineers b. AHU: Air Handling Unit C. BACnet: Building Automation Controls Network d. BMS: Building Management System e. DDC: Direct Digital Control f. EIA: Electronic Industries Alliance g. GUI: Graphical User Interface h. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning i. IEEE: Institute Electrical Electronic Engineers j. MER: Mechanical Equipment Room k. PID: Proportional, Integral, Derivative 1. VAV: Variable Air Volume Box 2. Communications and protocols: a. ARP: Address Resolution Protocol b. BACnet: Building Automation and Control Networks C. CORBA: Common Object Request Broker Architecture d. CSMA/CD: Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect e. DDE: Dynamic Data Exchange f. FTP: File Transfer Protocol g. FTT: Free Topology Transceivers h. HTTP: Hyper Text Transfer Protocol i. HOP: Internet Inter -ORB Protocol j. IP: Internet Protocol k. LAN: Local Area Network 1. LON: Echelon Communication — Local Operating Network 239000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT in. MS/TP: Master Slave Token Passing n. OBIX: Open Building Information Exchange o. ODBC: Open Database Connectivity p. ORB: Object Request Broker q. SNVT: Standard Network Variables Types r. SQL: Structured Query Language S. UDP: User Datagram Protocol t. XML: eXtensible Markup Language Controllers: a. ASD: Application Specific Device b. AAC: Advanced Application Controller C. ASC: Application Specific Controller d. CAC: Custom Application Controller e. DCU: Distributed Control Unit f. HRC: Hotel Room Controller g. LCM: Local Control Module h. MC: MicroControllers i. MPC: Multi -purpose Controller j. NSC: Network Server Controller lc. PEM: Package Equipment Module 1. PPC: Programmable Process Controller in. RC: Room controller n. RPC: Room Purpose Controller o. SDCU: Standalone Digital Control Units p. SLC: Supervisory Logic Controller q. UEC: Unitary Equipment Controller r. VAVDDC: Variable Air Volume Direct Digital Controller 4. Tools and Software: a. AFDD: Automated Fault Detection and Diagnostic b. APEO: Automated Predictive Energy Optimization C. DR: Demand Response d. CCDT: Configuration, Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool e. BPES: BACnet Portable Engineering Station f. LPES: LON Portable Engineering Station g. POT: Portable Operator's Terminal h. PEMS: Power and Energy Management Software i. MTBF: Mean Time Between Failure 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. In accordance to the scope of work, the system shall also provide a graphical, web -based, operator interface that allows for instant access to any system through a standard browser. The contractor must provide PC -based programming workstations, operator workstations and microcomputer controllers of modular design providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/output points and processing/control functions. B. For this project, the system shall consist of the following components: 1. Administration and Programming Workstation(s): The BAS system supplier shall include Operation software and architecture as described in Part 2 of the specification. These workstations must be running the standard workstation software developed and tested by the manufacturer of the network server controllers and the standalone controllers. No third party front-end workstation software will be acceptable. Workstations must conform to the B-OWS BACnet device profile. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Web -Based Operator Workstations: The BAS system supplier shall furnish licenses for web connection to the BAS system. Web -based users shall have access to all system points and graphics, shall be able to receive and acknowledge alarms, and shall be able to control setpoints and other parameters. All engineering work, such as trends, reports, graphics, etc. that are accomplished from the Workstation shall be available for viewing through the web browser interface without additional changes. The web -based interface must conform to the B-OWS BACnet device profile. There will be no need for any additional computer based hardware to support the web -based user interface. 3. Ethernet -based Network Router and/or Network Server Controller(s): The BAS system supplier shall furnish needed quantity of Ethernet -based Network Server Controllers as described in Part 2 of the specification. These controllers will connect directly to the Operator Workstation over Ethernet at a minimum of 100mbps, and provide communication to the Standalone Digital Control Units and/or other Input/Output Modules. Network Server Controllers shall conform to BACnet device profile B-BC. Network controllers that utilize RS232 serial communications or ARCNET to communicate with the workstations will not be accepted. Network Controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC). 4. Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs): Provide the necessary quantity and types of SDCUs to meet the requirements of the project for mechanical equipment control including air handlers, central plant control, and terminal unit control. Each SDCU will operate completely standalone, containing all of the VO and programs to control its associated equipment. Each BACnet protocol SDCU shall conform to the BACnet device profile B-AAC. BACnet SDCUs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC). C. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 10 or 100 Mpbs Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Modbus, XML and HTTP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Network Server Controllers (NSCs), user workstations and a local host computer system. D. The Enterprise Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) LAN shall utilize Carrier Sense Multiple/Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD), Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) operating at 10 or 100 Mbps. E. The system shall enable an open architecture that utilizes EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalkTM protocol and/or ANSI / ASHRAETM Standard 135-2004, BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all system components. Native support for the LonTalkTM protocol and the ANSI / ASHRAETM Standard 135-2004, BACnet protocol are required to assure that the project is fully supported by the HVAC open protocols to reduce future building maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs. F. The system shall enable an architecture that utilizes a MS/TP selectable 9.6-76.8 KBaud protocol, as a common communication protocol between controllers and integral ANSI / ASHRAETM Standard 135-2004, BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all system components. The AAC shall be capable of communicating as a MS/TP device or as a BACnet IP device communicating at 10/100 Mbps on a TCP/IP trunk. The ANSI / ASHRAETM Standard 135-2004, BACnet protocol is required to assure that the project is fully supported by the leading HVAC open protocol to reduce future building maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs. G. LonTalkTM packets may be encapsulated into TCP/IP messages to take advantage of existing infrastructure or to increase network bandwidth where necessary or desired. 1. Any such encapsulation of the LonTalkTM protocol into IP datagrams shall conform to existing LonMarkTM guide functionality lines for such encapsulation and shall be based on industry standard protocols. 2. The products used in constructing the BMS shall be LonMarkTM compliant. 3. In those instances, in which Lon-MarkTM devices are not available, the BMS system supplier shall provide device resource files and external interface definitions for LonMark devices. 239000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT H. The software tools required for network management of the LonTalkTM protocol and the ANSI / ASHRAETM Standard 135-2004, BACnet protocol must be provided with the system. Drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans and are required to meet the functional intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. BACnet clients shall comply with the BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) device profile; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet IP or MS/TP. Physical connection of LonWorks devices shall be via Ethernet IP or FTT- 10A. 1. The system shall provide support for Modbus TCP and RTU protocols natively, and not require the use of gateways. J. Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and electronic/electric actuation of Mechanical Equipment Room (MER) valves and dampers and electronic actuation of terminal equipment valves and actuators as specified herein. The BMS is intended to seamlessly connect devices throughout the building regardless of subsystem type, i.e. variable frequency drives, low voltage lighting systems, electrical circuit breakers, power metering and card access should easily coexist on the same network channel. 1. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using HTML5 enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. The system shall not require JAVA to be enabled in the browser. 2. Data shall reside on a supplier -installed server for all database access. 3. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer's internal Intranet network. K. All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of the approved manufacturer's local field office. The approved manufacturer's local field office shall have a minimum of 5 years of installation experience with the manufacturer and shall provide documentation in the bid and submittal package verifying longevity of the installing company's relationship with the manufacturer when requested. Supervision, hardware and software engineering, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the employees of the approved manufacturer's local field office and shall not be subcontracted. The control contractor shall have an in place support facility within 50 miles of the site with factory certified technicians and engineers, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment for the installed system, and the control contractor shall have 24 hours/day, 7 days/week emergency service available. L. Provide the Commissioning, configuration and diagnostic tool (CCDT), color display personnel computer, software, and interfaces to provide uploading/downloading of High Point Count Controllers (AAC), Unitary Equipment Controllers (UEC) and VAV controllers (VAVDDC), monitoring all BACnet objects, monitoring overrides of all controller physical input/output points, and editing of controller resident time schedules. f lhl�ll11:3U 1101F.11ki A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 Submittals and Section 23 00 00 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical, in addition to those specified herein. 1. All shop drawings shall be prepared in Visio Professional or AutoCAD software. hi addition to the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish a CD containing the identical information. Drawings shall be B size or larger. 2. Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers and workstations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of each mechanical system showing all connected points with reference to their associated controller. Typicals will be allowed where appropriate. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 239000-6 3. Submittal data shall contain manufacturer's data on all hardware and software products required by the specification. Valve, damper and air flow station schedules shall indicate size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment. 4. Software submittals shall contain narrative descriptions of sequences of operation, program listings, point lists, and a complete description of the graphics, reports, alarms and configuration to be furnished with the workstation software. Information shall be bound or in a three ring binder with an index and tabs. Diagrams shall be on 11-inch by 17-inch foldouts. If color has been used to differentiate information, the printed copies shall be in color. 5. Submit Electronic copies of submittal data and shop drawings to the Engineer for review prior to ordering or fabrication of the equipment. The Contractor, prior to submitting, shall check all documents for accuracy. 6. The Engineer will make corrections, if required, and return to the Contractor. The Contractor will then resubmit with the corrected or additional data. This procedure shall be repeated until all corrections are made to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the submittals are fully approved. 7. The following is a list of post construction submittals that shall be updated to reflect any changes during construction and re -submitted as "As -Built". a. System architecture drawing. b. Layout drawing for each control panel C. Wiring diagram for individual components d. System flow diagram for each controlled system e. Instrumentation list for each controlled system f. Sequence of control g. Binding map h. A matrix sheet detailing all system addresses and communication settings for the following: 1) All IP network addresses and settings 2) All BMS device addresses and communication settings 3) Operation and Maintenance Manuals 8. Information common to the entire system shall be provided. This shall include but not be limited to the following. a. Product manuals for the key software tasks. b. Operating the system. C. Administrating the system. d. Engineering the operator workstation. e. Application programming. f. Engineering the network. g. Setting up the web server. h. Report creation. i. Graphics creation. j . All other engineering tasks. k. System Architecture Diagram. 1. List of recommended maintenance tasks associated with the system servers, operator workstations, data servers, web servers and web clients. in. Define the task. n. Recommend a frequency for the task. o. Reference the product manual that includes instructions on executing the task. p. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service representatives for equipment and control systems. q. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems. r. Submit one copy for each building, plus two extra copies. 9. Information common to the systems in a single building shall be provided. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. System architecture diagram for components within the building annotated with specific location information. b. As -built drawing for each control panel. C. As -built wiring design diagram for all components. d. Installation design details for each VO device. e. As -built system flow diagram for each system. f. Sequence of control for each system. g. Binding map for the building. h. Product data sheet for each component. i. Installation data sheet for each component. j. Submit two copies for each building and two extra copies. 10. Software shall be provided: a. Submit a copy of all software installed on the servers and workstations. b. Submit all licensing information for all software installed on the servers and workstations. C. Submit a copy of all software used to execute the project even if the software was not installed on the servers and workstations. d. Submit all licensing information for all of the software used to execute the project. e. All software revisions shall be as installed at the time of the system acceptance. f. Firmware Files g. Submit a copy of all firmware files that were downloaded to or pre -installed on any devices installed as part of this project. h. This does not apply to firmware that is permanently burned on a chip at the factory and can only be replaced by replacing the chip. i. Submit a copy of all application files that were created during the execution of the project. j. Submit a copy of all graphic page files created during the execution of the project. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All bidders must be building automation contractors in the business of installing direct digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 5 years. 1. The Building Management System contractor shall have a full service facility within 50 miles of the project that is staffed with engineers trained and certified by the manufacturer in the configuration, programming and service of the automation system. The contractor's technicians shall be fully capable of providing instructions and routine emergency maintenance service on all system components. 2. Any installing contractor, not listed as prequalified in the Approved Manufacturer's section, shall submit credentials as detailed in the Pre -bid Submittal section for the engineer's review 2 weeks prior to bid date. Failure to follow the attached formats shall disqualify potential alternate bidders. Credentials must attest that the contractor meets all requirements of the specification and the Engineers judgment regarding approval to bid as an acceptable installer after reviewing the data will be final. B. All bidders must be authorized distributors or branch offices of the manufacturers specified. C. The following bidders have been pre -qualified: 1. Schneider Electric 2. Or as approved by City of Lubbock. D. Any installing contractors or manufacturers interested in participating as acceptable bidders for this project that are not pre -qualified shall furnish a detailed technical pre -bid submittal to the consulting engineer. All information must be submitted 2 weeks prior to the published bid date to allow the engineer adequate time to review the bidder's credentials. E. The Pre -Bid submittal shall contain the following information as a minimum: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. A profile of the manufacturer and the local installation and service/organization. 2. Description of how the system meets and achieves all the specified criteria in terms of configuration, operation, and control. 3. System Architecture with single line riser diagram showing all major components (digital controllers, routers, hubs, etc.) that will be required for this project. 4. Procedure for commissioning and time required to startup and commission each of the systems for this project. 5. Contractors approach for the project planning and management. 6. Product Data Sheets for all components, DDC panels, and all accessories listed per the appropriate specification sections herein. 7. Examples of actual graphic screens for other similar projects. 8. Number and types of DDC panels required for this installation. 9. Number and types of spare points provided with the proposed system. 10. Recommended spare parts list for components with list price schedule. 11. List of 2 similar systems in size, point capacity, total installed value, installed and commissioned by the local office with a list of the installers/manufacturers design team members for each project and the owners contact information. 12. Samples of service offerings and a list of current similar service contracts with contact information. 13. Resumes for the management team and all employees who will be involved with the project design, commissioning assistance, project management, and after installation service. Resumes should include copies of manufacturer's certifications for the proposed product line. 14. Copy of this Control Specification in its entirety with a check mark beside each paragraph to signify that the manufacturer's equipment and software shall fully conform to the specified requirement. If the requirement cannot be met, indicate the reasons/limitations and the alternative proposed. 15. An interview may be conducted and the bidder will be requested to make a formal presentation concerning the proposed system and possibly provide an installed project tour prior to a final decision. F. Each point in the system shall be tested for both hardware and software functionality. In addition, each mechanical and electrical system under control of the BAS will be tested against the appropriate sequence of operation specified herein. Successful completion of the system test shall constitute the beginning of the warranty period. A written report will be submitted to the owner indicating that the installed system functions in accordance with the plans and specifications. G. The BAS system supplier shall commission and set in operating condition all major equipment and systems, such as the chilled water, hot water and all air handling systems, in the presence of the equipment manufacturer's representatives, as applicable, and the Owner and Architect's representatives. If the vendor is providing an AFDD/CC system, use of the analytics shall be used to help commission the system. H. The BAS system supplier shall provide a technician for 4 days manpower and engineering services required to assist the HVAC Contractor and Balancing Contractor in testing, adjusting, and balancing all systems in the building. The BAS system supplier shall coordinate all requirements to provide a complete air balance with the Balancing Contractor and shall include all labor and materials in his contract. I. Startup Testing shall be performed for each task on the startup test checklist, which shall be initialed by the technician and dated upon test was completion along with any recorded data such as voltages, offsets or tuning parameters. Any deviations from the submitted installation plan shall also be recorded. J. Required elements of the startup testing include: 1. Measurement of voltage sources, primary and secondary 2. Verification of proper controller power wiring. 3. Verification of component inventory when compared to the submittals. 239000-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Verification of labeling on components and wiring. 5. Verification of connection integrity and quality (loose strands and tight connections). 6. Verification of bus topology, grounding of shields and installation of termination devices. 7. Verification of point checkout. 8. Each 1/0 device is landed per the submittals and functions per the sequence of control. 9. Analog sensors are properly scaled and a value is reported 10. Binary sensors have the correct normal position and the state is correctly reported. 11. Analog outputs have the correct normal position and move full stroke when so commanded. 12. Binary outputs have the correct normal state and respond appropriately to energize/de-energize commands. 13. Documentation of analog sensor calibration (measured value, reported value and calculated offset). 14. Documentation of Loop tuning (sample rate, gain and integral time constant). K. A performance verification test shall also be completed for the operator interaction with the system. Test elements shall be written to require the verification of all operator interaction tasks including, but not limited to the following. 1. Graphics navigation. 2. Trend data collection and presentation. 3. Alarm handling, acknowledgement and routing. 4. Time schedule editing. 5. Application parameter adjustment. 6. Manual control. 7. Report execution. 8. Automatic backups. 9. Web Client access. 10. A Startup Testing Report and a Performance Verification Testing Report shall be provided upon test completion. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. B. Coordinate equipment from other divisions including "Intrusion Detection," "Lighting Controls," "Motor Control Centers," "Panel boards," and "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with those systems. C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator workstation. D. Coordinate location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete". E. Coordinate with the Owner's IT department on locations for NSC's, Ethernet communication cabling and TCP/IP addresses. 19.1�1111je1117.y I I I i A. The Owner shall retain licenses to software for this project. B. The Owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer's standard software and firmware licensing agreement as a condition off this contractor. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application software to the Owner as defined by the manufacturer's license agreement, but shall protect the manufacturer's rights to disclosure of Trade Secrets contained within such software. C. The licensing agreement shall not preclude the use of the software by individuals under contract to the owner for commissioning, servicing or altering the system in the future. Use of the software by individuals under contract to the owner shall be restricted to use on the owner's computers and only for the purpose of commissioning, servicing, or altering the installed system. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT D. All project developed software, files and documentation shall become the property of the Owner. These include but are not limited to: 1. Server and workstation software 2. Application programming tools 3. Configuration tools 4. Network diagnostic tools 5. Addressing tools 6. Application files 7. Configuration files 8. Graphic files 9. Report files 10. Graphic symbol libraries 11. All documentation 1.9 WORK BY OTHERS A. The BAS system supplier shall cooperate with other contractors performing work on this project necessary to achieve a complete and neat installation. To that end, each contractor shall consult the drawings and specifications for all trades to determine the nature and extent of others' work. B. The BAS system supplier shall furnish all Control Valves, Flow Meters, Sensor Wells for installation by the Mechanical Contractor and/or others. C. The BAS system supplier shall provide field supervision to the designated contractor for the installation of the following: 1. Automatic control dampers 2. Blank -off plates for dampers that are smaller than duct size. 3. Sheet metal baffles plates to eliminate stratification. 4. The Electrical Contractor shall provide: a. All 120VAC power wiring to motors, heat trace, junction boxes for power to BAS panels. b. Furnish smoke detectors and wire to the building fire alarm system. HVAC Contractor to mount devices. BAS system supplier to hardwire to fan shut down. C. Auxiliary contact (pulse initiator) on the electric meter for central monitoring of kWh and KW. Electrical Contractor shall provide the pulse rate for remote readout to the BAS. BAS system supplier to coordinate this with the electrical contractor. D. Prior to delivery to the Project site, ensure that suitable storage space is available to store materials in a well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity, and corrosive atmospheres. Materials shall be protected during delivery and storage and shall not exceed the manufacturer stated storage requirements. As a minimum, store indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. In addition, protect electronics from all forms of electrical and magnetic energy that could reasonably cause damage. E. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier's or manufacturer's original wrappings and containers, labeled with supplier's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and equipment tag number or service name as identified within the Contract Documents. F. Inspect and report any concealed damage or violation of delivery storage, and handling requirements to the Engineer. 1.10 WARRANTY A. All components, system software, and parts furnished and installed by the BMS system supplier shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for 1 year from substantial completion. Labor to repair, reprogram, or replace these components shall be furnished by the BMS system supplier at no charge during normal working hours during the warranty period. Materials furnished but not installed by the BMS system supplier shall be covered to the extent of the product only. 23 90 00 - 10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Installation labor shall be the responsibility of the trade contractor performing the installation. All corrective software modifications made during warranty periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks. The Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for warranty service within 24 standard working hours. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following pre -qualified manufacturers: 1. Electric Components: Schneider -Electric Field Devices 2. Electronic Components: Schneider -Electric Field Devices 3. Direct Digital Control Systems Field Controller Devices: a. Schneider Electric BACnet MSTP Network Thermostats installed by approved manufacturer's local field office or authorized distributor. b. Or approved equal. 2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A. General: 1. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall consist of Network Server/Controllers (NSCs), a family of Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs), Administration and Programming Workstations (APWs), and Web -based Operator Workstations (WOWS). The BAS shall provide control, alarm detection, scheduling, reporting and information management for the entire facility, and Wide Area Network (WAN) if applicable. 2. An Enterprise Level BAS shall consist of an Enterprise Server, which enables multiple NSCs (including all graphics, alarms, schedules, trends, programming, and configuration) to be accessible from a single Workstation simultaneously for operations and engineering tasks. 3. The Enterprise Level BAS shall be able to host up to 250 servers, or NSCs, beneath it. 4. For Enterprise reporting capability and robust reporting capability outside of the trend chart and listing ability of the Workstation, a Reports Server shall be installed on a Microsoft Windows SQL based computer. The Reports Server can be installed on the same computer as the Enterprise Server. 5. The system shall be designed with a top-level 10/100bT Ethernet network, using the BACnet/IP, LonWorks IP, and/or Modbus TCP protocol. B. Modbus RTU/ASCII (and J-bus), Modbus TCP, BACnet MS/TP, BACnet IP, LonTalk FTT-10A, and WebServices shall be native to the NSCs. There shall not be a need to provide multiple NSCs to support all the network protocols, nor should there be a need to supply additional software to allow all three protocols to be natively supported. C. A sub -network of SDCUs using the BACnet MS/TP protocol shall connect the local, stand-alone controllers with Ethernet -level Network Server Controllers/IP Routers. D. The TCP/IP layer connects all of the buildings on a single Wide Area Network (WAN) isolated behind the campus firewall. Fixed IP addresses for connections to the campus WAN shall be used for each device that connects to the WAN. E. The fieldbus layer shall support all of the following types of SDCUs: 1. BACnet MS/TP SDCU requirements: The system shall consist of one or more BACnet MS/TP field buses managed by the Network Server Controller. Minimum speed shall be 76.8kbps. The field bus layer consists of an RS485, token passing bus that supports up to 127 Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs) for operation of HVAC and lighting equipment. These devices shall conform to BACnet standard 135-2004. The NSCs shall be capable of at least two BACnet MS/TP field buses for a total capability of 254 SDCUs per NSC. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 11 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT F. The BAS shall be capable of being segmented, through software, into multiple local area networks (LANs) distributed over a wide area network (WAN). Workstations can manage a single LAN (or building), and/or the entire system with all portions of that LAN maintaining its own, current database. G. All NSCs, Workstation(s) and Servers shall be capable of residing directly on the owner's Ethernet TCP/IP LAN/WAN with no required gateways. Furthermore, the NSC's, Workstation(s), and Server(s) shall be capable of using standard, commercially available, off -the -shelf Ethernet infrastructure components such as routers, switches and hubs. With this design the owner may utilize the investment of an existing or new enterprise network or structured cabling system. This also allows the option of the maintenance of the LAN/WAN to be performed by the owner's Information Systems Department as all devices utilize standard TCP/IP components. H. System Expansion: 1. The BAS system shall be scalable and expandable at all levels of the system using the same software interface, and the same TCP/IP level and fieldbus level controllers. Systems that require replacement of either the workstation software or field controllers in order to expand the system shall not be acceptable. 2. Web -based operation shall be supported directly by the NSCs and require no additional software. 3. The system shall be capable of using graphical and/or line application programming language for the Network Server Controllers. 1. All Network Server Controllers must natively support the BACnet IP, BACnet MS/TP, LonWorks FTT-10, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU (RS-485 and RS-232), and Modbus ASCII protocols. 2.3 OPERATOR WORKSTATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Furnish any temporary computers required to completely install and test the system. A permanent operator's workstation is not required for this Municipal Court Building. However, the contractor shall install updated software on the City of Lubbock network computers as required to completely control and monitor the rooftop units at the Municipal Court. 2. The programming and configuration workstation software shall allow any user with adequate permission to create and/or modify any or all parts of the NSC and/or Enterprise Server database. 3. Web -based workstations (webstations) shall have a minimum of 10 concurrent operator users. 4. All configuration workstations shall be personal computers operating under the Microsoft Windows operating system. The application software shall be capable of communication to all Network Server Controllers and shall feature high -resolution color graphics, alarming, trend charting. It shall be user configurable for all data collection and data presentation functions. 5. A minimum of 1 physical Workstation shall be allowed on the Ethernet network. In this client/server configuration, any changes or additions made from one workstation will automatically appear on all other workstations since the changes are accomplished to the databases within the NSC. Systems with a central database will not be acceptable. B. General Administration and Programming Workstation Software: 1. System architecture shall be truly client server in that the Workstation shall operate as the client while the NSCs shall operate as the servers. The client is responsible for the data presentation and validation of inputs while the server is responsible for data gathering and delivery. 2. The workstation functions shall include monitoring and programming of all DDC controllers. Monitoring consists of alarming, reporting, graphic displays, long term data storage, automatic data collection, and operator -initiated control actions such as schedule and setpoint adjustments. 3. Programming of SDCUs shall be capable of being done either off-line or on-line from any operator workstation. All information will be available in graphic or text displays stored at the 239000-12 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT NSC. Graphic displays will feature animation effects to enhance the presentation of the data, to alert operators of problems, and to facilitate location of information throughout the DDC system. All operator functions shall be selectable through a mouse. C. User Interface: 1. The BAS workstation software shall allow the creation of a custom, browser -style interface linked to the user when logging into any workstation. Additionally, it shall be possible to create customized workspaces that can be assigned to user groups. This interface shall support the creation of "hot -spots" that the user may link to view/edit any object in the system or run any object editor or configuration tool contained in the software. Furthermore, this interface must be able to be configured to become a user's "PC Desktop" — with all the links that a user needs to run other applications. This, along with the Windows user security capabilities, will enable a system administrator to setup workstation accounts that not only limit the capabilities of the user within the BAS software, but may also limit what a user can do on the PC and/or LAN/WAN. This might be used to ensure, for example, that the user of an alarm monitoring workstation is unable to shutdown the active alarm viewer and/or unable to load software onto the PC. 2. System shall be able to automatically switch between displayed metric vs. imperial units based on the workstation/webstations localization. 3. The BMS workstation/webstations shall be capable of multiple language display, including English, Spanish, German, French, Japanese, Italian, Finnish, Portuguese, Swedish, Russian, and traditional and simplified Chinese. The multiple languages shall not require additional add on software from the standard workstation installer and shall be selectable within said workstation. 4. Webstations shall have the capability to automatically re -direct to an HTTPS connection to ensure more secure communications. 5. Personalized layouts and panels within workstations shall be extended to webstations to ensure consistent user experiences between the two user interfaces. 6. Webstations shall give the user the same capabilities within the graphics pages as are given within the workstation but shall be mobile responsive for use on smaller devices. 7. Servers and clients shall have the ability to be located in different time zones, which are then synchronized via the NTP server. 8. Workstation shall indicate at all times the communication status between it and the server. D. User Security: I . The software shall be designed so that each user of the software can have a unique username and password. This username/password combination shall be linked to a set of capabilities within the software, set by and editable only by, a system administrator. The sets of capabilities shall range from View only, Acknowledge alarms, Enable/disable and change values, Program, and Administer. The system shall allow the above capabilities to be applied independently to each and every class of object in the system. The system must allow a minimum of 256 users to be configured per workstation. Additionally, the software shall enable the ability to add/remove users based upon Microsoft Windows Security Domains that enable the customer IT department to assist in user access. 2. Additional requirements include mandatory change of passwords: a. At first logon with default credentials b. Of admin passwords before deploying 3. No general accounts, one account per user 4. Capability to integrate and use Windows Active Directory for user log on credentials 5. Include a timed auto log off feature 6. Use TLS 1.2 encryption or higher 7. Capability to use blacklisted and whitelisted IPs/MAC addresses to gate access 8. All devices and software that support HTTP shall allow disabling the HTTP access and require access via HTTPS. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 13 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 9. All devices that have web portals for the configuration of IP addresses and other configuration attributes shall have the ability, through commands issued, to disable this service upon completion. A direct connection method with ASCII commands shall enable this service again if changes need to be applied. Loss of power or cycling the device shall not reverse this command. Disabling this web portal eliminates the security risk and the need for updating security patches. 10. All devices shall support SNMP V3 monitoring of network performance and stack statistics for the purpose of managing denial of service attacks 11. The Integrated Control Platform shall support the feature to alarm on a predetermined period of time until the default password for each device is changed from the default factory setting. 12. The Integrated Control Platform shall support encrypted password authentication for all web services whether serving or consuming. E. Configuration Interface: 1. The workstation software shall use a familiar Windows Explorer style interface for an operator or programmer to view and/or edit any object (controller, point, alarm, report, schedule, etc.) in the entire system. In addition, this interface shall present a "network map" of all controllers and their associated points, programs, graphics, alarms, and reports in an easy to understand structure. All object names shall be alphanumeric and use Windows long filename conventions. 2. The configuration interface shall also include support for user defined object types. These object types shall be used as building blocks for the creation of the BAS database. They shall be created form the base object types within the system input, output, string variables, setpoints, etc., alarm algorithms, alarm notification objects, reports, graphics displays, schedules, and programs. Groups of user defined object types shall be able to be set up as a predefined aggregate of subsystems and systems. The configuration interface shall support copying/pasting and exporting/importing portions of the database for additional efficiency. The system shall also maintain a link to all "child" objects created. If a user wishes to make a change to a parent object, the software shall ask the user if he/she wants to update all of the child objects with the change. F. Color Graphic Displays: 1. The system shall allow for the creation of user defined, color graphic displays for the viewing of mechanical and electrical systems, or building schematics. These graphics shall contain point information from the database including any attributes associated with the point (engineering units, etc.). In addition, operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse. 2. Requirements of the color graphic subsystem include: a. At a minimum, the user shall have the ability to import .gif, .png, .burp, .jpeg, .tif, and CAD generated picture files as background displays, and layering shall be possible. b. The system shall support HTML5 enabled graphics. C. It shall be possible for the user to use JavaScript to customize the behavior of each graphic. d. The editor shall use Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) technology. e. A built-in library of animated objects such as dampers, fans, pumps, buttons, knobs, gauges, ad graphs which can be "dropped" on a graphic through the use of a software configuration "wizard". These objects shall enable operators to interact with the graphic displays in a manner that mimics their mechanical equivalents found on field installed control panels. f. Support for high DPI icons shall be included and automatically chosen if viewing on a high definition display such as Retina or 4K displays. g. Using the mouse, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints, start or stop equipment, modify PID loop parameters, or change schedules. h. Status changes or alarm conditions must be able to be highlighted by objects changing screen location, size, color, text, blinking or changing from one display to another. 239000-14 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT i. Ability to link graphic displays through user defined objects, alarm testing, or the result of a mathematical expression. Operators must be able to change from one graphic to another by selecting an object with a mouse - no menus will be required. j. It shall be possible to create and save graphical components and JavaScript code in reusable and transferrable, customized libraries. k. Graphics should rescale based on whatever monitor or viewing device is being used. 1. Be able to create graphics on varying layers that can be moved and repeated. in. Be able to create graphics within varying windowpanes that can be moved and/or re - referenced. For example, creating the graphical menu within a pane and referencing it on every graphics page, therefore not rebuilding thus allowing for a single spot for updates that get pushed to all the pages that reference it. n. The ability to create re -usable cascading menus. o. The ability to have multiple instances of a graphic and edit one instance to change all. 3. Additionally, the Graphics Editor portion of the Engineering Software shall provide the following capabilities: a. Create and save pages. b. Group and ungroup symbols. C. Modify an existing symbol. d. Modify an existing graphic page. e. Rotate and mirror a symbol. £ Place a symbol on a page. g. Place analog dynamic data in decimal format on a page. h. Place binary dynamic data using state descriptors on a page. i. Create motion through the use of animated .gif files or JavaScript. j. Place test mode indication on a page. k. Place manual mode indication on a page. 1. Place links using a fixed symbol or flyover on a page. in. Links to other graphics. n. Links to web sites. o. Links to notes. p. Links to time schedules. q. Links to any .exe file on the operator work station. r. Links to .doc files. S. Assign a background color. t. Assign a foreground color. U. Place alarm indicators on a page. V. Change symbol/text/value color as a function of an analog variable. W. Change a symbol/text/value color as a function of a binary state. X. Change symbol/text/value as a function of a binary state. y. All symbols used by Schneider Electric EcoBuilding Business in the creation of graphic pages shall be saved to a library file for use by the owner. G. The software shall allow for the automatic collection of data and reporting from any controller or NSC. The frequency of data collection shall be user -configurable. H. Alarm Management: 1. The software shall be capable of accepting alarms directly from NSCs or controllers, or generating alarms based on evaluation of data in controllers and comparing to limits or conditional equations configured through the software. Any alarm (regardless of its origination) will be integrated into the overall alarm management system and will appear in all standard alarm reports, be available for operator acknowledgment, and have the option for displaying graphics, or reports. 2. Alarm management features shall include: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - l 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. A minimum of 1000 alarm notification levels at the NSC, workstation, and webstation levels. At the Enterprise level the minimum number of active and viewable alarms shall be 10,000. Each notification level will establish a unique set of parameters for controlling alarm display, distribution, acknowledgment, keyboard annunciation, and record keeping. b. Automatic logging in the database of the alarm message, point name, point value, source device, timestamp of alarm, username and time of acknowledgement, username and time of alarm silence (soft acknowledgement). C. Playing an audible sound on alarm initiation or return to normal. d. Sending an email page to anyone specifically listed on the initial occurrence of an alarm. The ability to utilize email paging of alarms shall be a standard feature of the software using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) with support for secure email using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Secure (SMTPS) No special software interfaces shall be required and no email client software must be running in order for email to be distributed. The email notification shall be able to be sent to an individual user or a user group. e. Individual alarms shall be able to be re-routed to a user at user -specified times and dates. For example, a critical high temp alarm can be configured to be routed to a Facilities Dept. workstation during normal working hours (7am-6pm, Mon -Fri) and to a Central Alarming workstation at all other times. f. An active alarm viewer shall be included which can be customized for each user or user type to hide or display any alarm attributes. g. The active alarm viewer can be configured such that an operator must type in text in an alarm entry and/or pick from a drop -down list of user actions for certain alarms. h. The active alarm viewer can be configured such that an operator must type in text in an alarm entry and/or pick from a drop -down list of causes for certain alarms. This ensures accountability (audit trail) for the response to critical alarms. i. The active alarm viewer can be configured such that an operator must confirm that all of the steps in a check list have been accomplished prior to acknowledging the alarm. j. The active alarm viewer shall, if filtered, show the quantity of visible and total number of alarms that are not equal to `normal' and the quantity of disabled and hidden alarms. k. The alarm viewer can be configured to auto hide alarms when triggered. 1. An operator shall have the capability to assign an alarm to another user of the system. In. Time schedules shall be able to be used to set control notifications to users. n. An operator shall have the capability to save and apply alarm favorites. o. Alarm notifications must support multiple distribution methods within one notification. I. Report Generation: 1. The Reports Server shall be able to process large amounts of data and produce meaningful reports to facilitate analysis and optimization of each installation. 2. Reports shall be possible to generate and view from the operator Workstation, and/or Webstation, and/or directly from a reports -only web interface. 3. A library of predefined automatically generated reports that prompt users for input prior to generation shall be available. The properties and configurations made to these reports shall be possible to save as Dashboard reports, so that the configurations are saved for future used. 4. It shall be possible to create reports standard tools, such as Microsoft Report Builder 2.0 or Visual Studio, shall be used for customized reports. 5. Additional reports or sets of reports shall be downloadable, transferrable, and importable 6. All reports shall be able to be set up to automatically run or be generated on demand. 7. Each report shall be capable of being automatically emailed to a recipient in Microsoft Word, Excel, and/or Adobe .pdf format. 8. Reports can be of any length and contain any point attributes from any controller on the network. 239000-16 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 9. Image management functionality shall be possible to enable the system administrators to easily upload new logos or images to the system. 10. It shall be possible to run other executable programs whenever a report is initiated. 11. Report Generator activity can be tied to the alarm management system, so that any of the configured reports can be displayed in response to an alarm condition. 12. Minimum supplied reports shall include: a. Activities Per Server Report b. Activities Per User Report C. Alarm Amount by Category Report d. Alarm Amount by Type Report e. Alarms Per Sever Report f. Current Alarm Report g. Most Active Alarm Report h. System Errors Per Server Report i. Top Activities Report j. Top Alarms Report k. Top System Errors Report 1. Trend Log Comparison Report M. User Logins Report n. Users and Groups Reports 13. Minimum Energy Reports shall include: a. Energy Monitoring Calendar Consumption Report: Shall provide an interactive report that shows the energy usage on one or multiple selected days. b. Energy Monitoring Consumption Breakdown Report: Shall provide a report on energy consumption broken down using sub -metering. C. Energy Monitoring Consumption Report: Shall show the energy consumption against a specified target value. 14. Reports Server Hardware Requirements: a. Processor: 1) Minimum: 2.0 GHz 2) Recommended: 2.0 GHz or higher b. Memory: 1) Minimum: 6 GB 2) Recommended: 8GB or higher C. Hard Disk: 500 GB 15. Reports Server Software Requirements: a. Operating System: 1) Microsoft Windows 7 32-bit (Professional) 2) Microsoft Windows 7 64-bit (Professional) 3) Microsoft Windows 8.1 32-bit (Pro or Enterprise) 4) Microsoft Windows 8.1 64-bit (Pro or Enterprise) 5) Microsoft Windows 10 64-bit (Pro or Enterprise) 6) Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit (Standard, Enterprise, Datacenter, Web, or Itanium) 7) Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64-bit (Standard) 8) Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 64-bit (Standard, Datacenter) b. SQL Versions: 1) Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 64-bit SP2 (Standard and Express with Advanced Services) 2) Microsoft SQL Server 2012 64-bit (Standard and Express with Advanced Services) C. Additional required software: Microsoft .Net 4.5 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 17 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT J. Scheduling: 1. From the workstation or webstation, it shall be possible to configure and download schedules for any of the controllers on the network. 2. Time of day schedules shall be in a calendar style and viewable in both a graphical and tabular view. 3. Schedules shall be programmable for a minimum of one year in advance. 4. To change the schedule for a particular day, a user shall simply select the day and make the desired modifications. 5. Additionally, from the operator webstations, each schedule will appear on the screen viewable as the entire year, monthly, week and day. A simple mouse click shall allow switching between views. It shall also be possible to scroll from one month to the next and view or alter any of the schedule times. 6. Schedules will be assigned to specific controllers and stored in their local RAM memory. Any changes made at the workstation will be automatically updated to the corresponding schedule in the controller. 7. It shall be possible to assign a lead schedule such that shadow/local schedules are updated based upon changes in the Lead. 8. It shall be possible to assign a list(s) of exception event days, dates, date ranges to a schedule. 9. It shall be possible to view combined views showing the calendar and all prioritized exemptions on one screen. 10. It should accommodate a minimum of 16 priority levels. 11. Values should be able to be controlled directly from a schedule, without the need for special program logic. K. Programmer's Environment: 1. Programming in the NSC shall be either in graphical block format or line -programming format or both. 239000-18 2. Programming of the NSC shall be available offline from system prior to deployment into the field. All engineering tasks shall be possible, except, of course, the viewing of live tasks or values. 3. The programmer's environment will include access to a superset of the same programming language supported in the SDCUs. 4. NSC devices will support both script programming language as well as the graphical function block programming language. For both languages, the programmer will be able to configure application software for custom program development, and write global control programs. Both languages will have debugging capabilities in their editors. 5. It shall be possible to save custom programs as libraries for reuse throughout the system. A wizard tool shall be available for loading programs from a library file in the program editor. 6. The system shall be capable of creating `custom types'. These types can be created within the programming environment, graphics, or as full controller `templates' that can be pushed to any other variable pertaining to it to allow for singular reference to multiple objects. This allows easing of updating/changes allowing the use to make a singular change and push to all connected instances. 7. It shall be possible to view graphical programming live and real-time from the Workstation. 8. The system shall be capable of creating `binding templates' allowing the user to bind multiple points to multiple objects all at once. 9. Key terms should appear when typing (IntelliType). 10. Applications should be able to be assigned different priorities and cycle times for a prioritized execution of different function. 11. The system shall be able to create objects that allow common objects such as power meters, VFD drives, etc. to be integrated into the system with simple import actions without the need of complicated programming or configuration setups. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT L. Saving/Reloading: 1. The workstation software shall have an application to save and restore NSC and field controller memory files. 2. For the NSC, this application shall not be limited to saving and reloading an entire controller — it must also be able to save/reload individual objects in the controller. This allows off-line debugging of control programs, for example, and then reloading of just the modified information. M. Audit Trail: 1. The workstation software shall automatically log and timestamp every operation that a user performs at a workstation, from logging on and off a workstation to changing a point value, modifying a program, enabling/disabling an object, viewing a graphic display, running a report, modifying a schedule, etc. 2. It shall be possible to view a history of alarms, user actions, and commands for any system object individually or at least the last 5000 records of all events for the entire system from Workstation. 3. The Enterprise server shall be able to store up to 5 million events. 4. The event view shall support viewing of up to 100,000 events. 5. It shall be possible to save custom filtered views of event information that are viewable and configurable in Workstation. 6. It shall be capable to search and view all forced values within the system. N. Fault Tolerant Enterprise Server Operation (Top level NSC): A single component failure in the system shall not cause the entire system to fail. All system users shall be informed of any detectable component failure via an alarm event. System users shall not be logged off as a result of a system failure or switchover. O. Web -based Operator Software: 1. General: a. Day-to-day operation of the system shall be accessible through a standard web browser interface, allowing technicians and operators to view any part of the system from anywhere on the network. b. The system shall be able to be accessed on site via a mobile device environment with, at a minimum, access to overwrite and view system values. 2. Graphic Displays: a. The browser -based interface must share the same graphical displays as the Administration and Programming Workstations, presenting dynamic data on site layouts, floor plans, and equipment graphics. The browser's graphics shall support commands to change setpoints, enable/disable equipment and start/stop equipment. b. Through the browser -based interface, operators must be able to navigate through the entire system, and change the value or status of any point in any controller. Changes are effective immediately to the controller, with a record of the change stored in the system database. C. System shall have out -of -the -box dashboards that enable customizable views of live data which can be public to all users or capable to make them specific to a user based on log in credentials. d. The user shall have the ability to create custom dashboards. e. The dashboards shall have a kiosk mode which allows for occupant level data display on monitors or tablets throughout the building. Alarm Management: a. Systems requiring additional client software to be installed on a PC for viewing the webstation from that PC will not be considered. b. Through the browser interface, a live alarm viewer identical to the alarm viewer on the Administration and Programming workstation shall be presented, if the user's password allows it. Users must be able to receive alarms, silence alarms, and acknowledge alarms FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 19 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT through a browser. If desired, specific operator text must be able to be added to the alarm record before acknowledgement, attachments shall be viewable, and alarm checklists shall be available. P. Groups and Schedules: 1. Through the browser interface, operators must be able to view pre -defined groups of points, with their values updated automatically. 2. Through the browser interface, operators must be able to change schedules — change start and stop times, add new times to a schedule, and modify calendars. Q. User Accounts and Audit Trail: 1. The same user accounts shall be used for the browser interface and for the operator workstations. Operators must not be forced to memorize multiple passwords. 2. All commands and user activity through the browser interface shall be recorded in the system's activity log, which can be later searched and retrieved by user, date, or both. R. Web Services: The installed system shall be able to use web services to "consume" information within the Network Server/Controllers (NSCs) with other products and systems. Inability to perform web services within the NSCs will be unacceptable. 1. Shall be able to "consume" data into the system via SOAP and REST web services 2.4 NETWORK SERVER CONTROLLERS (NSC) A. Network Server Controllers shall combine both network routing functions, control functions, and server functions into a single unit. B. The BACnet NSC shall be classified as a "native" BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Network Server Controller (B-BC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B-SA are not acceptable. NSCs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as BACnet Network Server Controllers (B-BC). C. The Network Server Controller shall provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the NRS. D. The NSCs shall be capable of whitelisting IPs to restrict access to a pre -defined list of hosts or devices. E. Whitelisting of file extensions for documents shall be capable. F. Encrypted and authenticated communication shall be configurable for non -open protocol communications using TLS 1.2. G. The NSCs shall support Simple Network Management Protocol version 3 (SNMPv3) for monitoring of the NSCs using a Network Management Tool. H. The NSCs shall support remote system logging for used by System Information and Event Monitoring (SIEM) software. I. They shall also be responsible for monitoring and controlling their own HVAC equipment such as an AHU or boiler. J. They shall also contain graphics, trends, trend charts, alarm views, and other similar presentation objects that can be served to workstations or web -based interfaces. A sufficient number of NSCs shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list. K. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1. Calendar functions 23 90 00 - 20 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization by means of an Internet site including automatic synchronization 6. Native integration of LonWorks controller data and Modbus controller data or BACnet controller data and Modbus controller data 7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT L. Hardware Specifications: 1. Memory: The operating system of the controller, application programs, and all other portions of the configuration database, shall be stored in non-volatile, FLASH memory. Servers/Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20 percent additional free memory. 2. Each NRC shall provide the following on -board hardware for communication: a. Two 10/100b Ethernet for communication to Workstations, other NRCs, IP field bus controllers, other SDCUs, and onto the internet. 1) The two Ethernet ports shall support active switch and BACnet/IP communication protocols. 2) Support IPv4 addressing 3) Ethernet port 1 shall support static or DHCP client configuration for communication to Workstation or other NSCs 4) Ethernet port 2 shall support switch mode or DHCP server to set addressing of DHCP client devices 5) It shall be possible to disable Ethernet port 2 6) In DHCP server mode, the Ethernet port 2 shall support 50 BACnet/IP field controllers in daisy chain configuration directly from the port 7) Each NSC shall be able to support a total of 250 IP SDCUs in daisy chain configuration (5 sub networks via switch) 8) If using RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) with a managed switch (with IEEE 802.1W or IEEE 802.1Q-2014 support), Ethernet port 2 shall support up to 39 devices 9) Each NSC shall be able to support a total of 234 IP SDCUs in RSTP configuration (6 sub networks via managed switch) 10) Where a switch is needed, use a Cisco 9000 Catalyst or IE switch, EtherWAN EX63402-01B, or other equal and approved equivalent. b. Two RS-485 ports for communication to BACnet MSTP bus or serial Modbus (software configurable) C. One TP/FT port for communication to LonWorks devices. d. One device USB port e. One host USB port 3. The NSC shall conform to a small footprint no larger than 10OW x 125H x 75D mm (3.94W x 4.92H x 2.95D in). M. Modular Expandability: 1. The system shall employ a modular VO design to allow expansion. Input and output capacity is to be provided through plug-in modules of various types. It shall be possible to combine 1/0 modules as desired to meet the 1/0 requirements for individual control applications. 2. One shall be able to "hot -change" (hot -swap) the UO modules preserving the system on-line without any intervention on the software; addressing and configuration shall be automatic. 3. If for any reason the backplane of the modular VO system were to fail, VO module addresses will be protected. N. Hardware Override Switches: All digital outputs shall, optionally, include three position manual override switches to allow selection of the ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. These switches shall be built into the unit and shall provide feedback to the controller so that the position of the override switch can be obtained through software. In addition each analog output shall be equipped with an override potentiometer to allow manual adjustment of the analog output signal over its full range, when the 3 position manual override switch is placed in the ON position. O. Universal Input Temperatures: 1. All universal inputs directly connected to the NSC via modular expansion shall be capable of using the following thermistors for use in the system without any external converters needed. a. 10 kohm Type I (Continuum) FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 21 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT b. 10 kohm Type II (I/NET) C. 10 kohm Type III (Satchwell) d. 10 kohm Type IV (FD) e. Linearized 10 kohm Type V (FD w/1 I shunt) f. Linearized 10 kohm (Satchwell) g. 1.8 kohm (Xenta) h. 1 kohm (Balco) i. 20 kohm (Honeywell) j. 2.2 kohm (Johnson) 2. In addition to the above, the system shall be capable of using the below RTD sensors, however it is not required that all universal inputs be compatible with them. a. PT 100 (Siemens) b. PT 1000 (Sauter) C. Ni1000 (Danfoss) P. Local Status Indicator Lamps: The NSC shall provide as a minimum LED indication of CPU status, Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status. For each input or output, provide LED indication of the value of the point (On/Off). The LED indication shall support software configuration to set whether the illumination of the LED corresponds to On or Off or whether the color when illuminated is Red or Green. Q. Real Time Clock (RTC): 1. Each NSC shall include a real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. Each NSC will allow for its own UTC offset, depending upon the time zone. When the time zone is set, the NSC will also store the appropriate times for daylight savings time. 2. The RTC date and time shall also be accurate, up to 30 days, when the NSC is powerless. 3. No batteries may be used to for the backup of the RTC. R. Power Supply: 1. The 24 VDC power supply for the NSCs shall provide 30 watts of available power for the NSC and associated 10 modules. The system shall support the use of more than one power supply if heavily power consuming modules are required. 2. The power supply, NSC, and I/O modules shall connect power wise and communication wise via the separate terminal base allowing for ease of replacement and no separate or loose wiring. S. Automatic Restart After Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage, the NSC shall automatically and without human intervention update all monitored functions, resume operation based on current, synchronize time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required. T. Data Retention: During a power failure, the NSC shall retain all programs, configuration data, historical data, and all other data that is configured to be retained. There shall be no time restriction for this retention and it must not use batteries to achieve it. U. Software Specifications: 1. The operating system of the controller, application programs, and all other portions of the configuration database such as graphics, trends, alarms, views, etc., shall be stored in non- volatile, FLASH memory. There will be no restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system. Each NSC shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted due to normal user communications including interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage, etc. 2. Each NSC shall have an available capacity of 4 GB of memory. This shall represent 2 GB for application and historical data and 2 GB dedicated for backup storage. V. User Programming Language: 1. The application software shall be user programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be either 23 90 00 - 22 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a script -based structured text or graphical function block based and fully programmable by the user. The language shall be structured to allow for the configuration of control programs, schedules, alarms, reports, telecommunications, local displays, mathematical calculations, and histories. Users shall be able to place comments anywhere in the body of either script or function block programs. 2. Network Server Controllers that use a "canned" program method will not be accepted. W. Control Software: I . The NSC shall have the ability to perform the following pre -tested control algorithms: a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID) b. Two Position Control C. Digital Filter d. Ratio Calculator e. Equipment Cycling Protection X. Mathematical Functions: Each controller shall be capable of performing basic mathematical functions (+, -, *, /), squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms, Boolean logic statements, or combinations of both. The controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical statements including operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These must be able to be used in the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five parentheses deep. Y. NSCs shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy management routines: 1. Time of Day Scheduling 2. Calendar Based Scheduling 3. Holiday Scheduling 4. Temporary Schedule Overrides 5. Optimal Start 6. Optimal Stop 7. Night Setback Control 8. Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer) 9. Peak Demand Limiting 10. Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling 11. CFM Tracking 12. Heating/Cooling Interlock 13. Hot/Cold Deck Reset 14. Hot Water Reset 15. Chilled Water Reset 16. Condenser Water Reset 17. Chiller Sequencing Z. History Logging: 1. Each NSC controller shall be capable of LOCALLY logging any input, output, calculated value or other system variable either over user defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes or based upon a user configurable change of value. A minimum of 1000 logs, with a minimum of 100,000 records, shall be stored. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to a higher level NSC long term archiving based upon user -defined time intervals, or manual command. 2. For extended trend logging a minimum of 1500 trends shall be capable, with a minimum number of 600,000 records within. 3. Management of a power meter replacement to ensure meter log data is accurate shall be possible in the NSC. 4. Every hardware input and output point, hosted within the NSC and attached I/O modules, shall be trended automatically without the requirement for manual creation, and each of these logs shall log values based upon a change of value and store at least 500 trend samples before replacing the oldest sample with new data. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 23 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 5. The presentation of logged data shall be built into the server capabilities of the NSC. Presentation can be in time stamped list formats or in a chart format with fully configurable pen colors, weights, scales and time spans. 6. Tooltips shall be present, magnetic, and visible based on users preference. 7. Comments shall be visible whenever viewing the trend log list. 8. System shall give indication of memory usage and be able to alert the user if too many logs are allocated. AA. Alarm Management: 1. For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or in comparison to other point values. All alarms will be tested each scan of the NSC and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports. 2. There is no limit to the number of alarms that can be created for any point 3. Alarms can be configured to be generated based upon a single system condition or multiple system conditions. 4. Alarms will be generated based on an evaluation of the alarm conditions and can be presented to the user in a fully configurable order, by priority, by time, by category, etc. These configurable alarm views will be presented to a user upon logging into the system regardless of whether the log in takes place at a WorkStation or a Webstation. 5. The alarm management system shall support the ability to create and select cause and action notes to be selected and associated with an alarm event. Checklists shall also be possible in order to present to an operator a suggested mode of troubleshooting. When acknowledging an alarm, it shall be possible to assign it to a user of the system such that the user is notified of the assignment and is made responsible for the alarm resolution. 6. Alarms must be capable of being routed to any BACnet workstation that conforms to the B- OWS device profile and uses the BACnet/IP protocol. BB. Embedded Web Server: 1. Each NSC must have the ability to serve out web pages containing the same information that is available from the Workstation. The development of the screens to accomplish shall not require any additional engineering labor over that required to show them at the WorkStation itself. 2. The NSC shall be configurable to logging all Embedded Web Server access attempts 3. The NSC shall have the option to redirect HTTP based Embedded Web Server connections to secure, HTTPS connections. 4. The NSC shall authenticate and authorize all users connecting to the Embedded Web Server 5. The NSC shall provide to ability to configure an automatic logoff for Embedded Web Server users that have not had any activity for an adjustable time period. 2.5 BACNET FIELDBUS AND BACNET SDCUS A. Networking: 1. IP Network: All devices that connect to the WAN shall be capable of operating at 10 megabits per second or 100 megabits per second. a. IP To Field Bus Routing Devices b. A Network Server Controller shall be used to provide this functionality. C. These devices shall be configurable locally with IP crossover cable and configurable via the IP network. d. The routing configuration shall be such that only data packets from the field bus devices that need to travel over the IP level of the architecture are forwarded. B. Field Bus Wiring and Termination: 1. The wiring of components shall use a bus or daisy chain concept with no tees, stubs, or free topology. 2. Each field bus shall have a termination resistor at both ends of each segment. 23 90 00 - 24 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. The field bus shall support the use of wireless communications. C. Repeaters: 1. Repeaters are required to connect two segments. 2. Repeaters shall be installed in an enclosure. The enclosure may be in an interstitial space. D. Field Bus Devices: 1. General Requirements: a. Devices shall have a light indicating that they are powered. b. Devices shall be locally powered. Link powered devices (power is furnished from a central source over the field bus cable) are not acceptable. C. Application programs shall be stored in a manner such that a loss of power does not result in a loss of the application program or configuration parameter settings. (Battery backup, flash memory, etc.) E. Advance Application Controllers (B-AAC): 1. The key characteristics of a B-AAC are: a. They have physical input and output circuits for the connection of analog input devices, binary input devices, pulse input devices, analog output devices, and binary output devices. The number and type of input and output devices supported will vary by model. b. They may or may not provide support for additional input and output devices beyond the number of circuits that are provided on the basic circuit board. Support for additional 1/0 shall be provided by additional circuit boards that physically connect to the basic controller. C. The application to be executed by a B-AAC is created by an application engineer using the vendor's application programming tool. d. If local time schedules are embedded, the B-AAC shall support the editing of time schedule entries from any BACnet OWS that supports the BACnet service for writing of time schedule parameters. e. If local trend logging is embedded, the B-AAC shall support the exporting of trend log data to any BACnet OWS that supports the read range BACnet service for trending. f. If local alarm message initiation is embedded, the B-AAC shall: 1) Deliver alarm messages to any BACnet OWS that supports the BACnet service for receiving alarm messages and is configured to be a recipient off the alarm message. 2) Support alarm acknowledgement from any BACnet OWS that supports the BACnet service for executing alarm/event acknowledgement, g. Shall support the reading of analog and binary data from any BACnet OWS or Building Controller that supports the BACnet service for the reading of data. h. Shall support the control of the out of service property and assignment of value or state to analog and binary objects from any BACnet OWS that supports writing to the out of service property and the value property of analog and binary objects. i. Shall support the receipt and response to Time Synchronization commands from a BACnet Building Controller. j. Shall support the "Who is" and "I am." BACnet services. k. Shall support the "Who has" and "I have." BACnet services. 2. Analog Input Circuits: a. The resolution of the A/D chip shall not be greater than 0.01 Volts per increment. For an A/D converter that has a measurement range of 0 to 10 VDC and is 10 bit, the resolution is 10/1024 or 0.00976 Volts per increment. b. For non -flow sensors, the control logic shall provide support for the use of a calibration offset such that the raw measured value is added to the (+/-) offset to create a calibration value to be used by the control logic and reported to the Operator Workstation (OWS). C. For flow sensors, the control logic shall provide support for the use of an adjustable gain and an adjustable offset such that a two point calibration concept can be executed (both FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 25 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a low range value and a high range value are adjusted to match values determined by a calibration instrument). d. For non -linear sensors such as thermistors and flow sensors the B-AAC shall provide software support for the linearization of the input signal. 3. Binary Input Circuits: a. Dry contact sensors shall wire to the controller with two wires. b. An external power supply in the sensor circuit shall not be required. 4. Pulse Input Circuits: a. Pulse input sensors shall wire to the controller with two wires. b. An external power supply in the sensor circuit shall not be required. C. The pulse input circuit shall be able to process up to 20 pulses per second. 5. True Analog Output Circuits: a. The logical commands shall be processed by a digital to analog (D/A) converter chip. The 0 percent to 100 percent control signal shall be scalable to the full output range which shall be either 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 milliamps or 0 to 20 milliamps or to ranges within the full output range (Example: 0 to 100 percent creates 3 to 6 VDC where the full output range is 0 to 10 VDC). b. The resolution of the D/A chip shall not be greater than 0.04 Volts per increment or 0.08 milliamps per increment. 6. Binary Output Circuits: a. Single pole, single throw or single pole, double throw relays with support for up to 230 VAC and a maximum current of 2 amps. b. Voltage sourcing or externally powered triacs with support for up to 30 VAC and 0.5 amps at 24 VAC. 7. Program Execution: a. Process control loops shall operate in parallel and not in sequence unless specifically required to operate in sequence by the sequence of control. b. The sample rate for a process control loop shall be adjustable and shall support a minimum sample rate of 1 second. C. The sample rate for process variables shall be adjustable and shall support a minimum sample rate of 1 second. d. The sample rate for algorithm updates shall be adjustable and shall support a minimum sample rate of 1 second. e. The application shall have the ability to determine if a power cycle to the controller has occurred and the application programmer shall be able to use the indication of a power cycle to modify the sequence of controller immediately following a power cycle. 8. Local Interface: a. The controller shall support the connection of a portable interface device such as a laptop computer or vendor unique hand-held device. The ability to execute any tasks other than viewing data shall be password protected. Via this local interface, an operator shall be able to: 1) Adjust application parameters. 2) Execute manual control of input and output points. 3) View dynamic data. F. Application Specific Devices: 1. Application specific devices shall have fixed function configurable applications. 2. If the application can be altered by the vendor's application programmable tool, the device is an advanced application controller and not an application specific device. 3. Application specific devices shall be BTL certified. G. Room controllers/Network Thermostats — Furnish and install network thermostats for each rooftop unit shown on the drawings. 23 90 00 - 26 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. For connected room solutions that do not require integrated lighting and blind busses built into a singular unit, the system shall include a BACnet MS-TP enabled controller specifically designed for room control. 2. The controller shall communicate via BACnet MS-TP. It should also be capable of MODBUS RTU communication. 3. The controller shall be capable of controlling fan coil units, cooling VVT zones with reheat, fin -tube radiators, cabinet heaters, radiant panel heaters, electric re -heat zones, terminal reheats, rooftop units (1H1C, 2H2C, 3H2C, MH2C), or heat pumps, if necessary. 4. The controller shall house an onboard temperature sensor, and options for onboard humidity and occupancy sensor. 5. The controller shall utilize a touch screen interface and have multiple options for casings and fascias. The screen shall be a TFT transmissive LED backlit LCD touchscreen with at least 5 color options. 6. Controller will have password protection to prevent unauthorized access to the configuration menu parameters. 7. The controller will have integrated Zigbee wireless communications with predefined profiles for Zigbee door and window switches, occupancy sensors, water leakage detectors, CO2 sensors, and additional temperature and humidity sensors. 8. The controller will be capable of hosting at least 10 Zigbee sub devices. 9. The controller will be capable of being programmed with customizable scripts via the open programming language Lua. It shall be equipped with at least 256KB of SRAM with 80KB configurable/reserved for Lua scripting purposes. 2.6 DDC SENSORS AND POINT HARDWARE A. Temperature Sensors: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries 2. All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate to +/- 1 degree F over a range of —30 to 230 degrees F. Space temperature sensors shall be accurate to +/- .5 degrees F over a range of 40 to 100 degrees F. 3. Room Sensor: Standard space sensors shall be available in an [off white][black] enclosure made of high impact ABS plastic for mounting on a standard electrical box. Basis of Design: Veris TW Series a. Where manual overrides are required, the sensor housing shall feature both an optional sliding mechanism for adjusting the space temperature setpoint, as well as a push button for selecting after hours operation. b. Where a local display is specified, the sensor shall incorporate an LCD display for viewing the space temperature, setpoint and other operator selectable parameters. Using built in buttons, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints directly from the sensor. 4. Duct Probe Sensor: Sensing element shall be fully encapsulated in potting material within a stainless steel probe. Useable in air handling applications where the coil or duct area is less than 14 square feet. Basis of Design: Veris TD Series 5. Duct Averaging Sensor: Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which are larger than 14 square feet. The averaging sensor tube shall contain at least one thermistor for every 3 feet, with a minimum tube length of 6 feet. The averaging sensor shall be constructed of rigid or flexible copper tubing. Basis of Design: Veris TA Series 6. Pipe Immersion Sensor: Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement of temperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as refrigerant applications. Provide sensor probe length suitable for application. Provide each sensor with a corresponding pipe -mounted sensor well, unless indicated otherwise. Sensor wells shall be stainless steel for non -corrosive fluids below 250 degrees F and 300 series stainless steel for all other applications. Basis of Design: Veris TI Series FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 27 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 7. Outside Air Sensor: Provide the sensing element on the building's north side. Sensing element shall be fully encapsulated in potting material within a stainless steel probe. Probe shall be encased in PVC solar radiation shield and mounted in a weatherproof enclosure. Operating range -40 to 122 F, Basis of Design: Veris TO Series 8. A pneumatic signal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature. B. Current Sensors: Current status switches shall be used to monitor fans, pumps, motors and electrical loads. Current switches shall be available in split core models, and offer either a digital or an analog signal to the automation system. Acceptable manufacturer is Veris Industries C. Current Status Switches for Constant Load Devices: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries 2. General: Factory programmed current sensor to detect motor undercurrent situations such as belt or coupling loss on constant loads. Sensor shall store motor current as operating parameter in non-volatile memory. Push-button to clear memory. 3. Visual LED indicator for status. 4. Split core sensor, induced powered from monitored load and isolated to 600 VAC rms. Sensor shall indicate status from 0.5 A to 175 A. 5. Normally open current sensor output. 0.IA at 30 VAC/DC. 6. Basis of Design: Veris Model H608. D. Current Status Switches for Constant Load Devices (Auto Calibration): 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries. 2. General: Microprocessor based, self -learning, self -calibrating current switch. Calibration -free status for both under and overcurrent, LCD display, and slide -switch selectable trip point limits. At initial power -up automatically learns average current on the line with no action required by the installer 3. Split core sensor, induced powered from monitored load and isolated to 600 VAC rms. Sensor shall indicate status from 2.5 A to 200 A. 4. Display: Backlit LCD; illuminates when monitored current exceeds 4.5A 5. Nominal Trip Point: ±40 percent, ±60 percent, or on/off (user selectable) 6. Normally open current sensor output. 0.IA at 30 VAC/DC. 7. Basis of Design: Veris Model H11D. E. Smoke Detectors: 1. Air duct smoke detectors shall be by Air Products and Controls or approved equal. The detectors shall operate at air velocities from 300 feet per minute to 4000 feet per minute. 2. The smoke detector shall utilize a photoelectric detector head. 3. The housing shall permit mechanical installation without removal of the detector cover. 4. The detectors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and meet the requirements of UL 268A. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. In addition to the requirements specified herein, execution shall be in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 23 00 00 and Drawings. B. Examine equipment exterior and interior prior to installation. Report any damage and do not install any equipment that is structurally, moisture, or mildew damaged. C. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Engineer, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by the Installer. 239000-28 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT E. Install equipment in accordance with reviewed product data, final shop drawings, manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations, and as indicated on the Drawings. F. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer that shall help ensure that the equipment is without damage at time of Substantial Completion. G. Demolition: Remove controls which do not remain as part of the building automation system, all associated abandoned wiring and conduit, and all associated pneumatic tubing. The Owner will inform the Contractor of any equipment which is to be removed that will remain the property of the Owner. All other equipment which is removed will be disposed of by the Contractor. H. Access to Site: Unless notified otherwise, entrance to building is restricted. No one will be permitted to enter the building unless their names have been cleared with the Owner or the Owner's Representative. I. Code Compliance: All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes and will comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be in conduit and shall be installed by the contractor under this section. Should any discrepancy be found between wiring specifications in Division 23 and Divisions 26, wiring requirements of Division 23 will prevail for work specified in Division 23. J. Cleanup: At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned, and all other areas shall be cleaned around equipment provided under this contract. 3.2 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. All application software will be verified and compared against the sequences of operation. B. Control loops will be exercised by inducing a setpoint shift of at least 10 percent and observing whether the system successfully returns the process variable to setpoint. Record all test results and attach to the Test Results Sheet. C. Test each alarm in the system and validate that the system generates the appropriate alarm message, that the message appears at all prescribed destinations (workstations or printers), and that any other related actions occur as defined (i.e. graphic panels are invoked, reports are generated, etc.). Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner. D. Perform an operational test of each unique graphic display and report to verify that the item exists, that the appearance and content are correct, and that any special features work as intended. Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner. E. Perform an operational test of each third party interface that has been included as part of the automation system. Verify that all points are properly polled, that alarms have been configured, and that any associated graphics and reports have been completed. If the interface involves a file transfer over Ethernet, test any logic that controls the transmission of the file, and verify the content of the specified information. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Hardware Installation Practices for Wiring: 1. All controllers are to be mounted vertically and per the manufacturer's installation documentation. 2. The 120VAC power wiring to each Ethernet or Remote Site controller shall be a dedicated run, with a separate breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral and ground wire. The ground wire will terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit or device. 3. A true earth ground must be available in the building. Do not use a corroded or galvanized pipe, or structural steel. 4. Wires are to be attached to the building proper at regular intervals such that wiring does not droop. Wires are not to be affixed to or supported by pipes, conduit, etc. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 29 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 5. Conduit in finished areas will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces and wall construction. Exception; metallic surface raceway may be used in finished areas on masonry walls. All surface raceway in finished areas must be color matched to the existing finish within the limitations of standard manufactured colors. 6. Conduit, in non -finished areas where possible, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces, and wall construction. Exposed conduit will run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure. 7. Wires are to be kept a minimum of three (3) inches from hot water, steam, or condensate piping. 8. Where sensor wires leave the conduit system, they are to be protected by a plastic insert. 9. Wire will not be allowed to run across telephone equipment areas. 10. Provide fire caulking at all rated penetrations. B. Installation Practices for Field Devices: 1. Well -mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure good heat transfer to the sensor. 2. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will be adjusted to give smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke. 3. Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils. Suppression devices shall limit transients to 150 percent of the rated coil voltage. 4. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they are installed. 5. For duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be connected to a metal static pressure probe inserted into the duct pointing upstream. The low pressure port shall be left open to the plenum area at the point that the high pressure port is tapped into the ductwork. 6. For building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be inserted into the space via a metal tube. Pipe the low pressure port to the outside of the building. C. Wiring, Conduit, and Cable: 1. All wire will be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class listed below: a. Power - 12 Gauge - 600 Volt b. Class One - 14 Gauge Std. - 600 Volt C. Class Two - 18 Gauge Std. - 300 Volt d. Class Three - 18 Gauge Std. - 300 Volt e. Communications - Per Mfr. 2. Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit. 3. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code. 4. All wiring is required to be installed in conduit. EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be minimum 3/4 inch galvanized EMT. Set screw fittings are acceptable for dry interior locations. Watertight compression fittings shall be used for exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture. Provide conduit seal -off fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of high temperature/moisture differential. 5. Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors, actuators, controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid -tight flexible conduit shall be use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture. 6. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment termination, and transitions from EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, nominal four -inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location JH-boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers. 7. Where the space above the ceiling is a supply or return air plenum, the wiring shall be plenum rated. Teflon wiring can be run without conduit above suspended ceilings. EXCEPTION: Any wire run in suspended ceilings that is used to control outside air dampers or to connect the system to the fire management system shall be in conduit. 23 90 00 - 30 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 8. Fiber optic cable shall include the following sizes; 50/125, 62.5/125 or 100/140. 9. Only glass fiber is acceptable, no plastic. 10. Fiber optic cable shall only be installed and terminated by an experienced contractor. The BAS system supplier shall submit to the Engineer the name of the intended contractor of the fiber optic cable with his submittal documents. D. Enclosures: I. For all I/O requiring field interface devices, these devices where practical will be mounted in a field interface panel (FIP). The Contractor shall provide an enclosure which protects the device(s) from dust, moisture, conceals integral wiring and moving parts. 2. FIPs shall contain power supplies for sensors, interface relays and contactors, and safety circuits. 3. The FIP enclosure shall be of steel construction with baked enamel finish; NEMA 1 rated with a hinged door and keyed lock. The enclosure will be sized for twenty percent spare mounting space. All locks will be keyed identically. 4. All wiring to and from the FIP will be to screw type terminals. Analog or communications wiring may use the FIP as a raceway without terminating. The use of wire nuts within the FIP is prohibited. 5. All outside mounted enclosures shall meet the NEMA-4 rating. 6. The wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic track. Wiring within controllers shall be wrapped and secured. E. Identification: 1. Identify all control wires with labeling tape or sleeves using words, letters, or numbers that can be exactly cross-referenced with as -built drawings. 2. All field enclosures, other than controllers, shall be identified with a Bakelite nameplate. The lettering shall be in white against a black or blue background. 3. Junction box covers will be marked to indicate that they are a part of the BAS system. 4. All 1/0 field devices (except space sensors) that are not mounted within FIP's shall be identified with name plates. 5. All I/O field devices inside FIP's shall be labeled. F. Existing Controls: Existing controls which are to be reused must each be tested and calibrated for proper operation. Existing controls which are to be reused and are found to be defective requiring replacement, will be noted to the Owner. The Owner will be responsible for all material and labor costs associated with their repair. G. Location: 1. The location of sensors is per mechanical and architectural drawings. 2. Space humidity or temperature sensors will be mounted away from machinery generating heat, direct light and diffuser air streams. 3. Outdoor air sensors will be mounted on the north building face directly in the outside air. Install these sensors such that the effects of heat radiated from the building or sunlight is minimized. 4. Field enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the controller panel(s) to which it is being interfaced. H. Software Installation: The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful operation of the system. 3.4 TRAINING A. The BAS system supplier shall provide both on -site and classroom training to the Owner's representative and maintenance personnel per the following description: B. On -site training shall consist of a minimum of (8) hours of hands-on instruction geared at the operation and maintenance of the systems. The curriculum shall include: 1. System Overview FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 31 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 2. System Software and Operation 3. System access 4. Software features overview 5. Changing setpoints and other attributes 6. Scheduling 7. Editing programmed variables 8. Displaying color graphics 9. Running reports 10. Workstation maintenance 11. Viewing application programming 12. Operational sequences including start-up, shutdown, adjusting and balancing. 13. Equipment maintenance C. Factory, classroom training will include a minimum of (2) training reservations for a 3 day course with material covering workstation operation tuition free with travel expense responsibility of the owner. The option for 2-3 weeks of system engineering and controller programming shall be possible if necessary and desired. CONTROL SYSTEM SWITCH -OVER A. Demolition of the existing control system will occur after the new temperature control system is in place including new sensors and new field interface devices. B. Switch -over from the existing control system to the new system will be fully coordinated with the Owner. A representative of the Owner will be on site during switch -over. C. The Contractor shall minimize control system downtime during switch -over. Sufficient installation mechanics will be on site so that the entire switch -over can be accomplished in a reasonable time frame. DATABASE CONFIGURATION. A. The Contractor will provide all labor to configure those portions of the database that are required by the points list and sequence of operation. COLOR GRAPHIC DISPLAYS A. Unless otherwise directed by the owner, the Contractor will provide color graphic displays as depicted in the mechanical drawings for each system and floor plan. For each system or floor plan, the display shall contain the associated points identified in the point list and allow for setpoint changes as required by the owner. REPORTS A. The Contractor will configure a minimum of minimum, be able to provide: 1. Trend comparison data 2. Alarm status and prevalence information 3. Energy Consumption data 4. System user data POINT TO POINT CHECKOUT 23 90 00 - 32 4 reports for the owner. These reports shall, at a FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Each VO device (both field mounted as well as those located in FIPs) shall be inspected and verified for proper installation and functionality. A checkout sheet itemizing each device shall be filled out, dated and approved by the Project Manager for submission to the owner or owner's representative. B. In case of wireless devices, the signal strength recorded during checkout shall be reported. 3.10 CONTROLLER AND WORKSTATION CHECKOUT A. A field checkout of all controllers and front end equipment (computers, printers, modems, etc.) shall be conducted to verify proper operation of both hardware and software. A checkout sheet itemizing each device and a description of the associated tests shall be prepared and submitted to the owner or owner's representative by the completion of the project. 3.11 DOCUMENTATION A. As built software documentation will include the following: 1. Descriptive point lists 2. Application program listing 3. Application programs with comments. 4. Printouts of all reports. 5. Alarm list. 6. Printouts of all graphics 7. Commissioning and System Startup 8. An electronic copy of all databases, configuration files, or any type of files created specifically for each system. 3.12 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Packaged Rooftop Units: 1. Provide a network thermostat connected to the building automation system for each unit. 2. Each thermostat shall be equipped with up/down arrows, temperature indication, and an override button with variable duration. 3. Provide a discharge air temperature sensor for each unit to monitor discharge air temperature for troubleshooting purposes. 4. Graphics shall show a building floor plan and location of all units with rooms served by each unit. Temperatures shall be displayed, along with thermostat setpoint. Provide fan status with positive feedback through a current transformer. Provide graphic means to adjust occupied periods. 5. For each unit, provide a separate graphics screen showing zone temperature, setpoint, fan status, mode of operation, and discharge temperature. 6. On a fire alarm, all units over 2000 cfm shall be shut down. Close any and all fire dampers in the system. B. Exhaust Fans: 1. Provide a start/stop and positive indication of run status for all exhaust fans in the building. Note that all fans shall have HOA switches so that they may be switched with the lights or with switches mounted on the face of hoods, as well as from the building automation system. Generally, exhaust fans serving drying or fingerprint hoods shall be switched on the face of the hood. C. Other Points: 1. Provide a temperature sensor and alarm in the IT room. If the room temperature rises above 78 deg. F., cause an alarm at the front end. 2. Provide form C contacts and connect to the fire alarm system. Report trouble alarm or fire alarm to the building automation system. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 23 90 00 - 33 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 23 90 00 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Annunciate the FM200 system actuation to the building automation system, along with any supervisory alarms. 4. Annunciate run condition of the emergency generator. Provide generator run status and trouble alarm for the generator. END OF SECTION 23 90 00 23 90 00 - 34 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 0100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 26 0100 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment Requirements. 2. Materials. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. The work included in Division 26 of the Specifications includes all electrical work, interior and exterior to the project. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, transportation, tools, permits, fees, and supervision to install, test and make operational the complete electrical systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide and install products in accordance with referenced standards. Comply with the standards listed in each section. 1. Codes: The electrical work shall be in accordance with latest edition of the following codes: a. National Electrical Code b. National Electrical Safety Code C. Life Safety Code d. International Building Code e. City of Lubbock Electrical Ordinance f. State of Texas codes as applicable g. National Fire Protection Association h. Other codes as referenced in individual sections B. Material Standards: Materials and equipment shall be listed or labeled as defined in Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner. Materials shall be marked for their intended use. C. Permits and Inspections: Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of the work and pay all charges incident thereto. Deliver to the Owner all certificates of inspections issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for equipment as listed in each Section. B. Submittals shall include descriptive material, catalog sheets, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the manufacturer to show conformance with drawings and specifications. C. Provide complete electrical characteristics for all equipment. Lighting submittals shall include photometric data. D. Submittals shall be clearly marked showing the individual item offered. E. All electrical submittals shall be bound in a book, indexed by specification section, and certified that they have been checked by the contractor. F. Omissions from the submittal of any material which has been shown on the drawings or specified, does not relieve the contractor from furnishing and installing the item. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 2601 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 0100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT &C Vil/\ 9 51V\0"1J A. The contractor warrants the material and equipment installed to be free from defects for a period of one year after acceptance by the owner. All defects in labor or materials occurring during this period shall be repaired or replaced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical equipment specified and shown on the drawings is based on information available at the time of design. If the equipment furnished has different electrical requirements, the contractor shall make the required changes to the wire, conduit, controls, overcurrent protection, switchgear, and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the owner. The cost for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this Specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be UL labeled where a Standard exists for the product. If the product does not bear the UL label, the manufacturer shall submit documentation from an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, showing evidence that the product is suitable for the installation. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products in current production of manufacturer's regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. C. All materials shall be new and free from defects. Materials of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. D. All material and equipment shall be installed, applied, and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and standards. E. Where no specific material is mentioned, provide the required material from a reputable manufacturer. The material shall conform to the project requirements, and shall be suitable to the engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabricate, erect, and install the complete electrical systems in accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel who are licensed and experienced in such work. Proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. 3.2 DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Carefully coordinate the work with structural, architectural, and mechanical conditions. Make adjustments to avoid conflicts. B. The locations shown for electrical equipment is approximate and not intended to convey the exact details of installation. Exact locations are to be determined in the field by actual measurements. C. The contractor is responsible for fitting the equipment and material into the space. If the equipment furnished requires different space conditions than shown on the drawings, the contractor shall arrange 260100-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 0100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT for such space and shall submit a drawing indicating the exact details of installation prior to construction. D. Do not scale drawings. Layout electrical equipment using dimensions obtained from the manufacturer of the equipment and from field measurements. 3.3 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Prior to submitting bids, visit the site and become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. Include in the bid the work required to remove, extend, relocate, reconnect or modify existing equipment or systems, and to restore them to their original condition. 3.4 MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and recommendations. B. All materials, except those specifically designed to be installed outdoors, shall be stored in an enclosed, dry building or trailer. Protect all stored equipment from damage. Remove damaged materials from the premises. C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment and materials. They shall be protected from water, direct sunlight, cold and heat unless designed for such conditions. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Sleeve or cut all openings in walls, floors, ceilings and roof required to install the electrical work. B. Do not cut structural members unless specific permission is granted by the structural engineer. C. Patch all openings after installation of the work, and repair any damage caused by this activity. Restore the surface to its original condition. 3.6 PAINTING A. Refer to PAINTING Section of these Specifications. B. Touchup scratched or marred surfaces of all electrical equipment with paint obtained from the equipment manufacturer's specifically for that purpose. Remove all oil, dirt, grease and foreign material before painting and prepare the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where plywood backboards are used to mount equipment, paint backboards with two coats of light gray semi -gloss paint. 3.7 TESTING A. Provide all field-testing specified in the individual specification sections. 3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide record documents as required in Division 01 of the specifications. 3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals as required in Division 01 of the specifications. B. Before final inspection, instruct the owner's personnel in operation of the systems under this Division. Use the Operation and Maintenance Manual as basis for the instruction. Review the contents of the manual in detail and explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 2601 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 0100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Prepare and insert additional data in the manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. END OF SECTION 26 01 00 260100-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 18 WIRES AND CABLES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 26 05 18 - WIRES AND CABLES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conductors. 2. Joints and Splices. 3. Color Coding. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets on all conductors and cables and wire. 1.3 SCOPE A. Under this Section, furnish and install all building wires and cables (600 volts and below) complete with connectors and terminations. Exterior branch circuits and feeders are also included in this section. Wiring for communication and alarm systems are included in their respective sections unless they reference this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products which comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) UL 44 Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs UL 510 Insulating Tape PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. Insulated Cable: a. Southwire Co. b. Senator Wire and Cable Co. C. Okonite d. Anaconda e. Pirelli Cable Co. 2. Electrical Spring Connectors: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 l 8 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 18 WIRES AND CABLES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. Scotch b. Ideal C. Buchanan 3. Compression Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch C. Ilsco 4. Mechanical Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch C. Ideal Insulating Kits: a. Raychem b. Scotch 6. Insulating Tape: Scotch `-A►�QWILI1 eMelIR A. Type: Soft drawn copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, free from flaws and imperfections. Conductors no. 10 and smaller shall be solid. Conductors larger than no. 10 shall be stranded. B. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, otherwise specified in other Sections, or otherwise required by the National Electrical Code, conductors shall have type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. C. High Temperatures: Use type RHH or RHW-2 for wiring in proximity to boilers and other devices subject to high temperatures. D. Markings: Conductors shall be marked on the surface with rated voltage, size, type, and manufacturer. The size shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 24 inches, with the remaining data repeated at intervals not exceeding 40 inches. E. Performance: Conductors shall be electrically continuous and free from shorts or grounds. All open or shorted conductors shall be replaced. All conductors with damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced with new conductors free from defects. F. Conductors and cables installed open in ceiling plenums shall be plenum -rated. 2.3 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Solid Conductors (No. 10 AWG and smaller): U.L. approved, screw -on, electrical spring connectors, 600 volt, 105C, insulated. B. Stranded Conductors (No. 8 and Larger): Crimp type compression connectors properly selected for the conductor size and material. All connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools as recommended by the manufacturer. Insulate the splice with an insulating kit providing 600 volt, 90C rating. 2.4 COLOR CODING A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. Grounding conductors from isolated grounding system shall be green with yellow stripes. 2. Equipment grounding conductors, no. 6 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Sizes larger than no. 6 awg shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of green tape, or green adhesive labels. 260518-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 18 WIRES AND CABLES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Neutral Conductors: 1. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural gray. 2. Where systems of different voltages are installed, the neutral of the lower voltage shall be white or natural gray, and the neutral of the higher voltage shall have three continuous white stripes on other than green insulation. 3. Sizes no. 6 awg, or smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of white tape or stripped tape or white adhesive labels. C. Phase Conductors: 1. Conductors no. 10 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of colored tape, or colored adhesive labels. 2. The color -coding system employed shall be permanently posted on the inside door of each branch -circuit panelboard. The posting shall identify the color -coding of each phase conductor and shall be applied to the inside of the door with adhesive. 3. 120/208 volt, 3 phase system: Phase A — Black Phase B — Red Phase C — Blue PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING A. Install all wiring in raceways unless specified otherwise. B. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Use U.L. listed cable pulling compound where necessary. C. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. D. Wire Sizing: 1. No wire shall be smaller than no. 12, except for signal and control circuits, or lighting fixture taps. 2. Receptacle and motor branch circuits — Use no. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. 3. 120 volt, 20 amp lighting and receptacle branch circuits — Where the length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet or receptacle exceeds 85 feet use no. 10 conductors; otherwise use no. 12. 4. Where more than three current -carrying conductors are installed in the same conduit or raceway, the conductors shall be increased in size as required to maintain the required ampacity after application of the adjustment factors of NEC Table 310-15(b)(2)(a). 5. All branch circuit wiring connected to the load side of dimmers shall have an individual neutral installed with each circuit. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 18 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 18 WIRES AND CABLES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT E. Joints and Splices: 1. Make j oints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes, wiring troughs and other enclosures permitted by the NEC. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. 2. Do not splice conductors in panelboards, safety switches, switchboards, motor control centers or motor control enclosures. 3. Conductors for use with insulated spring connectors shall be twisted together prior to application of the connector. F. Terminations: Tighten electrical connections and terminations in accordance with the manufacturer's published values. A calibrated tool shall be used to insure proper torque values. G. Bundling: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets, pullboxes and the like using nylon straps made for this purpose. Bundle conductors larger than no. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. H. Identification: Refer to ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION. 1. Mark conductors to clearly identify each circuit by number. Securely attach to each conductor in each junction box, pull box, panelboard, etc. 2. The cover of each junction box and pullbox shall be marked with the designations of each circuit contained therein. 3. Where colored plastic tape is applied to conductors for identification, use half -lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from the terminal points and in boxes where taps and splices are made. Apply the last two turns with no tension to prevent unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape applied to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Tests and procedures shall be in accordance with the applicable IPCEA standards. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing. Submit test data to the engineer on data sheets in a format that can be compared with future testing. All test data shall be included in the project operating manual. B. Test wires and cables for electrical continuity and short circuits. C. Prior to terminating, check each service and feeder conductor with megohmmeter to determine the insulation resistance with respect to ground and other phases. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts do for 1 minute. D. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturer's recommended values using calibrated torque wrench. E. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. END OF SECTION 26 0518 260518-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 25 GROUNDING AND BONDING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 26 05 25 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conductors. 2. Ground Rods. 3. Chemical Electrodes. 4. Ground Connectors. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all grounding equipment. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install grounding equipment and systems as specified herein. Also refer to, and comply with specific grounding requirements contained in other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Grounding Products: a. Chance / Hubbell b. Copperweld Corp C. Erico Inc. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. ILSCO f. Kearney / Cooper Power Systems g. Lyncoln XIT Grounding FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 25 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 25 GROUNDING AND BONDING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT h. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. i. Thomas and Betts j. Raco, Inc. k. Burndy 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Use insulated conductors that comply with WIRES AND CABLES Section. 2. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. 3. Isolated ground conductors shall be green with yellow stripes. 4. No. 6 AWG and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of conductor. Larger sizes shall be identified with color -coded plastic tape at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. For equipment grounding conductors use green tape. For isolated ground conductors use alternating bands of green and yellow tape with a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. B. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Insulated stranded cable complying with WIRES AND CABLES Section. C. Underground Ground Conductors: Bare conductors installed underground shall be tinned, stranded complying with ASTM B8. D. Bonding Conductors: 1. Bonding cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of no. 17 AWG, copper. 2. Bonding Conductor: Bare stranded copper. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors terminated with copper ferrules. 2.3 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be one-piece or sectional type, copper -clad steel, 5/8-inch in diameter by 10 feet long. 2.4 CHEMICAL ELECTRODES A. System: Rods shall be an electrolytically enhanced, self-contained system which hygroscopically extracts moisture from the air to activate the electrolytic process. The system shall be UL listed, 100 percent self -activating, sealed, maintenance -free. B. Electrode Unit: 1. Rods shall be 2 inches diameter hollow copper tube, capped at top and bottom. Air breather holes shall be provided in the top of the tube and drainage holes in the bottom for electrolytic drainage into the surrounding soil. 2. Rods shall be filled at the factory with non -hazardous Calsolyte. 3. Rods shall be a minimum of 10 feet long. 4. Stranded No. 4/0 AWG copper ground wire shall be Cadwelded to side of rod for electrode conductor connection. Clamping "U-bolt" with pressure plate on the top end of the tube shall be provided for testing and temporary connections. C. Ground Access Box: Precast concrete box with slots for conduit entrances. Minimum size 10 inches diameter by 12 inches high. Cast iron grate flush cover with "breather" slots, same manufacturer as chemical rods. D. Backfill Material: 1. Natural volcanic, non -corrosive form of bentonite clay material free of polymer sealants. 2. Shall absorb approximately 14 gallons of water per 50-pound bag for optimal 30 percent solids density. 260525-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 25 GROUNDING AND BONDING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PH value 8-10 with maximum resistivity of 3 ohm-m at 30 percent solids density. 2.5 GROUND CONNECTORS A. Compression Connectors: 1. Suitable for direct burial, embedded in concrete, or above grade applications, equal to Burndy Hyground. 2. Connectors shall be equivalent in current -carrying capacity to the maximum size copper conductors being joined. 3. Equipment shall be in accordance with the connector manufacturers' recommendation. This shall include cable preparation, installation tools and dies, and the required number of crimps. B. Bolted Connectors: 1. UL listed for grounding. 2. Above grade applications. 3. Provide equipment in accordance with connector manufacturers' recommendations for the application. C. Welded Connectors: 1. Exothermic -welded type, UL listed for grounding connections. 2. Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, conductors and other items to be connected. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICE GROUNDING A. Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the NEC. B. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding conductor (grounding electrode conductor) without joint or splice to the grounding electrode system. At each end point of connection, attach the metal conduit containing the grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode, or bond the grounding electrode conductor to its conduit as it exits the conduit with a fitting selected for this purpose. Separate bonding jumpers are not permitted for bonding the conduit to the electrode. 3.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Ground rods B. Chemical ground rod(s) C. Building steel D. Water service line E. Concrete -encased electrode (Ufer ground) 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. B. Install a separate, green -insulated, equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and each branch conduit. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with related phase and neutral conductors, and connect to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 25 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 25 GROUNDING AND BONDING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect the grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and ground busses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. C. Install equipment grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Install equipment grounding conductors in all flexible metal conduit and liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Ground Rods: 1. Install at least 3 rods spaced at least one rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from the other grounding electrodes. 2. Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Interconnect ground rods with No. 2/0 bare, tinned, stranded copper 24 inches below grade. Attach with exothermic welds except at test wells. B. Chemical Ground Rod(s): 1. Install in compliance with manufacturers' instructions. 2. Bore hole 6 inches deeper than length of rod to be buried. 3. Remove sealing tape from leaching holes. 4. Place rod in hole and backfill with the material obtained with the system. Mix each 50 pound bag with 14 gallons water and pour around the rod to the level directed. 5. Place protective box so top is flush with grade level. 6. Remove sealing tape from top breather holes to activate. 7. Connect grounding electrode conductor to rod pigtail. C. Metallic Water Service Pipe: 1. Clean contact surfaces thoroughly to assure good metal to metal contact. 2. Where a dielectric fitting occurs on the water main, connect the grounding conductor on the street side of the fitting. 3. Connect to the pipe with a grounding fitting designed to attach the grounding conductor and its conduit to the pipe. D. Grounding Building Steel: The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the grounding electrode system. kXX 01104 N 13 QK19 X611 I IfUr.10121 OKI] 11014 A. Inspection: 1. Visually verify proper grounding connections at the service entrance equipment. 2. Visually verify proper connections to the grounding electrode system. 3. Visually verify proper grounding connections of separately derived systems. 4. Visually verify proper grounding connections at emergency generators. 5. Visually verify proper grounding connections at distribution panels and branch circuit panels. B. Testing: 1. Perform ground impedance measurements using the fall -of -potential method described in IEEE Standard 81. Instrumentation utilized shall be specifically designed for ground testing. 2. The testing shall be performed before the electrical distribution system is energized, and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after rainfall, and without moistening the ground. 3. The impedance -to -ground of the main grounding electrode system shall be 5 ohms or less. 260525-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 25 GROUNDING AND BONDING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Where tests show an impedance to ground of more than 5 ohms, take action to decrease this value to 5 ohms by driving and interconnecting additional ground rods, installing ground plates, or installing chemical electrodes. END OF SECTION 26 05 25 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 25 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 32 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 26 05 32 - RACEWAYS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Conduit and Fittings. 2. PVC Conduit and Fittings. 3. PVC Coated Metal Conduit and Fittings. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all conduits and fittings. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install all conduits, wireways, raceways, and fittings for all systems interior and exterior to the building. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C-80.1 Rigid Galvanized Conduit C-80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit UL 651 Rigid PVC Conduit UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit UL 360 Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) RN1 Externally PVC Coated GRS and IMC Conduit PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Metal Conduit and Fittings: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 32 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 32 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. Allied b. Wheatland C. Appleton d. Raco C. Killark f. O-Z / Gedney 2. PVC Conduit and Fittings: a. Carlon b. Certainteed 3. PVC Coated Metal Conduit: a. Robroy Industries b. Levy 2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS): 1. Rigid, threaded, galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel, galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Steel tubing, galvanized outside with slick corrosion resistant interior coating. 2. Steel compression couplings and box connectors. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips. Aluminum is not permitted. 2. Flexible conduit shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Connectors shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips with PVC cover extruded over the exterior to make the conduit liquidtight. 2. Shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity, liquidtight. [►��ZK � � 11YII�►i7yYWY1►[l1.y A. PVC conduit shall be Schedule 40 unless noted otherwise. B. Exterior underground conduit encased in concrete ductbank shall be type EB. C. Conduit fittings shall be the same material as the conduit supplied by the same manufacturer. 2.4 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. PVC coating shall be bonded to the galvanized outer surface of the conduit, minimum 20 mil thick. B. Couplings shall have PVC coating with PVC sleeve extending from both ends such that joining the coupling and conduit will cover all metal surfaces. 260532-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 32 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the work under this Section. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets, and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return the surface to approximately its original condition. B. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work under this Division. C. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill. Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations, and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. D. Make trenches the necessary width for proper installation of the lines. E. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. F. Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing pavement, cut the pavement as required. Hold the size of the cut to a minimum consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation of the new work is completed, and the excavation has been backfilled, patch the paving using materials to match those cut out. Take care that the patches are level with the original surfaces and thoroughly bond with them. 3.2 BACKFILLING A. Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, soft shale or other approved material free from large clods of earth deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6-inck layers. B. Do not use broken concrete or pavement as backfill material. C. Settling the backfill with water is permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. D. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and smooth off. E. Install continuous identification tape as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION. F. Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved as specified above except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6-inch layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density of not less that 95 percent Standard Proctor in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and permit paving the area immediately after backfilling as completed. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND DUCTS A. Concrete between ducts and earth, and with 3 inches of concrete between adjacent ducts. Provide at least 30 inches of cover from top of concrete encasement to finished grade. Install with uniform slope for drainage, with no low pockets to collect water. B. Build up duct banks completely in the trench before any concrete is poured, using factory -fabricated plastic conduit spacers in staggered configuration to provide the proper horizontal and vertical spacings, and securing the entire assembly with heavy twine or cord to insure rigidity during pouring. Do not use metal for this purpose. Assemble conduits with staggered adjacent couplings so that no two couplings will lie in the same transverse plane, in a vertical direction. Use solvent cement as directed by the duct manufacturer in making up all joints. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 32 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 32 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Fabricate duct runs with standard factory -made fittings, elbows and accessories. Make all changes of direction, horizontal or vertical, with long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet, except that manufactured bends at or near the ends of the runs may be used on short runs of 100 feet or less. Make long sweep bends with one or more curved or straight sections of duct. Manufactured bends, where permitted, shall have a minimum radius of 10 times the nominal duct diameter. Where manufactured ducts of greater than a 30-degree angle are required, use rigid hot dipped galvanized steel conduit bends. During construction, protect partially completed duct lines from entrance of dirt and debris by means of suitable factory -made duct plugs. After completion of installation, seal all ends of spare ducts with factory made duct plugs. D. Where ducts enter in or under buildings, change from plastic duct to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade outside the structure, using suitable factory adapters. At the point of change of materials, extend the concrete envelope to enclose at least 2 feet of steel conduit. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. E. Install the concrete envelope for a given duct run in one pour where possible. Use concrete of 3000 psi compressive strength. In pouring concrete, do not allow heavy masses of concrete to fall on ducts. Direct flow of concrete down sides of assembly to bottom, forcing it to flow to center of bank and then to rise up in middle, filling all spaces uniformly. Spade concrete liberally and carefully with a long, flat slicing bar between vertical rows to eliminate voids. Weight or brace the duct bank assembly if necessary, to prevent the assembly from floating. Because of the fact that plastic conduits may expand considerably during construction, each run and its concrete envelope shall be installed starting at one end and proceeding toward the other with any necessary adjustments to length being made at the end toward which the work is progressing. F. After ducts are installed, complete with envelope, and before pulling any cable, pull a mandrel through every duct to check for alignment and clear passage. Use an iron -shod mandrel with a diameter of 1/4-inch less than the nominal size of the duct and a length equal to the duct diameter. Mandrel shall have a leather or rubber gasket slightly larger than the duct hole. After testing the ducts with the mandrel, pull a stiff -bristled brush through each duct until it is clear of all particles of earth, sand or gravel; then install duct plugs immediately. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT A. Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless noted to the contrary. Assemble and install raceways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make joints with couplings and solvent cement. Fabricate bends of 30 degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or flattening are unacceptable. Ream ends of all conduit before joining. B. "Snake" plastic conduit in trench, from side to side, with a complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and contraction. Maintain this configuration during backfilling. C. Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside of such structures. Do not extend any plastic conduit above grade. Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit at connections to underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT A. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 3M Company 0.020-inch thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3 inches on both sides of joints. 260532-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 32 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 3.6 INSTALLATION OF PVC COATED CONDUITS A. During installation, visually examine the conduit for cuts. Patch these areas with a paste containing a PVC solvent obtained from the conduit manufacturer. The patch shall be built up to the original thickness of the coating and feathered out on all sides of the damaged area a minimum of 1/2-inch to provide a complete bonded seal over the damaged area. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or PVC coated rigid galvanized steel or wrapped rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12 inches long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3 inches of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1 inch from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. G. Different Systems: In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase conductors, where different phase conductors are to be run to a common gang wall switch box, install a separate conduit for each different phase wire and its return switch leg, and provide substantial barriers between adjacent switches in the box so that two different phase wires will not be the same compartment. H. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. 1. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. J. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire -resistive and installed to meet requirements of the UL Fire Resistance Directory. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 32 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 32 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.8 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4-inch and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4-inch are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4-inch are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. END OF SECTION 26 05 32 260532-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 34 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 26 05 34 - BOXES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Outlet and Device Boxes. 2. Pullboxes and Junction Boxes. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets for all boxes. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install electrical boxes in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) No. 514 Outlet boxes and fittings No. 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. OS 1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports No. FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. Sheet Steel Outlet and Device Boxes: a. Raco b. Steel City C. Appleton 2. Cast Metal Device Boxes: a. Crouse Hinds b. Appleton C. Pyle National FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 34 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 34 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.2 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. All boxes shall be UL listed. B. Sheet steel boxes shall be not lighter than 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication. C. Cast metal boxes shall be cast iron or cast alloy. D. Outlet boxes for switches, receptacles and communications use shall be 4-inch square with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. Box depth shall be as required by NEC for device and wiring volume requirements, but not smaller than 1-1/2-inch. E. Boxes for devices mounted flush in concrete block walls shall be single gang masonry boxes, 3-1/2- inch deep. F. Boxes installed in poured concrete shall be concrete -tight type. G. Boxes for surface mounted or pendant fixtures shall be 4 inches octagonal by 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. H. Boxes for flush mounted fixtures shall be 4-inch by 4-inch size with cover installed above the ceiling and accessible by removing ceiling panel or fixture. Connection to fixture shall be with flexible conduit. I. Boxes for interior exposed work shall be cast metal boxes (Cast iron or cast alloy). J. Boxes for outdoors shall be cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 2.3 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Dimensions shall be as required by NEC for the number, size and locations of conduits entering the box. C. Boxes installed above ceilings shall be accessible by removing ceiling panels, installing access door in hard ceiling, or flush mounting the cover on the ceiling. D. Boxes installed flush in walls in finished areas shall have overlapping trim with hinged door and lock to match the appearance of electrical panelboard. E. All boxes shall have covers. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. All pull and junction boxes shall be accessible after construction is complete. Install access panels in the construction as required to make the box accessible. C. Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. D. Where outlet box on grid ceiling supports surface or suspended fixture, provide box with fixture stud and secure the box to ceiling members with steel channel. E. Outlet boxes for devices shown back to back shall be offset a minimum of 6 inches. F. All boxes shall have covers and unused conduit openings shall be covered. END OF SECTION 26 05 34 260534-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 52 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 26 05 52 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment Nameplates and Signs. 2. Conductor Identification Materials. 3. Underground Line Warning Tape. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide and install electrical identification for electrical conductors and equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Comply with UL Standard 969. C. Comply with ANSI C2. D. Comply with NEMA WC-1 and WC-2. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. W. H. Brady 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Seton Nameplate Co. 4. Panduit Corp. 2.2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates: 1. Melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16-inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches, and 1/8- inch thick for larger sizes. 2. White letters on black face for equipment connected to normal power system. 3. White letters on red face for equipment connected to emergency power system. 4. Attach with self -tapping stainless -steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive can be used where screws can not or should not penetrate the surface. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 52 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 52 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1-1/2-inch wide. B. Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters to show circuit identification. 2.4 UNDERGROUND LINE WARNING TAPE A. Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indication type of underground line. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical identification products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and OSHA. B. For items attached with adhesive, degrease and clean the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where items attach to surfaces that require painting, attach after completion of painting. D. Install signs at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. E. Identification on Raceways and Boxes: 1. Every box containing circuit wiring shall have the circuit numbers marked on the outside cover of the junction box. Use indelible marker with wide tip. Markings for normal circuits shall be black, and shall be red for emergency circuits. 2. Junction boxes shall be painted to identify the securing system according to the following schedule: a. Fire Alarm — Red b. 120/208V normal wiring — Brown C. 120/208V emergency wiring — Black d. Security — Orange C. Telephone/data — Purple i Temperature Controls — Gray (Unpainted) Raceways feeding the junction boxes shall have identification to match the colors of the junction boxes. This identification shall be a 6-inch wide painted band every 10 feet. 3. All device boxes used for telephone and data wiring shall be identified. The inside of each box shall be marked with the word "DATA" to indicate the function of the box. Junction boxes above ceilings shall also have this wording applied to the outside of the cover. 3.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Apply conductor identification on each conductor in each box, enclosure, cabinet and panel. B. Refer to Section 26 05 18 for color -coding of conductors. 260552-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 52 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 3.3 MARKING EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND LINES A. During trench backfilling for power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above the line at 12 to 16 inches below finished grade. 3.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved, plastic laminate sign on each unit of electrical equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems unless the units contain their own self-explanatory identification. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with %2-inch high lettering on 1-1/2-inch high sign (2 inches high where 2 lines are required). C. Text shall match the notations used on the drawings for identification. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION OF PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, AND SWITCHGEAR A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign containing 3 lines of text. The top line shall be the panel name. The centerline shall indicate the panel voltage, and the bottom line shall indicate the source of supply. B. Signs for equipment fed from the normal system shall have white letters on black background, and equipment fed from the emergency system shall have white letters on red background. C. An example of the required identifications is: Panel 4HA 277/480 Fed From Panel 4DP D. Install identification on each starter, VFD, contactor panel, switchboard, safety switch, and similar equipment. END OF SECTION 26 05 52 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 52 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 73 ARC -FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 26 05 73 - ARC -FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes a computer -based, arc -flash study to determine the arc -flash hazard boundary distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near energized electrical equipment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. One -Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein. B. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies. C. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. D. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system. E. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. F. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. G. Single -Line Diagram: See "One -Line Diagram." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit information regarding computer software program to be used for studies. B. Study Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form: 1. Arc -flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist. 2. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory. 3. Exported data from computer -based, one -line diagram detailing the system data used for the arc -flash calculations, provided in .csv or Microsoft Excel format. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: 1. For Power Systems Analysis Software Developer. 2. For Power System Analysis Specialist. B. Product Certificates: For arc -flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Arc -Flash Hazard Analysis: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 73 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 73 ARC -FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Provide final arc -flash hazard analysis report in hard copy and digital format. 2. Provide digital file containing electrical system model in a format consistent with power system analysis software used to perform study. 3. Provide library files for power system analysis software used to perform study. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis. B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. C. Manual calculations are unacceptable. D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. Computer program shall be designed to perform arc -flash analysis. E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional or qualified engineer in charge of performing the arc -flash study, analyzing the arc -flash results, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional or qualified engineer. F. Arc -Flash Study Certification: Arc -Flash Study Report shall be signed and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software developed and sold by EasyPower software with ANSI ShortCircuit, ArcFlash, PowerProtector, Scenario Manager, SmartDuty and SmartBreaker or comparable product by one of the following: 1. CGI CYME. 2. Power Analytics, Corporation. B. Software must provide results consistent with the requirements of the latest versions of IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E. C. Software capable of creation and storage of unlimited number of operating scenarios. All scenarios stored in the same project model file. System changes made to the base case automatically propagated to each operating scenario. 2.2 ARC -FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT A. Executive summary of study findings. B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of results. C. One -line diagram, indicating the following: 1. Protective device designations, locations, and ampere ratings. 2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor -control center, and panelboard designations. 6. Utility sources. D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article. 260573-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 73 ARC -FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT E. Data on all protective devices; manufacturers, types, sizes and adjustable settings that were used for the arc -flash calculations. F. List of protective devices found to be inoperable or with signs of impending failure. These devices must be clearly listed and excluded from use in determination of the arc time. G. Equipment Duty Study: Report to verify that all protective devices have adequate short-circuit ratings to interrupt the calculated maximum short-circuit current. H. Arc -Flash Study Calculations and Output Reports: 1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc -flash boundary. 5. Restricted approach boundary. 6. Limited approach boundary. 7. Working distance. 8. Incident energy. I. Arc -Flash Study input data, scenario descriptions, and arc -flash calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the arc -flash hazard report. Study input data must be provided in electronic form as .csv or Excel files. 2.3 ARC -FLASH WARNING LABELS A. Provide a weatherproof, self-adhesive equipment label for each location requiring arc -flash hazard identification. 1. Minimum Size: 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 inches (100 mm) high. 2. Sample label submitted for review prior to printing of actual labels. B. Content: Orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC -FLASH HAZARD, Arc -Flash and Shock Risk Assessment, Appropriate PPE Required." and the following information taken directly from the arc -flash hazard analysis: 1. Equipment ID. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Protection boundaries. a. Arc -flash boundary. b. Restricted approach boundary. C. Limited approach boundary. 4. Available incident energy. 5. Working distance. 6. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date. C. Completely machine printed, no field -applied markings. D. Compliance: NFPA 70E. PART 3 - EXECUTION Kai *1100V 11►/:V Y [00 A. Examine Project electrical equipment submittals. Proceed with arc -flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc -flash study may not be used in study. The report shall clearly state any assumptions that were necessary to complete the analysis. K*mil;Z0D 01 K%111 I II I IVAR;7 O7:112/:16161.1 h1 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 73 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 73 ARC -FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Comply with the latest versions of NFPA 70E for the arc -flash hazard analysis study. B. Study all operating scenarios to determine the maximum incident energy at each location. C. Submit proposed arc -flash analysis scenarios for review prior to performing arc -flash calculations. Arc -flash hazard analysis report shall indicate which scenario created the maximum arc -flash energy for each location. All arc -flash calculations must be performed in accordance with the procedures and recommendations contained in the latest version of IEEE 1584. Calculate the arc -flash hazard boundary and incident energy at all locations in electrical distribution system where personnel could service or examine equipment while energized. D. Include all three-phase medium- and low -voltage equipment locations. E. Calculate the limited and restricted approach boundaries for each location. F. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc -flash calculations on buses with multiple sources or fault current that changes with time during the fault. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented based on the recommendations in IEEE 399 and ANSI C37 where applicable. G. Arc -flash energy shall generally be reported for the maximum of line or load side of a circuit breaker. However, arc -flash computation shall be performed and reported for both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows: 1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location. H. Base arc -flash calculations on the time -current curve or operating time of the fastest upstream device using the predicted arcing current through that device. For medium -voltage circuit breakers, the breaker interrupting time must be automatically added to the relay operating time. Based on the recommendations in IEEE 1584 and sound engineering judgment, a maximum arc time of two seconds can be applied for situations where the protective device operating time is found to exceed two seconds. 3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the arc -flash hazard analysis. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one -line diagram on Drawings. Call any discrepancies or missing information to Owner's attention. 2. For new equipment, use characteristics from approved submittals under provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project. 3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer. Data shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings. 2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance or available short-circuit current at each service. 3. Short-circuit current at each system bus (three phase and line to ground). 4. Voltage level at each bus. 5. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio if available, tap settings, and phase shift. 6. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance. 260573-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 05 73 ARC -FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 7. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, short-circuit rating, continuous current rating, and settings for all adjustable settings. 8. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio. 9. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings. 10. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, size, and conductor material. 11. Motor horsepower. 12. Low -voltage conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material. 13. Medium -voltage conductor sizes, lengths, conductor material, conductor construction and metallic shield performance parameters, and conduit material. 3.4 LABELING A. Apply one arc -flash label on the front cover of each section of the equipment and on side or rear covers with accessible live parts and hinged doors or removable plates for each equipment included in the study. Base arc -flash label data on highest values calculated at each location. B. Each piece of equipment listed below shall have an arc -flash label applied to it: 1. Low -voltage switchboard. 2. Switchgear. 3. Medium -voltage switch. 4. Low voltage transformers. 5. Panelboard. 6. Safety switch. 7. Fused disconnect switch. 8. Enclosed circuit breaker. 9. Adjustable frequency drive. 10. Control panel. 3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS A. Install arc -flash warning labels under the direct supervision and control of Power System Analysis Specialist. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage Power Systems Analysis Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in potential arc - flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the interpretation of arc -flash warning labels. END OF SECTION 26 05 73 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 05 73 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 24 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Panelboards. 2. Distribution Panels — Circuit Breaker Type. 3. Distribution Panels — Fusible Switch Type. 4. Lighting and Appliance Panels. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short-circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal sizes. 5. Catalog product sheets. 6. Nameplate Identification. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all electrical panelboards shown on the drawings and specified herein. Panels shall be complete assemblies including enclosures, bussing, overcurrent protective devices, and trim. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Molded Case Breakers / Enclosures 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PB-1 Panelboards No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 24 16 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 24 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 2.2 PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS A. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. The building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment". C. Panels shall be arranged for flush mounting, surface mounting, or free-standing as indicated on the drawings. D. Panels shall have the voltage ratings, continuous current ratings, and interrupting ratings as scheduled on the drawings. E. All panelboard accessories and features scheduled or specified on the drawings shall be provided. F. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where the device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where the device is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. G. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip -free, thermal magnetic indicating type unless otherwise noted. H. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. I. Connect all overcurrent protective devices with sequence phasing. J. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a plastic covered cardholder on the inside of the panelboard door. K. Install laminated plastic nameplate for each panel as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Cabinets: 1. Rigidly constructed of galvanized sheet steel per UL 50 Standards. Corners shall be overlapped or welded with the edges turned over to receive trim. 2. Where two -section panels are required, both sections shall be same height, and have fully rated bussing in separate cabinets connected by conduit nipples. B. Trim: 262416-2 1. Fabricated from sheet steel meeting the requirements of UL 50 Standards. Trim shall have medium gray enamel finish suitable to serve as the final finish, or suitable to receive field painting. 2. Trim door shall have rounded corners and edges free from burrs. 3. Surface trims shall be the same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box 3/4- inch on all sides. 4. Furnish each door with substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. Doors more than 48 inches high shall have auxiliary fasteners. Provide each lock with 2 keys. All locks shall be keyed alike. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 24 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 5. Unless noted otherwise, interior mounted panels shall have type 1 fronts (one piece with hinged door). Where door -in -door construction is specified, it shall consist of a hinged door within a piano -hinged cover secured with trim clamps. 6. Exterior mounted panels shall be type 3R in accordance with UL 50 requirements. All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a tumbler type vault lock and two additional trunk type latches. C. Bussing: 1. All bussing shall be plated copper sized in accordance with UL Standards to limit temperature rise on any current -carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. 2. Main lugs and main breakers shall be UL approved for copper or aluminum conductors sized to accommodate the conductors to be terminated. Provide oversized lugs to terminate conductors that are increased in size due to voltage drop or temperature requirements. 3. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. Where scheduled, an isolated ground bus shall also be included. 4. A full size (100 percent) neutral bar shall be furnished for panels shown with neutral. Neutrals shall have suitable lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring neutral connection. Where scheduled, provide 200 percent rated neutrals with lugs for oversized neutral conductors. 2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELS — CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE A. Distribution panels with bolt -on devices contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings to interrupt fault current values indicated on the drawings. Breakers shall be molded case type. B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide overcurrent and short circuit protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Also provide ground fault protection where scheduled. C. Circuit breakers shall operate by toggle -type handle and shall be quick make, quick -break switching mechanism that is mechanically trip -free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. 2.5 DISTRIBUTION PANELS — FUSIBLE SWITCH TYPE A. Distribution panels shall have fusible switches for fuses in the ratings shown on the drawings. B. Fusible switches shall be quick -make, quick -break design. Units 30 thru 600 amperes shall be rated not less than 200 kAIC with rejection -type fuse clips for Class R fuses. Units 800 and 1200 amperes shall be rated for 200 kAIC with Class L fuse provisions. C. Fuses shall be field installed. PKI�Q04soMIIlelowVMI_X.1 M1 EX141Do710D)M A. Bolt -in type, heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break, single- and multi -pole molded case circuit breakers with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. B. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common handle for all multiple pole breakers. C. Breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits. D. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights and fire alarm panels. E. Breakers shall be fully rated to interrupt the fault current values scheduled on the drawings. F. Provide breaker accessories as scheduled on the drawings. G. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes with each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 24 16 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 24 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, NEN A PB 1.1 and NEC standards. B. Panelboard enclosures shall be securely fastened to the structure with a minimum of four bolts or screws. C. Clean dirt and foreign paint from exterior and interior of all panels. D. Do not splice conductors in panels. E. Conductors not terminating in panelboard shall not extend through or enter panel enclosure. F. A single conductor shall terminate in each lug on a circuit breaker. Do not terminate multiple conductors under a single lug. G. During installation carefully balance the electrical loads between the various phases. This may require connecting loads to circuits different from the circuit numbers indicated on the drawings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in panelboards as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install panelboard nameplate identification as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. Provide individual circuit identification for each circuit with a type -written directory of circuits mounted in a holder on the inside of the panel door. The directory shall identify the type or name of the load served along with the room names and numbers. The room names and numbers shall be the final names and numbers assigned to the space and not those used on the drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each panel for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually inspect breakers and switches for broken parts and loose terminals. 3. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 4. Visually verify panelboard trim fits properly with no gaps between the trim and panel enclosure. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each breaker ON and OFF to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. 4. When the facility is under normal use, amperage measurements shall be taken on each phase conductor in each panel feeder, and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5 percent high or low (maximum unbalance of 10 percent). END OF SECTION 26 24 16 262416-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 100%, Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Switches 2. Receptacles. 3. Weatherproof Devices. 4. Coverplates. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all wiring devices. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated complete with coverplates. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices WD 6 Wiring Devices — Dimensional requirements 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 20 General -Use Snap Switches PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not companies are acceptable: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Pass and Seymour 4. General Electric 5. Bryant 2.2 CLASSIFICATION These Standards limited to) the following FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 27 26 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. All wiring devices shall be UL listed. B. All wiring devices shall be specification grade. 2.3 COLORS A. All devices shall have white finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. B. All devices connected to the emergency power system that are fed from Panel "LS" or Panel "D" shall be red. 2.4 SWITCHES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish switches in colors specified above even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Single pole wall switch — 1221. 2. Three-way wall switch — 1223. 3. Four-way wall switch — 1224. 4. Pilot -lighted switch — 1221-PLC. 5. Momentary contact switch — 1556. 2.5 RECEPTACLES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish receptacles in colors specified even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Duplex receptacle: 20 amp, 125 volt, grounding (NEMA 5-20R) — No. 5362. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacle (GFI) — No. GF-5362. 3. Special Receptacles: Furnish devices in the NEMA configuration listed on the drawings. 2.6 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES A. Provide the specified device in weatherproof cast box with gasketed coverplate. 2.7 COVERPLATES A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, including telephone, signal outlets and other devices. Coverplates shall be one piece single or multi -gang type as required. B. Indoor Flush Devices: 1. Provide 302/304 stainless steel, .032" thick. 2. Where installed in masonry walls, use jumbo plates. C. Indoor Surface Devices: For indoor devices use zinc -coated metal with rounded or beveled edges, same size as the box. D. Outdoor devices: TayMac PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices plumb and level. B. Install SPST wall switches with OFF position down. 262726-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Install devices within outlet boxes to allow coverplates to be in full contact with the wall on all sides. F. After connection of each wiring device, install two full wraps of electrical insulating tape around the side terminals prior to installation in the box. G. Replace broken devices and plates with new. H. Clean all paint, plaster and dirt from wiring devices and plates. 3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. Devices noted to be installed above counters or millwork shall be installed above the backsplash. C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by architect, install devices at the following heights above finished floor: DEVICE Wall switch Receptacle Wall dimmer switch Clock hanger outlet Wall mounted clock Communication outlet 3.3 IDENTIFICATION MOUNTING HEIGHT 46 inches 18 inches 46 inches 12 inches below ceiling 12 inches below ceiling 18 inches A. At each wiring device provide a laser engraved circuit number on coverplate that has engraved circuit number backfilled with red. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. Energize lighting circuits and operate each wall switch to verify proper operation. B. Energize receptacle circuits and test each receptacle with circuit tester to verify the device is energized and has correct polarity. C. Test TRIP and RESET buttons on GFI receptacles. In addition, test GFI receptacles with a GFI tester to verify it trips at 4ma of ground current. END OF SECTION 26 27 26 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 27 26 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 28 15 SAFETY SWITCHES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 26 28 15 - SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Heavy Duty Switches B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short-circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal size. 5. Fuse rating and type. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all safety switches shown on the drawings or required by codes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Enclosures for electrical Equipment UL 98 Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 2.2 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 28 l 5 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 28 15 SAFETY SWITCHES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Requirements: Provide and install safety switches as shown on the drawings or as required by NEC. Where code requires the installation of safety switches that are not shown on the drawings, provide and install the required switches. B. All switches shall be heavy-duty type. C. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible as noted on the drawings or as required by codes. D. Provide switches with the voltage and current ratings as shown on the drawings. E. Where safety switches serve as motor or motor starter disconnects, provide horsepower rated switches with auxiliary contacts to disconnect all power and control circuits. F. Construction: 1. Switch blades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily padlockable in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Switches rated 100A to 600A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick -make / quick -break type. 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. Switches shall have CU/AL mechanical lugs. G. Enclosures: 1. Where installed indoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose type unless otherwise noted. 2. Where installed outdoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA 3R, raintight type unless otherwise noted. 3. Where noted on the drawings, provide the following enclosures: a. NEMA 4 — watertight (304 stainless steel). b. NEMA 12 — dust tight/oil tight. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and NEC requirements. B. Install adjacent disconnects at the same height. C. Install disconnects to maintain the required NEC clearances and working space. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install engraved plastic sign on each safety switch as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. The sign shall contain 3 lines of text. The top line shall identify the load served. The center line shall indicate the voltage. The third line shall indicate the source of supply. D. An example of the required identification is: AHU #2 480 V Fed From Panel PP 26 28 15 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 28 15 SAFETY SWITCHES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each switch for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 3. Verify fusible switches contain proper type and size of fuses. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each switch ON and OFF four times to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuit and verify proper operation. END OF SECTION 26 28 15 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 28 15 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 32 13 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 26 32 13 — EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Engine Specifications. 2. Alternator and Exciter. 3. Voltage Regulator. 4. Fuel Supply System. 5. Protective Housing for Engine -Generator 6. Remote Annunciation 7. Emergency Stop Switch B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review catalog data, wiring diagrams and drawings on all equipment items. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install a complete emergency engine -generator plant to furnish power to circuits as shown. All equipment shall be new and unused. The unit shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. That company and its authorized dealer shall assume sole responsibility for the performance of the unit and all its accessories. The unit shall be a standard model in regular production and shall be selected to operate at a rating recommended by the manufacturer's current catalog literature. The engine -generator shall be of Stewart and Stevenson, Cummins, Kohler, or Caterpillar manufacture. Generator shall meet NFPA 99 requirements for Type 10, Class X, Level 1. 1.4 WARRANTY A. The generating unit offered shall be covered by the manufacturer's standard warranty or guarantee on new machines, which shall apply for a minimum of two years following certificate of final payment. 1.5 MANUALS A. Provide three bound copies of commercial type manuals consisting of operating and maintenance information, parts, books, dimensional drawings and wiring diagrams of engine -generator set and all auxiliary equipment. 1.6 PARTS AND SERVICE A. The supplier offering the engine generator set shall be the authorized dealer of the manufacturer of the set, and shall be fully qualified and authorized to provide service and parts for the engine, generator and auxiliary components at any time, day or night. Availability of parts and service will be considered in reviewing the submittal. Field service local office shall employ three full-time FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 32 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 32 13 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT people, be located within 120 miles and have a factory trained person working out of the local field office that has been trained in repair of generators being supplied. 1.7 TESTING A. The complete engine -generator plant shall be assembled and tested at the factory. The tests shall be as outlined herein and a certified report of the test shall be submitted for review. A copy of the report shall be bound in the operation and maintenance manual. Factory tests shall be as follows: 1. The unit shall be run at 100 percent, load for two hours. At fifteen minute intervals readings shall be taken and logged for generator terminal voltage, generator output current, frequency, engine oil pressure, engine water temperature and average air temperature. 2. The transient response shall be measured and logged at 100 percent, 90 percent, 50 percent, and 25 percent load by single stage switching. 3. Engine overspeed trip, water temperature trip and oil pressure trip shall be tested and logged. 4. Complete system load test shall be performed after all equipment is installed. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 RATING A. The rating of the unit shall be based on operation of the set when equipped with all of the necessary operating accessories, such as radiator, fan, air cleaners, lubricating oil pump, fuel injector pump, fuel transfer pump, jacket water pump, governor, charging generator, main generator, exciter, regulator, muffler and other devices specified herein UL 2200. B. When operating at an altitude 3256 feet above seal level in an ambient temperature of 120 degrees F. maximum and 0 degrees F. minimum, one unit shall be capable of producing 350 KW at 0.8 power factor (437.5 KVA). 2.2 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS A. Type: Full diesel, compression ignition; liquid cooled; four cycle; either naturally aspirated, pressure charged or turbocharged; operating on No. 2 diesel fuel. B. Horsepower: The brake horsepower of the engine at rated RPM with all accessories attached, shall not be less than required by the full load rating of the generator, taking into account all efficiency losses. C. Speed: 1800 RPM D. Cylinders: Multi -cylinders, vertical in -line or V-type; removable wet or dry type liners of close grained alloy iron, heat treated for proper hardness to obtain maximum life. E. Pistons: Trunk type; oil cooled; cast iron or aluminum alloy; fitted with both compression and oil control rings. F. Crankshaft: Drop forged, electrically hardened and dynamically balanced; main bearing journal on both sides of each crankpin. G. Bearings: Connecting rod and main bearings shall be precision removable shell type. H. Valves: Heat resisting alloy steel with stellate facing; stellate faced exhaust valve seats. I. Lubrication: Submerged suction, gear type oil pump to supply forced feed, constant pressure oil to all important points such as main bearings, crank pin bearings, pistons, piston pins, timing gears, camshaft bearings, and valve rocker mechanisms; replaceable element, full flow oil filter; spring loaded bypass valve to bypass oil if filter is clogged; lubricating oil cooler, engine mounted and water cooled. J. Fuel Pump: Integral engine -driven fuel transfer pump to supply adequate quantity of fuel under all conditions to the engine injection system. 263213-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 32 13 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT K. Governor: Hydraulic type, to maintain frequency stability of plus or minus 0.33 percent at any steady state from no load to full load; frequency regulation of 25 percent load change not more than 2 percent with 3 seconds maximum recovery time; frequency transient on 100 percent load rejection not more than 8 percent. L. Starting Equipment: Electric starting motor with solenoid and Bendix or Dyer drive; hard rubber cased nickel -cadmium storage batteries mounted on unit or in separate rack beside engine; all required cables and connections; automatic solid state full wave silicon rectifier battery charger capable of maintaining battery at full charge; adjustable charge rate with two steps, trickle charge and fast charge; ammeter and automatic reset thermal overload circuit breaker on charger; charger may be mounted on wall or on generator control panel, and shall operate from 120 volts normal power. M. Cooling System: Engine shall be equipped with mounted radiator and fan, water manifold, temperature control valve, and gear or V-belt driven engine water circulating pump. System shall be adequate to cool engine in an ambient temperature of 110 degrees F. Provide a permanent type ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in the cooling system, suitable for operation at 0 degrees F and approved by the engine manufacturer. N. Immersion Heater: Provide an electric immersion heater with thermostat in engine cooling water system to maintain constant temperature when engine is not in operation. Heater shall operate on 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. current. O. Exhaust System: Provide hospital type muffler and flexible stainless steel exhaust connection for each exhaust outlet. P. Air Cleaner and Silencer: Provide an air cleaner and silencer as recommended by the engine manufacturer. Q. Engine Instruments: Provide on an engine control panel the following: 1. Water inlet and outlet temperature gages 2. Lubricating oil pressure and temperature gages 3. Running time indicator 4. Combination alarm and shutdown systems for high water temperature and/or low oil pressure, with indicating lights. 5. Combination alarm and shutdown with indicating light for engine overspeed. R. Flywheel: Both statically and dynamically balanced. S. Fuel and Oil Consumption: State guaranteed fuel consumption at 100, 75, and 50 percent load at rated speed. Also state guaranteed lubricating oil consumption. Fuel consumption shall not exceed 0.44 pounds per brake horsepower per hour at full load with fuel rated at 19,350 Btu per pound (high heat value). 2.3 ALTERNATOR AND EXCITER A. Alternator: Engine -driven, revolving field synchronous generator, direct connected to engine with steel disc flexible coupling. Generator housing shall bolt to engine flywheel housing. It shall have a single ball bearing support for the rotor. Rotor shall be dynamically balanced up to 25 percent overspeed. Generator shall conform to applicable NEMA Standards. It shall be open, drip -proof type with amortisseur windings and Class A, B, F or H insulation. Generator shall be rated 120/208 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz. B. Exciter: Generator field excitation shall be by either a rotating exciter mounted on generator rotor shaft through a brushless rotating diode system, or by a solid state static exciter system through generator slip rings. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 32 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 32 13 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.4 VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Voltage regulator shall be of the static magnetic amplifier or transistor type. A voltage adjusting rheostat shall provide plus or minus 10 percent voltage adjustment. Regulator shall maintain generator output voltage within plus or minus 1 percent of rated value from no load to full load at 0.8 p.f. Voltage stability shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent of average RMS value at any steady state load condition from no load to full load. Stable voltage operation shall be re-established within 2 seconds following any sudden load change between no load and full load. On any load addition up to and including 90 percent full load, the voltage dip shall not exceed 20 percent of rated voltage. B. Generator Control Panel: Provide a generator control panel in a unit mounted cabinet, containing the following equipment. 1. AC ammeter 2. AC voltmeter 3. Frequency meter 4. Exciter field rheostat 5. Voltage Regulator 6. Current and potential transformers as required 7. Combination ammeter -voltmeter phase selector switches 8. Generator line circuit breaker (100% Load) of proper trip rating and interrupting capacity for the generator rating. 9. Panel lights 10. Necessary wiring and interconnections in accordance with standard commercial electrical practices. 2.5 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM A. Day Tank/Main Tank: UL approved, fuel oil day tank shall be incorporated in sub -base of generating set; capacity to provide 24 hours operation at full load; fuel level gauge; breather cap; float switch to control operation of fuel transfer pump. Provide dual wall tank with leak detection system. Contractor shall supply all fuel for testing and leave fuel tanks full after acceptance tests. B. Diesel Fuel Piping: All piping associated with the diesel fuel system will be furnished and installed as a part of the work by generator contractor. 2.6 PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR ENGINE -GENERATOR A. The unit shall be shipped to the job assembled in a weatherproof shelter. The shelter shall completely enclose the charger and all other accessories. B. The shelter shall be constructed of welded and bolted sheet steel, 16 gauge and 14 gauge with a 14 gauge floor plate. All metal parts shall be prime coated and finish painted with machinery enamel (owner to select custom color). Each assembly shall have shuttered air openings on the front and sides, with mesh screens covering side shutters. C. The shelter shall have hinged double doors on each side and one door in the rear for access to the engine generator and controls. All door handles shall be of key lock design. The skid and floor design shall include a removable panel below the engine oil pan. D. Provide two Lithonia or equal light fixtures on inside of housing on each side of generator. Fixture shall be equal to VRI 232120 GEBIOIS EL6DW IP67. Provide switch inside of enclosure to turn on light. E. Provide a GFI duplex receptacle with in -use cover for future service equipment inside of protective enclosure. 263213-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 32 13 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATION A. Provide and install for the new engine -generator a remote alarm annunciator in Elec 203 and Breakroom 117. The annunciator shall be powered by the engine -generator storage battery to provide a warning of derangement or alarm conditions in the standby power plant. B. Indicators: The annunciator shall comply with NFPA 110 (1999) 3-5.5.2(a) (Ref NFPA 99 (1999) 3- 4.1.1.15. C. Additional annunciator requirements: 1. Provide generator running status D. Construction: The annunciator shall be constructed from a sheet steel enclosure arranged for flush mounting. The face of the panel shall contain nine lamps, an audible alarm, a toggle switch marked NORMAL and OFF (for audible signal) and a lamp test pushbutton switch. The front face shall be removable to expose the internal printed circuits, wiring, terminal block and battery voltage sensors. 2.8 EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH A. The emergency break glass switch shall be in a NEMA 3R enclosure. B. Label "Emergency Generator Stop", "Break Glass to Release Button". C. Device equal to P/N ST120SN3R Davidsonsales.com D. Locate outside Electric Room 203 on wall of building. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. The engine generator set shall be factory mounted on a welded structural steel base of box type construction. B. Provide and install a reinforced concrete pad designed for the weight of the unit and set the steel base on the pad by installing pad type vibration isolators under the base of the unit. Isolation pads shall be properly selected and installed to minimize noise and vibration transmission. C. Submit the following for review: 1. Drawings of engine -generator set and foundation requirements 2. Literature describing the set and indicating its current production status. 3. Make and type of engine, generator and all auxiliary equipment. 4. Number of cylinders, bore, stroke and displacement 5. Rated RPM 6. BHP of engine at rated speed 7. Generator rating, KVA, KW and p.£ 8. Description of generator, exciter and voltage regulator. 9. Provide load analysis via PC program to verify generator will handle building startup. 3.2 MANUFACTURE SUPERVISION A. After the engine -generator is installed, and before it is energized, a representative of the manufacturer shall inspect the installation and perform the pre -starting checks on the unit. After his inspection is complete, he shall crank the unit and test the system for proper operation to perform all tests to meet NFPA 110-5-13 and shall supply all equipment and materials for testing. Full load test shall be based on KW of generator. At the time of final inspection, he shall demonstrate the operation of the system including starting, stopping, exercising, etc. from the transfer switches. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 32 13 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 32 13 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.3 INSTRUCTION A. The manufacturer's representative shall allot sufficient time to instruct the owner's personnel as to the complete operation of the emergency system including the engine -generator, transfer switches, service recommendations, exercise periods and procedure, etc. 3.4 Connect generator heater, battery charger, leak -detection system, and duplex receptacle to new electrical panel in generator enclosure. END OF SECTION 26 32 13 263213-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 36 23 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 26 36 23 — AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Starting Controls 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide automatic transfer controls enclosed in code gauge NEMA 4 wall mounted steel cabinets. The engine -generator set shall be equipped with the necessary engine mounted devices for automatic starting and stopping of the engine. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 STARTING CONTROLS A. Engine starting control shall operate from a single pole contact that closes for engine start and opens for engine stop. When engine fires, cranking controls shall be automatically disconnected. Cranking disconnect shall prevent recranking for a definite time if voltage falls to a low value. If engine fails to fire, or if any safety device operates while the engine is running, engine shall stop immediately and starting controls shall lock out, requiring manual reset. Cranking shall be a 10-second cranking cycle limited to 3-5 attempts. 2.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Transfer switch shall close pilot contact to start engine 1 second after normal source failure or 1 second after drop in voltage on any phase to 85 percent or less of normal voltage. When generator is delivering not less than 90 percent rated voltage and 95 percent of nominal frequency, the main transfer switch shall transfer load from normal to emergency generator. Upon restoration of normal source to not less than 95 percent of rated voltage on all phases, load shall be retransferred to normal source after a time delay of 30 minutes (job adjustable). After retransfer, engine shall run for 5 minutes unloaded and then shut down, ready to restart on next power failure. If standby plant should fail while carrying the load, retransfer to normal source shall be instantaneous upon restoration of normal source. Means shall be provided to start the engine manually for test purposes without transferring the load, and also to simulate a power failure and actually transfer the load as in a real failure. The switch shall contain pilot lights to indicate the source to which the switch is connected. B. A job -adjustable clock exerciser shall be provided, to exercise the plant automatically at full load at regular intervals for a pre -selected period of time. C. One switch shall be rated 150A minimum amperes, 3 pole 120/208 volts, three phase, 4 wire service with neutral terminal lugs. The other switch shall be rated for 800A minimum amperes, 3 pole, 120/208 volts, three phase, 4-wire service with neutral lugs. The switch shall utilize solid-state sensing on normal and emergency for automatic, positive operation. D. Close differential voltage sensing shall be provided on all live lines. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85percent to 100 percent of nominal and the dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 75 percent to 98 percent of the pickup value. Provide closed -transition transfer switches. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 26 36 23 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 36 23 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT E. The time delay to override momentary normal source outages shall be field adjustable from 0.5 to 6 seconds and factory set at one second. F. The time delay on retransfer to normal shall be field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and factory set at 30 minutes. G. The unloaded running time delay for generator cooldown shall be field adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes and factory set at 5 minutes. H. Independent voltage and frequency sensing shall be provided for the emergency source. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 percent to 100 percent of nominal (factory set at 90 percent) and pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 percent to 100 percent of nominal (factory set at 95 percent). 2.3 DESCRIPTION A. Transfer switch shall be a double throw switch operated by momentarily energized solenoid mechanism. It shall be inherently interlocked mechanically and electrically, with no neutral position possible. Operating current for transfer shall be from source to which it is transferring load. Main contacts shall be silvered. All contacts and coils shall be easily replaceable from front of panel without major disassembly. Switch shall be suitable for all classes of loads. It shall conform to the latest UL Standard 1008 and the additional requirements herein. B. The control module shall be supplied with a protective cover and shall be separately mounted inside the transfer switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be solid state and mounted on plug-in circuit boards. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 26 36 23 263623-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 5100 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 26 5100 - LIGHTING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Luminaires. 2. LED Fixtures. 3. Lamps. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all lighting products. B. Submit complete photometric data for each fixture. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete interior and exterior lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) No. 101 Life Safety Code 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LE 4 Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 1449 Surge Protection Devices UL 8750 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products 4. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) LM-79 Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid -State Lighting Products LM-80 Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources TM-21 Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Ballasts: a. Advance FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 2651 00 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 5100 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT b. Lutron C. General Electric d. Valmont 2. Lamps: a. Osram/Sylvania b. General Electric C. Philips 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations scheduled on the drawings. Should any designation be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes of suffixes corresponding to the feature called for. 2.3 LED FIXTURES A. Fixtures shall bear UL label. B. General Requirements: 1. Drivers shall be Electronic type. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 20 percent or less 3. Power Factor: 90 percent minimum. 4. Sound Rating: A 5. Surge Protection: Surge protection devices (SPD) to be provided with each luminaire. 6. RF Interference: Labeled as compliant with radio frequency interference (RFI) requirements of FCC Title 47 Part 15. 2.4 LAMPS A. LEDs: 1. Color Temperature: 4000 K 2. CRI: 80 or higher. 3. Lumen output as scheduled on the drawings. 4. LEDs of the same fixture type shall be supplied from the same batch during manufacturing. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for LED fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the 265100-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 26 5100 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. END OF SECTION 26 5100 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 2651 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 27 00 00 - COMMUNICATIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes general design requirements, administration topics, and installation for communications systems. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The objective of this project is to provide a complete communications cabling infrastructure system installation including, but not limited to: fiber backbone, riser system, horizontal data and voice cabling with attendant terminations, mounting equipment, cable pathway and management systems, testing and other items/materials, as specified in drawings, these specifications, and contract documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 00 00 Electrical (including related sub -sections) 2. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 3. Section 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications 4. Section 27 1100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 5. Section 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 6. Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 7. Section 27 41 16 Audiovisual Systems 8. Section 27 41 17 Audiovisual Infrastructure 9. Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security (including related sub -sections) 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section establishes an infrastructure to be used as signal pathways for communications systems, but is not limited to the following: 1. Comply with all Project Contract documents and the following requirements for a complete project installation. 2. Provide a structured cabling system as described hereafter that includes, but is not limited to, supplying, installing and testing of: backbone cabling, riser cabling; data and voice horizontal cabling, cable connectors, communications outlets and terminations, and equipment racks/cabinets for networking hardware and patch panels. 3. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for the installation described herein. 4. Follow industry standard installation procedures for communications cable to assure that the mechanical and electrical transmission characteristics of this cable plant and equipment are maintained. B. Work of this section covers complete installation of permanent and channel links for a data and voice communications networks utilizing copper and fiber transmission media that includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Provide, install, terminate, test, and document all fiber and copper backbone cables, riser cables, and horizontal cables. 2. Provide and install all termination devices such as, but not limited to, modular patch panels, termination blocks, information outlets (jacks and plates), phone jacks, fiber distribution panels, bulkheads, connectors, and fiber fan out kits. Document all termination devices with proper labeling. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 00 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Provide in quantities specified, interconnect components such as, but not limited to, fiber patch cables, copper patch cords, and station cables. 4. Provide and install specified Telecommunication Room equipment such as, but not limited to, racks, cabinets, horizontal and vertical cable support devices, cable trays and cable runway, and required mounting brackets/hardware. 5. Provide and install UL-approved firestopping systems in all communication pass -through locations of rated ceiling, wall or floor penetrations involving, conduits, cable, and cable trays in coordination with General Contractor. 6. Provide and install grounding and bonding connection to the bus (TGMB/TGB) provided by Division 26. 7. Provide and install all appropriate consumable items required to complete the installation. 8. Coordination with other trades. 9. Provide complete documentation and demonstration of work. 10. Provide indexed and organized complete Test Results of all copper and fiber cable and their components. 11. Provide Submittals as outlined below. 12. Provide a Manufacturer's Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for this wiring system. 13. Conduct a final document handover meeting with client, consultant, and PM to review, discuss and educate the Owner on the final product, test results, and As -Built Drawings. C. Changes to the Scope of Work 1. Owner changes to the scope of work shall be in writing. 2. Change order requests by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Owner/Project Manager complete with price breakdown and description for approval before any work is done. 3. The Contractor shall respond to these changes with a complete material list, including pricing, labor, and taxes in writing to be presented to the Owner for approval. 4. The Contractor shall not proceed with additional scope of work without signed approval by the Owner. Owner will not pay for additional work performed by the Contractor without written/signed approval of these changes. 5. Contractor will attach a copy of the signed change order with billing information. 1.4 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS (NIC) A. The Owner may separately procure and/or provide certain equipment and component that will be installed during the course of project. Such items may not be indicated in the documents. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and Owner's suppliers when considering: 1. The provision and installation of phone systems, related system equipment/software, and employee station equipment/software. 2. The provision and installation of multi -port routers, switches, and other Layer 2 / Layer 3 networking components in communications rooms. 3. The provision and installation of Uninterruptable Power Source (UPS) devices in communications rooms. 4. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building electrode system. 5. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, and utility outlets. 6. The installation and finishing of plywood backboards. 7. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system (HVAC), and environmental control sensors. 8. Communication pathway devices such as, but not limited to, cable tray and flex -tray in corridors, office spaces and open areas, outlet boxes and stub -ups, conduits, conduit sleeves, and penetrations in walls and floors. 270000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 1.5 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitution may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. An alternate product must be equal to or exceed specified requirements. The material substituted shall not void, alter or change manufacturers' structured cabling system warranty. B. Document substitution requests with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Include in each request for substitution: 1. Product identification, manufacturer's name and address 2. Product Data: a) Description, performance and test data, reference standards, finishes and colors. b) Samples: Finishes. c) Complete and accurate drawings indicating construction revisions required (if any) to accommodate substitutions. d) Data relating to changes required in construction schedule. e) Cost comparison between specified and proposed substitution. C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. D. The Owner will be the final judge of acceptability, with review by DataCom Design Group and the distribution of the acceptance by the Architect. E. No substitute shall be ordered, installed or utilized without the Architect's prior written verification of acceptance from the Owner. 1.6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General provisions of the contract, including Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Architectural plans and specifications, requirements of Division 1, Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing, Audio -Visual, Security and Communications specifications and plans, and the publications listed below apply to the Communications section, are incorporated into this specification by reference, and shall be considered a part of this section. B. Reference to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean reference to the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract. C. The Contractor shall read all sections in their entirety and apply them as appropriate for work in this section. D. Conflicts 1. Drawings and specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another and to supplement one another. 2. In general, the specifications determine the nature and quality of the materials and tests, and the drawings establish the quantities, details, and give characteristics of performance that should be adhered to during the installation of the communications system components. 3. If there is an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, or between specification sections, the items with the greater quantity and/or quality shall be estimated and installed. 4. Clarification with the Owner and/or DataCom Design Group about these items shall be made in writing prior to procurement and installation. 5. Codes and Standards 6. American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association (ANSI/TIA) a) ANSFTIA-568-C.0 "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises" b) ANSFTIA-568-C.1 "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 00 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Standard" c) ANSUTIA-568-C.2 "Balanced Twisted -Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard" d) ANSUTIA-568-C.3 "Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard" e) ANSI/TIA-568-C.4 "Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components Standard" f) ANSI/TIA-569-C "Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces" g) ANSI/TIA-606-B "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure" h) ANSI/TIA-607-B "Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications" i) ANSI/TIA-758-B "Customer -Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard" j) ANSI/TIA-862-A "Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard" k) ANSI/TIA-942-A: "Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers" 1) ANSI/TIA-1152: "Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted -Pair Cabling" m) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) n) ANSI C80.1 Electrical rigid steel conduit (ersc) American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) C131 a) BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual b) BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 9. Federal Specifications (FS) 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 11. National Electrical Code (NEC) 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 13. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) 14. Local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of installation. 15. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards. a) It shall be indicated in the proposal the components that may be of foreign manufacture, if any, and the country of origin. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Communications Contractor shall have a complete working knowledge of low voltage communications cabling applications such as, but not limited to data, voice and video network systems. B. Communications Contractor shall have installed similar -sized systems in at least ten (10) other projects in the last five (5) years prior to this bid and be regularly engaged in the business of installation of the types of systems specified in this document. C. Communications Contractor and individual installation crew members shall be experienced and qualified to perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission. All onsite supervision personnel that will be assigned to this project shall be listed in the Pre -Installation Submittal. 1. 80% shall have a minimum of three (3) years of experience in the installation of the types of systems, equipment, and cables specified in this document prior to this bid. 2. All installation team members must demonstrate knowledge and compliance with all applicable methods, standards, and codes. 3. All members of the installation team shall be certified by the Structured Cabling System Assurance Warranty provider as having completed the necessary training to complete their part of the installation and capable of an installation that falls under manufacturer's guidelines necessary to obtain the Manufacturer's System Assurance Warranty. 270000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Any personnel substitutions shall be noted in writing to the Owner. D. A BICSI RCDD shall supervise and approve all on -site work as a recognized member of the Contractor's installation team. E. Refer also to General Conditions. 1.8 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS A. In order to accomplish the conditions of this agreement, the Contractor shall perform the specific duties listed herein. B. Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, supervision, tools, permits, equipment, test equipment, tests and services to provide and install a complete communications cabling infrastructure system. Pay all required sales, gross receipts, and other taxes. C. Insurance 1. The Contractor shall procure, submit for review, and maintain for the duration of this agreement, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from, or in connection with, the performance of work hereunder by the Contractor, his agents, representatives, employees or subcontractor. The Contractor shall pay the cost of such insurance. 2. The Owner, its directors, officers, representatives, agents and employees, respectively, shall have no responsibility to the Contractor with respect to any insurance in accordance with the provisions set forth herein. D. Regulatory Requirements 1. Communications Contractor shall supply all city, county, and state telecommunication cabling permits required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. Communications Contractor shall be licensed and/or bonded as required for telecommunications/low voltage cabling systems. E. Privacy and Confidentiality 1. The Contractor will respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of Owner, its employees, processes, products, and intellectual property to extent necessary, consistent with the legal responsibilities of the Owner policies. 2. Contractors shall sign a non -disclosure agreement and abide by the requirements to keep confidential all information concerning bid documents and this project. F. Use of Subcontractors 1. Successful bidder shall inform the Owner's contact and General Contractor in writing about the intention to use Subcontractors and the scope of work for which they are being hired. 2. The Owner or Owner's designated contact must approve the use of Subcontractors in writing prior to the Subcontractor's hiring and start of any work. G. The Contractor's designated Project Manager will be recognized as the single point of contact. The Project manager shall oversee all work performed to ensure compliance with specifications as outlined in bid documents (which includes all specifications, references, and drawings) to ensure a quality installation and attend project meetings with the telecommunication consultant, the Owner and others. H. Coordination 1. Coordinate installation work with other trades (examples include ceiling grid contractors, HVAC and sheet metal contractors, etc.) to resolve procedures and installation placement for cable trays and cable bundle pathways. 2. The goal of this coordination will be to establish priority pathways for critical data/voice network cable infrastructure, materials, associated hardware, as well as mitigate delays to the project and to allow service access for communications and HVAC components. 3. Exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 00 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Coordinate with electrical contractors and plan for the pathway routes used communications cabling to minimize cable lengths. Report any potential over distance cable runs for approval before pulling the cables. 5. Record agreements with other trades and distribute record to other participants, Owner and telecommunication consultant. 1.9 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Communications Contractor shall attend and/or arrange a scheduled pre -installation conference prior to beginning any work of this section. This venue is to ask and clarify questions in writing with consultant and/or project manager/Owner representative. B. Agenda 1. Safety 2. Work to be performed 3. Scheduling 4. Coordination 5. Other topics as necessary C. Attendance 1. Communications project manager/supervisor shall attend meetings arranged by General Contractor, Owner's representatives, and other parties affected by work of this document. 2. All individuals who will serve in an on -site supervisory capacity, including project managers, site supervisors, and lead installers, shall be required to attend the pre -installation conference. Individuals who do not attend the conference will not be permitted to supervise the installation and testing of communications cables on the project. 1.10 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION A. DataCom Design Group may perform site visits and provide job field reports upon inspection of Contractor's installation, materials, supporting hardware, coordination with other trades and progress to schedule to the client. B. Job Field Report outline: 1. General: The general installation progress in relation to scheduled work made by the Contractor up to that date. 2. Deficiencies and/or Items of Note: Documents observations of the cable installation that may require corrective action by the Contractor. 1.11 POST INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. At the time of substantial completion, the contractor shall call and arrange for a post installation meeting to present and review all submittal documents to include but not be limited to As -Built Drawings, Test reports, Warranty paperwork, etc. B. Attendees shall include 1. Communications Contractor 2. Project Manager/Owner Representative 3. DataCom Design Group 4. General Contractor 5. Other trades that the GC deems appropriate. C. At this meeting the Communications Contractor shall present and explain all documentation. D. Any discrepancies or deviations noted by and agreed to by participants shall be remedied by the Communications Contractor and resubmitted within one (1) week of the meeting. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 270000-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Coordination with delivery companies, drivers, site address, and contact person(s) will be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Communications Contractor requirements: 1. Be responsible for prompt material deliveries to meet contracted completion date. 2. Coordinate deliveries and submittals with the General Contractor to ensure a timely installation. 3. No equipment materials shall be delivered to the job site more than three weeks prior to the commencement of its installation. 4. Equipment shall be delivered in original packages with labels intact and identification clearly marked. 5. Equipment shall not be damaged in any way and shall comply with manufacturer's operating specifications. 6. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. 7. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 8. Contractor shall be responsible for all handling and control of equipment. Contractor is liable for any material loss due to delivery and storage problems. C. Owner/General Contractor shall provide the security requirements for Contractor to follow. 1.13 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. For all environmental recommendations, refer to master Architectural section. B. For all security recommendations, refer to related consultant sections. C. Contractor shall provide daily a clean work environment that is free from trash/rubbish accumulated during and after cabling installation. D. Contractor shall keep all liquids (drinks, sodas, etc.) away from finished spaces. If any liquid or other detriment (cuts, soils, stains, etc.) damages any finishes, Contractor shall provide professional services to clean or repair scratched/soiled finishes, at Contractor's expense. E. Damage by Communications Contractor to the work of others will be remedied at the Contractor's expense in a timely manner. 1.14 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall be a certified Manufacturer's Value Added Reseller (VAR) and/or Authorized Installer and provide an end -to -end product warranty, adhere to the industry standard engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this project. B. Contractor shall coordinate with manufacturer for warranty paperwork and procedures prior to the start of the project. C. Contractor shall provide a minimum one (1) year warranty on installation and workmanship PLUS an Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for this wiring system and shall commit to make available local support for the product and system during the Warranty period. 1. The Extended Product Warranty shall apply to all passive structured cabling system components and shall cover the replacement or repair of defective products and labor for the replacement or repair of such defective products for a minimum of one (1) year. 2. The System Assurance Warranty provides a complete system and product warranty that will be extended to the end -user, ensuring the structured cabling system will be free of defects in materials and workmanship, will meet or exceed applicable performance requirements defined in the contract documents, and support all current and future network applications for a minimum of twenty (20) years. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 00 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT D. System Certification: Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the customer shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the manufacturer, registering the installation. 1.15 PAYMENT A. Refer to the General Contractor contract documents and/or master specifications issued by Architect for project and cost payment details. 1.16 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Requirements of Division 1 B. The Communications Contractor shall not perform any portion of the work requiring submittal and review of shop drawings, product data, or samples until Owner has approved the respective submittal in writing. Such work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. C. Pre -Installation Submittal Requirements 1. Communications Contractor shall provide certificates for the appropriate insurance coverage as defined in contract documents. 270000-8 2. City, county, and/or state telecommunication cabling permits as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3. Executed non -disclosure agreement. 4. Appoint a Project Manager and provide the name and contact information. 5. Shop Drawings a) Communications Contractor shall submit, for approval, floor plans that identify all device locations, cable routes and quantities, cable types, riser locations, and references to installation details and diagrams. 1) Communication Contractor shall notify Owner of cable routes exceeding standardized lengths. b) Communications Contractor shall submit, for approval, diagrams that show room layouts, rack layouts (including elevations), riser layouts, etc. c) The Contractor shall make any corrections as required by the consultant team and submit revised shop drawings to the team for approval. d) Approval by the Consultant of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings or specifications, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. Requests to deviate shall be submitted in writing to the Architect. e) Release of CAD Files 1) Contractor may request to utilize the DataCom Design Group AutoCAD floor plan files for assistance in producing shop drawings. 2) Request shall be made by signing the DataCom Design Group "Agreement for Release of CAD Files" letter. 6. Product Data Cut -sheets a) Communications Contractor shall submit catalogue cut -sheets that include manufacturer, trade name, and complete model number for each product specified. Model number shall be handwritten and/or highlighted to indicate exact selection. b) Communications Contractor shall identify applicable specification section reference for each product performance for each component specified for approval prior to purchase and installation. 7. Warranty FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a) The Communications Contractor shall submit appropriate documentation from the certifying manufacturer showing the project is registered and qualified for the System Assurance Warranty. b) All subsequent work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. The Communications Contractor shall not perform any portion of the work requiring approval of the System Assurance Warranty manufacturer's warranty registration qualification procedures that would disqualify any part or all of the wiring system from that warranty qualification. Qualifications a) Communications Contractor shall submit a list of the Contractor's previous projects that demonstrate qualification for this project. This list shall include, but not be limited to: 1) At least ten (10) other projects in the last five (5) years 2) Name and location of project 3) Project contacts, email addresses, and phone numbers 4) Total square footage 5) Total number of cables/drops 6) Types of media b) Communications Contractor shall submit an up-to-date and valid statement of qualifications for those assigned to perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission. 1) Communications Contractor Employees 2) Subcontractors c) Manufacturer certifications for Contractor and installers. Cable Testing Plan a) The Contractor shall provide a complete and detailed test plan for approval of the cabling system specified herein, including a complete list of test equipment for copper and fiber components and accessories prior to beginning cable testing. b) The following minimal items shall be submitted for review: 1) A testing plan that clearly describes procedures and methods. 2) Product data for test equipment. 3) Certifications and qualifications of all persons conducting the testing. 4) Calibration certificates indicating that equipment calibration meets National Institute of Standards and Technology (MIST) standards and has been calibrated at least once in the previous year of the testing date. 5) Examples of test reports, including all graphs, tables, and charts necessary for display of testing results. 6) Samples c) For workstation outlet connectors, jack assemblies, housings and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical specifications and requirements. Confirm with Architect, interior designer, and Owner representative for color before purchasing materials. 10. Unit Pricing a) Provide add/deduct unit pricing for a permanent link, including all components, with an average cable length of a linear 150'-0". All requirements and specifications will be enforced. D. Closeout Submittal Requirements 1. As -Built Drawings a) Communications Design drawings are to be supplied to the Architect to prepare the master "As -Built" drawings. b) Submit one electronic copy and one hard copy with project deliverables within three (3) weeks subsequent to substantial completion. Provide a laminated floorplan with drop designations in the respective serving Telecom Room. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 00 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 270000-10 c) As -Built drawings shall be in AutoCAD format, same version as used by Architect and consultant. Dimensions and scale of the drawing sheets submitted shall match the size of the drawing sheets used for the contract documents. d) Utilize normal recognized drafting procedures that match AutoCAD standards, Architect and Consultant guidelines, and methodology. e) The As -Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the building identified in, but not limited to, addendum, change notices, site instructions or deviations resulting from site conditions. 1) Contractor shall clearly identify any resubmitted drawing sheets, documents or cut sheets either by using a color to highlight or cloud around resubmitted information. 2) Maintain drawing numbering or page/sheet scheme consistency as per previously issued drawings/documents. f) Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of networking components, showing: 1) All work area outlet locations complete with outlet/cable labeling. 2) Rack and/or cabinet locations complete with labeling. 3) One -line diagram of equipment/device interconnections with the cable plant. 4) Standard or typical details of installations unique to Owner's requirements. 5) Graphic symbols and component identification on detail drawing shall conform to the latest conventions: i) ANSUTIA-568-C.0 "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises" i i) ANSI/TIA-569-C "Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces" i i i) ANSI/TIA-606-B "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure" iv) ANSI/TIA-607-B "Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications" 2. The Communications Contractor shall deliver the Installer's Extended Product Warranty and Manufacturer's signed System Assurance Warranty of installed cabling system to include all components that comprise the complete cabling system. a) Delivery shall be completed within two (2) weeks of the time of final punch list review. b) Product Certificates shall be signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal equipment certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 3. Cable Testing Report Requirements a) Submit certified test reports of Contractor -performed tests. Contractor shall submit the required Test Reports in the format and media specified, upon completion of testing the installed system. b) The tests shall clearly demonstrate that the media and its components fully comply with the requirements specified herein. c) Three (3) sets of electronic and hardcopy versions of test reports shall be submitted together and clearly identified with cable designations. d) Cable inventory data shall be submitted for all fiber, copper, and coaxial cabling and termination components. Include products furnished: 1) Manufacturer's name 2) Manufacturer's part numbers 3) Cable designations 4) Location and riser assignments 5) Product Data FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Supply Owner with training manuals with instructions on methods of adding or removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases. E. The Contractor's BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) supervisor shall review, approve and stamp all documents prior to submitting. The Contractor's RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein upon completion of all work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUMMARY A. Equipment and materials shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of telecommunications cabling products and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to bid opening. B. All material and equipment, as provided, should be the standard Commercial -Off -The -Shelf (COTS) products of a manufacturer engaged in the manufacturing of such products. 1. All shall be typical commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified. 2. All material and equipment shall be readily available through manufacturers and/or distributors. C. All equipment shall be standard catalogued items of the manufacturer and shall be supplied complete with any optional items required for proper installation. D. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance and backward compatibility. E. All materials shall be UL- and/or ETL-approved and labeled in accordance with NEC for all products where labeling service normally applies. F. Materials and equipment requiring UL 94, 149 or 1863 listing shall be so labeled. Modification of products that nullifies UL labels is not permitted. G. Backward Compatibility: The provided products shall be backward compatible with lower category ratings such that if higher category components are used with lower category components, the basic link and channel measures shall meet or exceed the lower category's specified parameters. H. Component Compliance: The provided products shall each meet the minimum transmission specifications listed herein such that no individual component will be less than specifications for permanent link and channel, regardless of the fact that tests for link and channel ultimately meet required specifications. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Identification (Labeling) System 1. Brady 2. Dymo 3. Hellerman-Tyton 4. Acceptable alternate B. Fire -Stop Systems 1. Hilti 2. SpecSeal 3. 3M 4. Acceptable alternate C. Other Products as Referenced in other Division 27 Specifications. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 00 00 - I I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements 1. Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. B. Established Dimensions 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, coordinate with the General Contractor to establish dimensions. 2. When approved in writing, proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. 3. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. C. Pre -installation inspection 1. The Contractor shall visually inspect all cables, cable reels, and shipping cartons to detect possible cable damage incurred during shipping and transport. 2. Visibly damaged goods are not acceptable and shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Contractor shall install work in accordance with specifications, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal data. B. Allowable cable bend radius and pull tension: a) In general, communications cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation. b) Refer to cable manufacturer's bend radius recommendations for the maximum allowable limits. c) After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue. Use only lubricants specifically designed for cable installation. C. Pull Strings 1. Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed (trailer strings) as part of this contract. 2. Data and video cables can be pulled in tandem with pull strings. 3. The pull strings must move freely to prevent cable jacket/cable damage during pulls. D. Labeling 1. Cable labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl -cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations. 2. Flat -surface labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl -cloth labels, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations. 3. Provide transparent plastic label holders, and 4-pair marked colored labels. 4. In accordance with ANSUTIA-606-B "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure": 270000-12 a) Install colored labels according to the type of field as per color code designations. b) Use "designation strip color -code guidelines for voice, data, cross -connect, riser, and backbone fields". Pathway Labels and Labeling System a) Labeling system shall consist of a hand-held portable printer b) Conduits: General-purpose label designed for powdered coated surfaces with an FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT ultra -aggressive adhesive. Label size shall be appropriate for the conduit size. Font size shall be legible from the finished floor. c) Inner duct: Polyethylene general-purpose tagging material attached using tie wraps. d) Junction boxes: General-purpose label designed for powdered coated surfaces with an ultra -aggressive adhesive, trade name. Font size shall be easily visible from the finished floor. e) All labels shall be permanent, i.e. will not fade, peel, or deteriorate due to environment or time. f) Identification 1) All conduits, junction boxes, gutters, and pull boxes shall have machine - generated labels easily visible from the finished floor. 2) Conduits shall be labeled with the word "communications" and the conduit's origination room number and destination room number. 3) The Contractor shall label conduit at each wall and floor penetration and at each conduit termination, such as outlet boxes, pull boxes, and junction boxes, or as otherwise specified in other sections. 4) Junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be labeled with identification name or number as determined by contractor and submitted for approval. 5) The Contractor shall label conduit sleeves at each wall and floor penetration. 6) Firestop S. Provide approved fire-resistant materials to restore originally -designed fire -ratings to all wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations used in the distribution and installation for communications cabling system. 7. Install and seal penetrations (conduit, sleeves, slots, chases) in fire -rated barriers created for communications infrastructure to prevent the passage of smoke, fire, toxic gas, or water through the penetrations. S. The firestopping material shall maintain/establish the fire -rated integrity of the wall/barrier that has been penetrated. 9. All through penetrations in a fire rated surface require a sleeve, regardless of penetration diameter or penetrating cable count. 10. Using a "ring and string" method of installing cabling for membrane penetrations in a wall cavity is acceptable, provided the solution was accepted by the Owner in writing. Code - compliant firestopping rules still apply. 11. Coordinate firestopping procedures and materials with General Contractor. 12. Sharing the pathway of other trades/utilities through compliant and non -compliant penetrations does not remove the requirement to maintain code -compliant firestopping. 13. Provide and install removable, intumescent mechanical systems in floor chases for all openings greater than 0'4". 14. Provide and install removable, intumescent, firestop bricks for all openings greater than 0'-4" where there are penetrations through walls. 15. Bricks shall be listed for insertion in fire -rated openings and require restraining materials or apparatus as needed per manufacturers' specifications. 16. Provide manufacturer recommended material for rated protection for any given barrier. 17. Laminate and permanently affix adjacent to chases the following information: a) Manufacturer of firestop system. b) Date of installation/repair. c) Part and model numbers of system and all components. d) Name and phone numbers of local distributor and manufacturer's corporate headquarters. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 00 00 - 13 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 18. Solutions and shop drawings/submittals for firestop materials and systems shall be presented to the General Contractor for written approval of materials/systems prior to purchase and installation. 19. Materials shall be installed per manufacturer instructions, be UL-listed for intended use, and meet NEC and local's codes for fire stopping measures. 20. The material chosen shall be distinctively colored to be clearly distinguishable from other materials, adhere to itself, and maintain the characteristics for which it is designed to allow for the removal and/or addition of communication cables without the necessity of drilling holes in the material. 21. Develop training manuals with instructions on methods of adding or removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases. E. Within the normal environment, the installed systems shall not generate nor be susceptible to any harmful electromagnetic emission, radiation, or induction that degrades, or obstructs any equipment. F. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare conductor pairs in cables, positions in patch panels, cross connects, and terminal strips, and space in cable pathways and backboard layouts to accommodate 20% future increase in structure cable system capacity. G. In the event of a breach of the representations and warranties contained herein, the Contractor, at their own expense, shall take all measures necessary to make the cabling system work and comply with the applicable manufacturer written technical recommendations and standards. H. System Tests 1. Upon completion of the installation of the communications infrastructure systems, including all pathways and grounding, the Contractor shall test the system. a) Cables and termination modules shall be affixed, mounted or installed to the designed/specified permanent location prior to testing. b) Any removal and reinstallation of any component in a circuit, including faceplates, shall require retesting of that circuit and any other disturbed or affected circuits. c) Approved instruments, apparatus, services, and qualified personnel shall be utilized. d) The Contractor must verify that the requirements of the specifications are fully met through testing with an approved tester (rated for testing parameters listed elsewhere), and documentation as specified below. e) This includes confirmation of requirements by demonstration, testing and inspection. Demonstration shall be provided at final walk-through in soft copy and printed test data. 2. Non -Compliant Cabling a) Testing that shows some or all pairs of a cable do not comply with specifications, without written approval by the Owner, shall be replaced at Contractor's expense (including respective connectors). b) With the Owner's written approval, the over -length cable(s) shall be excluded from requirements to pass standardized tests and shall be explicitly identified. 1) Testing is still required for non -compliant cabling. 2) The tests shall be for wire -mapping, opens, cable -pair shorts, and shorts - to -ground. 3) The test results must be within acceptable tolerances and shall be submitted with the Owner's acceptance document. 3. Failed Tests a) If tests fail, Contractor shall correct as required to produce a legitimate passing test. 270000-14 b) Manipulation of tester parameters on a failing test in order to achieve a passing test is unacceptable. c) If the Contractor is found to have manipulated or falsified any failing test result to show a "PASS" for any reason (without written notice and prior approval of the FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Owner), the Contractor shall be required to employ a Third -Party Testing Agent selected by the Owner to retest the complete cable plant and shall be required to pay all costs associated with this retesting. 4. Owner reserves the right to be present during any or all testing. 3.3 CLEANING A. The Contractor will clean all surfaces prior to final acceptance by Owner. 3.4 COMPLETION INSPECTION AND PUNCH LIST A. When the Contractor determines that the Scope of Work has been completed in accordance with the plans and specifications, Contractor shall schedule a Completion Inspection with the Owner. B. A Punch List will be generated during the Completion Inspection containing deficiencies in need of corrective action. C. Complete all punch list deficiencies within 10 working days. The work is not complete until all punch list deficiencies have been addressed. 3.5 ACCEPTANCE A. Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted, and Owner is satisfied that all work is in accordance with contract documents, the Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the system. B. Contractor must warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein (Standards Compliance & Test Requirements). C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post -installation testing which yields 100% PASS rating, and receipt of full documentation soft and hard copies as described herein. END OF SECTION 27 00 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 00 00 - 15 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 27 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes grounding and bonding products, design requirements and installation for communications systems. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 00 00 Electrical (including related sub -sections) 2. Section 27 00 00 Communications 3. Section 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 4. Section 27 1100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 5. Section 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 6. Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 7. Section 27 41 16 Audiovisual Systems 8. Section 27 41 17 Audiovisual Infrastructure 9. Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security (including related sub -sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced in Section 27 00 00 form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to Section 27 00 00. D. Codes and Standards 1. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. All conductor wire, busbars and conduit shall be UL listed. 2. The communications ground system shall be independent from all power grounding except for the connection to the building's electrical service main grounding electrode system. 3. Power grounding and/or bonding shall not be allowed to interfere or provide any back feed or be a conductor to the separate communications ground system source or to any communications bonded materials or equipment. B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) and Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) 1. The main ground source feed for the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) in the MC (MDF) shall be an independent feed from the building's electrical service main grounding electrode system, known as the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT). 2. The BCT shall be a stranded copper ground wire from the building ground system to the TMGB in the MC (MDF) sized at a minimum #4/0 unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record. 3. The BCT connections shall be low emission exothermic welds at the connecting ends. C. TEBC and RBC 1. All cabinets and racks shall be connected by the Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC). The TEBC is a stranded copper #4 conductor from the TMGB/TGB FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 05 26 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT extending along each row of racks within the room. Bond each rack with a Rack Bonding Conductor (RBC). The RBC is a stranded copper #6 conductor connected to the vertical rack bonding terminal. All connections shall be irreversible crimp connections. Route conductor so as to minimize the quantity of sweeping bends. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. B. The Contractor shall ship on manufacturer's standard reel sizes of one continuous length. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel quantity accordingly. PRODUCTS 1.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated in the work, include: B. Cable Manufacturers 1. Houston Wire and Cable Company 2. Okonite Company 3. General Cable 4. Pirelli Cable Corporation 5. Triangle Wire and Cable 6. Owner Approved Alternate C. Electrical Service Entrance Bonding Conductor and Connector Manufacturers 1. Copperweld 2. Thomas & Betts 3. Blackburn 4. Owner Approved Alternate D. Exothermic Connector Manufacturers 1. Erico Products (Cadweld) 2. Continental Industries (thermOweld) 3. Harger 4. Owner Approved Alternate E. Crimp Connector Manufacturers 1. Thomas & Betts 2. FCI Burndy Electrical 3. O-Z/Gedney 4. Owner Approved Alternate F. Telecommunication Grounding Busbars 1. Chatsworth 2. Panduit 3. Leviton 4. Owner Approved Alternate G. Bonding Straps 1. Chatsworth 2. Harger 270526-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Brundy 4. Owner Approved Alternate H. C-Type Compression Taps 1. Brundy 2. Harger 3. Owner Approved Alternate I. Antioxidant Joint Compound 1. Chatsworth 2. Owner Approved Alternate J. Labeling 1. Refer to Section 27 00 00. K. Firestopping 1. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 1.8 MATERIALS A. Communications Grounding Conductors: Copper American Wire Gauge (AWG) wire of the following sizes: 1. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT): #4/0 (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record) 2. Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB): #3/0 (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record) 3. Grounding Equalizer (GE): equal AWG as the TBB (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record) 4. Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC): #4 5. Rack Bonding Conductor (RBC): #6 B. Grounding Connectors 1. Connectors shall be a copper alloy material and two -hole, double -crimp compression lug type at the connecting ends. C. Telecommunications Main Ground Busbar (TMGB) 1. Use pre -drilled copper busbar with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors. 2. Sized for the immediate requirements and allow for 25% growth. 3. The minimum dimensions shall be 0'-'/4" thick X 0'-4" wide X 1'-8"/2'-0" long. 4. Contain (2) tiers of pre -drilled holes for use with standard sizes of two -hole copper compression lugs. 5. ASTM-B187-C11000 Copper bar suitable for use with two -hole compression -type copper lugs. D. Equipment Cabinet and Rack Ground Busbar 1. Provide and install a vertical ground busbar in all racks and equipment cabinets to be used as an equipment grounding bus. 2. The busbar shall be equal -flange (channel) l'-7" (19) rack width and shall include ground bar, splice plate and #12-24 mounting hardware. 3. The minimum dimensions shall be 0' 3/4" in width by 0'-3/16" in thickness. 4. The busbar shall have pre -drilled holes and shall be suitable for use with two -hole compression -type copper lugs. EXECUTION 1.9 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 1.10 PREPARATION FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 05 26 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Copper and copper alloy connections should be cleaned prior to connection. 1.11 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install the work in accordance with the specifications, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal data. B. All work shall be supervised and reviewed by the Contractor's on -site RCDD. C. Installation plans and Requests for Information (RFIs) shall be reviewed by the Contractor's RCDD. D. General 1. Bonding and grounding procedures and components shall comply with ANSI/TIA-607-B "Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications". 2. Bonding should be accomplished such that the bonding system is integrated and compliant with NEC specifications. 3. Bonding conductors shall be routed with minimum bends or changes in direction and should be made directly to the points being bonded. 4. Bonding connections should be made by using compression copper lugs. However, for parts of the ground electrode system that are subject to corrosion, must carry high currents reliably, or for locations that require minimum maintenance, connections are made with low emission exothermic welding (see NEC Article 250). 5. Make connections to dry surfaces only. 6. Remove paint, rust, oxides, scales, grease and dirt from surfaces before making connection. 7. Burnish clean a 0'-1" X 0'-1" area, drill, tap, apply an adequate amount of antioxidant joint compound mixed for the metal surface types affected, and bolt conductor and connector to burnished and compounded area. Ensure proper conductivity. 8. Route bonding conductor(s) the shortest distance between bonding contact points. 9. The ground -wire connecting ends shall have a minimum amount of insulation removed at the ground lug. 10. Do not connect ground wire in power cable assemblies to the telecommunications ground system. 11. All grounding and bonding conductors shall be copper and may be insulated. If bare - bonding conductors are used, isolate bonding conductors and prevent contact. 12. Antioxidant material shall be installed to separate dissimilar metals and prevent corrosion. 13. If multiple systems are involved (lightning protection systems, communications, radio and TV, CATV, etc.), those systems shall be bonded together to minimize potential differences between the systems, per NEC 250.94. E. Telecommunication Bonding Conductors 1. Each telecommunications grounding and bonding conductor shall be labeled at each end detailing the function and room number of its opposite end. Labels shall be located on conductors as close as practicable to their point of termination in a readable position. Labels shall be nonmetallic and include the following text, "TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUND - DO NOT REMOVE. IF THIS CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR MUST BE REMOVED, PLEASE CALL THE BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS MANAGER". 2. Furnish and install all required bonding material, hardware, and utilize tools manufactured for this purpose. 3. The connections of the BCT, TBB, GE, TEBC, and RBC shall be made using low emission exothermic welding or hydraulically crimped with a double crimp connector. Two -hole grounding lugs are preferred for connection to the grounding bus bars. a) All low emission exothermic welding shall be by Division 26. b) Coordinate with the building services personnel in occupied spaces to prevent the smoke from the exothermic weld process from potentially setting off smoke/fire 270526-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT alarms. 4. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in a ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds I (3ft) in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6AWG conductor, minimum. 5. The bonding conductors should be installed without splices. a) Where splices are necessary, the number of splices should be minimized, be accessible, and be located within the telecommunications spaces. b) Joined segments of a bonding conductor shall be connected using exothermic welding, irreversible compression -type connectors, or equivalent. All joints shall be adequately supported and protected from damage. F. Equipment Cabinets and Racks 1. The bulbar shall be installed at the base and back of each cabinet/rack for floor fed cabinets/racks. 2. The busbar shall be installed at the top and back of each cabinet/rack for top fed cabinets/racks. 3. Each cabinet and rack shall be provided with a minimum # 6 AWG ground wire. 4. Do not loop from cabinet/rack to cabinet/rack. 5. Each cabinet or rack bay against the wall shall be bottom/side ground fed from the wall. a) Wall ground feeds/raceways to racks shall not be exposed on the walls. b) Exception: Some cabinet or rack bays will require the ground to be fed from the ceiling raceway. 6. All ground raceways within each cabinet/rack or cabinet base and adjacent -ganged cabinet base shall be an insulated metallic flex type raceway and shall not interfere with equipment mounting frames or equipment mounting brackets. G. Cable Runway, Cable Raceway and Support System Grounding 1. The Contractor shall provide communications cable tray and cable runway systems with a communications dedicated ground from the TGB. 2. All cable tray needs to be electrically continuous per NEC 250.96. a) Metal raceways, wire -mesh cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, frames, fittings, and other metal non -current -carrying parts that are to serve as an alternate grounding path, with or without the use of supplementary equipment grounding conductors, shall be effectively bonded where necessary to ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current plausibly to be imposed on them. b) Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at the threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. c) Grounding or bonding conductors shall be connected by fittings designed for that purpose to ensure adequate bonding. 3. The Contractor shall provide and install a #6 AWG ground wire to bond one end of each cable tray/runway system to the TGB. 4. For electrically non -continuous conduits that contain only grounding conductor, the Contractor shall bond the conduit and conductor together at both ends to ground to the nearest TGB with grounding bushings or ground clamps. H. Shielded Backbone Cabling 1. The Contractor shall terminate and bond the shield to the nearest TGB or TMGB at both ends, following manufacturer's guidelines. 1.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing 1. Upon completion of the electrical system, including all grounding, the Electrical Contractor shall test the system for stray currents, ground shorts, etc. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 05 26 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Approved instruments, apparatus, services, and qualified personnel shall be utilized. 3. If stray currents, shorts, etc., are detected, eliminate or correct as required. END OF SECTION 27 05 26 270526-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 27 05 28 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Hangers and Supports, including open -top supports (cable hooks) for communications systems. 2. Conduits and Pull Boxes for communications systems. 3. Cable Tray and Cable Runway with associated accessories and fittings for communications systems. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 00 00 Electrical (including related sub -sections) 2. Section 27 00 00 Communications Systems 3. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 27 1100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 5. Section 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 6. Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 7. Section 27 41 16 Audiovisual Systems 8. Section 27 41 17 Audiovisual Infrastructure 9. Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security (including related sub -sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced in Section 27 00 00 form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to Section 27 00 00. D. Codes and Standards 1. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, and HANDLING A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. B. Conduit Storage 1. Package conduits in bundles maximum 10'-0" long, with conduit and coupling thread protectors for indoor/outdoor storage. 2. Package fittings in manufacturer's standard quantities and packaging suitable for indoor storage. 3. Protect coating on plastic -coated rigid conduit, fittings, and bodies from damage during shipment and storage. 4. Store conduit above ground on horizontal racks to prevent corrosion and entrance of debris. 5. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 05 28 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. Protect plastic conduit and inner duct from sunlight. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated in the work, include: B. Cable Hooks 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Erico 3. Caddy 4. Owner approved alternate C. Cable Tray 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Chatsworth (CPI) 3. Hoffman 4. WBT Wire Mesh 5. Owner approved alternate D. Innerduct 1. Carlon Riser Guard Flexible Raceway (corrugated innerduct) 2. MaxCell (fabric innerduct) 3. Owner approved alternate E. Measured pull tape (pull tape printed with sequential footage markings) 1. Fibertek 2. Condux International 3. Owner approved alternate F. Labeling 1. Refer to Section 27 00 00. G. Firestopping 1. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 2.2 CABLE HOOKS A. Cable hooks shall be factory assembled for direct attachment to walls, hanger rods, beam flanges, purlins, strut, floor posts, etc. to meet job conditions. B. Features 1. Cable hooks shall have a flat bottom and provide a minimum of 0'-1.625" cable -bearing surface. 2. Cable hooks shall have 90' radius edges to prevent damage while installing cables. 3. Cable hooks shall be designed so that the mounting hardware is recessed to prevent cable damage. 4. Cable hooks for non -corrosive areas shall be pre -galvanized steel. Where additional strength is required, cable hooks shall be spring steel with a zinc -plated finish. 5. Cable hooks for corrosive areas shall be stainless steel. 6. Cable hooks shall have a stainless steel cable latch retainer to provide containment of cables within the hook. 7. The retainer shall be removable and reusable. C. Factory assembled multi -tiered cable hooks shall be used where required to provide separate cabling compartments, or where additional capacity is needed. D. Load cable hooks in accordance with manufacturer requirements and recommendations. 270528-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT E. Provide capacity for 20% / 25% growth, add additional hooks as needed. 2.3 PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, AND GUTTERS A. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be UL listed and comply with NEC requirements. B. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall meet the following minimum material requirements: 1. 16-gauge steel or heavier 2. Seams shall be continuously welded and grounded smooth 3. External screws and clamps 4. External mounting feet (where applicable) 5. Oil -resistant gasket and adhesive 6. ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surface C. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be provided with bushings for conduits and/or cabling. D. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be securely installed. 2.4 CONDUITS A. All conduits shall be UL listed and comply with NEC requirements. B. Conduit Fittings 1. All fittings shall be compression or threaded. 2. Fittings shall provide a secure connection for pulling communications cables. 3. Setscrew fittings are not permitted. 4. Conduit "condulets" are not permitted. C. Non-metallic conduits are not permitted in above ground installations. Conversion fittings are required for non-metallic (below ground) to metallic (above ground) transitions. D. Innerduct: 1. All fiber shall be installed in innerduct unless fiber cabling is armored. 2. Shall be constructed of non-metallic material. E. Only manufacturer's fittings, transition adapters, terminators and fixed bends shall be used. F. Measured Pull Tape 1. Pre -lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant yarn with footage markers printed on the tape. 2. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1130 lbs. for 0'-1.5" and smaller conduits and innerduct. 3. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1800 lbs. for conduits larger than 0'-1.5". G. Fill and Bend Radius 1. Conduit fill shall comply with NEC requirements. 2. The minimum bend radius is 6 X the conduit inside diameter (ID) for 0'-2" conduit or less. 3. The minimum bend radius is 10 X the conduit ID for a conduit greater than 0'-2". 4. There shall be no more than two 90' bends (180' total) between conduit pull boxes. 5. Changes in direction shall be accomplished with sweeping bends observing minimum bend radius requirements above. 6. Do not use pull boxes for direction changes unless specifically designated otherwise in the drawings. 7. Unless otherwise noted in the drawings, conduits entering pull boxes shall be aligned with exiting conduits. H. Routing 1. Conduits shall be routed in the most direct route possible, with the fewest number of bends possible. 2. There shall be no continuous conduit sections longer than 100'-0" for premises conduits. For runs that total more than 100'-0", insert junction or pull boxes so that no continuous run between pull boxes is greater than 100'-0". 3. Penetrations FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 05 28 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. All conduit penetrations shall comply with all applicable fire codes. 5. All conduit penetrations in fire -rated walls or floors shall be sealed and fire -proofed to meet or exceed the designed rating of the penetration area. 2.5 CABLE TRAY A. Cable tray systems are defined to include, but are not limited to, straight sections of cable trays, bends, tees, elbows, reducers, crosses, wyes, vertical bends, up/down tees, cable support fittings, drop -outs, supports and accessories. B. Install all tray types utilizing manufacturer recommended installation instructions and applicable standards. C. Load cable tray and cable runway in accordance with manufacturer requirements and applicable standards. D. Cable Tray Systems 1. Wire basket (mesh) of types and sizes indicated on the drawings; with connector assemblies, clamp assemblies, connector plates, splice plates, cable drop outs, bonding accessories, and splice bars. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces. 2. For Telecom Rooms: Ladder type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (side rails) with transverse members (rungs) welded to the side rails. Rungs shall be spaced 0'- 9" on center. Spacing in radius fittings shall be 0'-9" as measured at the center of the tray's width. Rungs shall have a minimum cable -bearing surface of 0'-.875" with radius edges. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of the side rails. E. Cable trays shall have sufficient depth and width so as not to exceed a maximum 50% fill ratio, including 20% capacity for anticipated growth. F. All straight sections shall be supplied in minimum 8'-0" lengths, except where shorter lengths are permitted to facilitate tray assembly lengths. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORT A. Steel support brackets shall be galvanized steel and capable of supporting a minimum of 200 lbs with a safety factor of 3. B. Steel support brackets shall have a removable galvanized steel retaining strap. C. Steel support brackets shall accept 0'-3/8" (10mm) threaded rod for attachment to building structure or sub structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. B. Verify system is properly sized for cables before installation. C. Verify that the manufacturer recommended loads are not exceeded. D. Verify general routing and coordinate locations with other trades before installation. Layout cable runs in advance to determine quantities of cable to be installed along pathways, and to ensure non- interference from other trade installations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. B. Cable Hooks 1. Provide cable hook 0-hook) cable support system for horizontal and/or riser cabling in accessible ceiling space. Assemblies shall be complete with mounting hardware. 270528-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Provide threaded rod for supporting hangers when hanging from floor deck and deck members. 3. Follow manufacturers fill capacities. 4. Locate cable hooks on 4' to 5' centers to adequately support and distribute the cable's weight. 5. Suspended cables shall be installed with at least 0'-3" of clear vertical space above the ceiling tiles and support channels. 6. For larger quantities of cables, provide special supports that are specifically designed to support the required cable weight and volume. 7. Do not support pathways or cables with the ceiling suspension system or use electrical, plumbing, or other pipes for support. 8. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or substrates. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached, and that are suitably sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported. 9. Secure and support exposed horizontal cable at intervals not exceeding 5'-0" and not less than 1'-4" (16") from cabinets, pack pole, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 10. Cable sag between vertical supports for horizontal pathway shall not exceed 0'-6". Provide at least 0'-3" cable sag between supports. 11. Painted J-hooks shall meet or exceed NEC requirements for the environment in which the product is installed. C. Conduit and Pull Boxes 1. The Contractor shall route the conduit in approximate locations unless drawing is dimensioned for precise placement. 2. Conduit cuts shall be square. Ream ends of burrs, and remove metal shavings and cutting lubricants before conduit is connected to the conduit system. 3. For conduit embedded in concrete, coat threaded connections in conduits with colloidal rust and corrosion inhibitor and sealant. Conduit must be clean and dry and must pass standard sizing test after concrete is poured. 4. Cap unused conduits with watertight caps 5. Make conduit connections with appropriate fittings and tighten securely. 6. Use appropriate tools to install PVC coated conduit; avoid damage to exterior coating. 7. Install liquid -tight flexible metal conduit where exposed to weather, water, or other liquids. 8. Use IMC, PVC conduit, or rigid galvanized steel conduit in underground installations. 9. The Contractor shall provide fabric innerduct in all underground conduits, as indicated on the drawings. 10. The Contractor shall use pre -lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant fabric. 11. The Contractor shall be trained for proper installation technique by the innerduct manufacturer. The Contractor shall coordinate with the owner to demonstrate that pull ropes in each inner duct cell move freely from end to end. D. Cable Tray and Cable Runway I. Cut wire basket tray members square with approved cable tray cutting tool as to not leave sharp edges at cut point. Remove burrs and smooth the ends before the cut is connected to wire -mesh tray system. 2. Ensure that standard splices are designed to have less than I milliohm (0.0001 92) of resistance between connections and provide bonding between sections. Painted wire mesh tray requires the outer mask of the non-conductive surface be removed at each end of the tray prior to installing the splice to provide continuity between painted tray sections. 3. Threaded rod (minimum 0'-1/2" diameter) or equivalent and slotted channel shall be used for hanging cable tray between floor deck and deck members E. Fiber Support: FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 05 28 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Support vertical fiber optic cable with basket weave wire/cable grips. Support fiber riser with single weave support grip with a single offset eye. 2. Mount/attach pulling eye to a wall or ceiling deck secured hook to support/provide strain relief to riser cable. Provide a minimum Y-0" loop of fiber prior to entering fire stopped floor sleeve. 3. Where required coil up slack fiber cable into pull box and secure with single weave support grip. F. Clearances 1. A minimum of 1'-0" access headroom shall be provided above a cable tray. Ensure that other building components do not restrict access to the cable trays from the sides. 2. Power outlets shall not be installed in or mounted to cable tray or cable runway. 3. Provide 3'-0" of unencumbered space for every 10'-0" segment of tray. 4. Cable tray clearances a) Motors or transformers: 4'-0" b) Power cables and conduit: 1'-0" c) Fluorescent lighting: 0'-5" d) Halide lights: 1'-0" e) Above the ceiling tiles: 0'-3" f) Access above and on one side of the cable tray: F-0" 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test system to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections. B. Ensure compliance with specified maximum ground resistance. C. Refer to NFPA 70B Chapter 18 for testing and test methods. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove all unnecessary tools and equipment, unused materials, packing materials, and debris from each area where Work has been completed unless designated for storage. B. Wipe clean all cable trays and apply appropriate manufacturer's paint to areas that have been scratched. END OF SECTION 27 05 28 270528-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 1100 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 27 1100 - COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes basic communications and equipment room design requirements and fittings including: 1. Equipment cabinets, racks, frames and enclosures 2. Cable management and ladder racks 3. Telecommunications service entrance pathways 4. Rack mounted power protection and power strips B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 00 00 Electrical (including related sub -sections) 2. Section 27 00 00 Communications 3. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications 5. Section 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 6. Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 7. Section 27 41 16 Audiovisual Systems 8. Section 27 41 17 Audiovisual Infrastructure 9. Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security (including related sub -sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 27 00 00. D. Codes and Standards (Most recent editions or as required in contract) 1. Refer to section 27 00 00. 2. Local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase 3. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards. It shall be indicated in the proposal the components that may be of foreign manufacture, if any, and the country of origin. 1.3 COMMUNICATIONS ROOMS A. Communications rooms must be dedicated to designated equipment and services: 1. Space shall not be used for storage of equipment not related to designated equipment and services. 2. Hazardous or corrosive materials shall not be stored in the space. 3. Piping, ductwork and distribution of power, not related to designated equipment and services shall not pass through or be located within the space. a) Foreign piping such as water pipes, steam pipes, soil pipes, sanitary drains, storm drains, A/C ducts, and other unrelated systems utilized for or containing liquids, or gases shall not be installed or pass through communication rooms. b) With the exception of fire sprinklers, all water pipes shall be routed around communications room. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 11 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 1100 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Each communication room shall be equipped with fire detection, fire -extinguishing system and prevention devices. Connect detection devices to base building fire alarm system. A minimum of one (1) smoke detector shall be installed in each communications room. C. Walls shall be covered with 0' 3/4" X 4'-0" X 8'-0" AC -grade plywood backboard 1'-0" AFF (smooth side to interior of room mounted vertically), capable of supporting mounted hardware and equipment. 1. Plywood shall be affixed to the studs in the walls with screws that penetrate the studs a minimum of 0'-1", are spaced not greater than 1'-6" (18") apart in each stud, and with screws 0'-0" from the top and bottom of plywood. 2. Plywood shall be sealed against the wall and painted on all exposed sides with two coats of flat white non -reflective paint. 3. If applicable fire -treatment verification stamps on plywood shall be left unpainted to be readable. D. Communications room walls shall extend from floor slab to ceiling deck, with no drop ceilings installed. E. Cable tray or ladder rack should be used to distribute cables between rooms through finished wall penetrations. F. Cable ladder rack should be used to distribute cables within rooms, complete with cable bend limiters (drop outs). G. To reduce static, floors should not have carpet, but be sealed concrete to prevent concrete dust from forming. H. Communications rooms shall have only one lockable entrance door, a minimum of 3'-0" wide and 7'-0" high, that opens towards the outside of the room, and does not open into another room. 1. Doors shall be provided with a lockset for the appropriate technology key with pinned hinges and anti -pry guards. 2. Doors should have no windows or door seals. 3. Communications rooms should have no exterior identifying markings. I. Mechanical 1. Install monitoring sensors with dedicated environmental controls operating 24 hours a day, 365 days a year in the communications rooms. 2. Provide ventilation in the communications rooms to dissipate heat generated by active devices. 3. Temperature and Humidity requirements: a) Maintain communication rooms at an average of 60°F to 70°F, with a relative non - condensing humidity of 30% to 50%. b) The temperature range should be maintained within f 9° J. Plumbing 1. If "wet" fire suppression is used, install wire cages on sprinkler heads to prevent accidental operation. 2. Do not place sprinkler heads over equipment or cabling. In the event of a leak this will protect the equipment and cabling. 3. Drainage troughs are also recommended for leakage protection. K. Electrical 271100-2 1. One manufacturer's product is recommended for each type of installation. The mixing of different manufacturer products for one item is not acceptable. 2. No electrical feeders/branch circuits shall be placed in or run through any communications room except as required to service those rooms. 3. The Contractor shall install a slot (a UL-approved fire -rated assembly) to accommodate cable runway entry from corridor and a fire -retardant system (bricks, boards, mechanical, etc). The formed slot shall have no burrs or sharp edges. This opening in the wall will be used to pass data and voice cabling from the corridor cable tray into the communications room. 4. The Contractor shall provide uniform illumination of at least 50 foot-candles (fc) 3'-0" AFF for communications rooms located a minimum of 8'-6" AFF. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 1100 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a) Light fixtures in communications rooms are to be positioned for maximum lighting. Do not install over cable tray, ladder rack, or l'-7" (19") standing racks. b) Provide enough power receptacles to support equipment and service. Coordinate power requirements of active equipment with electrical designer. L. Relay Racks 1. l'-7" (19") X 7'-0" relay racks are to be used for mounting and termination of inter -building and intra-building fiber optic/ copper cables and components. a) The racks shall have adequate horizontal and vertical cable management for the 8P8C patch panels and switches. b) Racks with active electronics shall have rack mounted power strips. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to section 27 00 00. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 27 00 00. B. Product Standards 1. Equipment and materials shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of telecommunications cabling products and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to bid opening. 2. Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to section 27 00 00. B. Coordinate layout and installation of equipment with owner's communications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to section 27 00 00. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Refer to section 27 00 00. B. At the start of the project, contractor shall register the project with the manufacturer to help insure and facilitate manufacturer's warranty process. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. F-7" (19") Floor -Mounted Equipment Racks and Support Components 1. Chatsworth (CPI) - 46353-703 2. Owner approved alternate B. Horizontal Rack -Mount Cable Management (4 RU) 1. Panduit NM4 C. Angled Patch Panel — 48 Port Patch Panel 1. Panduit—CPPA48FM6BL, with Electric Ivory TG Style Jacks CJ688TGEI D. Vertical Rack -Mount Cable Management 1. Panduit 2. Leviton 3. Owner approved alternate E. Horizontal Runway and Support Components FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 11 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 1100 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Chatsworth (CPI) 2. B-Line 3. Owner approved alternate F. 8 Pin 8 Contact Jack Module — Black/Electric White Ivory 1. Panduit - CJ688TGBL — CJ688TGEI 2. Owner approved alternate G. Labeling 1. Refer to section 27 00 00. H. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 27 00 00. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refer to section 27 00 00. B. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. C. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross -connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room. D. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Refer to section 27 00 00. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to section 27 00 00. 3.5 CLEANING A. Refer to section 27 00 00. 3.6 ACCEPTANCE A. Refer to section 27 00 00. END OF SECTION 27 1100 27 11 00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 27 15 00 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section of the horizontal cabling portion of a structured cabling system includes: 1. UTP Copper cabling 2. Termination and patch cables B. Provide all horizontal cabling, terminating hardware, adapters, and cross -connecting hardware necessary to interconnect all system equipment including equipment located in communications rooms. C. Related Sections 1. Section 26 00 00 Electrical (including related sub -sections) 2. Section 27 00 00 Communications 3. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications 5. Section 27 1100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 6. Section 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 7. Section 27 41 16 Audiovisual Systems 8. Section 27 41 17 Audiovisual Infrastructure 9. Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security (including related sub -sections) 1.2 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 27 00 00. D. Codes and Standards 1. Refer to section 27 00 00. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to sections 27 00 00. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 27 00 00. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to sections 27 00 00 and 27 13 00. flr�9 1131X40I&II1*41130711113W A. Refer to section 27 00 00. A. Refer to section 27 00 00. 1.8 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT A. Refer to section 27 00 00. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 15 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Labeling 1. Refer to section 27 00 00. B. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 27 00 00. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE COPPER MANUFACTURERS A. UTP Plenum Rated Cable 1. Panduit 2. Berk-tek 3. CommScope 4. Superior Essex 5. Belden 6. General Cable 7. Owner approved alternate B. Datalloice Outlet Components l . Panduit — Pan Net Mini Com Jacks — (white or ivory for voice)(blue, as the first jack, then followed by black, green, and yellow for data) 2. Owner approved alternate C. Patch Panels (48 port) 1. Panduit — Mini-Com Modular Patch Panel Kits 2. Owner approved alternate D. Copper Patch Cords 1. Panduit 2. Belden 3. CommScope 4. Superior Essex 5. Berk-tek 6. General Cable 7. Owner approved alternate E. Wall and/or Rack Mount 110 Termination Blocks 1. Panduit 2. Leviton 3. Ortronics 4. Owner approved alternate 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Mount one laminated full-size hard copy in color of an as -built floor plan designating workstation locations, pathways, and communications room locations. Confirm hard copy size with Owner. B. Provide clear plastic lamination serving each communication room. C. Install the laminated drawings within a protective Plexiglas encasement on the wall of the servicing communications rooms. To ease accessibility, the Plexiglas encasement shall be in either flip -down format or file folder format. 2.4 HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLING A. Recognized cabling for providing the signal medium from the work area to the communications room shall include the following: 1. Category 6 UTP cable B. Category 6 UTP Cable Requirements 271500-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. 23/24 AWG solid bare copper 2. Cable jacket shall comply with NEC Article 800 for use as a plenum cable and shall be UL and c (UL) Listed Type CMP (communications multipurpose plenum) 3. Cable shall terminate on an eight -pin modular jack at each outlet. All horizontal cabling shall meet or exceed the ANSUTIA-568-C.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components 4. Cables shall be marked as UL verified with a minimum of Category 6 rating 5. The cable shall support Voice, Analog Base band Video/Audio, Fax, Modem, Switched-56, T-1, ISDN, RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, 10BASE-T Ethernet, Token Ring, 100Mbps TP-PMD, 100BASE-T Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital Video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM and emerging high -bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet, gigabit ATM, as well as all 77 channels (550 Mhz) of analog broadband video 6. The maximum horizontal cable length for Category 6 copper cable from the termination of the cable in the communications room to the outlet is 295'-0". 7. Cable shall meet or exceed the following electrical characteristics: 8. Cable shall be specified to 250 MHz and shall meet the manufacturer's guaranteed electrical performance and physical specifications. 2.5 TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Patch panels 1. Patch panels shall be rated to match installed cable plant 2. The wiring block shall accommodate #23 AWG cable conductors. 3. All modular cross connect panels shall be UL-listed. B. Work Area Outlet 1. Universal eight -position jack pin/pair assignments 2. Jack Color: a) Data: Blue > First jack, then followed by black, green, yellow b) Voice: White or Ivory C. Work Area Outlet Faceplates: 1. Ivory to match electrical outlets. 2.6 PATCH CABLES A. Verify exact quantities and lengths with Owner prior to purchase B. Patch Cable requirements: 1. Category 6, stranded UTP cable 2. Standard modular non -keyed, 8-position 8-conductor plug 3. 94V-0 rated 4. UL listed 5. Meets FCC Part 68 C. Provide 3'-0", 5'-099, 7'-0", and 10'-0" Patch Cords at the communications room for each installed port. 1. Coordinate with Owner on the active equipment layout prior to purchase to ensure correct sizing of patch cords from patch panels to switching equipment. 2. When connecting voice ports to a copper riser, provide a one -pair stranded 8P8C connector on one end and 110GS on the other end and shall be of appropriate length for application. D. Provide a 10'-0" Station Cord for each work area outlet port. E. Place each size/length patch cord in a separate container, and mark the containers that hold the patch cords with the length of patch cords contained within. F. All cords shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Horizontal Cabling Section, and be part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 15 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT G. Cords shall be equipped with an eight -pin modular connector on each end, wired straight through and shall be of appropriate length for application. H. All rated patch cords shall be round, and consist of #23 AWG copper, stranded conductors, tightly twisted into individual pairs. I. Patch cords shall be made and warranted by the manufacturer of the cabling system installed in this project and shall meet or exceed patch cord specifications as outlined in TIA standards. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING) SYSTEM A. Refer to sections 27 00 00. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 27 00 00. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refer to section 27 00 00. B. The Contractor shall check pathways, raceways, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, debris, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to section 27 00 00. B. All installation shall be done in conformance with ANSI/TIA-568-C standards, BICSI methods, industry standards and manufacturer's installation guidelines. 1. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the facilities. 2. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines shall require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation. 3. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation. C. Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with specified data cabling and the installed components and that ensure specified performance levels of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. 1. Pull cables in smooth and regular motions using methods that prevent cable kinking. 2. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the same raceway/pathway. 3. If necessary, use approved cable pulling lubricant 4. Use fish tape, cable, rope, basket weave wire/cable grips, and other tools that will ensure no damage to the media or raceway. 5. Install open cabling parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or structural members following surface contours where possible. 6. Do not bend cable greater than a bend radius of 0'-1". D. Provide a 10'-0" service loop at the communications room and shall provide a 3'-0" service loop above the access ceiling or cable trays unless specified otherwise. 1. All service loops shall be a minimum of 1'-6" (18") in diameter and be accessible for maintenance. E. Coordinate loop placement and orientation with the technology consultant. 1. This allows for future changes or expansion without installing new cables. F. Install cables in continuous "home run" lengths from work station outlet to specified patch panel. 271500-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. No intermediate punch down blocks or splices may be installed or utilized between the communications rooms and the workstation outlet without written Owner permission. G. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance specifications. 1. Factory twists of each individual pair must be maintained up to the connection points at both ends of the cable. 2. There shall never be more than 0'-'/z" of unsheathed cable at either the wiring closet or the workstation termination locations. H. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space. 1. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair equipment's efficient use of their full capacity. 3.4 CABLING METHODS A. The Contractor shall provide cabling in accessible spaces, cable tray, (surface and/or enclosed raceway), conduits, and/or J-Hook cable support system. 1. Within consoles, racks, cabinets, desks, and counters, in accessible ceilings spaces and in gypsum board partitions where open cable method may be used. 2. Use UL or ETL listed plenum rated cable in all spaces. 3. Provide all necessary installation materials, hardware, tools and equipment to perform insulation displacement type terminations at all data outlets, patch panels, and voice termination materials. B. Conceal raceway and cabling except in unfinished spaces as is practical. C. Exposed Cable 1. All station cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever possible. 2. Exposed station cable will only be run where indicated on the drawings and will only be allowed when no other options exist. a) Owner must approve all exceptions. D. The Contractor shall utilize conduits/cable tray as indicated on the drawings. E. All cabling placed above drop ceilings must be supported by cable tray, J-hooks, caddy bags or conduit. 1. The Contractor shall permanently affix cable supports to the building structure or substrates and provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached and are suitably sized to sustain the weight of the cables to be supported. a) Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. b) Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid wires. 2. Multiple cables are to be dressed every 5'-0" to 7'-011 . a) Maximum cable sag between cable hooks is 3"-6". F. The Contractor shall route data and voice cables separately in a neat and orderly fashion. 1. No cable ties or wraps shall be used to secure the cables in the runway outside of the communications rooms. Cable ties shall be rated for the environment. G. Keep all items protected before and after installation with dust and moisture proof barrier materials/envelopes. H. If wiring is terminated on patch panels, data, voice jacks prior to painting, carpet installation, and general finish clean up, these jacks shall be placed in a protective envelope to ensure dust, debris, moisture, and other foreign material do not settle onto jacks' contacts. 1. Envelope will be removed on final trim out after other trades have completed their finish work. 2. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure the integrity of these protective measures throughout the life/installation of the project. a) Cable bundles brought into the communications rooms shall be routed and dressed in such a manner that prior to termination the cables are not subject to damage and misuse such as installers walking on the bundles that are on the floor. b) Cable pulling force shall not exceed 25 lbs of pulling tension or cable FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 15 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. c) Do not leave cables on the floor unprotected or cable bundles hanging from the ceilings. Coil them up in a temporary manner and protect them from damage. I. Communications room cables shall be combed and dressed in a manner as to prevent twists, "braiding" and crossed cables in the cable bundle from the communication room entrance to the termination point at the rear of the patch panel. 1. Behind the patch panel, the cable bundle shall be attached to the rear cable support bar, and shall drop out each cable in a neat, cascading manner to prevent crossed and/or interwoven cables to each patch panel port termination point. a) Use Velcro wraps instead of cables ties for all bundling in the communications rooms. b) Plastic/nylon tie -wraps are not allowed to permanently secure cables inside the communications room. 3.5 CABLING SEPARATION A. Comply with TIA rules for separating unshielded copper communication and data-processing equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. B. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1'-6" (18") from electrical feeders and/or branch circuit wiring including, but not limited to, light fixtures, sources of heat and EMI sources. C. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1'-0" from auxiliary systems cabling. D. Maintain a 1'-0" separation where cables must pass perpendicularly to electrical, plumbing, or other wiring, conduit, or piping systems. 1. Use non -conduit bushings, if necessary to maintain separation, which allow for the addition of a reasonable number of cables in the future. E. Maintain communications pathways away from electrical apparatus such as motor driven equipment and transformers, minimum separation distance of 10'-0" is recommended. 3.6 CABLING TERMINATION A. Terminate cables in consistent consecutive order. B. Terminate cables onto 8P8C modular patch panels without damaging twisted pairs or jacket. C. Arrange cables on patch panels and voice termination hardware in ascending order of room numbers and outlet numbers within rooms. D. Provide a 10'-0" service loop for horizontal cables at each rack in communications rooms. 1. Locate loop at ceiling deck or on bottom of cable runway in minimum V-6" (18") diameter. E. Provide a 3'-6" service loop for horizontal cables at work area outlets. Locate service loop above or below data/voice outlet were vertical cable run transitions to horizontal run. F. Maintain twists in cable pairs to within 0'-1/2" of termination. G. Video Surveillance Systems Cabling (Electronic Safety and Security <ESS> devices) 1. Video Cameras will require a field terminated plug on the end of a horizontal cable to be directly plugged into device. a) Follow TIA-862-A Building Automation Standard. b) Contractor shall use applicable equipment in testing solid conductor plug. 2. Group all security systems cables in one group. 3. Clearly label cable number and function, in the last positions on the horizontal cabling blocks in each communications room. H. Building Systems Cabling (BAS, FA, elevator line, etc) 1. Coordinate exact placement and connectivity requirements with applicable trade prior to installation. 2. Group all building systems cables in one group. 3. Clearly label cable number and function, in the last positions on the horizontal cabling blocks in each communications room. 271500-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT I. Limit cable -bending radius to 20X the cable diameter during installation, and 15X the cable diameter after installation. J. Start numbering at the left of the main door to the room and continue in a clockwise direction around the room. 1. The cables within the room will be terminated starting with the cables located to the left of the main door to the room and continue around the room in a clockwise direction. 3.7 TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Station Hardware 1. Flush mount jacks shall be mounted in a faceplate with back box. 2. Outlets shall not be mounted on temporary, movable, or removable surfaces, doors, or access hatches without prior Owner approval. 3. 8P8C Jack Pin Assignments for work area outlets shall match the T-568B wiring scheme. B. Patch panels 1. Copper cables shall be terminated in eight position/eight conductor (8P8C) modular patch panels. 2. All Modular jack panels shall match the T-568B wiring scheme. C. Work Area Outlet 1. 8P8C non -keyed modular outlets for applications up to one Gbps and ANSI/TIA-568-C compliant for the specified transmission requirements D. Work Area Outlet Faceplates: 1. Furnish and install blank plates in all unused ports. 3.8 SPECIAL CIRCUITS A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on the cable termination plan for special circuits, including cables to wireless access point locations, security, elevators, fire alarms, etc. B. Wireless Access Points 1. Install two (2) cable(s) from dedicated wireless patch panel(s) in communications room to outlets having 8P8C connectors within a secure metal enclosure. 2. Enclosures shall be NEMA rated for the environment to which they are exposed. 3.9 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. Labeling system shall consist of a hand-held portable printer and labels appropriate to the application. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. B. Fiber termination hardware (designation strip) shall have a 0' 3/4" x 0'-'/4" thermal transfer printable label with a permanent acrylic adhesive C. I I0-type copper termination hardware shall have a laser printable, non -adhesive label designed for 110 terminal block marking. D. All labels shall be permanent and shall not fade, peel, or deteriorate due to environment or time. E. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the finalized plan in writing to the Owner representative and DataCom Design Group for review and authorization to proceed. 1. Coordinate with Owner for specifications on labeling of all hardware, cabling, and related equipment prior to any testing. F. Labeling requirements: 1. Label cable terminations on designation strips 2. Label all cable at each terminating point. 3. Label each port of the work area outlet. 4. Cable identification numbers shall not be duplicated. 5. Label patch panels and wall mounted termination blocks in the communications rooms to match those on the corresponding voice and data outlets. a) The font shall be at least 0'-1/8" in height. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 15 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 6. Where a wireless access point is installed above an acoustical ceiling, label the ceiling grid frame below the access point, displaying the data port number and, if applicable, the access point identification number. Coordinate labeling of grid with Owner and Architect prior to application of labels. 7. Label each distribution rack, block and other terminating equipment unit and field within that unit within 0'-4" from the block or patch panel termination. Keep labels in a neat and orderly lineup. 8. Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable -terminating and connecting hardware within connector fields, in wiring closets and equipment rooms. a) Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both communication and data- processing equipment, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. 9. Post the cable schedule in a prominent location in each wiring closet and equipment room. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. G. Location and termination field description 1. Room location 2. Rack -mount or Wall mount 3. Termination field type a) Specific patch panel ports versus a separate dedicated patch panel b) 110-type or M66 blocks H. Unique identifiers 1. Segregation and position on equipment rack 2. Port color -coding 3. Unique labeling I. Documentation 1. Provide electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for project in software and format selected by Owner. a) All labels shall correspond to as -built drawings and to final test reports. 2. All cable inventory data documentation shall be submitted in format coordinated with and approved by Owner so that data can be incorporated into existing databases. 3. Documentation shall include cable identification number, source and destination, type of cable, length of cable and number of pairs or fibers. 4. Complete cross connect documentation is required. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to section 27 00 00. 3.11 POST -INSTALLATION TESTING A. Contractor shall test each pair or strand of every cable prior to acceptance. (100% PASS) B. Contractor shall submit acceptance documentation as defined below. No cabling installation is considered complete until test results have been completed, submitted and approved. C. Standards Compliance and Test Requirements: 1. Cabling shall meet ANSUTIA-568-C.2 Category 6 Horizontal cabling requirements. D. Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, Return Loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT data that indicate the worst case result, the frequency at which it occurs, the limit at that point, and the margin. 1. These tests shall be performed in a swept frequency manner from 1 MHz to highest relevant frequency, using a swept frequency interval that is consistent with TIA and ISO requirements. 2. Information shall be provided for all pairs or pair combinations and in both directions when required by the appropriate standards. 3. Length, propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. a) Length, propagation delay, and delay skew shall be tested relative to the relevant limit. 271500-8 b) Test shall also include mutual capacitance and characteristic impedance. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1) Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a `FAIL". E. Cable Test Documentation: 1. Cable test documentation shall be submitted in hard copy and electronic formats. a) If proprietary software is used, disk or CD shall contain any necessary software application required to view test results. b) Electronic reports shall be accompanied by a Certificate signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor warranting the truth and accuracy of the electronic report. c) Certificate shall reference traceable circuit numbers that match the electronic record. 2. Each test record shall contain the cable ID as follows: a) "MEDIA TYPE — SOURCE ROOM — DESTINATION ROOM — STRAND/PAIR #", e.g. MM-MC-HC23-001. 3. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into an accessible database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of the test records. a) These test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e., "as saved in the field- test instrument". b) The file format, CSV (comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used. 4. Test reports shall include the following information for each cabling element: a) Wire map results that indicate that 100% of the cabling has been tested for shorts, opens, miss -wires, splits, polarity reversals, transpositions, presence of AC voltage and end -to -end connectivity. b) Length, propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a FAIL. C) Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type, and NVP d) Tester make & model, serial number, hardware version, and software version. e) Cable ID and project name f) Auto -test specification used g) Overall pass/fail indication h) Date of test F. Cable Test Equipment 1. Contractor shall supply all of the required test equipment used to conduct acceptance tests. 2. Test equipment used under this contract shall be from manufacturers that have a minimum of 5 years' experience in producing field test equipment. Manufacturers shall be ISO 9001 certified. 3. Testing equipment shall be UL-verified to meet Level III accuracy. a) The cable installers shall have a copy of this reference in their possession and be familiar with the contents. 4. Testing equipment shall be within the calibration period recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Testing equipment shall have the latest software and firmware installed. 6. Testing equipment of a given type shall be from the same manufacturer, and have compatible electronic results output. 7. Test adapter cables shall be approved by the manufacturer of the test equipment. a) Adapter cables from other sources are not acceptable. b) Adapter cables must be replaced after 1000 tests to ensure accuracy. 8. Test equipment must have a dynamic range of at least 100 dB to minimize measurement uncertainty. 9. Test equipment must be capable of storing full frequency sweep data for all tests and printing color graphical reports for all swept measurements. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 15 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 10. Test equipment must include S-Band time domain diagnostics for NEXT and return loss (TDNXT and TDRL) for accurate and efficient troubleshooting. 11. Test equipment must be capable of running individual NEXT, return loss, etc measurements in addition to auto tests. Individual tests increase productivity when diagnosing faults. 12. Test equipment must include a library of cable types, sorted by major manufacturer. 13. Test equipment must be able to internally group auto tests and cables in project folders for good records management. a) Test equipment must store at least 1000 auto tests in internal memory. 14. Test equipment must include DSP technology for support of advanced measurements. 15. Test equipment must make swept frequency measurements in compliance with TIA standards. 16. The measurement reference plane of the test equipment shall start immediately at the output of the test equipment interface connector. 17. There shall not be a time domain dead zone of any distance that excludes any part of the link from the measurement. 18. Acceptable testers: a) Fluke DTX CableAnalyzer b) Owner approved equivalent 3.12 FIBER TESTING A. Refer to Section 27 13 00. 3.13 CLEANING A. Refer to section 27 00 00. 3.14 ACCEPTANCE A. Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted and approved, and the Owner is satisfied that all work has been completed in accordance with contract documents, the Owner will notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the system. B. Contractor's RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein. C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post -installation testing which yields 100% PASS rating, and submittal and approval of full documentation as described above. Tests with the "* PASS" (asterisk) will not be acceptable. 1. These circuits must be repaired to meet "PASS". END OF SECTION 27 15 00 27 15 00 -10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100%, Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 27 4116 — AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.1. SUMMARY A. This document covers the general requirements for the installation of Audio Video (AV) active systems for City of Lubbock Crime Lab and Evidence Warehouse. 1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3. CODES A. Execute work in accordance with best AV system installation practices, National Electrical Code, and applicable state and local codes. 1.4. REGULATIONS A. Comply with terms and conditions of Americans with Disabilities Act, especially regarding provisions for hearing impaired and wheelchair access in control areas. 1.5. SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Refer to Division 1. 2. Submit in quantities, format and timetable as required by General Conditions. 3. Any work performed without an approved product submittal or shop drawing shall be performed at risk by the Contractor B. Product Data Binders 1. Minimum number of Sets: four (4). 2. Timetable a. Submit within thirty (30) days after award of contract. b. Submit simultaneously with Shop Drawings. C. Include complete table of contents including unit quantities per space d. Include product schematics/one-line diagrams with submitted literature. e. Allow minimum of ten (10) business days for review. All sets minus one (1) will be returned with review comments. If a resubmit is required, resubmit total quantity of complete sets. If second resubmit is required, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for expenses incurred during additional review process. f. Review and approval of Product Data is required before equipment purchase and installation. C. Shop Drawings 1. Minimum Number of Sets: four (4). 2. Timetable a. Submit within thirty (30) days after award of contract. b. Submit simultaneously with Product Data Binders. C. Allow minimum of ten (10) business days for review. All sets minus one (1) will be returned with review comments. If a resubmit is required, resubmit total quantity of complete sets. If second resubmit is required, Contract shall reimburse Owner for expenses incurred during additional review process. 3. Description: a. Shop Drawings shall be used for coordination between trades and updated throughout the project as required before submitting as final record drawings. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 41 16 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT b. Bind all Shop Drawings together to form set. Loose drawings will not be accepted. C. Each drawing shall include: Project, Building, Location, Contractor Name, Architect, AV Consultant, Date and Revision Number. d. Number and title each drawing in logical manner as a set. e. Include cover sheet with listing of all drawings included in bound set. f. Ensure that labeling on Shop Drawings match labeling on equipment. g. Minimum Scale: 1) Floor Plans: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. 2) Rack Elevations: 1-1/2 inch = 1 foot. 3) Plate/Panel Details: 6 inches = 1 foot. 4) Loudspeaker Details: 1 inch = 1 foot. h. Include as a minimum: 1) Floor plans indicating locations of all AV devices, vertical risers, pull boxes, and exposed wiring. Include Device ID (PRJ, SCREEN, FRK, FB, AVP, etc., as referenced in design contract documents), as appropriate for projectors, screens, racks, floor boxes, AV plates in walls, etc. 2) Schematic diagram showing all primary and secondary devices, interconnectivity and signal flow. 3) Plate details showing size, material, finish, connectors, engraving, etc. 4) Mounting detail drawings of loudspeakers, racks, and overhead equipment. Hire services of professional structural engineer, licensed by the appropriate governing authority, to review shop drawings, building structural drawings, and any existing structures from which equipment is to be suspended. Include Structural Engineer's stamped report with shop drawing submittal. Report shall include: i. Itemization of items reviewed by the Structural Engineer. j. Confirmation that proposed methods of suspending equipment as shown on the shop drawings conform to required safety factors. k. Confirmation that building structure from which equipment is to be suspended will support equipment including required safety factors. 1) Rack elevations. 2) Complete schematic diagram. One -line diagram with detailed descriptions of product inputs and outputs is acceptable. Include terminal strip details and cable label information. If wiring diagram spans more than three (3) sheets, additionally provide simplified block diagram of entire system on one (1) sheet. 3) Electrical power wiring diagram. Include circuit, switching, and control details. 4) Wiring diagram of grounding and shielding scheme. 5) Drawings for custom -fabricated items (i.e., plates, panels, cables, and assemblies). 6) General construction drawings necessary for completion of work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Minimum number of Sets: four (4). 2. Bind Operation and Maintenance Manuals using either GBC or 3-ring binders. 3. Format and Minimum Information below: a. Section 1 - System Operation. 1) Introduction/overview to system components and their functions and locations. Include a brief listing of basic system functions. 2) Complete but simple system operating instructions to accomplish basic system functions, written for non -technical personnel. 3) Certificate indicating names of Owner personnel trained by AV Contactor, 274116-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT date of training, name of AV Contractor representative that provided training, and name of project. b. Section 2 - System Documentation. 1) Simplified system one -line schematic diagram showing changes made during construction. 2) Complete inventory of system components including serial numbers. Identify location (equipment rack, over stage, stored in control room, etc.) of each component. 3) Cable and terminal strip documentation including cable numbers, functions, originating locations, terminating locations, and signal levels. 4) All Shop Drawings corrected to reflect as -built conditions. 5) Other data and drawings required during construction. 6) Initial Tests and Adjustments data. 7) Final Tests and Adjustments data. 8) CD-ROM discs including all utilized manufacturer's software and saved copies of software configurations (configurations as established during Final Tests and Adjustments). C. Section 3 - Manufacturer's Documentation. 1) For each equipment model at no additional costs to Owner, even if manufacturer does not include costs of such documentation with purchase of equipment item. 2) Manufacturer's Product Data. 3) Operating instructions. 4) Installation instructions. 5) Service information. 6) Schematic diagrams. 7) Replacement parts list. d. Section 4 - Maintenance Information. 1) Preventive maintenance schedule letter clearly stating target dates of six month and end -of -warranty preventative maintenance inspections, and list of maintenance tasks performed. 2) Maintenance instructions including manufacturer's recommended maintenance, recommended maintenance schedule and information concerning proper inspection, testing, and replacement of components. 3) Troubleshooting information complete with instructions for procedures during equipment failure. e. Section 5 — Warranty Information 1) System warranty letter. 4. Provide three (3) sets on CD-R disc that include all material in Operation and Maintenance Manuals in PDF format except for copyrighted material. 5. Submit one (1) set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals at least ten (10) days before Final Tests and Adjustments procedures (minus data from Final Tests and Adjustments). This set will be reviewed by Owner and returned to Contractor. Re -submit after Final Tests and Adjustments and include data. NOTE: Do not schedule Final Tests and Adjustments or perform training of Owner personnel before submitting Operation and Maintenance Manual. 6. Submit remaining number of complete manuals as required by General Conditions within ten (10) days after return of reviewed set(s). Include Final Tests and Adjustment data, warranty period letter, and any other data not included in first submission. E. Samples 1. Request for Samples - Upon request, furnish samples (at no additional cost) to Owner and/or General Contractor of submitted items proposed as substitutes for specified items. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 41 16 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Products will be reviewed to determine if proposed substitute items meet required function and quality. 2. Product Tests a. Products submitted as samples may require testing by independent laboratory. Testing at expense of Contractor. b. Obtain written approval of tested products before incorporating into system. 1.6. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AV Contractor Qualifications 1. Be established AV System Contractor, regularly engaged in furnishing and installing AV systems. NOTE: Electrical or general contracting firms responsible for completion of this work, but not meeting above requirement, shall employ services of approved AV Contractor as subcontractor to perform work described herein. 2. Be experienced in installations of similar size and scope within last five (5) years. Submit list of four (4) (minimum) installed jobs of similar magnitude, completed within last five years. For verification, submit complete information, including project name, project address, contact person, daytime telephone number plus month and year of project completion. At Owner's request, accompany Owner or Owner's representative on visit to any or all example completed projects submitted. 3. Be Authorized Dealer for all major lines of equipment listed in Part 2 (Biamp, Sony, Crown, Sharp, Crestron, etc.) Must have at least one permanent staff member who is factory trained in the installation and maintenance of each major product line offered. 4. Employ personnel (at all levels of work) experienced in projects of similar size and scope. Provide list of key personnel to be responsible for each of the following aspects of work: Project Management, Technical Documentation, Control System programming, DSP programming and Leadership of Field Work (one who is present for all field work). For each identified employee, indicate number of years employed by contractor, number of years' experience in assigned responsibilities, and list of previously completed projects where similar responsibilities were required. 5. Project manager assigned to this project must have a minimum of five (5) years' experience in installing and integrating AV systems of similar scale. Project Manager shall also have either an INFOCOMM CTS-I or CTS-D certification. PART2 PRODUCTS 1.1. GUIDELINES A. All active AV equipment shall be furnished by AV Contractor selected by the Owner. All active electronics shall be contractor furnished, contractor installed (CFCI). B. Infrastructure Products — All conduits, basket tray/cable tray, pull boxes and associated parts required for infrastructure shall be installed by the electrical contractor unless specifically excluded in these specifications or drawings. C. Performance - Regardless of completeness of descriptive paragraphs herein, each device shall meet its manufacturer's published specifications. Verify performance. D. Contract Documents - Drawings and specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another and to supplement one another. In general, the specifications determine the nature and quality of the materials, and the drawings establish the quantities, details, and give characteristics of performance that should be adhered to in the installation of the AV system components. If there is an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, the items with the greater quantity or quality shall be provided and installed. Clarification with the owner about these items shall be made prior to the ordering and installation. 274116-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT E. Quantities — All quantities are indicated on AV drawings or in Part 2 AV Products list. Confirm quantities on final Contract Documents. If Contract Documents do not include quantities necessary to deliver complete working system, provide notification of disparity, and install required quantity of devices for complete working system. F. Small Parts - Systems are described in terms of major products. Even if not specifically mentioned, provide and install patch cables, connectors, hardware, converters, power supplies, labels, terminals, mounting accessories etc. necessary for complete and working system meeting design intent of specifications. G. Balanced Lines — Unless specifically directed otherwise, wire all line and microphone level circuits as balanced with respect to signal ground. For products without balanced inputs or outputs, provide high quality balancing transformers with proper level, shielding, and impedance characteristics. Assure all audio levels arriving and leaving matrix and routing switchers are equal to the manufacturer's recommended input audio level. If required, use Radio Design Labs, Inc. products or equivalent for level matching. H. Keys - Provide five (5) sets of keys for any AV system product requiring keys. I. Condition — Provide and install products listed in this section in factory new condition, conforming to applicable provisions of American National Standards Institute. J. Designations - Each major product item is given unique designation (such as MIX1 for mixer number 1). The product designations are unique in this section only and may be repeated in other specification sections. K. Security Screws - Use Middle Atlantic HSK Guardian Series button -head screws and bits to secure rack components, LCD mounts, Projector mounts and any other location deemed necessary by Owner. Use nylon washers (not provided by Bryce) to protect equipment surfaces. Account for appropriate tip wear when ordering quantity and do no use a bit beyond the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide ten (10) additional unused driver bits and deliver to the customer after completion. L. AV Electrical Power - Ensure that "Star" ground configuration is properly implemented by the Electrical Contractor. Ensure that ground wires from each outlet are isolated from conduit, neutrals, and each other and are each home -run back to the dedicated breaker panel for AV systems. M. Wireless Microphones - Coordinate frequency selection with other radio -frequency sources in the area and with manufacturer's recommendations. N. Control System Programming: 1. Program each panel to provide simple, intuitive control of all basic AV functions including: per zone program and speech volume levels, video source and destination routing, AV system power, media player transport functions and CATV tuner control (including channel guide, navigation, last channel, channel select (up, down and manual input) and channel presets). 2. Utilize Infocomm International's "Dashboard for Controls" or current industry standard as concept for touch panel layout unless directed otherwise by Owner. 3. Control systems in all meeting and presentation spaces shall be integrated with building window shades and lighting systems allowing the Owner to manage and control these systems as part of the AV system presentation. 4. AV management software shall be installed on Owner furnished computer(s) with adequate specifications per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Provide layout of each and every touch panel and hard -button panel pages in the product data submittal for approval by Owner. 6. Provide web -control for each touch panel in AV system. Include page tracking, and track current button feedback between touch panel and web -control panel. 7. Staff member certified by control system manufacturer shall program control system. Control programming must be done by in-house personnel. Programming cannot be subbed out to another contractor or individual. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 41 16 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 8. After programming is approved, all control system code and programming, including touch panel code and graphics, will become property of Owner. AV Contractor shall provide Owner both raw and compiled code on CD-R disc. O. Audio System Programming - Owner shall coordinate layout and logical branching of DSP audio system. Include screen layout and menu branching drawings in AV submittal. After AV system is approved, all audio control system code and programming will become property of Owner. AV Contractor shall provide Owner both raw and compiled code on CD-R disc. P. EDID Configuration — The variety of resolutions of laptops and other computer devices that may be connected to these systems is unknown. Set preferred EDID settings to 1920x1080, 60Hz, 2- channel audio. Q. AV Racks: 1. Provide blank faceplate in any area marked BLANK in drawings. 2. Provide shelf for mounting of any device for which rack mount kit is not available. 3. Provide one Panelcrafters DATCO-XXXXX-RHIM-01 designer/integrator information plate or approved alternate per rack. Install information plate at the top of each rack unless 1RU space is not available. Contact Panelcrafters sales department to add AV Contractor graphic to the "integrator" section (approximately 8.5" x 1.75" of the right-hand side). All alternates must include AV Consultant graphic. Submit to AV designer for approval of final plate design prior to purchasing and installation. R. AV Floor Boxes and Poke-thrus: 1. Clean floor boxes and poke-thrus of all dust and debris prior to installation of any active or connectorized plate. 2. Any floor box or poke-thru with active or connectorized AV plates found to have any dust, debris or water in bottom of box are subject to replacement of all plates and components. A re -test of all associated components must be completed. 3. Provide blank plates for all unused compartments in the AV floor boxes and poke-thrus. S. AV Plates 1. The project standard plate color is white unless the plate is mounted on a wood or stone wall in which case it is to be stainless steel. T. AV Design Bid & Substitutions: 1. System design is around products listed in Part 2. Intent of product specification is to provide standard of quality and function for installed materials. Certain performance specifications are given to clarify job requirements. 2. Bid AV system with products specified in section below unless noted otherwise from Consultant. 3. No substitutions will be allowed without prior approval from Consultant specific to proposed manufacturer and model numbers. 4. Equipment listed in Part 2 is based on performance criteria to meet Owner design requirements. 5. All requested substitutions need to meet or exceed performance of devices listed in Part 2. For each request provide manufacturer's published specifications to verify performance and explain functional and cost impact. 6. Evaluation and approval of substitution requests will be performed by Consultant. 1.2. ROOM DESCRIPTIONS A. Conference Room: the room will have a large wall mounted flat panel display for showing presentations and video-conferencing. Wired inputs at the floor via poke-thru and wireless presentation will be provided as well as an owner furnished room PC and cable television tuner (CATV by others). Audio will be accommodated via recessed ceiling speakers. An installed assistive listening system will be included per ADA requirements. Control will be handled via a table mounted control panel. Web and Tele-conferencing will be achieved through a wired codec with web camera and ceiling mounted microphones. A digital signal processor with VoIP 274116-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT capability is provided to facilitate teleconferencing through an owner furnished VoIP connection. Equipment will reside in the room credenza or in a portable millwork rack. B. Digital Signage/CATV: Each digital signage/CATV location will have a wall mounted flat panel display for digital signage and/or showing cable television (cable television feed by others). A small form factor, IP addressable PC will be provided at each display for pushing content from an owner provided signage system. Control will be via the flat panel display's remote. 1.3. AV PRODUCTS A. The following are major active and infrastructure products for this project; not all listed are utilized — refer to system drawings. 1. AMP — Power Amplifier a. Type 1 — QSC SPA2 60 single channel 70volt 60watt amplifier 2. AVP — AV Input Plate a. Type 1 — Decora two -gang AV plate with cable HDMI and USB pass -through b. Type 2 — Decora two -gang AV plate C. Type MRK - Custom 5-gang plate with five (5) decora style cutouts each with a brush pass -through 3. CAM — PTZ Video Camera a. Type 1 — Cisco Webex PTZ 4K Camera with display mount. 1) Included with Integrator Bundle. 2) Include Power Supply. 3) Mount camera directly above FPD in Conference room 4. CC - Cable Cubby a. Type 1 — Extron Cable Cubby 202 with pass -through plates 1) Coordinate exact mounting location with architect 5. CDC — Codec Videoconferencing a. Type 1 —Cisco Webex Room Kit Plus with Webex PTZ 4K Integrator Bundle 1) Install codec in equipment credenza below display. 6. CMIC — Ceiling Microphone a. Type 1 —Shure MXA710 ceiling array microphone 7. DCP — Control Processor a. Type 1 — Crestron AV3 control processor 1) Include accessories such as expansion cards and power supplies as required to provide a fully functioning system as indicated on the drawings 2) Include C2N-I0 control port expansion module as required to provide a fully functioning system as indicated on the drawings 3) Include RS-232 extenders for cable runs over 50 feet 8. DMR — Digital Media Receiver a. Type 1 - Crestron DM-RMC-4KZ-100-C-1G-B-T twisted pair receiver 1) Power from switcher or PW-2412WU 2) Include appropriate decora cover plate to fit mounting condition 9. DMT — Digital Media Transmitter a. Type 1 - Crestron DM-TX-4KZ-100-C-1G 1) Power from switcher or PW-240WUL 2) Include appropriate decora cover plate to fit mounting condition 10. DSP — Digital Signal Processor a. Type 1 — Biamp TesiraForte DAN VT4 11. FPD - Flat Panel Display; 4K UHD resolution with integrated ATSC tuner; minimum 350nit; 16/7 power rating — submit equals by LG, Samsung, NEC. Ensure model selected does not protrude more than 4" from the wall when installed per TAS 307.2 ADA standard. a. Type 1 — Panasonic TH-65EF2U 65" diagonal. 1) Include Peerless AV Model SF660P series fixed wall mount FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 2741 16 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2) Include active unbalanced to balanced audio converter for audio output b. Type 2 — Panasonic TH-75EF2U 75" diagonal. 1) Include Peerless AV Model ST680P series fixed wall mount 2) Include active unbalanced to balanced audio converter for audio output C. Type DS — Panasonic TH-55EF2U 55" diagonal 1) Include Peerless AV Model ST660P series fixed wall mount 2) Coordinate with Owner to provide signage computers. d. Type SC — Panasonic TH-32EF2U 32" diagonal. 1) Include Peerless AV Model SF640P series fixed wall mount 2) Include theft resistant hardware. 3) Coordinate with Security to install surveillance computer. 12. IWB — Interactive Whiteboard a. Type 1 — Smartboard MX265 interactive display 65" diagonal 13. LA - Listening Assist System a. Type 1 - Williams Sound IR SY1 small -area infrared system 1) Install transmitter at millwork rack with antenna accessible for proper coverage. 2) Include additional receivers as required for ADA compliance. 14. MRK — Millwork Rack a. Type 1 - Middle Atlantic C5 Series Credenza 1) Power strip for appropriate power distribution b. Type 2 - Middle Atlantic RFR-1628 portable equipment cabinet 1) Coordinate finish with architect 2) Power strip for appropriate power distribution 15. NET — Network Switch a. PoE+ gigabit ethernet switch as approved by IT Dept. 16. PSW — Presentation Switcher a. Type 1 — Crestron DMPS3-4K-150-C presentation switcher 1) Use Extron Electronics ASA 131 passive audio summing adapters for incoming/outgoing balanced stereo audio signals. 2) Include RS-232 extenders for cable runs over 50 feet. 3) Include Crestron C2N-IO control port expansion model as necessary 17. PWR - Power Management a. Type 1 - Middle Atlantic PDC-915R-6 power supply b. Type 2 - Middle Atlantic UPS-220OR-IP uninterruptable power supply 18. S — Loudspeaker a. Type 1 - Tannoy CVS 8 with back can and grill 1) Tap at 7.5 watts. 2) Follow manufacturer's guidelines to paint speakers to match architect provided color sample 19. TP - Control Touch Panel a. Type 1 —Cisco Webex Room Navigator control unit 1) Included with Integrator Bundle. 2) Include tabletop kit as required. 20. WPS — Wireless Presentation System a. Type 1 — Crestron AirMedia 1) Include rack mount kit or shelf as required. 2) Coordinate with Owner to integrate with IT Dept. B. Interconnect Wiring — All AV cables will be plenum rated per NEC. 1. Analog Audio Plenum Rated Cable - West Penn 25291, or similar. 2. Digital Audio Plenum Rated Cable: Belden 1801B plenum -rated AES/EBU compliant equivalent. 274116-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Analog Composite Video Plenum Rated Cable: West Penn 25806 or Belden 89120. 4. Control Plenum Rated Cable: West Penn D25350. 5. Loudspeaker Plenum Rated Cable: West Penn 25226B & 25227B. 6. Shielded Cat7a Cable: Crestron DM-CBL-ULTRA 7. Interface/Adapter Cables: AMX or Extron Certified Cables 8. HDMI Interconnect Cables: Extron Pro Series HDMI Cables C. Connectors — All AV (including microphone) connectors shall be made by Canare or Neutrik. Connectors shall be of the quantity and type as required for proper and durable operation, and signal transmission of the electrical characteristics for associated circuitry. 1. Microphone connectors: 3-conductor XLR AES/EBU compliant (for microphones in tables/lecterns, use Neutrik RF shielded connectors). 2. Control panels: XLR type with number of conductors as required. 3. Line level and left/right audio connectors: tip/ring/sleeve 1/4" phone jacks with insulated bushings. 4. Composite video and RGBHV connectors: BNC dual crimp true 75 ohm BCP-C. 5. BNC shall be made by ADC or Kings and be HD -SDI compliant to 3 GHz. 6. Loudspeaker shall be Neutrik Speakon type. 7. Provide strain relief for each and every connector. PART 3 EXECUTION 1.1. INSTALLATION A. General Guidelines 1. Quality of Work - Perform labor to accepted industry standards and state and local codes to accomplish complete and working system. 2. Material and Labor - Provide specified products and other incidental materials, appliances, tools, and transportation required for complete and functioning systems. Provide personnel to perform labor who are skilled in techniques and can demonstrate technical knowledge AV infrastructure system installations. 3. Documents at Job Site - Keep following documents at job site during entire construction period: a. Complete Specifications and Drawings. b. Approved Shop Drawings. C. Approved Product Data. d. Progress Set of Project Record Documents including details of all installed conditions, ASIs, RFIs, Change Orders and Proposal Requests. e. Documents should be made available to the Owner and design team as needed during the course of Construction. 4. Mounting - Mount equipment and enclosures plumb and square. Ensure that permanently installed equipment is firmly and safely held in place. Design equipment supports to support loads imposed with project safety factor of five (5) or greater. For devices hung overhead, obtain review by Structural Engineer licensed by the appropriate governing authority prior to installation. 5. Dimension Verification - Verify dimensions and space requirements to assure that proper mounting, clearance, and maintenance access space is available for system components. 6. Clean -Up - Leave project clean each day. Place debris where designated by General Contractor. Debris includes but not limited to: solder splatter, cable ends, stripped insulation, spent crimp connectors, gypsum board and ceiling tile dust, and product wrappings and cartons. After completion of installation, thoroughly clean areas worked, including non -visible areas such as equipment rack interiors, rack top panels, and inside lockable floor and wall boxes. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 41 16 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 7. Coordinate installation of AV infrastructure and equipment with other trades in order to follow project schedule. 8. Maintain any licensing required by the appropriate governing authority to install and terminate low voltage systems. B. Labeling 1. Equipment Labels - AV Contractor shall provide engraved lamicoid labels on front and rear of rack -mounted equipment. Mount labels plumb and square. Include schematic reference design, item name, and system or area controlled by labeled component. On program preamps and mixers, provide label for each input indicating which source is controlled by labeled channel. Unless otherwise indicated, provide permanently -mounted black labels engraved with 1/8-inch white block characters. Handwritten, self -laminating, or embossed plastic (Dymo) labels are not acceptable. Provide labels for major equipment with two (2) lines (minimum) of engraving, coded as follows: a. Line 1: Generic name of device, such as MIXER AMPLIFIER. b. Line 2: Schematic designation of device, such as AV-MSW-1. 2. Control Labels — AV Contractor shall provide engraved label over each user -operated control that describes the function or purpose of control. Provide label of proper size to fit available space. 3. Terminal Strip Labels - AV Contractor shall label each terminal strip with unique identification code in addition to numerical label (Cinch MS series) for each terminal. Show terminal strip codes on system schematic drawings included with Project Record Documents. 4. Rear Equipment Labels - AV Contractor shall provide adhesive label on rear of equipment where cables attach, to indicate designation of cable connected at each point. 5. Cable and Wire Labels - Label cables and wiring logically, legibly and permanently for easy identification. Labels on cables shall be adhesive strip type, covered with clear heat shrink tubing. Factory stamped heat shrink tubing may be used. Hand-written or self - laminating type labels are not acceptable. 6. Cable Label Codes and Locations - Label each cable with unique alpha -numeric code. Locate cable designation at start and end of each cable run, within three (3) inches of termination point. For cable runs that have intermediate splice points, label cable with same designation throughout, with additional suffix to indicate each segment of run. Provide cable designation codes to schematic drawings included with Project Record Documents and Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Power and Grounding 1. Power Coordination — Coordinate final connection of power and ground wiring to rack. Electrical contractor will provide power to audio visual systems. Before installation, verify load requirements for systems as accepted. 2. Bus Bars - Install 1-inch by'/4-inch copper ground bus bar, top to bottom in floor mounted AV racks. Ground and bond equipment chassis of each rack -mounted component without three -pin grounding plug to bus bars with #12 AWG insulated green wire using 6-32 or larger nuts, bolts, lock -washers, and appropriate NEMA connectors. Electrical Contractor (Division 16) shall provide and connect #4 AWG green insulated wire from Bus Bars to ground point in AV technical electrical panel. D. Equipment Racks 1. Ventilation - Provide ventilation adequate to keep temperature in rack below 85 degrees Fahrenheit. Use "whisper" type ventilation fans in racks, adjusted to come on when temperature in rack rises above 85 degrees Fahrenheit, only if adequate cooling cannot be provided by Owner. E. Wiring 1. Wiring Standards - Execute wiring in strict adherence to best AV engineering practices. 2741 16 -10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Field Connection Devices - Connect cable to active components through screw terminal connections and spade lugs when appropriate. For BNC connections use three-piece, dual crimp BNC properly sized for cable with insulating bushings. Wire nut or "Skotchlock" connectors are not acceptable. Do not wrap audio cable splices or connections with adhesive backed tape. Punch connectors or telephone -style punch blocks are not acceptable anywhere in the installation unless specifically authorized by Owner. 3. Run cable in ceiling plenums neatly parallel to building walls, supported every three feet to structure with plenum rated ties. 4. Raceways - Run vertical wiring inside rack in Panduit (or equivalent) plastic raceways with snap -on covers, sized to allow at least 50% future wiring. Mount raceways on full length 3/4-inch flat black plywood backboards, attached to rack sides. If between -rack wiring chases are provided, Panduit raceways are not required. Horizontal wiring in rack shall be neatly tied in manageable bundles with cable lengths cut to minimize excess cable slack, but still allow for service and testing. Provide horizontal support bars if cable bundles sag. Individually bundle excess AC power cable away from rack mounted equipment with plastic cable ties. Electrical tape and adhesive backed cable tie anchors are not acceptable. 5. Accessibility - Ensure that wiring and connections are completely visible and labeled in rack. Mount termination resistors, if required, on terminal strips, fully visible and not concealed within equipment or connectors. 6. Loudspeaker Polarity - Connect loudspeakers electrically in phase, using same wire color for loudspeaker wiring throughout project. 7. Physical Damage Prevention - Take necessary precautions to prevent physical damage to cables and equipment. Damaged cables or equipment will not be accepted. Separate, organize, and route cables to restrict channel crosstalk and feedback oscillation. 8. Racks - Looking into the rack from the rear, locate AC power, control, data and speaker wiring on the left; line level audio, control, video, and RF wiring on the right. Keep several inches of space between power cables and other signals. 9. Hum Prevention - Ensure that electromagnetic and electrostatic hum is at inaudible levels. For line level signals, float cable shields at the output of the source device. Do not cut or remove shield conductors; fold back unconnected shields over cable jacket and cover with clear heat -shrink tubing. Do not obstruct cable labels. 10. Other Connections - Make connections using rosin core solder or approved mechanical connectors. Where spade lugs are used, crimp properly with ratchet type crimping tool. Solder spade lugs mounted on #22 AWG or smaller cable after crimping. 1.2. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Power up any electronic equipment to ensure its proper functioning before its arrival onsite. B. Ensure that materials (especially electronic and electro-acoustic devices) are protected against physical, environmental, and electronic damage until final acceptance by Owner. C. Schedule delivery to minimize delays in the project. D. Provide storage protection against temperature and humidity extremes, theft, vandalism, physical damage, and environmental damage. 1.3. WARRANTY A. Refer to Division 1. B. Warranty - Submit letter providing warranty covering labor and materials supplied under this contract. Bind in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Terms as described in General Conditions. Minimum terms as follows: 1. System - Systems shall be free of manufacturing or installation defects for a minimum period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. Clearly designate begin and end dates of system warranty period. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 2741 16 - 11 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Parts and Labor - Provide parts and labor to repair defects in materials and workmanship during system warranty period. 3. Response Time - Within system warranty period, provide initial on -site service response within one (1) business day of service call. Provide resolution to any system defects within 72 hours or within 48 hours of receipt of repaired or replaced product from manufacturer. 4. Replacement Products - If any item must be removed for repair during system warranty period, provide replacement item of similar quality at no charge. 5. Repair Limit - Do not repair any piece of equipment found defective during installation or system warranty period more than two (2) times. After second repair, replace defective item with similar approved item at no additional cost to Owner. 6. Extended Manufacturer's Warranties — Identify products with manufacturer's warranties extending beyond one (1) year. Provide terms and conditions of such warranties. 7. Service Personnel Information - Provide name(s) and telephone number(s) of service personnel to be contacted regarding repair and maintenance. C. Extended Warranty - Provide cost to extend complete AV system warranty from one (1) year to three (3) years. Included a list of all provided services including maintenance schedules. 1.4. INITIAL TESTS A. Purpose — These tests are to ensure that the AV system is installed and functioning as specified, and to ensure the system is ready for Final Tests and Adjustments (described later). B. Testing Standards — Perform testing in accordance with ANSI standards. C. Inspection - Verify prior to beginning actual tests and adjustments on systems: 1. Proper grounding of all electronic components (through third prong of power connector or separate connection between component chassis and ground bus bar). 2. Cables dressed, routed, and labeled, connected with proper polarity. 3. Insulation and shrink tubing in place. 4. Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc. removed. 5. Proper frequency settings (or modules) at crossovers and controllers. 6. All equalizer bands and tone controls set for flat frequency response. 7. Survey temperatures of each piece of equipment after four (4) hours use (minimum). Note and report any hot equipment. D. Electrical Power Quality - While all sound and AV system components are unplugged from electrical power outlets, AV Contractor shall turn on power to outlets, and confirm proper voltages at each outlet across the following pairs of terminals: hot and neutral, hot and ground, and neutral and ground (zero volts across neutral and ground). AV Contractor to document measurements. E. General Function Tests - Test each piece of equipment to ensure that it performs its intended function. Include all portable equipment in tests. Intent of initial tests is to verify complete, functioning system before Final Tests and Adjustments. Correct problems found during initial testing before beginning Final Tests and Adjustments. Document whether all pieces performed intended functions; note any unresolved malfunctions. F. Initial Tests and Adjustments Data - Submit written report of Initial Tests and Adjustments data upon completion to Owner. Include printed name(s) of technician(s) performing tests, date(s) and time(s) of tests, model and serial numbers of test equipment, results of each initial test, descriptions of problems encountered and their solutions, and statement that system is ready for Final Tests and Adjustments. Initial Tests and Adjustments Data to include signatures of technician(s) performing tests. 1.5. FINAL TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Purpose — These tests are to be witnessed by AV Consultant to determine if system is complete and functioning as designed and specified. Also, AV Consultant will perform listening and viewing tests and witness adjustments of all images for optimum clarity. 2741 16 -12 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Timetable - Coordinate with Owner, General Contractor, and AV Consultant to schedule Final Tests and Adjustments after submittal of Initial Tests and Adjustments data. C. System and Site Conditions — AV Consultant will witness Final Tests and Adjustments. Have systems fully functional and ready for observation and testing upon AV Consultant's arrival. Coordinate with all trades for quiet conditions throughout the listening areas and for the duration of the test schedule. If upon AV Consultant's arrival, systems do not meet criteria, site is not sufficiently quiet, or if Owner or AV Consultant is required to make additional trips to job site to witness additional testing or perform additional reviews of installed equipment, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for labor and expenses incurred by having incurred costs deducted from payments to contractor. D. Test Labor - Provide technician familiar with this project's AV systems and operation of test equipment to perform testing. Provide additional technician to assist in the tests and to perform troubleshooting, repairs, and adjustments. Include labor for these technicians to be present for one (1), eight (8)-hour day during Final Tests and Adjustments. E. Tools - Provide standard hand tools including screwdrivers, pliers, wire strippers, nut drivers, soldering iron, and other tools appropriate for troubleshooting system problems. F. Ladders and Scaffolds - Provide ladders and scaffolds to inspect/adjust loudspeakers and rigging points. G. Verification of Initial Tests and Adjustments - Verify that Initial Tests and Adjustments have been performed and meet criteria. During Final Tests and Adjustments, AV Consultant may require portions of the Initial Tests and Adjustments to be repeated. Repeat measurements as requested without claim for additional payment. 1.6. FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER A. Certificate — Submit Certificate of Final Acceptance form signed by Owner verifying complete installation and proper operation of systems upon fulfillment of all requirements and upon recommendation by Owner. B. General Adjustments — Adjust, balance, and align equipment for optimum quality, meeting manufacturers published specifications. C. Input/Output Jack Demonstration — Demonstrate proper performance and phase of each system input and output jack (all audio input and output jacks) as received at AV and network systems. D. Inventory — Inventory all installed and portable equipment for correct quantities. E. Functional Demonstration — Demonstrate operation of each function of each major piece of equipment. F. Other Tests - Perform any other tests on any part of the AV system as requested by Owner. G. Final Equipment Settings — Record final settings of all equalizer bands, tone controls, filters, delays, limiters, etc., including those established through computer software settings. Include descriptions of settings (including software settings) in Operation and Maintenance Manual. Include software copy of configuration file(s) in Operation and Maintenance Manual. H. Security Inspection — Inspect equipment for security from tampering (covers, shaft -locks, etc.). 1. Review of Labels — Review installed labels on cables, equipment, controls, and terminal strips. 1.7. OWNER TRAINING A. Provide Owner training as described in General Conditions. As a minimum, provide twelve (12) hours instruction (within four (4) trips to site) regarding AV Systems operation to Owner - designated personnel. Schedule instruction time(s) with Owner to occur after completion of Final Tests and Adjustments. Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule instruction time. Document date, time, and attendees of the training session and include documentation in Operation and Maintenance Manuals to serve as record of trained personnel. 1.8. SUPPORT DURING OWNER'S FIRST USE OF COMPLETED SYSTEM FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 2741 16 - 13 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4116 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Provide personnel familiar with design, installation, and operation of each system to be present at Owner's first use of each completed system (up to six (6) hours total in two sessions). During first use of each system, respond to Owner requests for troubleshooting, adjustments, and additional training. If no one contractor employee or representative can provide expertise in all aspects of the system, provide multiple personnel for the six (6) hours per session as required. Schedule presence of personnel in advance with Owner. Should significant elements of the new system be operational prior to final completion, Owner may elect to schedule contractor presence for Owner function prior to final completion of system. Should Owner exercise this option, contractor presence will not be required at first use following final completion. END OF SECTION 27 4116 2741 16 -14 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4117 AUDIO VISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 27 4117 - AUDIO VISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and DivisionOI — General Requirements apply. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor Boxes and Poke-Thru Devices B. Flat Panel Display In -Wall Storage Boxes C. Wall Junction Boxes D. Pull Boxes 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 09 — Flooring Systems B. Division 26 — Electrical, Electrical Systems and Components C. Division 27 — Communications: Communications Systems and Components D. Division 28 — Electronic Safety and Security: Security Systems and Components 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 0122 00 —Submittal Procedures 1. Product Data: For the following Infrastructure System components a) Poke-Thru Devices b) Flat Panel Display In -Wall Storage Boxes c) Ceiling Junction Boxes d) Wall Pull Boxes 2. Shop Drawings: For the following Infrastructure System components a) Floor plans shall indicate locations of all AV devices, vertical risers, pull boxes, and exposed wiring. 1) Include Device ID (PRJ, SCREEN, FRK, FB, AVP, etc., as referenced in design contract documents), as appropriate for projectors, screens, racks, floor boxes, AV plates in walls, etc. b) Electrical power wiring diagram. 1) Include circuit, switching, and control details. c) Wiring diagram of grounding and shielding scheme. d) Drawings for custom -fabricated items: 1) i.e., plates, panels, cables, and assemblies e) General construction drawings necessary for completion of work. f) Mounting detail drawings of loudspeakers, racks, and overhead equipment. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General 1. Floor Boxes provide the interface between power, audio video (A/V), and communications cabling in concrete floors and decks at activation locations requiring power, audio -video, or communication device outlets. a) ADA Compliance: Flush -mounted floor device outlets shall not create tripping hazard. 2. Poke-thru devices provide the interface between power, communication and audio -video (A/V) cabling in an above grade concrete floor and the activation location where power communication and/or A/V device outlets are required. These poke-thru devices provide recessed device outlets that will not obstruct the floor area. a) ADA Compliance: Flush -mounted floor device outlets shall not create tripping hazard. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 27 41 17 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4117 AUDIO VISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3. Flat Panel Display In -Wall Storage Boxes provide the interface between power, audio -video (AN), and communications cabling in recessed cavity of wall behind flat panel displays where power, communication and/or AN device outlets and/or device storage/mounting is required. 4. Wall Outlet Boxes provide the interface between power, audio -video (A/V) and communications cabling in walls at activation locations requiring power, audio -video, or communication device outlets. 5. Pull and Junction boxes provide an accessible pathway in a run of conduit to facilitate the pulling in of wires and cables. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of floor boxes, poke-thru devices and in -wall storage boxes of the types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Provide floor boxes, poke-thru devices, in -wall storage boxes, electrical junction boxes, pull boxes and plenum ceiling boxes that are produced by a manufacturer listed in this section. C. Electrical Raceways and Components: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, NEC, UL, and NEMA Standards pertaining to raceways and components. Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 100. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver floor boxes, poke-thru devices, and in -wall storage boxes and associated fittings in factory labeled packages. B. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. C. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GUIDELINES A. Floor Boxes, Poke-thru Devices, Wall Junction Boxes and Pull & Junction Boxes shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor selected by the Owner unless specifically excluded in these specifications or drawings. 1. Coordinate with AV Contractor regarding proper placement of duplex outlets for any AV designated floor box or Poke-thru Device. Electrical circuits should be connected (and outlets wired) to the designated AV circuit breaker panel (N.I.C.). Ensure that "Star" ground configuration is properly implemented. B. In -Wall Storage Boxes and Plenum Ceiling Boxes shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor unless specifically excluded in these specifications or drawings. 1. Coordinate with AV Contractor regarding proper placement of duplex outlets for any AV designated Plenum Ceiling Box and/or In -Wall Storage Box. C. Floor Box Inserts/Plate and Poke-thru Device Inserts/Plates shall be furnished and installed by the AV Contractor selected by the Owner unless specifically excluded in these specifications or drawings. D. Condition - Provide and install products listed in this section in factory new condition, conforming to applicable provisions of American National Standards Institute. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Substitutions will be considered under provisions of Section 0125 00. B. The following are major infrastructure products for this project. 1. FPD (Flat Panel Display Back Box) a) Chief Manufacturing PAC526FW in -wall pull box 1) Coordinate installation of power receptacle and data outlet with Division 26. 2. FPD (Flat Panel Display Back Box) — Security Monitor (Vestibule) a) Chief Manufacturing PAC525FCW in -wall pull box 1) Coordinate installation of power receptacle and data outlet with Division 26. 274117-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4117 AUDIO VISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT FB (Floor Box)) a) FSR FL-500P 6-inch deep floor box b) Include mounting brackets c) Cover finish per Architect PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions under which boxes, poke-thrus' fittings, and projection screens are to be installed and substrate that will support boxes. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 2. Verify rough -in openings are properly prepared. 3.02 DOCUMENT INTERPRETATION A. The locations of the outlet symbols shown in the Drawings represent a close approximation of the exact location where the outlet shall be installed. This location may be shifted left or right eight inches to allow for stud alignment or coordination with electrical outlet locations. Approval by Owner is required for more extensive adjustments to outlet location. B. Outlet Schedule 1. Refer to the outlet schedule contained on the Drawings for outlet mounting height, device box size, and station conduit size. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and to prevent electrical hazards. B. Accessories: Provide accessories as required for a complete installation, including insulated bushings and inserts where required by manufacturer. C. Unused Openings: Close unused box openings using manufacturers recommended accessories. D. Outlet Box Mounting: 1. Station cable boxes shall be 4-11/16" square x 3" deep regardless of cable count or cable type. 2. Height: unless otherwise noted in the Outlet Schedule, all communication outlet boxes shall be installed at the same height as electrical outlets, except WCP outlets, which shall be installed at 48 inches AFF to center of box. 3. Install boxes to accommodate device indicated by symbol, in conformance with code requirements and consistent with type of construction. 4. Install the appropriate work cover on all outlet boxes. 5. Set front edge of device box flush with the finished surfaces except on walls of non0combustible materials where the boxes may have maximum set back of/4". Secure flush - mounted box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. 6. Set outlet boxes parallel to construction and independently attached to same. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 2741 17 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 27 4117 AUDIO VISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 7. Do not install back-to-back and through -the -wall boxes. Install with a minimum 6" horizontal separation between closest edges of the boxes. Install with minimum 24" separation in acoustic rated walls. 8. Outlet boxes for audiovisual shall be in a separate box from electrical outlets. E. Box Support: 1. Mount boxes straight and plumb. 2. Install stud support one side, with short piece of stud, for up to 2-Gang device boxes. 3. Do not support boxes with tie -wire. 4. For one- and two -gang box support, manufactured bracket supports shall be accepted alternate. 5. Support boxes independently of raceways. 6. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet boxes. 7. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush -mounted junction box between studs. 8. Do not install boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. 9. When boxes are installed in fire -resistive walls and partitions, provide 24" horizontal separation between boxes on opposite sides of a wall. In addition, limit penetrations to 16 square inches per penetration and not to exceed a total of 100 square inches per 100 square feet of wall area. Apply fire stop putty or muffins acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect boxes and fittings until acceptance. 3.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery to minimize delays in the project. B. Provide storage protection against temperature and humidity extremes, theft, vandalism, physical damage, and environmental damage. END OF SECTION 27 4117 2741 17-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 28 00 00 - ELECTRONIC SECURITY GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT SUMMARY/OVERVIEW A. This document covers the general requirements for work to be performed to provide electronic security and surveillance. B. The contents of this document, along with related drawings and other documentary material, are critical to the security of this project and Owner and shall remain secure and confidential. 1. Confidential information shall not be deliberately or inadvertently disclosed to anyone other than the Contractor's personnel and subcontractors who require disclosure to perform their portion of the work. 2. This confidential information shall be tracked to ensure that copies are accounted for and properly destroyed when no longer needed to perform the work. C. The security systems shall consist of the following integrated subsystems as specified herein: 1. Video Surveillance 2. Emergency Intercommunications and Duress D. Provide complete turnkey systems with the exception of those items noted within this specification as being provided by others. E. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 00 00 Electrical (including related sub -sections) 2. Section 27 00 00 Communications (including related sub -sections) 3. Section 28 10 00 Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection 4. Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 5. Section 28 26 00 Emergency Intercommunications and Duress 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Upon completion of commissioning testing and Owner acceptance, DataCom Design Group bears no liability or responsibility for the continued proper operation of the installed systems. B. The Items described herein shall not be modified or substituted without consent of DataCom Design Group and/or the Owner. C. Electronic security systems integrator (security subcontractor) manager/supervisor shall attend meetings arranged by the Contractor, Architect, Owner or other parties affected by the work of this Section 28 00 00. D. If the manufacturer of security devices or connecting hardware has supplied post manufacture performance data, copies of such are to be kept for inclusion in the documentation and made available to the Owner upon request. E. All materials are to be new unused and of the latest series of model number, unless otherwise indicated by the Owner or security system designer. F. All security integrator personnel must be manufacturer certified and capable of an installation that falls under the manufacturer's guidelines necessary to obtain a manufacturer warranty. 1. The integrator shall provide all components/materials essential for a complete and functional security access and surveillance system. G. Security integrator shall issue a two (2) year warranty on installation and workmanship. H. These Specifications and Drawings are intended for bidding purposes only, No part shall be copied or used for any purpose other than bidding on this project. 1. This package shall be contractual upon bid award. 1. Drawings and Specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another and to supplement one another. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 00 00 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. In general Specifications determine the nature and quality of the materials and tests, and drawings establish the quantities, details and give characteristics of performance that should be adhered to in the installation of the security system components. 2. If there is an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, or within the specifications themselves, the items with greater quantity or quality shall be estimated and installed. 3. Clarification with the Owner/Designer about these items shall be made prior to purchase and installation. 4. Questions regarding the Specification or system requirements should be directed in writing to DataCom Design Group or the Owner. J. Security integrator shall adhere to Division 1 general requirements and written security Specifications and Drawings within this construction package and shall be responsible for complying with all local, state and federal laws or regulations applicable to the work being performed, even though said law, rule or regulation is not identified herein. K. Security integrator shall arrange and pay for any inspections required by the public agencies having jurisdiction in the area. L. The security contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of this agreement, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from, or conjunction with, the performance of the work hereunder by the security integrator, his agents, representatives, or employees. 1. The security integrator shall pay the cost of such insurance. M. The security integrator will respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of the Owner, his employees, processes, products, and intellectual property to the extent necessary, consistent with the legal responsibilities of the State of Texas and the Owner. N. If required the security integrator shall sign a non -disclosure agreement and abide by its requirements to keep confidential all information concerning bid documents and this Project. O. Furnish submittals and manuals in accordance with Division 1. P. Furnish a detailed material list complete with suppliers (distributors) list of components and distributors name, address, and phone number. Q. Refer to Specifications issued by Architect, Division 1, for Project and cost payments. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in Specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. For conflicts between referenced requirements and contract documents comply with the one that is more stringent. 1. Federal, State, and Local codes, regulations and ordinances 2. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code 3. NFPA 730: Guide for Premises Security 4. NFPA 731: Standard for the Installation of Electronic Premises Security 5. National Electric Code (NEC), latest edition 6. Building Codes (UBC) (IBC), latest editions 7. Local Governing Authorities Having Jurisdiction 8. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Applicable Standards for Safety and Security 9. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Applicable Standards 10. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) Applicable Standards 11. City of Lubbock standards for Security Systems D. Related Documents 280000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT 1. Security Drawings 2. General provisions of contract 3. Uniform general conditions 4. Supplementary general conditions 5. Architectural plans & specifications 6. Requirements of Division 1 7. Electrical / Mechanical / Telecommunications specifications and plans. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM WORK A. Furnish and install all materials, tools, equipment, and services for all electronic security/surveillance devices to provide functioning systems in accordance with performance requirements specified and any modifications resulting from reviewed shop and field coordinated drawings. 1. Video Surveillance System a. This system is used to provide video surveillance through the use of cameras of security sensitive areas and target items. b. The system shall allow for the viewing and recording of images. 2. Emergency Intercommunications and Duress Systems a. Emergency Phone / Intercom / Call Stations 1) The device typically is a distinct box or pole with a call button. 2) Depressing the call button puts the individual in direct voice contact with assigned monitor along with specific location information. B. RACKS AND ENCLOSURES 1. Wall mounted enclosures shall be installed as per manufacturer's requirements. a. Coordinate pathways and power with Electrical and Telecommunications Contractors b. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all control consoles, equipment racks, cabinets, and enclosures not provided by others in accordance with contract documents. C. Completely coordinate with work of other trades to avoid duplication in purchasing. d. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 2. The installation of the relay racks/cabinets for Electronic Surveillance shall be by the Telecommunications Contractor. a. Coordinate locations with G.C. C. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound and complete installation. D. Drawings are representative and show general arrangement of systems and equipment, except when dimensioned or detailed. 1. For exact locations refer to dimensioned architectural drawings. a. Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned drawings. b. Field verify locations and arrangement of all systems and equipment. C. Coordinate all work with other trades and Contractor. E. Electronics systems work as specified in this Section and Sections 281000, 282300, 282600 shall include: A project kick-off/pre-submittal meeting with the Architect, Designer, and Contractor to review security design package. a. Additional participants shall include: 1) Division 8 subcontractors 2) Division 14 subcontractors 3) Division 26 subcontractors FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 00 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Preparation of pre -installation submittals, including point-to-point wiring information for security equipment to interface to work by others prior to start of any installation work. Include lock permit requests in submittals for review. 3. Furnishing and installation of all security devices, components and accessories. 4. The furnishing and coordination on installation of special back boxes for security equipment and field devices as required. 5. Equipment Enclosures shall to be furnished and installed by the Security contractor. a. Coordinate location, size and positioning of racks and enclosures with telecommunications contractor. 6. Furnishing, installation and termination of all copper wiring and cabling including any special purpose wire and cable for electronic security systems. a. Coordinate all network and fiber optic cable interface provided by telecommunications subcontractor. 7. Coordinate raceway and power distribution systems provided by Division 26. 8. Coordination with other trades and Owner required to facilitate the installation of the security equipment including: a. Division 26 (power, raceways, and fire alarms) b. Division 27 (telecommunications network interface). 9. Programming of all security control equipment and prior coordination with the Owner's security and telecommunications personnel. 10. Preparation of "As -Built" documentation. 11. Warranty service for completed work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Requirements of Division 1. B. Pre -Installation Submittal Requirements 1. Submittals for electronic security shall be complete and submitted at the same time. a. No partial submittals will be accepted for review. b. Allow 2 weeks for consultant review of submittals. 2. General Requirements a. A functional description of each system. b. Power supply points listing with devices and maximum loads to prevent overloading. C. Equipment schedules listing all system components, manufacturer, model number and quantities of each. d. Qualifications and proof of work history (with references). 3. Product Data Cut -sheets a. Complete manufacturer's technical data including manufacturer warranty information, descriptive literature, illustrations, and installation instructions for all components included within this project indicating compliance with applicable referenced standards, size, dimensions, model number, electrical characteristics, support requirements, connection requirements and all applicable information verifying that submitted components comply with Contract Documents. 4. Shop Drawings a. Floor plans necessary to identify specific device locations, cable routes and quantities, cable types, riser locations, and references to installation details and diagrams. b. Riser diagram showing routes between floors or other areas that are not easily identified on the floor plans. C. Security One -line diagrams showing all input and output points of the system. 1) The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the consultant team, file with him two corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. 2) The consultant's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, 280000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT unless he has in writing called the Architect's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. d. Release of CAD Files 1) Contractor may request to utilize DataCom's AutoCAD floor plan files for assistance in producing shop drawings. 2) Request shall be made by signing DataCom's "Agreement for Release of CAD Files" letter. 5. Warranty a. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with the requirements described in the WARRANTY section. 6. Qualifications a. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with the requirements described in the QUALITY ASSURANCE section. C. As -Built drawings shall be in current AutoCAD format, same version as used by the Architect. 1. Dimensions and scale of the drawing sheets submitted shall match the size of the drawing used for the contract documents, and shall include the following. a. Utilize normally recognized drafting procedures that match AutoCAD standards, Architect, and Designer guidelines and methodology. b. The As -Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the building identified in, but not limited to, Addenda, contemplated change notices, Site Instructions or deviations resulting from site conditions. C. Dimensioned plan and elevation views of all security components. d. Cable routing paths of security cables to identified infrastructure pathways. e. All rack, cabinet, and enclosure locations and labeling thereof. f. One -line diagrams of equipment/device interconnecting cabling of the security systems. g. Standard or typical installation details of installations unique to Owner's requirements. h. Submit one soft and one hard copy with project deliverables within 30 days of project completion. D. Security integrator shall provide three (3) paper copies and one (1) electronic copy (PDF format) of a properly indexed O&M Manual at the conclusion of the project, which will include, but not be limited to the following requirements: 1. Ring binder with project title, properly indexed, and contractor's name on cover and spine including: a. Sequence of operations, design philosophy, and specific functions b. System block diagram C. Equipment list including: 1) A brief description 2) Model 3) Total number of each item used in the project. d. Camera schedule including: 1) Number 2) Location 3) Camera model/manufacturer 4) View 5) Lens 6) Power source 7) Multiplexer/input 8) Settings entered on site e. Manufacturers' data sheet and O&M manual for associated equipment. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 00 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT f. Maintenance requirements for equipment, inspections and preventative maintenance schedules. g. As -built drawings for each floor plan layout and rack and wall elevation layouts. Each drawing shall show: 1) Actual cable routing pathway 2) Device number (camera, etc.), h. Final test data (measured video levels, day & night camera snapshots in JPEG format and other significant operating parameters). i. List of system associated mechanical locking keys with key codes and tamper resistant hardware types. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electronic security systems integrator (security subcontractor) shall meet the following minimum requirements. 1. Maintain a valid Type B license from the Texas Private Security Bureau. 2. Have successfully completed three (3) projects of similar size and complexity that have been in proper operation for a period of one (1) year. 3. Technicians shall be factory trained and certified in specified systems. 4. The Project manager and supervising/lead technician shall have been regularly engaged in the installation and testing of the products specified for not less than five (5) years and maintain manufacturer certification. 5. The security integrator must maintain an operating facility in the local area (50 mile radius) of the Project location to provide service to the Owner for the warranty period. a. At the Owners request for service, the security integrator shall dispatch a service technician to the location to affect the required repairs or adjustments. 6. The contractor shall maintain a spare parts inventory necessary to resolve component failures of the system. a. Refer to individual specification section for a list of specifically required parts provided to the owner and stored on site. These parts will become the property of the owner. 1) At the end of the warranty period the security integrator shall test the owner's spare parts and repair or replace as needed to bring the parts up to proper operation. B. Security integrators desiring approval must comply with Division I requirements. C. Security integrator must be cognizant of site conditions, verify locations of new and existing equipment, and determine exact requirements for connection and interface. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment and components shall be delivered properly protected and undamaged with original containers, packaging, and labels intact. B. Store, handle, and protect all related materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking, scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. 1. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the owner. E. Protect all equipment and components that are to be installed from theft, vandalism, or use by unauthorized persons. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 280000-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Security integrator is responsible for conducting a site survey prior to the commencement of work to determine locations of all existing security devices and verify the proposed locations of the new components to be installed. B. Security integrator will coordinate all work through the Contractor and schedule work to cause as little interference or interruption of existing services as possible. C. Security integrator will arrange and pay for all necessary permits, licenses, and inspections. 1. Security integrator shall prepare all information necessary to obtain a permit for Electronic Locking Mechanisms in compliance with the Owner requirements. D. Verify with Division 26 installer all conduits and special back box requirements in a timely manner. 1.9 WARRANTY A. See requirements in Division 1 Specifications. B. The Security Integrator shall warrant all completed work, including all materials and labor, to be free from defects in design, workmanship, and/or materials for a period of two (2) years from final acceptance date. 1. System acceptance is defined as the completion of all functional performance testing and the resolution of all punch list items. C. Warranty Service 1. In the event that defects in the materials and/or workmanship are identified during the warranty period, the contractor shall provide all labor and materials to correct the deficiency. 2. All service work shall be performed by factory certified technicians. 3. All warranty service shall include the replacement of all parts and or components as required to restore normal system operation. a. If parts or components need to be repaired, a loaner will be supplied and installed until the part or component can be repaired and reinstalled. 4. Immediately following a warranty service request, the Contractor shall provide written documentation to Owner which details the service work completed, cause of trouble, and any outstanding work required to restore a complete and normal system. D. Warranty service requests shall be responded to within 4 hours of notification with a qualified service technician on site. E. All repairs shall be completed within 48 hours upon site arrival. 1. If the failure exceeds 48 hours, the Owner reserves the right to require the contractor provide on -site manufacturer support at no additional cost to Owner. F. Extended warranties on equipment components offered by the manufacturer shall be passed through to the Owner. 1. Warranty provisions shall be fully transferable only at the direction of the Owner, in the event that ownership of the installed security systems is transferred. 1.10 SYSTEMS STARTUP AND TRAINING A. After all systems have been tested, accepted and turned on for operation, the Security integrator shall provide "User Training" to Owner personnel. 1. The onsite training shall cover all newly installed electronic security components, devices and systems. The training classes shall total a minimum of twelve (8) hours for up to four (2) people of the Owner's choosing. 2. The contents of the manuals will include: a. Title page with subject, system name, owner's name, and an owner approved confidentiality notice. b. Table of contents. C. Manual that details system and sub -system operation. d. Manuals that details system administration procedures and tasks. e. Manuals that fully detail all programming commands. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 00 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Provide two (2) Bound hardcopy System Administration training manuals and one electronic copy (PDF format). PRODUCTS 1.11 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers are shown in individual specification sections. B. Equipment manufacturers and model numbers indicated in individual specification sections are identified as minimum equipment requirements. C. All substitutions shall meet or exceed these minimum requirements and must be approved by the Owner/Architect prior to purchase. D. All manufacturers' equipment shall be available through a nationally recognized supplier network. 1.12 EQUIPMENT A. Provide security fasteners on all equipment, device plates, etc. within public areas. 1. Allen head with center pin, hardened steel. 2. Provide four (4) fastener tools to Owner. B. Equipment installed in exterior applications shall be fitted with fasteners and exposed surfaces of stainless steel or other corrosion resistant material. C. All materials and equipment used must be new and unused, prime quality products. D. All equipment or components installed on the exterior of a building where the equipment is subject to adverse weather/elements shall be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures. 1.13 WIRE AND CABLE A. All wire and cable shall be U.L. approved for its intended application and shall meet or exceed manufacturer's recommendations for the components connected. B. All conductors and cable shall meet individual security system manufacturer specifications. 1. Provide shielded conductors and cable as required by the manufacturer or as required to provide for interference -free signals. 2. Color coding shall be accomplished by using solidly colored insulation. a. Grounding conductors, where insulated, shall be colored solid green or identified with green color as required by NEC. C. UTP Structured Cabling Systems for IP cameras and intercoms (including pulling, terminating, and testing) by Division 27 Telecommunications contractor. 1. Intra-building data communications circuits shall utilize UTP cable as specified in Telecommunications specifications. D. Patch Cables 1. Provide pre -manufactured patch cables (cable, connectors, boots, etc.) as required to connect security systems to voice and data communication outlets. 2. Patch cables shall be certified for their specific use to meet or exceed applicable industry specifications. 3. Provide cable lengths as necessary to neatly route cables through cable management systems and other cable organization systems. 4. Provide connectors as required for proper termination. a. Provide boots for connectors where applicable to prevent snagging. E. The minimum conductor sizes are for distances as per the manufacturer's specifications from security device to security panel. 1. The contractor shall size the conductor accordingly for longer runs. 2. Minimum Conductor and Cable Types and Sizes. a. Alarm device field wiring shall be 18/20 AWG stranded copper conductors. b. Low voltage power circuits will use 18 AWG stranded copper conductors. 280000-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1) Increase conductor gauge consistent with circuit current requirements. EXECUTION 1.14 INSTALLATION A. All personnel working on this project shall be experienced, highly skilled installers with a minimum of three (3) years' work on similar type projects. B. Changes in location of any work require the written approval of the Architect/Owner prior to initiation. C. Changes in indicated sizes shall not be made without the written approval of the Owner/Architect. D. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. All systems shall be designed and installed to provide 24 hour a day, 7 days a week operation. F. Conduits (By Div 26) a. All conduits shall be EMT unless specifically otherwise indicated. G. Coordinate extension and connection to commercial, emergency/UPS power circuits provided by Division 26. 1. Make power connections in accordance with Division 26. H. Shielded and/or screened cables shall be grounded per the hardware manufacturer's instruction. 1. Single point shield grounds shall be grounded at the field panel feeding the device or sub panel and insulated from ground at the termination end of the cable. I. All installation of security systems shall be complete at least thirty calendar days prior to occupancy. f i �l Z1111�1171�[!1\� 91 1,111 1W04 A. Equipment Cabinets and Racks 1. To provide electrical continuity between rack elements, paint -piercing grounding washers shall be used where rack sections bolt together, on both sides, under the head of the bolt and between the nut and rack. 2. A horizontal busbar shall be installed at the top and back of each rack for floor fed cabinets/racks. 3. A vertical busbar shall be installed to the rear of the right-hand side rail with thread -forming screws to ensure metal -to -metal contact. 4. Each rack shall be provided with a minimum # 6 AWG insulated ground wire. 5. Do not bond racks serially (loop from rack to rack). 6. Each rack bay against a wall shall be bottom/side ground feeds from the wall. a. Wall ground feeds/raceways to racks shall not be exposed on the walls. b. Exception 1) Some rack bays will require the ground to be fed from the ceiling raceway. Refer to drawings for details. 7. The Contractor shall provide a ground strap for each equipment rack and bond to the nearest Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) connection, Furnish all required bonding materials and hardware manufactured for this purpose. a. Follow NEC bonding procedures/specifications. 8. All ground raceways within each rack shall be an insulated metallic flex type raceway and shall not interfere with equipment mounting frames or equipment mounting brackets. 9. Each ground feed shall provide proper installation allowances and penetration depths to provide conversion fittings from solid metallic to insulated metallic flex conduit raceways. 10. To bond each rack to ground, burnish clean a one square inch area, drill, tap, apply an adequate amount of antioxidant joint compound mixed for the metal surface types affected, and bolt connectorized conductor to burnished and compounded area. a. Ensure proper conductivity. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 00 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1.16 LABELING A. Provide labeling for all security equipment components using waterproof, self-adhesive computer printed labels. 1. Coordinate with Owner on numbering/labeling scheme. B. Provide labeling for all security cable/wiring using waterproof, self-adhesive computer printed labels. 1. Coordinate with Owner on numbering/labeling scheme. 2. Label all cables/wiring on both ends. 3. At multi conductor cable terminations label each conductor. 4. At a minimum, each cable/wire label shall designate: a. Origination Point b. Alarm point description C. Opening description (if applicable) C. Provide a complete cable/wire identification plan/list with project completion submittal. D. Conduit and junction box exteriors may be identified with unique color paint, but shall not be identified with written words that easily identify the function of the conduit and boxes. 1.17 POWER REQUIREMENTS A. 120 VAC power dedicated to telecom/security will be provided. (By Electrical Contractor) B. Back-up power for all equipment and devices shall be for at least 4 hours unless otherwise specified. 1. When generator backup power is available, provide a UPS, rated to maintain the load for a minimum of 15 minutes for all 120VAC equipment. C. Rack -mounted Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 1. Provide a UPS to support 120% of the required load to allow for future load expansion and age related deterioration of the battery performance. 2. The UPS interface port shall have an RS-232 communications port and a 10 Base-T Ethernet for LAN management. a. Provide the necessary data connection, hardware and software to remotely monitor the UPS b. Provide user configurable computer operating system shutdown capability 3. The control panel shall have a LED status display for load and battery bar graphs in addition to replace battery and overload indicators. a. Rack -mounted surge suppression shall be vertically mounted and made for this orientation. D. All electronic locks shall be 12/24VDC (By Division 08) E. Connect to AC power and provide UL listed power supplies and transformers to distribute low voltage power to the system components as required. 1. Provide uninterrupted battery backup power for the duration required above. F. All equipment connected to AC circuits shall be protected from power surges. 1. The devices shall be installed and grounded per manufacturer instructions. 2. Equipment protection shall meet requirements of ANSI C62.41. 3. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. G. All non -fiber optic data circuits that serve devices exterior to the buildings will be protected by surge protectors at the device and the termination. 1. The devices shall be installed and grounded per manufacturer instructions. 2. Equipment protection shall meet requirements of ANSI C62.41. 3. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. 1.18 TESTING A. Ensure that all provisions and requirements of this specification are met. 1. Verify through inspections, demonstrations and tests. 280000-10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Perform required tests to demonstrate workmanship, operation, and performance. 1. Conduct tests with Architect/Owner and if required, inspectors of agencies having jurisdiction present. 2. Arrange test dates in advance and give all parties a minimum of 48 hours' notice. C. Repair or replace equipment or systems found defective or inoperative and re -test until 100% satisfactory results are obtained. 1.19 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST A. The Functional Performance Test (FPT) will be conducted at the end of the project and prior to system acceptance by the Owner. 1. The security integrator will provide all necessary staff and communications needed to fully test all functions of the system. 2. The contractor will submit for approval by the Architect and Owner, a comprehensive test plan that will include testing of every function on every door and security device thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled start of the test. 3. The system will not be considered for acceptance prior to the successful completion of the FPT and completion of punch list items. B. Pre -Testing I . Following installation and prior to the FPT, the security integrator shall individually test each component and field device and verify the proper functioning of each component within a particular sub -system. a. Prior to the FPT all deficiencies must be corrected. C. Upon completion of the outlined tasks and tests the security integrator shall schedule the FPT with the Architect and Owner. I. The security contractor must demonstrate that the security system components and sub- systems operate together as a system and meet specification requirements in the "As - Installed" operating environment. 2. On conclusion of the FPT the test report document will be submitted to the architect for approval. 3. The FPT will be observed by the architect's and Owner's representatives. 4. The FPT may be stopped at any time by these representatives if they believe the failure rate is too high or the system is not performing to contract document requirements. 5. The FPT will only resume when all deficiencies have been corrected. 6. Retesting will be required of all failed tests. 1.20 SYSTEM OPERATIONAL TEST A. Upon completion of the FPT, conduct a formal test to be known as the System Operational Test (SOT), in which all components and sub -systems of the security system are demonstrated to operate error and failure free together as a system. I . This test is to be performed over a continuous seventy-two (72) hour period. 2. A formal test plan and test procedures shall be prepared by the security subcontractor and submitted to the Owner/Architect for approval. 3. The Security integrator must demonstrate that the system components and sub -systems meet specification requirements in the "As -Installed" operating environment and operate error and failure free for the duration of the test. 4. If a system failure does occur, the failure must be documented and repaired, after which the seventy-two hour SOT period will restart. B. In the event that the Owner, Architect, or Contractor are required to witness a retest at a later date because the Security integrator is not properly prepared to conduct the acceptance tests or because the systems being tested have failed such tests, which shall be solely determined by the Architect or Owner witnessing the tests, the cost of witnessing additional tests shall be borne exclusively by the Security integrator. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 00 00 - 11 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 00 00 ELECTRONIC SECURITY 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Costs are to be based on time and materials at the established rates of the Architect or Owner. END OF SECTION 28 00 00 280000-12 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 10 00 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT SECTION 28 10 00 - ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY/OVERVIEW A. This section provides specifications for the installation of Electronic Access Control (AC), Intrusion Detection (ID), and related components. B. Related Sections 1. Section 08 7100 Door hardware 2. Section 26 00 00 Electrical (including related sub -sections) 3. Section 27 00 00 Communications (including related sub -sections) 4. Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security 5. Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 6. Section 28 26 00 Emergency Intercommunications and Duress 7. Section 28 3100 Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection 1.2 REFERENCES A. See Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Lubbock City Garage shall be equipped with an Open Options access control system that is an extension of an existing Open Options dnaFusion system in the Citizen's Tower that is monitored and maintained by the City of Lubbock Police Department 1. All work required within the project for extension of the new Open Options components to the existing Open Options system head end shall be furnished and installed by the project security contractor. 2. The project security contractor shall be fully certified -to install Open Options systems and only use certified Open Options components. a. Variances to this requirement will require written approval from City of Lubbock. B. General Requirements 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for a complete security system as indicated and in accordance with provisions of the contract documents. 2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 3. Comply with the provisions of Division 1 for General Requirements. a. In the event of a conflict between the provisions of this Section and Division 1, the more stringent provisions shall apply. 4. All system devices and components included shall be compatible. C. The AC/ID system will support the needs of the project in accordance with these specifications. 1. The AC/ID system shall have the capability for future expansion to support the security needs of the completed complex. D. The AC/ID system shall be interfaced with the Fire Alarm system (by others) as required to comply with all building code requirements. 1.4 SYSTEM COORDINATION A. The Security Integrator shall completely coordinate all relevant work of other trades/systems including, but not limited to: 1. Door hardware 2. Fire Alarm System 3. Elevator Control System FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 10 00 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 10 00 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT 4. Electrical Systems(s) 5. Telecommunications System(s) B. Electric Locking Mechanisms 1. The security integrator and door hardware contractor shall coordinate all door hardware, door and door frame design. 2. The security contractor shall verify all specified door hardware is appropriate for the security application and verify the sequence of operations for each access controlled opening. C. Fire Alarm and Life Safety 1. The security integrator shall coordinate the access control system design with the life safety consultant to insure compliance with applicable codes and requirements. 2. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Fire alarm interface b. Fail safe/fail secure locking mechanisms C. Delayed egress 1.5 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM A. The AC system will consist of card readers, door position switches, and request -to -exit sensors operating in conjunction with associated electric door hardware. 1. Card readers and adjunct devices shall be provided as shown on the drawings. a. Provide card readers, Data Gathering Panels <DGP>, and alarm input and output devices connected to the security management system via Local Area Network (LAN). b. The security integrator shall coordinate network and IP address requirements with Owner to identify the Media Access Control (MAC) address (Layer 2) of each provided device, the location to be installed, and the port configuration needed for communication. C. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for a complete system as indicated and in accordance with provisions of the contract documents. d. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. B. Card readers will work such that upon presentation of a valid AC card, the unique card data shall be transmitted to an associated control panel where the data is compared to an authorized user database and access is approved or rejected accordingly. 1. A valid authorization will activate operation of the electric lock and shunt the door position switch. The alarm shunt will not affect supervision of the detection circuit. 2. Coordinate with owner on card format and other pertinent details. C. Card readers shall support both 125 KHz proximity and 13.56 MHz smart card technologies D. Door position switches at card reader controlled location serve to indicate the open/closed status of the associated door and shall establish the basis for reporting a door -propped or unauthorized entry condition. 1. Provide door position switches as indicated on drawings. 2. Security contractor is responsible for coordinating the contact configuration (SPDT) (DPDT) and rating for door position switches, and for connection of switches with the AC. E. Electrified door hardware for card reader controlled doors will include electrified locksets, electric exit devices, and electric power transfer as shown on the drawings. 1. All electrified door hardware shall be provided under the work of Division 08 unless otherwise noted. 2. Security subcontractor shall provide all security cables and, low voltage power supplies for operation of electrified door hardware associated with card reader controlled doors. F. Request -to -exit (REX) devices at designated card reader controlled doors shall cause the associated door position switches to be shunted. 1. The alarm shunt shall not affect the supervision of the alarm detection circuit. 2. Electrified Lockset shall have an integral REX switch. 28 10 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 10 00 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT 3. Electrified Exit devices shall have an integral REX switch. 4. Magnetic Locks shall have a Passive InfraRed (PIR) motion sensor REX device. a. Wire the PIR to the Door REX Input. The configuration on this motion shall be non- resettable and activate for only 2 seconds. b. A second set of output contacts for the REX motion sensor shall be wired in series with the power to the lock, disconnecting power to the lock when motion is sensed. C. The PIR REX shall be mounted and the sensor positioned to avoid detection more than three feet from the door and at the door bottom sweep. 1) Deter under door spoofing attacks by pointing the sensor away from the door threshold. Position the sensor to detect motion at the door handle or door push plate. d. Connect to REX switch in exit device (by Division 8). 1) Coordinate with Division 8 to ensure proper REX switch configuration 2) Wire the REX switch as described for the above motion sensor to disconnect power to the lock and activate the REX input on the DGP. e. Doors without exit devices, a UL listed double pole pushbutton exit switch shall be provided as a redundant REX device. 1) It shall be wired as described for the above motion sensor to disconnect power to the lock and activate the REX input on the DGP. 2) Locate within 6'-0" of the door push-plate/handle. 1.6 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM A. A series of field installed alarm initiating devices shall be connected to the ID system so that status changes of the devices are transmitted to the security management system. 1. Provide Data Gathering Panels <DGP>, alarm devices, and keypads to be connected to the security management system via Local Area Network (LAN). 2. The security integrator shall coordinate network and IP address requirements with Owner to identify the Media Access Control (MAC) address (Layer 2) of each provided device, the location to be installed, and the port configuration needed for communication. B. Motion Detector 1. Provide dual technology (microwave and infrared) to prevent false alarms. a. Specific model depends on application and mounting requirements. b. One motion detector per zone, do not wire in series. C. Glass Break Detector 1. Contractor will need to provide compatible glass break tester for device being installed. 2. One glass break detector per zone, do not wire in series. D. Tamper Switches 1. Typically closed tamper switches to monitor the secure status of all DGP's, power supplies, terminal cabinets, power distribution units, and other Security System cabinets and enclosures. 2. Fasten tamper switches within the cabinet to provide no access to the switch and fasteners when the cabinet is closed. 3. Provide independent monitoring of tamper conditions for each cabinet. a. Include the number of tamper switches in the total alarm input figures. E. Provide ID keypads conveniently located near areas being protected so as to allow devices to arm and disarm. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00 additional requirements. B. Field Test Reports I . Upon completion and testing of the installed system, test reports shall be submitted in booklet form and electronic media showing all field tests performed on, and adjustments made to each/any component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 10 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 10 00 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT 2. Indicate and interpret test results in written form and verbally to owner/DataCom for compliance with performance requirements at a pre -scheduled meeting. C. Battery calculations to show the expected loads and backup duration for power supplies and UPS devices for all active AC/ID equipment. D. Security Contractor is responsible to prepare and submit as required to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) any and all information to obtain an Electronic Locking Mechanisms permit. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00. B. Spare Parts: 1. Provide spare components for every model and configuration of electronic components and devices used on the project as spare parts inventory. a. The security integrator will turn over the new and unused components and devices to the owner at project closeout. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00. 1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00. B. All devices and components shall comply with applicable U.L. standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. AC System Platform Software (Existing) 1. Open Options dnaFusion 2. Owner Approved Equivalent B. Access Control Data Gathering Panels <DGP> 1. Mercury Panel Based 2. Owner Approved Equivalent C. Proximity Card Readers <CR> 1. HID 2. Owner Approved Equivalent D. Door position Switches <DP> 1. Concealed Magnetic Door position Switch a. Sentrol1076D b. Magnasphere MSS-19C/L / MSS-25C/L C. Detection Systems, Inc d. Owner Approved Equivalent 2. Surface Mount Door and Hatch Position Switch a. Sentrol2500 b. Magnasphere MSS-3XXS C. Owner Approved Equivalent E. Electric Locking Mechanism Power Supply 1. Altronix 2. Alarm-Saf 3. Owner Approved Equivalent F. Wire & Cable 28 10 00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 10 00 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT 1. Belden 2. Windy City 3. General Cable 4. Owner Approved Equivalent PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Power Supplies 1. Power supply requirements a. A switch and on/off indicator within the power supply cabinet. b. Four hours of sealed gel battery backup to provide continuous operation during power failure. 1) Provide batteries as required to provide specified battery backup time for a fully loaded power supply, regardless of the connected load. C. A battery charger to maintain the battery. d. Low battery and power fail contacts to monitor the status of the input power and the battery. 1) Connect each power supply low battery and power fail alarm as a separate alarm input into DGP. e. Key lockable wall mount metal enclosure with tamper switch. 2. Additional DGP Power Supply Requirements a. The DGP power supply provides power only to DGP's and shall not provide power for locks or any other low voltage device. 3. Additional Electric Locking Mechanism Power Supply Requirements a. Fail secure electric locking mechanisms shall remain locked during power failure and fire alarm conditions. b. Connect fail safe locking devices in accordance with applicable life safety codes to unlock automatically under the following conditions: 1) Loss of power to the power supply 2) Failure of the power supply 3) Fire alarm activation C. Provide power distribution boards with independently fused output relays and fire alarm control panel interface. 4. Additional Device Power Supply Requirements a. Provide device power supplies for other security system devices requiring power (e.g. card readers, local alarms, motion sensors, etc.) b. Provide power distribution boards with independently fused outputs. B. Video Surveillance System Integration 1. Automatic Video Call-up a. All alarms shall call up all cameras in the area of alarm to the screen of the ACID alarm operator workstation to allow for operator assessment of the alarm. 2. Pre and Post Alarm Video a. The operator shall be able to view up to 10 seconds of video before the alarm and 30 seconds after the alarm for all cameras associated with the alarm. b. This feature is to be integrated with the operator alarm notification to assist in alarm assessment. C. This feature shall be displayed as an option on the alarm notification screen and will not require operator to make a manual video search. 3. Recording FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 10 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 10 00 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT a. All cameras whose field of view that include images of the area affected by the alarm, shall be recorded when an alarm is detected for use in forensic analysis, including the pre and post alarm video. 4. Duress and Emergency Intercommunications Integration a. Calls from emergency intercoms/phones with cameras shall provide the above video call-up and the pre and post alarm video capabilities. C. Tamper Resistant Screws 1. Provide appropriate screw heads for each application (e.g. countersunk heads for recessed cover plate screws, flat head screws for standard junction box covers, etc.). 2. The security integrator shall provide Torx® tamper resistant screws for: a. Junction boxes located above doors b. Junction boxes located below ceiling height and/or within reach of hatch ladders C. Security device cover plates d. Surface mounted door position switches and armored cable 3.2 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION A. Enclosures shall be lockable with a tamper switch and installed in a manner to be accessible with clearance to fully open enclosure door. B. All security panels shall be wired through a dedicated power supply with battery backup. 1. Power to the data gathering panels is to be hardwired utilizing EMT or rigid conduit in accordance with the Electrical specifications. 2. A circuit from the Fire Alarm panel must be installed to each lock power distribution panel. C. Enclosures shall be installed on designated wall fields in a neat and compact manner to allow for future growth. D. Enclosures shall be sized to allow for 20% growth in each panel. E. All panels and boards shall be installed in enclosure(s) suitable to their environment and have sufficient size and orientation to include all system components. F. Each panel shall be labeled accordance with Owner standards. The label for each panel shall be posted on the exterior of the panel door. a. Each panel shall have a list of devices connected to it located on the inside cover. b. A detailed device layout drawing will be located on the inside of the panel door in an appropriate sleeve and keeper. 3.3 FURTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to provisions of Section 28 00 00. B. Furnish and coordinate installation of all special device back boxes and ACID field devices as shown on the security drawings and as specified in this section. C. The exact installation locations of all equipment shall be coordinated and verified with the Contractor prior to installation. 1. Subcontractor shall notify the Contractor if any location appears to be unsuitable. D. Provide low voltage power supplies for electric locking devices and ACID devices and components as shown on the security drawings and specified in this Section. E. Coordinate with the Telecommunications Subcontractor for data network connections, IP address requirements, and telephone circuits as required. F. Prepare all systems for user operation. 1. The security system must be complete and ready to operate prior to Owner final acceptance of the system. G. Coordinate with the Owner for all system programming requirements. H. Perform database programming as required to support the card reader, alarm point, surveillance system integration, and control panel configuration as required. END OF SECTION 2810 00 28 10 00 - 6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT SECTION 28 23 00 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY/OVERVIEW A. This section provides specifications for the installation of an IP based Video Surveillance System (VS) and related components. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 00 00 Electrical (including related sub -sections) 2. Section 27 00 00 Communications (including related sub -sections) 3. Section 28 10 00 Access Control and Intrusion Detection 4. Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security 5. Section 28 26 00 Duress and Emergency Intercommunications and Duress 1.2 REFERENCES A. See Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The City of Lubbock Police Department has an existing Panasonic Video Insight Video Management System (VMS) in the new Citizen's Tower. 1. As a result, this project will be equipped with a Video Insight VMS that will an extension of the existing Video Insight system maintained by The City of Lubbock Police Department. 2. Any and all work required within the project for extension of the Video Insight system to the new VMS head end shall be furnished and installed by the project security contractor, including but not limited to, providing new NVR servers in existing Citizen Tower space. 3. The new system shall comply with the existing equipment standards. 4. The Local Area Network shall be used to extend viewing of live and recorded signals from local Network Video Recorders (NVR) B. The security integrator shall furnish and install the surveillance system, consisting of cameras, camera assemblies, audio recording system components, NVR, Network Switch, wiring & cabling, and low voltage camera power supplies. 1. All active surveillance equipment and communication devices shall be on emergency/UPS power. 2. The digital video recorder and camera power supplies shall be from emergency and UPS power. C. Camera assemblies include camera, lens, housing, and mount. D. Coordinate all work that must be performed in security head end spaces with the General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor, and the Telecommunications contractor. (If applicable) E. Camera images shall support H.264 compression formats. F. The NVR (as required) shall not be loaded to exceed 50% of the camera and/or storage capacity to allow room for expansion. G. Camera lenses for fixed cameras shall be varifocal and sized to provide the owner approved field of view. The lens shall be IR corrected and have megapixel resolution. H. Surveillance camera audio functions shall not be installed and/or disabled unless specifically requested by Owner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00 for additional requirements. B. Project Data FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 23 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT 1. Provide a description of system operation indicating the purpose and capability of each device/component of the system with a functional diagram indicating all interfaces to other systems. C. Video Quality test reports shall be provided for all cameras to confirm an optimum high definition video signal. D. Shop drawings shall reflect all requirements associated with Owner provided or existing equipment and materials that will be used as part of this system. E. Video Storage calculations to show the system capacity can accommodate the specified video retention. F. Battery calculations to show the expected loads and backup duration for camera power supplies and UPS devices for all active surveillance equipment. G. System programming, camera titles, descriptions, camera images and database 1. Camera titles and descriptions prior to system programming 2. Programming/database prior to performance testing 3. Provide a cross reference between specified camera numbers and programmed camera numbers 4. Final programming, camera images and system documentation on electronic media to Owner H. Product Data 1. Manufacturer's technical data sheets and specifications 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00. B. Spare Parts: 1. Provide spare components for every model and configuration of electronic components and devices used on the project as spare parts inventory. a. The security integrator will turn over the new and unused components and devices to the owner at project closeout. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. See Section 28 00 00. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. See Section 28 00 00. A. See Section 28 00 00. PRODUCTS 1.9 CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS A. All cameras shall be a Dome Camera unless otherwise specified 1. Compatible with the VMS 2. Vandal resistant with polycarbonate dome 3. Wide Dynamic Range Feature: All exterior cameras and interior cameras that have exterior lighting or headlights in their field of view shall have a Wide Dynamic Range feature to improve picture quality in situations with strong backlighting. 4. Multi -stream so that recording and viewing can be at different frame rate and compression. 5. Day -night Color/B&W camera with cut filter 6. Exterior cameras: a. Shall be outdoor rated b. Include a heater to permit fog -free viewing in low temperatures 282300-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT C. Fan to prevent overheating in high temperatures (as required) B. Interior Fixed Dome Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 2MP (1080p) at 30 FPS 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Smoked lower dome 4. Varifocal auto -iris fixed lens sized to provide the owner approved field of view 5. Size camera and lens for facial recognition at a minimum of 60 pixels per foot at the target location 6. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.05 Lux at 30 IRE C. Interior Multi Sensor 180' and 360' Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 8MP at 30 FPS (4x 1080p) 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Smoked lower dome 4. Allows for up to 4 multiple views 5. Varifocal auto -iris fixed lens sized to provide the owner approved field of view. 6. Size camera and lens for facial recognition at a minimum of 60 pixels per foot at the target location 7. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.17 Lux at 50 IRE D. Exterior Fixed Dome Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 2MP (1080p) at 30 FPS 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Clear lower dome, unless otherwise specified 4. Vari-focal auto -iris fixed lens sized to provide the owner approved field of view. 5. Outdoor rated. 6. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.05 Lux at 30 IRE E. Exterior Multi Sensor 180' and 360' Camera: 1. Resolution shall be a minimum of 8MP at 30 FPS (4x 1080p) 2. Shall be IP, PoE IEEE 802.3af 3. Clear lower dome, unless otherwise specified 4. Allows for up to 4 multiple views 5. Varifocal auto -iris fixed lens sized to provide the owner approved field of view. 6. Size camera and lens for facial recognition at a minimum of 60 pixels per foot at the target location 7. Outdoor rated 8. Shall have a minimum sensitivity of 0.17 Lux at 50 IRE 1.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Video Management System (VMS) Platform Software 1. Video Insight 2. Owner Approved Equivalent B. NVR Server (as required 1. Video Insight compliant hardware C. Interior surveillance cameras 1. Advidia 2. Owner Approved Equivalent D. Exterior surveillance cameras 1. Advidia 2. Owner Approved Equivalent E. Exterior Parapet/Roof Deck Camera Mount 1. Axis 2. American Dynamics 3. Pelco FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 23 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT 4. Owner Approved Equivalent F. Equipment Racks and Racks Components: (By Division 27) 1. Chatsworth Products (CPI) 2. Ortronics 3. Newton Instruments 4. Owner Approved Equivalent G. PoE Network Switch (as required) 1. Brocade 2. Cisco 3. Juniper 4. Arista 5. Owner Approved Equivalent H. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 1. Eaton UPS a. 5S series for workstations b. 9170 for rack mounted equipment 2. APC Smart -UPS Series a. SMT series for workstations b. Smart -UPS on -Line series for rack mounted equipment 3. MinuteMan a. Pro series for workstations b. Enterprise Plus series for rack mounted equipment 4. Owner Approved Equivalent EXECUTION 1.11 CONFIGURATION A. Video Cameras 1. Provide day/night cameras in exterior locations 2. Lenses shall be field tested with Owner present to verify clear, crisp images and desired field of view a. Substitute camera lenses as necessary to obtain required field of view at no additional cost b. Provide spot filters for exterior lenses as required to reduce picture washout caused by sunlight 3. The security integrator shall coordinate network and IP address requirements with Owner to identify the Media Access Control (MAC) address (Layer 2) of each provided camera, the location to be installed, and the port configuration needed for communication. 4. Make all necessary adjustments to camera lenses to obtain clear, crisp images and desired field of view to the Owners satisfaction. a. Substitute camera lenses as necessary to obtain required field of view at no additional cost. 1) Adjust all cameras to produce high -definition images with no blooming, streaking or noticeable lag. 2) Provide and install in -line PoE injectors as required when non PoE network switches are used or when manufacturer specified power is not available to the camera. 3) All camera power shall comply with the specified power requirements. B. Wall mounted camera feed display 1. Security contractor shall program and configure 2 wall mounted monitors to display static feed of exterior cameras. 282300-4 2. Coordinate exact cameras and display content layout with Owner. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT a. Flat Panel Display [FPD] and mounting by AV contractor b. UTP cabling by Telecom contractor C. CPU by City of Lubbock 1.12 POWER REQUIREMENTS A. Provide uninterruptible power supplies for all active surveillance equipment 1. Rack mounted components, including all active network communication hardware, shall be on an Uninterruptible Power Supply <UPS> system. 2. Refer to Section 28 00 00 for UPS and power requirements 3. Camera power supplies shall be on an Auxiliary Power Supply <APS>, system as required, with a battery backup. a. The Auxiliary power supply shall be furnished with a power distribution panel with each camera individually fused or protected with an over -current protector. B. Power supplies shall provide: 1. 120 VAC input and output voltage as required 2. UL Listed 3. Power fail contacts to monitor the status of the input power a. Connect each power supply power fail alarm as a separate alarm input into AC/ID system 4. Key lockable wall mount metal enclosure with tamper switch 5. Independently fused outputs 1.13 INSTALLATION A. Refer to provisions of Section 28 00 00 B. All surveillance system devices and components shall be compatible. C. Camera Housings and Mounts 1. Cameras shall include housings and mounts as indicated in the Drawings. a. Provide the smallest available housing for each camera application. 1) Integrated miniature dome cameras are preferred 2. Wiring to cameras shall pass from the back -box through the mount and into the housing. Exposed wiring or conduit shall not be acceptable. 3. Provide sun shields for camera housings in outdoor locations exposed directly to sunlight. 4. Provide surge protection for power and copper video cables for exterior cameras at the camera and at the point of termination (security rack). 5. Field verify the exact camera location, position, and mounting prior to installation. 6. Roof mounted cameras shall use roof deck brackets. D. Video Management Control System 1. The system shall allow for secure remote viewing of live and recorded video as required. E. Provide labeling suitable to Owner for all major equipment components. Coordinate with Owner on numbering scheme to match existing. Major equipment components: 1. Video monitors, IP camera Patch Panels, PoE Switches (or mid -span units), Network Video Recorders (NVR), and fiber mux units (if required). F. Coordinate with Telecommunication subcontractor for network and patch panel provisions for security connections in the IT room. (If applicable) G. Coordinate with Owner for all system programming and database requirements. 1. Provide all programming, setup, camera and device titling and data entry 2. Camera and device title and descriptions shall be consistent for all components H. Install all Point -to -Point wiring with appropriate terminal connections for every wire and component termination so that all connections are mechanically and electrically secure. I. Install field wiring in continuous lengths, without splices. J. Verify upon job completion that all wiring and terminations are clearly labeled to identify the wire and terminal. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 23 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID+PERMIT K. Testing of the surveillance system includes checkout of installed cameras back to the Security head end equipment to confirm proper operation of camera assemblies. Security integrator shall provide all necessary test equipment to fully demonstrate proper performance of field devices. Copies of test results shall be included in the project completion submittals given to the Owner. END OF SECTION 28 23 00 282300-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 26 00 EMERGENCY INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND DURESS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 28 26 00 - EMERGENCY INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND DURESS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY/OVERVIEW A. This section provides specifications for the installation of Emergency Intercommunications and Duress (EID) system and related components. 1. Emergency Phones B. Related Sections 1. Section 08 7100 Door Hardware 2. Section 26 00 00 Electrical (including related sub -sections) 3. Section 27 00 00 Communications (including related sub -sections) 4. Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security 5. Section 28 10 00 Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection 6. Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 7. Section 28 3100 Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection 1.2 REFERENCES A. See Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security. 1.3 SYSTEM COORDINATION A. The Security Integrator shall completely coordinate all relevant work of other trades/systems including, but not limited to: B. Fire Alarm System 1. Electrical Systems(s) 2. Telecommunications System(s) C. Fire Alarm and Life Safety 1. The security integrator shall coordinate the EID system with the life safety consultant to ensure compliance with applicable codes and requirements. 1.4 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for a complete system as indicated and in accordance with provisions of the contract documents. 2. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 4. Comply with the provisions of Division 1 for General Requirements. a. In the event of a conflict between the provisions of this Section and Division 1, the more stringent provisions shall apply. 5. All system devices and components included shall be compatible. B. The project shall be equipped with a new system that will maintained locally by the City of Lubbock Police Department C. The EID system will support the needs of the project in accordance with these specifications. 1. The EID system shall have the capability for future expansion to support the security needs of the completed complex. D. EID systems utilized for life safety shall comply with all applicable codes. E. Emergency/UPS power will be utilized to power the EID system's components at the Security head end equipment location. 1.5 EMERGENCY PHONE FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 26 00 - I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 26 00 EMERGENCY INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND DURESS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Provide outdoor rated, ADA—compliant hands -free Intercom/Phones 1. Vandal resistant stainless steel faceplate. 2. Provide buttons for emergency and non -emergency calls 3. Support SIP protocol 4. Provide call status LEDs 1.6 DURESS PANIC BUTTONS A. The Duress panic button is a switch that allows an individual to covertly send a duress signal, with no visible or audible indication when activated. 1. Desk Duress Button a. Switch shall have a shroud over the activating lever that locks in activated position until reset with a key or have two buttons that must be press simultaneously to send alarm 2. Wall Duress Button a. Provide Pull Station switch in lieu of mushroom button to minimize nuisance alarm and accidental actuation. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00 additional requirements. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00. B. Spare Parts: 1. Provide two (2) spare components for every model and configuration of electronic components and devices used on the project as spare parts inventory. a. The security integrator will turn over the new and unused components and devices to the owner at project closeout. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00. 1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Follow provisions of Section 28 00 00. B. All devices and components shall comply with applicable U.L. standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS A. Intercom / Phone 1. Aiphone 2. Commend 3. Stentofon 4. Talk -A -Phone 5. Owner Approved Equivalent B. Emergency Phone Wall Mount Enclosure 1. Dormakaba 2. STI 3. Potter 28 26 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 26 00 EMERGENCY INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND DURESS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 4. Owner Approved Equivalent PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Power Supplies 1. Provide device power supplies for all security system devices requiring power 2. Provide power distribution boards with independently fused outputs. 3. Power supply requirements: a. Sealed gel battery backup to provide continuous operation during power failure. b. Provide batteries as required to provide specified battery backup time for a fully loaded power supply, regardless of the connected load. C. A battery charger to maintain the battery. d. Low battery and power fail contacts to monitor the status of the input power and the battery. e. Key lockable wall mount metal enclosure with tamper switch. B. Video Surveillance System Integration 1. Automatic Video Call-up a. Intercom / Phones shall position PTZ cameras and call-up all cameras in the area, to the alarm assessment workstation b. Record video of alarm calls C. Tamper Resistant Screws 1. Provide appropriate screw heads for each application (e.g. countersunk heads for recessed cover plate screws, flat head screws for standard junction box covers, etc.). 2. The security integrator shall provide Torx® tamper resistant screws for: a. Security device cover plates b. Duress buttons 3.2 FURTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to provisions of Section 28 00 00. B. Furnish and coordinate installation of all special device back boxes and field devices as shown on the security drawings and as specified in this section. C. The exact installation locations of all equipment shall be coordinated and verified with the Contractor prior to installation. 1. Subcontractor shall notify the Contractor if any location appears to be unsuitable. D. Labeling 1. Provide labeling suitable to Owner for all major equipment components. a. Coordinate with Owner on numbering scheme to match existing. 2. Provide labeling for all security equipment racks and enclosures. 3. Provide labeling for all security device wiring. a. Label all cables and wiring using waterproof, self-adhesive computer printed labels. Label both ends of each cable. b. At multi conductor cable terminations label each conductor. E. Coordinate with the Telecommunications Subcontractor for data network connections and telephone circuits as required. F. Prepare all systems for user operation. 1. The security system must be complete and ready to operate prior to Owner final acceptance of the system. G. Coordinate with the Owner for all system programming requirements. H. Perform database programming as required to support the security sub -system integration, and control panel configuration as required. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 26 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 26 00 EMERGENCY INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND DURESS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT END OF SECTION 28 26 00 282600-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 35 25 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE, VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 28 35 25 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE, VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Digital, Addressable, Voice Evacuation Fire Alarm System. B. Related Sections: Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The installing contractor and/or equipment manufacturer shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: 1. Control panel wiring schematics and interconnections. 2. Point to point wiring diagram showing terminal connections to all system devices. This would include the size of conductors to each device and proposed routing. After review, this shall become the installation drawing. 3. Riser wiring diagram and conduit sizes. 4. Floor plan drawings locating all devices associated with the Fire Alarm System. 5. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment to be used and so marked as to dimensions, size, voltage, style, catalog number, manufacturer's names, and configuration. 6. Detailed system description and operation describing system functions. 7. Complete Bill of Material for reference. 8. One set of installation, operation and maintenance manuals for submittal review of fire alarm system. Required number of manuals are still required at project closet. 9. Power supply, voltage drop, and battery calculations. B. All submittal data shall be in bound form with contractor's name, supplier's name, project name, and state fire alarm license number adequately identified. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the fire alarm manufacturer to sell, install and service the manufacturer's equipment. B. The installing contractor must be licensed by the state Fire Marshall to sell, install and service fire alarm systems. C. The installing contractor shall have on their staff an installation superintendent who is licensed by the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation shall take place. D. The fire alarm installation firm will have factory -trained personnel performing the control panel wiring for the system that they were trained for. The firm shall also maintain a stock of parts and components used in the system. E. The qualifications of the installation firm, the availability of replacement parts and service records will be considered. 1.4 CLOSE-OUT MANUALS A. Provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals which includes: 1. Complete typewritten operating instructions. 2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all terminals identified. 3. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering numbers. 4. A plan showing conduit size, number and size of conductors and locations of all devices. 5. Printout of system program with all levels of passwords. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 35 25 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 35 25 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE, VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Floor plan locating all fire alarm devices with their identification points labeled. Provide DWG format Cadd disk. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The installation and testing shall be made under the provisions of the latest International Fire Code; National Electrical Code (NFPA-70); NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code). NFPA 71, NFPA 72, UL Standards (1480, 864, 268, 268A, 217, 521, 228, 464, 1638, 38, 346, 1076, 1971, 1481), and all other applicable state and local codes and ordinances. The Contractor shall submit the new fire alarm equipment layout to the local fire alarm authority having jurisdiction for approval. System shall be UL listed and FM Global approved. 1.6 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install and place in operating condition a 24 VDC, fire detection and alarm system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. It is the intent to obtain a complete system, which shall operate as described herein, and all equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control panels, power supplies, alarm -initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. The system shall operate as a continuous sounding system which shall have multiple audible alarm circuits and a voice evacuation system. The system signaling line circuits shall be wired as Class B circuits. The system notification appliance circuits shall be wired as Class B supervised circuits. 1.7 QUALITY A. To establish the standards of performance, function, quality, and features of system desired, the equipment specified is that of the Notifier Company. B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be of the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or, if provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. C. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, unless directed otherwise. D. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code, local codes and the National Fire Protection Association-70, Article 760. The minimum wire sizes shall be 12 gauge for AC power supply connections and auxiliary circuits, 14 gauge for DC power supply connections, 16 gauge for audible alarm circuits. Cable for SLC loops shall be 18 to 12 AWG twisted pair with a shield jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained. Intelligent detector wiring must not be routed adjacent to, or in the same conduit with Audio/Visual power wiring, 120/240 VAC power wiring or other high current circuits. Size SLC conductors per manufacturers instructions and anticipate all fixture device additions. E. Wire shall be UL listed for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and shall be installed in conduit. All wiring between floors, in mechanical rooms, or in risers shall be installed in conduit with a minimum size of 3/4". 1.8 TESTING, GUARANTEE, SERVICE A. A factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall perform the final connections, complete system checkout and testing of the system, and it shall be subject to the final acceptance and 283525-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 35 25 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE, VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT approval of the engineer and local authorities. Upon completion and acceptance, the owner and/or his representative(s) shall be instructed in the proper use of the system. A written copy of the final system test and checkout shall be provided detailing the function of each device. Furnish the Owner, Architect, Engineer and all authorities having jurisdiction a Certificate of Compliance. B. All equipment and wiring shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of two year from owner acceptance or beneficial occupancy, whichever comes first. Any equipment shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. C. The manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of such supplied to the Owner and Engineer. D. The manufacturer's representative shall be prepared to offer a service contract at the end of the warranty period. WWV-919 02/"r1M01 A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the Fire Alarm System with all trades including, but, not exclusive of: electrical contractor, sprinkler contractor, temperature control contractor, FM Global, City of Lubbock Fire Marshal, and mechanical contractor. Adequate coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items required to interact with the Fire Alarm System to provide a complete and functional system. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. The Fire Alarm, Detection System and Voice Evacuation System shall be a single integrated system by a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for its operation. The fire detection system shall consist of a fire alarm panel and shall contain all power supplies, relays, modules and batteries as required for the operation described herein. The equipment described herein is of Notifier manufacture. All components of the system shall be fully supervised. 2.2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION A. Operation of manual or automatic initiating device shall cause the following events to occur: 1. The System alarm LED shall flash. 2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. 3. The 640-character LCD display and remote LCD annunciators shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the alarm and its location. 4. All automatic programs assigned to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated indicating devices and relays activated, such as: a. The appropriate indication shall appear on the fire control panel. b. An evacuation tone and message shall sound on all alarm speakers and all visual strobes shall flash. C. Remote Point Annunciation devices shall show an alarm condition if devices connected to it are in alarm condition. d. All smoke dampers shall close. e. Each RTU shall shut down when duct detectors or open air smoke detectors that are served by that RTU sense smoke. B. When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1. The System Trouble LED shall flash. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 35 25 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 35 25 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE, VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. 3. The 80-character LCD display shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the trouble condition and its location. However, unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages, and if such an alarm must also be displayed, the trouble message shall not be displayed on the LCD. C. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to a single new trouble or alarm condition shall silence the panel sounding device and change the System alarm or Trouble LEDs from flashing to steady -ON. If additional new alarm or trouble conditions exist in the system, activation of this switch shall advance the display to the next alarm or trouble condition that exists, and shall not silence the local audible device or change the LEDs to steady until all new conditions have been so acknowledged. D. New alarm conditions shall always be displayed before new trouble conditions. Occurrence of a new alarm or trouble condition shall cause the panel to "resound" and repeat the sequences previously described. E. Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all appropriate indicating appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays silenced by this switch shall be fully programmable. F. Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all electronically -latched initiating devices or zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to the normal condition. G. If alarm conditions exist in the system after the System Reset Switch activation, the system shall then resound the alarm conditions as previously indicated. H. Activation of the System Test Switch shall initiate an automatic test of all intelligent detectors in the system. Such test shall activate the electronics in each intelligent device, simulating an alarm condition. A report summarizing the results of this test shall be displayed automatically on the front panel. I. Activation of the Lamp Test Switch shall turn on all LED indicators, LCD display and local sounder, and then return to the previous condition. J. The system shall include a special Automatic Detector Test, which permits a serviceman to test all intelligent detectors from the main control panel. K. The system shall include independent "Watch Dog" timers to detect and report failure of any microprocessor circuit, memory, or software. L. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need for special tools or PROM programmers and shall not require replacement of memory ICs. All programming may be accomplished through the standard control panel keyboard. All programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory. M. The programming function shall be entered with a special password that may be selected when the system is installed. The password may be changed in the field to a new value at any time by entering the old password and requesting a password change. In the event that the programmer may enter a password and then lose or forget it, the system shall be designed such that the password may be determined by special procedures available through the system manufacturer. 2.3 CONTROL PANEL A. The control panel shall be housed in a cabinet designed for mounting directly to a wall or vertical surface. B. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and future expansion. C. The control panels shall provide or be capable of expansion to the following capacities: Intelligent/Addressable Loops 2 Intelligent Detectors (Sensors) per loop 159 283525-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 35 25 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE, VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Addressable Monitor/Control Modules per loop 159 Total Intelligent Points 636 Provide Number of Loops for Required Devices Plus 25% D. Power Supply: 1. The power supply for the panel and all fire alarm peripherals shall be integral to the control panel. The power supply shall provide all control panel and peripheral power needs. The audio- visual power may be increased as needed by adding additional modular expansion power supplies or remote power supplies. All power supplies shall be designed to meet UL and NFPA requirements for power -limited operation on all external initiating circuits and indicating circuits. 2. Positive -temperature -coefficient thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over -current protection shall be provided on all power outputs. 3. This system shall meet the requirements of and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and shall be in a single enclosure and equal to Notifier Model NFS2-640 with DACT and Digital Voice Command DVC-EM with amplifier sized for each speaker at 1 watt, 25 Vrms. Provide fire evacuation message and tornado message with switch in Clerk Workspace 105. E. Battery: The system batteries shall be sealed gelled cell and shall be installed in the control panel enclosure. The batteries shall provide 24 volt DC for system operation and shall be sized in accordance with NFPA 72 for 15-minute alarm and 24-hour operation. F. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. The Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors shall connect with two wires to one of the control panel loops. The detectors shall use the photoelectric principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. The detectors shall be ceiling -mount and shall include a twist -lock base. 2. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself, by activating a magnetic switch, or may be activated remotely on command from the control panel. 3. The detectors shall provide address -setting means on the detector head using rotary decimal switches. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying code, which the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. 4. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Both LEDs may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. The detector shall be supplied with a Notifier B710LP or B224RB base. The smoke detector shall be a Notifier FSP-851, or equal and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. G. Monitor Module: 1. The Monitor module shall be used to connect a supervised zone of conventional initiating devices (any n.o. dry contact device, including 4-wire smoke detectors) to one of the SLC loops. The Monitor Module shall mount in a 4-inch square 2-1/8" deep electrical box. The zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. 2. The Monitor module shall provide address -setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code, which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Monitor Module shall be a Notifier FMM-1, or equal and UL listed. H. Control Module: 1. The Control Module shall be used to connect a conventional indicating appliance circuit (IAC) of 24 VDC compatible polarized audio/visual-indicating appliances to one of the SLC loops. The Control Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square 2-1/8" deep electrical box. The IAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y operation. The control module may also be wired as a dry contact (from C) relay. Power for the relay coil shall be provided by the SLC loop to FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 35 25 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 35 25 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE, VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT reduce wiring connection requirements. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate loop from the main control panel or from supervised remote power supplies. 2. The Control Module shall provide address -setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code, which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Control Module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Control Module shall be a Notifier FCM-1, or equal and UL listed. I. Isolator Module: 1. The Isolator Module shall be used to isolate wire -to -wire short circuits on an SLC loop in order to limit the number of other modules or detectors that are in capacitated by the short circuit fault. If a wire -to -wire short occur, the isolator shall automatically open -circuit the SLC loop. When the short is corrected, the isolators shall automatically re -connect the isolated section of the SLC loop. 2. The Isolator module shall not require any address setting, although each isolator will electrically reduce the capacity of the loop by two detector or module address. The isolator module will mount in a standard 4-inch deep electrical box. It shall provide a single LED, which shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short has been detected and isolated. Isolator module shall be a Notifier ISO-X, or equal and UL listed. Provide minimum of two. 2.4 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Manual fire alarm stations shall be non -coded, non-breakglass type equipment with a key to reset. Each manual stations shall be a Notifier NBG-12LX or equal and shall be U.L. listed. 2.5 TAMPER AND FLOW SWITCHES A. Tamper and flow switches shall be furnished an installed by Division 23 and connected to the Fire Alarm System by Division 26. Provide monitor modules as required under Division 28. 2.6 INDICATING DEVICES A. The alarm indicating devices shall be UL listed speaker/strobes with synchronized strobes housed in common frame and finished in white. The alarm signals shall be Wheelock #E70-24MCW-FW (wall), or Wheelock #E90-24MCC-FW flush mounted unit or equal with DSM-12/24-R-SYNC module. B. The alarm indicating devices shall be UL listed speaker and finished in white. The alarm signals shall be Wheelock #E70-W, or a Wheelock #E90-W. C. The strobe unit shall be equal to Wheelock #ZRS-MCW-FW (wall) and ZRS-MCC-FW (ceiling). 2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A. Remote annunciator panel shall be a Notifier LCD-80 and all require cable and backbox and microphone. 2.8 DUCT DETECTOR A. Duct detector shall be a 24VDC type with visual alarm and power indicators, and a reset switch. Each detector shall be installed upon the air duct with properly sized air sampling tubes. Detector shall be equal to a Notifier DNR/FSP-851 with remote annunciator and key test switch on ceiling. 283525-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 35 25 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE, VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of the system shall be made by the Contractor under the supervision of a representative of the manufacturer who shall make the final connection to the system, perform the functional tests of the system and place it in operation. B. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult manufacturer for all wiring diagrams, schematics, sizes, outlets, etc. before installing conduits and pulling wires. C. Fire alarm devices shall be mounted upon and all splices made in Listed Boxes. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the extent possible and Transposing or changing colors will not be permitted". D. Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. Circuit shall be labeled as "FIRE ALARM". E. As indicated on the drawings, each zone shall be labeled on the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Names of the zones shall be coordinated with the Owner, and shall meet with the Owner's approval. F. Fire Sprinkler System shall each be indicated on a separate zone. Gate Valves and Post -Indicator Valves may be on the same zone per floor. G. Use only identified conduit entries at Fire Alarm Panel or request approval for other penetrations in cabinets (certain areas require clear space for interior components). Cabinet shall be grounded to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. H. Heat and Smoke Detectors: The location of detectors shown on the plans is schematic only. The detector must be located according to code requirements. I. Smoke detectors should be installed to favor the air flow towards return openings and not located where air supply diffusers can dilute smoke before it reaches the detector. J. Mount pull stations at 4'AFF and indicating devices at 80"AFF. 3.2 FINAL INSPECTION A. After the system has been placed in service and all items are functioning properly, call for a final inspection. The manufacturer's representative shall be present and shall demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 INSTRUCTION A. The representative of the manufacturer shall allot eight (8) hours to instruct the Owner's personnel as to the complete operation of the system. END OF SECTION 28 35 25 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 35 25 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 50 00 LIFE SAFETY TWO-WAY RADIO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 28 50 00 — LIFE SAFETY TWO-WAY RADIO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes details, product, and execution requirements for the Life Safety Two -Way Radio Distribution System (RDS). B. Site Survey 1. Contractor shall perform a complete site survey prior to providing a proposal and submittals to the Owner and Engineer. 2. Site survey shall be conducted when building is substantially constructed but prior to finish -out and determine where amplifier equipment isnecessary. 3. After site survey is completed, submit proposal to owner for installation of all equipment necessary to provide radio coverage in accordance with IBC, IFC, and this specification. 1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. Additional Codes and Standards: 1. IBC 2009 — International Building Code, 2009 2. FCC 47 CFR 90.219 — Use of Signal Boosters 3. National Public Safety Telecommunications Council (NPSTC) — Best Practices for In- Building Communications; 2007 1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. Additional definitions per this Section ofWork: 1. Radio Communications System (RCS) — Two-way communications system and infrastructure provided by municipality. 2. Radio Distribution System (RDS) — Building two-way distribution infrastructure provided by project for ensuring RCS coverage as definedherein. 3. Site/Donor Antenna — Municipal antenna transmitting native RCS signals. 4. Roof antenna — Building antenna mounted with direct line -of -sight to nearest site/donor antenna. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER A. Owner shall: 1. Coordinate all communications and decisions with City of Lubbock Fire Department. 2. Provide acceptable component mounting locations within the building. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Partial submittals are not acceptable and will be returned without review. B. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Provide electrical characteristics, connection requirements and compatibility listing showing that components are compatible with each other including but not limited to: a. Full equipment list including model numbers and quantities b. Complete system operation C. Highlighted Data Sheets on Devices and Products d. Wiring diagrams of all equipment e. Installation instructions for all equipment f. Equipment testing procedures FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 50 00 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 50 00 LIFE SAFETY TWO-WAY RADIO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT g. Equipment maintenance manuals h. Wire data sheets. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include scaled plans with layout of all devices, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide a detailed legend. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring. 3. Detail assembly electrical back box and supportrequirements. 4. Include detailed input/output matrix. 5. Riser diagrams indicating circuits, types of devices, number of devices, number of conductors, conduit size, junction boxes and zones. 6. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams. D. General Submittal Requirements: l . Approval and Acceptance a. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. b. The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall be notified prior to installation or alteration of equipment or wiring. C. At the AHJ's request, complete information regarding the system or system alterations, shall be submitted for approval. d. Neither approval nor acceptance by the AHJ shall relieve the designers or installers from providing a system compliant with all governing laws, codes or standards. e. Deviations from requirements of governing laws, codes, or standards, shall be clearly identified and documented as such. Documentation of equivalences shall be provided. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Designer, Programmer, andInstaller. B. Field quality -control reports. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include the following: a. A documentation package shall be provided by the Contractor before final testing with FSSS and FPS AHJ that shall include all information needed to allow the University to perform additions, modifications, maintenance and repair of the system. b. This shall include: 285000-2 1) Equipment schematic diagrams for all components andmodules. 2) Equipment technical data. 3) Equipment repair parts lists. C. "As -built" wiring, conduit diagrams to include: 1) Floor plan layout drawings showing all significant conduit routes and sizes, wire amounts, sizes and color code and marshaling box locations. 2) Riser diagram showing all significant conduit routes and sizes, wire amounts, sizes and color code and marshaling box locations. d. Floor plan device layout drawing to include: 1) All device locations. e. Riser diagram to include: 1) All devices with. 2) Schematic representation of all SLCs, NACs, audio circuits and power circuits. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 50 00 LIFE SAFETY TWO-WAY RADIO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT f. Backup copy of the operating system and/or all resident programming, software or firmware, which would be required to restore the system to full operation after a complete failure or equipment replacement including any security device needed to run the system software. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation shall comply with all applicable codes. B. All equipment shall be new, in current production, and the standard products of a manufacturer of intercom equipment. Manufacturer shall be certified as complying with the standards of ISO- 9001 for quality control. The central exchange shall meet standards and be certified with a CE label as conforming to rigid EMC requirements for electromagnetic emissions, immunity and harmonics. C. Manufacturer shall guarantee availability of parts, for a minimum of 2 years from date of shipment. D. If required, manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate features, functions, operating characteristics and clarity of sound to owner. E. System shall be installed by a factory authorized communications contractor with technicians specifically certified on this exact system. F. On -site maintenance and repair service shall be available locally and within 4 hours of notification for emergency conditions. G. System shall allow remote programming. Contractor shall have the ability to access and make changes to the system remotely. Provide any modem(s)required. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Refer to Division 1, General Conditions, and General Requirements - Guarantee Documents for general warranty requirements. B. The entire system and its operation shall be warranted for a period of 3 years from date of Owner's acceptance. 1. Include monthly coverage adjustments of installed equipment during first year of system operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The purpose of the RDS shall be to provide supplemental active signal boost and distribution for the City of Lubbock Life Safety Two -Way Radio Communications System (RCS) within the Building. B. System provided shall be complete and operational. C. System shall be licensed under FCC rules for class B bi-directional amplifiers. D. Cables shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) listed, comply with Article 800 (Communications Circuits) of National Electrical Code and shall meet specifications of NEMA (low loss), UL 444, and ICEA (where applicable). E. Cable and Termination Components (Jack, Patch Panel) are specified to function as System. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Manufacturers: Motorola, Kenwood, Vertex Standard. B. The system shall: 1. Provide two-way radio signal levels to building areas found to have inadequate signal levels. 2. Support FCC Narrowband requirements (6.25 kHz and 12.5 kHz channel bands). 3. Support frequency ranges within 151-159 MHz, 450-470 MHz, and 700, 800 and 900 MHz frequency bands. 4. Comply with APCO Project 25 (P25) standards for digital compatibility and interoperation. 5. Support upgrading for revisions or additions of system frequencies as deemed necessary for maintaining radio system coverage over the life of the system. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 50 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 50 00 LIFE SAFETY TWO-WAY RADIO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Provide minimum receiving signal strength of -95dBM to minimum 95 percent of all areas of each building level in question. Provide minimum transmitting signal strength of-100dBm at the closest City of Lubbock site/donor antenna when transmitted from minimum 95 percent of all areas of each building level in question. 2.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A. System shall: 1. Consist of roof antenna, signal bi-directional amplifier, repeaters, duplexers, interior antennas, and interconnecting non -radiating cabling. 2. System shall be modular to allow Owner to expand system to entire building floor area in future. 3. Roof antenna shall: a. Be wall -mountable. 1) Coordinate size and color with Owner. 4. Bi-directional Amplifiers shall: a. Be rack -mountable. b. Require 120V power via cord and plug. 5. Repeaters and Duplexers shall: a. Be provided where additional signal boost is required. b. Require 120V power via cord and plug. 6. Interior antenna shall: a. Be surface -mounted. 1) Coordinate size, color, and mounting requirements with Owner. b. Be passive components not requiring separate power feed. 2.4 COMPONENT ENCLOSURES A. All repeater, transmitter, receiver, signal booster components, and battery system components shall be contained in a NEMA 4- or 4X-type enclosure(s). 2.5 SIGNAL BOOSTER COMPONENTS A. If used, signal boosters shall meet the following requirements, as well as any other requirements determined by the authority havingjurisdiction: 1. Signal boosters shall have FCC certification prior to installation. All signal boosters shall be compatible with both analog and digital communications simultaneously at the time of installation. The authority having jurisdiction shall provide the maximum acceptable propagation delay standard. a. All repeaters, transmitters, receivers, and signal boosters shall be installed and operated in a manner consistent with Title 47, CFR. A label displaying the exact FCC certification number must be placed in a visible place on the equipment itself. hKI�Z11l, 0A01%309WNIW A. At least two independent and reliable power supplies shall be provided for all repeater, transmitter, receiver, and signal booster components, one primary and one secondary. 1. Primary Power Source. The primary power source shall be supplied from a dedicated branch circuit. 2. Secondary Power Source. The secondary power source shall consist of one of the following: a. A storage battery dedicated to the system with at least 12 hours of 100 percent system operation capacity. b. An automatic -starting, engine -driven generator serving the dedicated branch circuit or the system with at least 12 hours of 100 percent system operation capacity and storage batteries dedicated to the system with at least 2 hours of 100 percent system operation capacity. 285000-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 50 00 LIFE SAFETY TWO-WAY RADIO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2.7 SYSTEM MONITORING A. The public safety radio communications enhancement system shall include automatic supervisory and trouble signals for malfunctions of the signal booster(s) and power supply(ies) that are annunciated by the fire alarm system and comply with the following: 1. System and signal booster supervisory signals shall include the following: a. Antenna malfunction b. Signal booster failure C. Low -battery capacity indication when 70 percent of the 12-hour operating capacity has been depleted. d. Power supply signals shall include the following for each signal booster: e. Loss of normal ac power f. Failure of battery charger 2.8 DEDICATED PANEL A. A dedicated monitoring panel shall be provided within the fire command center to annunciate the status of all signal booster locations. The monitoring panel shall provide visual and labeled indication of the following for each signalbooster: 1. Normal ac power 2. Signal booster trouble 3. Loss of normal ac power 4. Failure of battery charger 5. Low -battery capacity 2.9 WIRE AND CABLE A. All system cable and connectors shall be per manufacturer recommendations. B. All system cables shall be plenum -rated. C. All system cables shall have 2 hour circuit integrity. 2.10 SYSTEM OPERATION A. RDS shall operate continuously. B. RDS shall be connected to emergency back-up power. 1. Power connection by Division 26 Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate location of existing City Radio Communications System (RCS) site/donor antenna. B. All wire and cable shall be uniform and in accordance with national electric codes and manufacturer's instructions. C. Equipment shall be firmly secured, plumb, and level. D. Install cables splice -free. E. Install cables within dedicated raceway (conduit,J-hooks). F. Install vertical cables via stacked floor sleeves within Tele/Data rooms. 1. Coordinate with Owner for exact sleeve usage. G. Where wall -mounted, route cable in conduit stub -up from back box to nearest accessible ceiling, and voice/data J-hooks back to local Tele/Dataroom. H. Furnish manufacturer -required back boxes to Electrical Contractor for installation. 1. Follow manufacturer's recommended cable terminationpractices. J. Mark all Wire and Cable in common at both ends using a permanent method such as self- laminating cable marking tape. Tags shall be attached to wire and cable nylon cable ties in an accessible location so that y can easily be read. Tags shall be installed when wire and cables are installed. Labeling shall FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 50 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 50 00 LIFE SAFETY TWO-WAY RADIO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT agree with Record Documentation. 3.2 PRE CONSTRUCTION A. Contractor shall perform a complete site survey prior to providing submittals to Engineer. 1. Site survey shall be conducted when building is substantially constructed but prior to finish out to determine where amplifier equipment isnecessary. 2. After site survey is completed submit proposal to owner for installation of all equipment necessary to provide radio coverage in accordance with IBC, IFC, and this specification. B. Confirm with Owner: 1. Closest City Radio Communications System site/donor antenna location(s) 2. Contact information for AHJ associated specifically with public safety radio frequencies and confirmation with AHJ of required frequency support required at building system. 3. Adequate native signal strength at proposed roof antennalocation 4. Required mounting position of project roofantenna. 5. Constructability of proposed antenna mounting location, including wall/roof penetrations and aesthetic. C. Site survey shall be conducted per NPSTC "Best Practices for In -Building Communications". a. Establish with Owner what point in construction or occupancy site survey shall be performed. b. Site Survey shall include at aminimum: 1) Voice quality test and radio coverage test performed by City staff as scheduled by Owner. 2) Provide full on -site RF spectral analysis of existing City Radio Communication System signal strength though entire building floor area. 3) Closest City Radio Communications System site/donor antenna location 4) Adequate native signal strength at proposed roof antennalocation 5) Required mounting position of project roof antenna. 6) Constructability of proposed antenna mounting location, including wall/roof penetrations and aesthetic. 7) Discovery of potential number of concurrent users in building during emergency situations. 8) Discovery of all other wireless frequencies in use within the building. 9) Documentation of building construction materials in eacharea. 2. Contractor shall provide all site survey and test results to Engineer and Owner within in project submittal. D. Coordinate Roof/wall penetration for roof antenna with architect prior to beginning work. E. Coordinate with Division 27 Contractor for final component mounting locations within Tele/Data rooms. 1. Refer to drawings for initial locations. 3.3 SYSTEM INITIALIZING AND PROGRAMMING A. System shall include all software necessary for system configuration. B. System shall be turned on and adjustments made to meet requirements of specifications and on- site conditions. 1. All system oscillation between antennas shall be rectified. C. System shall be programmed to function as specified. D. All system initializing and programming system parameters shall be recorded and turned over to Owner for future reference. 1. Update system records immediately after making system changes. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. System field testing shall be performed according to NPSTC "Best Practices for In -Building 28 50 00 - 6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 28 50 00 LIFE SAFETY TWO-WAY RADIO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Communications". B. Prior to testing, Contractor shall provide an Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) document. 1. ATP shall detail testing objectives, protocol, responsibilities, and timelines. a. At minimum, testing protocol shall include: 1) Signal strength test performed by Contractor throughout building areas served by RDS. 2) Voice quality test performed by City staff as scheduled by Owner. b. Establish with Owner what point in construction or occupancy site survey shall be performed 2. Owner shall accept ATP in writing prior to systemtesting. C. System shall be completely tested to assure that the operations of all system components are in working order. D. System shall be tested in presence of Owner. E. System testing shall be completed upon written acceptance of system operation by Owner. 3.5 TRAINING A. Contractor shall conduct up to (4) hours of on -site instruction in use and operation of the system to designated owner representatives, within (30) days of system acceptance. Owner will print and distribute directory number plan to users. 3.6 MANUALS A. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) electronic copies and (1) hard copy of standard factory prepared operation, installation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall include typical wiring diagrams and all initial system settings END OF SECTION 28 50 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 28 50 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3110 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 3110 00 - SITE CLEARING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Removing trees and other vegetation. 2. Clearing, grubbing, and topsoil stripping. 3. Removing above -grade site improvements. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1-inch in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for materials indicated to stockpile or remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor property and removed from site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings according to General Conditions: Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site -clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to salvage and store on Owner's premises where indicated. C. Notify utility locator service to locate and mark utilities in Project area before site clearing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. Restore damaged improvements to original condition, as acceptable to Owner. D. Verify existing plant life or items designated to remain are tagged or identified. 3.2 UTILITIES FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 10 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3110 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. B. Coordinate removal of underground utilities with other Sections of Contract Documents. 3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain, clean and carefully, where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. B. Fill clearing and grubbing depressions with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth. Compact each layer to density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.4 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to depths encountered to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.5 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut faces vertically. 3.6 DISPOSAL A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 31 10 00 311000-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3120 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 3120 00 - EARTH MOVING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below -grade improvements and utilities. 3. Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas. 4. Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit excavation and planting. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. C. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. D. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. E. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. F. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation. G. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service. C. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and plant -protection zones. d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade. e. Field quality control. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: For each on -site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows: 1. Classification according to ASTM D2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D698. B. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth -moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 20 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3120 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups SC, CL, and SM according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 4-inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. 1. Liquid Limit: 35. 2. Plasticity Index: 15. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth -moving operations. B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth -moving operations. C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Provide dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. B. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. C. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. D. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. 31 20 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3120 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Primary Designer when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Primary Designer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs with a pneumatic -tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof -rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Primary Designer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Primary Designer, without additional compensation. 3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Primary Designer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Primary Designer. 3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.8 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." D. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing. E. Initial Backfill: 1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 20 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3120 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. 3.10 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under building slabs, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under footings and foundations, use satisfactory soil material. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than [8 inches] <Insert dimension> in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698. 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 6 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 3.13 GRADING A. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10- foot straightedge. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements. 2. Determine that fill material classification and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, during placement and compaction, that in -place density of compacted fill complies with requirements. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D2937, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2500 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab but in no case 31 20 00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3120 00 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length but no fewer than two tests. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.15 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Primary Designer; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.16 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 3120 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 20 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3123 00.00 EXCAVATION AND FILL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 3123 00.00 - EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes all excavation, filling, and grading in connection with paved streets and parking lots and unpaved landscaped areas. Excavation, filling, and grading shall conform to lines and grades as shown on Plans. Contractor furnishes all materials, equipment, tools, labor, superintendence, and incidentals necessary to complete Work per Drawings and as specified herein. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill is placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill is placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. C. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation is below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as Architect directs. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material paid per Contract provisions for changes in Work. 2. Bulk Excavation is more than 10 feet in width and 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation is below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without Architect direction. Unauthorized excavation and remedial Work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. D. Embankment/Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. E. Rock: Material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4-cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows per 2 inches when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, per ASTM D 1586. F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other manmade stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. G. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of excavation or top surface of a fill/backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earthmoving operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Do not commence earthmoving operations until temporary sedimentation- and erosion -control measures are in place. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 23 00.00 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3123 00.00 EXCAVATION AND FILL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials unavailable from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Onsite material free of gravel, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter or a select non -expansive material mechanically processed to produce a consistent uniform material meeting the following general requirements: 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3.0 inches. 2. Percent Retained on No. 4 Sieve: 25 - 50 percent. 3. Percent Retained on No. 40 Sieve: 50 - 85 percent. 4. Plasticity Index: 15 maximum. C. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. D. Bedding Course: Naturally- or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. E. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Excavation consists of removing all material from areas where subgrade or finished grade is below existing ground. Excess excavated material not required, or otherwise unsuitable according to geotechnical report, for making necessary fills for items in Project, shall be disposed by Contractor, as Architect directs, in approved waste areas. No additional compensation made for hauling or disposing waste material or excess excavation. B. Existing Pavement, Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks, Etc.: All existing pavement, concrete curbs, trees, grass, or other organic materials removed as excavation, shall be classified as waste material, and not incorporated in fills unless Architect gives specific direction to do so. Where sidewalks are removed, take care to avoid damage to that portion of walk not requiring removal. Waste material shall be disposed as provided herein. C. Finishing: All excavation shall be to lines and grades shown on Plans. Any excavation below such grade, and consequential filling to established grade, shall be at Contractor expense. Neatly finish excavation beyond ends of intersection stubs, between curb and property line, or other transition areas, to lines and grades shown on Plans or established by Architect. D. Damage to Existing Pavement, Curbs, Utilities, Etc.: Take care in all excavation Work to avoid damage to existing pavement, curbs, utilities, and other such installations. If these installations are damaged by Contractor forces or equipment, replace or repair as directed at expense of Contractor. E. Unclassified Excavation: All material excavated as part of Project. 3.3 EMBANKMENT/TOPSOIL A. Embankment: Constructed to lines and grades shown on Plans or directed by Architect, in 31 23 00.00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3123 00.00 EXCAVATION AND FILL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT approximate horizontal layers. Only place suitable material, approved by Architect, as embankment. Contractor shall obtain borrow source if necessary to complete embankment areas. Material shall meet ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups SP and SM, free of rock or gravel larger than 1-inch in any dimension, debris, waste, or vegetation. Material shall have a PI less than 15. Existing surface where placing fill shall be scarified to approximately 3 inches before placing any fill material, to bond fill to existing surface. Remove and replace any unsuitable subgrade materials below finished subgrade excavation with suitable materials. No separate payment for removing and replacing such materials made and shall be incidental to subgrade preparation. B. Topsoil: 1. All topsoil imported for planting beds shall be typical in texture of soils in Project area. Soil shall be free of nutgrass and other noxious weeds, grasses, sticks, roots, sterilants, chemicals or stones, consistent in texture characteristic of red sandy loam. Blow sand or caliche not permitted. No rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter permitted. Topsoil, source, and method of installation shall be approved by Architect. 2. Minimum 12-inch depth required at all landscape areas. 3. Minimum 4-inch depth required at all other areas shown on Plans. C. Quality Control: 1 field density test required for each 500 sq. yds. of prepared subgrade. 3.4 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten and mechanically process soil to produce material with consistent and uniform soil moisture content. Deviation in moisture content consistency is grounds for rejection of material. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on muddy, frozen, frosty, or icy surfaces. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.5 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Mechanically process soil material until a consistent material, uniform in color, unit weight, and moisture content is produced prior to any compaction efforts. D. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Proctor samples will not be taken for performance testing before material processed to a uniform and consistent material on site. Approval of any material in submittal process does not guarantee acceptance of material in the field. 2. For Pavements: Scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 3. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 4. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 12 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 5. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent. 6. At Architect discretion, additional proctors and rework required where compaction exceeds 103 percent of ASTM D 698. Compaction result of 103 percent ASTM D 698 or higher is cause for rejection. 3.6 SUBGRADE FINISHING FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 23 00.00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3123 00.00 EXCAVATION AND FILL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Finish subgrade accurately to lines, grades, and cross Sections shown on Plans or established in the field. Bring subgrade in cut areas to grade by blading or hand grading. Compact surface with approved pneumatic roller followed by approved 3-wheel roller until it presents a uniform compacted appearance. Compact subgrade in fill areas with approved pneumatic roller. Follow final rolling of last layer deposited by blading and rolling with 3-wheel roller as described. B. Accurately form warped sections, valley gutters, and other irregularities in Section shown on Plans or established in the field, in subgrade during finishing operation. Check subgrade by "teeing" from gutter to gutter on cross Section, valley gutters, with straightedge, longitudinally. Contractor shall furnish a satisfactory straightedge if required. Correct variations more than 1/2- inch from true grade or true cross Sections by loosening, adding, or removing material, reshaping, and recompacting affected area. Set "blue tops" set to finished subgrade elevations set where elevations cannot be checked as stated. 3.7 ROLLING EQUIPMENT A. Pneumatic Rollers: Consists of not less than 9 pneumatic -tired wheels, running on 2 axles so rear group of tires will not follow in tracks of forward group, mounted in rigid frame, and provided with loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. Front axle shall rotate around a king pin located so roller may turn within a minimum circle. Roller, under working conditions, shall have an approximate 60-inch effective rolling width and give a minimum compression of 325 pounds per inch of width of tire tread. Roller shall be drawn by a suitable pneumatic -tired tractor or self-propelled type. B. 3-Wheel Roller: Shall be a 3-wheel self-propelled type, weighing not less than 10 tons, and provide a compression on rear wheels not less than 325 pounds per linear inch of width. Rear wheels shall be flat, diameter not less than 48 inches, and width not less than 20 inches. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protecting newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, erosion, and free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially -completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect. Reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent Work and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.9 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 3123 00.00 31 23 00.00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3123 00.10 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR UTILITIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 3123 00.10 - EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR UTILITIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes all excavating, backfilling, and compacting of trenches for pipe and pipe accessories and other utilities. No separate pay item for excavating, backfilling, and compacting trenches. Correct overexcavation not at Architect direction at Contractor expense. OSHA regulations and Part 3 herein will apply to all excavation and trenching. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 33 12 00 "Water Utility Distribution Equipment." 3. Section 33 31 00.10 "Sanitary and Storm Utility Sewerage Piping." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TRENCHES A. Excavate pipe trenches to lines and grades shown on Drawings or established by Architect. Before excavation begins in paved areas, cut, or saw existing pavement to a neat line by methods meeting Architect approval. Maximum width of trench from pipe invert to top of trench shall be as detailed on Limits of Excavation; indicated on Contract Drawings. Procedures for treatment of trench walls shall be as prescribed by trench safety system. In some areas of limited right-of-way or when necessary to protect existing facilities, limit slope of trench wall. Where necessary to stay within maximum width limits at top of pipe, adequately brace and sheet trench. Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage to adjacent structures due to inadequate trench wall supporting devices. B. Where special pipe bedding material not required, excavate trench to an even grade so bottom of pipe will rest on bottom of trench throughout entire length of pipe. In obtaining a true and even grade, wet excavated trench bottom as necessary to facilitate compaction. Compact bottom of trench by mechanical means to consolidate all loose material disturbed during excavation. No compaction tests required on bottom of trench; however, compact entire width and length of trench so no loose material remains. Correct any part of trench excavated below grade by filling with approved materials and thoroughly compacting. If clay, rock or other unyielding material encountered in trench bottom, remove to 6 inches below grade, refill with selected materials, and compact to minimum 95 percent maximum density and f2 percent optimum moisture per ASTM D 698 to specified grade. C. Dig bell holes of ample dimensions at each j oint to permit j ointing pipe made properly, and prevent pipe from resting on or supported by bell. D. Use trench -digging machinery to make trench excavations except where operation of same would cause damage to existing structures above or below ground. In such instances, employ hand methods. Contractor shall locate all existing underground lines, whether shown on Drawings, sufficiently in advance of trenching operations to prevent any damage thereto. Take extreme care to prevent such damage and Contractor fully responsible for damage to any such lines. Pothole and locate all utility lines at least 1,000 feet ahead of pipeline placement operations to allow Architect a minimum 4 working days to initiate any necessary changes in alignment and/or grade of pipeline. E. No classification of excavated materials and excavate all materials encountered as required. Protect adjacent structures from damage by construction equipment. Excavated material may be stockpiled alongside trench per approved trench safety plan, not endangering work. Within street rights -of -way, remove excavated material as necessary from the street to allow traffic to pass safely. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 23 00.10 - l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3123 00.10 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR UTILITIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT In no case is excavated material allowed to be stockpiled in street or public rights -of -way. F. Excavate for manholes as required, providing space for constructing structure and trench safety system if applicable. G. Explosives not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEM A. This item covers requirements for Contractor to provide design and construction of trench safety system for all trenches excavated. Contractor required to install a trench system to provide for safe excavation of all trenches exceeding a depth of 5 feet per OSHA standards. It is the duty and responsibility of Contractor and all subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-596, 29 U.S.C. Specs. 651 et. Seq., Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), all amendments thereto, and enforce and comply with all provisions of this act. In addition, on projects where trench excavation exceeds 5 feet, Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with all requirements of 29 C.F.R. secs., and 1926.652 and 1926.653, OSHA Safety and Health Standards, more fully described herein. B. Description: 1. This Section governs trench safety systems required for construction of all trench excavation utilized in Project, including all additional excavation and backfill necessitated by the safety system. Trench safety systems shall be suitable for construction of pipelines, utilities, etc., installed below grade and sufficient to fully protect public or private property including other existing utilities and structures below or above grade. Trench safety systems include but are not limited to sloping of side of excavation, sheeting, trench boxes or trench shields, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, dewatering, or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. 2. Contractor is responsible for design of systems and procedures (use of sheet piling, shoring, or other means of temporary support to protect existing buildings, streets, highways, water conveying structures, and any other structures). For existing utilities, Contractor may elect, at his cost, to remove utilities under stipulated condition that removal and subsequent replacement of utilities shall meet with approval of Architect, Owner, utility owner, and all agencies having jurisdiction of structure or property. In all cases, Contractor is fully responsible for protection of public or private property and any person(s), who, as a result of Contractor work, may be injured. 3. Successful responsible bidder is required to submit 3 sets of trench excavation plans with a trench safety system to Owner for review within 15 consecutive days after Award of Contract. 4. Plans must be designed and sealed by a professional Engineer registered in Texas with professional experience in geotechnical engineering. Contractor is responsible for obtaining borings and soil analysis as required for design and preparation of trench excavation plan and trench safety system. Design trench excavation plan and trench safety system per OSHA standards and regulations. 5. No trenching in excess of 5 feet below existing grade allowed until trench excavation plan is reviewed and returned to Contractor. Any changes in trench excavation plan after initiation of construction will not cause an Extension of Time or Change Order but such changes will require same review process as original excavation plan. 6. Contractor accepts sole responsibility for compliance with all applicable safety requirements. Review is only for general conformance with OSHA safety standards; and trench excavation plan review does not relieve Contractor of any/all construction means, methods, technique, and procedures. Any property damage or bodily injury, including death arising from use of trench excavation plan, shall remain sole responsibility and liability of 31 23 00.10 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3123 00.10 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR UTILITIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Contractor. C. Construction Methods: Accomplish trench safety systems per detailed specifications set out in provisions of Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring, Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, as amended including proposed Rules published in Federal Register (Vol. 54, No. 209) on Tuesday, October 31, 1989, or subsequent revisions. Sections incorporated into these specifications by reference include Sections 1926-650 through 1926-653. Legislation enacted by Texas Legislature (H.B. NoS. 662 and 665) with regard to Trench Safety Systems is hereby also incorporated, by reference, into these Specifications. D. Safety Program: 1. Contractor shall submit a safety program specifically for construction of trench excavations together with trench excavation plans for trench safety systems. Trench safety program shall be per OSHA Standards governing presence and activities of individuals working in and around trench excavation. 2. Contractors have 3 generally accepted methods, or combinations thereof, to meet OSHA Standards for Trench Excavation: a. Utilization of Trench Box: Utilizing a trench box must submit physical dimensions, materials, position in trench, expected loads, and strength of box. Trench box shall be designed by a professional engineer. b. Shoring, Sheeting, and Bracing Methods: Utilizing shoring, sheeting, and bracing must submit dimensions and materials of all uprights, stringers, cross -bracing, and spacing required to meet OSHA requirements, all designed by a professional engineer. C. Sloping and Benching: Utilizing sloping and benching methods shall have methods designed by a professional engineer. 3. Safety program must indicate in which areas Plan will be utilized. 4. No claims for delay permitted for Contractor delay in obtaining safety program approval. E. Inspection: 1. Provide a qualified person to daily inspect trench safety systems to ensure systems meet OSHA requirements. Contractor shall provide this person's name as part of post -bid, pre - award Key Personnel Qualifications submittal. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections. 2. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, cease all work in trench until Contractor takes necessary precautions to safeguard personnel entering trench. It is sole duty, responsibility, and prerogative of Contractor, not Owner or designated representative, to determine specific applicability of designed trench safety systems to each field condition encountered on Project. F. Indemnification: 1. Indemnify and hold harmless Owner, employees, and agents, from any/all damages, costs (including without limitation legal fees, court costs, and cost of investigation), judgments or claims, by anyone, including workers or general public, for injury or death of person(s) resulting from collapse/failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. 2. Acknowledge and agree this indemnity provision provides indemnity for Owner in case claims are made Owner is negligent by act/omission in providing for trench safety, including but not limited to inspections, failure to issue stop -work orders, and hiring Contractor. G. Emergencies: In any emergency situation which may threaten or affect safety or welfare of persons or property, act at your discretion to prevent possible damage, injury, or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed for such action is considered in view of cause of emergency and per general conditions. 3.2 OPEN TRENCH RESTRICTION FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 23 00.10 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3123 00.10 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR UTILITIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Limit stringing out pipeline ahead of trenching operations in street right-of-way, to linear footage of pipeline installed in 1 day's work. Under no circumstances is pipeline allowedto string out or store in street rights -of -way any longer than 1 day. Except where otherwise specified, indicated on Plans or accepted in writing by Architect, maximum length of open trench, where construction is in any stage of completion shall not exceed lengths set forth. Open trench includes excavation, pipe laying, backfilling, and pavement replacement. Descriptions under area designations are general in nature and may be amended in writing by Architect due to particular or peculiar field conditions. 1. Business District Areas: 300 linear feet. 2. Residential Areas: One block or 300 linear feet, whichever is less. 3. Undeveloped Areas: 1,000 linear feet (open trench shall not exceed length of 1 day's pipe laying). B. Complete backfill of all trenches before removing dewatering operations from area to prevent possibility of pipe flotation. C. Excavated areas considered open trench until all pavement replacements made or all trenches outside of pavement replacement areas are backfilled, compacted, and replaced to original condition per Contract Documents. Completely backfill trenches across streets and place temporary or permanent pavement within 48 hours after laying pipe. D. Provide substantial steel plates, properly secured in place, with adequate trench bracing used to bridge across trenches at street and alley crossings and at commercial and residential driveways, where trench backfill and temporary patches are not completed before end of Contractor regular working hours. Provide safe and convenient passage for pedestrians at all times. Architect may designate an enclosed or railed passage for safe access of pedestrian traffic at any location adjacent to construction activities as necessary. Maintain access to fire stations, fire hydrants, schools, hospitals, EMS, emergency response, homes, and businesses at all times. 3.3 BEDDING A. Bedding and bedding zone for pipe shall be as specified in applicable portions of Sections 33 12 00 "Water Utility Distribution Equipment," and 33 31 00.10 "Sanitary and Storm Utility Sewerage Piping." 3.4 BACKFILLING A. Backfill all trenches per this Section as soon as practicable after pipe is installed with specified bedding condition. As soon as practicable after laying and jointing pipe, completion of bedding, and completion of structures, backfill trench. B. Backfill material immediately adjacent to pipe or bedding material shall meet gradation requirements recommended by geotechnical engineer. Material shall be free from rocks, boulders, clay or other unsuitable material(s). C. Placement of Backfill: If bedding requirements do not require bedding zone material to top or above pipe, carefully place first lift of backfill material under and around pipe and thoroughly compact by mechanical tamps to spring line of pipe. When first lift is compacted by mechanical tamps, second lift shall be to 1-foot above top of pipe and compacted as specified. Placing each lift will be dependent upon pipe diameter and in no case shall each lift exceed 8 inches in thickness based upon loose measure. Backfilling remainder of trench shall be done in the following manner: 1. Place backfill material in trench in layers not to exceed 8 inches. Backfill material shall be moistened as necessary to obtain optimum moisture and mechanically processed to a consistent material, uniform in color, moisture, and unit weight prior to placement and compaction efforts in the trench. Compact with approved mechanical compaction equipment until required density obtained. Do not use vibratory rollers in city streets. Depending upon mechanical compaction equipment used, Architect may allow Contractor to lay thicker lifts. If Contractor feels he can achieve passing density tests based upon density requirements of contract with thicker lifts than 8 inches by loose measure, he shall first 31 23 00.10 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 3123 00.10 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR UTILITIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT submit proposed method of compaction, type of equipment to use, and desired lift thickness. Architect shall determine whether Contractor's proposed methods are acceptable. In utilizing existing spoil for backfill material, any spoil that contains obvious and excessive amounts of clay and/or large cobbles (greater than 3 inches) shall not be acceptable for use in any zone. Architect shall determine whether excavated spoil is acceptable for backfill material. 2. Density requirements shall be as: a. For all backfill in areas to pave, obtain a density not less than 95 percent per ASTM D 698 from top of subgrade to 18 inches below top of subgrade. Obtain a density 90 percent per ASTM D 698 from 18 inches below top of subgrade to top of pipe bedding zone. b. For all backfill not in paved areas, obtain a density not less than 90 percentper ASTM D 698 from top of pipe bedding zone to ground surface. C. Jetting or water ponding methods not allowed. d. Slamming excavator bucket down on backfill is unacceptable for compaction. Contractor shall use sheepsfoot wheel rollers or other approved mechanical compaction techniques. e. At Architect discretion, additional proctors and rework is required where compaction exceeds 103 percent of ASTM D 698. Compaction result of 103 percent ASTM D 698 or higher is cause for rejection. D. Field Quality Control: 1. Take field densities of backfill every 300 linear feet of pipe installation, per ASTM D 698 at the following depths: a. 1/3 pipe height. b. Springline. C. Top of pipe. d. Every lift thereafter to ground surface. 2. Additionally, obtain 1 moisture density curve for each type of material used per ASTM D 698, 1 sieve analysis, and 1 plasticity index for each type of imported material used per ASTM C 136 and D 4318. 3. Sloping the backfill with an excavator to test multiple lifts is not permitted. Each lift shall pass moisture and density requirements prior to placement of subsequent lifts. E. Backfill and Maintenance: 1. Following backfill completion, maintain trench surface in a satisfactory manner until final completion and acceptance of finished Project. Maintenance shall include blading as necessary, filling depressions caused by settlement, and other work required to keep areas and roads in satisfactory condition. 2. Repair any settlement which occurs before and during the 1-year warranty period at Contractor expense. END OF SECTION 3123 00.10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 23 00.10 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 3131 16 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and profiles for termite control products. 2. Include the EPA -Registered Label for termiticide products. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of termite control product. B. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products and who is accredited by manufacturer. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Soil Treatment: 1. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA -Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: EPA -Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Corporation, Pest Control Solutions; Termidor. b. Syngenta; Demon Max. 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 31 31 16 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare work areas according to the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and according to manufacturer's written instructions before beginning application and installation of termite control treatment(s). Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA -Registered Label volume and rate for maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. 1. Slabs -on -Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas, including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 4. Masonry: Treat voids. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and below -grade walls will be penetrated. B. Post warning signs in areas of application. C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. B. Protect termiticide solution dispersed in treated soils and fills from being diluted by exposure to water spillage or weather until ground -supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. END OF SECTION 313116 31 31 16 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 1150 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 32 11 50 - FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes excavating, crushing, hauling, and spreading base material and wetting, compacting, and shaping it to form a flexible base course for paving, to lines, grades, and typical cross section shown on Plans, and as specified herein. Furnish all materials, equipment, tools, labor, superintendence, and incidentals necessary to complete Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 3123 00 "Excavation and Fill." 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. This list is a guideline for number of tests required per sequence of construction. Architect shall direct required tests and reserves the right to adjust, modify, or waive requiredtest. 1. Base Material: Retest gradation, liquid limits and plasticity index, for each 10,000 square yards of base material laid. 2. Compaction Test: One field density test required for each 500 square yards of caliche base material laid. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data representative of product per Submittal Procedures and sample must be less than 12 months old. B. Product Data: must submit product data for each source. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of these with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing: 1. Atterburg Limits. 2. Sieve Analysis. 3. Proctor. 4. Wet ball mill. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CALICHE BASE A. Furnish materials for constructing base course from Architect -approved source. Locate source of caliche, securing approval of source, and arrange with property owner on which pit is located, for use of material. Strip pits of all unacceptable material and dispose stripping as agreeable to pit property owner. Open pits to immediately expose vertical faces of all various strata of acceptable material. Unless otherwise directed, secure material in successive vertical cuts extending through all exposed strata. Any incidental costs, including securing, stripping, or crushing base material, is paid by Contractor. B. Screen all acceptable material, crush, and return oversized material to screened material so a uniform material is produced. Processed caliche base material, when properly slaked and tested by TxDOT standard laboratory methods, shall meet the following requirements: Test Property Grade 1-2 Grade 3 Grade 5 Method Sampling Tex-400-A FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 11 50 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 1150 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Master gradation sieve size (cumulative % retained) Tex- 110-E 2-1/2" 0 0 0 1-3/4" 0-10 0-10 0-5 7/8" 10-35 - 10-35 3/8" 30-65 - 35-65 #4 45-75 45-75 45-75 #40 65-90 50-85 70-90 Liquid Limit, % Max Tex- 104-E 40 40 35 Plasticity Index, Max' Tex-106-E 10 12 10 Plasticity index, Min' As shown on the plans As shown on the plans As shown on the plans Wet ball mill, % Max Tex-116-E 40 40 Wet ball mill, % Max increase passing the #40 sieve 20 20 C. Crushed or recycled concrete must meet TxDOT 247 Type D Recycled Materials. Tests necessary to show compliance will be required in a submittal. D. Recycled material (Recycled Asphalt Pavement (RAP), etc.) not permitted unless specifically shown otherwise on Plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HAULING AND PLACING A. Before placing any base material, shape, wet, roll, and compact subgrade to cross sections and grades specified per Section 3123 00 "Excavation and Fill." B. Place flexible base in uniform courses with compacted thicknesses no more than 8 or less than 3 inches compacted if compaction achieved. Deliver material in approved vehicles of uniform capacity and supply amount of material required to construct base course to thickness shown on Plans. Spread and shape to thoroughly mix material and prevent segregation. Sprinkling during this process required if necessary to prevent segregation. When shaping is completed, material shall be uniformly well graded and of proper thickness. Spread and shape material deposited upon subgrade the same day. In event inclement weather or other unforeseen circumstances renders impractical spreading of material during the day it is deposited, material shall be scarified, mixed and spread as directed by Architect. Correct and remove or replace all areas and nests of segregated coarse or fine materials with well -graded material. If additional or corrective binder required, it shall be furnished and applied in amount directed by Architect. Carefully and evenly incorporate such binder material with material in place by scarifying, harrowing, or other approved method. 3.2 COMPACTING AND FINISHING A. After material is properly spread, sprinkle, roll, and blade until thoroughly compacted. During compaction, apply water to maintain optimum moisture in material and sufficiently blade base course to ensure a uniform distribution of base materials and smooth uniform surface, true to section and grades established, after final compaction. Compact by rolling with pneumatic and steel -wheeled rollers as approved by Architect. In areas not accessible to roller, compact base material with mechanical tampers or other approved methods to secure uniform compaction over entire paved area. Throughout entire operation, maintain shape of base course by blading. Blading 3211 50-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 1150 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT and rolling shall continue until course is thoroughly compacted and surface is smooth and in conformity with typical sections shown on Plans, to lines and grades established. Compact material to 95 percent maximum density, at optimum moisture, as determined by ASTM D 1557. At Architect discretion, additional proctors and rework shall be required where compaction exceeds 103 percent of ASTM D 1557. A compaction result of 103 percent ASTM D 1557 or higher is cause for rejection. B. Immediately correct all irregularities, depressions, or weak spots which develop during compaction by scarifying areas affected, adding or removing material as required, reshaping, and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. Immediately before placing surfacing, check base for grade and cross section, and correct any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch from grade or true cross section. Set blue tops to finished base elevations to check base for proper grade and elevation. C. If base course is opened to traffic before surfacing, satisfactorily maintain base by wetting, blading, and rolling until wearing surface is placed thereon. END OF SECTION 32 1150 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 11 50 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 12 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 32 12 16 — ASPHALT PAVING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hot -mix asphalt paving and patching. 2. Asphalt surface treatments. 3. Pavement -marking paint. 4. Cold milling existing hot -mix asphalt pavement. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 32 1150 "Flexible Base Course." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AASHTO T 102 - Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials. B. AASHTO M 248 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed White and Yellow Traffic Paints. C. Al MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types. D. AIMS-22 - Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements. E. ASTM C 29 - Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate. F. ASTM C 88 - Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. G. ASTM C 117 - Materials Finer than 75-Micrometer (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. H. ASTM C 127 - Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. I. ASTM C 128 - Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate. J. ASTM C 131 - Resistance to Degradation of Small -Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. K. ASTM C 136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates L. ASTM C 188 - Density of Hydraulic Cement. M. ASTM D 70 - Specific Gravity of Semi -Solid Bituminous Materials. N. ASTM D 75 - Sampling Aggregates. O. ASTM D 242 - Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. P. ASTM D 546 - Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler for Road and Paving Materials. Q. ASTM D 692 - Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. R. ASTM D 854 - Specific Gravity of Soils. S. ASTM D 946 - Penetration -Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. T. ASTM D 979 - Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures. U. ASTM D 995 - Mixing Plants for Hot -Mixed, Hot -Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures. V. ASTM D 1073 - Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. W. ASTM D 1075 - Effect of Water on Cohesion of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures. X. ASTM D 1188 - Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin -Coated Specimens. Y. ASTM D 2027 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium -Curing Type). Z. ASTM D 2041 - Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures. AA. ASTM D 2172 - Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 12 16 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 12 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT BB. ASTM D 2726 - Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non -Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures. CC. ASTM D 2950 - Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods. DD. ASTM D 3381 - Viscosity -Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. EE. ASTM D 3405 - Standard Specification for Joint Sealants, Hot -Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. FF. ASTM D 3549 - Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens. GG. TEX-126-E - Molding, Testing and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Materials. HH. TEX-204-F - Design of Bituminous Mixtures. Il. TEX-224-F - Determining Flakiness Index. JJ. TxDOT Item 300 - Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions. KK. TxDOT Item 301 -Asphalt Antistripping Agents. LL. TxDOT Item 340 - Specification for Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement. MM. TxDOT Item 345 - Specification for Asphaltic Stabilized Base (Plant Mix). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Job -Mix Designs: Submit for approval before preparing and placing bituminous mixture. Design mix using procedures contained in TxDOT Standard Specifications. Formulas shall indicate physical properties of mixes as shown by tests made by a commercial laboratory approved by Architect, using materials identical to those provided on Project. Submit formulas with material samples. Job -mix formula for each mixture shall be in effect until modified in writing by Contractor and approved by Architect. Provide a new job -mix formula for each source change. C. Qualification Data: Submit qualifications for product manufacturers. D. Material Test Reports: 1. Specific gravity test of asphalt. 2. Coarse aggregate tests. 3. Weight of slag test. 4. Percent of crushed pieces in gravel. 5. Fine aggregate tests. 6. Specific gravity of mineral filler. 7. Bituminous mixture tests. 8. Aggregates tests. 9. Bituminous mix tests. 10. Pavement courses. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified per ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated, as documented per ASTM E 548. B. Asphalt -Paving Publication: TxDOT Item 340 "Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement." C. Required Data - Job -mix formula shall show: 1. Source and proportions, percent by weight, of each ingredient of mixture. 2. Correct gradation, percentages passing each size sieve listed in specifications for mixture to be used, aggregate, and mineral filler from each separate source and from each different size used in mixture and for composite mixture. 3. Amount of material passing the No. 200 sieve determined by dry sieving. 4. Number of blows of hammer compaction per side of molded specimen. 321216-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 12 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 5. Temperature viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement. 6. Stability, flow, percent voids in mineral aggregate, percent air voids, unit weight. 7. Asphalt absorption by the aggregate. 8. Effective asphalt content as percent by weight of total mix. 9. Temperature of mixture immediately upon completion of mixing. 10. Asphalt viscosity grade and/or penetration range. 11. Curves for asphalt stabilized base and hot mix asphalt paving courses. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect materials delivered to site for damage and store with minimal handling. Store aggregates to prevent segregation, contamination, or intermixing different aggregate sizes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations. Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet, excessively damp, or the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 degrees F. 2. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 degrees F at time of placement. Engineer must approve placement when ambient temperatures are less than 50 degrees F before placement. B. Pavement -Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at minimum 40 degrees F ambient or surface temperature for oil -based materials, 50 degrees F for water -based materials, not exceeding 95 degrees F. 1.8 MIXING PLANT A. Provide mixing plant able to meet Project needs. B. At no time shall plant hinder Project progress. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aggregate: Use materials/gradations that performed satisfactorily in previous installations. 1. Coarse Aggregate shall conform to ASTM D 692. a. Material retained on a No. 4 sieve shall consist of clean, washed, durable fragments of crushed stone of uniform quality. Mixing or combining crushed gravel and crushed stone is not permitted. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed to extent that produces 85 percent minimum crushed faces for Type D HMAC when tested per TEX-460-A. Part 1 "Determination or Crushed Face Count." b. Maximum loss of 20 percent when subjected to five cycles of Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test ASTM C 88. Amount of organic matter, clays, loams, or particles coated therewith, or other undesirable materials shall not exceed 2 percent. When subjected to Los Angeles Abrasion test, coarse aggregate shall not have a loss greater than 40 percent by weight. C. Coarse aggregate may be enhanced with crushed concrete (CL A min). 2. Fine Aggregate shall conform to ASTM D 1073. a. That part of material passing No. 40 sieve consisting of sand/screenings. Plasticity index of that part of sand passing the 40 sieve shall not exceed 6. Plasticity index of screenings shall not exceed 9. b. Sand shall be composed of durable stone particles free from injurious foreign matter. Screenings to be same/similar material specified for coarse aggregate. 3. Mineral Filler shall conform to ASTM D 242 and consist of thoroughly -dry stone dust, Portland cement, or other material dust approved by Architect. Mineral filler shall be free of FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 12 16 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 12 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT foreign and other injurious matter and meet the following gradation: a. Percent Passing on No. 30 Sieve: 95-100. b. Percent Passing on No. 80 Sieve: 75 minimum. C. Percent Passing on No. 200 Sieve: 55 minimum. B. RAP: 1. Salvaged, milled, pulverized, broken, or crushed asphalt pavement. Crush or break RAP so 100 percent of particles pass 2-inch sieve. 2. From Contractor or other sources including RAP generated during Project, permitted only when shown on Plans. Owner -owned RAP, if allowed for use, available at location shown on Plans. When RAP used, determine asphalt content and gradation for mixture design purposes. Perform other tests on RAP when shown on Plans. 3. When RAP allowed by Plan note, use no more than 30-percent RAP in Types A or B mixtures unless otherwise shown on Plans. For all other mixtures, use no more than 20- percent RAP unless otherwise shown on Plans. 4. Do not use RAP contaminated with dirt or other objectionable materials. Do not use RAP if decantation value exceeds 5 percent and plasticity index is greater than 8. Test stockpiled RAP for decantation per the laboratory method given in Tex-406-A, Part I. Determine plasticity index using Tex- 106-E if decantation value exceeds 5 percent. Decantation and plasticity index requirements do not apply to RAP samples with asphalt removed by extraction. 5. Do not intermingle Contractor -owned RAP stockpiles with other RAP stockpiles. Remove unused Contractor -owned RAP material from Project site upon completion of Project. Return unused Owner -owned RAP to the designated stockpile location. C. Asphalt: 1. Performance grade 64-28 S or L, AASHTO Performance Graded Binder Specification (MP 1) or AC 10 with latex. 2. Notify Architect of source of asphaltic material for approval before production of the asphaltic mixture. 3. Optimum asphalt content determined by Tex 236F method. 4. Asphalt content of paving mixture shall not be below optimum or vary from specified design asphalt content by more than +0.2 percent dry weight, based on total mixture. D. Prime Coat: Prime surface using an application of 0.20-0.30 gallons per square yard of MC asphalt per ASTM D 2027 - MC 30. E. Tack Coat: Asphaltic material for tack coat shall meet requirements for Cut -Back Asphalt RC-250, slow rate cure SS-1 emulsified asphalt, or medium rate cure MS-1 emulsified asphalt or PG grade asphalt as used in HMAC Surface Course. F. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 3405 or AASHTO M 301, hot -applied, single -component, polymer - modified bituminous sealant. G. Emulsified Asphalt Sealer: Spray all HMAC surface courses with an emulsified asphalt sealer consisting of a 15/85 mixture of an MS-2, or 20/80 SS-1, liquid anionic asphalt, and distilled water. Apply emulsified asphalt sealer after HMAC surface cools to below 70 degrees F, applied at a rate of 0.10-0.12 gallons per square yard of surface. H. Mix Design: 1. Hot -Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot -laid, hot -mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction; designed per procedures in Al MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area Project is located. 2. Base Course: a. Asphalt Stabilized Base (ASB) shall consist of a compacted mixture of graded -gravel aggregate and asphalt cement mixed hot in a mixing plant per TxDOT Standard Specifications, 2004, Item 340 Dense -Graded Hot -Mix Asphalt (Method). b. Provide a current mix design using approved materials indicating gradation and 321216-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 12 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT optimum asphalt content. Aggregate mixture shall conform to the following master gradation: Sieve Size 1-1/2" 3/4" 1/2" #4 1 #40 Percent Retained by Weight 0 8-30 30-55 50-70 1 70-90 C. Material passing #40 sieve known as soil binder and meet these requirements: 1) Liquid Limit Shall Not Exceed: 45. 2) Plasticity Index Shall Not Exceed: 15. 3) Linear Shrinkage Shall Not Exceed: 5. d. Mineral aggregate shall not contain more than 0.5 percent moisture before entering the pug mill for mixing with asphalt. e. ASB mixture shall consist of a uniform mixture of mineral aggregate and asphaltic material. Mineral aggregate shall conform to gradation requirements specified. Percent asphaltic material determined per Test Method Tex.-126-E or Tex.-204-F and procedures outlined in TxDOT Bulletin C-14. In no case shall asphalt content be less than 4 nor more than 9 percent by weight. Asphalt for mixture shall meet requirements of TxDOT Item 300 "Asphalt, Oils, and Emulsions." Grade of asphalt and source must be approved by Architect before use. Surface Course: a. Hot mix asphalt concrete surface shall consist of a compacted mixture of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler (if required), and asphalt cement mixed hot in a mixing plant per Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, materials and construction shall conform to TxDOT Item 340 DGR HMA (M). b. Combined mineral aggregate, after final processing by mixing plant and before addition of asphalt and mineral filler, shall have a sand equivalent value not less than 45 when tested per Test Method Tex 203-F. Flat or elongated slivers of stone for any aggregate shall not exceed 25 percent when tested per Test Method Tex 224-F. C. Condition asphaltic mixtures with aggregates which exhibit stripping characteristics with lime or liquid anti -stripping agent approved by Architect. Anti -stripping agents shall meet requirements of TxDOT Item 301 "Asphalt Antistripping Agents," and added at manufacturer's recommended dosage and temperature range. d. Provide a current HMAC mix design indicated on Drawings using approved materials indicating gradation and optimum asphalt content. Aggregate mixture shall conform to the following master gradation from TxDOT 2004 Standard Specifications: Master Gradation Bands (% Passing by Weight or Volume) and Volumetric Properties Sieve Size A Coarse Base B Fine Base C Coarse Surface D Fine Surface F Fine Mixture 1-1/2" 98.0-100.0 - - - - 1" 78.0-94.0 98.0-100.0 - - - 3/4" 64.0-85.0 84.0-98.0 95.0-100.0 - - 1/2" 50.0-70.0 - - 98.0-100.0 - 3/8" - 60.0-80.0 70.0-85.0 85.0-100.0 98.0-100.0 #4 30.0-50.0 40.0-60.0 43.0-63.0 50.0-70.0 80.0-86.0 #8 22.0-36.0 29.0-43.0 32.0-44.0 35.0-46.0 38.0-48.0 #30 8.0-23.0 13.0-28.0 14.0-28.0 15.0-29.0 12.0-27.0 #50 3.0-19.0 6.0-20.0 7.0-21.0 7.0-20.0 6.0-19.0 #200 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 Design VMA1, % Minimum - 12.0 13.0 1 14.0 1 15.0 16.0 e. Material passing No. 40 sieve known as soil binder and meet: 1) Liquid Limit Shall Not Exceed: 45. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 12 16 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 12 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2) Plasticity Index Shall Not Exceed: 15. 3) Linear Shrinkage Shall Not Exceed: 5. f. Mineral aggregate shall not contain more than 0.5 percent moisture before entering pug mill for mixing with asphalt. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads. B. Proof -roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic -tired rollers to locate areas unstable or requiring further compaction. C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. D. Surface shall be clean and free of loose dirt, rock, or any other foreign matter. 3.2 PRIME COAT A. Application: Immediately following surface preparation, apply prime coat by bituminous distributor. Apply bituminous material at a 25- to 75-pound per square inch pressure range within temperature limits specified herein, and not less than 0.20 nor more than 0.30 gallon of bituminous material per square yard. Apply bituminous material so uniform distribution is obtained over entire surface to treat with slight puddling on surface. Unless distributor is equipped to obtain satisfactory results at junction of previous and subsequent applications, spread building paper on surface of applied material for a sufficient distance back from ends of each application so flow from sprays may start and stop on paper and all sprayers will operate at full force on surface to treat. Immediately after application, remove building paper and apply bituminous material to spots missed by distributor. B. Curing: Following application of bituminous material, allow surface to cure without disturbing not less than 48 hours, or longer as necessary, to attain penetration into foundation course and evaporation of volatiles from bituminous material. Furnish and spread enough sand to effectively blot up and cure excess bituminous material. Maintain primed surface until succeeding layer of pavement is placed by protecting surface against damage and by repairing and re -priming deficient areas. C. Temperature: Maintain application temperature 68-149 degrees F. D. Protection: Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material. Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades to prevent traffic over freshly treated surfaces. 3.3 TACK COAT A. Apply tack coat when surface to treat is dry. Immediately following preparation of surface for treatment, apply bituminous material by bituminous distributor, within limits of temperature specified herein at not less than 0.05 nor more than 0.15 gallon of diluted emulsion per square yard. Apply bituminous material so uniform distribution obtained over entire surface treated. Treat lightly -coated areas and spots missed by distributor with bituminous material. Following application of bituminous material, allow surface to cure without disturbing for time necessary to permit setting tack coat. Apply bituminous tack coat only as far in advance of placing overlying layer as required for that day's operation. Maintain and protect treated surface from damage until succeeding course of pavement is placed. B. Temperature: Maintain application temperature 122-185 degrees F. C. Material Test: Perform spot test for asphalt per AASHTO T102 on each shipment. D. Traffic Controls: Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material. Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades so traffic will not travel on freshly -treated surfaces. 3.4 ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE COURSE (ASB) 321216-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 12 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Do not place ASB when air temperature as reported by National Weather Service is below 45 degrees F and falling. B. Place ASB at 255-85 degrees F during June, July, and August. During other months, place ASB at 275-325 degrees F. C. Reject any ASB material above or below specified temperature range. No payment made for any rejected material. D. Place and compact ASB in 3-inch lifts unless otherwise directed by Architect. Place material so when properly compacted, finished course is smooth, of uniform density, and in conformance with required cross sections and grades. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot -mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, minimum 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, minimum 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints as described in Al MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot -mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints within 2 percent of specified course density. 3.6 COMPACTION A. Begin compaction as soon as placed hot -mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot -mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory -plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 degrees F. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin immediately after breakdown rolling while hot -mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot -mix asphalt course is uniformly compacted to 92- to 97-percent of density with 3- to 8-percent air voids. D. Finish Roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot -mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot -mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it cools and hardens. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture cools enough not to become marked. 3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce thickness indicated within these tolerances: 1. Base Course: ±1/2-inch. 2. Surface Course: +1/4-inch, no minus. B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4-inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8-inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 12 16 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 12 16 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4-inch. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. B. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. C. Thickness: In -place compacted thickness of hot -mix asphalt courses determined per ASTM D 3549. D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot -mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. E. In -Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement per ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168. 1. Reference maximum theoretical density determined by averaging results from four samples of hot -mix asphalt -paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared per ASTM D 2041, and compacted per job -mix specifications. 2. In -place density of compacted pavement determined by testing core samples per ASTM D 1188 or D 2726. Take one core sample for every 2,000 square yards or less of installed pavement. F. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate it does not comply with specified requirements. G. Owner may elect to take confirmation tests at Owner expense. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner's testing agency. Failing tests taken at Owner direction shall be charged to Contractor. Failing test charges shall include pro-rata technician charges, actual failing test charge, pro-rata mileage charge, and other pro -rated charges. 3.9 DISPOSAL A. Dispose excess materials per requirements of Contract Documents. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate onsite. END OF SECTION 32 12 16 321216-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Where Contractor elects to remove, or required to remove, and replace concrete pavement and driveway as part of construction. 2. Section applies also for repair or replacement of facilities otherwise damaged by Contractor operations, including: a. Concrete driveways. b. Concrete curb and gutter. C. Sidewalks, flatwork, and other miscellaneous concrete. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 3123 00 'Excavation and Fill." 3. Section 32 1150 "Flexible Base Course." 4. Section 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with 1 or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data representative of product and less than 12 months old per Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. C. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance ofthese with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing current materials: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive. 8. Joint fillers. E. Shop Drawings for reinforcement detailing, fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, materials, steel grades, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement and methods of support. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to this Project and whose work resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 13 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. Manufacturer must be certified per National Ready Mix Concrete Association's Plant Certification Program. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of same brand from same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from 1 source. E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements of Contract Documents. F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities and emergency services. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood, or other approved panel -type materials to provide full -depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. B. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less. C. Forms should be no less than 10 feet in length. D. Form -Release Agent: Commercially -formulated form -release agent with maximum 350 g/1 volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces nor impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. E. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units leaving no metal closer than 1.5 inches to plane of exposed concrete surface. Provide ties so, when removed, leaves holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets, shall be 6 x 6 inches, 10-gauge welded -wire fabric, or as shown on Plans. A. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. C. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. D. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook -bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations and permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports per CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice," from steel wire, plastic, precast concrete, or fiber -reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. Space reinforcing supports at 5-foot maximum in any direction. 2.3 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Fiber reinforcement may be used in place of wire mesh only if approved by Architect and Owner. 32 13 13-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Fiber reinforcement shall be 100-percent virgin polypropylene, collated, fibrillated fibers, made for use as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed olefin materials, and conforming to ASTM C 1116, Type III. C. Specific Gravity: 0.91. D. Tensile Strength: 70,000 - 100,000 psi. E. Length: 2 inches. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Use same brand and type of cementitious material from same manufacturer throughout Project. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Types I, II, or III or ASTM G 176 IA, IIA, or IIIA for air entrained. C. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, as: 1. Class:4M. 2. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal. 3. Coarse aggregate for Class C or D concrete shall be crushed limestone. 4. Aggregate shall be graded from fine to coarse and conform to ASTM C 136. Gradation for aggregate shall meet these requirements by weight: FINE AGGREGATE COARSE AGGREGAT Sieve Percent Retained Sieve Percent Retained 3/8Inch 0 1-3/4 Inch 0 No. 4 0-5 1-1/2 Inch 0-5 No.16 20-55 3/4Inch 30-65 No.30 45-75 3/8Inch 70-90 No.50 70-90 No.4 95-100 No.100 1 98-100 5. Maximum amounts of organic impurities shall conform to ASTM C 40 and C 87. Maximum amounts of impurities finer than #200 sieve shall conform to ASTM C 117. Maximum amounts of soft particles shall conform to ASTM C 123. Maximum amounts of friable particles shall conform to ASTM C 142. 6. Protect stockpiles from dusty conditions by drift fences or other methods approved by Architect. Stockpiling methods used shall not allow aggregate to roll down slope when adding to existing stockpiles. Built stockpiles in layers of uniform thickness. Equipment not permitted to operate over same lift repeatedly. 7. Coarse aggregate shall have maximum 18-percent loss when subjected to 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate soundness test (ASTM C 88). 8. Wear percentage shall be no more than 40 when tested per ASTM C 131 or C 535. 9. Aggregates delivered to mixer shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel, or natural sand. Crushing shall result in a product with coarse aggregate having at least 95 percent by weight of particles with 1 or more fractured faces and 75 percent by weight of particles with 2 or more fractured faces. Aggregate shall be composed of sound, tough, durable particles and meet requirements for deleterious substances given in ASTM C 33. Aggregate in any size group shall not contain more than 8 percent by weight of flat or elongated pieces (having a ratio between maximum and minimum dimensions of a circumscribing rectangular prism exceeding 5 to 1). D. Water: ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Use of any material added to concrete mix shall be approved by Owner's Representative. B. Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain no more than 0.1-percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and compatible with other admixtures. C. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Certified by manufacturer compatible with other FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 13 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT required admixtures. D. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. E. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Types F or G. F. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. G. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 2.6 COVER MATERIAL FOR CURING A. Curing materials shall conform to one of these specifications: 1. Liquid membrane -forming compounds for curing concrete shall conform to ASTM C 309 requirements, Type 2 (all resin base). 2. White polyethylene film for curing concrete shall conform to ASTM C 171 requirements. 3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting for curing concrete shall conform to ASTM C 171 requirements. 4. Waterproof paper for curing concrete shall conform to ASTM C 171 requirements. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion/Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Texture Surface for Ramps: 1. Meet requirements of Texas Accessibility Standards. 2. Color as selected by Owner. 3. Surface should be non-skid. 4. Durabak with Safti-Traxx Detacable Warning System by Cote-L Distribution Company, or approved equal. C. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. D. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand with plasticity index of 8 or less. E. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, 2-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXES B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned per ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal -weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. A. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for trial batch method. Do not use Owner's field quality -control testing agency as independent testing agency. B. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious material ratio. C. Concrete Classification: 1. Class A - Curb and Gutter, sidewalks, curb ramps, medians, and miscellaneous slabs. 2. Class C - Concrete Pavement, Fillets, and Driveways. D. Mix Design: 1. At least 15 days prior to beginning any concrete pavement construction, Contractor shall submit the following to Architect for approval: a. Test certificates from approved commercial testing laboratory on all proposed aggregate. Certificates shall indicate material source, gradation, and loss from 5- cycle Magnesium Sulfate or Sodium Sulfate test (not to exceed 18 percent). b. Mix design based on water -cement ratio. C. Results of compression tests per ASTM C 39 and/or flexural tests per ASTM C 78, made by approved commercial testing laboratory. Tests shall be made on 6 cylinders/beams at curing times appropriate to concrete class. 2. Architect will approve/reject mix design and materials based on submittals. This approval is subject to additional testing during construction. 3. Mix designs for various classes of concrete shall conform to: Minimum Sacks I Maximum Gallon I Maximum Slump 3213 13-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT Class Cement per CY Water per Sack Inches A 5.0 6.5 4 +l C 6.0 a 0 E. Strength Requirements. Various classes of concrete shall conform to these strengths in psi as determined by average of 2 test cvlinders or beams: COMPRESSIVE LEXU L Class 7 Day 28 Day A 2,100 35000 - C 2,800 4,000 600 (28-day) F. Properties: 1. Air Entrainment: 5 percent, +1-1/2 percent ASTM C 260. 2. When approved by the Engineer, Synthetic Fiber: Use manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 pound per cubic yard (where applicable). 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94. B. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C 94 and C 1116 requirements when synthetic fibers are involved. When air temperature is 85-90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 90 to 75 minutes. When air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. C. Project -Site Mixing: Comply with requirements and measure, batch, mix concrete materials, and concrete per ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixers of 1 cubic yard or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1.5 but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before releasing any part of batch. 2. For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cubic yard, increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cubic yard. 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. 2.10 CONCRETE BUMPERS (WHEELSTOPS) A. Cement: Portland Cement should contain minimum 5 sacks of cement per cubic yard ANSFASTM C 150, Portland Type I - Normal, gray color. B. Concrete Materials: ANSFASTM C 330; water and sand. C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615, deformed steel bars. D. Air Entrainment Admixture: ANSFASTM C 260. E. Concrete Mix: Minimum 4,500 psi, 28-day strength, air entrained 5-7 percent, with fibermesh. F. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. G. Embed two #5 reinforcing steel bars, and drill or sleeve for 2 dowels. H. Cure units to develop concrete quality and minimize appearance blemishes (non -uniformity, staining, surface crackling, etc.). I. Nominal Size: 6 inches high, 9 inches wide, 6 feet long. J. Profile: Rectangular cross section with sloped vertical faces, square ends. K. Anchoring Dowels: Cut reinforcing steel, 1/2-inch diameter, 12 inches long, pointed tip. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 PREPARATION A. Proofroll prepared subgrade and base surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 13 13 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions are corrected and subgrade and base are ready to receive pavement. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface just before placing concrete. C. Remove snow, ice, frost, and trash from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen or muddy surfaces. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form -release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice," for fabricating reinforcement and per CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond -reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construct isolation, contraction, construction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and where pavement operations are stopped for more than a half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Use a bonding agent where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially -hardened concrete surfaces. C. Isolation Joints: Form of preformed joint -filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 2. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 or more than 1-inch below finished surface ifjoint sealant indicated. 3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant not indicated. 4. Furnish joint fillers in 1-piece lengths. Where more than 1 length required, lace or clip joint -filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete is placed on both sides of joint. D. Longitudinal joints shall be completed as soon as it will not cause excessive raveling of the concrete but no more than 24 hours after placement and before any traffic is allowed on the pavement. A crew should be available, day or night, to complete this work according to ACI. E. Driveways and Pavements - Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to radius noted on Plans. Repeat 321313-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. Refer to Plans for joint dimensions. F. Sidewalks - Control Joints: Sawcut 1/8-inch control joints after curing to depth shown on Plans. Joints shall be clean, straight lines as shown on Plans. Clean concrete surface of all debris after installation. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to embed or cast in. B. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition when placing concrete. Do not place concrete around manholes/other structures until at required finish elevation/alignment. C. Comply with ACI 304R requirements and recommendations for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. D. Deposit and spread concrete in continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. E. Consolidate concrete by mechanical -vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete per ACI 309R recommendations. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator, keeping it away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. F. Place concrete in 2 operations. Strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to required depth below finish surface. Lay welded -wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete placed more than 15 minutes without covering by top layer or use bonding agent if approved by Architect. G. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before finishing operations or spreading dry -shake surface treatments. H. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement attains 85 percent of 28-day compressive strength. I. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature falls to, or is expected to fall, below 40 degrees F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature not less than 50 nor more than 80 degrees F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. J. Hot -Weather Placement: Place concrete per ACI 305R recommendations and as follows when hot - weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Use chilled mixing water or chopped ice to control temperature, if water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor option. 2. Cover reinforcement steel with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 13 13 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Wetting concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited. B. Float Finish: Begin second floating operation when bleed -water sheen disappears and concrete surface stiffens sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power -driven floats or hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Light -to -Medium Broom Finish: Concrete sidewalks. 2. Medium -to -Coarse -Textured Broom Finish: For concrete pavement and driveways, provide a medium -to -coarse finish by dragging float -finished concrete surface 1/16- to 1/8-inch deep with a stiff -bristled broom, perpendicular to line oftraffic. C. Wall Finishes: Concrete walls shall be form -revealed finish. Reference Plans for forms dimension control. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. Protect freshly -placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and follow ACI 305R recommendations for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 pound per square foot by H before and during finishing operations. Apply per manufacturer -written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water disappears from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Moisture curing, moisture -retaining -cover curing, curing compound, or a combination as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist not less than 7 days with: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller per manufacturer -written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control include those specified herein. B. Testing Services shall be performed per the following requirements: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Obtain representative samples of fresh concrete per ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; 1 test at point of placement for each compressive -strength test, but not less than 1 test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests required when concrete consistency changes. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; 1 test for each compressive -strength test, but not less than 1 test for each day's pour of each type of air -entrained concrete. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; 1 test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below and 80 degrees F and above, and 1 test for each set of compressive -strength 321313-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT specimens. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; 1 set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive -strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens unless field -cured test specimens required. 6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; 1 set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 but less than 25 cubic yards, plus 1 set for each additional 50 cubic yards. Test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 at 28 days. Retain 1 specimen in reserve for later testing if required. 7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 compressive -strength tests for a given class of concrete, test from at least 5 randomly -selected batches or each batch if fewer than 5 are used. C. Report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. D. Nondestructive Testing: Architect may permit impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device but do not use as sole basis for approval or rejection. E. Additional Tests: Contractor shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements not met, as directed by Architect. Contractor may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. F. Contractor shall pay for failing tests. G. Questionable Concrete: 1. Concrete considered "questionable" where any of these tests evaluations occur: a. Individual test strength is below specified strength. b. Samples of concrete for acceptance test cylinders or acceptance test beams not representative of concrete -in -place in the pavement. C. Insufficient or inadequate concrete curing. d. Insufficient number of acceptance test cylinders or acceptance test beams for day's concreting were made for testing. 2. Except where core tests will impair structure strength, make core test as directed by Owner at no cost to Owner to resolve Questionable Concrete. If core tests fail to demonstrate test strength required by Contract Documents or structural analysis does not confirm structure adequacy, Owner may, at his discretion, reject Work, require load tests, or additional construction. If structural analysis confirms pavement adequacy, Owner may, at his discretion, accept concrete with credit for full value of concrete delivered to site per General Conditions. 3. Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in providing additional testing or analysis to resolve acceptability of Questionable Concrete. 4. Core Tests: a. Take 3 representative cores from each member or area of concrete for each test considered questionable. Location of cores shall be as directed by Owner to least impair pavement strength. Replace damaged cores. b. Obtain and test cores per ASTM C 42 except if concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (60-80 degrees F and relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and test dry. If concrete in structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, immerse cores in water at least 48 hours and test wet. C. Questionable concrete considered structurally acceptable if core average is equal to or greater than 90 percent of specified strength and no single core is greater than 500 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 13 13 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT psi below specified compressive strength (50 psi below specified beam strength). 3.10 REPAIRS OF DEFECTIVE PAVEMENT SLABS A. Replace or repair broken slabs, random cracks, nonworking contraction joints near cracks, and spalls along joints and cracks as specified hereinafter at no cost to Owner. B. Broken Slabs: Entirely remove and replace pavement slabs containing multiple cracks through more than 1/4 of slab depth separating slab into 3 or more parts and pavement slabs with one or more cracks through more than 1/4 of pavement depth extending diagonally across more than 1/3 of slab either transversely or longitudinally. Repair pavement slabs containing a single diagonal crack intersecting transverse and longitudinal joints within 1/3 of width and length of slab from corner by removing and replacing smaller portion of slab. Repair broken slabs per Article 3.12 "Removal and Replacement of Defective Pavement Areas." C. Grooving and Repairing Cracks in Pavement Slabs: Random cracks penetrating more than 1/4 of pavement depth shall be grooved, crack filled with epoxy -resin, and groove filled with epoxy -resin grout. Groove top of crack to minimum 3/4-inch depth and not less than 3/8- nor more than 5/8-inch width by an approved grooving machine. Grooving machine shall be vertical rotary -cutting and able of following closely the path of crack and widening top of crack to required section without spalling or otherwise damaging concrete. Fill random cracks that are tight and penetrate less than 1/4 of pavement depth with epoxy -resin. When necessary, determine depth of crack penetration by inspection of cores not less than 4 inches in diameter drilled by Contractor at his expense where directed. Refill core holes with Portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy -resin grout. In addition, when a longitudinal crack is continuous across I or more slabs and penetrates more than 1/4 depth of pavement, drill core holes not less than 6 inches in diameter through full depth of slab at both ends of crack. In operation to drill cores at longitudinal -crack ends, position core bits so core removed will include no more than 3 inches of crack. Use sandblasting and high- pressure air jets to remove any fines near apparent ends of crack to permit accurate determination of crack ends. Remove all fines, dust, and other loose material on wall of cored holes by scrubbing with stiff -bristle brush, followed by washing and dewatering core hole. Refill core holes with epoxy -resin concrete. Apply a prime coat of epoxy -resin binder thinned with 3 parts toluene to 7 parts epoxy binder, by volume, and brush into vertical wall of core hole. Delay placement of epoxy - resin concrete until prime coat becomes stringy or approaches dry to touch. Place epoxy -resin concrete in layers not over 6 inches thick. Time interval between placement of additional layers shall be so temperature of epoxy -resin concrete does not exceed 140 degrees F any time during hardening. 3.11 NONWORKING (UNCRACKED) CONTRACTION JOINTS A. When transverse random crack terminates in or crosses a transverse contraction joint, fill uncracked portion of joint with epoxy -resin mortar or grout then route and seal crack. When a transverse random crack approximately parallels planned contraction joint and is within a distance of 25 percent of slab length from a contraction j oint, route and seal crack then fill j oint with epoxy - resin grout or mortar. When transverse random crack is more than 25 percent of slab length from nearest contraction joint, seal both joint and crack. Thoroughly clean joints to fill with epoxy -resin mortar or grout. Cleaning and sealing cracks and joints shall be as specified in Section 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants." 3.12 SPALLING ALONG JOINTS AND CRACKS A. Repair spalls by making a saw cut at least 1-inch outside spalled area and to a 2-inch minimum depth. When spalled area abuts a joint, make saw cut to a 2-inch depth or 1/6 slab thickness, whichever is greater. Remove concrete between saw cut and joint or primary crack to a minimum 2- inch depth below original concrete surface, and to such additional depth necessary to expose a surface of sound, unweathered concrete uncontaminated by oils, grease, deicing salts or solutions, or other substances that inhibit performance of epoxy -resin bonding material. Remove concrete 3213 13-10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT volume between saw cut and joint or primary crack using a hydraulic impact hammer, or other methods approved by Owner's Representative. Contractor shall exercise care in removing required concrete so no damage is inflicted on adjoining concrete slab. Contractor shall repair damage of adjoining concrete at his expense to satisfaction of Owner's Representative. B. Thoroughly clean concrete void to patch with compressed air, sandblasting, or other approved methods to remove all loose material. Apply a prime coat of epoxy -resin binder thinned with 3 parts toluene to 7 parts epoxy binder, by volume, to dry, cleaned surface of all sides of cavity, except joint or primary crack face. Apply prime coat in a thin coating and scrub into surface with a stiff -bristle brush. Delay placement of Portland -cement concrete, epoxy -resin concrete, or mortar until prime coat becomes stringy or approaches dry to touch. Place epoxy concrete in cavity in layers not exceeding 2 inches thick. Time interval between placements of additional layers shall be so temperature of epoxy -resin concrete does not exceed 140 degrees F at any time during hardening. Use mechanical plate, screed, float vibrators, or hand tampers to consolidate concrete or mortar. Remove excess mortar or concrete on adjacent surfaces of hardened concrete before it hardens. After finishing operations and while epoxy -resin concrete or mortar is still tacky, uniformly spread a thin coating of Portland cement on surface of repaired area and lightly brush into surface. If spalled area to patch abuts a working joint or a working crack which penetrates full depth of slab, use an insert or other bond -breaking medium to maintain working joints or cracks during repair work. Use surface embedment of a flexible polyethylene or other suitable type hose for forming a groove along working crack to fill with appropriate type of joint -sealing material. Carefully remove hose before concrete hardens sufficiently to form a high bond. Thoroughly clean and fill groove with sealer as specified. 3.13 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE PAVEMENT AREAS A. Remove and replace defective pavement areas as specified herein with pavements of thickness and quality required by Specifications. Carefully remove defective pavement so adjacent pavement will not be damaged and existing reinforcement at joints left intact. When replacing a portion of unfractured slab, make a 2-inch deep sawcut transversely across slab in required location, and remove concrete to provide an essentially vertical face in remaining portion of slab. Before placing fresh concrete, clean slab face of debris and loose concrete, then thoroughly coat with epoxy -resin grout. Epoxy -resin coating shall be approximately 1/16-inch and applied by scrubbing a thin coat of grout into surface with a stiff -bristle brush followed by a second application. Place strips of polyethylene sheeting on vertical faces of adjacent slabs at juncture with slab to patch as a bond - breaking medium. Place fresh Portland -cement concrete while epoxy -resin is still tacky so grout coating is not removed. Construct longitudinal and transverse joints of replaced slab or portion thereof as indicated. Seal joints as specified in Section 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants." Replaced pavements will be paid for at contract price but no payment made for defective pavements removed nor for cost of removing defective pavements. 3.14 TOLERANCE IN SLAB THICKNESS A. Determine slab thickness by average caliper measurement of cores tested per ASTM C 174. Owner's Representative may elect to measure thickness of concrete pavement before placement based on measurements from a string line stretched across forms or in plastic concrete behind concrete placing operation. B. Remove and replace areas found deficient in thickness with concrete of thickness shown on Plans at Contractor expense. If cores are used to determine concrete thickness, fill core holes with non - shrink grout by Contractor at his expense. END OF SECTION 32 13 13 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 13 l 3 - l l PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 32 13 73 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Expansion and contraction joints within Portland cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between Portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1193 - Use of Joint Sealants. B. ASTM D 5249 - Backer Material for Use with Cold -and -Hot -Applied Joint Sealants in Portland Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints. C. ASTM D 1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). D. ASTM D 3405 - Joint Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. E. ASTM D 3406 - Joint Sealant, Hot Applied, Elastomeric Type, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. F. ASTM C 920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint -sealant samples in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying products furnished comply with requirements and suitable for use indicated. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From joint sealant manufacturer indicating: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backer materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating joint sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project and work resulted in joint -sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source and manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for Article 1.3.E "Product Test Reports," from a qualified testing agency, based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency qualified per ASTM C 1021 to conduct testing indicated, as documented per ASTM E 548. 2. Test joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturer, for testing indicated, samples of materials that contact or affect joint sealants. Use manufacturer - standard test methods to determine if priming and other specific joint preparation techniques FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 13 73 - I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original, unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials per manufacturer -written instructions to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint sealants under these conditions: 1. Ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. Joint substrates are wet. 3. Blowing dust conditions exist. B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not install joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint -Substrate Conditions: Do not install joint sealants until contaminants able to interfere with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, per joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Bituminous premolded expansion joint shall conform to ASTM D 1751. C. Elastomeric sealant for contraction joints shall be, or equivalent to, W.R. Meadows "SOF-SEAL" or "Gardox." 1. Hot -poured sealant for joints between Portland cement concrete and bituminous concrete shall conform to ASTM D 3405. 2. Hot -poured sealant for all other joints in Portland cement concrete pavement shall conform to ASTM D 3406. 3. Cold -poured joint sealant shall conform to ASTM C 920. D. Mix material per manufacturer recommendations. 2.2 JOINT -SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. Provide joint -sealant backer materials that are nonstaining, compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers, and approved for applications indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rod for Cold- and Hot -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 2, thickness and width required to control sealant depths, prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. D. Round Backer Rods for Cold -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate and field tests. 321373-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Clean Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALL JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1193 recommendations for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths to allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that are wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with these when backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths to allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants per specified requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, eliminate air pockets, and ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated. KKI�41 Q WR: I I►194 A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 13 73 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT and damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 32 13 73 321373-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 32 17 23 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes painting markings and stripes on pavement surface applied per Specifications at locations shown on Plans or as directed by Architect. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Paint shall meet current local authority having jurisdiction specifications for pavement markings and requirements of the following specifications: 1. Federal Test Method Standard No. 141, Methods 4121, 4184, 4281, and 6121. 2. Fed. Spec. TT-P-85b. 3. Fed. Spec. TT-P-I15A. 4. Fed. Spec. TT-14-16, Methods 408.1, 409.1, and 409.2. 5. ASTM D 771-5S. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Weather Limitations: Paint only when surface is dry, atmospheric temperature is above 45 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or windy. B. Equipment: 1. All Work equipment shall be approved by Architect and include apparatus necessary to properly clean existing surface, mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand - painting equipment as necessary to satisfactorily complete job. 2. Mechanical marker shall be atomizing spray marking machine suitable for application of traffic paint. It shall produce an even and uniform film thickness at required coverage and designed to apply markings of uniform cross sections and clear-cut edges without running or spattering. C. Preparation of Surface: 1. Immediately before paint application, surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, oil, laitance, or other foreign material which reduce bond between paint and pavement. Clean area to paint by sweeping, blowing, or other methods required to remove all dirt, laitance, and loose materials. 2. Do not apply paint to Portland cement concrete pavement until concrete in areas to paint is clean of curing material. Use sandblasting or high-pressure water to remove curing material from concrete surfaces. D. Layout of Markings: On those sections of pavement where no previously -applied markings are available to serve as a guide, lay out proposed markings in advance of paint application. E. Application: 1. Apply markings at locations and to dimensions and spacing shown on Plans. Do not apply paint until layout and condition of surface are approved by Architect. 2. Mix paint per manufacturer's instructions and apply to pavement with marking machine at rate of 100 to 110 square feet per gallon. Do not add thinner. Allow 15 days to elapse between FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 17 23 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT placing a bituminous surface course or seal coat and applying paint. 3. Marking edges shall not vary from a straight line more than 1/2-inch in 50 feet, and dimensions shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent. If Plans indicate, distribute glass spheres to surface of marked areas immediately after applying paint. Furnish a dispenser properly designed to attach to marking machine and suitable for dispensing glass spheres. Apply spheres at rate of 10 pounds per gallon of paint. 4. Contractor shall furnish certified test reports for materials shipped to Project. Reports shall not be interpreted as basis for final acceptance. Contractor shall notify Architect upon arrival of a shipment of paint to job site. Return all emptied containers to paint storage area for checking by Architect. Do not remove containers from site or destroy until authorized by Architect. F. Protection: After application of paint, protect all markings from damage until paint is dry. Protect all surfaces from disfiguration by spatter, splashes, spillage, or drippings ofpaint. END OF SECTION 32 17 23 321723-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 32 84 00 - PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The Work consists of installing a complete underground irrigation system as shown on the Drawings and as specified hereafter. Contractor performing this Work shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and permits necessary for the completion of the system, except those specified to be furnished by others. 2. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, construction of the irrigation system shall include the furnishing, installing, and testing of all pipe, fittings, valves, heads, controllers, wires, air release and vacuum valves, backflow prevention devices, inlet and discharge piping, automatic drain valves, manual drain valves, valve boxes, water meters, and all other components pertinent to the Plans and Specifications of this system. 3. Contractor shall perform all trenching, excavating, boring, backfilling, compacting, concrete pouring, electrical Work, welding, and any other Work necessary for the completion of the Project. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Contractor shall examine related work and surfaces before starting the Work of this Section. Contractor shall report to Landscape Architect or his authorized representative, in writing, conditions which will prevent the proper execution of irrigation installation. B. Deviations from Plans and Specifications shall be executed only with the express permission of Landscape Architect and at no cost to Owner. If obvious inadequacies or inappropriate design are found on the Drawings, they shall be promptly brought to the attention of Landscape Architect in writing before proceeding with installation of the system. 1.3 CODES, RULES, AND SAFETY ORDERS A. All Work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest local rules and regulations of safety. 1.4 PROTECTION A. Contractor shall furnish and maintain all warning signs, shoring, barricades, red lanterns, etc., as required by the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety and local ordinances. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Lateral Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B. Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water -distribution -system pressure. C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic. 3. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic. 4. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 5. PP: Polypropylene plastic. 6. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 7. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 84 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain 100 percent water -coverage irrigation system for exterior plants indicated. B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent water coverage of planting areas indicated. C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig. 2. Lateral Piping: 200 psig. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Prepare and make 5 sets of submittals providing manufacturer's Specifications and "cut sheets" on the following components: 1. Manual and automatic valves. 2. Drip Emitters. 3. 24-volt wire. 4. Piping. 5. Joint materials. 6. Irrigation heads and nozzles. 7. Filters and screens. 8. Valve boxes and extensions. 9. Wire splicing materials. 10. PVC fittings. 11. Drip tubing. 12. Pressure regulators. 13. Dripline. B. Provide irrigation system record Drawings: 1. Legibly mark Drawings to record actual construction. 2. Indicate horizontal and vertical locations, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Identify field changes of dimension and detail any changes made by Change Order. C. Contractor shall provide 1 controller chart showing the area covered by a controller for each automatic valve. The chart shall be a reduced Drawing of the actual "Record Drawing" system. The size of the chart shall be the maximum size that the controller door will allow. If controller sequence is not legible when the Drawing is reduced, Drawing shall be enlarged to a size that is readable. D. Chart shall be a blackline print with a different color used to show area of coverage for each system. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between 2 pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils thick. Charts shall be completed and approved prior to final inspection and acceptance of the irrigation system. E. Field quality -control test reports. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with Sections on general conditions, quality control, and standard landscape practices. C. Installer's Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years' experience installing irrigation systems of comparable size, and current Irrigator's License. Submit a copy of Irrigator's License to Landscape Architect. D. Materials, equipment, and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes and 328400-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT standards: 1. Manufacturer's instructions. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): National Electrical Code. 3. ASTM International (ASTM). 4. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 5. The Irrigation Association (IA). 6. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). E. Excavation, Backfilling, and Compaction Operations: Contractor shall meet state and local requirements. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver irrigation system components in manufacturer's original, undamaged, and unopened containers with labels intact and legible. B. Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe ends, both threaded or plain. C. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration. D. Provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinklers heads, and similar components that cannot be immediately replaced, to prevent installation delays. E. Contractor to provide and honor all manufacturer warranties on all irrigation products. F. Deliver piping with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Landscape Architect and Owner no fewer than 5 days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission. B. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated within the Drawing set. If utilities are not shown on Plans, that does not mean there are no utilities in the construction limits. C. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns, and other features designated to remain as part of the final landscape work. D. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by irrigation system work. Cost of repairs at Contractor's expense. E. Promptly notify Landscape Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions. F. Irrigation system layout is diagrammatic. Exact location of piping, sprinkler heads, valves and other components shall be established by Contractor in the field at the time of installation. 1. Cut through concrete and masonry with core drills. Jackhammers are not permitted. 2. Materials and finishes for patching shall match existing surface materials and finish. Exercise special care to provide watertight patching at openings in exterior walls. 3. Methods and materials used for cutting and patching shall be acceptable to Landscape Architect. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with other contractors on -site to ensure rapid and efficient completion of all contracted Work. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Irrigation system shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for 1 year after Final Acceptance. Work covered under the guarantee period will include, but not be limited to, FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 84 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT emergency repairs. Repair settling backfilling trenches, and repair replacement of any malfunctioning equipment. B. Correct all defects and resulting damages within 24 hours after Owner's notification. If no response to the notification is made within the 24-hour period, Owner may proceed with repairs and charge the expense incurred with the Work to Contractor. Owner may make emergency repairs as necessary without voiding the guarantee. C. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment for correction at no expense to Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified, or approved equal. 2.3 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to Part 3 'Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. B. PVC, Pressure -Rated Pipe: ASTM D2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR21: 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40: 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466. D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 80: 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467. 2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464. A. The swing joints shall be used as a height -adjustable connector between lateral lines and sprinklers or quick coupler valves. 1. The swing joint shall be molded from rigid PVC, Type 1 cell classification 12454-B, conforming to ASTM D1784, with a pressure rating of 315 psi at 73 degrees F when tested in accordance with ASTM D3139. All NPT threads, sockets, and spigots shall be Schedule 80 per ASTM D2464 and D2467. 2. All components shall be factory pre -assembled in lengths of 12 inches and 18 inches. 3. All rotating joints shall be modified stub ACME threads. 4. All rotating joints shall have EPDM rubber O-rings for positive sealing and thread protection. 2.5 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solvent Cement: ASTM F 656 primer and ASTM D 2564 solvent cement in color other than orange. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloys Sn95 and E. B. Gaskets and Fasteners for Metal and Metal -to -Plastic Flanged Joints. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, asbestos -free, flat 1/8-inch thickness gaskets and ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washer. C. Gaskets for Plastic Flanged Joints: Materials recommended by plastic pipe and fittings manufacturer. 2.6 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A. Valve Box and Cover: 18-inch-deep x 25-1/4-inch-diameter plastic box with locking cast iron cover. 328400-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Gravel: The bottom of each valve box shall be filled with clean gravel as specified. Gravel shall be washed clean and graded such that none are less than 3/8-inch and none larger than 3/4-inch. Gravel sizes shall be equally proportioned and thoroughly mixed. 2.7 CONTROL -VALVE BOXES A. Plastic Control -Valve Boxes: Box and cover, and box extensions with open bottom; designed for installing flush with grade. Include size as required for valves and service. 1. Shape: Rectangular. 2. Sidewall Material: PE. Injection molded of structural foam polyethylene. 3. Cover Material: PE. a. Lettering: IRRIGATION. 4. Manufacturers: a. Carson Industries LLC. b. NDS. C. Armor. d. Rainbird. B. Drainage Backfill: 4 inches depth cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4-inch minimum to 2 inches maximum. 2.8 SPRINKLERS, VALVES, CONTROLLERS A. As shown on the Plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 POINT OF CONNECTION A. All water main line locations shown on the Drawings are schematic. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to pothole and field check to determine actual locations as incidental requisite to the construction contract. B. The proposed controller location indicted on the Plans is approximate. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to connect proposed valves to the proposed controller. C. Where connections to existing stub -outs are required, Contractor shall make necessary adjustments, should stubs not be located exactly as shown, at no additional cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Examine final grades and installation conditions. Do not start irrigation system work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Contractor will be responsible for gaining access under all paving by boring under the paving. Sleeves should be coordinated before all Work begins. 3.3 EARTHWORK A. Excavating and Trenching: 1. All excavation shall be considered unclassified excavation and include all materials encountered. 2. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for locating all cables, conduits, piping, and any other utilities or structures that may be encountered either above or below ground. All necessary precautions must be taken by Contractor to prevent any damage to these existing utilities and improvements. In the event that such damage should occur from his operations, Contractor shall repair or replace damaged utilities to their original condition at no additional expense to Owner. 4. Excavation and trenching for pipelines shall be a true and straight line with the trench banks FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 84 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT as nearly vertical as practical. The width of the trenches shall not be greater than necessary to permit proper joining, tamping, backfilling, bedding, or any other installation procedures that may be necessary. Trench widths shall also be wide enough so that there will be a minimum horizontal and vertical separation of 4 inches between pipes in the same trench. In areas where trees are present, trench lines will be adjusted on the site to eliminate any damage to tree roots. In areas where avoidance of tree roots is not possible, trenches shall be hand dug. Roots greater than or equal to 1-inch in diameter shall not be cut. 6. Trench depths shall be sufficient to provide the specified pipe cover as described elsewhere in these Specifications or as noted on the Drawings. In rocky areas, the trenching depth shall be 6 inches below normal trench depth to allow for pipe bedding as described in other portions of these Specifications. 7. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: a. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches below finished grade, or not less than 6 inches below average local frost depth, whichever is deeper. b. Lateral Piping: 12 inches. C. Sleeves: 18 inches. 8. If Contractor encounters rock or other unfavorable trenching conditions, no additional compensation will be paid. When material from the excavation or trenching is unsuitable for use as backfill, additional backfill material suitable for this purpose shall be brought in at the expenses of Contractor. It shall also be Contractor's responsibility to remove and dispose of all unsuitable materials removed from the trench that cannot be used in the backfill operation. B. Backfilling: 1. Upon completion of a particular section of the irrigation system, and after sufficient time has elapsed for the curing of solvent weld joints, partial backfilling shall begin, leaving all joints, risers, and connections exposed for visual inspection during the hydrostatic testing. Only upon successful completion of the hydrostatic test shall the backfill operation be completed for any 1 particular section. 2. All backfill material shall be subject to approval by Landscape Architect. Backfill material shall be free from rock, large stones, brush, sod, frozen material, or other unsuitable substances that may damage pipe during the backfilling operations. 3. In the event that the material from the excavation or trenching is found to be unsuitable for use in backfill by Owner's Representative, it shall be removed from the site and properly disposed of by Contractor and at his own expense. Contractor shall then, at no additional cost to the Owner, arrange for, purchase, and furnish suitable backfill material consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials free of large clods of earth or sharp stones and capable of attaining the same relative density of the surrounding ground. 4. In rocky areas, the trench depth shall be 6 inches below the normal trench depth to allow for 6 inches of suitable backfill as padding for the pipe. In like manner, there shall be at least 6 inches of padding on all sides of the pipe as a padding against the rock wall of the trench. 5. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches below finished grades, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavement and slabs. 6. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth andshall be thoroughly tamped, or water compacted to near original density or so that no settling will result. Backfill shall be placed to the original ground level. If settlement of trenches occurs within 1-year from date of completion, it shall be Contractor's responsibility to refill trenches and re -seed or sod the repaired areas. 7. After all piping, risers, valves, thrust blocks, etc., have been installed and partially backfilled as specified in other parts of these Specifications, the control valve shall be opened, and a full 328400-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT head of water used to flush out the system. After the system is thoroughly flushed, risers shall be capped off and the system pressure tested in accordance with the testing Section of these Specifications. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the heads shall be installed and the backfill operation completed. 3.4 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. B. Piping in control -valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges instead ofjoints indicated. 1. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent - cemented joints. C. Underground Irrigation Main Piping: 1. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. D. Lateral Piping: 1. Class 200, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. E. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: 1. Class 200, PVC pipe; threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints. F. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: 1. Class 200, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. G. Sleeves: 1. Class 200, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. H. Transition Fittings: Use transition fittings for plastic -to -metal pipe connections according to the following: 1. Couplings: a. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. b. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA transition coupling. 2. Fittings: a. Underground Piping: Union with plastic end of same material as plastic piping. 3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Where specific types are not indicated, the following requirements apply. 1. Buried Valves 2 inches and Smaller: Full port brass ball valve. 2. Buried Valves 2 inches and Larger: PVC ball valves. 3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction. B. Saw cut plastic pipe. Use a square -in -saw vice to ensure a square cut. Remove burrs and shavings at ends prior to installation. C. Make plastic to plastic joints with solvent weld joints. Use only solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Install plastic pipe fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall make arrangements with pipe manufacturer for all necessary field assistance. D. Make plastic to metal joints with plastic male adapters. E. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings. F. The minimum horizontal and vertical clearance between lines in the same trench shall be 4 inches. G. Pipe shall not be laid when the temperature is 32 degrees F or below. 3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Make solvent weld joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 84 00 - 7 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Pressure Main IPS Weld -on 711 (grey heavy-duty) for all Pressure Main and PVC pipe over 2 inches. 2. Lateral: IPS Weld -on 710 for all PVC pipe up to 2 inches. 3. Primer: IPS Weld -on, Purple P-68 or P-70. 4. Cleaner: IPS Weld -on. 5. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system. 6. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. Close open ends of pipe by acceptable methods when pipe installation is not in progress. 3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Underground Manual Valves: Install in valve box with top flush with grade. 1. Install valve boxes on a minimum 4-inch depth base of pea gravel with landscape fabric beneath. Valve boxes shall be large enough to house the entire valve assembly and allow for maintenance. 2. Provide valve box extension, if necessary, to ensure that entire valve assembly is enclosed in valve box and top of box or extension is flush with adjacent grade. B. Automatic Control Valve: Install in valve box with top flush with grade. 1. Install valve boxes on a minimum 4-inch depth base of pea gravel with landscape fabric beneath. Valve boxes shall be large enough to house the entire valve assembly and allow for maintenance. 2. Provide valve box extension, if necessary, to ensure that entire valve assembly is enclosed in valve box and top of box or extension is flush with adjacent grade. 3. Automatic control valves shall be of the type and size as indicated on the Drawings. Installation shall be according to these Specifications, the Drawings, and the manufacturer's Specifications. 4. Valve wire splices shall be waterproofed. 5. Contractor shall provide a 36-inch wire expansion coil to facilitate raising splices to ground level without cutting wires. 6. Seal threaded connections on pressure and non -pressure side of control valves with Teflon tape only. 3.9 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights. C. Locate part -circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls and 2 inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. D. Heads shall be installed in the vertical position and backfilled and compacted to near original density. E. Heads shall be of the type and make specified and shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. F. Head spacing shall not exceed the spacing shown and shall be in the location and configuration as shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall verify turf area dimension while staking head location. Heads shall be spaced to achieve uniform coverage. G. After all piping and risers are in place and connected and before installation of the heads, all control valves for a given section shall be fully opened and a full head of water shall be used to flush out the system. H. Install popup spray heads with polyethylene "cut off' nipples. I. Install popup impact or gear driven sprinklers with an adjustable swing joint riser of at least 3 standard 90-degree elbows. Fabricate double swing joints risers of Schedule 80 PVC nipples and Schedule 40 PVC elbows. 3.10 CONNECTIONS 328400-8 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. C. Valve wire splices shall be waterproofed using 3M Scotchlok Connectors, and Contractor shall provide a 36-inch wire expansion coil to facilitate raising splices to ground level without cutting wires. 3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic -laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller. 1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: The following inspections shall be the minimum required inspections during the course of construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the discretion of Owner or Landscape Architect. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to notify Owner's Representative, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required inspection. The sequence of required inspections shall not be changed from the sequence listed below. Contractor shall not proceed with Work of the next sequence without written approval of the Work of the previous sequence. Contractor shall attach a copy of the written inspection approvals to all applications for payment. 1. Inspect head placement, coverage, and operating pressure prior to planting. 2. Inspect at end of maintenance period. B. Testing: 1. Upon completion of the irrigation system's mainline, the entire mainline shall be tested for a 1-hour period at 100 psi, unless otherwise noted. Prior to testing, the mainline shall be partially backfilled, leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All dirt shall be flushed from the system and the line filled with water to remove air. The mainline shall be brought to static pressure. A pressure gauge and temporary valve shall be installed at the end of the mainline to permit air pressure to be applied to the main. A pressure of 100 psi must be retained for a 1-hour period. Any leaks resulting in the 1-hour pressure test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test. 2. Upon completion of the lateral piping sections, each lateral system shall be pressure tested. On systems using flex nipples, or swing joints, the lateral system shall be tested prior to installation of the flex nipples or swing joints. Prior to testing, the lateral lines shall be partially backfilled, leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All air and dirt shall be flushed from the system and all open fittings shall be capped. The testing procedure shall be the same as used for the main line. If, after 1-hour, 100 psi pressure has been retained, the heads shall be installed and the backfill operation completed. Any leaks resulting from the hydrostatic test shall be repaired and the system retested until the system passes the test. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for payment of construction observations for retesting of any lines or system components that fail initial pressure or performance test. Costs shall include the time of the observer at the observer's standard rate, travel time, and travel expenses. 3.13 STARTUP SERVICE A. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 26 Sections. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 84 00 - 9 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT C. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.14 ADJUSTING A. Contractor shall adjust all valves for the proper operating pressure and adjust all heads for uniform coverage and even flow. B. Contractor shall wire the controller (valve/station) as directed by Landscape Architect. The valve number shall be indicated on the controller panel for each station. C. Contractor shall program controller to provide optimum system performance. D. Adjust sprinklers so they will be flush with finish grade. 3.15 CLEANING A. Contractor shall continuously keep a neat and orderly area in which he is installing the system. Disposal of rubbish and waste material resulting from the installation shall be continual. Upon completion of the system, Contractor shall remove from Owner's property, at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish waste material, tools, and equipment resulting from or used in the installation of the system. B. Contractor shall repair damage resulting from irrigation system installation. C. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. 3.16 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. When Contractor is satisfied that the system is operating properly, that it is balanced and adjusted, and that all Work and clean-up is completed, he shall issue Notice of Completion to Owner's Representative, requesting a final inspection. Owner's Representative will respond to the Notice of Completion by Contractor and shall appear with Owner for an inspection of the Project. At that time, Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of each system in its entirety. In judging the Work, no allowance for deviation from the original Drawings and Specifications will be made unless prior approval has been obtained. B. Any inconsistency to the Specifications or the Drawings shall be noted by Owner's Representative and a written copy of required corrections shall be given to Contractor. 3.17 DEMONSTRATION A. After the system has been tested and accepted, Contractor shall instruct Owner's Representative in the operation and maintenance of the system. B. Contractor shall provide Owner with 2 keys for the following: 1. Manual gate valves. 2. Manual drain valves. 3. Valve boxes. 4. Valve markers. 5. Controllers. 6. Any locking assembly in need of key access. C. Contractor shall provide Owner with 2 copies of a Maintenance Manual bound in a 3-ring binder. The maintenance manual shall include copies of the approval submittals, controller operations manuals, and manufacturer's warranties on all irrigation products. 3.18 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE A. Maintenance of the irrigation system shall begin immediately following the installation of the system and shall continue until the entire Project is accepted. Maintenance shall include repair of defects or damages, adjustments and fine tuning of the system, and repairs of damages resulting from vandalism, erosion, weather, and the like. B. For a period of 1 year from Final Acceptance of the system, Contractor shall promptly furnish and install, without cost to Owner, any and all parts or materials which prove defective in material or workmanship. Damage due to irrigation system line breaks shall be repaired and brought to 328400-10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT original condition by Contractor at no expense to Owner. C. In the fall, at Owner's request, Contractor shall drain the system and otherwise prepare the system for winter. In the spring, at Owner's request, Contractor will reactivate the system, repair any defects or damage, and adjust the system. As these services are performed, Contractor shall instruct Owner. D. For a period of 1 year from Final Acceptance of the system, Contractor shall repair any settlement of trenches by one of the following methods as directed by Owner's Representative. 1. Bring to grade by top -dressing (raking topsoil into the planting bed). 2. Bring to grade with topsoil. 3. Remove existing plant material, fill depression with topsoil, and replace with new plant material to match original plantings. 4. Repair by any of the above methods shall result in a smooth, level area. Maintenance of repaired areas shall be the responsibility of Owner. END OF SECTION 32 84 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 84 00 - I I PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 32 9113 - SOIL PREPARATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes planting soils specified according to performance requirements of the mixes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" for placing planting soil for turf and grasses. 3. Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for placing planting soil for plantings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials. B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be amended or unamended soil as indicated. C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity. D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth. E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use. G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other that together produce an environment for plant growth. H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil. I. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-, plant-, and water -testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample exchanges and statistical evaluation of analytical data. J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called "humus" or "soil organic matter." K. Planting Soil: Existing, on -site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as specified with soil amendments to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. L. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. M. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America. N. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. O. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms. P. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil;" but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. Q. USCC: U.S. Composting Council. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include recommendations for application and use. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 3291 13 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. 3. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil amendment before delivery to the site, according to the following: a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard products. b. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made according to SSSA methods, where applicable. B. Samples: For each bulk -supplied material, 1-quart volume of each in containers labeled with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of composition, color, and texture. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For each testing agency. B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For preconstruction soil analyses specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state -operated, or university -operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. 1. Multiple Laboratories: At Contractor's option, work may be divided among qualified testing laboratories specializing in physical testing, chemical testing, and fertility testing. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction soil analyses on existing, on -site soil, and imported soil. 1. Notify Landscape Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory samples will be taken. B. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each unamended soil type, perform testing on soil samples and furnish soil analysis and a written report containing soil -amendment and fertilizer recommendations by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according to "Soil - Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles. 1. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according to sample collection and labeling requirements. 1.7 SOIL -SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article. B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Contractor under the direction of the testing agency. 1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of three representative soil samples from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes. 2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: According to USDA-NRCS's "Field Book for Describing and Sampling Soils." 3. Division of Samples: Split each sample into two equal parts. Send half to the testing agency and half to Owner for its records. 4. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth. 1.8 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article. B. Physical Testing: 329113-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT I. Soil Texture: Soil -particle, size -distribution analysis by one of the following methods according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods": a. Sieving Method: Report sand -gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse, medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment -gradation (gravel) percentages for fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA sand and fragment sizes. b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay. 2. Bulk Density: Analysis according to core method and clod method of SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods." 3. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods." 4. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part I -Physical and Mineralogical Methods." 5. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part I -Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85 percent compaction according to ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor). C. Chemical Testing: I . CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3-Chemical Methods." 2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay minerals using CEC by ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part I -Physical and Mineralogical Methods." 3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA metals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include recommendations for corrective action. 4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant -available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, lithium, mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium, vanadium, and zinc. D. Fertility Testing: Soil fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of SSSA NAPT SERA-6 including the following: 1. Percentage of organic matter. 2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC. 3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value). 4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity. 5. Nitrogen ppm. 6. Phosphorous ppm. 7. Potassium ppm. 8. Manganese ppm. 9. Manganese -availability ppm. 10. Zinc ppm. 11. Zinc availability ppm. 12. Copper ppm. 13. Sodium ppm and sodium absorption ratio. 14. Soluble -salts ppm. 15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in the standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. 16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each. E. Organic -Matter Content: Analysis using loss -by -ignition method according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3-Chemical Methods." F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 91 13 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants indicated. Include, at a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium fertilization, and for micronutrients. 1. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations in weight per 1,000 sq. ft. for 6-inch depth of soil. 2. Soil Reaction: State the recommended liming rates for raising pH or sulfur for lowering pH according to the buffered acidity or buffered alkalinity in weight per 1,000 sq. ft. for 6-inch depth of soil. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance with state and federal laws if applicable. B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil -bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen. 4. Accompany each delivery of soil amendments with appropriate certificates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED ACCORDING TO PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Planting -Soil Type: Existing, on -site surface soil, with the duff layer, if any, retained; and stockpiled on -site; modified to produce viable planting soil. Using preconstruction soil analyses and materials specified in other articles of this Section, amend existing, on -site surface soil to become planting soil complying with the following requirements: 1. Particle Size Distribution by USDA Textures: Classified as sandy loam soil according to USDA textures. 2. Soil Reaction: pH of 6 to 7. 3. Soluble -Salt Content: 5 to 10 dS/m measured by electrical conductivity. 4. Soil shall include fertilizer recommendations per the soil analysis in "pounds per 1,000 sq. ft." 2.2 ADDITIONAL SOIL AMENDMENTS FOR PLANTING BEDS A. Cotton Burr Compost: Well -composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter. Install 80 c.£ per 1,000 sq. ft. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Place planting soil and soil amendments according to requirements. B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil. C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON -SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING 32 91 13 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth required to achieve finish grade after amending and adding mulch. B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth. C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a combined maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand. 3.3 BLENDING PLANTING SOIL IN PLACE A. General: Mix amendments with in -place, unamended soil to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. B. Preparation and Mixing: Till unamended, existing soil in planting beds to a minimum depth of 12 inches and in turf areas a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. C. Compaction: Compact blended planting soil to 75-82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 except where a different compaction value is indicated on Drawings. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect areas of in -place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Vehicle traffic. 4. Foot traffic. 5. Erection of sheds or structures. 6. Impoundment of water. 7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. B. If planting soil or subgrade is overcompacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the subgrade as directed by Landscape Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new planting soil. 3.5 CLEANING A. Protect areas adjacent to planting -soil preparation and placement areas from contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated. 1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on -site were directed by Owner. END OF SECTION 32 9113 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 3291 13 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sodding. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 32 84 00 "Planting Irrigation" for turf irrigation. 3. Section 32 93 00 "Plants." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in -place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass -seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape installer. D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. E. Material Test Reports: For existing native surface topsoil and imported or manufactured topsoil. F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 92 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements." 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from installer's place of business to Project site. 5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable. B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. C. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil -bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. May 15thto August 31"for seeding and sprigging. 2. Overseeding: Annual Rye Grass. a. If seed or sprigs cannot be established by September 30, lawn areas are to be over - seeded with annual rye grass at a rate of 4-lbs./1,000 sf. If this is required, Contractor shall maintain the annual grass lawn as needed, including, but not limited to irrigation, weeding and mowing to maintain a maximum height of 3 inches, and edging as required. b. This annual rye grass maintenance shall be considered as a separate item from the maintenance period. C. Contractor shall apply a minimum of two applications of Roundup herbicide to the annual rye grass in early spring in preparation for Bermudagrass installation. The two applications should be separated by a period of 10-14 days and Contractor should notify A/E of the schedule of Roundup application. d. After sufficient annual grass kill has been verified by A/E, lawn areas should be tilled to a depth of 2 to 3 inches prior to seeding or sprigging as specified. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 329200-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion. 1. Spring Planting: April 1't to August 1" for seed and sprigs. 2. Fall Planting: Year-round for sod. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of planting completion. a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. 2. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of planting completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TURFGRASS SOD A. Turfgrass Sod: Approved complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Turfgrass Species: Cynodon Dactylon (TIFTUF). 2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well -composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 dS/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings: B. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen -treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. C. Manure: Well -rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth. 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content; free of stones 1-inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on -site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off -site sources when quantities are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well -drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from playa lake areas. 2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off -site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well -drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from playa lake areas. 3. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in -place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 92 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. a. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off - site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well -drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from playa lake areas. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by A/E and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. B. Install erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 2. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface -soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soil. Till 329200-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. a. Apply fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening. 3. Remove stones larger than 1-inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2-inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Before planting, obtain A/E's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod. 3.5 TURF MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of four inches. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of mulch. 2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1-inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass -leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: 1. Mow bermudagrass to a height of 1/2 to 1-inch. D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb./1,000 sq. ft. to turf area. 3.6 SATISFACTORY TURF FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 92 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. 3.7 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established. C. Remove nondegradable erosion -control measures after grass establishment period. END OF SECTION 32 92 00 329200-6 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 32 93 00 — EXTERIOR PLANTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. 2. Planting Soils. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. D. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. G. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in -place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. H. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. J. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil, profiled and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. K. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. B. Samples of mineral mulch. C. Product certificates. D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when Work is in progress. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 93 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil -testing laboratory. 1. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver bare -root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare -root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. C. Handle planting stock by root ball. D. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion: a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery -grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well -shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. B. Root -Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. C. Annuals and Biennials: Provide healthy, disease -free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well -established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to 32 93 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT outdoor conditions before delivery. 2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well -composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 dS/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen -treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. 2. Manure: Well -rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth. 2.3 PLANTING SOILS A. Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. Loose Compost per acre 4 tons. 2. Weight of Sulfur per acre 20 lbs. 3. Weight of zinc per acre 1.5 lbs. 4. Weight of Boron per acre 0.5 lbs. 5. Weight of 11-52-0 monoammoniun phosphate (MAP) per acre 200 lb. 2.4 MULCHES A. Inorganic Mulch: As shown on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than f- inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45- degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assistin drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately 3 times as wide as ball diameter. 2. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare -root stock. 3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 32 93 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT 3.3 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1-inch above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Container -Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 4. Fabric Bag -Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 5. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately 1/2 filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 6. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately 1/2 filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil -testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1-inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 7. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 3.4 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by A/E, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. 3.5 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Inorganic Mulch: Screening material shall be blend #20 from R.E. Janes Gravel; Slaton, Texas. END OF SECTION 32 93 00 32 93 00 - 4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 33 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general and other site utilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 UTILITY LOCATION A. Before any work commences, Contractor shall notify Dig Tess for locating all utilities within Project area. B. Contractor shall coordinate location of existing utilities (irrigation systems, etc.) with Owner's personnel. Take care to salvage all system components to remove unless otherwise directed by Owner. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research Owner's utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility -locating service for area where Project is located as required. B. Locate existing structures and piping to close and abandon. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate utility down time with Owner. B. Coordinate with other utility work. C. Provide utility entity at least 72 hours' advance notification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REPLACING DAMAGED PRODUCTS A. If damage is done to Owner's utility service, Contractor shall coordinate replacement of damaged parts with Owner at no cost to Owner to a quality equal -to -or -better -than prior to construction. Repair in a timely manner to prevent excessive down -time for Owner. B. Any rerouting existing utilities, other than those utilities anticipated in Plans, shall be at Contractor expense and considered subsidiary to Project. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 33 05 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 33 05 00 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 0513 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID +PERMIT SECTION 33 05 13 - MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue -and -groove joints with transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings. B. ASTM C 478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. C. ASTM C 923 - Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Shop Drawings: Indicate manhole locations, elevations, piping, conduit, and sizes and elevations of penetrations. B. Product Data: Provide manhole covers, component construction, features, configuration, and dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MANHOLE MATERIALS A. Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete 4,000 psi at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 478 with gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 923. 2.2 CONCRETE MANHOLE COMPONENTS A. Lid and Frame: ASTM A 48, Class 30B Cast iron construction, machined flat bearing surface, removable lid, lid molded with "Sanitary Sewer" name; Number 300-24; manufactured by Western Iron Works or approved equal. Lids on storm sewer manholes shall be slotted grates. B. Manhole Steps: Formed galvanized steel rungs; 3/4 diameter. 2.3 CONFIGURATION A. Shaft Construction: Concentric with concentric cone top section; lipped male/femalejoints; sleeved to receive pipe sections. B. Shape: Cylindrical. C. Clear Inside Dimensions: 48-inch diameter for pipes up to 16-inch diameter. Larger manhole diameter as required for pipes larger than 16-inch diameter. D. Design Depth: As indicated. E. Clear opening inside of ring is 36-inch diameter. F. Pipe Entry: Provide openings as required. G. Steps: 16 inches on center vertically, set into manhole wall. H. Interior Epoxy Coating: 1. The interior of all concrete sanitary sewer manholes shall have an epoxy coating. Minimum thickness of cured coating shall be 65 mils. This coating may be field or shop applied. When manholes are furnished with shop coating, all joints and other exposed concrete areas shall be field coated using the same material used for shop coating. 2. Furnished material shall be a sprayable/brushable 2-component epoxy coating composed of 100 percent solids, suitable for horizontal, vertical, and overhead application. The product FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 33 05 13 -1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 05 13 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT shall be FE-100 as supplied by Thane -Coat, Inc., 10400 West Office Drive, Suite 120, Houston, TX 77042, or approved equal. Submit technical data on product furnished including catalog cut sheets and 1 set of installation procedures, including shop and field application techniques. 3. Produced lining shall be monolithic, permanent, impermeable, and chemically resistant to chemicals found in domestic sewer lines including sulfuric acid, sodium hydroxide detergents, bleaches, and gasoline and other solvents that might be accidentally spilled into said sewer lines. Thoroughly clean surface to coat per material supplier's recommendations before coating material is applied. 4. Follow manufacturer recommendation regarding product pot life, cure time, substrate, and ambient air temperatures during application. 5. Use an accurate wet film gauge in at least 2 locations per square yard during application to check film thickness as applied. 6. After coating operation is complete and prior to acceptance, Work shall be visually inspected by Architect. Visual inspection shall be done to check for thin spots and voids. 7. Keep a daily log showing date, weather conditions, quantity of structure lined (square footage), and number of gallons of lining compound expended. 8. Trowel, brush, roller, or squeegee may be used for touchup and repairs. 9. All application procedures must be performed in accordance with OSHA and NIOSH requirements. In confined areas, workers must wear fresh airline respirators or positive pressure hose masks. Protective clothing, goggles, and gloves must be worn to protect eyes and skin from contact with the material. Where flammable solvents exist, explosion proof lighting must be used. Requirements ofthe Material Safety Data Sheets and manufacturer's recommendations regarding safe procedures must be rigidly adhered to. 10. All interior concrete structure walls and ceiling shall be covered with epoxy coating FE-100 or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify items provided by other sections of Work are properly sized and located. B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into Work. C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other Sections. 3.3 PLACING MANHOLE SECTIONS A. Place base pad, trowel top surface level. B. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad. C. Cut and fit for pipe. D. Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour as required. E. Set cover frames and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations. F. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. END OF SECTION 33 0513 330513-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 12 00 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 33 12 00 - WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe and fittings for site water line including domestic and fire protection water lines. 2. Valves and fire hydrants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 3123 00.10 "Excavation and Fill for Utilities." 3. Section 33 13 00 "Disinfection of Water Utility Distribution" for disinfection of site service utility water piping. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME B 16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. C. ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. D. ASTM D 1557 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb. Rammer and 18-inch Drop. E. ASTM D 1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. F. ASTM D 2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). G. ASTM D 2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. H. ASTM D 2855 - Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and fittings. I. ASTM D 2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). J. ASTM D 3017 - Test Methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures. K. ASTM D 3139 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. L. ASTM D 3035 - Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter. M. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. N. AWWA C104 - Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. O. AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other liquids. P. AWWA C111- Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Grey -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. Q. AWWA C151 - Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand -Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. R. AWWA C500 - Gate Valves, 3-inch through 48-inch NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. S. AWWA C502 - Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants. T. AWWA C504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves. U. AWWA C508 - Swing -Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-inch through 24-inch NPS. V. AWWA C509 - Resilient Seated Gate Valves 3-inch through 12-inch NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. W. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances. X. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. Y. AWWA C900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4-inch through 12-inch, for Water. Z. AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings, 2-inch through 3-inch, for Water. AA. AA. UL 246 - Hydrants for Fire -Protection Service. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 33 12 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 12 00 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. 1.4 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and invert elevations. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work per City of Brownfield standards. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site to prevent damage. B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER PIPE A. General water piping shall be ductile iron or C900 PVC in standard trenches. Piping in and near underground vaults shall be ductile iron as noted on details. B. Pipe 6- to 12-inch Diameter: 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151: a. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness. b. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods. C. Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket. 2. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900 Class 150: a. Fittings: AWWA C111, cast iron. b. Joints: ASTM C 3139 compression gasket ring. c. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly -colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Water Line" in large letters. C. Pipe 1- to 4-inch Diameter: 1. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K annealed: a. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast copper, or ASME B 16.22, wrought copper. b. Joints: Compression connection or AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. 2. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2241, SDR-26 for 160 psig pressure rating: a. Fittings: ASTM D 2466, PVC. b. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld. C. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly -colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Water Line" in large letters. 3. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D 3035, for 160 psig: a. Fittings: AWWA C901, molded or fabricated. b. Joints: Compression. C. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly -colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Water Line" in large letters. 2.2 GATE VALVES - UP TO 3 INCHES A. Brass or Bronze body, non -rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc, extension box and valve key. 2.3 GATE VALVES - 3 TO 12 INCHES A. AWWA C509, Iron body, bronze trim, non -rising stem with square nut, single wedge, resilient 33 l 2 00 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 12 00 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT seat, ends, control rod, post indicator where shown on plans, extension box and valve key. 2.4 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Series 7090SYRW. 2. Substitutions: Refer to other Sections of Contract Documents. B. AWWA C510-92, iron body, bronze trim, removable disk and seat, flanged ends. 2.5 HYDRANT A. Manufacturers: Mueller Centurion, or approved equal. B. Hydrant: AWWA C502, UL 246, dry -barrel type, inside dimension of 7 inches minimum, with minimum 5-inch-diameter valve seat opening; minimum net water area of barrel not less than 190 percent of valve opening; 6-inch bell or mechanical joint inlet connection with accessories, gland bolts, and gaskets. C. Hydrant Extensions: Fabricate in multiples of 6 inches with rod and coupling to increase barrel length. Extensions shall be incidental and installed to place hydrant lower flange at elevation noted on Plans. D. Hose and Streamer Connection: Match sizes with utility company, two hose nozzles, and one pumper nozzle. E. Finish: Primer and two coats of enamel. 2.6 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: Crushed rock material per ASTM C 33, Grade No. 8 or approved equal. B. Cover: Per Section 3123 00.10 "Excavation and Fill for Utilities." 2.7 FITTINGS A. 4- to 12-inch Diameter Pipe: Ductile iron mechanical joint AWWA C110, minimum pressure rating 250 psi. B. Pipe smaller than 3-inch Diameter: Suitable for use with the piping and at a pressure rating not less than pipe. 2.8 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES A. Tapping sleeves designed for a working pressure of 150 psi and mechanical joint or as required to make connection. Tapping sleeves shall be Mueller, ductile iron, with duck -tipped gaskets or approved equal. All interior cast iron surfaces shall be epoxy coated per appropriate articles herein. Tapping valves shall be resilient seat Mueller mechanical joint valves designed for a working pressure of 150 psi or approved equal. 2.9 VALVE BOXES, EXTENSION STEMS, AND POST INDICATORS A. Extension stems furnished on buried valves where top of operating nut is more than 36 inches below finished grade. Top of extension stem shall not be more than 9 inches below top of valve box. Buried valves provided with cast iron valve boxes. Boxes designed to fit over a section of 6-inch C900 PVC riser pipe used as extension from top of valve to within 8 inches of ground surface. Box shall have a heavy cast-iron cove and flange -type base, with base approximately 4 inches larger in diameter than outside diameter of box barrel. Necessary length of 6-inch C900 PVC riser pipe required for extension considered as part ofbox. B. Post indicator extensions shall be compatible with installed valve and installed per manufacturer instructions. Post indicators shall be Mueller adjustable type or approved equal. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: 3,000 psi concrete. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 33 12 00 - 3 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 12 00 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify building service connection and municipal utility water main size and location are as indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench per Section 3123 00.10 "Excavation and Fill for Utilities," for Work herein. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at any change of pipe direction. Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. C. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. D. For non-metallic pipe, place bedding material around pipe sides and to 6 inches over top of pipe. Take care to position bedding material under the pipe haunches. E. For metallic pipe, backfill around sides and to top of pipe. Position bedding material under pipe haunches. F. Maintain optimum moisture content of cover material to attain required compaction density. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping per TCEQ code. B. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600. C. Route pipe in straight line. D. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe orjoints. E. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 33 13 00 "Disinfection of Water Utility Distribution." Slope water pipe and position drains at low points. F. Form and place concrete for thrust restraints at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main. G. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 3.5 feet of final cover. H. For non-metallic pipe, install trace wire continuous buried 18 inches below finish grade, above pipe line; coordinate with Section 31 23 00.10 "Excavation and Fill for Utilities." I. Backfill trench per Section 31 23 00.10 "Excavation and Fill for Utilities." J. Pipe Installed in Casings: 1. Attach two hardwood skids to pipe joint using stainless steel bands. Skid dimensions shall position pipe bell above casing by 2 inches minimum. Skid length shall be 2/3 pipe joint length minimum. Submit alternate skid designs for approval. 2. Insert pipe joints into casings so that joint is always in compression. 3. Seal spaces at ends of casing pipe between casing and carrier pipe with grout. Extend grout 12 inches minimum into casing. 3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Set valves on solid bearing. B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade. C. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway. D. Set hydrants to elevation noted on the Plans, with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground. E. Provide a granular drainage sump as indicated on Plans. Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to above drain opening. Do not connect drain opening to sewer. 331200-4 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 12 00 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT F. Paint hydrants Federal Safety Yellow. 3.6 DISINFECT DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Flush and disinfect system per Section 33 13 00 "Disinfection of Water Utility Distribution." 3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide water service to municipal systems shown in Plans and per City of Brownfield requirements. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction testing per Section 3123 00.10 "Excavation and Fill for Utilities." B. Other testing per Section 33 13 00 "Disinfection of Water Utility Distribution." END OF SECTION 33 12 00 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 33 12 00 - 5 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 13 00 DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 33 13 00 - DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes disinfection of potable water distribution system and testing/reporting results. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 33 12 00 "Water Utility Distribution Equipment." 1.2 REFERENCES A. AWWA B300 - Standard for Hypochlorites. B. AWWA B301 - Standard for Liquid Chlorine. C. AWWA B302 - Standard for Ammonium Sulfate. D. AWWA B303 - Standard for Sodium Chlorite. E. AWWA C651 - Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements. B. Certificate: Certify cleanliness of water distribution system meets/exceeds specified requirements. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit test results to Architect. B. Disinfection Report: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Initial and 24-hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 5. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. C. Bacteriological Report: 1. Date issued, Project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and phone number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24-hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 7. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of local health department. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work per AWWA C651. B. Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting potable water systems specified herein with minimum three years' experience. C. Testing Firm: Company specializing in examining potable water systems, approved by State of Texas. D. Submit bacteriologist's signature and authority associated with testing. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code or regulation for performing Work herein. FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 33 13 00 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 13 00 DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of water system. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS A. Chemicals: AWWA B300, Hypochlorite, AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine, AWWA B302, Ammonium Sulfate, and AWWA B303, Sodium Chlorite. PART 3 - EXECUTION K 1� *1:I:11u 11► .11111000 A. Verify piping system is clean, inspected, and pressure tested. B. Perform scheduling and disinfecting activity with startup, testing, adjusting, and balancing, and demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems. A. Provide and attach required equipment to perform Work herein. B. Introduce treatment into piping system. C. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. D. Flush, circulate, and clean until required cleanliness is achieved. Use municipal domestic water. E. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. F. Pressure test system to 150 psi. Repair leaks and retest. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test samples per AWWA C651. END OF SECTION 33 13 00 331300-2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 31 00.10 SANITARY AND STORM UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT SECTION 33 3100.10 - SANITARY AND STORM UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, accessories, and bedding from 5 feet outside building to municipal utilities. 2. Site storm sewers and culverts. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section. 2. Section 31 23 00.10 "Excavation and Fill for Utilities" for trenching subsoil for sewer system piping. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSFASTM A 74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. B. ANSFASTM C 12 - Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. C. ANSFASTM C 14 - Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. D. ANSFASTM C 76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. E. ANSFASTM C 425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings. F. ANSFASTM C 443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. G. ANSFASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3). H. ANSFASTM D 2321 - Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe. I. ANSFASTM D 2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. J. ANSFASTM D 2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. K. ANSFASTM D 3033 - Type PSP Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. L. ANSFASTM D 3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. M. ASTM A 746 - Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe. N. ASTM C 564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. O. ASTM C 700 - Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and Perforated. P. ASTM D 1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. Q. ASTM D 2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). R. ASTM D 3017 - Test Methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, before subsequent backfilling. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe and pipe accessories. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record location of pipe runs, connections, and invert elevations. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements and elevations are as indicated. 1.7 COORDINATION FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 33 31 00.10 - 1 PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 31 00.10 SANITARY AND STORM UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Coordinate Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to off -site utility service, and trenching. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEWER AND STORM SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Pipe for sanitary sewers 15 inches in diameter and less shall be PVC. B. PVC Pipe: ANSFASTM D 3034, Type PSM, PVC material; bell and spigot style joint end, with rubber gasket joints. Utilize SDR 35 (greater than 3 or less than 12 feet of cover) and SDR 26 (less than 3 or greater -than -or -equal -to 12 feet of cover). C. Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe shall meet: ASTM F 405 "Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings;" ASTM F 667 "Standard Specification for Large Diameter Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings;" AASHTO M 252 "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Corrugated Drainage Pipe;" and AASHTO M 294 "Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 12-inch to 36-inch diameter." Joint watertightness required to inhibit groundwater infiltration and/or effluent exfiltration. Seal watertight joints with elastomeric gasket that meets or exceeds ASTM F 477 performance requirements. Diameters 24inches and smaller shall meet ASTM D 3212; larger pipe shall meet ASTM D 3212, with exception that maximum pressure is 5 psi. Pipe shall be smooth interior Advanced Drainage Systems (ADS) N-12 for 12-inch to 36-inch diameters, and ADS N-12 HC for diameters larger than 36 inches, Hancor Products ASTM F 794 Vylon Pipe, ETI Co Ultra -Rib, or approved equal. D. Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe: Concrete culvert pipe, 12-inch diameter or larger, reinforced concrete Class III - Wall B, shall conform to AASHTO M170 or ASTM C 76 requirements. Pipe shall be Gifford Hill Tongue and Groove C-76, or approved equal. 2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Warning Devices: Tracer Wire and Warning Tape both required. 1. Tracer Wire: Minimum 12 gauge. 2. Detectable Warning Tape: Brightly -colored continuously -printed plastic ribbon tape with "Sewer Line" in large letters; not less than 6 inches wide by minimum 4 mil thick. B. Sloping End Treatments: If part of Project, sloped concrete end treatments shall be constructed per TxDOT Standards. 6:1 typical slope. C. Cleanouts shall incorporate long sweep ells and constructed per Plan details. 2.3 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Bedding: Crushed rock material per ASTM C 33. Grade No. 8, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on Drawings. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct overexcavation with bedding aggregate. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. 3.3 BEDDING 33 31 00.10 - 2 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY PROJECT #92551 SECTION 33 31 00.10 SANITARY AND STORM UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 100% Construction Documents - ISSUE FOR BID + PERMIT A. Excavate pipe trench per Section 3123 00.10 "Excavation and Fill for Utilities," for Work herein. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not less than 6-inch depth. 3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories per ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer instructions. Seal joints watertight. B. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on Drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8- inch in 10 feet. C. Place bedding material around pipe sides and to 6 inches over top of pipe. Position bedding material under pipe haunches. D. Refer to Section 3123 00.10 "Excavation and Fill for Utilities," for trenching and backfill requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. E. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe. F. Install detectable warning tape continuous of top of pipe, buried 12 to 16 inches below finish grade. G. For concrete pipe, use two -sack concrete as backfill up to top of pipe to provide joint watertightness. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing bedding. B. Compaction testing per Section 3123 00.10 " Excavation and Fill for Utilities." C. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with ASTM C 828. D. Deflection Test: Test in accordance with 95 percent diameter mandrel. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. END OF SECTION 33 3100.10 FORENSIC / PROPERTY FACILITY 33 31 00.10 - 3 PROJECT #92551 Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR. Page is too large to OCR.